22046564r015 EthernetTestingGuide PDF

T-BERD/MTS/SC/MAP-2100
Ethernet, and Fibre Channel

Testing Manual
T-BERD/MTS/SC/MAP-2100
Ethernet and Fibre Channel
Testing Manual
Rev. 015
Viavi Solutions
1-844-GO-VIAVI
www.viavisolutions.com
Notice
Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this manual was accurate at the
time of printing. However, information is subject to change without notice, and Viavi
reserves the right to provide an addendum to this manual with information not available
at the time that this manual was created.
Copyright/Trademarks
© Copyright 2018 Viavi Solutions Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this guide may be
reproduced or transmitted, electronically or otherwise, without written permission of the
publisher. Viavi Solutions and the Viavi logo are trademarks of Viavi Solutions Inc.
(“Viavi”).
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Viavi is under license.
All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
Copyright release
Reproduction and distribution of this guide is authorized for US Government purposes

only.
Terms and conditions
Specifications, terms, and conditions are subject to change without notice. The provi-
sion of hardware, services, and/or software are subject to Viavi’s standard terms and
conditions, available at www.viavisolutions.com/en/terms-and-conditions.
Open Source Disclaimer - IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY
The MSAM, CSAM, T-BERD / MTS 5800 family of instruments, MAP-2100, and SC
4800/4800P include third party software licensed under the terms of separate open
source software licenses. By using this software you agree to comply with the terms
and conditions of the applicable open source software licenses. Software originated by
Viavi is not subject to third party licenses. Terms of the Viavi Software License different
from applicable third party licenses are offered by Viavi alone.
Ordering information
The catalog number for a printed Ethernet testing manual is ML-22046565. The catalog
number for electronic manuals on USB is CEML-21138299.
T-BERD/MTS/SC Ethernet and Fibre Channel Testing Manual

Page ii 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
WEEE and Battery Directive Compliance
Viavi has established processes in compliance with the Waste Electrical and Electronic
Equipment (WEEE) Directive, 2002/96/EC, and the Battery Directive, 2006/66/EC.
This product, and the batteries used to power the product, should not be disposed of
as unsorted municipal waste and should be collected separately and disposed of
according to your national regulations. In the European Union, all equipment and
batteries purchased from Viavi after 2005-08-13 can be returned for disposal at the end
of its useful life. Viavi will ensure that all waste equipment and batteries returned are
reused, recycled, or disposed of in an environmentally friendly manner, and in compli-
ance with all applicable national and international waste legislation.
It is the responsibility of the equipment owner to return equipment and batteries to Viavi
for appropriate disposal. If the equipment or battery was imported by a reseller whose
name or logo is marked on the equipment or battery, then the owner should return the
equipment or battery directly to the reseller.
Instructions for returning waste equipment and batteries to Viavi can be found in the
Environmental section of Viavi’s web site at www.viavisolutions.com. If you have ques-
tions concerning disposal of your equipment or batteries, contact Viavi’s WEEE
Program Management team.
T-BERD/MTS CPRI/OBSAI, Ethernet, and Fibre Channel Testing Manual

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page iii
Page iv 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Contents
About this Manual ix

Purpose and scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .x
Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .x
Terminology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .x
Related Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xii
Safety and compliance information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Technical assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Chapter 1 Basic Testing 1

Preparing to test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Using the 5800v2 and optional TEM as an external timing reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Using an external high accuracy timing reference signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Step 1: Selecting a test application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Launching a test from the Quick Launch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Launching a test using the Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Step 2: Configuring a test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Step 3: Connecting the instrument to the circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Step 4: Starting the test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Capturing packets for analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
What is captured? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
How much can be stored in the buffer? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Why use packet slicing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Understanding the Capture toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Specifying filter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Manually capturing packets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Capturing packets based on a trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Saving or exporting captured packets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
How long will it take to save the PCAP file? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Analyzing the packets using Wireshark®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Analyzing the packets using J-Mentor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Step 5: Viewing test results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Setting the result group and category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Additional test result information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Running multiple tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page v
Contents
Chapter 2 Optical BER Testing 21

About Optical BER testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
BER Testing Optical Layer 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Monitoring Optical Layer 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Chapter 3 CPRI/OBSAI Testing 25

About CPRI/OBSAI testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Layer 1 OBSAI BER Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Layer 2 CPRI testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Layer 2 CPRI BULK and Channelized BER testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Layer 2 I/Q Waveform Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Remote Radio Head Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Scanning and Controlling Antenna Line Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Performing ALD Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Performing ALD Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Performing RET Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Calibrating delay measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Inserting alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Layer 2 OBSAI testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Inserting errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Monitoring CPRI or OBSAI links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
RFoCPRI / RFoOBSAI Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Performing the RFoCPRI / RFoOBSAI Spectrum analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Frequency/Bandwidth settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
The Amplitude settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
The Sweep/Trace settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
The Markers settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Spectrogram View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
PIM (Passive Intermodulation) Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Running the PIM test: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Capturing packets for analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Running the CPRI Check work flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Running the OBSAI Check work flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Chapter 4 eCPRI Testing 71

About eCPRI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Running eCPRI tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
High precision RTD measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Chapter 5 Ethernet and IP Testing 73

About Ethernet and IP testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Features and capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Understanding the graphical user interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Frame settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Packet settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Ethernet and IP test applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
MiM test applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
EoE testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Page vi 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Contents
MPLS-TP test applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Configuring applications in Dual Through mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Configuring 10 Gigabit Ethernet WAN tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Configuring Ethernet VPLS tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
VPLS tunnels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Virtual channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
VPLS test applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Configuring MPLS over Ethernet tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Configuring IPv4 and IPv6 tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Cable Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Running cable diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Viewing cable measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Intrusively identifying a remote test access port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Skew Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Adjusting the frequency of transmitted optical signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Enabling automatic traffic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Prerequisites for traffic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Issues to consider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Enabling the feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Discovering another Viavi test instrument using J-Connect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Discoverable instruments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Discovering an instrument. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
About the Refresh key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Sorting discovered instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Observing details for an instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Discovering network devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Programming JMEPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Protocol Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Layer 1 testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
BER testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Transmitting and analyzing layer 1 test patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Monitoring layer 1 BERT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Layer 2 testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Specifying interface settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Specifying Ethernet frame settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Things to consider. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Specifying the settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Configuring VLAN tagged traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Configuring Q-in-Q traffic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Configuring stacked VLAN traffic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Configuring VPLS traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Configuring LBM Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Specifying Ethernet filter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Filtering traffic using Q-in-Q criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Filtering traffic using stacked VLAN criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Filtering traffic using VPLS criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Filtering traffic using MPLS criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Filtering traffic using byte pattern criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Filtering traffic using payload criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page vii
Contents
Specifying traffic load settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

Transmitting a constant load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Transmitting a bursty load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Transmitting a ramped load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Transmitting and analyzing layer 2 traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Transmitting and analyzing layer 2 patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Monitoring layer 2 traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Transmitting and analyzing layer 2 MPLS-TP, T-MPLS or MPLS traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
About MPLS-TP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Transmitting and analyzing MPLS-TP traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Using J-Proof to verify layer 2 transparency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Understanding transparent loopbacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Configuring the traffic originating instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Using Quick Config to configure test frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Verifying the far end filter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Initiating the transparent loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Starting the frame sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Observing transparency results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Layer 3 testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Specifying L3 interface settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Specifying the data mode and link initialization settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Configuring MPLS traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Specifying BFD settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Specifying PPPoE settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
PPPoE messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Terminating a PPPoE session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Specifying transmitted IPv4 packet settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Specifying IPv4 filter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Specifying transmitted IPv6 packet settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Specifying IPv6 filter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Transmitting and analyzing IP traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Ping testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Specifying IP settings for Ping and Traceroute testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Transmitting ping request packets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Running Traceroute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Monitoring IP traffic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Capturing packets for analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Loop back testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Inserting errors or pause frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Inserting alarms or defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Measuring round trip delay or packet jitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Measuring one way delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Things to consider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
About the One Way Delay test option and accessory kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
CDMA Receiver Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
GPS Receiver Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Signal Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Measuring one way delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Measuring Peak IFG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Measuring Ethernet Service Disruption (ESD) Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
OAM service and link layer testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Page viii 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Contents
Service layer features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Link layer features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Specifying OAM settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Turning AIS or RDI analysis ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Sending LBM or LTM messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
MAC-in-MAC testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Understanding MAC-in-MAC test results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Understanding the MAC-in-MAC LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Configuring layer 2 MAC-in-MAC tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Specifying interface settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Specifying Ethernet filter settings for MiM traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Specifying OAM settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Specifying traffic load settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Transmitting layer 2 MiM traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Inserting errors or pause frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Measuring round trip delay and packet jitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Measuring service disruption time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Monitoring layer 2 MiM traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Ethernet over Ethernet (EoE) testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Understanding EoE test results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Understanding the EoE LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Configuring layer 2 EoE tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Specifying interface settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Traffic load settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Transmitting layer 2 EoE traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Inserting errors or pause frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Measuring round trip delay and packet jitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Measuring service disruption time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Synchronous Ethernet testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Discovering traffic using J-Profiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Chapter 6 25GigE and 100GigE RS-FEC Testing 195

About the 25GigE and 100GigE RS-FEC testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Features and capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
25GigE and 100GigE RS-FEC test applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Correctable RS-FEC errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Optics Self-test and Cable Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Specifying RS-FEC settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Specifying layer 2 and layer 3 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Transmitting traffic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Inserting RS-FEC alarms and errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Calibrating and resynchronizing CSAM transceivers for RS-FEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Calibrating the transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Resynchronizing the transceiver to the device under test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page ix
Contents
Chapter 7 PTP/1588 Testing 205

About PTP/1588 testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Features and capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
PTP/1588 test applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Optional Time Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Signal Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Connecting a GPS receiver or TEM Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Monitoring 1GigE Layer 2 PTP traffic in Dual Monitor Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Analyzing PTP traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Analyzing PTP traffic for wander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Capturing packets for analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Running the PTP Check work flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Before you begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Step 1: Launching PTP Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Step 2: Loading a profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Step 3: Running a Quick Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Step 4: Running PTP Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
PTP Check profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Chapter 8 1GigE Optical SyncE & 1000BASE-T Wander Testing 223

About wander testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Signal Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Accessing wander test results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Measuring and analyzing wander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Measuring TIE and calculating MTIE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
SyncE Reference Timing Wander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Analyzing wander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Saving and exporting wander measurement data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Chapter 9 TCP/UDP Testing 233

About TCP/UDP testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Understanding the graphical user interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
TCP/UDP test applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Understanding the ATP Listen IP and Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Specifying layer 2 and layer 3 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Specifying layer 4 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Well known ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Specifying TCP/UDP settings for transmitted traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Configuring the traffic load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Specifying the frame or packet length for transmitted traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Filtering received traffic using layer 2 or layer 3 criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Filtering received traffic using layer 4 criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Transmitting layer 4 traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Inserting errors or pause frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Loopback testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Page x 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Contents
Running TCP Host or Wirespeed applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Changing settings during the test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Streams pipe: multiple TCP streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Understanding the LED panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Understanding TCP Host and Wirespeed test results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Viewing results for a specific stream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Viewing cumulative link results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Viewing TCP Host results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Focusing on key results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Configuring the streams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Specifying TCP Host settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Running the TCP Host application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Running the TCP Wirespeed application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
TrueSpeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Chapter 10 Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing 255

About Triple Play and Multiple Streams testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Features and capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Streams Pipe soft key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Using the action buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Multiple Streams testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Multiple Streams test applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
Understanding the LED panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
Streams pipe: multiple streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
Understanding multiple streams test results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Viewing results for a specific stream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Viewing graphical results for all streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Changing graph properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Enabling multiple streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Specifying the load type for all streams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Specifying the load unit on a stream with burst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Specifying the load unit for multiple streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Specifying common traffic characteristics for multiple streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
Specifying layer 2 stream settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Automatically incrementing configured MAC addresses or VLAN IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
Specifying layer 3 stream settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
Specifying layer 4 stream settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Transmitting multiple streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
SAMComplete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Triple Play testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Triple Play test applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Understanding the LED panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Streams pipe: Triple Play streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Understanding Triple Play test results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Viewing graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Changing graph properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Characterizing Triple Play services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page xi
Contents
Specifying layer 2 and layer 3 settings for Triple Play services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Transmitting multiple Triple Play streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Looping back multiple streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Running the TCP Host script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Playing audio clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Chapter 11 Loop Back Testing 283

About Loop back testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Loop back terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Local unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Loop back unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Terminate mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Loop back mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Key loop back concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
ARP settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Address swapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Filter criteria on the loop back unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Loop types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
LBM Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
VLAN and Q-in-Q traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
VPLS labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
VPLS service provider and customer destination addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
MPLS labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
MPLS destination addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
TCP/UDP ATP Listen IP Address and Listen Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Loop back action buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Loop back messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Loop back tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Specifying a unit identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Using LLB to loop received traffic back to the local unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Using Loop Up to initiate a loop back from the local unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Chapter 12 IP Video Testing 295

About IP Video testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Understanding MPEG video transport streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Single program transport streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Multiple program transport streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Understanding the Explorer and Analyzer applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Explorer applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Analyzer applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Understanding MSTV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Instant Channel Change (ICC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Microsoft R-UDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Action buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Restart button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Understanding the LED panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301

Page xii 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Contents
Understanding IP Video test results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Layered view: Quality Layer Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Layered View: Button Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Streams view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Stream status icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Observing streams using the Explorer Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Observing streams using the Analyzer Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Static and dynamic test results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Navigating the results display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Customizing the results display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
IP Video test applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Populating the Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Adding streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Updating stream data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Importing or exporting streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Specifying interface settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Specifying Video settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Specifying Ethernet filter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Specifying result threshold settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Specifying latency distribution settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Specifying IGMP settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Joining streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Observing physical layer and link statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Observing stream statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Leaving streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Basic principles of IP Video testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
IP Video network architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
MPEG-2 transport streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Packetized elementary streams (PES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Signaling tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
IP Video encapsulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
RTP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Non-RTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Chapter 13 Fibre Channel Testing 327

About Fibre Channel Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
Features and capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
Understanding the graphical user interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Fibre Channel test applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Configuring layer 1 tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
BER testing layer 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Monitoring layer 1 BER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Configuring layer 2 Fibre Channel tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Specifying interface settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Specifying Fibre Channel frame settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Specifying Fibre Channel filter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Specifying traffic load settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Transmitting and analyzing layer 2 traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
Loopback testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Transmitting and analyzing patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page xiii
Contents
Measuring service disruption time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341

Inserting errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Measuring round trip delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Monitoring layer 2 traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Emission Lowering Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
32G Fibre Channel Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
32Gig RS-FEC Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
TTS and Fabric Login. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Chapter 14 Automated Testing 347

About the TrueSAM function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Setting up TrueSAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Loading TrueSAM Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Running TrueSAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Launching a single automated test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Automated Test Availability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Automated RFC 2544 (RFC 5180) and Fibre Channel tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
About loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
J-QuickCheck. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Understanding the J-QuickCheck stages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Test at configured Max Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Layer 2 Quick Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Asymmetrical tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Throughput test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Viavi zeroing-in method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Throughput test results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Pass/fail threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Latency (RTD) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
About the latency test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Pass/fail threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Packet Jitter test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
About the Packet Jitter test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Packet Jitter test results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Pass/fail threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
About the System Recovery test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
About the System Recovery test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
System Recovery test results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Frame Loss test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
About the frame loss test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Frame Loss test results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Back to Back Frames test (Burst test). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
About the Back to Back Frames test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Back to Back test results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Optimizing the test time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Importing and exporting RFC config files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Initiating the Enhanced RFC2544 Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Configuring the Enhanced RFC 2544 or Fibre Channel tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Specifying the external test settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Page xiv 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Contents
Setting Connection parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

Configuration methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Test selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Running Enhanced RFC 2544 and FC tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
About the SAMComplete test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Initiating the SAMComplete test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Configuring SAMComplete test settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
Choosing SAMComplete tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Running SAMComplete tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Automated VLAN tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Automated FTP Throughput tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Automated HTTP Throughput tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Automated TCP Throughput tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
TrueSpeed Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
TrueSpeed test steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
About the test steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Initiating the TrueSpeed test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Configuring the TrueSpeed test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Running the TrueSpeed test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
TrueSpeed VNF Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
TrueSpeed VNF test steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
About the test steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Step 1: Determine the path MTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Step 2: Determine the baseline RTT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Step 3: Measure TCP Throughput . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Initiating the TrueSpeed VNF test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Configuring the TrueSpeed VNF test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
TrueSpeed VNF Manual Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Running the TrueSpeed VNF test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Testing using TAM automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Before testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Connecting to the management network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Connecting to the test network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Setting up a TAM test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Saving automated test report data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Chapter 15 VoIP Testing 447

About VoIP testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Understanding VoIP basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Understanding the graphical user interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Action buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
449
Understanding the LED panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Understanding the VoIP call bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Understanding VoIP test results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Layered view: Quality Layer Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Layered View: Button Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Navigating the results display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
VoIP test applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page xv
Contents
Populating the Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454

Specifying interface settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Specifying Ethernet frame and IP settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Specifying VoIP settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Specifying VoIP Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Placing and receiving calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Registering with the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Placing calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Receiving calls manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Automatically answering calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Capturing packets for analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Understanding the Capture toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Specifying filter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Capturing packets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Analyzing Audio Packets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Chapter 16 Test Results 467

About test results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Summary Status results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
CPRI/OBSAI results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
CPRI and OBSAI LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Interface/Signal results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
RRH Status Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
RRH SFP Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
RRH RTD Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
RRH RF Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
CPRI/OBSAI Error Stats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
CPRI/OBSAI Counts results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
CPRI L1 Inband Protocol results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
OBSAI Status Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
CPRI/OBSAI Payload BERT results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Ethernet, IP, TCP/UDP, and Fibre Channel results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Cable Diagnostic results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
MDI or MDIX Status result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Fault Type result. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Distance (m) result. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Skew (ns) result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Polarity result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Pair result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
SLA/KPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Interface results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
L2 Link Stats results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
L2 Link Counts results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
L2 Filter Stats results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
L2 Filter Counts results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
J-Proof (transparency) results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
L2 BERT Stats results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
CDMA Receiver Status results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

Page xvi 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Contents
CDMA/GPS Receiver Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

Ethernet OAM Service OAM results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Ethernet OAM Service OAM MEP Discovery results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Ethernet OAM L-OAM Modes results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Ethernet OAM L-OAM Counts results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Ethernet OAM L-OAM States results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Ethernet OAM L-OAM Error History results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
L3 Link Stats results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
L3 Link Counts results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
L3 Filter Stats results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
L3 Filter Counts results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
L3/IP Config Status results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Ping results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Traceroute results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
PCS Error Stats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Ethernet Per Lane results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Error Stats results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Error Stats (Layer 1 BERT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Error Stats (Layer 2 Traffic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Error Stats (Layer 3 Traffic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Capture results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Sync Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
AutoNeg Status results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Login Status results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Implicit or Explicit (E-Port) login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Explicit (Fabric/N-Port) login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
L4 Link Stats results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Detailed L4 Stats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Cumulative L4 results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
L4 Link Counts results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
L4 Filter Stats results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
L4 Filter Counts results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
J-Profiler results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
RS-FEC results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
RS-FEC LED results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
RS-FEC Stats results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
PTP results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
PTP Link Counts results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
PTP Link Stats results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
PTP Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Wander Interface results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
IP Video results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
IP Video LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Physical/Link Stats results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
All Streams Transport results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
All Streams Video/All Program Video results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
All Streams Complete results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Individual stream results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Stream and Program PID results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page xvii
Contents
MSTV results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562

MSTV Stats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
MSTV Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
MSTV Latency Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
MSTV Message Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
VoIP results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
VoIP LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Content results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Transport results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
QoS results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Stats/Counts results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Transaction Log results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Miscellaneous measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Measurement results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Call Stats results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Ethernet results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Stats results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Capture results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Auto Neg Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Graph results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Graphical results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Histogram results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Event Log results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Time test results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
Chapter 17 Troubleshooting 573

Before testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
The test application I need is not available. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Can I hot-swap PIMs? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
How can I determine whether I need to swap a PIM or swap SFP transceivers? . . . . . . . . . . . 574
I am receiving unexpected errors when running optical applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Performing tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Optical Overload Protection message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
User interface is not launching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Inconsistent test results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Result values are blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Unit on far end will not loop up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
A receiving instrument is showing many bit errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
RFC 2544 or FC Script button does not appear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Which MSAM or application module is selected? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
I am transmitting Layer 2 Ethernet traffic with OAM frames at 10 Mbps, but no frames are
transmitted or received . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
One way delay measurements do not appear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
My VoIP call didn’t go through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
I am emulating a SIP phone but cannot register with the SIP server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
I am running a VoIP test but the delay measurement does not appear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
I have very little loss, but a high level of delay on my VoIP test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
I have a large amount of jitter in my VoIP test, but no loss or delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Upgrades and options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
How do I upgrade my instrument?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
How do I install test options? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Do software and test options move with the Dual Module Carrier, Transport Module, and MSAM
or Transport Module? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579

Page xviii 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Contents
Glossary 581
Index 595

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page xix
Contents

Page xx 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
About this Manual
This prefix explains how to use this manual. Topics discussed include the following:
• “Purpose and scope” on page x
• “Assumptions” on page x
• “Terminology” on page x
• “Related Information” on page xi
• “Conventions” on page xii
• “Safety and compliance information” on page xiv
• “Technical assistance” on page xiv

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page ix
About this Manual
Purpose and scope
Purpose and scope

The purpose of this manual is to help you successfully use the CPRI/OBSAI, Ethernet,
IP, TCP/UDP, Fibre Channel, and IP Video test capabilities of the following test instru-
ments available on the T-BERD ⁄ MTS 8000 and T-BERD ⁄ MTS 6000A and platforms:
• Transport Module
• CSAM
• MSAM
The manual also supports the CPRI/OBSAI, Ethernet, IP, TCP/UDP, Fibre Channel,
and IP Video test capabilities available on T-BERD ⁄ MTS 5800 and SC 4800 Handheld
Network Test Family instruments.
This manual includes task-based instructions that describe how to configure, use, and
troubleshoot the test capabilities available on your instrument assuming it is configured
and optioned to support the capabilities.
Assumptions
This manual is intended for novice, intermediate, and experienced users who want to
use their instrument effectively and efficiently. We are assuming that you have basic
computer experience and are familiar with basic telecommunication concepts, termi-
nology, and safety.
Terminology
The following terms are used throughout this manual, and appear on the user interface
when performing CPRI/OBSAI, Ethernet, IP, TCP/UDP, Fibre Channel, IP Video, and
VoIP testing. Some terms are also used to label the available ports (connectors) on
instrument connector panels.
Terms used to represent different test instrument platforms, hardware components, line
rates, transceivers, and adapters are defined in the Terminology section of the T-BERD/
MTS/SC Getting Started Guide.
• 1GigE — 1 Gigabit Ethernet.
• CPRI — Common Public Radio Interface.
• FC — Fibre Channel.
• OBSAI — Open Base Station Architecture Initiative.
• OTN — Optical Transport Network.
• OTU3 — Optical Transport Unit 3.
• OTU4 — Optical Transport Unit 4.
• P1 — Port 1.
• P2 — Port 2.
• SyncE — Synchronous Ethernet.

Page x 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
About this Manual
Related Information
• Viavi Ethernet test set — A test set marketed by Viavi and designed to transmit
an Acterna Test Packet (ATP) payload with a time stamp that is used to calculate
a variety of test results. The FST-2802 TestPad, the SmartClass Ethernet tester,
the HST with an Ethernet SIM, the T-BERD / MTS 5800, SC 4800, MSAM, CSAM,
and Transport Module can all be configured to transmit and analyze ATP
payloads, and can be used in end-to-end and loopback configurations during
testing.
Related Information
This is the CPRI/OBSAI, Ethernet, IP, TCP/UDP, Fibre Channel, and IP Video testing
manual for the Transport Module, CSAM, MSAM, 5800 and 4800. This manual is appli-
cation-oriented and contains information about using these instruments to test service
carried on each of the listed networks. It includes an overview of testing features,
instructions for using the instruments to generate and transmit traffic over a circuit, and
detailed test result descriptions. This manual also provides contact information for
Viavi’s Technical Assistance Center (TAC).
Use this manual in conjunction with the following manuals:

• 8000 Base Unit User Manual. This manual provides an overview, specifications,
and instructions for proper operation of the base unit.
• 6000A Base Unit User Manual. This manual provides an overview, specifications,
and instructions for proper operation of the base unit.
• T-BERD/MTS/SC Getting Started Guide. This guide provides an overview of the
connectors provided on the hardware components, instructions for connecting to
the circuit you are testing, and specifications for the hardware components.
• T-BERD/MTS/SC SONET, SDH, OTN and PDH Testing Manual. This manual
provides instructions for testing each of the services listed, and detailed test result
descriptions. When using your instrument for OTN testing, details concerning
SONET and SDH settings and test results are provided in this manual.
• T-BERD/MTS GNSS and Timing Expansion Module User Manual for instructions
on using the optional GNSS application and Timing Expansion Module (TEM) as
sources of high accuracy timing when using a 5800v2 test instrument.
• The OTDR Functions, Options, and Software Applications User Manual for the
optional OTDR modules that are available for testing using the 5800.
• Remote Control Reference Manual. This manual provides the remote control
commands used when developing scripts to automate your testing. This manual
is distributed electronically on the USB stick provided with your instrument

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page xi
About this Manual
Conventions
NOTE:
Many applications also require you to purchase and install certain testing
options; others require specific hardware connectors to connect to circuits
for testing. For example, if your instrument does not have a connector or PIM
designed to support 1GigE Optical testing, you can not transmit and analyze
a signal or traffic over a 1GigE circuit.
You can quickly determine whether or not your instrument supports certain
applications by exploring the technologies, rates, and test modes presented
on the Test menu and by reviewing the settings available when you config-
ure a test.
Conventions
This manual uses conventions and symbols, as described in the following tables.
Table 1 Text formatting and other typographical conventions
Item(s) Example(s)
Buttons, keys, or switches that Press the On button.
you press or flip on a physical – Press the Enter key.
device. – Flip the Power switch to the on position.
Buttons, links, menus, menu Click Start
options, tabs, or fields on a PC- – Click File > Properties.
based or Web-based user inter- – Click the Properties tab.
face that you click, select, or
– Type the name of the probe in the Probe
type information into.
Name field.
Directory names, file names, $NANGT_DATA_DIR/results (directory)
and code and output messages – test_products/users/
that appear in a command line defaultUser.xml (file name)
interface or in some graphical – All results okay. (output message)
user interfaces (GUIs).
Text you must type exactly as – Restart the applications on the server using
shown into a command line the following command:
interface, text file, or a GUI text $BASEDIR/startup/npiu_init
field. restart
Type: a:\set.exe in the dialog box.
References to guides, books, Refer to Newton’s Telecom Dictionary.
and other publications appear in
this typeface.
Command line option separa- platform [a|b|e]
tors.
Optional arguments (text vari- login [platform name]
ables in code).

Page xii 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
About this Manual
Conventions
Table 1 Text formatting and other typographical conventions (Continued)
Item(s) Example(s)
Required arguments (text vari- <password>
ables in code).
Table 2 Symbol conventions

This symbol indicates a note that includes important supplemental infor-
mation or tips related to the main text.
This symbol represents a general hazard. It may be associated with either a

DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION, or ALERT message. See Table 3 for
more information.
This symbol represents an alert. It indicates that there is an action that must
be performed in order to protect equipment and data or to avoid software
damage and service interruption.
This symbol represents hazardous voltages. It may be associated with

either a DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION, or ALERT message. See Table 3
for more information.
This symbol represents a risk of explosion. It may be associated with either
a DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION or ALERT message. See Table 3 for
more information.
This symbol represents a risk of a hot surface. It may be associated with
either a DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION, or ALERT message. See Table 3
This symbol represents a risk associated with fiber optic lasers. It may be
associated with either a DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION or ALERT mes-
sage. See Table 3 for more information.
This symbol, located on the equipment, battery, or the packaging indicates
that the equipment or battery must not be disposed of in a land-fill site or
as municipal waste, and should be disposed of according to your national
regulations.
Table 3 Safety definitions
Term Definition
DANGER Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury. It may be associated with either a
general hazard, high voltage, or other symbol. See Table 2 for
more information.
WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided,
could result in death or serious injury. It may be associated with
either a general hazard, high voltage, or other symbol. See Table 2

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page xiii
About this Manual
Safety and compliance information
Table 3 Safety definitions (Continued)
Term Definition
CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided,
could result in minor or moderate injury and/or damage to equip-
ment.
It may be associated with either a general hazard, high voltage, or
risk of explosion symbol. See Table 2 for more information.
When applied to software actions, indicates a situation that, if not
avoided, could result in loss of data or a disruption of software
operation.
ALERT Indicates that there is an action that must be performed in order to
protect equipment and data or to avoid software damage and ser-
vice interruption.
Safety and compliance information

Safety and compliance information for the instrument are provided in printed form and
ship with your instrument.
Technical assistance
If you require technical assistance, call 1-844-GO-VIAVI. For the latest TAC informa-
tion, go to http://www.viavisolutions.com/en/services-and-support/support/technical-
assistance.

Page xiv 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
1
Chapter 1 Basic Testing
This chapter explains basic testing concepts and procedures common to each CPRI/
OBSAI, Ethernet, IP, TCP/UDP, Fibre Channel, or IP Video test. Detailed information
about the concepts and procedures common to all supported test applications are
provided in the Getting Started Guide that shipped with your instrument or upgrade.
Topics discussed in this chapter include the following:

• “Preparing to test” on page 2
• “Step 1: Selecting a test application” on page 3
• “Step 2: Configuring a test” on page 5
• “Step 3: Connecting the instrument to the circuit” on page 5
• “Step 4: Starting the test” on page 5
• “Step 5: Viewing test results” on page 19
• “Running multiple tests” on page 20
NOTE:
When a test is configured to establish a connection to a remote unit, the con-
nection process queries the remote unit for its software version. If the version
level of the remote and local unit are different, a notice will be displayed
encouraging you to update the older unit to avoid incompatibility issues and to
achieve optimal performance. For details, see “Setting up the instrument” in
the Getting Started Guide that shipped with your instrument or upgrade.
T-BERD/MTS/SC/MAP-2100 Ethernet and Fibre Channel Testing Manual

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 1
Preparing to test
Preparing to test
Before testing, Viavi recommends:
• Reviewing the Getting Started Guide that shipped with your instrument or
upgrade; in particular, the instructions for connecting your test instrument to the
circuit.
• Verifying that you have the correct cables, connectors, transceivers, and adapters
required to connect to the circuit. Your Getting Started Guide provides important
considerations when testing over optical circuits, verifying that optics support
specific line rates, tuning SFP and XFP transceivers, and testing 40G/100G
optics.
• Determining whether you need to synchronize near and far end instruments to a
high accuracy timing reference before beginning the test. Your Getting Started
Guide provides an overview of the process used to synchronize instruments using
CDMA and GPS receivers. If you are using optional Timing Expansion Modules
(TEMs) to synchronize multiple 5800v2 instruments, synchronization instructions
are provided in the GNSS and Timing Expansion Module User Manual that
shipped with your TEM.
• Determining whether a high accuracy timing reference is required for precise
measurements and analysis. The 1PPS Analysis, 10 MHz / 2 MHz Wander, and
PDH/SDH Wander analysis applications documented in this manual require a
high accuracy timing reference. See “Using an external high accuracy timing
reference signal” on page 2 for details.
Using the 5800v2 and optional TEM as an external timing

reference
The 5800v2 instrument can be used (together with the optional TEM Module) as a high
precision external timing reference for another device. For details, refer to the GNSS
and Timing Expansion Module User Manual that shipped with your TEM.
Using an external high accuracy timing reference signal

Some test applications documented within this manual require an external, high accu-
racy timing reference (for example, a GPS receiver such as the optional TM4M or the
optional 5800v2 Timing Expansion Module). These include the applications used to
perform SyncE Wander analysis, 1588v2 Precision Time Protocol (PTP) measure-
ments, and One Way Delay (OWD) Measurements.
It is important to understand the connections required to input the reference and

analyzed signals. This is especially true when providing signal input to a 5800v2 test
instrument via the Multi Access SMA Timing Cable Adapter (which is connected to the
EXT CLK port on the 5800v2), and when using the optional TEM Module.
• Required signal input connections are described in the procedures supporting
each of the application in this manual.

Page 2 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Step 1: Selecting a test application
• Instructions for connecting a GPS receiver are provided in the Getting Started
Guide that shipped with your instrument.
• Instructions for connecting the optional TEM Module are provided in the T-BERD/
MTS GNSS and Timing Expansion Module User Manual.

There are two methods available for selecting a test application. The first method uses
the Quick Launch screen, which lists pinned (saved) and recently run tests. The second
method uses the Test Menu, which lists every available test for the currently installed
options and configuration of your instrument.
NOTE:
Some tests (for example, the NextGen GFP tests) only appear if you pur-
chased the associated testing options for your instrument.
When testing using an MSAM, only the tests supported by currently inserted
PIMs will appear on the Test menu. For example, if a DS1 PIM is inserted in the
MSAM chassis, you will not see Ethernet applications.
For a detailed explanation of the Quick Launch screen and Test Menu, refer to the Basic
Testing chapter of the Getting Started Guide that shipped with your instrument.
Launching a test from the Quick Launch screen

The Quick Launch screen is used to launch tests that you use frequently. The last four
selected tests are also automatically listed on the screen. When running CPRI/OBSAI,
Ethernet, IP, TCP/UDP, Fibre Channel, VoIP, and Video tests, the icons in appear to the
left of each pinned test representing the application or technology that is supported.
Table 1 lists the icons used to represent key applications.
Table 1 Quick Launch Icons
Application Icon Application Icon

Ethernet Quick Check J-Profiler
Ethernet Traffic RFC 2544
Ethernet Multiple PTP/1588

Streams
1 GigE Optical SyncE RFC 6349 Truespeed

Wander Analysis

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 3
Table 1 Quick Launch Icons (Continued)
Application Icon Application Icon

CPRI / OBSAI TCP Wirespeed
Fiber Channel Traffic TrueSAM
VoIP Y.1564 SAMComplete
IP Video 1 PPS Analysis
To launch a test from the Quick Launch screen
1 If the Quick Launch screen did not appear by default when you turned on your
instrument, on the Main screen, click Select Test.
The Quick Launch screen appears.
The All Tests and Hide Tests buttons are used to display or hide the Test Menu to
the left of the screen; the Customize button is used to maintain and customize the
list of tests that appear on the screen.
2 If the test you want to launch appears on the screen, select the test; otherwise,
customize the screen to add the test, then select the test on the Quick Launch
screen.
3 Wait for the test to launch and appear on the Main screen, then proceed to “Step
2: Configuring a test” on page 5.
The test is launched.
Launching a test using the Test Menu

Tests are grouped and listed on the Test Menu by technology (for example, SONET or
SDH), signal, payload, and test mode.
To select a test using the Test Menu
1 On the Main screen, click Select Test.

The Quick Launch screen appears.
– If the Test Menu appears to the left of the screen, proceed to step 2.
– If the Test Menu does not appear, select the All Tests button (located at the
bottom left of the Quick Launch screen). The Test Menu will appear.
2 Using the Test Menu, select the technology, signal, payload, and test mode for
your test.

Page 4 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Step 2: Configuring a test
The instrument displays a message asking you to wait while it loads the test.
3 Wait for the Main screen to appear, and then proceed to “Step 2: Configuring a
test” on page 5.
The test is selected.
Step 2: Configuring a test

Before you configure a test, be certain to complete the information that you want to
include when you generate reports of your test results. For details, refer to the Getting
Started Guide that shipped with your instrument.
Configuring a test involves displaying the setup screens, specifying test settings, and
optionally saving the test setup. Key settings are also available on the Main screen and
on the Quick Config tabs. Changing key settings while running a test (for example,
changing the pattern transmitted) triggers an automatic restart of the test.
To display the setup screens
1 Using the Test Menu or Quick Launch screen, select a test application (see “Step
1: Selecting a test application” on page 3).
2 Select the Setup soft key.
A setup screen with a series of tabs appears. The tabs displayed vary based on
the test application you selected.
3 To navigate to a different setup screen, select the corresponding tab at the top of
the screen. For example, to display the Traffic setup screen, select the Traffic tab.
Step 3: Connecting the instrument to the circuit

For detailed instructions on connecting your instrument to the circuit, refer to the
T-BERD/MTS/SC Getting Started Guide that shipped with your instrument or upgrade.
When connecting the unit to optical circuits, bear in mind that applied power must not
exceed the power level supported by each optical connector on your instrument.
Step 4: Starting the test

After you configure a test, connect the unit to the circuit, and, if appropriate, turn the
laser ON, you are ready to start your test.
• If you are running an Ethernet, OTN, Fibre Channel, or NextGen application
(launched from the SONET or SDH test menu), you must actively Start Traffic
(using the action button).

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 5
• If you are running an Ethernet or Fibre Channel application, and you would like
your unit to transmit traffic automatically, you can enable the automatic traffic
generation feature. For details, see “Enabling automatic traffic transmission” on
page 89 in Chapter 5 “Ethernet and IP Testing”.
• When a test is configured to establish a connection to a remote unit, the connec-
tion process queries the remote unit for its software version. If the software
version level on the remote and local unit are different, a notice will be displayed
encouraging you to update the older unit to avoid incompatibility issues and
achieve optimal performance. See “Setting up the Instrument” in the T-BERD /
MTS/SC Getting Started Guide that shipped with your instrument or upgrade.
NOTE: Temperature stabilized lasers

When testing 10 Gigabit, 40 Gigabit or 100 Gigabit optical circuits, some lasers
(particularly 1550 nm lasers) are temperature stabilized; therefore, they need
to reach a certain temperature before you can use them to transmit a signal.
This is expected behavior, and does not indicate that there is something wrong
with the laser or test instrument.
It typically takes up to one minute for the temperature to stabilize. If you turn
the laser on, but no signal is present on the receiving instrument or device,
simply wait for one minute.
After you start a test, use the buttons at the bottom of the screen to perform actions
such as turning the laser on and off, starting and stopping traffic, starting and stopping
a local loop back, and inserting errors, anomalies, alarms, or defects. Table 2 lists some
common Action buttons.
Table 2 Action buttons
Button Action
Laser On/Offa Turns the laser on or off when testing optical rates.
Insert Error/Anomaly Inserts an error or anomaly into the transmitted traffic.
Insert Alarm/Defect Inserts an alarm or defect into the transmitted traffic.
Start Traffic/Stop Traffic Starts or stops transmission of Ethernet, IP, Fibre
Channel, OTN, TCP/UDP, or GFP traffic over the
circuit.
a. You can optionally configure optical standard Ethernet and Fibre Channel applications to automatically transmit
traffic after you turn the laser ON.
Capturing packets for analysis

If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so, you can use it to capture trans-
mitted and received packets, save it on the instrument or to an external USB key, and
then either send the packets to another technician for analysis, or analyze it yourself

Page 6 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
using the Wireshark® protocol analyzer, or the J-Mentor utility (provided on the instru-
ment).
NOTE:
The term “packets” is used interchangeably with “frames” throughout the follow-
ing section, and represents any of the layer 2, layer 3, or layer 4 datagrams car-
ried in the traffic stream.
You can capture packets when running any of the single stream or multiple stream
Ethernet, IP, TCP/UDP, or VoIP applications, with the following exceptions:
• Applications with Mac-in-Mac (MiM) encapsulated traffic
• IPTV applications
What is captured?
All received traffic (test traffic, control plane traffic, and live traffic) that satisfies the user-
specified criteria on the Filter setup tab can be captured for all supported interfaces.
All transmitted traffic (test traffic, control plane traffic, and live traffic) that satisfies the
user-specified criteria on the Capture setup tab can be captured for all supported inter-
faces up to 1 Gigabit Ethernet.
Only control plane traffic for traffic transmitted from supported 10GigE or higher inter-
faces is captured. The scope (extent) of the control plane traffic captured will depend
on 1) the bandwidth remaining after received traffic is captured, and 2) the bandwidth
of the transmitted control plane traffic.
Ethernet frames ranging from 64 to10000 bytes long can be captured, but the 4 byte
Ethernet FCS is not stored in the capture buffer.
Test traffic
Test traffic is the traffic generated and transmitted by your test instrument carrying an
ATP or BERT payload. Test traffic can be captured when it is transmitted, looped back
and then captured when it is received, or it can be captured when received from a trans-
mitting instrument on the far end.
You can capture received test traffic for all supported interfaces; you can capture trans-
mitted test traffic for all supported interfaces except 10Gig and 100Gig Ethernet.
Control plane traffic
Control plane traffic is traffic used to establish a connection with another network
element (or instrument), request information from the element, or to verify connectivity
with the element. Examples of control plane traffic include ARP packets, Ping packets,
and software application layer datagrams, such as HTTP, TCP/UDP, or FTP control
packets.
You can capture transmitted and received control traffic from all supported interfaces.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 7
How much can be stored in the buffer?

When you configure your instrument to capture packets, you can control the size of the
buffer by specifying a size ranging from 1 MB to 256 MB in 1 MB increments. You can
also control how your instrument handles the packets when the buffer becomes full.
The instrument can stop capturing packets entirely, or it can wrap (overwrite) the oldest
packets in the buffer with new captured packets in 1 MB increments.
After capturing packets to the buffer, you can save them to a a PCAP (packet capture)
file, which can optionally be compressed using gzip for efficient storage.
Why use packet slicing?

When you configure your instrument to capture packets, you can tell the instrument to
capture only the first 64 or 128 bytes of each packet. This allows you to analyze the
most important data carried in the packet headers (at the beginning of the packets), and
to capture and store more packets in the buffer.
Understanding the Capture toolbar

The buttons on the Capture toolbar (illustrated in Figure 1) are used to enable or
disable the capture feature, start and stop the capture process, save the packets in the
capture buffer to the internal USB drive (or an external drive), or launch Wireshark® or
J-Mentor to analyze the packets on the instrument.
Figure 1 Capture Toolbar
The % Buffer Full gauge shows the percentage of the available buffer capacity that is
used.
When you capture traffic at a high bandwidth or specify a small buffer size, if you
configure the capture to wrap (overwrite) the oldest packets in the buffer with new
captured packets in 1 MB increments, the buffer gauge may appear to “jump around”.
If you do not wrap the packets, the capture process may stop very soon after you start
it, because the buffer reaches capacity quickly. This is expected behavior.
Specifying filter settings

If you specify filter settings when you configure the application, the settings determine
which received traffic is captured to the buffer. The Capture Toolbar (illustrated in
Figure 1) indicates whether filters are active or inactive.
Transmitted control plane frames are always captured to the buffer. When capturing
frames on circuits at rates up to 1 Gigabit Ethernet, all other transmitted frames are
captured.

Page 8 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
To specify filter settings before capturing frames
1 If you haven’t already done so, use the Test Menu or Quick Launch screen to
select the test application for the interface you are testing.
2 On the Main screen, select the Capture tool bar, then enable the capture feature.
3 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the Filters tab. By default, a summary
of all currently configured filter settings appear (Ethernet, IP, and TCP/UDP).
4 If you would like to clear the filters (to specify new settings for the capture
process), select Clear All Filters.
5 If you launched a layer 2 application, the panel on the left of the tab displays the
Summary and Ethernet selections.
If you launched a layer 3 or layer 4 application, the panel displays the Summary,
Basic, Ethernet, IP, and if applicable, TCP/UDP selections.
Do one of the following:
– If you launched a layer 2 application, select Ethernet, and then specify the
settings that capture the received traffic that you want to analyze (see “Spec-
ifying Ethernet filter settings” on page 114).
– If you launched a layer 3 or layer 4 application, and you want to specify basic
filter information, select Basic, and then specify the Traffic Type and the
Address Type carried in the received traffic you want to capture.
– If you launched a layer 3 or layer 4 application, and you want to specify
detailed filter information, select Basic, and then set the filter mode to
Detailed.
Use the Ethernet, IP, and TCP/UDP selections in the pane on the left to
display the filter settings for your particular test, and then specify the settings
that capture the received traffic that you want to analyze (see “Specifying
Ethernet filter settings” on page 114, “Specifying IPv4 filter settings” on
page 149 or “Specifying IPv6 filter settings” on page 152, and “Filtering
received traffic using layer 4 criteria” on page 243).
The filter settings are specified for the capture.
Manually capturing packets

Capturing packets involves launching and configuring an Ethernet, IP, TCP/UDP, or
VoIP application, specifying the capture settings, and, if you are capturing received
traffic, specifying the filter settings. If you are capturing received traffic only, you can
start the capture process immediately.
If you intend to capture transmitted or looped back traffic, you must actively start traffic
transmission. The traffic can then be looped back (to be captured by the transmitting
instrument), or captured by a second receiving instrument on the circuit.
When capturing packets in Monitor or Terminate mode, you must use Port 1 for your
test if you are using an MSAMv1; if you are using an MSAMv2 or CSAM, either port can
be used.
If you are capturing packets while running the VoIP application, it is recommended that
you do not save the captured packets until the call is ended (the phone is on hook).

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 9
When capturing packets, bear in mind that configuring the capture for a large buffer (for
example, 256 MB) with small packets (for example, 46 byte ping packets), it will take a
long time to fill the buffer. If you configure the capture for a small buffer with large
packets, it will take much less time.
To capture packets on the instrument
1 Launch a single or multiple stream layer 2 Ethernet, layer 3 IP, or layer 4 TCP/
UDP application.
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then do one of the following:
– Specify the settings required to filter received traffic for the type you want to
capture and analyze.
– Clear all of the filters to capture all received traffic.
For details, refer to “Specifying filter settings” on page 8.
3 Select the Capture setup tab, and then specify the following settings:
Setting Parameter
Capture buffer size (MB) Specify a size ranging from 1 to 256 MB in a 1 MB
increment. The default buffer size is 16 MB.
Capture frame slicing If you want to capture the first 64 or 128 bytes of each
frame (and ignore the rest of the frame), select 64 or
128; otherwise, select None.
If you select None (the default), the entire frame is cap-
tured.
When capture buffer is If you want to overwrite the oldest packets with new
filled packets when the buffer becomes full, select
Wrap Capture; otherwise, select Stop Capture.
Include frames from If you want to capture transmitted frames (the traffic
Traffic tab load which is specified on the Traffic tab), select Yes.
4 Select the Results soft key to return to the Main screen.

5 If you are capturing transmitted or looped back traffic, select Start traffic.
6 Select the Capture toolbar, and then do the following:
a Select Start Capture.
A message appears in the message bar indicating that the capture has
started, and the action key states Capture Started.
b If you want to capture packets that shows how the traffic is impacted by
various events, use the buttons on the Actions, Errors, and Fault Signaling
tool bars to insert the events into the transmitted traffic stream.
7 If you want to manually stop capturing packets (for example, after the instrument
has transmitted and received a certain number of frames), select the Capture
Started action key.
The action key turns gray, and a message appears in the message bar indicating
that the capture is complete.

Page 10 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Packets were captured and are stored temporarily in the capture buffer. A count of the
number of packets processed is provided in the Ethernet result group, in the Capture
category.
ALERT: Changing applications or turning OFF the instrument

You will lose the entire contents of the capture buffer if you launch a new appli-
cation on the port that you are capturing packets on, or if you turn your instru-
ment OFF. To ensure that the packets are stored, save the capture buffer
before changing applications or turning the instrument OFF.
Capturing packets based on a trigger

When troubleshooting problems that occur intermittently or inconsistently, the trigger
feature allows capture to begin based on a given event. For this scenario, the filters are
used as triggers.
Triggering using only the byte pattern as a trigger
1 Press the Setup soft key.

2 Select Capture tab, and then set Capture to Enable.
3 Set Use Filters as to Filter.
4 Select the Filters tab, and then, in the panel on the left side, select Summary.
5 Select the Clear All Filters button to clear any current filter settings.
6 In the panel on the left side, select Byte Pattern.
7 Set Use Byte Pattern as to Trigger (N/A for 40GigE and 100GigE), and then
specify the trigger/filter as described in “Filtering traffic using byte pattern criteria”
on page 121.
8 Select the Capture tab and specify a Post-Trigger Size. This is the amount of
data, in MB, to capture after the trigger event occurs. If set to zero, the capture
stops immediately after the trigger event.
NOTE:
When capturing packets based on a trigger, the capture buffer saves in wrap-
around mode (overwrite the oldest packets with new packets when the buffer
becomes full).
10 Select the Capture toolbar, and then select Start Capture.

A message appears in the message bar indicating that the capture has started,
and the action key states Capture Started.
The capture will begin when the trigger event occurs which will be when the data
matches the byte pattern criteria. Captured packets are stored temporarily in the

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 11
capture buffer. A count of the number of packets processed is provided in the Ethernet
result group, in the Capture category.

Triggering using only the filters as a trigger

3 Set Use Filters as to Trigger.
7 Set the Use Byte Pattern as to Don't Care to turn off the byte pattern as a
trigger.
8 On the Filters tab, specify the trigger/filter as described in “Specifying filter
settings” on page 8.
NOTE:
becomes full).

matches the filter criteria. Captured packets are stored temporarily in the capture buffer.
A count of the number of packets processed is provided in the Ethernet result group, in
the Capture category.


Page 12 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Triggering using the filters and byte pattern simultaneously as a trigger

3 Set Use Filters as to Trigger.
7 Set the Use Byte Pattern as to Trigger, and then specify the trigger/filter as
described in “Specifying filter settings” on page 8.
NOTE:
becomes full).

matches the filter criteria and byte pattern criteria. Captured packets are stored tempo-
rarily in the capture buffer. A count of the number of packets processed is provided in
the Ethernet result group, in the Capture category.

Saving or exporting captured packets

After capturing packets, you can save the packets in the buffer to the internal USB drive,
or export it to an external USB drive. You can save the entire buffer, or you can indicate
that you want to save part of the buffer. You can also optionally turn on zip compression.
You can also optionally import a pcap file from an external USB drive to analyze it on
your unit.
Many factors contribute to the length of time it takes to save a captured file. For
example, if you configure a capture for a large buffer size (for example, 256 MB) with
small packets (for example, 46 byte ping packets), it will take a long time to save the file

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 13
due to the large number of packets stored in the buffer. Essentially, the packet density
and the capture size determine the length of time it takes to save the packets.
If you are running a TCP Host application, saving captured packets takes a long time;
therefore, we recommend stopping the TCP Host application before saving the
captured packets.
To save the packets in the capture buffer
1 Capture the packets (see “Manually capturing packets” on page 9 or “Capturing

packets based on a trigger” on page 11).
2 Select Save Capture Buffer.
The Save Capture File dialog box appears (see Figure 2).
Figure 2 Save Capture File dialog box
3 At the top of the dialog box, select one of the following:
To ... Select this ...

Save the captured packets to the internal USB /acterna/user/bert/disk/capture
drive
Save the captured packets to an external USB /acterna/user/usbflash
drive
4 Specify the following settings:
Setting Parameter
File Type If you want to see all files stored in the location you
selected in step 3, select All files; otherwise, accept the
default (Pcap files).

Page 14 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Setting Parameter
File Name If you want to specify a file name instead of accepting the
default, type the name using popup keypad. You do not
need to specify the .pcap file extension, the instrument will
automatically do so for you.
Save Select one of the following:
– If you want to save all of the packets in the buffer, select
Full Buffer.
– If you only want to save some of the packets in the buf-
fer, select Partial Buffer.
From If you indicated that you only want to save part of the buffer
(by selecting Partial Buffer), specify one of the following:
– Start of buffer
– End of buffer
Amount If you indicated that you only want to save part of the buffer
(by selecting Partial Buffer), specify one of the following:
– The number of MB to save (up to 256 MB)
– The percentage of the buffer to save
Compress File By default, the instrument does not compress the file. If
you want to save the packets in a compressed (gz) format,
select this setting.
CAUTION! Do not compress the file if you are measuring
One Way Delay.
Launch Wireshark If you want to launch Wireshark immediately after saving
after saving the packets in the capture buffer, select this setting.
5 Select the Save button at the bottom of the dialog box.

A dialog box appears above the Main screen showing the percentage of the buffer
that has been saved. When buffer is saved, the box closes. If you indicated that
you wanted Wireshark to launch immediately after saving the buffer, the Wire-
shark® application appears.
The packets in the capture buffer are saved or exported.
NOTE: CANCELLING THE SAVE PROCESS

You can cancel the save process by pressing the Cancel button provided on
the Save Capture Buffer dialog box. The length of time it take to cancel the
save process varies depending on the amount of data stored in the capture
buffer. More data in the buffer results in a longer cancellation process.
How long will it take to save the PCAP file?

The length of time it takes to save the PCAP file varies based on a number of factors,
including the capture buffer size, the length of the packets captured, the system
resources used, and whether or not you chose to compress the file.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 15
Table 3 provides estimates for a 100% full 256 MB buffer, for two packet lengths. The
estimates assume you did not compress the file, and that you are not running another
application on the other port.
Table 3 Estimated time to save a 256 MB PCAP file
Packet Length Estimated time to save

64 bytes 9 minutes
512 byte frames 8 minutes
Analyzing the packets using Wireshark®

After saving the packets in the capture buffer (to a PCAP file), you can analyze the
packets in detail on the instrument using the Wireshark® protocol analyzer. Files
exceeding 16 MB should not be analyzed on the instrument; large files should be
exported for analysis on another device. If you attempt to analyze a file with more than
50,000 packets, the instrument will alert you that the file should be exported for anal-
ysis.
One way to think of the buffer size in relationship to the length of packets is in terms of
density. A small 1 MB buffer populated with 256 byte packets is not as dense as a 1 MB
buffer populated with 64 byte packets, because less 256 byte packets are required to
fill the 1 MB buffer. Due to the reduced density of the file, opening the file for analysis
take less time. A dense file takes longer to open.
IMPORTANT: Wireshark® Support

Viavi is distributing Wireshark® on the instrument under the GNU General Pub-
lic License, version 2. It is not a Viavi product. For technical support, go to the
product website at www.wireshark.org.
To analyze captured packets
1 On the Capture toolbar, select the Wireshark action key.

The Open Capture File dialog box appears.
2 Navigate to and select the file you want to analyze.
The Wireshark® splash screen appears, then a small dialog box appears while
the application loads the packets in the file you selected.

Page 16 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
3 After the packets are loaded, a screen similar to the one in Figure 3 appears.
Figure 3 Sample Wireshark® screen
4 Use the controls at the top of the screen to locate and evaluate the packets. For
technical support and product documentation, go to www.wireshark.org.
You are analyzing captured packets.
Analyzing the packets using J-Mentor

If you want a summarized analysis of the packets, you can use the J-Mentor utility
provided on your instrument. J-Mentor can only be used to analyze PCAP files with
50,000 or less captured packets.
To analyze captured packets
1 On the Capture toolbar, select the J-Mentor action key.

The Open Capture File dialog box appears.
2 Specify the link bandwidth in Mbps. This is the line rate at which you captured the
traffic.
3 Navigate to and select the file you want to analyze.
4 If you want to observe key details for the PCAP file, select Get PCAP Info. This is
wise if you suspect the file might exceed the 50000 packet limit for analysis on
your instrument.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 17
If the file has 50,000 packets (or less), a summary of the data in the file appears,
including:
– The number of packets captured
– The file and data size
– The capture duration, start, and stop time
– The data bit and byte rate
– The average packet size
– The average packet rate
If the file has more than 50,000 packets, a message appears indicating that you
can not analyze the packets on the instrument. If this occurs, export the PCAP file
and analyze it using Wireshark® on your workstation.
5 To analyze the packets in the file, select Analyze. The utility immediately checks
for the following:
– The possible retransmissions of packets
– High bandwidth utilization
– Top talkers
– Detection of half duplex ports
– ICMP frames
After analyzing the packets, the Capture Analysis Summary screen appears, indi-
cating whether issues were found at layers 1 and 2 (the physical and Ethernet
layer), layer 3 (the IP layer), or layer 4 (the TCP/UDP layer). Green indicates
everything was fine at a particular layer; Red indicates that there were issues
identified at that layer. See Figure 4.
Figure 4 Capture Analysis Summary screen
6 Use the Details buttons to observe detailed results for each layer. For example, if
you want to observe a graph of the network utilization, or a list of all IP conversa-
tions, press the Details button for Layer 1 / 2.

Page 18 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Step 5: Viewing test results
7 If you want to analyze another PCAP file, select Choose PCAP File, and repeat
step 3 through step 6; otherwise, select Exit to return to the Main Screen.
The packets were analyzed using J-Mentor.
Step 5: Viewing test results

Test results appear in the Results Windows of the Main screen.
Setting the result group and category
To set the result group and category
1 Using the Test menu or Quick launch screen, select a test application see “Step 1:
Selecting a test application” on page 3), and then configure your test (see “Step 2:
Configuring a test” on page 5).
3 Connect your module to the circuit (see the instrument-specific procedure
provided in the T-BERD/MTS/SC Getting Started Guide that shipped with your
instrument or upgrade).
4 If you are testing an optical interface, select the Laser button.
5 If you selected an Ethernet, Fibre Channel, or SONET/SDH GFP test application,
select the Start Traffic button to start generating and analyzing traffic.
Results appear in the Results Windows.
6 Optional. Insert errors or anomalies into the traffic stream, or use the Action
buttons to perform other actions.Only buttons that are applicable to the test you
selected appear.
7 Use the Group and Category buttons to specify the type of results you want to
observe. Figure 5 illustrates buttons for a standard layer 2 Ethernet application.
Figure 5 Result Group and Category buttons
Results for the category you selected appear in the result window.
8 Optional. To observe results for a different group or category in another result
window, press the buttons at the top of the window to specify the group and cate-
gory.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 19
Running multiple tests
For descriptions of each result, refer to Chapter 16 “Test Results”.
TIP:
If you want to provide a screen shot of key test results, on the Main screen,
select Tools > Capture Screenshot. A screen shot will be captured and stored
as a JPG file in the /acterna/user/disk/bert/images folder. You can
include the screen shot when you create reports.
Additional test result information

For detailed information on the following topics, refer to the Getting Started manual that
shipped with your instrument or upgrade.
• Expanding and collapsing result measurements
• Changing the result layout
• Using the entire screen for results
• About histogram results
• Viewing a histogram
• About the Event log
• About result graphs
• Clearing History results
• Creating and maintaining Custom result groups
For descriptions of each result, refer to Chapter 16 “Test Results”.
Running multiple tests

You can significantly reduce your testing time by terminating traffic over multiple circuits
simultaneously.
For example, if your instrument is configured and optioned to do so, you can transmit
traffic from two ports supporting different interfaces to receiving interfaces on a network
element, and then loop the traffic back to your instrument to analyze the received
signals and verify that the network element is operating properly.
In addition, you can display two test result windows side-by-side using the Dual Test
View button.
For details, refer to the T-BERD/MTS/SC Getting Started Guide that shipped with your
instrument or upgrade.

Page 20 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
2
Chapter 2 Optical BER Testing
This chapter provides information on testing Optical BER services using your instru-
ment. Topics discussed in this chapter include the following:
• “About Optical BER testing” on page 22
• “BER Testing Optical Layer 1” on page 22
• “Monitoring Optical Layer 1” on page 23

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 21
About Optical BER testing
About Optical BER testing

The Optical BER test is used to validate that the underlying dark fiber/DWDM network
is configured correctly to support 3072.0M (3.072G) or 9830.4M protocol without errors.
If your instrument is equipped with the option, it supports both Terminate and Monitor
modes.
BER Testing Optical Layer 1
To BER test Optical Layer1
1 Using the Test menu or Quick launch screen, select the Optical BERT 3072.0M or
9830.4M Optical Layer 1 BERT Terminate application.
2 To specify the BER pattern, do the following:
a Select the Setup soft key, and then the Pattern tab.
b Select a pattern.
Pattern Description
2^23-1 ANSI Selects the 223 -1 pseudorandom pattern, which generates a
maximum of 22 sequential 0s and 23 sequential 1s. Usually
used to simulate live data for DS3 and SONET circuits.
2^23-1 Inv ANSI Selects the inverted 223 -1 pseudorandom pattern, which gen-
erates a maximum of 22 sequential 1s and 23 sequential 0s.
Usually used to simulate live data for DS3 and SONET circuits.
Delay 223-1 PRBS with multi-Bit Error Insertion for Latency Measure-
ment. This is an unframed Layer 1 Pattern. This pattern delivers
energy across the entire frequency spectrum delivering a good
basic Bit Error Test for the optical transmission line. The peri-
odic insertion of multiple bit errors permit a high-accuracy mea-
surement of timing in the 100s of nanoseconds range.
To measure round trip delay, use the Delay pattern.
NOTE:
There must be a loop at the far end (hard cable/fiber loop or far end test set in
Mon application with Rx = Tx selected) to measure round trip delay.
c Specify whether to link the Rx pattern to the Tx pattern.

d If you did not link the Rx pattern to the Tx pattern, specify the Rx pattern.
e Press Results to return to the Main screen.
3 Connect the instrument to the circuit.
4 Select the Laser button.

Page 22 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Monitoring Optical Layer 1
5 Verify that the green Signal LED is illuminated.

6 If desired, specify the error insertion parameters at the bottom of the page and
press the Error Insert button to insert into the signal.
7 Observe the test results in the following categories:
– Interface Signal - Stats such as Signal-Losses and Loss Seconds; Rx,
Optical-Overload and Level; Frequency and Clock Specs
– 3.072G Optical BERT- Error Stats such as Pattern Sync Losses and Pattern
Sync Loss Seconds (all), Bit Error Rate, Errors and Seconds (typical BERT
patterns), or Round Trip Delay (Delay pattern).
The Optical Layer 1 BERT is complete.
To monitor Optical Layer 1
1 Using the Test Menu or Quick Launch screen, select the Optical BERT 3072.0M
or 9830.4M Optical Layer 1 BERT Monitor/Thru application.
b Select the Rx Pattern. For example, if you want to analyze round trip delay,
select the Delay pattern.
NOTE:
The Rx Pattern that you select indicates which pattern to analyze; it does not
change the characteristics of the data transmitted by the terminating device or
instrument.
c Press Results to return to the Main screen.

4 If you are testing from an optical interface, select the Laser button.
6 Press the Restart soft key.
7 Observe the test results in the following categories:
– Interface Signal - Stats such as Signal-Losses and Loss Seconds; Rx,
Optical-Overload and Level; Frequency and Clock Specs.
– 3.072G Optical BERT- Error Stats such as Pattern Sync Losses and Pattern
Sync Loss Seconds (all), Bit Error Rate, Errors and Seconds (typical BERT
patterns), or Round Trip Delay (Delay pattern).
You are monitoring Optical layer 1.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 23

Page 24 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
3
Chapter 3 CPRI/OBSAI Testing
This chapter provides information on testing CPRI and OBSAI services. Topics
discussed in this chapter include the following:
• “About CPRI/OBSAI testing” on page 26
• “Layer 1 OBSAI BER Testing” on page 26
• “Layer 2 CPRI testing” on page 29
• “Layer 2 OBSAI testing” on page 39
• “Inserting errors” on page 40
• “Monitoring CPRI or OBSAI links” on page 41
• “PIM (Passive Intermodulation) Detection” on page 55
• “Capturing packets for analysis” on page 56
• “Running the CPRI Check work flow” on page 57

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 25
About CPRI/OBSAI testing
About CPRI/OBSAI testing

Common Public Radio Interface (CPRI) protocol is used on 3G/4G wireless network
deployments to implement a more cost effective distributive wireless base station archi-
tecture. CPRI is the communication protocol used to synchronize, control, and transport
data between the radio controller and remote radio heads. The CPRI test is used to vali-
date that the underlying dark fiber/DWDM network is configured correctly for these new
rates and meet CPRI service requirements.
Open Base Station Architecture Initiative Reference Point 3 (OBSAI RP3) refers to the
interface between the baseband and RF components within a cellular base station. The
OBSAI test is used to verify the CWDM links between the Central Office and the base
station.
CPRI Layer 2 testing enables field technicians to verify that fiber installation is correctly
performed and CPRI Link is functional before the Radio Equipment Controller at the
central office is installed and connected to the overall system.
Layer 1 OBSAI BER Testing

If your instrument is optioned to do so, you can BERT over CPRI or OBSAI by
transmitting 2^23-1 ANSI, 2^23-1 Inv ANSI, Delay, or specific test patterns that
use the 8B/10B symbol framing format.
The format allows the test patterns to be passed by network elements that require
basic synchronization messages as built into 8B/10B framing, and are used to
confirm the ability of the Physical Coding Sub-layer (PCS) of equipment that
implements 8B/10B to properly synchronize to another element under specific
conditions.
Figure 6 shows the details of the specific 8B/10B Encoded test patterns for OBSAI
used to verify the correct operation of the RF/Baseband interface.
Figure 6 Test pattern (D6.6 D25.6) frames for OBSAI

Page 26 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
To BER test OBSAI
1 Using the Test Menu or Quick Launch screen, select the OBSAI Layer 1 BERT
Terminate application.
Protocol Frequency Layer 1 BERT Applications

OBSAI 768M P1 Terminate
P2 Terminate
1536M P1 Terminate
P2 Terminate
3072.0M P1 Terminate
P2 Terminate
6144.0M P1 Terminate
P2 Terminate

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 27

b Select a pattern.
Pattern Description
2^23-1 ANSI Selects the 223 -1 pseudo-random pattern, which generates a
maximum of 22 sequential 0s and 23 sequential 1s. Usually
used to simulate live data for DS3 and SONET circuits.
2^23-1 Inv Selects the inverted 223 -1 pseudo-random pattern, which
ANSI generates a maximum of 22 sequential 1s and 23 sequential
0s. Usually used to simulate live data for DS3 and SONET cir-
cuits.
Delay 223-1 PRBS with multi-Bit Error Insertion for Latency Mea-
surement. This is an unframed Layer 1 Pattern. This pattern
delivers energy across the entire frequency spectrum deliver-
ing a good basic Bit Error Test for the optical transmission line.
The periodic insertion of multiple bit errors permit a high-accu-
racy measurement of timing in the 100s of nanoseconds
range.
NOTE: There must be a loop at the far end of the circuit to
measure round trip delay. For example, a hard cable/fiber loop
must be established, or an instrument on the far end must be
configured to run a supporting Mon/Thru application, and the
Rx = Tx setting must be selected.
Test Patterns Includes:
– D6.6 D25.6
– 2^23-1 ANSI
– 2^23-1 Inv ANSI
– Delay
– 2^31-1 (only available for 9.8G test)
– 2^31-1 Inv (only available for 9.8G test)
c Specify whether to link the Rx pattern to the Tx pattern.

d Select the Tx Pattern. If you did not link the Rx pattern to the Tx pattern, also
specify the Rx pattern.
e Select the Payload Analysis checkbox if you’d like to see pattern sync, bit
errors, etc. reported in the Results.
f Press Results to return to the Main screen.
3 Connect the module to the circuit. Select either SFP1 or SFP2.
5 If the Tx Frequency needs to be offset, select the Actions tab at the bottom of the
page and then select the Offset Tx Freq button. This will activate the available
offset frequency options. Select the desired offset.

Page 28 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Layer 2 CPRI testing
6 To insert errors into the transmission, select the Error tab at the bottom of the
page and then select from the available Error Types, Insertion Types and inser-
tion Rates. Press the Insert Error button to initiate error insertion.
7 Press the Start BERT Pattern action button to start inserting the BERT pattern.
This button appears when using the typical BERT patterns; it does not apply if you
are using the Delay pattern.
OBSAI layer 1 BERT is complete.

If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so, you can set Overhead Bytes,
configure a payload, and perform Bulk BER testing (with optional alarm insertion) of
your CPRI circuit.
On the T-BERD / MTS 5800v2 you can also transmit I/Q waveforms of LTE signals to
a spectrum analyzer for analysis.
NOTE:
CPRI Layer 2 testing is not available using the MSAMv1, T-BERD /
MTS 8000v1 DMC.
Layer 2 CPRI BULK and Channelized BER testing

The following procedure explains how to configure and run Layer 2 BULK and Chan-
nelized BER tests.
NOTE:
Channelized BER testing is only available on the T-BERD / MTS 5800v2.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 29
To configure and run a Layer 2 CPRI BER test
1 Using the Test Menu or Quick Launch screen, select a CPRI Layer 2 BERT Termi-
nate application.
Protocol Frequency Layer 2 Applications

CPRI Rates 1-7 Layer 2 BERT Terminate
Rates 8-9 Layer 2 BERT Terminate
614.4M Layer 2 BERT Terminate
Rates 1-7 are line rates that include the frequencies from 614.4 to 9830.4M
Rates 8-9 include frequencies 10137.6M and 12165.1M
If you select one of these two rates, you can specify the desired frequency in the
Line Rate drop-down box on the following screen. This enables you to change
frequency rates without exiting the application. It also includes option to perform
auto line rate negotiation with the far-end.
NOTE:
CPRI 24330.24M supports RS-FEC. It does not have Code Violation Error
Injection.
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the CPRI tab and Control Word
subtab.
a Define the Port Type and Start-Up Sequence in the corresponding drop-
down boxes.
b If the Start-Up Sequence is Bypass, specify the Protocol version.
c If you set the Protocol Version to 2, you can set up the Scrambler Seed
(not available for other settings)
d Specify the Control and Management parameters, if necessary.
- HDLC rate (or No HDLC).
- Whether the Ethernet Channel is enabled.
- If the Ethernet Channel is enabled, enter the Ethernet Sub-channel
Number.

Page 30 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
3 Select the CPRI tab, then select the User Plane sub-tab.
4 In User Plane Payload, select Bulk BERT or Channelized BERT, then do the
following:
a In Pattern Mode, select the mode (ITU or ANSI).
b In Pattern, select the pattern to transmit during testing.
5 If you selected Channelized BERT as your payload, specify the following to char-
acterize the AxC containers, over which the pattern will be transmitted and
received. These settings are not applicable or required for Bulk BERT payloads.
a In Bandwidth, select the signal bandwidth to be allocated to the AxC groups.
b Select the value in the drop-down NEM menu.
c If you select NEM as None, then you may configure Sample Width and the
number of Stuffing Bits. Also, you may configure the Offset to specify the
starting bit (within the User Plane of the CPRI frame) for the first AxC
container in the group.
d In the Tx and Rx AxC groups boxes, specify the Group number to be tested.
NOTE: The maximum number of groups is established based on 1) the line
rate (frequency) associated with the test application that you selected (for
example, 9.8G), and 2) the signal bandwidth that you specified (for example,
5 MHz). Using this example, up to 32 groups can be tested.
The AxC containers will be distributed automatically based on 1) the sample
width, and 2) the BERT pattern. The AxC mapping for each group automatically
appears under the AxC Mapping heading on the tab.
6 If service disruption detection is desired, select the Service Disruption tab and
click the Enable checkbox. Define the parameters to be detected from the avail-
able selections.
7 If a timed or delayed start test is required, select the Timed Test tab and specify
the desired start times and duration.
8 Select the Results soft key to return to the Main screen, then do the following:
a Select the Laser tab (located at the bottom of the screen), then click the
Laser button.
b Verify that the green Signal Present LED illuminates.
c If you selected Channelized BERT as the payload, select the Actions tab,
then click the Start User Plane Payload button.
d Verify that the Sync Acquired and Frame Sync LEDs illuminate.
9 Select the CPRI result group and then choose a category to view:
– Error Stats
– Counts
– L1 Inband Protocol
You are BER testing CPRI layer 2.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 31
Layer 2 I/Q Waveform Transmission

The following procedure explains how to configure and transmit layer 2 code words and
I/Q waveforms from your instrument to another device for spectrum analysis.
NOTE:
Layer 2 I/Q Waveform Transmission is only available on the T-BERD / MTS
5800v2 platform.
To properly analyze transmitted waveforms
The receiving device must be configured to align with the characteristics that you spec-
ified for the transmitted waveform. For example, if you are transmitting a waveform on
10Mhz bandwidth, the receiving device must be configured to analyze on 10Mhz band-
width. Other characteristics must also align (for example, the AxC starting offset bit and
the sample width).
To transmit a layer 2 I/Q waveform for analysis
1 Using the Test Menu or Quick Launch screen, select a CPRI Layer 2 BERT
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the CPRI tab and Control Word
subtab.
a Define the Port Type and Start-Up Sequence.
b If the Start-Up Sequence is Bypass, specify the Protocol version.
c If you set the Protocol Version to 2, you can set up the Scrambler Seed
(not available for other settings)
d Specify the Control and Management parameters, if necessary.
– HDLC rate (or No HDLC).
– Whether the Ethernet Channel is enabled.
– If the Ethernet Channel is enabled, enter the Ethernet Sub-channel Number.
3 Select the CPRI tab, then select the User Plane sub-tab.
4 In User Plane Payload, select Waveform from the list.

Page 32 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
5 Specify the following to characterize the AxC containers, over which the waveform
will be transmitted and received.
a In Bandwidth, select the signal bandwidth to be allocated to the AxC groups.
b If you set NEM to None, then you may configure Sample Width and the
number of Stuffing Bits. Also, you may configure the Offset to specify the
starting bit (within the User Plane of the CPRI frame) for the first AxC
container in the group.
c If needed, adjust the Gain of the waveform to be transmitted in order to
prevent an overrun or underrun of the RRH.
d Select the number of Tx and Rx antennas (up to 8).
e For each of the Tx and Rx antennas, specify the AxC group number that is
assigned.
Figure 7
For your convenience, when you configure the AxC Groups, you can
enable the IQ Block View checkbox and see the graphic representation of
where your AxC groups are located in the CPRI frame. Each AxC group is
represented by a different color. The IQ Block View can be enabled both in
the transmitted and received signals.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 33
To avoid mistakes in configuring the AxC groups, you can click the IQ
Activity Scan button in the received signal graph. The application checks
which groups are active and marks them with a gray frame on the graph.
f The AxC containers will be distributed automatically based on 1) the sample

width, and 2) the BERT pattern. The AxC mapping for each group automati-
cally appears under the AxC Mapping heading on the tab.
6 Select the Results soft key to return to the Main screen, then do the following:
a Select the Laser tab (located at the bottom of the screen), then click the
Laser button.
b Select the Actions tab, then click the Start User Plane Payload button.
7 Observe the waveform and supporting information on the receiving device.
8 Repeat step 4 through step 7 for additional waveforms.
You are transmitting waveforms from the instrument.
Remote Radio Head Testing

If your instrument is optioned to support Remote Radio Head (RRH) testing, you can
use it to perform enhanced testing of an RRH beyond CPRI layer 2 testing. Remote
Radio Head Testing is available only for certain types of remote radio heads. For the
type of radio heads, please contact your sales representative.
NOTE:
Remote Radio Head testing is only available on the 5800v2 platform.
Remote Radio Head Testing is not available at CPRI rate 10.137 Gbps.

Page 34 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
To test a remote radio head
1 Using the Test Menu or Quick Launch screen, select a CPRI Layer 2 BERT
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then the CPRI tab.
3 Specify the CPRI settings per the instructions provided in Step 2 of “Layer 2 CPRI
testing” on page 29. When connecting to an RRH, the Port Type must be
“Master.”
5 Select the Laser Tab at the bottom of the screen and click the Laser On button.
6 Select the RRH Connect button at the top of the screen.
7 If the instrument detects multiple RRH on the link, use the RRH/SN button at the
top of the screen to select the serial number of the remote radio that you want to
test.
8 Select the Results soft key, then obtain the following measurements from the
RRH result category:
– RTD: Observe the measurements associated with round trip delay.
– Status: Observe the serial number, software version, and details concerning
the RRH hardware and software.
– SFP: Observe details for the SFP that is plugged into the RRH.
Scanning and Controlling Antenna Line Devices
Performing ALD Scan

1 To check the information for the antenna line devices connected to the RRH,
Select the ALD Scan button on the RRH tab Once the scan is complete (it could
take several minutes), the devices are listed by Serial number. See the figure
below for details.
2 To see the information corresponding to an ALD, select the device by its Serial
number from the drop-down list (if there are more than one device).
3 Select the RRH result category and then the ALD results sub-category to see
the results.
Performing ALD Operations

1 Select the device by its serial number from the drop-down list on the RRH tab.
2 To reset the device, select the Reset Device button from the ALD tab at the
bottom of the screen.
3 To clear alarms, select the Clear Alarms button from the ALD tab at the bottom of
the screen.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 35
Performing RET Operations

You can use the instrument to perform Remote Electrical Tilt (RET) operations on an
antenna such as calibration, setting and verifying tilt.
1 First select the ALD by its serial number from the drop-down list on the RRH tab at
the top of the screen. Then select the antenna from the drop-down list (if there are
more than one connected to the device) on the ALD tab.
2 Select the Calibrate Antenna button from the ALD tab.
3 To change tilt, configure the desired tilt on the ALD tab, and select the Set Tilt
button. Once the button becomes executable again, verify that the tilt has been
changed by viewing the Current Electrical Tilt result in the RRH->ALD results
category.
Loop back testing with RRH
1 To Loop the RRH to perform BER testing, follow Steps 2 through 7 in the "Layer 2
CPRI Bulk BER and Channelized BER Testing" section to configure the Control
Word settings and User Plane settings appropriately. Select Channelized BERT
as the User Plane Payload.
2 Select the Results soft key to return to the Main menu.
3 Select the Actions tab, and click the Loop Up button. If the RRH is placed in
Loop back mode successfully, the Loop Status will be shown as "Enable" in the
RRH Status result category.
4 Select the Actions tab, and click the Start User Plane Payload button to start
transmitting BERT pattern in the payload.
5 Check the BERT results in the Payload BERT results category.
6 Once testing is complete, click the Loop Down button on the Actions tab to bring
RRH out of Loop back mode.

Page 36 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
I/Q Waveform Testing with RRH
To perform I/Q Waveform testing with the RRH, you can use the instrument to configure
the RRH to transmit the test waveform on the RFoCPRI link. Now you can also
configure the RRH (Remote Radio Head) to receive the test waveform. A Viavi instru-
ment capable of performing spectrum analysis (including CPRI monitor application on
MTS 5800) can be used as the receiving device to analyze the waveform.
1 To configure the RRH to perform Waveform analysis testing, follow Steps 2
through 6 in the "Layer 2 I/Q Waveform Transmission" section to configure the
Control Word settings and User Plane settings appropriately.
2 On the User Plane tab, specify the Tx RRH settings to configure a carrier: Tx
Antenna numbers, Tx Frequency, and Max Tx Power of the transmit signal.
Please add Number of Tx Antennas.
3 If you want to analyze a waveform by either using a Mon/Thru application on the
second port of the MTS 5800 or using another Viavi instrument, then on the User
Plane tab, specify the Receive RRH settings: Rx Antenna, Rx Antenna Number,
and Rx Frequency of the received signal. Please add Number of Tx Antennas.
4 Click Configure Carrier button to send the configuration to the RRH.
Figure 8 RRH Configuration on the User Plane
4. Verify the Carrier configuration as reported by the RRH.
5. Select the Results soft key to return to the Main menu.
6. Select the Actions tab, and click the Start User Plane Payload button to start trans-
mitting the selected waveform.
You are transmitting waveforms on the CPRI signal.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 37
Calibrating delay measurements

If your instrument is optioned to support CPRI testing, you can use it to obtain highly
accurate measurements of the delay on the circuit between your test instrument (posi-
tioned adjacent to the base station) and the RRH. This is accomplished by 1) entering
the length of the cable that will be used to connect to the RRH as a calibration setting,
2) establishing a self loop between the Rx and Tx ports of the active SFP using the
same cable, 3) measuring round trip delay, and then 4) entering the round trip delay
measurement as a calibration setting. This process will provide a more accurate
measurement by calibrating the following delay values out of the measurement:
• The delay that is introduced by the instrument’s SFP.
• The delay that is introduced by the RRH.
NOTE:
Calibrating delay measurements is not available using the T-BERD / MTS 5800-
100G.
To calibrate your delay measurement
1 Measure the length of the short loopback cable.

3 Select the CPRI tab, then select the RTD sub-tab.
4 In Calibration Cable Length (cm), enter the length of the cable.
5 Verify that your instrument is configured using the Master port type, then establish
a self loop from one port on your instrument to a second port using the measured
cable.
6 Select the Results soft key, then obtain the Round Trip Delay measurement from
the CPRI Counts result category.
7 Select the Setup soft key, and then return to the CPRI tab.
8 In SFP Delay (us), enter the Round Trip Delay measurement.
9 To provide the inherent RRH delay value, do one of the following:
– Obtain the RRH delay value (from the operator of the RRH), then enter the
value in RRH Delay (us) and restore the Calibration Cable Length (cm) to
0 us.
– Use the measured cable to establish a connection from the instrument to the
RRH. Select the Results soft key to return to the main screen, then use the
RRH Connect softkey to connect to the RRH.
The RRH automatically provides the RRH delay value to the instrument. Use
the Setup soft key to return to the CPRI tab, and restore the Calibration
Cable Length (cm) to 0 us.
10 Select the Results soft key, then observe the delay measurements in the RRH
RTD result category.
You have calibrated your delay measurement.

Page 38 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Layer 2 OBSAI testing
Inserting alarms
You can insert alarms into a configured Layer 2 CPRI signal.
To insert alarms
1 Verify the laser is active (indicated by a yellow Laser button and a green Signal
Present LED).
2 Select an alarm type (R-LOS, R-LOF, RAI, SDI).
3 Press the Alarm Insert button.
The module inserts an alarm and the button turns yellow.
Test results associated with the alarm or defect appear in the Status result category.
Layer 2 OBSAI testing

If the instrument is optioned to do so, the Port Type, Enable LOS, Force Tx Idle and
define the RP3 address and Type parameters can be specified in Layer 2 OBSAI appli-
cations.
NOTE:
Layer 2 OBSAI testing is not available on the T-BERD / MTS 5800-100G plat-
form.
NOTE:
When conducting OBSAI Layer 2 testing using an MSAM (connected to a
DMC), a v2 MSAM must be used. OBSAI Layer 2 testing is not available on v1
MSAMs.
To configure Layer 2 OBSAI BER test
1 Using the Test Menu or Quick Launch screen, select a OBSAI Layer 2 BERT
Protocol Frequency Applications

OBSAI 768.0M Layer 2 BERT Terminate

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 39
Inserting errors
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then the OBSAI tab.
a In the Tx box, specify the Port Type, LOS Enable, Force Tx Idle, Scrambler
Seed, RP3 Address, and RP3 Type.
b In the Rx box, specify the RP3 Address and RP3 Type.
c If scrambling is desired, check the Enable Seeds Exchange Box (6144M
OBSAI only).
d In the FCB Message Box, Specify the RP3 Address to be used for Tx FCB
message. In Slave mode, this address is also used for FCB message detec-
tion.
e If FCB message generation/detection is desired check Enable FCB message
box.
3 Select the Pattern tab.
a Select a Pattern Mode.
b Select the desired pattern from the list of available patterns.
4 If service disruption detection is desired, select the Service Disruption tab and
click the Enable checkbox. Define the parameters to be detected from the avail-
able selections.
5 If a timed or delayed start test is required, select the Timed Test tab and specify
7 Select the Laser Tab at the bottom of the screen and click the Laser On button.
8 Select the OBSAI result group and then choose a category to view:
– Error Stats
– Counts
– L1 Inband Protocol
You are BER testing OBSAI layer 2.
Inserting errors
Action buttons on the Main screen allow you to insert errors into the CPRI/OBSAI
signal. If you turn on a particular error insertion rate, the error insertion continues even
after you restart a test or change the test configuration.
To insert errors
1 If you are inserting errors, select one of the following error types:
– Code
– K30.7
– BIT/TSE
– Running Disparity (CPRI L2 only)

Page 40 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Monitoring CPRI or OBSAI links
2 Do the following:
– Specify the Insertion Style (Single, or Rate).
– If you specified Rate, select a rate.
3 Press the Error Insert button.
Error or pause frame insertion starts. If you are inserting errors at a particular rate, the
associated button turns yellow. To stop insertion, press the corresponding button again.
Error insertion stops, and the associated button turns gray.

If your instrument is optioned to do so, you can monitor CPRI or OBSAI links.
To monitor CPRI or OBSAI
Using the Test Menu or Quick Launch screen, select a CPRI or OBSAI Monitor/Thru
application.
Protocol Frequency Mon/Thru Applications

CPRI Layer2 Rates 1-7 P1 Mon/Thru
P2 Mon/Thru
Rates 8-9 P1 Mon/Thru
P2 Mon/Thru
614.4M P1 Mon/Thru
P2 Mon/Thru
1228.8M P1 Mon/Thru
P2 Mon/Thru
2457.6M P1 Mon/Thru
P2 Mon/Thru
3072.0M P1 Mon/Thru
P2 Mon/Thru
4915.2M P1 Mon/Thru
P2 Mon/Thru
6144.0M P1 Mon/Thru
P2 Mon/Thru
9830.4M P1 Mon/Thru
P2 Mon/Thru
10137.6M P1 Mon/Thru
P2 Mon/Thru

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 41
Protocol Frequency Mon/Thru Applications

OBSAI Layer 1 768M1 P1 Mon/Thru
P2 Mon/Thru
1536M1 P1 Mon/Thru
P2 Mon/Thru
3072.0M1 P1 Mon/Thru
P2 Mon/Thru
6144.0M P1 Mon/Thru
P2 Mon/Thru
OBSAI Layer 2 768M P1 Mon/Thru
P2 Mon/Thru
1536M1 P1 Mon/Thru
P2 Mon/Thru
3072.0M1 P1 Mon/Thru
P2 Mon/Thru
6144.0M P1 Mon/Thru
P2 Mon/Thru
1. Available on MSAMv1
Select the Setup soft key and configure the following:

1 To monitor traffic for a BER pattern:
a Layer 1 OBSAI - Select the Pattern tab, then select the Payload Analysis
checkbox if it is desired to check for BERT pattern errors. This will cause
pattern sync, bit errors etc. to be reported in the results.
b Layer 2 CPRI - Select the CPRI tab, then select the User Plane sub-tab. In
User Plane Payload, select Bulk BERT or Channelized BERT, then do the
following:
i In Pattern Mode, select the mode (ITU or ANSI).
ii In Pattern, select the pattern to monitor during testing.
c If you selected Channelized BERT as your payload, specify the following to
characterize the AxC containers, over which the pattern will be received.
These settings are not applicable or required for Bulk BERT payloads.
i In NEM (Network Equipment Manufacturer), select one of the NEMs.
ii In Bandwidth, select the signal bandwidth allocated to the AxC groups.
iii If you set NEM to None, then you can configure the Sample Width,
Stuffing Bits, and the Offset.
iv In AxC Group, specify the Group number to be tested. When you
configure the AxC Groups, you can enable the IQ Block View checkbox
and see the graphic representation of where your AxC groups are
located in the CPRI frame. You can also click the IQ Activity Scan

Page 42 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
button in the received signal graph. The application will check which
groups are active and mark them with a gray frame on the graph. For
more information see page 33.
2 To perform RFoCPRI Interference Analysis (Spectrum Analysis and Spectro-
gram)in Layer 2 CPRI:
a Select the CPRI tab.
b Then select the User Plane sub-tab.
c In User Plane Payload, select Waveform.
d In NEM, select one of the NEMs.
Chose None to configure the Sample Width and the Offset (these settings
characterize the AxC containers over which the IQ data will be received).
i In Bandwidth, select the signal bandwidth allocated to the AxC groups.
ii ii and iii are removed. If NEM is selected as None, then you may
configure Sample Width and the number of Stuffing Bits. Also, you
may configure the Offset to specify the starting bit (within the User Plane
of the CPRI frame) for the first AxC container in the group.
iii In # of Antennas, you can configure up to eight antennas. Four spec-
trums corresponding to any antenna/AxC group can be displayed simul-
taneously. The number of antennas depends on the bandwidth and CPRI
line rate settings.
iv In AxC Group, specify the Group number to be tested. When you
configure the AxC Groups, you can enable the IQ Block View checkbox
and see the graphic representation of where your AxC groups are
located in the CPRI frame. You can also click the IQ Activity Scan
button in the received signal graph. The application will check which
groups are active and mark them with a gray frame on the graph. For
more information see page 33.
For detailed instructions on RFoCPRI Interference Analysis, please see

the section below.
3 To monitor Layer 2 BERT traffic:
a Select the OBSAI tab.
b Select Payload Type as BERT.
c Select the RP3 address of the OBSAI receiver.
d Select the RP3 type from the drop-down list.
e Specify the RP3 address for FCB message detection.
f Specify Pattern Mode and Bert Pattern to monitor.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 43
RFoCPRI / RFoOBSAI Analysis
4 To perform RFoOBSAI Interference Analysis (Spectrum Analysis and Spectro-

gram) in Layer 2 OBSAI:
a Select the OBSAI tab.
b Select Payload Type as Waveform
c Select signal Bandwidth.
d For # of Rx Antennas, you can configure up to eight antennas. Four spec-
trums corresponding to any antenna can be displayed simultaneously. The
number of antennas depends on the bandwidth and OBSAI line rate settings.
e For each Rx Antenna, specify the RP3 Address.
f Specify the RP3 address for FCB message detection.
5 For Layer 2 CPRI/OBSAI - If service disruption detection is desired, select the
Service Disruption tab.
a Click the Enable checkbox.
b Define the Separation Time and Threshold Time parameters by entering the
desired values.
c Click the Event triggers tab.
d Click the events on the tabs for which service disruption notifications are
desired.
6 If a timed or delayed monitoring is required, select the Timed Test tab and specify
7 Press Results to return to the Main screen.
8 Connect the module to the circuit. If necessary, select either SFP1 or SFP2.
10 Verify that the green Signal Present LED is illuminated.
11 Press the Restart soft key.
You are monitoring CPRI or OBSAI.
RFoCPRI / RFoOBSAI Analysis

If optioned to do so, the RF over CPRI (RFoCPRI) and RF over OBSAI (RFoOBSAI)
technology enables you to perform PIM and interference analysis without disrupting
service by monitoring the CPRI or OBSAI signals. It covers multiple network technolo-
gies such as LTE.
NOTE:
RFoCPRI and RFoOBSAI are not available on T-BERD/MTS-5800-100G.
RFoCPRI requires option C5RFOCPRI. RFoOBSAI requires C5RFOOBSAI.

Page 44 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Performing the RFoCPRI / RFoOBSAI Spectrum analysis
The purpose of this feature is to make it easy to verify the presence of unwanted signals
such as spurious and harmonics, which are normally very hard to identify in time
domain analysis. You shall be able to analyze the RF Spectrum by adjusting resolution
bandwidth, reference amplitude level, zooming in/out, and using traces and markers.
After checking that the link connection is good with no errors and alarms, you can
proceed to interference analysis activities such as Spectrum analysis and Spectrogram
view.

1 Select the RFoCPRI or RFoOBSAI spectrum analysis. The steps in both cases
are almost identical and are illustrated below by the RFoCPRI examples. The few
differences are shown in the additional RFoOBSAI examples.
a For RFoCPRI, you can be either in Mon/Thru (Monitor) or Term (Terminate)
modes. Select Waveform in the User Plane Payload drop-down menu and
configure the settings as shown below. The number of available AxC groups
depends on the bandwidth and the number of selected antennas.
b For RFoOBSAI, you need to be in the Mon/Thru mode. Select Waveform in

the User Plane Payload drop-down menu and configure the settings as
shown below. Configure RP3 Addresses for each of the Rx Antennas.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 45
1 Press the Spectrum soft key on the right. The RFoCPRI / RFoOBSAI Spectrum
screen will open. This is the basic configurations and results panel that can be
configured to display one, two or four plots with unique settings per plot to run one
or more AxC groups. The four blue buttons Status, Zoom, Marker Data and
Marker Controls in the lower left corner display the status information, control the
zoom settings, show marker data, and offer configurable marker controls.

Page 46 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
2 Press the plot display button in the upper-right corner (the name of the
button varies depending on how many plots you assigned for display; i.e. Quad
stands for four plots). The Configure Spectrum View screen opens.
Figure 9 RFoCIPRI Configure Spectrum View
Figure 10 RFoOBSAI Configure Spectrum View
3 Select the Single, Dual or Quad Spectrum view (plots) in the Analysis Mode. In
the Rx Sources menu you have a choice of several AxC Groups or RP3
Addresses to run depending on how many antennas and which Analysis Mode
you have selected.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 47
4 Once you press OK, the new configured screen will open. In the RFoCIPRI
example below, four AxC Groups and the Quad Spectrum were selected on the
Configure Spectrum View screen. Press the Select button on the right side to
move between the plots.
5 Next, you will need to configure the test set using blue soft keys on the right side
of the screen. All soft key configuration panels will have the plot display button
in the upper-right corner that opens the Configure Spectrum View screen
where you can change the display to one, two or four plots. You can also switch to
Full Screen mode by either toggling the soft keys on the right or clicking the
>>Hide key at the lower-right corner of the configuration panels.

Page 48 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Frequency/Bandwidth settings
Select the Frequency/Bandwidth soft key to open the Frequency/Bandwidth configu-
ration panel.
Figure 11 The Frequency/Bandwidth configuration panel
Configure the following parameters:
1 Center Frequency.
2 Zoom Center Frequency. Configure the frequency you want to zoom around by
entering the value manually or use the left/right arrow buttons at the bottom of the
screen.
3 Zoom Span (zoom in or out). Configure the zoom span by entering the value
directly or use the Zoom blue button at the bottom of the screen to operate Zoom
controls.
4 RBW and VBW. For the RBW and VBW, the signal bandwidth range is 10Hz to
30KHz depending on the bandwidth. You can also set the RBW/VBW to Auto. The
instrument will pick the highest available RBW for you.
5 Average. You can set the number of measurements to be averaged for the trace
presentation in the Spectrum and Spectrogram modes. A maximum of 100 times
of averaging can be set. When the averaging reaches to your setting, a new
measurement value replaces the value in sequence from the earliest. Enter a
value between 1 and 100.
You can restore the Frequency scale to its original value by pressing the Restore
button.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 49
The Amplitude settings

Select the Amplitude soft key to open the Amplitude configuration panel.
Figure 12 The Amplitude configuration panel

1 Reference Level. You can set the reference level automatically or manually to
optimize the display of the measured traces.
a To automatically set the reference level:
i Press the Auto Scale button.
Each time you press this button, the Y-axis scale changes to be opti-
mized with some margin.
b To set the reference level manually:
i Either enter the value directly or use the Zoom blue button at the bottom
of the screen to get access to reference levels controls.
2 Scale/Div. This feature permits you to change the scale per division, representing
the value of one division on the horizontal scale. Enter the value directly or use
the Zoom blue button at the bottom of the screen to get access to Scale/Div
controls.
3 External Offset. You can turn the External Offset on and manually set the
external offset value.
You can restore the original amplitude scale by pressing the Restore button.

Page 50 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
The Sweep/Trace settings

Select the Sweep/Trace soft key to open the Sweep/Trace configuration panel. If
configured in the Single Spectrum mode, this panel has a capability to capture the
Spectrum and Spectrogram data in a file to be viewed later, using the JDViewer appli-
cation.
Figure 13 The Sweep/Trace configuration panel
1 Select the Hold button. The word HOLD turns red and the sweeping is paused. If
in Single Spectrum mode, you have the option to press the Sweep Once button to
get a new measurement.
2 Detector. To select the type of the detector, do the following:
To display Select
Random noise better than the peak without missing signals Normal
The highest value in each data point Peak
The root mean squared average power across the spectrum RMS
The lowest value in each data point Negative Peak
The center value in each data point Sample

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 51
3 Trace. You can display up to three traces on the measurement chart simultane-
ously. Enable/Disable each of the 3 traces (T1 T2, T3). The legend shape of the
selected trace changes from square to round to indicate that the trace is the active
one now. Complete one of the following:
To Select Trace Legend

Clear current data and dis- Clear Write W
play with new measure-
ments
Display the input signal’s Max Hold Max
maximum response only
(unlimited or for a certain
amount of time)
Display the input signal’s Min Hold min
minimum response only
(unlimited or for a certain
amount of time)
NOTE:
For the Max Hold and Min Hold, your instrument compares newly acquired
data with the active trace and displays larger maximum values or smaller min-
imum values on the screen.
You can set it to unlimited by not enabling Hold Duration check box and view
maximum or minimum data or specify a certain amount of time up to 60 sec-
onds by enabling Hold Duration.
The Hold Duration is common to all Spectrum plots
4 Start Capture. Press this button to start capturing the data. This button will turn
into Stop Capture. After you selected the Stop Capture, you can save the data in
a file and later export it to the USB. This feature is available in Single Spectrum
mode only.

Page 52 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
The Markers settings

Select the Markers soft key to open the Markers configuration panel.
Figure 14 The Markers configuration panel
1 Markers. A marker is used to get the information about a specific trace. There are
a total of 6 global markers that can be placed on any of the spectrum plots. Each
marker can be used independently. The X and Y coordinates of the trace are
displayed when the marker is placed on any position of the trace. The following
parameters may be selected for each of the Markers:
a Marker Enable/Disable. Enable/Disable up to 6 markers.
b Marker Frequency. Enter the frequency to place the Marker manually or
select the Marker Controls button to use the peak search controls on the
bottom of the screen.
c Type. Select Marker type as follows:
i Normal. Active marker is used as a tracking marker whose amplitude
changes as the amplitude of the signal being measured changes.
ii Always Peak. Active marker moves automatically to the highest peak of
the trace every time the trace is refreshed.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 53
iii Reference. Active marker is used as a reference with fixed amplitude.

d Negative Enable/Disable. If enabled, the active marker moves to the lowest
peak of the trace.
e Assigned Trace. Select the Trace (T1, T2, T3) the marker is assigned to.
2 Marker Operations. Buttons at the bottom of the screen can be used to perform
different marker operations.
a Center. Puts signal at the active marker in the center of the screen.
b Find Peak
i Peak Search. Moves the active marker to the highest peak of the trace.
ii Next Peak. Moves the active marker to the second highest peak of the
trace.
c Move To Peak
i Next Peak Right: Moves the active marker to the highest peak to the
right of its current position.
ii Next Peak Left: Moves the active marker to the highest peak to the left of
its current position.
d Move Marker. Moves marker to the far left, far right, or center of the display.
e Delta (M1-M2). You can enable the checkbox to provide M1-M2 frequency
and level values.
Spectrogram View
The Spectrogram view is particularly useful when attempting to identify periodic or inter-
mittent signals as it captures spectrum activity over time and uses various colors to
differentiate spectrum power levels. The Frequency/Bandwidth, Amplitude, Sweep,
and Markers setups are shared between Spectrum and Spectrogram modes. For
each Spectrum plot, you can have up to 3 different types of traces (live, min hold, max
hold) superimposed. For Spectrogram, we only show one trace. It supports the same
Clear Write, Max Hold, and Min Hold settings as the Spectrum view.
Select the Spectrum soft key on the right to get to the Spectrum view and select the
Spectrogram tab.

Page 54 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
PIM (Passive Intermodulation) Detection
Figure 15 Spectrogram panel
You can view 4 spectrograms on the screen in the Quad mode but only two can be
displayed at a time. The other two are minimized. To view the minimized spectrograms,
press the minus next to the open spectrograms numbers (Rx1- and Rx2- buttons above
the spectrograms in the picture above). Then press the plus on the spectrogram you
want to view (it will appear next to the minimized spectrograms). There is also an
enable/disable button for Show Markers on the Spectrogram view.
PIM (Passive Intermodulation) Detection

PIM is a common form of intermodulation distortion that can occur in many areas from
coaxial connectors to cables, even rusty bolts or any joint where dissimilar metals
occur. PIM can produce interference, resulting in dropped calls and affecting signal
quality. It can have many causes, from rusty connectors and lose antennas to bad
cables. Accordingly, it’s important to check if there is PIM in the signal and remove its
causes. You can perform RF over CPRI and RF over OBSAI Spectrum Analyses for
PIM detection.
Running the PIM test:

1 On the Spectrum pane, press the blue Measure soft key on the bottom right.
2 Enable the PIM Detection option button under Measure on the top of the window
(the default is Off)

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 55
3 Set the PIM Threshhold (db) value (the default is 5.0).

4 Set the Bandwidth Percent (the recommended default is 80.0). This is the part of
the signal that will be tested for PIM.
5 Enable or disable Hold Duration (s)
6 You can view the PIM trace in the horizontal (no PIM) or slanted (PIM exists) part
of the graph in the PIM Detection window.
7 Make sure the Status button in the lower-left corner is enabled and displays the
Status control panel with the test results. At the end of the test, the Pass/Fail
status for each test will be displayed and the Level Difference value will show the
degree of the PIM slant.
NOTE:
You can conduct PIM detection on multiple antennas simultaneously.

If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so, you can use it to capture
received Ethernet packets inside the C & M channel in CPRI frames, save it on the
instrument or to an external USB key, and then either send the packets to another tech-
nician for analysis, or analyze it yourself using the Wireshark® protocol analyzer.

Page 56 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Running the CPRI Check work flow
NOTE:
Capturing packets for analysis is not available using the T-BERD / MTS 5800-
100G.
Capturing packets for analysis is not available for CPRI rate 10.137 Gbps.
NOTE:
The term “packets” is used interchangeably with “frames” throughout this man-
ual, and represents any of the layer 2, layer 3, or layer 4 datagrams carried in
the traffic stream.
For details, refer to “Capturing packets for analysis” on page 6.

If your instrument is configured and optioned to support CPRI testing, you can run the
CPRI Check work flow to verify that fiber installation is correctly performed and a CPRI
Link is functional before the Radio Equipment Controller at the central office is installed
and connected to the overall system.
Before running the CPRI Check work flow, you must establish a physical connection
from your test instrument (located adjacent to the BBU) to the RRH. When you
configure the work flow, you specify the type of BBU on the circuit that you are testing.
The work flow needs to know the equipment type to establish a communications link to
the RRH using the same parameters that are used by the BBU.
To run the CPRI Check work flow

1 Using the Test Menu or Quick Launch screen, select a Layer 2 CPRI Check. The
Configure CPRI Check menu appears.
2 Select one of 3 options (edit previous configuration, load a saved configuration, or
start a new configuration).
3 Select Test Settings (Green Arrow)
4 The CPRI Check Test Settings screen will open.
5 Select the device in the Far-end Device drop-down box. This is the equipment
type for the simulated BBU that will eventually be used on the link that you are

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 57
testing.
Note: C5RRHA option is required to select RRH Identification, RET, and VSWR
tests. Both C5RRHA and C5RFOCPRI options are required to select PIM Detec-
tion test and Diversity Imbalance test.
a ALU (Alcatel-Lucent). If you select ALU, your instrument will use a Normal
start up sequence.
b Ericsson. If you select Ericsson, your instrument will bypass the start up
sequence.
c Other. If you select Other, your instrument will use a Normal start up
sequence.
d Hard Loop. If Hard Loop is selected, you can optionally run a BERT test.
6 In the yellow Select Tests box, the column on the left shows the tests that are run
by default and cannot be disabled. The column on the right has optional tests that
you can enable or disable. Select your tests.
7 You can either press the Next button and follow the step-by-step instructions on
the following screens or press the Go To... button for a menu of shortcuts to the
functions you need. For your convenience the Go To... button is available on all
the following screens where applicable.

Page 58 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
8 Go To... button.
9 If you click not the Go To... button, but the Next button on the CPRI Check work
flow screen, you will be taken to step-by-step instructions.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 59
10 On this screen you need to configure the CPRI Link Test settings:
- CPRI Link Test Duration. Here you can specify precisely the test dura-
tion in seconds, minutes, hours, days, or in a dd/hh:mm:ss format.
- Optical Rx Level Max. Limit (dBm). To specify the threshold for failing
this test, select the checkbox to enable the setting, then specify the
maximum signal strength that is considered acceptable in dBm. If the
strength of the received signal is greater than the threshold level, this
test will FAIL.
- Optical Rx Level Min. Limit (dBm). To specify the threshold for failing
this test, select the checkbox to enable the setting, then specify the
minimum signal strength that is considered acceptable in dBm. If the
strength of the received signal is lower than the threshold level, this test
will FAIL.
- Round Trip Delay Max. Limit (us). To set the threshold for failing this
test, select this checkbox, then specify the delay that is considered
acceptable in us. If the measured delay is greater than the threshold
level, this test will FAIL.
- Press Next.
11 On this screen you need to configure the RRH (Remote Radio Head) settings.

Page 60 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
12 Press Next and you will be taken to the Save Profiles window. If you don’t want
to save the profile, you can press the Skip Save Profiles button.
13 On the next screen click the Go button next to Run Tests
14 The Tests screen will open where you can run the tests. Click the Run Test
button.
– The button turns yellow, and the label changes to Stop Test.
– The test status boxes next to the tests keep you informed of the progress of
each test. The Test Status Key is available on the screen for easy reference.
Press the status boxes to see the test results.
– The first 5 tests (SFP Check, Interface, Start-up Sequence, RTD, and option-
ally BERT) will run simultaneously for the time specified in the setup screen
(usually 30 seconds). Once completed, the RRH Identification test will run.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 61
15 SFP Verification. The SFP inserted into your test instrument is evaluated to
determine whether the transceiver has been qualified by Viavi for the frequency
associated with the Layer 2 CPRI test application that you have selected before
running the work flow, and whether the signal level is appropriate.
– Test results. If the SFP was purchased from or approved by Viavi, and
supports the selected CPRI line rate, the following screen will be displayed:
– If the SFP has not been qualified by Viavi, the following screen will be
displayed:
– Check that the SFP Wavelength, SFP Vendor, and SFP Part Number are
approved for this CPRI line rate.

Page 62 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
16 Start-up Sequence.
– Test results:
17 RTD (Round Trip Delay). This test uses the threshold that you specify as the
Round Trip Delay Max. Limit when you configure the work flow to determine the
RTD test status:
– If the measured delay is greater than the specified threshold, the test will
FAIL.
– If the measured delay is less than or equal to the specified threshold, the test
will PASS.
– If you disabled the threshold, the test will be reported as COMPLETED.
– Test results:

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 63
18 Interface. This test uses the threshold that you specify as the Optical Rx Max.
Limit/Optical Rx Min Limit when you configure the work flow to determine whether
the strength of the signal received by your test instrument from the RRH is too
strong.
– If the signal strength is greater than the specified MAX threshold or less than
the specified MIN threshold, the test will FAIL.
– If the signal strength falls between the specified MIN and MAX thresholds or
equal to the specified thresholds, the test will PASS.
Test results:
19 RRH Identification
– Test results:

Page 64 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
20 RET, VSWR, Diversity Imbalance and PIM testing require specific information
for the RRU under test. Return back to the Tests screen by clicking the Back
button. Then click the yellow pause status boxes next to these tests to enter the
missing information:
21 RET (Remote Electrical Tilt). This test is the ALD (Antenna Line Device, or the
RET Controller) scan that checks how many antennas are connected to the RRH
(Remote Radio Head) on the cell tower. It also collects status information on each
antenna that you can see in the Antenna Results area, such as the Serial
Number, Model Name, Base Station, Sector, Current Tilt and Tilt Test informa-
tion.
– Select the ALD for each antenna from the Selected ALD drop-down box in
the ALD Scan Results area and check the Alarm state in the Alarm
Summary area on the right side of the window.
– On the RET screen you can also press the buttons, Calibrate Antenna,
Clear Alarms and Set Tilt to perform the corresponding functions.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 65
22 VSWR.
– Return back to the Tests screen and click the status box next to VSWR.:
– The VSWR test requires the RRH to be configured with specific data to
transmit at full power. Click the link RRH Configuration:.
– Configure the appropriate Tx & Rx Frequency, and Max Tx Power for the
RRH.
– Press the button Configure Carrier to set the RRH. Once completed the
Carrier State in the RRH Configuration area will show ENABLE.
– Press the Back button to return to the VSWR screen.
– Click the Start VSWR test button to run the VSWR test.
– Once finished, press the Back button to return to the Tests screen and start
the next test.
23 Diversity Imbalance. The Diversity Imbalance test establishes a connection to
the radio and compares the Receive channel power of each of the antennas (up
to 4 antennas on the Receive side). If there is a big difference among the channel

Page 66 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
powers of the antennas, the application detects an imbalance.

24 PIM Detection. The PIM test requires the RRH to be configured with specific data
to transmit at full power. Please refer to the VSWR section of this manual if the
VSWR test was not run.
– Test results. You can also press the Spectrum button on this screen to see a
graphic presentation of the PIM trace. The recommended defaults for PIM
Bandwidth is 80% of the signal.
25 The CPRI Check is finished. Press the Next button to create and save the report.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 67
Creating and Saving a Report:
a Click the Create Report button. Enter the Job information:
b Click the Next arrow button to get to the Create Report page.
- You may view saved reports by selecting the View Report button.
- To show a copy of the current report after saving it, check the View
report after creation check box. The report will automatically load into
the appropriate reader (if available) depending upon the format in which
it has been saved.
- To include screenshots with the report, select the Include screenshots
check box.
- When ready to save the report, select the Create Report button. After
the report has been created and viewed, select the Exit soft key to return
to the CPRI Check test window.
1 To view detailed results of the test, select the Go arrow on the View Detailed
Results line. The detailed results are presented in a sequence of windows that
vary depending upon the steps in the test that were selected to be run.
2 To repeat the test that just ran, select the Go arrow on the Repeat Test line.
3 To exit the test application do one of the following:
– To exit to the base application, retaining all setups from the CPRI Check test,
select the Exit to Results button.
– To return to the previous window, select Cancel.
– To restore the CPRI Check test configuration to the values that were set
before you started the CPRI Check application, select the box Restore
Setups on Exit.
– To completely exit the application, select Exit.

Page 68 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Running the OBSAI Check work flow

If your instrument is configured and optioned to support the OBSAI testing, you can run
the OBSAI Check work flow. It will verify that fibre installation is correctly performed and
an OBSAI Link is functional before the Radio Equipment Controller at the central office
is installed and connected to the overall system.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 69

Page 70 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
4
Chapter 4 eCPRI Testing
This chapter provides information on eCPRI testing. Topics discussed in this chapter
include the following:
• “About eCPRI” on page 72
• “Running eCPRI tests” on page 72

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 71
Chapter 4 eCPRI Testing
About eCPRI
About eCPRI
eCPRI is an extension of CPRI developed in 2017 for the massive broadband use of
5G. eCPRI is designed to enable efficient and flexible radio data transmission via a
packet based fronthaul transport.
Running eCPRI tests

If your instrument is optioned for eCPRI and 10 or 25 GigE, the applications will transmit
and analyze layer 2 eCPRI traffic (see “Layer 2 testing” on page 101). All test frames
are automatically set to an EtherType of AEFE to indicate the eCPRI protocol.
High precision RTD measurements

The 25Gig eCPRI application provides more precise latency and jitter RTD measure-
ments. In order to enable these measurements:
1 On the Interface GPS/CDMA Receiver setup tab ensure that Enable CDMA or
GPS Receiver is not selected.
2 On the Ethernet setup tab, select the Data field and set the Acterna Payload Ver.
to Version 4.
3 Setup a loopback test (see “Loop Back Testing” on page 283).
4 Select Start Traffic.
5 Round Trip Delay (us) and Packet Jitter (us) results will populate with 1ns
measurement granularity.

Page 72 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
5
Chapter 5 Ethernet and IP Testing
This chapter provides information on testing Ethernet and IP services using the MSAM.
• “About Ethernet and IP testing” on page 74
• “Cable Diagnostics” on page 85
• “Intrusively identifying a remote test access port” on page 87
• “Adjusting the frequency of transmitted optical signals” on page 89
• “Enabling automatic traffic transmission” on page 89
• “Discovering another Viavi test instrument using J-Connect” on page 91
• “Discovering network devices” on page 95
• “Programming JMEPs” on page 97
• “Protocol Analysis” on page 98
• “Layer 1 testing” on page 99
• “Capturing packets for analysis” on page 159
• “Loop back testing” on page 160
• “Inserting errors or pause frames” on page 160
• “Inserting alarms or defects” on page 162
• “Measuring round trip delay or packet jitter” on page 163
• “Measuring one way delay” on page 164
• “Measuring Peak IFG” on page 167
• “OAM service and link layer testing” on page 171
• “MAC-in-MAC testing” on page 178
• “Synchronous Ethernet testing” on page 191
• “Discovering traffic using J-Profiler” on page 192

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 73
About Ethernet and IP testing

If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so, you can use it to provision
Ethernet and IP service, verify end-to-end connectivity, and analyze link performance
by simulating different traffic conditions. Figure 16 illustrates the Main screen when
running an Ethernet application.
Figure 16 MSAM Main screen (Ethernet Terminate Application)
Result Result Result Test

Port Group Category
Menu Bar
Message Bar
Quick Config
Soft
keys
LED Panel
Actions Panel
Features and capabilities

Features and capabilities include the following when testing Ethernet or IP service:
• 10/100/1000 Megabit, 1 Gigabit Ethernet, 10 Gigabit LAN, 10 Gigabit WAN,
40Gigabit Ethernet and 100Gigabit Ethernet testing—Testing on each of these
circuits is supported.
• Viavi Discovery—You can automatically detect other Viavi test equipment on the
network, and determine their services and capabilities. For details, see “Discov-
ering another Viavi test instrument using J-Connect” on page 91.
• Cable diagnostics—You can use the Dual Module Carrier and MSAM to examine
the state of the cables used to transmit 10/100/1000 electrical signals before you
begin testing. For details, see “Cable Diagnostics” on page 85.
• Ping test during Setup—After entering the destination address (during application
Setup or in the Quick Config bar in the Main Menu), the validity of the address
entered can be checked in layer 3+ applications. The ping will be sent using the
currently defined frame encapsulation and will be able to respond despite

Page 74 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
mismatched frames. Ping buttons will appear next to the Destination IP in the
Quick Config bar on the main screen and on the IP/Source Destination Address
page during Setup.
• Automatic traffic transmission—You can optionally set up optical Ethernet, IP,
TCP/UDP, and Fibre Channel Traffic, Multiple Streams, and Triple Play applica-
tions to generate and transmit traffic automatically whenever you turn the laser
on.
• Dual port testing—You can run a dual port test in terminate or through mode from
a 10/100/1000 or 1GigE interface, and observe test results for each port simulta-
neously on the Main screen. Dual port testing requires two SFP or XFP PIMs
(MSAM, CSAM, or 40/100G Transport Module).
• BER testing—You can verify circuit performance by sending BERT patterns over
switched (layer 2) and unswitched (layer 1) networks. You can also configure ATP
payloads carrying a BERT pattern.
• Multiple source MAC addresses—When transmitting a single stream of Layer 2
traffic, you can simulate traffic from multiple sources by assigning a range of MAC
addresses to be carried in the frames transmitted in the stream.
• Layer 2 transparency testing—You can transmit and analyze layer 2 traffic with
CDP, VTP, STP, and R/STP headers to verify that a circuit can support a variety of
control protocols irrespective of the transport method. For details, see “Using
J-Proof to verify layer 2 transparency” on page 136.
• Automated VLAN testing—An automated VLAN test is available that tests a range
of VLANs by transmitting and looping back frames for each VLAN in the range for
a user-specified test period, and then comparing the number of frames trans-
mitted to the number received. For details, see “Automated VLAN tests” on
page 410.
• Layer 3 testing—You can perform end to end tests to verify throughput. You can
also:
– Transmit packets and determine if any are lost when looped back to your
module.
– Filter traffic using layer 3 criteria.
– Measure round trip delay. 10M/100M/1GbE/10GbE, 40G/100G data rates
can utilize ATP version 3 for highly accurate delay measurements.
– Send ping requests and respond to ping requests from another Ethernet
device to verify connectivity.
– Record and observe the route of traffic through the network using the Tracer-
oute application.
– Insert IP checksum errors into the traffic stream.
– Insert Acterna payload errors into the traffic stream.
• J-Profiler traffic explorer—You can use the J-Profiler application to automatically
discover and monitor up to 128 streams of traffic that satisfy your profile criteria on
10/100/1000 electrical, 100M optical, and 1GigE optical circuits. For details, see
“Discovering traffic using J-Profiler” on page 192.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 75
• PPPoE support—If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so, you can
configure your unit to emulate a PPPoE client or server, login to a PPP peer to
establish a PPPoE session, and then transmit IPv4 packets over an Ethernet
circuit for analysis. For details, see “Specifying L3 interface settings” on page 141
and “Configuring MPLS traffic” on page 143.
• IPv6 support—If you purchased the IPv6 Traffic option, you can transmit and
analyze IPv6 traffic using the terminate and monitor/thru applications. When
configuring your test, you can specify the required addresses manually, or you
can use stateless or stateful auto-configuration to assign addresses for you.
• Packet capture and analysis—If your instrument is configured and optioned to do
so, you can use it to capture transmitted and received data, save it on the instru-
ment or to a USB key, and then either send the data to another technician for
analysis, or analyze it yourself using the Wireshark® protocol analyzer (provided
on the instrument). The instrument supports packet capture based on a triggering
event. For details, see “Capturing packets for analysis” on page 6. In addition, if
capturing VoIP packets, the data can by analyzed with the PVA-1000 utility from
Viavi. NOTE: PVA-1000 is used for VoIP analysis only.
• MPLS and VPLS testing—If you purchase the MPLS/VPLS test option, you can
configure your unit to generate, transmit, and analyze MPLS and VPLS encapsu-
lated frames when testing and qualifying core and metro networks. For details,
see “Configuring MPLS over Ethernet tests” on page 83 and “Configuring
Ethernet VPLS tests” on page 82.
• Q-in-Q testing—You can configure, transmit, and analyze traffic carrying SVLAN
and CVLAN tags per IEEE 802.1ad to verify that your network can support and
prioritize traffic for multiple customers without conflicts. You can also specify a
user-defined TPID for the service provider when transmitting and filtering Q-in-Q
encapsulated traffic. For details, see “Configuring Q-in-Q traffic” on page 113.
• MiM testing—If you purchase the MiM testing option, you can transmit and
analyze MAC-in-MAC Ethernet traffic over a PBB (Provider Backbone Bridged)
network to verify end-to-end connectivity, and analyze link performance. For
details, see “MAC-in-MAC testing” on page 178.
• Stacked VLAN—If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so, you can
configure, transmit, and analyze L2 traffic carrying SVLAN and CVLAN tags per
IEEE 802.1ad to verify that your network can support and prioritize traffic for
multiple customers without conflicts. You can also specify a user-defined TPID for
the service provider when transmitting and filtering stacked VLAN encapsulated
traffic. For details, see “Configuring stacked VLAN traffic” on page 113.
• Filters enhanced to include byte pattern filter. The instrument supports filtering on
a 16-byte pattern. For details, see “Filtering traffic using byte pattern criteria” on
page 121
• Link and service layer OAM testing—OAM messages are supported, enabling you
to identify trunk problems so you can initiate a switch to a protection path. When
testing Ethernet First Mile OAM communications, you can loop back an adjacent
node or Ethernet demarcation device (EDD), and then exchange messages with
the node or device to verify that auto-discovery and error notification are func-
tioning properly. For details, see “OAM service and link layer testing” on
page 171.
• Packet jitter testing—You can verify the integrity of triple play services such as
Video and VoIP by qualifying the packet jitter characteristics of Ethernet circuits.
For details, see “Measuring round trip delay or packet jitter” on page 163.

Page 76 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
• OTN testing—If you purchased an instrument configured for OTN testing, you can
generate and transmit 10 Gigabit LAN Ethernet payloads at OTU2 line rates
(11.05G and 11.1G) or 1 Gigabit Ethernet payloads utilizing ODU0 multiplexing
carried in an OTU2 or OTU-1 wrapper over an OTN circuit. If you purchased a
40G/100G High Speed Transport Module configured for OTN testing, you can
generate and transmit Bulk BERT payloads at OTU3 line rates (43.02G) or OTU4
line rates (111.8G) and 100 Gigabit Ethernet payloads utilizing ODU4 multiplexing
carried in an OTU4 wrapper over an OTN circuit. For details, see the T-BERD /
MTS / SC Sonet / SDH, OTN and PDH Testing Manual that shipped with your
• NextGen GFP testing—If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so, you
can use it to transmit and analyze generic framing procedure (GFP) traffic
carrying Ethernet frames over a legacy SONET or SDH circuit, and then run layer
2 and layer 3 Ethernet tests to verify that network performance conforms to all
applicable ITU-T and IEEE standards. For details, see the T-BERD / MTS / SC
Sonet / SDH, OTN and PDH Testing Manual that shipped with your instrument or
upgrade.
• Test Access Management (TAM)—If your instrument is configured and optioned
to do so, you can now use it to remotely log into and provision network elements
such as switches and routers from a Mobility Switching Center (MSC). You can
also use your instrument to emulate a router on the network end of the Ethernet
Transport Service (ETS), run an RFC 2554 script to put a Network Interface
Device (NID) in loop back mode, transmit traffic, then analyze looped back traffic
to determine link characteristics such as throughput and latency. For details, see
“Testing using TAM automation” on page 440 of Chapter 14 “Automated Testing”.
• One way delay measurements—If your instrument is configured and optioned to
do so, you can measure delay in one direction on a circuit. For details, see
“Measuring one way delay” on page 164.
• Sync-E timing- If configured and optioned to do so, the instrument can provide
physical layer timing transport required to guarantee frequency distribution to the
extent necessary for encapsulated signals to meet network performance require-
ments. Transmit capability is available on 100M/1GE/10GE Optical all layer appli-
cations except J-Profiler, IPTV, VoIP, Wirespeed, L1 BERT and thru modes.
Detection is available on the same interfaces as well as 10/100/1000 Electrical
Ethernet applications on MSAMv2, only if a SyncE PIM is installed.
• 100GigE RS-FEC (per IEEE 803bj Clause 91) - If configured and optioned to do
so, the CSAM provides applications designed to test and verify that next-genera-
tion 100GigE interfaces using SR4 interfaces and multimode fiber have been
deployed such that they overcome the inter-symbol interference challenges
caused by dispersion in low-cost optical fibers. The instrument can transmit
correctable or uncorrectable RS-FEC errors, and then measure post-FEC perfor-
mance on the Ethernet/MAC layer using frame loss ratio measurements. The
measurements are provided in a dedicated RS-FEC statistics result category. For
details, see Chapter 6 “25GigE and 100GigE RS-FEC Testing”.
Understanding the graphical user interface

When you configure your module for testing, graphical displays of Ethernet frames and
IP packets are provided on the setup tabs for the application you selected. You can

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 77
specify frame or packet characteristics for transmitted and filtered traffic by selecting
the corresponding field on the graphic, and then entering the value for transmitted or
filtered traffic. Colored fields can be edited; fields in gray can not be modified.
Frame settings
Figure 17 illustrates the frame settings for a layer 2 traffic test, with the Data field
selected.
Figure 17 Frame Settings
For details on each of the settings, see “Specifying Ethernet frame settings” on
page 105 and “Specifying Ethernet filter settings” on page 114.
Packet settings
Figure 18 illustrates the IP packet settings for a layer 3 traffic test.
Figure 18 IP Packet Settings
For details on each of the settings, see “Specifying transmitted IPv4 packet settings” on
page 147 and“Specifying IPv4 filter settings” on page 149

Page 78 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Ethernet and IP test applications

This release supports the layer 2 and layer 3 applications listed in Table 4.
• MiM applications are listed in Table 5 on page 80.
• MPLS-TP applications are listed in Table 7 on page 80.
• PTP/1588 test applications are listed in Table 15 on page 207.
• Layer 4 TCP/UDP applications are listed in Table 18 on page 236 of
Chapter 9 “TCP/UDP Testing”.
• Multiple Streams applications are listed in Table 19 on page 258 of
Chapter 10 “Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing”
• Triple Play applications are listed in Table 21 on page 273 of
Chapter 10 “Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing”.
• Loop back applications are listed in Table 22 on page 289 of Chapter 11 “Loop
Back Testing”.
Table 4 Ethernet and IP applications
40Gig & 100Gig Optical

1 GigE Optical
10 GigE WAN
100M Optical
10 GigE LAN
10/100/1000
Application
Test Mode
Layer 1 PCS Terminate N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X

Monitor/Through N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A X
Layer 1 BERT Terminate N/A N/A X X X N/A
Monitor/Through N/A N/A X X X N/A
Layer 2 Patterns Terminate N/A N/A X X N/A N/A
Layer 2 Traffic Terminate X X X X X X
Monitor X N/A N/A N/A N/A X
Monitor/Through N/A X X X X X
Layer 3 Ping1 Terminate X X X X X X
Layer 3 Traceroute1 Terminate X X X X X X
Layer 3 Traffic1 Terminate X X X X X X
Monitor X N/A N/A N/A N/A X
Monitor/Thru N/A X X X X N/A
1. IPv4 and IPv6 applications are available. IPv4 and IPv6 applications are also available when running layer 3 and layer 4 multiple
streams terminate applications.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 79
MiM test applications

If your instrument is optioned to do so, this release supports the MiM (MAC-in-MAC)
applications listed in Table 5.
Table 5 MiM applications
Interface Application Test Mode

10/100/1000 MiM Traffic Terminate
Monitor
100M Optical MiM Traffic Terminate
Monitor
1GigE Optical MiM Traffic Terminate
Monitor
10GigE LAN MiM Traffic Terminate
Monitor/Through
EoE testing
EoE applilcations are listed in Table 6.
Table 6 EoE applications

1GigE Optical EoE Traffic Terminate
10GigE LAN EoE Traffic Terminate
MPLS-TP test applications

If your instrument is optioned to do so, this release supports the MPLS-TP applications
listed in Table 7.
Table 7 MPLS-TP applications

10/100/1000 Layer 2 MPLS-TP Traffic Terminate
100M Optical Layer 2 MPLS-TP Traffic Terminate
1GigE Optical Layer 2 MPLS-TP Traffic Terminate
10GigE LAN Layer 2 MPLS-TP Traffic Terminate

Page 80 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Configuring applications in Dual Through mode

When configuring applications in Dual Through modes, you must specify test and traffic
settings for each port.
If you are currently running tests using both ports, you must remove one test before
launching a Dual Through mode application.
To configure an application using two ports
1 Launch an application in Dual Through mode.

2 Use the Port Selection soft key to select a port.
3 Configure the test running on the port. The settings you specify will apply only to
the currently selected port.
4 Use the Port Selection soft key to select the second port, then configure the
second test.
When running applications in Dual Through mode, the user interface behaves as
follows:
Quick Config settings—The Quick Config tab located under the Message Bar,
provides key settings required to configure the currently selected Port. Changing a
setting that prompts an automatic restart on one port also restarts the test or script
running on the other port.
LEDs—LEDs are provided for Port 1 and Port 2 (see Figure 16 on page 74).
Action Panel—The Action buttons affect the currently selected port.
Restart Soft key—The Restart soft key affects both ports; therefore, script results will
be reset (and inaccurate) if you press Restart while running a script on one port. If you
are running a script, wait for the script to complete before pressing Restart.
DUAL PORT TEST RESULTS:

Although you can only perform actions on the currently selected port, you can
easily observe test results for both ports without toggling back and forth. To do
so, set the result port in one pane to Port 1, and the result port in a second
pane to Port 2.
Configuring 10 Gigabit Ethernet WAN tests

When you use the instrument to test 10 Gigabit WAN interfaces, you can specify
settings that characterize the SONET or SDH network in addition to the settings used
to characterize the Ethernet data. Essentially, the setup tabs are a combination of those
used to specify SONET or SDH settings, and those used for the Ethernet applications
discussed in this chapter. When configuring the module to test a WAN interface, refer

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 81
to the T-BERD / MTS / SC Sonet / SDH, OTN and PDH Testing Manual that shipped
with your instrument or upgrade for details on each of the SONET/SDH setup tabs.
NOTE:
When configuring the module for WAN testing, default SONET/SDH overhead
values are per IEEE 802.3ae.
Configuring Ethernet VPLS tests

The instrument allows you to configure and transmit layer 2 VPLS traffic (see Figure 19)
by specifying tunnel and virtual circuit label settings.
Figure 19 VPLS network
Figure 20 illustrates generic tunnel and virtual circuit (VC) labels, which together
comprise a VPLS header. Shaded fields are user-configurable.
Figure 20 Generic tunnel and VC labels
When configuring traffic for VPLS testing, be certain to specify labels that have already
been instantiated by routers on the network. For details on specifying VPLS settings for
transmitted traffic, see “Specifying Ethernet frame settings” on page 105. For details on
filtering received VPLS traffic, see “Specifying Ethernet filter settings” on page 114.
VPLS tunnels
In a VPLS network, customer sites are connected to the service provider network (see
Figure 19 on page 82) via PE routers. Each PE router in the network is connected
together using tunnels, and can be connected to any other PE router residing on the
network.

Page 82 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Virtual channels
Each tunnel is comprised of multiple channels which are used to carry different types
of service between the PE routers.
VPLS test applications

Key VPLS applications include:
End-to-end testing of VPLS networks—For this application, you configure your unit
to transmit layer 2 traffic without a VPLS header to a second unit on the far end of the
circuit. The ingress provider edge (PE) router then adds the VPLS header and sends
the encapsulated traffic through the network. The egress PE router removes the tunnel
label. If the VPLS header also carries a VC label, the router forwards the traffic to the
appropriate interface. Finally, the far end unit analyzes the received layer 2 traffic.
PE router emulation—For this application, you configure a unit on the near-end to

emulate an ingress PE router transmitting VPLS encapsulated traffic to a second unit
on the far end. Transmitted traffic is then routed through the VPLS network using the
tunnel label you specified. The egress PE router removes the tunnel label. If the VPLS
header also carries a VC label, the router forwards the traffic to the appropriate inter-
face.
Traffic analysis: monitor mode— For this application, you configure a near-end unit
to transmit layer 2 Ethernet traffic to an ingress PE router. The PE router then adds the
VPLS header, and sends it through the network. Using a second unit, you connect to
the circuit from a port provided by a router, and then monitor and analyze the VPLS
encapsulated traffic.
Traffic analysis: through mode— For this application, you configure a near-end unit
to transmit layer 2 Ethernet traffic to an ingress PE router. The PE router then adds the
VPLS header, and sends it through the network. Using a second unit, you connect to
the circuit at a point between the two routers, monitor and analyze the received VPLS
encapsulated traffic, and then pass the traffic through the unit to transmit it to the next
router on the network.
Configuring MPLS over Ethernet tests

The instrument allows you to transmit layer 3 IP traffic over a MPLS network by speci-
fying MPLS label settings. Figure 21 illustrates a generic MPLS header. Shaded fields
are user-configurable.
Figure 21 Generic MPLS header
When configuring traffic for MPLS testing, be certain to specify labels that have already
been instantiated by routers on the network. For details on specifying MPLS settings

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 83
for transmitted traffic, see “Specifying Ethernet frame settings” on page 105. For details
on filtering received MPLS traffic, see “Specifying Ethernet filter settings” on page 114.
Key MPLS test applications include:
End-to-end testing of MPLS networks—For this application, you configure your unit
to transmit layer 3 traffic without MPLS labels to a second unit on the far end of the
circuit. The ingress provider edge (PE) router then adds the MPLS header and sends
the encapsulated packet through the network. The egress PE router removes the
MPLS header, and then forwards the data to a second unit on the far end. The far end
unit then analyzes the layer 3 traffic.
PE router to CE router emulation—For this application, you configure a unit on the

near-end to emulate an ingress PE router transmitting MPLS encapsulated traffic to a
second unit on the far end. The far end unit is configured to emulate a customer edge
(CE) router. If the network uses routers which do not use ARP, you may also need to
specify the MAC address of the PE router that your near-end unit is connected to.
Transmitted traffic is then routed through the MPLS network using the MPLS header
settings you specified. The egress PE router removes the MPLS header, and then
forwards the layer 3 IP traffic to the far end unit (which is emulating a CE router) for layer
3 analysis.
PE router to PE router emulation—For this application, you configure a unit on the

near-end to emulate an ingress PE router transmitting MPLS encapsulated traffic to a
second unit on the far end. The far end unit is configured to emulate an egress PE
router. If the network uses routers which do not use ARP, you may also need to specify
the MAC address of the PE router that your near-end unit is connected to. Transmitted
traffic is then routed through the MPLS network using the MPLS header settings you
specified. The far end unit emulating the egress PE router removes the MPLS header,
and analyzes the layer 3 IP traffic.
Core router testing—For this application, you configure a unit on the near-end to
emulate an ingress PE router, which then transmits MPLS encapsulated traffic to a core
router on the MPLS network. Using the label you specified for the traffic originated by
the near-end unit, the core router forwards the traffic to a second far end unit, which is
configured to emulate another router in the core of the network. The far end unit then
analyzes received traffic (based on the MPLS filter criteria you specified) to determine
the characteristics of the intermediary core router.
Packet analysis: monitor mode— For this application, you configure a near-end unit
to transmit layer 3 IP traffic to a ingress PE router. The PE router then adds the MPLS
header, and sends it through the network. Using a second unit, you connect to the
circuit from a port provided by a core router, and then monitor and analyze the MPLS
encapsulated traffic.
Packet analysis: through mode— For this application, configure a near-end unit to
transmit layer 3 traffic to a ingress PE router. The PE router then adds the MPLS
header, and sends it through the network. Using a second unit, you connect to the
circuit between two routers, monitor and analyze the received MPLS encapsulated
traffic, and then pass the traffic through the unit to transmit it to the next router on the
network.

Page 84 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Cable Diagnostics
Configuring IPv4 and IPv6 tests

If you purchased the IPv6 option, applications are provided that allow you to transmit
and analyze either IPv4 or IPv6 traffic. Table 8 lists the key differences between the
applications:
Table 8 IPv4 and IPv6 applications
Feature IPv4 IPv6

Source IP Configura- – In IPoE mode, uses DHCP or Uses one of the following:
tion manual configuration. – Stateful Auto-configuration
– In PPPoE mode, uses the cli- (also known as DHCPV6)
ent-server PPPoE login process. – Stateless
For details, see “Configuring Auto-configuration
MPLS traffic” on page 143. – Manual configuration
Source IP Address A single IP address is assigned to Two IP addresses are assigned:
the interface transmitting IP traffic. – Link-local address. this source
address is assigned locally,
and must always go through
duplicate address detection
(DAD).
– Global address. This second
source address is not used
locally; it is used to transmit
traffic beyond the router.
Automatic MAC Uses ARP Uses Neighbor Solicitation
Address Resolution
Traffic Uses one of the following: Uses the following:
prioritization – Layer 2 VLAN or Q-in-Q encap- – VLAN or Q-in-Q encapsulation.
sulation. – Flow labels. The instrument
– Layer 3 MPLS encapsulation allows you to configure traffic
which uses labels and tunnel pri- with flow labels simply to deter-
orities. mine whether routers on the
circuit support the labels.
– MPLS encapsulation is not
supported.
IP Header Check- Checksum error insertion sup- Does not use checksums.
sums ported.
Error Messages ICMPv4 messages appear. ICMPv6 messages appear.
Cable Diagnostics
Before testing 10/100/1000 electrical Ethernet, IP (IPoE), or TCP/UDP circuits, you can
use the instrument to examine the state of the cables used to transmit electrical signals.
Typically this involves out-of-service testing to determine the link status, the pair status
of each MDI or MDI-X pair, the pair assignments for 1000M links, the polarity for each
MDI pair, and the pair skew. You can also use the instrument to verify whether or not

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 85
Cable Diagnostics
Power over Ethernet (PoE) service is available on the link (per IEEE 802.3af). Finally,
if the link is inactive, you can use the instrument to determine the nature of the fault.
Cable diagnostics should not be run in PPPoE Data Mode when running layer 3 test
applications.
Running cable diagnostics

Running cable diagnostics involves connecting a cable to the instrument test port,
launching the Cable Diagnostics tool, and observing the provided measurements.
Cable Diagnostics tests are included in Job Manager and can be added to a test plan.
To run cable diagnostics
1 If you haven’t already done so, launch a 10/100/1000 electrical Ethernet applica-
tion, and verify that Auto-negotiation is turned ON.
2 Select the Toolkit soft key, and then select the Cable Diagnostics tool. You can
alternatively launch the tool from the Select Test menu.
The Cable Diagnostics screen appears (see Figure 22).
Figure 22 Cable Diagnostics screen
1 Distance Test. This test measures the length of a cable. To run the test,
a Plug one end of the cable into your test port. The other end has to remain
disconnected.
b Click the Distance Test button. The test runs for a few seconds and then
displays the measurements in the Fault Type and Distance columns in the
Result table.

Page 86 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Intrusively identifying a remote test access port
2 Pair Test. This test measures the Skew, Polarity, and Pair of a cable. To run the
test,
a Plug the other end of the cable into another port, or the Wiremap port of a
Companion Cable Tester.
b Click the Pair Test button. The test runs for a few seconds and then displays
the measurements in the Skew, Polarity, and Pair columns in the Result
table.
3 Shield Test. (This test is only available on Port 1 of the T-BERD/MTS 5882. This
test verifies that the cable is properly shielded. To run the test,
a Plug the other end of the cable into the Shield Test port of a Companion
Cable Tester.
b Click the Shield Test button. The test runs for a few seconds and then
displays a Pass verdict if the cable is properly shielded; otherwise a Fail
verdict is displayed.
4 The Reset Test button will clear all measurements from the result table and all
test verdicts.
5 Optionally, you can disable the Shield Test by clearing the corresponding check
box.
Cable diagnostics are complete.
Viewing cable measurements

Cable measurements appear automatically on For detailed descriptions of the
measurements, see “Cable Diagnostic results” on page 490.
Intrusively identifying a remote test access port

Using the Link Connectivity Test, you can determine which port on the hub, switch, or
router is being used. This is useful when one technician is troubleshooting and the test
access port is in a different physical location than the switch.
ALERT: LOSS OF DATA
This is an intrusive test. It temporarily brings the link down. This action disrupts
signal and link. Please save any application results desired.
NOTE:
This test is available on 5800v2 and CSAM only. It is not available when using
a copper cable SFP.
To test link connectivity

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 87
Skew Injection
2 Verify that you are generating traffic or the laser has been turned on.
3 Select the Toolkit soft key, and then select the Link Connectivity Test tool.
The Link Connectivity Test window opens.
a Specify the desired Link Up and Link Down durations and the number of link
toggles.
b Press the Start Toggling Link soft button to begin Link Connectivity testing.
4 The link connectivity test will run until the defined parameters of the test have
been achieved or the Stop Toggling Link soft button has been pushed. Traffic may
be started while link connectivity test is enabled. Frames will be sent while the link
is present and shall be reactivated when the test concludes.
5 Go to the location of the hub, switch, or router and observe the link activity LEDs.
The port that is connected to the instrument will blink according to the parameters
that you specified.
6 This action disrupts the signal and link. Please save any application results
desired.
Skew Injection
For all 40G and 100G applications, you can specify bit-level static skew injection at the
lane level and specify the threshold of excess static skew. On the CSAM, skew injection
is available on 40G applications.
To inject skew
1 Using the Test Menu or Quick Launch screen, select the interface and test appli-
cation for the signal, rate, and payload being tested. Refer to Table 4 on page 79
through Table 5 on page 80 for a list of layer 2 and layer 3 applications. Table 18
on page 236 lists layer 4 applications.
3 On the interface tab, select the Bit Skew Injection subtab.
4 Do one of the following:
– If using the CSAM, specify the amount of skew (in bits) for each Virtual Lane
(0-3200).
– If using the 40G/100 module, specify the amount of skew (in bits) for each
Physical Lane to be tested (0-64000).
When the number of bits is entered for a lane, the Injected Skew (in ns) will be
calculated for the current configuration. To return all lane skew settings to 0, press
the Default button.
5 Select the Signal subtab. In the Skew Alarm frame, specify the threshold (in ns)
for which the unit should report a Static Skew alarm.
6 Select the Results soft key to return to the Main screen, or select another tab to
specify additional test settings.

Page 88 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Adjusting the frequency of transmitted optical signals
Skew injection is set.
Adjusting the frequency of transmitted optical signals

If your unit is configured and optioned to do so, you can adjust the frequency of trans-
mitted optical signals in 1 PPM increments. Before adjusting the frequency, consider
the following:
• If you are transmitting traffic to another unit placed in LLB mode, if you increase
the frequency you may overrun the LLB unit. As a result, the transmitting unit will
report lost frames and out of sequence frames in the traffic received from the LLB
unit.
• Increasing the frequency may also overrun certain network devices on the circuit
you are testing.
To adjust the frequency
select the test application for the interface you are testing. Refer to Table 4 on
page 79 through Table 5 on page 80 for a list of layer 2 and layer 3 applications.
Table 18 on page 236 lists layer 4 applications.
2 Connect the module to the circuit.
4 Select the Laser action bar, and then do one of the following:
– To increase the frequency by 1 PPM, press Freq Offset +1.
– To decrease the frequency by 1 PPM, press Freq Offset -1.
– You increase or decrease the frequency up to 100 PPM.
5 On the transmitting unit, observe the values for the following results in the Inter-
face result group, Signal category:
– Tx Freq Max Deviation (ppm)
– Tx Frequency Deviation (ppm)
6 On the receiving unit, verify that the values for the following results match the
transmitted frequency values.
– Rx Freq Max Deviation (ppm)
– Rx Frequency Deviation (ppm)
The frequency was adjusted.
Enabling automatic traffic transmission

You can optionally set up Ethernet LAN, IP, TCP/UDP, and Fibre Channel test applica-
tions to generate and transmit traffic automatically whenever you turn the laser on (for
optical applications).

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 89
Enabling automatic traffic transmission
Prerequisites for traffic transmission

If you enable automatic traffic generated, traffic is transmitted after the following occurs:
• You turn the laser ON (using the Laser ON action button).
• A signal is acquired.
• Synchronization is acquired.
• A link is established.
• If you are running a layer 3 (IP) application and ARP is enabled, ARP must be
successful. If ARP is not enabled, the destination IP address must be available.
• If you are running a Fibre Channel application, the login process must be
complete.
As always, you can turn traffic off at any time using the Stop Traffic action button.
Issues to consider
Consider the following issues and behavior before enabling automatic traffic genera-
tion:
• This is not a global setting. This setting does not affect all Ethernet LAN, IP,
TCP/UDP, and Fibre Channel applications; you must enable automatic traffic
generation for each individual application. After you enable the setting for a partic-
ular application, it will remain enabled until you disable it.
• Changing setups while tests are running. Your unit is designed to handle traffic
transmission appropriately when you change key setups while a test is running. In
some instances, if you change key setups while running a test, traffic stops
temporarily (as a result of the changed setup), and then starts again. In other
instances, changing a setup stops traffic entirely until you actively start it again.
This is still the case when automatic traffic generation is enabled. If you change a
setup that causes the unit to stop transmitting traffic entirely, you must actively
start it again by pressing the Start Traffic action button.
• Loop back testing. Ensure that your unit is not placed in loop back mode by veri-
fying that the LLB action button is gray. If you intend to issue a command to loop
up another unit, make certain automatic traffic generation is not enabled on the far
end unit. If it is not disabled, the far end unit will not respond to the loop up
command.
Issues specific to certain applications are explained in the associated procedures

provided in this chapter.
Enabling the feature
To enable automatic traffic generation
1 Using the Test menu, launch the test application for the optical interface you are
about to test.

Page 90 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Discovering another Viavi test instrument using J-Connect
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then do the following:

a Select the Interface tab.
b Select the Physical Layer sub-tab.
c Set Auto-start traffic when laser turned on to Yes.
Traffic will be transmitted after you turn the laser on and the criteria listed in “Prerequi-
sites for traffic transmission” on page 90 is satisfied.

When testing using an MSAM, you can automatically detect other Viavi test instruments
on the same subnet and determine their capabilities.You can then optionally configure
key parameters for your test automatically based on a discovered instrument’s settings.
NOTE:
The J-Connect feature is not available when using a 40G/100G High Speed
Transport Module.
When your instrument discovers the other instruments on the subnet, it is simply
providing a snapshot of the information available for the instruments at that current
time. If someone changes an instrument’s IP address, or disconnects an instrument
from the circuit, this will not be reflected in the snapshot. To ensure that you have accu-
rate data, you should refresh the display periodically. The instruments must be on the
same VLAN ID and ether types.
The J-Connect feature is not available when testing using the Transport Module, or
when running MAC-in-MAC, multiple stream, IPv6, IP Video, or Triple Play applications.
Discoverable instruments
Discoverable test instruments include:
• The T-BERD ⁄ MTS 8000, 6000A, and 5800
• The T-BERD/MTS 8000 Transport Module
• The T-BERD/MTS 6000A MSAM
• HSTs with Ethernet SIMs
Prerequisites
To be discoverable, Viavi test instruments must:
• Run a software version that supports the J-Connect feature.
• Be configured to be discoverable.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 91
• Have a unique source IP address. Viavi test instruments of the same type (for
example, MSAMs) ship from the factory with the same default source IP address.
If you want to discover the instrument on the subnet, be certain to specify a
different source IP address.
On the transmitter side, destination addresses and port numbers can be discovered.
On the receiver side, source addresses and port numbers can be discovered. If you
want to use a discovered instrument’s MAC and IP addresses or port numbers to
configure the settings on your instrument, verify the following:
• In the Ethernet menu, verify that the Destination Type is Unicast.
• In the Ethernet Filter, verify that the Source Type is Unicast.
• In the IP Filter, verify that the filter is enabled, and that the Source IP setting is
checked.
• In the TCP/UDP Filter, verify that the filter is enabled, and that the service type for
the source port is User Defined.
• Verify that you are not transmitting traffic.
• If you want to use the discovered MAC address as the destination address, turn
ARP off if you are running a layer 3 or layer 4 application.
Discovering an instrument
To discover another Viavi test instrument
1 Before testing, ensure that instruments on the subnet are discoverable by doing
the following for each:
a Launch a single-stream IPv4 terminate application (see “Step 1: Selecting a
test application” on page 3).
b On the Main screen, above the result panes, select the J-Connect tab, and
then verify that the Make this unit discoverable setting is selected.
c Verify that a different source IP address is assigned to each instrument. To
observe the IP settings used for remote connections and the J-Connect
feature, if you are running a layer 2 application, go to the Network Visibility
sub-tab (on the Interface set up tab). If you are running a layer 3 or layer 4
application, the source IP address appears on the IP setup tab. This is also
the IP address that a remote instrument must use to connect to the instru-
ment when running the Asymmetric RFC 2544 test.
2 Connect your instrument to the circuit, and then do the following:
a Launch a single-stream layer 2, layer 3 (IPv4), layer 3 PING, or
layer 4 terminate application.
b Verify that the Sync Acquired and Link Active LEDs are illuminated, indicating
that an active link is established.
3 Verify that you are not running a timed test on any port.
4 If you haven’t already done so, select the J-Connect tab on the Main screen, then
select Discover Units.

Page 92 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
A message appears asking you to wait while the instrument discovers devices.
If the instrument discovered other test instruments, their unit identifiers appear on the
Discovered Devices screen.
If the instrument does not discover any other test instruments, a message appears
stating that no devices were discovered, and instructing you to press Refresh to start
the process again.
NOTE:
The J-Connect feature is also available when specifying destination MAC or IP
addresses, or port numbers for transmitted traffic, or source MAC or IP
addresses, or port numbers for filtered traffic.
About the Refresh key

The Refresh key appears whenever the Discovered Devices screen is displayed. Use
the button to rediscover devices on the subnet (for example, if you suspect a discov-
ered device is no longer connected to the circuit).
Sorting discovered instruments

By default, discovered instruments are listed by their unit identifiers. You can optionally
sort them by serial number, application name, MAC, or IP address.
To sort discovered instruments
1 Discover the instruments.

2 On the Discovered Devices screen, select the Display By ... drop down list.
3 Select the sort key.
The instruments are sorted using the new key.
The application names that appear on the screen are abbreviated due to space
constraints. Refer to Table 9 for the application name as it is typically used.
Table 9 Discovered application names
Discovered Name Application Name

TermEth100ML2Loopback 100M Optical Eth Layer 2 Loopback Term
TermEth100ML2Traffic 100M Optical Eth Layer 2 Traffic Term
TermEth100ML3Loopback 100M Optical Eth Layer 3 Loopback
TermEth100ML3Ping 100M Optical Eth Layer 3 Ping Term
TermEth100ML4Loopback 100M Optical Eth Layer 4 Loopback

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 93
Table 9 Discovered application names (Continued)
Discovered Name Application Name

TermEth10GL2Loopback 10GigE LAN Layer 2 Loopback
TermEth10GL2Traffic 10GigE LAN Layer 2 Traffic Term
TermEth10GL3Ping 10GigE LAN Layer 3 Ping Term
TermEth10ML2Loopback 10/100/1000 Eth Layer 2 Loopback
TermEth10ML2Traffic 10/100/1000 Eth Layer 2 Traffic Term
TermEth10ML3Ping 10/100/1000 Eth Layer 3 Ping Term
TermEth1GL2Loopback 1GigE Layer 2 Loopback
TermEth1GL2Patterns 1GigE Layer 2 Patterns Term
TermEth1GL2Traffic 1GigE Layer 2 Traffic Term
TermEth1GL3Ping 1GigE Layer 3 Ping Term
TermOc192Sts192cEthL2Loopback 10GigE WAN OC-192c Layer 2 Loopback
TermOc192Sts192cEthL2Traffic 10GigE WAN OC-192c Layer 2 Traffic Term
TermOc192Sts192cEthL3Loopback 10GigE WAN OC-192c Layer 3 Loopback
TermOc192Sts192cEthL3Ping 10GigE WAN OC-192c Layer 3 Ping Term
TermOc192Sts192cEthL3Traffic 10GigE WAN OC-192c Layer 3 Traffic Term
TermStm64Au464cVc464cEthL2Loopback 10GigE WAN STM-64 Layer 2 Loopback
TermStm64Au464cVc464cEthL2Traffic 10GigE WAN STM-64 Layer 2 Traffic Term
TermStm64Au464cVc464cEthL3Loopback 10GigE WAN STM-64 Layer 3 Loopback
TermStm64Au464cVc464cEthL3Ping 10GigE WAN STM-64 Layer 3 Ping Term
TermStm64Au464cVc464cEthL3Traffic 10GigE WAN STM-64 Layer 3 Traffic Term

Page 94 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Discovering network devices
Observing details for an instrument

After discovering the instruments, you can observe details for a particular instrument,
and indicate whether or not you want to use the discovered instrument’s MAC and IP
address, and port number (if applicable) when you configure your instrument.
To observe details for a discovered instrument
1 Select the instrument on the Discovered Devices screen.

The Device Details screen appears to the right.
2 If you want to automatically apply the discovered instrument’s MAC or IP address,
or port number to your instrument’s configuration, do the following:
a To use the discovered instrument’s MAC or IP address, or port number as the
destination MAC or IP address, or port number for your transmitted traffic,
highlight the check box under Tx, and then select Configure Checked
Item(s).
b To filter received traffic using the discovered instrument’s source MAC or IP
address, or port number, highlight the check box under Rx, and then select
Configure Checked Item(s).
3 Press Close to return to the previous screen.
Details were displayed, and your instrument is configured based on the settings you
selected.
NOTE:
If no MAC address was discovered, go to the Ethernet setup tab, change the
destination type to Unicast, and then re-discover the instruments.

The Network Discovery test is used to identify nodes and devices on the local network
It is typically done to gain knowledge of accessible devices prior to analysis and debug.
It provides information about what kinds of devices are available for access, and infor-
mation about how the network is configured.
To discover network devices
select the Traffic test application for the interface you are testing. Refer to Table 4
on page 79 through Table 5 on page 80 for a list of layer 2 and layer 3 applica-
tions. Table 18 on page 236 lists layer 4 applications.
2 Select the Toolkit soft key, and then select the Network Discovery tool.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 95
3 Select the Settings button, and then specify the following settings.
Setting Description
Mode Specify whether the discovery is active or passive.If test-
ing layer 2, this cannot be changed, it is always passive
MAC Source Type Specify the MAC address to use - the factory default or a
user defined address.
User Defined If the MAC source is user defined address, specify the
MAC user defined MAC address
Source IP Type Specify the source of the IP address (Static or DHCP). If
testing layer 2, this item is not available.
Source IP If the IP Type is Static, specify the local IP address.
Default Gateway If the IP Type is Static, specify the local gateway.
Subnet Mask If the IP Type is Static, specify the local subnet mask.
DNS Type Indicates where to get the DNS address. If IP Type is
Static, use Static; if DHCP, use Auto.
Primary DNS If the DNS Type is Static, specify the IP address of the pri-
mary DNS server
Secondary DNS If the DNS Type is Static, specify the IP address of the
secondary DNS server
4 Start the discovery.

The test reports the discovered devices. This could include all or only a few of the
following:
• Infrastructure:
– IP Networks - Listing of subnets discovered and count of devices discovered
per subnet.
– Domains - Listing of domains discovered (NetBIOS) and count of devices
discovered per domain.
– VLANs - Listing of VLAN IDs discovered, priorities of the discovered VLANs,
and count of devices per VLAN.
• Core
– Routers - Listing of the IPs discovered and a list of the MACs discovered.
• Distribution
– Switches - Listing of switches discovered and the services provided by the
switch.
• Access
– Hosts - Name of the devices as known to the DNS, the IP address of the
device, MAC address of the device, and the name of the device as known to
NetBIOS.
– Servers - Name of the devices as known to the DNS, the IP address of the
device, MAC address of the device, the name of the device as known to
NetBIOS, and the services offered by the device.

Page 96 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Programming JMEPs
5 Optional. To save the test results, select Report and then specify a file name for
the report and the file format.
You have discovered network devices.
Programming JMEPs
JMEPs (JDSU Micro Ethernet Probes) can be programmed for applications such as:
• programming the IPv4 or IPv6 IP address of the JMEP so that in can be used to
loop back Layer 3 Ethernet traffic to any T-BERD/MTS, HST or SmartClass
device.
• programming the loop up and loop down functionality of the network and optical
ports of a JMEP
To program a JMEP
1 Launch an L2 or L3 1GigE application.

2 Insert a JMEP into the SFP slot associated with the application
3 Navigate to the SFP connector page (Setup>Interface>Connector).
If a valid JMEP is detected, a “Configure JMEP” button appears.
4 Select “Configure JMEP” to launch the SFProbe Programmer program.

5 Select Read Device to get a list of the current settings of the device.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 97
Protocol Analysis
6 To change any of the settings, do the following:

a Find the field you wish to edit, and then click in the right column Write
Values. Depending on the selected field, a dropdown menu appears or a
keypad appears.
b Select or enter the value for the field. For more information on the values for
each field, refer to the SFProbe Programmer help or documentation.
c Repeat steps a and b for each field, as needed.
d Select Write Device to program the settings onto the device.
7 Optional. If you wish to set the values back to the factory settings, select Factory
Settings.
8 Select the Exit icon in the upper right.
Protocol Analysis
The Protocol Analysis utility automates the capture/decode process by passively
detecting a packet for a selected protocol and then providing the user relevant informa-
tion decoded from the packet.
This utility detects and decodes port data in LAN networks configured using the Cisco
Discovery Protocol (CDP) or the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP). Protocol Anal-
ysis can be used to recover the switch and port data supplied during configuration to
determine port availability on a network.
To analyze protocol
select a Traffic Monitor test application for the interface you are testing. Refer to
Table 4 on page 79 for a list of layer 2 and layer 3 applications.
NOTE:
The Protocol Analysis utility is provided in all Layer 2 and Layer 3 Ethernet traf-
fic monitoring applications from 10/100/1000 to 100GigE interfaces (10GigE
WAN excluded).
2 Select the Toolkit soft key, and then select the Protocol Analysis.
3 Select the Protocol to Analyze - CDP or LLDP.
4 To initiate the protocol analysis, click the Start Analysis button.

Page 98 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Layer 1 testing
The utility displays the configured parameters of the ports analyzed:

– CDP:
- Device Identifier - Name specified for the device containing the port.
- Port Identifier - Name specified for the port.
- VLAN ID - Name specified for the VLAN into which the port has been
configured.
- Source MAC address - MAC address of the device IP subnet address.
- IP subnet address - IP subnet address into which the device containing
the port has been configured.
– LLDP:
- Chassis identifier - Name specified for the chassis containing the port.
- Port identifier - Name specified for the port.
- Time to Live - Duration of the LLDP advertisement value.
- Source MAC (with optional VLAN identifier) - MAC address of the device
IP subnet address and (optional) specified name for the VLAN into which
the port has been configured.
- Management IP address - The IP address for the management port of
the device.
- MAU Type - Medium Attachment Unit Type - The physical component
type used to transmit/receive on the port identified.
5 Optional. To save the test results, select Export Text File and then accept the
given filename or click the Rename button and specify a file name for the report,
to be saved in the Reports subdirectory, and select OK twice.
You have completed protocol analysis.
Layer 1 testing
If your instrument is optioned and configured to do so, when testing 1 Gigabit,
10 Gigabit LAN, 10 Gigabit WAN, or 100 Gigabit Ethernet service, you can generate
and receive layer 1 test patterns, and monitor and analyze received signals. When
testing 100 Gigabit Ethernet service, you can also perform RS-FEC testing to detect
and correct bit errors to optimize transmission distance (for details, see
Chapter 6 “25GigE and 100GigE RS-FEC Testing”).
BER testing
Use the layer 1 BERT terminate application to generate and receive layer 1 test
patterns. Use the layer 1 BERT monitor application to analyze the received signal, and
then pass the signal bit-for-bit through the unit’s transmitter (if you select Connect Rx
to Tx).
For detailed descriptions of available patterns, refer to the following specifications:

• 100 Gigabit Ethernet patterns — IEEE 802.3ba-2010

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 99
Layer 1 testing
• 10 Gigabit Ethernet patterns — IEEE 802.3ae-2002, Sections 49.2.8, 49.2.12,

and 52.9.1.
• 1 Gigabit Ethernet MF, LF, and HF patterns — IEEE 802.3, 2000 Edition, Annex
26A.
• 1 Gigabit Ethernet RDPAT, JTPAT, and SNPAT patterns — NCITS TR-25-1999
specifications.
Transmitting and analyzing layer 1 test patterns
NOTE: Changing BERT patterns

If you change a BERT pattern during the course of your test, be certain to press
the Restart soft key to ensure that you regain pattern sync.
To BER test layer 1
select the Layer 1 BERT terminate application for the circuit you are testing. For
PCS BERT testing go to step 4.
3 Select the Pattern tab, and then do the following:
a Specify the TX Pattern.
b If you wish to do so, check the box for Use same pattern for Tx and Rx and
then specify a Tx pattern. If using the Delay pattern, the box should be
checked (Tx=Rx).
If the check box for Use same pattern for Tx and Rx is not checked, select
an Rx Pattern and a Tx Pattern.
4 Connect the test instruments to the circuit.
5 On both instruments, if you are testing an optical interface, select the Laser
button.
6 On both instruments, verify that the green Signal Present and Sync Acquired
LEDs are illuminated. If using the Delay pattern, only the Signal Present LED
appears (Sync Acquired is not used). For PCS BERT testing go to step 8.
7 On both instruments, do the following:
a If you are testing a 1GigE optical circuit, select the Actions tab, and then
press the Start BERT Pattern button. This is not necessary if you are using
the Delay pattern or testing a 10GigE LAN or WAN circuit.
b Verify that the green L1 Pattern Sync LED illuminates. If you are testing a
1GigE optical circuit, and the LED is not illuminated, stop transmitting the
pattern from the other instrument, and then transmit it again. The LED will illu-
minate.
8 At a minimum, observe the test results in the following categories:
– Summary
– Error Stats

Page 100 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Layer 2 testing
Layer 1 BER testing is complete.
When running the L1 BERT application, your LEDs may indicate that you have L1
Pattern Sync without word sync. The word sync status is indicated on your unit using
a red Sync Acquired LED (if word sync was obtained, then lost), or an extinguished
LED (if word sync was never obtained since starting your test). This is usually due to a
temporary loss of signal or word sync when receiving an L1 pattern that does not
contain Ethernet compliant link characters (for example, IDLE). To resolve this, stop
transmitting the L1 pattern momentarily to allow the receiver to regain sync, and then
begin transmitting the pattern again. The exception is when using the Delay using any
pattern other than Delay.
If this occurs, be certain to determine why the signal or word sync was lost temporarily.
Monitoring layer 1 BERT
NOTE:
If you are monitoring traffic on an optical circuit, be certain to turn the laser on
using the Laser button on the Main screen.
To monitor layer 1 BERT
1 Using the Test Menu or Quick Launch screen, select the Layer 1 BERT monitor/
through test application for the interface you are testing.For PCS BERT testing go
to step 4.
2 To specify the BER pattern for the traffic you are monitoring, select the Setup soft
key, select the Pattern tab, and then select the Rx Pattern.
6 Verify that the green Signal Present LED is illuminated. For PCS BERT testing go
to step 8.
7 Select Connect Rx to Tx to pass the received pattern through to the transmitter.
– Summary
– Error Stats
Monitoring layer 1 BERT is complete.
Layer 2 testing
Using the instrument, you can transmit, monitor, and analyze layer 2 Ethernet traffic.
Step-by-step instructions are provided in this section for the following:
• “Specifying interface settings” on page 102

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 101
Layer 2 testing
• “Specifying Ethernet frame settings” on page 105

• “Specifying Ethernet filter settings” on page 114
• “Specifying traffic load settings” on page 123
• “Transmitting and analyzing layer 2 traffic” on page 128
• “Transmitting and analyzing layer 2 patterns” on page 129
• “Monitoring layer 2 traffic” on page 130
• “Transmitting and analyzing layer 2 MPLS-TP, T-MPLS or MPLS traffic” on
page 131
• “Using J-Proof to verify layer 2 transparency” on page 136
NOTE:
If during the course of testing you change the frame length (or settings that
impact the calculated frame length) while the unit is already transmitting traffic,
the unit resets your test results, but some residual frames of the old length may
be counted because they are already in the traffic stream.
Specifying interface settings

Before you transmit traffic, you can specify interface settings which:
• Indicate which SFP jack you are using (if you are monitoring traffic on a 1 GigE
circuit, and your unit is equipped with SFP jacks).
• Specify the transmitted wavelength (if you are monitoring traffic on an 10 Gigabit
Ethernet circuit, and your unit is equipped with 850 nm, 1310 nm, and 1550 nm
connectors).
• Turn flow control off to ignore pause frames sent to the instrument by its Ethernet
link partner, or on if you want your unit to respond to received pause frames.
• Specify the pause quanta for transmitted pause frames. If you are specifying inter-
face settings for an IP Video application, pause frames can not be transmitted;
therefore, this setting does not appear on the Physical Layer sub-tab.
• Specify the speed and duplex settings for 10/100/1000 Ethernet traffic.
• Turn auto-negotiation for 10/100/1000 or 1 Gigabit Ethernet optical circuits on to
tell the instrument to negotiate its capabilities with another Ethernet device before
transmitting idle traffic. If you need to validate the auto-negotiation capabilities of
the device you are negotiating with, you can change each of the module’s default
capabilities.
NOTE:
For 10/100/1000 Ethernet, if you turn auto-negotiation ON, and the Duplex set-
ting is FULL, flow control is also ON by default. The module also advertises that
it is capable of transmitting and receiving pause frames. If you turn auto-negoti-
ation OFF, flow control is user-configurable.
If you turn auto-negotiation OFF, you must use a cross-over cable to connect to
the circuit.

Page 102 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Layer 2 testing
• Specify the source of the reference Signal Clock.

– Internal - where synchronization with incoming signal is not necessary
(default).
– Recovered - from timing signals embedded in incoming signal (Sync-E).
– External - stable reference signal input into connectors on the interface
panel.
To specify interface settings
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the Interface tab.
3 View the Connector sub-tab. If multiple connectors are installed, select the unit to
which the current setup applies.
4 Select the Signal sub-tab-
– If you have an older chassis, or if you selected a 10Gigabit Ethernet applica-
tion, specify the wavelength. If your module only supports one wavelength
(e.g., 850 nm, 1310 nm or 1550 nm), the wavelength settings on the Main
screen and Interface tab are disabled.
– If Tx Signal Clock is active (Enable Synchronous Ethernet checked on Phys-
ical Layer tab), select the Clock Source (not applicable to the MSAM v1 or
5800 units).
– For Internal mode, if latency compensation is required, enter the desired
internal frequency offset.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 103
Layer 2 testing
5 Select the Physical Layer sub-tab, and then specify the following settings:
Interface Settings
10/100/1000 – Auto Negotiation. If you want to negotiate capabilities with another switch,
select On; otherwise, select Off. Auto Negotiation is always On when your
unit is configured to test a 1000 BaseT interface.
– Pause Length (Quanta). Select the field to enter the quanta to be carried by
transmitted pause frames. To determine the pause duration, the receiving
device performs the following calculation:
10 Mbps electrical: Quanta x 51.2 ms
100 Mbps electrical: Quanta x 5.12 ms
1000 Mbps electrical: Quanta x 512 ns
– 10BaseTX FDX/HDX.
100BaseTX FDX/HDX
1000BaseTX FDX/HDX
Select Yes if you want to advertise that the module is capable of full-duplex
or half-duplex transmission for each rate; otherwise, select No. These set-
tings only appear if auto negotiation is On.
– Flow Control. If auto negotiation is OFF, select On if you want the module to
adjust the transmitted bandwidth when it receives pause frames, or Off to
ignore pause frames.
– Duplex. If auto negotiation is off, specify Half or Full duplex transmission.
– Speed (Mbps). If auto negotiation is off, specify 10 (10 Mbps) or 100 (100
Mbps) as the rate for the link. This setting only appears if auto negotiation is
Off.
1 Gigabit – Auto Negotiation. If you want to negotiate capabilities with another switch,
select On; otherwise, select Off.
– FDX Capable/HDX Capable. By default, the module advertises it is capable
of full and half-duplex transmission (Yes). If you need to advertise that it is
not capable, select No. This setting only appears if auto negotiation is On.
– Pause Capable. By default, the module advertises it is capable of transmit-
ting and interpreting received pause frames (Both). If you need to change
the default capabilities, select Neither, Tx Only, or Rx Only. This setting
only appears if auto negotiation is On.
– Flow Control. Select On if you want the module to adjust the transmitted
bandwidth when it receives pause frames, or Off to ignore pause frames.
This setting only appears if auto negotiation is Off.
1GigE optical: Quanta x 512 ns
10 Gigabit – Flow Control. Select On if you want the module to adjust the transmitted
LAN bandwidth when it receives pause frames, or Off to ignore pause frames.
10 Gigabit – Pause Length (Quanta). Select the field to enter the quanta to be carried by
WAN transmitted pause frames. To determine the pause duration, the receiving
10GigE LAN optical: Quanta x 51.2 ns

Page 104 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Layer 2 testing
Interface Settings
100GigE – Flow Control. Select On if you want the module to adjust the transmitted
bandwidth when it receives pause frames, or Off to ignore pause frames.
100GigE LAN optical: Quanta x 5.12 ns
6 Optional. If you want to transmit an ID to identify all loop up/loop down frames
originating from the module, select the Unit Identifier field, and then type the ID.
The default ID is Viavi 6000.
7 If you need to specify other settings for the test, select the appropriate tab; other-
wise, press Results to return to the Main screen.
The interface settings are specified.
Specifying Ethernet frame settings

Before you transmit traffic, you can specify the frame characteristics of the traffic, such
as the frame type (DIX, 802.3), control frame type (CDP, VTP, STP, or RSTP), encap-
sulation (VLAN, Q-in-Q, VPLS, or MPLS), and payload (Acterna test frames or BER
patterns).
Things to consider
Consider the following before specifying the settings:
• CDP, VTP, STP, or RSTP headers. When configuring traffic with these headers,
you can optionally specify EtherType settings; LLC, SNAP settings for 802.3
traffic are assigned automatically.
• Simulating traffic from a number of sources. If you would like to transmit traffic
carrying a variety of source MAC addresses to simulate traffic from a number of
sources, you can specify a beginning MAC address (or use the factory-assigned
MAC address), and then indicate that the unit should automatically increment the
address carried in each frame for a specific number of frames.
• ARP mode. If you are transmitting layer 3 traffic, you can enable ARP mode to
determine the layer 2 destination MAC address of the destination or gateway
router automatically, or you can disable ARP mode and then manually specify the
destination MAC address. You can also indicate that the instrument should only
ARP to devices on the same VLAN specified for transmitted traffic.
You can assign a user-defined source MAC address to your instrument to deter-
mine whether network problems originate with a particular address for an
Ethernet device.
You can assign your instrument with both a LAN IP and a WAN IP so that it can be
a dual source IP. It can both act as a device connected behind a CPE router and
emulate a CPE router.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 105
Layer 2 testing
• ATP payloads carrying BERT patterns. Even when running software version 8.x,
version 1 Transport Modules will not support ATP payloads carrying BERT
patterns. Version 2 and Version 3 Transport Modules do support the payloads.
40G/100G High Speed Transport Modules and MSAMs do not support ATP
payloads carrying BERT patterns. They only support ATP->Fill Byte payloads.
• Changing BERT patterns or payload type. In order for a BERT analysis to be reli-
able, the test configuration must not change for the entire duration of the test.
Changing any part of the configuration, including the pattern or source of the
frames being analyzed (including changes in loopback) may result in momentary
BERT bit errors and a pattern sync loss detected by the receiver after the traffic
resumes.
If you do experience bit errors and sync losses after changing the test configura-
tion (including initiating loop up) and starting traffic, press the Restart soft key to
clear the initial burst of errors. If you no longer make configuration changes, you
can stop and start traffic without experiencing extraneous bit errors or sync
losses. If you continue to see BERT bit errors after performing a test restart, this
indicates a problem with the circuit under test.
ATP Fill Pattern can be used if you do not wish to analyze BERT data.
• Byte sequence. The MSAM and Transport Module transmit the bytes in user
defined patterns from left to right; the FST-2802 transmits the bytes in user
defined patterns right to left. For example, a user defined hexadecimal pattern of
12345678 populates the frame as: 12345678.Using the same hexadecimal
pattern, the FST-2802 would populate the frame as 78563412. Consider this
when testing using the FST-2802.
Specifying the settings
To specify Ethernet frame settings
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the Ethernet tab.
3 In Encapsulation, select one of the following:
– None. If you do not want to encapsulate transmitted frames, select None.
– VLAN. If you want to transmit VLAN tagged frames, select VLAN, and then
refer to “Configuring VLAN tagged traffic” on page 112.
– Q-in-Q. If you want to transmit VLAN stacked (Q-in-Q) frames, select Q-in-Q,
and then refer to “Configuring Q-in-Q traffic” on page 113.
– Stacked VLAN. If you want to transmit stacked VLAN frames, select Stacked
VLAN, and then refer to “Configuring stacked VLAN traffic” on page 113.
– VPLS. If you are testing on a VPLS network, and you want to transmit traffic
with a VPLS header, select VPLS, and then refer to “Configuring VPLS traffic”
on page 113.
When you select VPLS encapsulation, the Frame Type label changes to SP
Frame Type, and the L2 Transparency setting disappears.

Page 106 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Layer 2 testing
NOTE: If you selected a Terminate application, and you want to filter received
traffic using VPLS criteria, you must select VPLS encapsulation for transmitted
traffic.
4 In Test Mode, specify the category of testing being done:
– Traffic. Standard mode that transmits unicast frames that satisfy the
receiving unit’s filter criteria.
– J-Proof. For verifying layer 2 transparency requiring loop back of all test
frames including control frames and frames carrying a broadcast or multicast
address (not applicable in multiple streams).
– LBM Traffic. For Loopback Message/Loopback Reply (LBM/LBR) frame
analysis where the far-end unit (any equipment that responds to LBM
messages) loops back any packet containing the LBM message.
NOTE:
If the LBM/LBR testing mode is required in RFC 2544 testing, it must be config-
ured prior to initializing the RFC 2544 application.
LBM/LBR testing mode is not valid for any automatic scripting application other
than RFC 2544.
5 In Frame Type, specify the type of frame you are transmitting (DIX, or 802.3).
6 If you are verifying layer 2 transparency, do the following:
a Turn L2 Transparency On.
b In Control Frame Type, select the frame type.
NOTE:
These settings are not applicable when testing 10 GigE WAN circuits.
7 If you selected a layer 2 application, in Frame Size (Bytes), select one of the
seven IEEE recommended frame lengths, Random, EMIX or enter a specific
Jumbo, Undersized, or User Defined frame length. (If the payload is something
other than Acterna with BERT payload, Undersized is available)
8 If you selected VLAN, Q-in-Q, or Stacked VLAN encapsulation, Increment
Frame Sizes by VLAN Tags becomes available. When selected, all IEEE recom-
mended frame lengths will be increased in size by 4 bytes for each VLAN tag
selected.
NOTE:
EMIX frame size is not available when configuring an Ethernet payload within
OTU2e multiplexed signal.
If you selected Random or EMIX, use the Configure button to specify user-
defined random frame sizes, including Jumbo, or select Reset to transmit frames
of randomly generated sizes based on the seven RFC 2544 frame length recom-
mendations. EMIX also adds the EMIX Cycle Length field that controls how many

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 107
Layer 2 testing
frame entries are sent, in order, before cycling back to the first frame entry and
repeating. To define the number of frame entries, enter a number between 1
and 8.
Figure 23 Configure Random Frame Size
Jumbo frames are not supported for 802.3 traffic per the 802.3 specification.
– If you are configuring layer 2 traffic, use the graphical display of a frame to
specify the following:
Frame
Setting Value
Label
DA Destination Select the type corresponding to the Destination Address that will be
Type inserted in the transmit frames:
– Unicast.
If you select Unicast, the least significant bit of the leftmost byte in
the MAC address is forced to 0.
– Multicast.
If you select Multicast, the least significant bit of the leftmost byte
in the MAC address is forced to 1.
– Broadcast
If you select Broadcast, the MAC address is automatically
FFFFFFFFFFFF.
Destination If you specified Unicast or Multicast as the destination type, enter
MAC the destination address using a 6 byte hexadecimal format.
Loop Type Select one of the following:
– Unicast. The unit will issue a unicast message and loop-up the
device with the Destination MAC address that you specified.
– Broadcast. The unit will issue a broadcast hello message, and
will then send a unicast loop-up to the first device on the circuit
that responds to the hello.

Page 108 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Layer 2 testing
Frame
Setting Value
Label
SA Source Type Select Factory Default or User Defined.
User MAC If you specified User Defined, enter the unicast source MAC address
using a 6 byte hexadecimal format.
Auto Incre- If you would like the unit to automatically increment the MAC
ment MAC address carried in each frame by one, select Yes.
# MACs in If you indicated that you would like the unit to increment the MAC
Sequence addresses, specify the number of MACs in the sequence. The
addresses will be assigned in succession, and will repeat after the
number specified for the sequence is complete.
Disable OoS If you indicated that you would like the unit to increment the MAC
Results addresses, any results derived from the out of sequence result (lost
frames) will show “N/A” in the results display.
Type EtherType If Tx Payload is Acterna, specify the desired Ethertype value from
0x0600-0xFFFF. Received ATP frames must have the same ether-
type to be recognized as Acterna Test Packets.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 109
Layer 2 testing
Frame
Setting Value
Label
Data TX Payload Select from-
– Acterna. To transmit frames that contain a sequence number and
time stamp so that lost frames, round trip delay, and jitter can be
calculated, select Acterna.
– Acterna Payload Ver. - Acterna Test Protocol (ATP) Version 2
and Version 3 handle time resolution differently, so ATPv3 pro-
vides higher resolution than ATPv2 for more precise RTD and
packet jitter results.
– Acterna Fill Pattern- these may be filled with any hexadecimal
bytes, up to a total of 64 bytes.
– Delay Setup (MSAMv1 only)- if you are measuring round trip
delay, indicate whether you want to measure delay with a high
degree of precision, or a low degree of precision. In most
instances, you should select High Precision - Low Delay. See
Table 10 on page 111 for Delay Measurement Topology on vari-
ous platforms.
– BERT. To transmit frames with payloads filled with the BERT pat-
tern you specify, select BERT, and then select a pattern.
– Depending on the equipment being used, various pseudo-ran-
dom and Fixed patterns are available. The pseudo-random pat-
terns continue from one frame into the next. The fixed patterns
restart each frame, such that the frame will always start with the
beginning of the pattern.
– If User Defined is an option and selected as the BERT Pattern, in
the User Pattern field, specify the 32 bit fixed pattern that will be
repeated in the payload.
– Optic Latency Factor This setting provides a means to compen-
sate for significant intrinsic delays, especially when using certain
types of pluggable optics affecting Frame Delay (latency) mea-
surement results.
In particular, if using the 40G/100G Transport Module, 100G LR4
CFP optics equipped with gearbox functionality have been shown
to introduce delays in the range of 70 to 170 nanoseconds.
Should this intrinsic delay be deemed significant, the Optic
Latency factor allows compensation by specifying a value
between 0 and 100 microseconds, with nanosecond granularity.
This factor will be subtracted from latency calculations.
To specify the Optic Latency Factor, do the following:
a Run an RTD test with a very short fiber self-loop.
b Enter the returned RTD value in the Optic Latency Factor
field on the Setup page.

Page 110 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Layer 2 testing
Table 10 Delay Measurement Topology
Maximum
Delay Type Payload Version Platform Rate Distance Delay
(km)
Round Trip (RT) High Precision CSAM 100G 37,000 (RT)1 189msec
ATPV3 40G/100G 18,500 each
Transport Mod- way
ule 40G 94,000 (RT) 470msec
47,000each
way
MSAMv2, MTS 10G 189,000 0.9 sec
5800 (RT)1
94,500 each
way
1G 1,890,000 9 sec
(RT)1
945,000
each way
High Precision CSAM 100G 7,747,000 >10sec
ATPv2 40G/100G (RT)
Transport Mod- 3,873,500
ule each way
40G 19,000,000 >10sec
(RT)
9,500,000
each way
MSAMv2, MTS 10G 38,000,000 >10sec
5800 (RT)
19,000,000
each way
1G 380,000,000 >10sec
(RT)
190,000,000
each way
MSAMv1 10G 75.500 (RT)2 0.375 sec
37,750 each
way
1G 755.000 3.75sec
(RT)2
377,500
each way
Transport Mod- 10G 1,1802 5.9 msec
ule 1G 11,8002 59 msec

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 111
Layer 2 testing
Table 10 Delay Measurement Topology
Maximum
Delay Type Payload Version Platform Rate Distance Delay
(km)
One-Way (using High Precision MSAMv2, MTS 10G 94,500 0.45 sec
external GPS/ ATPV3 5800
CDMA refer-
ence)
1G 945,000 4.7sec
High Precision MSAMv1 10G 1,180 5.9 msec
ATPv2
1G 11,800 59.1
msec
1. For longer distances use High Precision ATPv2
2. For longer distances use Low Precision ATPv2
The frame settings for transmitted traffic are specified.
Configuring VLAN tagged traffic
To configure VLAN tagged traffic
1 After selecting VLAN as your encapsulation, on the graphic of the frame, select
VLAN
2 Enter the VLAN ID transmitted in the VLAN ID field in a decimal format ranging
from 0 to 4095.
3 In User Priority, select the priority (0 to 7) from the drop-down menu.
– If you are configuring traffic for a layer 2 application, return to “Specifying
Ethernet frame settings”.
– If you are configuring traffic for a layer 3 application, return to “Specifying
transmitted IPv4 packet settings”.
VLAN settings are specified.

Page 112 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Layer 2 testing
Configuring Q-in-Q traffic
To configure Q-in-Q traffic
1 After selecting Q-in-Q as your encapsulation, on the graphic of the frame, select
SVLAN, and then specify the SVLAN ID, SVLAN User Priority, DEI Bit, and
SVLAN TPID for the service provider. You can now specify a User Defined TPID if
you choose to.
2 Select CVLAN, and then specify the VLAN ID and User Priority for the customer’s
traffic.
3 Return to “Specifying Ethernet frame settings” for details on specifying the
remaining settings.
Q-in-Q settings are specified.
Configuring stacked VLAN traffic
To configure stacked VLAN traffic
1 After selecting Stacked VLAN as your encapsulation, on the graphic of the frame,
select VLAN Stack, and then specify the stack depth (number of VLANs).
2 For each VLAN, specify the SVLAN ID, SVLAN User Priority, DEI Bit, and SVLAN
TPID for the service provider. You can now specify a User Defined TPID if you
choose to.
3 Select CVLAN, and then specify the VLAN ID and User Priority for the customer’s
traffic.
4 Return to “Specifying Ethernet frame settings” for details on specifying the
remaining settings.
Stacked VLAN settings are specified.
Configuring VPLS traffic
To configure VPLS traffic
1 After selecting VPLS as your encapsulation, on signal diagram, select Tunnel

Label, and then specify the Tunnel ID (the label the network will use to route the
traffic), the Tunnel Priority, and the Tunnel TTL value.
NOTE: VPLS settings are only available when configuring layer 2 test applica-
tions.
2 To specify a virtual circuit (VC) label for the transmitted traffic, select VC Label,
and then specify the VC ID (the label the network will use to route the traffic on the
channel to the appropriate interface), the VC Priority, and the VC TTL value.
3 To specify the customer destination address, source address, type, and payload,
select Data, and then specify each of the settings.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 113
Layer 2 testing
4 Based on your settings, the unit automatically calculates and displays the service
provider’s overall frame size in the Calc. SP Frame Size field. Return to step – on
page 108 of “Specifying Ethernet frame settings” for details on specifying the
remaining settings.
VPLS settings are specified.
Configuring LBM Traffic
To configure LBM Traffic
1 After selecting LBM Traffic as the Test Mode (see step 4 in “Specifying the
settings” on page 106), on the frame graphic, select LBM.
2 Specify the Maintenance Domain Level to which the transmitting unit belongs. If
desired, also select the Enable Sender TLV checkbox to include the unit identifier
(defined on the Network Visibility tab of the Interface setup page) in the header
data.
LBM settings are specified.
Specifying Ethernet filter settings

Before transmitting traffic, you can specify settings that indicate the expected received
payload and determine which frames or packets will pass through the filter and be
counted in the test result categories for filtered traffic. For example, you can set up the
filter to observe results for all traffic sent to a specific destination address. The filter
settings may also impact other results.
NOTE:
During layer 2 BER testing, incoming frames must pass the filter to be analyzed
for a BERT pattern. Local loopback is also only performed on frames that pass
the filter. Use the filter to analyze BERT frames when non-test frames are pres-
ent, such as spanning tree frames.
If you are transmitting Q-in-Q, VPLS, or MPLS encapsulated traffic, refer to:
• “Filtering traffic using Q-in-Q criteria” on page 117
• “Filtering traffic using VPLS criteria” on page 119
• “Filtering traffic using MPLS criteria” on page 121
To specify Ethernet filter settings

Page 114 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Layer 2 testing
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the Filters tab. By default, a summary
of all applicable filter settings appear (Ethernet, IP, and TCP/UDP).
3 In the panel on the left side of the tab, select Basic, then set the Filter Mode to
Detailed.
4 To specify layer 2 filter settings, in the panel on the left side of the tab, select
Ethernet, then do the following:
a If you want to filter traffic based on the type of encapsulation used, specify the
following values:
Setting Value
Encapsulation Select one of the following:
– None. The instrument will analyze only unencapsulated traffic.
– VLAN. The instrument will analyze only VLAN encapsulated traffic for the
parameters you specify.
– Q-in-Q. The instrument will analyze only Q-in-Q encapsulated traffic for the
parameters you specify. See “Filtering traffic using Q-in-Q criteria” on
page 117.
– Stacked VLAN (layer 2 applications only). The instrument will analyze only
stacked VLAN encapsulated traffic for the parameters you specify. See “Fil-
tering traffic using stacked VLAN criteria” on page 118.
– VPLS (layer 2 applications only). The instrument will analyze only VPLS
encapsulated traffic for the parameters you specify. See “Filtering traffic
using VPLS criteria” on page 119.
– MPLS (layer 3 applications only). The instrument will analyze only VPLS
encapsulated traffic for the parameters you specify. See “Filtering traffic
using MPLS criteria” on page 121.
– Don’t Care. The instrument will analyze traffic satisfying all other filter crite-
ria regardless of encapsulation.
VLAN If you specified VLAN as the encapsulation type, on the graphic display of the
frame, select VLAN, and then specify the VLAN ID carried in the filtered traffic.
User Priority If you specified VLAN as the encapsulation type, and you want to filter for traf-
fic with a specific user priority, specify the priority, or select Don’t Care.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 115
Layer 2 testing
b In Frame Type, specify one of the following:
Frame Type Description

DIX To analyze DIX frames only, select DIX.
EtherType If you specified DIX as the frame type, specify the Ethertype
by selecting the Type field on the graphic of the frame. If you
do not specify the EtherType, the module will filter the traffic
for DIX frames with the currently specified EtherType value.
802.3 To analyze 802.3 frames only, select 802.3.
Data Length If you specified 802.3 as the frame type, specify the data
(bytes) length by selecting the Length field on the graphic of the
frame. If you do not specify the length, the module will filter
the traffic for 802.3 frames with the currently specified length.
Don’t Care If you want to analyze both DIX and 802.3 VLAN or Q-in-Q
encapsulated traffic, select Don’t Care.
You must specify a frame type if you are filtering unencapsu-
lated traffic.
c If you want the unit to filter for traffic carrying a particular destination address,
on the graphic of the frame, select DA, and then specify the following:
Setting Value
Destination Type If you want to analyze traffic with a specific type of destina-
tion address, select one of the following:
– Unicast
– Multicast
– Broadcast
Otherwise, select Don’t Care to analyze traffic with any
type of destination address.
Destination MAC If you are filtering traffic for a specific Unicast or Multicast
destination address, specify the address carried in the traf-
fic that you want to analyze.
d If you want to filter traffic for a particular source address, on the graphic of the
frame, select SA, and then specify the following:
Setting Value
Source Type If you want to analyze traffic with a Unicast source
address, select Unicast; otherwise, select Don’t Care to
analyze traffic with any type of destination address.
Default MAC If you are filtering traffic for a specific Unicast source
address, specify the address carried in the traffic that you
want to analyze.

Page 116 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Layer 2 testing
5 To set additional filter settings, see:

– “Filtering traffic using Q-in-Q criteria” on page 117
– “Filtering traffic using stacked VLAN criteria” on page 118
– “Filtering traffic using VPLS criteria” on page 119
– “Filtering traffic using MPLS criteria” on page 121
– “Filtering traffic using byte pattern criteria” on page 121
– “Filtering traffic using payload criteria” on page 122
The Ethernet filter settings are specified.
Filtering traffic using Q-in-Q criteria

If your instrument is configured to transmit Q-in-Q encapsulated traffic, you can filter
received traffic using Q-in-Q criteria.
To filter traffic using Q-in-Q criteria
select the layer 2 or layer 3 test application for the interface you are testing. Refer
to Table 4 on page 79 through Table 5 on page 80 for lists of applications.
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the Ethernet tab. Verify that Q-in-Q is
specified as the encapsulation.
3 Select the Filters tab. In the panel on the left side of the tab, select Ethernet, then
a On the graphic of the frame, select SVLAN, and then specify the following:
Setting Value
SVLAN ID Specify the SVLAN ID carried in the filtered traffic.
SVLAN User Priority If you want to filter traffic for a specific user priority,
specify the priority; otherwise, select Don’t Care.
SVLAN DEI Bit If you want to filter traffic for a specific DEI Bit, specify
the bit value; otherwise, select Don’t Care.
SVLAN TPID (hex) Specify the TPID carried in the filtered traffic. If you are
transmitting traffic with a user defined TPID, your instru-
ment will automatically use the TPID that you specified
in the User SVLAN TPID (hex) field.
NOTE: If you want to filter on a user-defined TPID, you
must also enter that TPID on the RX Payload/TPID
setup page.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 117
Layer 2 testing
b On the graphic of the frame, select CVLAN, and then specify the following:
Setting Value
Specify VLAN ID If you specified Q-in-Q as the encapsulation type, and you
want to filter traffic for a specific CVLAN, select Yes; other-
wise, select Don’t Care.
VLAN ID If you specified Q-in-Q as the encapsulation type, and you
specified indicated that you want to filter traffic for a partic-
ular CVLAN, specify the VLAN ID carried in the filtered
traffic.
User Priority If you specified Q-in-Q as the encapsulation type, and you
specified indicated that you want to filter traffic for a partic-
ular CVLAN, specify the User Priority carried in the filtered
traffic.
4 If you want to analyze/detect frames carrying User Defined SVLAN TPID as Q-in-
Q traffic, you have to specify the expected User Defined TPID value(s) on the
Filters->Rx->TPID page. The TPID values on this page are used to recognize Q-
in-Q traffic with User Defined TPID. If you want to analyze/detect Q-in-Q traffic
carrying the same TPID that you specified for transmitted traffic, check the box for
Use Tx User SVLAN TPID.
The Q-in-Q filter settings are specified.
Filtering traffic using stacked VLAN criteria

If your instrument is configured to transmit stacked VLAN encapsulated traffic, you can
filter received traffic using stacked VLAN criteria.
To filter traffic using stacked VLAN criteria
select the layer 2 test application for the interface you are testing. Refer to Table 4
on page 79 for lists of applications.
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the Ethernet tab. Verify that Stacked
VLAN is specified as the encapsulation.

Page 118 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Layer 2 testing
a On the graphic of the frame, select SVLAN, and then specify the following:
Setting Value
SVLAN ID Specify the SVLAN ID carried in the filtered traffic.
SVLAN User Priority If you want to filter traffic for a specific user priority,
specify the priority; otherwise, select Don’t Care.
SVLAN DEI Bit If you want to filter traffic for a specific DEI Bit, specify
the bit value; otherwise, select Don’t Care.
SVLAN TPID (hex) Specify the TPID carried in the filtered traffic. If you are
transmitting traffic with a user defined TPID, your
instrument will automatically use the TPID that you
specified in the User SVLAN TPID (hex) field.
b On the graphic of the frame, select CVLAN, and then specify the following:
Setting Value
Specify VLAN ID If you specified stacked VLAN as the encapsulation type,
and you want to filter traffic for a specific CVLAN, select
Yes; otherwise, select Don’t Care.
VLAN ID If you specified stacked VLAN as the encapsulation type,
and you specified indicated that you want to filter traffic for
a particular CVLAN, specify the VLAN ID carried in the fil-
tered traffic.
User Priority If you specified stacked VLAN as the encapsulation type,
and you specified indicated that you want to filter traffic for
a particular CVLAN, specify the User Priority carried in the
filtered traffic.
4 If you want to analyze/detect frames carrying User Defined SVLAN TPID as

Stacked VLAN traffic, you have to specify the expected User Defined TPID
value(s) on the Filters->Rx->TPID page. The TPID values on this page are used
to recognize Stacked VLAN traffic with User Defined TPID. If you want to analyze/
detect Stacked VLAN traffic carrying the same TPID that you specified for trans-
mitted traffic, check the box for Use Tx User SVLAN TPID.
The stacked VLAN filter settings are specified.
Filtering traffic using VPLS criteria

If your unit is configured to transmit VPLS encapsulated traffic, you can filter received
traffic using VPLS criteria.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 119
Layer 2 testing
To filter traffic using VPLS header criteria
on page 79 through Table 5 on page 80 for lists of layer 2 applications.
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the Ethernet tab. Verify that VPLS is
specified as the encapsulation.
a On the graphic of the frame, select Tunnel Label, and then specify the
following:
Setting Value
Tunnel Label If you want to filter received traffic based on the tunnel
label, set the Tunnel Label filter to Yes; otherwise, select
Don’t Care.
Tunnel Label If you indicated that you want to filter traffic for a specific
tunnel, enter the label.
Tunnel Priority If you want to filter received traffic based on the tunnel pri-
ority, set the Tunnel ID Filter to Yes; otherwise, select
Don’t Care.
Tunnel Priority If you indicated that you want to filter traffic for a specific
tunnel, select the priority number.
b If you want to filter received traffic using virtual circuit criteria, select VC
Label, and then specify the following:
Setting Value
VC Label If you want to filter received traffic based on the tunnel ID,
set the VC Label to Yes; otherwise, select Don’t Care.
VC Label If you indicated that you want to filter traffic for a specific
label, enter the label.
VC Priority If you want to filter received traffic based on the virtual
channel priority, set the priority filter to Yes; otherwise,
select Don’t Care.
VC Priority If you indicated that you want to filter traffic for a specific
virtual channel priority, select the priority number.
4 Return to “Specifying Ethernet filter settings” to verify or specify additional filter

settings.
VPLS filter criteria is specified.

Page 120 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Layer 2 testing
Filtering traffic using MPLS criteria
To filter traffic using MPLS header criteria
page 79 through Table 5 on page 80 for lists of layer 3 applications.
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the Ethernet tab. Verify that the encap-
sulation is set to MPLS.
a Above the graphic of the frame, set the MPLS Type Filter to Enable.
b In EtherType, select MPLS Unicast or MPLS Multicast.
c On the graphic of the frame, select MPLS Label 1, and then specify the
following:
Setting Value
MPLS1 Label If you want to filter received traffic based on the label, set
the filter to Yes; otherwise, select Don’t Care.
MPLS1 Label If you indicated that you want to filter traffic for a specific
label, enter the label.
MPLS1 Priority If you want to filter received traffic based on the priority, set
the filter to Yes; otherwise, select Don’t Care.
MPLS1 Priority If you indicated that you want to filter traffic for a specific
priority, select the priority number.
4 If you want to specify additional criteria for MPLS2, on the graphic of the frame,
select MPLS Label 2, then repeat step 3.
5 Return to “Specifying Ethernet filter settings” to verify or specify additional filter
settings.
MPLS filter criteria is specified.
Filtering traffic using byte pattern criteria

If you want to do so, you can specify criteria to filter based on the byte pattern.
To filter traffic using byte pattern criteria
on page 79 through Table 5 on page 80 for lists of layer 2 applications.
2 Select the Capture tab, and then set Capture to Enable and set Use Filters as
to Filter.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 121
Layer 2 testing
3 Select the Filters tab, and then specify the following:

a In the panel on the left side of the tab, select Summary, and then select
Clear All Filters to clear any previous filter settings.
b In the panel on the left side of the tab, select Byte Pattern, and then set Use
Byte Pattern as to Filter. Specify one of the following filter and trigger
modes:
Basic/Detailed
16 Byte Pattern Comment
Filter Setting
Filter Mode Filter Mode Extended Filter. Both filters have to
pass with (AND) coupling.
Trigger Mode Trigger Mode Extended Trigger. No filters are set
(they are all “Don’t Care”). Trigger on
unfiltered packets. The filter counts are
the same as link counts.
Filter Mode Trigger Mode Triggering occurs on filtered packets.
Only filtered packets will be captured.
c Specify the following:
Setting Value
Match Method Select how to match the pattern: Fixed offset (match the pat-
tern at the specified Pattern Offset) or Sliding Window
(match the pattern anywhere in the header).
Byte Pattern In the graphic of the Byte Pattern, click on the individual bit
and set the hex pattern and the mask. The mask specifies
whether to match both bits (FF) one bit (0F or F0), or don’t
care (00).
Filtering traffic using payload criteria

You can filter traffic using payload criteria, or you can turn payload analysis off entirely.

Page 122 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Layer 2 testing
To specify payload filter settings
1 In the panel on the left side of the tab, select Rx Payload, then specify the
following:
Setting Value
Payload Analysis Specify one of the following:
– Off. If you want the module to monitor and ana-
lyze live Ethernet traffic by suppressing lost
frames (LF) or BERT errors in their associated
result counts and as triggers for LEDs during pay-
load analysis, select Off.
– On. If you want to analyze traffic carrying a partic-
ular BERT pattern, select On.
Use Tx BERT settings Specify one of the following:
– If you want the module to monitor and analyze
traffic carrying a different BERT pattern than the
one specified for transmitted traffic, clear the box.
– If you want to analyze traffic carrying the same
BERT pattern carried in transmitted traffic, check
the box.
Rx Payload Specify Acterna or BERT.
(Payload Analysis On,
and Use Tx BERT set-
tings un-checked)
Rx BERT Pattern If you unchecked Use Tx BERT settings, specify the
Payload Analysis On, BERT pattern carried in the filtered traffic.
and Use Tx BERT set-
tings un-checked)
Payload filter criteria is specified.
Specifying traffic load settings

Before transmitting traffic, you can specify the type of traffic load the unit will transmit
(Constant, Bursty or Ramp). The settings vary depending on the type of load. When
configuring a load, you can specify the bandwidth of the transmitted traffic in 0.001%
increments.
NOTE:
If you configure the instrument to transmit a bursty or ramped load of 100%,
the module is designed to transmit slightly less than 100% traffic (99.996% for
10 Gigabit Ethernet, 99.90% for 1 Gigabit Ethernet, and 99.90% for 10/100/
1000 Ethernet) as a safeguard against overrunning network elements that can
not support 100%. If you are certain the elements can support true 100% traf-
fic, select the Allow flooding check box when configuring the Constant load.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 123
Layer 2 testing
Transmitting a constant load

With a constant load, the module transmits frames continuously with a fixed bandwidth
utilization. You can specify the load as a percent or a bit rate. See Figure 24.
Figure 24 Constant traffic
Bandwidth
(configurable
either as %
or in kbps or
Mbps)
Time
When you setup a constant traffic load, if you are running a standard Ethernet applica-
tion, you can specify the bandwidth as a percentage of the line rate (%BW) or at a
specific bit rate. The bit rate can be specified in total kbps or Mbps.
To configure the module to transmit a constant load of traffic
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the Traffic tab.
3 In Load Type, select Constant.
4 In Load Unit, select one of the following:
– Percent. If you select Percent, in Load %, enter the duty cycle as a
percentage.
– Bit Rate. If you select Bit Rate, in Load (Mbps) or Load (kbps) enter the bit
rate in Mbps or kbps.
– Frames Per Second. Valid only for Constant in Non-Streams Apps; Valid for
Constant and Ramp in Streams.
5 Select the Allow flooding check box to transmit a true 100% load in those circuits
that you are certain can handle the signal.
The module is configured to transmit a constant rate of traffic.

Page 124 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Layer 2 testing
Transmitting a bursty load

With a bursty load, the module transmits frames at 100% bandwidth for a specific time
interval, followed by no frame transmissions during the specified gap interval. See
Figure 25.
Figure 25 Bursty traffic

Gap between bursts
100%
Bandwidth
Time
When you configure bursty traffic, if you are running a standard Ethernet application,
you can specify the burst load as a percentage of the duty cycle, or by specifying the
burst and gap intervals in units of time, bytes and Information Rate (IR). If you specify
the burst load as a percentage of the duty cycle, and then specify the number of frames
per burst, the module automatically calculates the burst gap.
NOTE:
If you configure a bursty load of traffic with a low percentage of the line rate
(duty cycle) and a large number of frames per bust, it may appear that traffic
transmission has stopped periodically. This is because the calculated interval
(gap) between bursts will be longer. A higher percentage of the line rate and a
lower number of frames per burst results in a shorter interval (gap).
To configure the module to transmit bursts of traffic
3 In Load Type, select Burst.
4 In Load Unit, select one of the following:
– Bytes and Information Rate. Proceed to step 5.
– Burst Time and Information Rate. Proceed to step 5.
– Gap Time and Information Rate. Proceed to step 5.
– Bytes and Gap Time. Proceed to step 5.
– Burst Time and Gap Time. Proceed to step 5.
– Frames and Duty Cycle. Proceed to step 6.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 125
Layer 2 testing
5 If you selected any of the combinations of Time, Rates and Byte, the following
parameters may need to be set:
NOTE:
Values may be automatically normalized (rounded to nearest appropriate val-
ues) from values entered.
a Information Rate. Enter the average throughput rate in Mbps up to the

maximum rate of the interface (layer 2 only).
b Burst KBytes. Enter the number of Kbytes of data desired to be transmitted
in each burst of traffic.
c Burst Time. Enter the amount of time that each burst of traffic should be
transmitted (will round to the nearest frame transmit time).
d Time Unit. Select unit for time entry - sec, msec, usec or nsec.
e Gap/Idle Time. Enter the amount of time between each burst. The valid
range for this setting adjusts depending on the Burst Time that is entered, to
ensure that the duty cycle is at least 1% in 0.001% intervals (will round to the
nearest 0.001%).
The following parameters may be displayed as a result of the above selec-
tions:
f Bit Rate (calculated). Bits/Time Unit from Burst average throughput rate (will
round kb down to the nearest frame size).
g Actual KBytes (calculated). Actual value of bytes/burst. Values above the
line rate can not be entered.
6 If you selected Frames and Duty Cycle as the load unit, set the following:
a Duty Cycle (%). Enter the percentage of the line rate (the duty cycle) during
which traffic will be transmitted in the burst, from 0.001 - 100%.
b Frames/Burst Time. Select a predefined value, or User-Defined, for the
number of frames that are to be included in each burst.
c User Burst Size. If User-Defined is specified for Frames/Burst, define the
User Burst size, 1- 65535 frames.
7 Specify the burst type for the traffic:
– Fixed. Sends a fixed number of bursts and then stops. If you select Fixed,
enter the number of bursts.
– Continuous. Sends bursts continuously.
The module is configured to transmit bursts of traffic.
Transmitting a ramped load

With a ramped load, the module automatically increases the load by a percentage of
bandwidth (specified as the load step) at a particular time interval (specified as the time

Page 126 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Layer 2 testing
step). The process is repeated, allowing you to easily verify the maximum throughput
of a link. See Figure 26.
Figure 26 Ramped traffic
Time step
Load step
Bandwidth
Time
You can also specify criteria to tell the module to stop ramping if an error (or errors)
occurs in a load step.
NOTE:
When configuring a ramped load of traffic for a particular stream (when running
a multiple streams application), the triggers for stopping the ramp are not avail-
able.
To configure the module to transmit a ramped load of traffic
3 In Load Type, select Ramp, and then specify the following settings:
a Time Step (sec). Enter the time step in seconds.
b Load Step. Enter the load step as one of the following:
- A percentage of the total bandwidth.
- In frames per second (fps). Applicable to streams application only.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 127
Layer 2 testing
4 Optional. If you want to stop the ramp from incrementing when certain errors
occur, under Stop Load Increments, specify the following:
– Errored Frames. If you want to stop incrementing the load if FCS errored
frames are detected, select Yes, and then enter the number of errored
frames that must be detected to stop the ramp.
– Dropped Frames. If you want to stop incrementing the load if dropped
frames are detected, select Yes, and then enter the number of dropped
frames that must be detected to stop the ramp.
NOTE:
Acterna frames carry a sequence number which the unit uses to determine
whether frames were dropped; therefore, you must configure your unit to trans-
mit an Acterna payload, turn payload analysis on, and loop the far-end device
back to the traffic originating unit.
– Pause Frames. If you want to stop incrementing the load if pause frames are
detected, select Yes, and then enter the number of pause frames that must
be detected to stop the ramp.
The module is configured to transmit ramped traffic.
Transmitting and analyzing layer 2 traffic

Before you transmit layer 2 traffic, you must specify:
• Interface settings (see “Specifying interface settings” on page 102).
• Frame characteristics for the transmitted traffic (see “Specifying Ethernet frame
settings” on page 105).
• Frame characteristics used to filter received traffic (see “Specifying Ethernet filter
• Traffic load settings (see “Specifying traffic load settings” on page 123).
After you specify the layer 2 settings, you are ready to transmit and analyze the layer 2
traffic.
NOTE: Layer 2 BERT testing

Layer 2 BERT patterns carried in a BERT payload are not compatible with
BERT patterns carried in an ATP payload. When testing using two instruments,
be certain to configure both using the same payload type and BERT pattern.
To transmit and analyze layer 2 traffic
page 79 through Table 5 on page 80 for a list of layer 2 applications.

Page 128 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Layer 2 testing
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the Interface tab to specify settings that
control the Ethernet interface (see “Specifying interface settings” on page 102).
3 Select the Ethernet tab to specify settings that define the frame characteristics of
the transmitted traffic (see “Specifying Ethernet frame settings” on page 105).
4 Select the Ethernet Filter tab to specify settings that filter the received traffic
based on specified frame characteristics (see “Specifying Ethernet filter settings”
on page 114).
5 Select the Traffic tab to specify the type of load the unit will transmit (see “Speci-
fying traffic load settings” on page 123).
9 Select Start Traffic to transmit traffic over the circuit.
10 Verify that the green Signal Present, Sync Acquired, and Link Active LEDs are
illuminated.
11 At a minimum, observe the summary, link statistics and counts, filter statistics and
counts, error statistics, and layer 2 BERT statistics results.
You have analyzed layer 2 traffic.
Transmitting and analyzing layer 2 patterns

Using the instrument, you can stress the jitter and noise characteristics of 1 Gigabit
components and systems by transmitting continuous random test patterns (CRPAT),
continuous jitter test patterns (CJPAT), and the compliant supply noise pattern
(CSPAT). These patterns are always transmitted automatically when you turn the laser
on.
NOTE:
You must run pattern tests using an end-to-end configuration at all times.
These patterns are designed to test physical layer networks. By definition,
these framed patterns populate the Ethernet header with invalid address infor-
mation; therefore, these frames will not traverse a layer 2, switched network.
For the same reason, if the pattern frames are transmitted to a far-end
Transport Module that is looped-up, the far-end Transport Module tries to swap
the source address and destination address for the pattern frames. As a result,
the patterns received by the near-end Transport Module are modified, and the
results are not valid.
To transmit a pattern
select the Layer 2 Patterns test application for the 1GigE Optical interface.
2 Select the Setup soft key. The Setup tab appears.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 129
Layer 2 testing
3 Select a pattern:
To… Select…
Emulate a worst case scenario for deterministic jitter by CRPAT
transmitting frames with a broad spectral content.
Stress the timing margins in the received eye by exposing CJPAT
the data sampling circuits to large systematic phase jumps.
Emulate a worst case scenario for power supply noise within CSPAT
network transceivers.

7 Verify that the green SIGNAL LED is illuminated.
8 Select Start Pattern to transmit the pattern over the circuit.
9 At a minimum, observe the summary and pattern statistic test results.
You have transmitted layer 2 patterns.
Monitoring layer 2 traffic

Use the layer 2 traffic monitor application whenever you want to analyze the received
signal. You can also pass the signal bit-for-bit through to the unit’s transmitter if you
select Connect Rx to Tx. When you configure your test, you can specify settings that
indicate the expected received payload and determine which frames will pass through
the receive filter and be counted in the test result categories for filtered layer 2 traffic.
The settings may also impact other results.
NOTE:
You must turn the laser on using the associated button to pass the signal
through the unit’s transmitter.
To monitor layer 2 traffic
1 Use the Test Menu to do one of the following:

– Select the layer 2 monitor test application for the interface you are testing
(refer to Table 4 on page 79 through Table 5 on page 80 for a list of applica-
tions).

Page 130 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Layer 2 testing
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the Ethernet Filter tab. Do one of the
following:
– If you are running a standard Ethernet test application, specify the filter
settings for the traffic you want to monitor (see “Specifying Ethernet filter
– If you are monitoring VPLS encapsulated traffic, specify the VPLS filter
settings (see “Filtering traffic using VPLS criteria” on page 119).
illuminated.
7 Select Connect Rx to Tx (for line loopbacks).
8 At a minimum, observe the summary, link statistics and counts, filter statistics and
counts, error statistics, and layer 2 BERT statistics results.
Layer 2 traffic is monitored.
Transmitting and analyzing layer 2 MPLS-TP, T-MPLS or MPLS

traffic
You can use the instrument to send and receive MPLS OAM messages or generate
Ethernet traffic on a specific pseudo-wire inside a specific tunnel and analyze any
MPLS-TP (ITU-T G.8113.1), T-MPLS (ITU-T G.8114),or MPLS (ITU Y.1711) traffic
present on the Ethernet link.
About MPLS-TP
The differences between MPLS, T-MPLS OAM and MPLS-TP OAM are:
• MPLS and T-MPLS OAM uses the reserved Label 14 as the identifier and MPLS-
TP uses the label 13 together with Associated Channel Header (ACH).
• T-MPLS and MPLS-TP can use Loop-Back Message and Loop-Back Reply
(LEBM/LBR) while MPLS must use Continuity Verification (CV).
However, MPLS, T-MPLS and MPLS-TP OAMs all support multiple layers: section
layer, tunnel/trunk layer or label switched path (LSP), and pseudo wire (PW) layer or
virtual circuit (VC).
MPLS-TP is a connection oriented packet-switched transport technology. The main

features of MPLS-TP are:
• Connection oriented
• Subset of MPLS (without IP functionality)
• Packet-based service support via point-to-point connection
• No dynamic control protocol

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 131
Layer 2 testing
• Simplified data plane and forwarding

• End-to-end OAM
• Protection switching
MPLS-TP provides transport service using pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge

(PWE3) technology.
Figure 27 summarizes the evolution of MPLS-TP from MPLS via T-MPLS.
Figure 27 MPLS-TP evolution
Transmitting and analyzing MPLS-TP traffic

You can use the instrument to send and receive MPLS-TP OAM messages or generate
Ethernet traffic on a specific pseudo-wire inside a specific tunnel and analyze any
MPLS-TP traffic present on the Ethernet link.
To transmit and analyze L2 MPLS-TP traffic
select the L2 MPLS-TP application for the interface you are testing. Refer to
Table 7 on page 80 for a list of applications.
3 Specify the Service Provider Frame settings:
– Encapsulation - None or VLAN
– Frame Type - DIX or 802.3
– Control Word - Specify ON or OFF to indicate whether an optional control
word (fixed to all zeroes) should be inserted before the payload.
For more information on the settings, see “Specifying Ethernet frame settings” on
page 105

Page 132 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Layer 2 testing
4 If VLAN was the encapsulation method selected, select the VLAN field on the
image of the outgoing frame at the bottom of the page. Define the VLANID and
the User Pri(ority).
NOTE: Only one VLAN is supported.
5 Select the OAM tab, and then do the following:
a In the options list on the left side of the tab, select Common Header and then
specify the settings:
Setting Description
Type Specifies the type of OAM transport service to be used:
MPLS-TP, T-MPLS or MPLS.
Layer Specifies the layer that OAM is operating on: PW, LSP,
or Section.
PW is only available if the Control Word field is set to
ON on the Ethernet setup tab.
Label Indicates the OAM encoding type, in label 13 (GAL) or
label 14 (OAL).
ACH Channel Type Specifies the channel type field in the associated chan-
nel header (ACH).
Only appears if the Label Type is label 13.
Traffic Class Specifies the traffic class field in the generic associated
channel label (GAL).
Only appears if the Label Type is label 13 and if using
the Section or LSP layer.
TTL Specifies the time to live (TTL) field.
If the Label Type is label 13, this only appears if using
Section or LSP layer. For label 14, it is always available.
Per the y.17tom specification, this setting is applicable
when LBM/LBR is enabled. If LBM/LBR is not enabled,
this field is fixed to 1, even if set to something else.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 133
Layer 2 testing
b In the options list on the left side of the tab, select CCM (except when
Y.1711(MPLS) was selected for type) and then specify the settings:
Setting Description
Continuity Checking Specifies whether to transmit/receive CCM mes-
sages.
LOC threshold Specifies the number of messages required to reach
the LOC threshold.
CCM Rate Specifies the rate at which CCM frames are transmit-
ted and the rate at which they are expected to be
received.
MEG End Point ID Specifies the local and peer MEG End Point ID.
Maintenance Domain Specifies the Maintenance Domain Level.
Level
Specify Domain ID Indicates whether the Domain ID needs to be speci-
fied.as part of the Maintenance Association ID.
Maintenance Association Specifies the Maintenance Association.
ID
c In the options list on the left side of the tab, select AIS (except when
Y.1711(MPLS) was selected for type), and then specify the settings:
Setting Description
AIS State Specifies whether to enable AIS.
Maintenance Domain Specifies the Maintenance Domain Level.
Level
AIS Rate Specifies the rate at which AIS indications are
sent. It is fixed to 1 second if the Label type is
Label 14 (OAL).
d In the options list on the left side of the tab, select LBM/LBR (except when
Y.1711(MPLS) was selected for type) and then specify the settings.
Setting Description
LBM/LBR (ping) Specifies whether to transmit/receive LBM/LBR
messages.
Maintenance Domain Level Specifies the Maintenance Domain Level.
MEG End Point ID Specifies the local and peer MEG End Point ID.
Maintenance Association ID Specifies the Maintenance Association.
e In the options list on the left side of the tab, if the Common Header type is set
to Y.1711(MPLS), select CV/FFD to turn on and set the Connectivity Verifica-

Page 134 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Layer 2 testing
tion and Fast Forward Detection settings.
Setting Description
CV/FFD Specifies whether the Connectivity Verification is activated
Type Specifies the type of Connectivity Verification to be
employed: CV or FFD
LSP TTSI
LSR ID (IPv6) Specifies the sixteen-bit source ID of the LSR (IPv6 only)
for the LSP Trail Source Termination Identifier
Specifies the sixteen-bit source ID of the tunnel containing
LSP ID (Tunnel ID) the LSP Trail Source Termination Identifier data.
Expected LSP TTSI Same as above, for received signal

Frequency Specifies the transmission frequency of the FFD packet
(FFD only).
f In the options list on the left side of the tab, if the Common Header type is set
to Y.1711(MPLS), select BDI and /or FDI to turn on and set the Backward
Defect Indication and/or Forward Defect Indication settings. The settings are
identical for either BDI or FDI.
Setting Description
BDI Specifies whether the Backward Defect Indication is acti-
vated
LSP TTSI
LSR ID (IPv6) Specifies the sixteen-bit source ID of the LSR (IPv6 only)
for the LSP Trail Source Termination Identifier
Specifies the sixteen-bit source ID of the tunnel containing
LSP ID (Tunnel ID) the LSP Trail Source Termination Identifier data.
Defect Type Specifies the type of defect indicated by the BDI or FDI.
Defect Location Specifies the 16-bit autonomous system number for the
defect location.

9 Verify that the green Signal Present and Link Active LEDs are illuminated.
11 Use the OAM action buttons to manually insert an AIS, RDI, or LBM (AIS when
AIS is enabled, RDI when CCM is enabled, or LBM when LBM is enabled).
12 Observe the Ethernet Service OAM results.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 135
Layer 2 testing
You have analyzed MPLS-TP traffic.
NOTE:
If capturing and analyzing MPLS-TP data using Wireshark, please note the fol-
lowing:
– If the transmitting unit’s destination MAC address contains a 6 in the first
four bits, Wireshark will interpret this as the fixed version field at the start
of an IPv6 packet and decode it as such.
– Wireshark does not support decoding of T-MPLS OAM PDUs and will
decode OAM PDUs according to ITU-T Y.1711 when it encounters label 13
(OAL), which will show erroneous fields.
Using J-Proof to verify layer 2 transparency

You can use the instrument to verify that an Ethernet circuit can support a variety of
control protocols (such as CDP, VTP, STP, and RSTP), irrespective of the underlying
transport method.
NOTE:
It is not possible to run OWD at the same time as a J-Proof test.
If the Test Mode is set to J-Proof for your application, you must actively transmit the test
frames by pressing the Start Frame Sequence action button. Your unit will not auto-
matically transmit test frames in this mode, even if automatic traffic generation is
enabled.
NOTE:
Legacy Viavi test instruments identify the J-Proof applications as Layer 2 or
L2 Transparency tests throughout their user interfaces. They are compatible
with the J-Proof applications.
Understanding transparent loopbacks

When a Viavi Ethernet test instrument sends a standard loopup message, the receiving
test instrument only loops back unicast test frames that satisfy its filter criteria. Pause
frames, control frames, and broadcast or multicast frames are not looped back.
When you verify layer 2 transparency, you need the receiving test instrument to loop-
back all test frames, including control frames and frames carrying a broadcast or multi-
cast address. To do so, you must place the traffic originating instrument into J-Proof
(transparency) mode, and then specify the settings for the outgoing loop-up frame.
When the receiving instrument receives the transparent loop-up frame, it is automati-
cally placed into transparent loopback mode, and it returns all received test frames. You
do not need to specify filter settings on the receiving instrument.
When initiating a transparent loopback from the traffic originating instrument, you can
send the loop-up frame to a specific test instrument (by specifying the appropriate

Page 136 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Layer 2 testing
unicast destination address), or you can send a broadcast loopup frame to loop-up the
first test instrument that replies within the broadcast boundary.
When the test is completed, the far end instrument is automatically taken out of loop up
mode.
Configuring the traffic originating instrument

Before verifying layer 2 transparency, you must place the traffic originating instrument
into J-Proof mode, specify the settings for the outgoing loop-up frame, and configure
the outgoing control frames.
To configure the traffic originating instrument
select the Layer 2 Traffic test application for the interface you are testing. Refer to
Table 4 on page 79 for a list of layer 2 applications.
3 Select the Ethernet tab, and then do the following:
a In Test Mode, select J-Proof.
b Specify the remaining settings that define the characteristics of the trans-
mitted loop back frame (see “Specifying Ethernet frame settings” on
page 105). If you are looping up a specific test instrument, be certain to
specify a unicast destination address for the frame.
Bear in mind that the encapsulation settings for outgoing control frames (as
opposed to the loop-up frame) are specified on the J-Proof tab for each type of
control frame.
4 Select the J-Proof tab. By default, a single test frame appears in the frame list.
You can specify a name for the frame, the control protocol format, encapsulation
settings, the number of frames of this type to transmit (the count), the frame rate,
and the timeout period.
To modify the settings for the transmitted frame:
a If you want to name the frame, select the Test Frame setting to launch a
keypad, and then type a name using up to twenty characters. Select OK to
close the keypad.
b In Protocol, select the control protocol format for the frame.
c In Encap., select None, VLAN, or Q-in-Q. If you select VLAN or Q-in-Q, be
certain to do the following:
VLAN. Select the VLAN field on the image of the outgoing frame at the
bottom of the tab, and then specify the VLAN ID and User Priority for the
frame. If you want the PBit to increment for each transmitted frame, select
PBit Increment. For details on VLAN settings, refer to “Configuring VLAN
tagged traffic” on page 112.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 137
Layer 2 testing
Q-in-Q. Select the SVLAN field on the image of the outgoing frame at the
bottom of the tab, and then specify the service provider’s SVLAN ID, SVLAN
User Priority, DEI Bit, and SVLAN TPID for the frame. If you want the PBit
to increment for each transmitted frame, select PBit Increment.
Select the CVLAN field, and then specify the customer VLAN ID and User
Priority for the frame. If you want the PBit to increment for each transmitted
frame, select PBit Increment. For details on Q-in-Q settings, refer to “Config-
uring Q-in-Q traffic” on page 113.
d In Count, specify the number of frames you want to transmit.
e In Rate (fr/sec), enter the rate at which you want to transmit the frames.
f In Timeout (msec), enter the number of milliseconds the instrument will wait
to receive the looped back frame before stopping transmission of frames.
5 If you want to transmit control frames for different protocols, do the following for
each protocol:
a Select the Add Frame soft key.
b Specify the settings listed in step 4 for each type of frame, or use the Quick
Config soft key populate the frame list with all types of control frames, or
frame types for a particular protocol family. You can also assign common
encapsulation settings to all of the frame types that appear in the list using
the Quick Config soft key (see “Using Quick Config to configure test frames”
on page 138).
The traffic originating instrument is configured for a layer 2 transparency test.
Using Quick Config to configure test frames

You can quickly populate the Frames List with frame types for all available protocols, or
a particular family of protocols. When you do so, all current frame settings will be over-
written, and the frame types generated by the instrument will all share the same encap-
sulation settings.
After populating the list using the Quick Config soft key, you can then optionally edit the
settings for the generated frame types. For example, you can assign different VLAN
priorities to the frame types.
To quickly generate and configure test frames

Page 138 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Layer 2 testing
3 Select the Ethernet tab, and then do the following:

a In Test Mode, select J-Proof.
b Specify the settings for the outgoing loop-up frame (see step 3 on page 137
of “Configuring the traffic originating instrument”).
4 Select the J-Proof tab, and then select the Quick Config soft key.
The Quick Config dialog box appears.
Setting Value
Intensity Select one of the following:
– Full. Select full to transmit 100 frames per protocol.
– Quick. Select Quick to transmit 10 frames per protocol.
Family Select one of the following:
– All. Select All to transmit frames for every supported protocol.
– Spanning Tree. Select Spanning to transmit STP, RSTP, and
MSTP frames.
– Cisco. Select Cisco to transmit CDP, VTP, PagP, UDLD, DTP,
PVST-PVST+, ISL, and STP-ULFAST frames.
– IEEE. Select IEEE to transmit GMRP, GVRP, LACP, VLAN-
BRDGSTP, and 802.1d frames.
Encapsulation Select one of the following, and then specify the associated
VLAN and, if applicable, SVLAN settings:
– None. Select None if you do not want to transmit encapsu-
lated frames.
– VLAN. Select VLAN to transmit VLAN-tagged frames, then
specify the associated settings. For details, refer to step c on
page 137.
– Q-in-Q. Select Q-in-Q to transmit Q-in-Q encapsulated
frames, and then specify the associated customer and service
provider settings. For details, refer to step c on page 137.
6 Select OK to store the settings and populate the Frames List.

7 Optional. If you would like to change settings for one or more of the frame types,
do so.
The frame types are generated.
Verifying the far end filter settings

After you configure the traffic originating instrument, verify that the Encapsulation
setting for the Ethernet filter is set to Don’t Care. This ensures that traffic will be looped
back.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 139
Layer 2 testing
Initiating the transparent loopback

After you configure the traffic originating instrument, and check the far end instrument’s
filter settings, you can initiate the transparent loopback.
To initiate the transparent loopback
1 If you are verifying transparency on an optical circuit, turn the Laser ON.
2 On the Main screen, select the Actions action panel, then select Loop Up. The
instrument sends the loop-up frame.
When the receiving instrument is placed in J-Proof transparent loopback mode, a

message appears stating that the remote transparent loop up was successful. You are
ready to transmit the test frames.
Starting the frame sequence

After turning the laser ON (if you are testing on an optical circuit), and placing the
second test instrument into transparent loopback mode, you can transmit the test
frames. The frames are transmitted sequentially in the sequence used on the Frames
List.
To transmit test frames
• On the Main screen, if you haven’t already done so, select the Actions action
panel, then select Start Frame Sequence. The instrument transmits the frames
sequentially as they appear in the Frames List.
The test frames are transmitted.
Observing transparency results

After transmitting and looping back test frames, you can observe results associated
with transparency testing in the J-Proof category.
To observe transparency results
• On the Main screen, set the result group to Ethernet, and the result category to J-
Proof. Counts of transmitted and received frames, and the pass/fail status
appears for each protocol.
Transparency results are displayed. For detailed result descriptions, refer to “J-Proof
(transparency) results” on page 509.
NOTE:
When your instrument is in Transparent test mode, Payload Analysis is auto-
matically turned OFF. If you return to Traffic mode, Payload Analysis is turned
back ON.

Page 140 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Layer 3 testing
Layer 3 testing
Using the instrument, you can transmit, monitor, and analyze layer 3 IPv4 or IPv6 traffic.
Step-by-step instructions are provided in this section for the following:
• “Specifying L3 interface settings” on page 141
• “Configuring MPLS traffic” on page 143
• “Specifying transmitted IPv4 packet settings” on page 147
• “Specifying IPv4 filter settings” on page 149
• “Specifying transmitted IPv6 packet settings” on page 150
• “Specifying IPv6 filter settings” on page 152
• “Transmitting and analyzing IP traffic” on page 153
• “Ping testing” on page 154
• “Running Traceroute” on page 157
• “Monitoring IP traffic” on page 158
NOTE: IPv4 applications

You must select an IPv4 application if you intend to do the following:
• Establish PPPoE sessions
• Transmit and analyze MPLS encapsulated traffic on electrical or optical
circuits.
NOTE: IPv6 applications

You can only run a single IPv6 application at a time. You can run other applica-
tions from other test ports (for example, a layer 2 Ethernet or layer 3 IPv4 appli-
cation) while running one IPv6 application.
Specifying L3 interface settings

Before you transmit traffic, you can specify interface settings. Specification of the inter-
face settings is similar for Layer 2, 3 and 4 applications. Explanation of these settings
can be found at “Specifying interface settings” on page 102.
Specifying the data mode and link initialization settings

Before transmitting layer 3 traffic, you must specify whether you are transmitting IPoE
or PPPoE traffic (if you are testing on an electrical, 1 GigE optical, or 100 Mbps optical
circuit), and provide the appropriate link initialization settings.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 141
Layer 3 testing
To specify the data mode and initialization settings
page 79 through Table 5 on page 80 for a list of layer 3 applications. Table 18 on
page 236 lists layer 4 applications.
– None. If you do not want to encapsulate transmitted traffic, select None.
– MPLS. If you are testing on an MPLS network, and you want to transmit
traffic with a MPLS header, select MPLS, and then refer to “Configuring
MPLS traffic” on page 143.
NOTE: If you selected a Terminate application, and you want to filter received
traffic using MPLS criteria, you must select MPLS encapsulation for transmitted
traffic.
4 In Data Mode, specify IPoE or PPoE.
5 If you want the unit to issue an ARP request to determine the destination MAC
address of the instrument’s link partner, in ARP mode, select Enabled; otherwise,
select Disabled, and then be certain to manually specify the destination MAC
address, (see “Specifying Ethernet frame settings” on page 105).
If you enabled ARP, and you only want to respond to ARP requests from devices
on the same VLAN specified for transmitted traffic, select Match VLAN ID(s).
NOTE: If you need your unit to respond to ARP requests from other devices (for
example, a second test instrument on the circuit), be certain to enable ARP.
6 In Frame Type, specify DIX or 802.3.
7 In Length Type, indicate whether you want to specify the length as a frame size or
as a packet length.
– Frame Size. If you select Frame Size, select a pre-defined size, or select
User Defined or Jumbo, and then specify the size. The calculated packet
length (in bytes) appears to the right of the field.
– Packet Length. If you select Packet Length, select a pre-defined length, or
select User Defined, Jumbo or EMIX and then specify the length. The calcu-
lated frame size (in bytes) appears to the right of the field.
defined random frame sizes, including Jumbo, or select Reset to transmit
frames of randomly generated sizes based on the seven RFC 2544 frame
length recommendations. EMIX also adds the EMIX Cycle Length field that
controls how many frame entries are sent, in order, before cycling back to the
first frame entry and repeating. To define the number of frame entries, enter a
number between 1 and 8.

Page 142 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Layer 3 testing
8 If you want to specify a source address for the traffic, select SA, and then specify
the following:
– Source MAC Address. Select Factory Default or User Defined.
– User MAC Address. If you specified User Defined, enter the source MAC
address using a 6 byte hexadecimal format.
9 Select the Filter tab, and then specify the Ethernet filter settings for the destina-
tion type, source type, and encapsulation.
Configuring MPLS traffic
To configure MPLS traffic
1 After selecting MPLS as your encapsulation, do the following:

a In EtherType, select MPLS Unicast or MPLS Multicast.
b Under Configure outgoing frames, select MPLS1 Label, and then specify the
label the network will use to route the traffic, the Priority, and the TTL value.
NOTE: MPLS settings are only available when configuring layer 3 test applica-
tions.
2 Optional. If you want to configure a second MPLS label for your traffic, in MPLS
Label #, select 2, and then repeat step 1 for the second label.
NOTE: When a unit is in LLB mode, it always uses the labels specified for the
transmitted traffic; therefore:
– If your near-end module is in LLB mode and is configured to transmit traffic
with a second MPLS label, but the module's link partner is configured to
transmit traffic with a single label, the out of sequence and lost frames counts
reported by the module's link partner may increment if the incoming frame
rate is too high.
– If your near-end module is in LLB mode, and is configured to transmit traffic
with a single MPLS label, but the module's link partner is configured to
transmit traffic with more than one label, the near-end module’s receive band-
width utilization will exceed its transmit bandwidth utilization.
3 Based on your settings, the unit automatically calculates and displays the frame
size in the Calc. Frame Size field. Return to step – on page 108 of “Specifying
Ethernet frame settings” for details on specifying the remaining settings.
MPLS settings are specified.
Specifying BFD settings

Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) is a network protocol used to detect faults
between two forwarding engines connected by a link.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 143
Layer 3 testing
BFD is supported in the following IPv4 applications:

– 10/100/1000 Layer 3 Traffic Term
– 10/100/1000 Layer 4 Traffic Term
– 1GigE Layer 3 Traffic Term
To specify BFD settings
1 Select any of the supported IPv4 applications.

2 Select the Setup soft key, and then click the BFD tab.
3 Click Enabled in the BFD Mode drop-down box. The following options will
appear:
Settings Parameters
Message Couple IP Settings. Select No if you prefer to have the BFD
Addressing session use its own Local and Remote IP addresses and Sub-
net Mask. If you select Yes, the settings for Local IP, Subnet
Mask, and Remote IP will be copied to the IP setup tab.
Message Prior- TOS/DSCP. This value will be set in all BFD messages.
ity User Priority. If configured encapsulation is set to VLAN or Q-
in-Q, BFD messages can be configured to be sent with their
own Priority value.
Message Con- Desired Min Tx Interval. This value defines the rate, at which
trol the BFD messages will be sent.
Required Min Rx Interval. This value defines the required
minimum rate, at which the BFD messages will be received.
Detect Multiplier. This value defines how many consecutive
missed messages will cause BFD to declare the session as
Down.
4 Session Status. The status shows whether the BFD session is currently Up or
Down.
Specifying PPPoE settings

In addition to the settings you specify to establish an Ethernet link, when establishing a
PPPoE session (available for compatible IPv4 Terminate applications only), you also
specify settings that allow you to log in to the PPPoE peer. The settings indicate
whether you want your unit to emulate a PPPoE client or server, and provide the user
name, password, and other information required to establish the session.

Page 144 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Layer 3 testing
To specify the PPPoE settings and establish a connection
select an IPv4 test application in Terminate mode for the e10/100/1000 electrical
interface.
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the Ethernet tab. Verify that the Data
Mode is set to PPPoE.
3 Go to the PPP setup tab, then specify the following settings. The Provider Name,
Password, and Service Name you specify for the instrument must match those of
its PPPoE peer:
Settings Parameters
PPP Mode – Client. In most instances, the instrument should emulate a
PPPoE client. If you select Client mode, you do not need to
specify the Local IP, Subnet Mask, or Remote IP settings
on the IP setup tab because they will be provided by a
PPPoE server.
– Server. Select Server mode if the unit must operate as a
PPPoE server. For example, if the unit is positioned before
a BBRAR (Broadband Remote Access Router), it must
function as a server. If you select Server mode, you must
specify the Local IP, Subnet Mask, or Remote IP settings
on the IP setup tab.
User Name Enter a valid user name for the ISP (Internet Service Provider).
Password Enter the password for the user name that you specified.
Remember passwords are often case-sensitive.
Service Provider If the ISP requires the provider’s domain name be included
with the User Name (for example, joesmith@provider.net),
select this setting, and then specify the provider name. An at
sign (@) and the provider name will automatically be
appended to the User Name that you specified, and will be
carried in the packet.
Service Name Select this setting if you want to specify a service name. If you
specify a service name, your unit will only attempt to establish
a PPPoE session with the service you specify. The default ser-
vice name is “Viavi”.

– If the instrument is emulating a PPPoE client, proceed to step 5. The unit will
use a static IP address.
– If the instrument is emulating a PPPoE server, go to the IP setup tab, and
then specify the following settings:
Settings Parameters
Local IP Enter the source IP address for traffic generated by your
unit. This address is used as the remote IP address for the
PPPoE client.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 145
Layer 3 testing
Settings Parameters
Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask.
Remote IP Enter remote IP address for the instrument server. This
address is used as the local (source) IP address on the cli-
ent side of the connection.
NOTE:
The instrument’s PPPoE server is a demo server and does not support full
server functionality.
5 If you need to specify other settings for the test, do so; otherwise, return to the
Main screen and do the following:
a Press the PPPoE Client Log-On or PPPoE Server Log-On Action key.
The unit discovers the MAC address of the PPPoE peer, and then uses the
MAC address in combination with a session ID to uniquely identify the
session.
b Observe the messages and events associated with the PPPoE login process.
For a list of potential messages, see “PPPoE messages” on page 146.
The PPPoE session is established. The instrument will continuously send PPP echoes
and replies to keep the session established.
PPPoE messages
The following messages may appear in the during the PPPoE login process.
Table 11 PPPoE messages
Message Typically Indicates: Resolution

PPP Authentication The user name, password, – It is possible that the user name and
Failed or provider name you speci- password you specified were not
fied were not accepted by recognized by the PPPoE server.
the PPPoE server. Verify that you specified the correct
name and password.
– If the PPPoE server requires a pro-
vider name, verify that the name
you specified when you configured
the PPP settings is correct.
– It is possible that the PPPoE server
does not require a provider name; if
so, specifying one in the PPP set-
tings results in a failed authentica-
tion. Set the Provider Name setting
to No, and then try to establish the
session again.
– Try to establish a new session with
the server.

Page 146 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Layer 3 testing
Table 11 PPPoE messages (Continued)
Message Typically Indicates: Resolution

PPPoE Timeout The instrument is not physi- – Verify that the instrument is physi-
cally connected to a PPPoE cally connected to the server.
server, or it is configured to – Verify that the service name you
use a service that is not sup- specified is correct, or, if a service
ported by the server. name is not required by the server,
set the Service Name setting to No.
– Try to establish a new session with
the server.
Data Layer Stopped The physical Ethernet link to Reconnect the physical Ethernet link.
the instrument is lost. The instrument will attempt to recon-
nect to the server.
PPP LCP Failed There is a problem with the Try to establish a new session with the
PPP IPCP Failed server. server.
PPPoE Failed
PPP Up Failed The PPPoE server dropped Try to establish a new session with the
a successful PPPoE ses- server.
sion.
Internal Error - Restart The instrument experienced Try to establish a new session with the
PPPoE an internal error. server.
Terminating a PPPoE session

After testing is complete, you must manually terminate the PPPoE session.
To terminate a PPPoE session
• Press the PPPoE Client Log-Off or PPPoE Server Log-Off Action key.
Specifying transmitted IPv4 packet settings

Before you transmit layer 3 IPv4 traffic, you can specify the IP characteristics of the
traffic, such as the destination IP address, the type of payload, and the type of service.
To specify transmitted IPv4 packet settings
select the layer 3 or layer 4 IPv4 test application for the interface you are testing.
Refer to Table 4 on page 79 through Table 5 on page 80 for a list of layer 3 appli-
cations. Table 18 on page 236 lists layer 4 applications.
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the IP tab.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 147
Layer 3 testing
as a packet length.
– Frame Size. If you select Frame Size, you must specify the size on the
Ethernet tab, then return to the IP tab to specify the remaining settings.
select User Defined or Jumbo and then specify the length. The calculated
frame size (in bytes) appears to the right of the field.
Figure 28 Configure Frame Size
4 On the illustration of the IP packet, select the TOS/DSCP field, and then do the
following to indicate how the packet should be prioritized during the transmission:
– In Type, select TOS or DSCP.
– Specify the TOS or DSCP value. DSCP values are shown as code points with
their decimal values in ( ) following. For example: EF(46).
5 Select the TTL field, and then specify maximum number of hops to travel before
the packet is dropped.
6 Select the Source/Destination Address field, and then specify the Source IP
Type, Source IP, Default Gateway, Subnet Mask and Destination IP. For load
balanced situations a fixed IPv4 length may cause problems. ID incrementing can
eliminate this problem. To enable ID incrementing, set the IP ID Increment field to
Enable.

Page 148 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Layer 3 testing
7 To verify the validity of the Destination IP entered, select the Ping button. If a
connection to the specified IP address is possible, a green check mark will display
after the Destination IP field. If no connection is possible a red “X” will appear.
This ping result will also appear on the ping button on the Results page.
NOTE:
For optical applications the Laser must be ON to ping the destination IP.
8 Select the Data field, and then do the following:

– If you want to transmit packets with a time stamp and sequence number,
select Acterna.
Indicate whether you want the payload to carry a BERT pattern, or a Fill-Byte
pattern, then specify the pattern.
NOTE:
In 10M/100M/1GbE/10G, 40Gig,and 100Gig Traffic applications, you can also
select either Version 2 or Version 3 Acterna Payload (ATP). To successfully use
the Version 3 payload, the remote equipment must be capable of receiving Ver-
sion 3 payloads. Verify compatibility before selecting Version 3 payloads.
– If you are measuring round trip delay on a 10 Gigabit circuit, in RTD Setup,
indicate whether you want to measure delay with a high degree of precision,
or a low degree of precision. In most instances, you should select High
Precision - Low Delay.
NOTE: You must select an Acterna payload to measure round trip delay and
count lost packets.
– If you want to populate the payload by repeating a specific pattern of bytes,
select Fill Byte, type the byte value using a 1 byte hexadecimal format, and
then specify the Protocol.
The transmitted IPv4 packet settings are specified.
Specifying IPv4 filter settings

Before transmitting layer 3 IPv4 traffic, you can optionally specify settings that indicate
the expected received payload and determine which packets will pass through the
receive filter and be counted in the test result categories for filtered IP traffic. The
To specify received IPv4 packet settings
select the IPv4 test application for the interface you are testing. Refer to Table 4
on page 79 through Table 5 on page 80 for lists of layer 3 applications. Table 18

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 149
Layer 3 testing
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the Filters tab.
Detailed.
4 Specify the Ethernet filter settings (see “Specifying Ethernet filter settings” on
page 114.
5 To specify layer 3 filter settings, in the panel on the left side of the tab, select IP.
6 Set the IP Filter to Enable., then do the following:
a If you are running an application in Monitor mode, in IP Version, select IPv4.
b In Address Filter, select one of the following:
Single Direction. To pass through the filter, traffic must satisfy the source
and destination address criteria you specified for the filter to be reflected in
the L3 Filter Counts and L3 Filter Stats result categories.
Either Direction. The filter will not care which direction the traffic is coming
from; therefore, the source address carried in the filtered traffic can be the
source address of the near-end unit or port, or the source address of the far
end unit or port. Traffic from either source will be reflected in the L3 Filter
Counts and L3 Filter Stats result categories.
c On the illustration of the IP packet, select the TOS/DSCP, Protocol, Source
IP, or Destination IP field, and then enter the filter criteria. This is the criteria
that must be carried in the analyzed (filtered) traffic. For descriptions of each
of these settings, see “Specifying transmitted IPv4 packet settings” on
page 147.
7 If you want the module to monitor and analyze live Ethernet traffic, in the panel on
the left side of the tab, select Rx Payload, then turn Payload Analysis Off. The
instrument will suppress lost frames (LF) in their associated result counts and as
triggers for LEDs.
The filter settings for IPv4 packets are specified.
Specifying transmitted IPv6 packet settings

Before you transmit layer 3 IPv6 traffic, you can specify the IP characteristics of the
traffic, such as the source type and default gateway.
To specify transmitted IPv6 packet settings
select the layer 3 or layer 4 IPv6 test application for the interface you are testing.
Refer to Table 4 on page 79 through Table 5 on page 80 for a list of layer 3 appli-
cations. Table 18 on page 236 lists layer 4 applications.
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the IP tab.

Page 150 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Layer 3 testing
as a packet length.
– Frame Size. If you select Frame Size, you must specify the size on the
Ethernet tab, then return to the IP tab to specify the remaining settings.
select User Defined, Jumbo, or Random and then specify the length. The
calculated frame size (in bytes) appears to the right of the field.
Figure 29 Configure Random Frame Size
4 On the illustration of the IP packet, select the Traffic Class field, and then specify
a number representing the traffic class using a hexadecimal format ranging from
0x0 to 0xFF.
5 Select the Flow Label field. If you are certain the routers on the circuit support
flow labels for traffic prioritization, specify the flow label using a hexidecimal
format ranging from 0x0 to 0xFFFFF; otherwise, use the default (0x0).
6 Select the Next Header field, then specify the code representing the type of data
carried in the next header in the packet using a hexidecimal format ranging from
0x0 to 0xFF.
7 Select the Hop Limit field, then specify the time after which a packet can be
deleted by any device on a circuit as a number of hops. The default Hop Limit
setting is 64 hops.
8 Select the Source Address field, then select one of the following:
– Stateful. Select Stateful if you want to obtain the required global, default
gateway, and DNS server addresses from a DHCPv6 server.
– Stateless. Select Stateless if you know that routers on the network allow
stateless configuration. When you use Stateless configuration, the instrument
generates a tentative link-local address, and then performs Duplicate

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 151
Layer 3 testing
Address Detection to verify that the address isn’t already used. If DAD is
successful, the instrument then obtains a subnet prefix from the router to
build the required global address.
– Manual. Select Manual if you want to specify the source link-local address,
global address, subnet prefix length, and default gateway.
9 Select the Destination Address field, and then specify the destination address
for the traffic.
10 Select the Data field, and then select do the following:
– If you want to transmit packets with a time stamp and sequence number,
select Acterna.
Indicate whether you want the payload to carry a BERT pattern, or a Fill-Byte
pattern, then specify the pattern.
– If you are measuring round trip delay on a 10 Gigabit circuit, in RTD Setup,
count lost packets.
– If you want to populate the payload by repeating a specific pattern of bytes,
select Fill Byte, type the byte value using a 1 byte hexadecimal format, and
then specify the Protocol.
The transmitted IPv6 packet settings are specified.
Specifying IPv6 filter settings

Before transmitting layer 3 IPv6 traffic, you can optionally specify settings that indicate
the expected received payload and determine which packets will pass through the
receive filter and be counted in the test result categories for filtered IPv6 traffic. The
To specify received IPv6 packet settings
select the IPv6 test application for the interface you are testing. Refer to Table 4
on page 79 through Table 5 on page 80 for lists of layer 3 applications. Table 18
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the Filters tab.
Detailed.
4 Specify the Ethernet filter settings (see “Specifying Ethernet filter settings” on
page 114.
5 To specify layer 3 filter settings, in the panel on the left side of the tab, select IP.

Page 152 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Layer 3 testing
6 Set the IP Filter to Enable, then do the following:

a If you are running an application in Monitor mode, in IP Version, select IPv6.
b In Address Filter, select one of the following:
Single Direction. To pass through the filter, traffic must satisfy the source
and destination address criteria you specified for the filter to be reflected in
the L3 Filter Counts and L3 Filter Stats result categories.
Either Direction. The filter will not care which direction the traffic is coming
from; therefore, the source address carried in the filtered traffic can be the
source address of the near-end unit or port, or the source address of the far
end unit or port. Traffic from either source will be reflected in the L3 Filter
Counts and L3 Filter Stats result categories.
c On the illustration of the IP packet, select the Traffic Class, Next Header,
Source Address, or Destination Address field, and then enter the filter
criteria. This is the criteria that must be carried in the analyzed (filtered)
traffic. For descriptions of each of these settings, see “Specifying transmitted
IPv6 packet settings” on page 150
7 If you want the module to monitor and analyze live Ethernet traffic, in the panel on
the left side of the tab, select Rx Payload, then turn Payload Analysis Off. The
instrument will suppress lost frames (LF) in their associated result counts and as
triggers for LEDs.
The filter settings for IPv6 packets are specified.
Transmitting and analyzing IP traffic

Before you transmit layer 3 IP traffic, you must specify:
• IP characteristics of the transmitted traffic (see “Specifying transmitted IPv4
packet settings” on page 147).
• IP characteristics used to filter received traffic (see “Specifying IPv4 filter settings”
on page 149).
After you configure the layer 3 IP settings, and you either manually specify the destina-
tion device’s MAC address, or the unit determines the address using ARP, you are
ready to transmit traffic over the link.
To transmit and analyze IP traffic
1 Use the Test Menu to select the layer 3 IP traffic terminate test application for the
interface you are testing (refer to Table 4 on page 79 through Table 5 on page 80
for a list of applications).

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 153
Layer 3 testing
3 Specify settings that define the Ethernet frame and the IP packet characteristics of
the transmitted traffic (see “Specifying transmitted IPv4 packet settings” on
page 147).
4 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the Ethernet filter tab to specify the
Ethernet filter settings (see “Specifying Ethernet filter settings” on page 114.
5 Select the IP Filter tab to specify settings that filter the received traffic based on
specified packet characteristics (see “Specifying IPv4 filter settings” on page 149).
10 Select Start Traffic (for constant or bursty loads) or Start Ramp (for ramped
loads) to transmit traffic over the circuit.
11 Verify that the green Signal Present, Sync Acquired, Link Active, and IP Packet
Detect LEDs are illuminated.
12 At a minimum, observe the summary, layer 2 and 3 link counts and statistics, layer
2 and 3 filter counts and statistics, layer 3 configuration status, and error statistics.
You have analyzed IP traffic.
Ping testing
Using the instrument, you can verify connectivity with another layer 3 or IP device by
sending ping request packets to the device. The device then responds to the ping
request with a ping reply (if the device is responsive), or with another message indi-
cating the reason no ping reply was sent.
Ping testing tells you if the destination device is reachable, how long it took the ping
packet to travel to the destination device and back to the Transport Module, and if ping
packets were dropped or lost along the way.
Before you transmit ping request packets, you must specify:

• Ethernet Frame settings (see “Specifying Ethernet frame settings” on page 105.
Bear in mind that Jumbo packets are only supported for DIX traffic (the 802.3
specification does not support jumbo packets).
Jumbo frames are also not supported when the instrument is configure to transmit
fast ping packets.
• IP settings (see “Specifying IP settings for Ping and Traceroute testing” on
page 155).

Page 154 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Layer 3 testing
After you specify the ping settings, you are ready to transmit ping request packets.
NOTES:
If you are transmitting ping packets larger than 2000 bytes to an MTS 8000
Transport Module, the Transport Module will not respond. This is not an issue
when testing using two MSAMs, or one MSAM and an FST-2802.
When transmitting ping packets, your instrument automatically inserts a 15uS
delay. The delay will be reflected in corresponding test results within the Ping
and Delay categories.
Specifying IP settings for Ping and Traceroute testing

Before you transmit ping request packets or run the Traceroute application, you can
specify settings indicating the source of the IP address (static, or assigned by a DHCP
server), and the destination type (IP address or host name), and attributes of the ping
request packets (type, size, type of service, and time to live). ARP is always enabled
when running Ping and Traceroute applications.
To specify IP settings
select the Ping application for the interface you are testing (refer to Table 4 on
page 79 through Table 5 on page 80 for a list of applications).
2 Select the Setup soft key, select the Ethernet tab, and then specify the Ethernet
frame settings (see “Specifying Ethernet frame settings” on page 105). Be certain
to set the data mode (IPoE or PPPoE).
3 Select the IP tab.
4 In Source Type, select one of the following:
– Static IP. To manually assign an IP address as the source address for the
traffic, select Static IP, and then type the address, subnet mask, and default
gateway in the corresponding fields.
– DHCP. To allow a DHCP server to assign an IP address, subnet mask, and
default gateway, select DHCP.
5 In Destination Type, select IP Address or Host Name, and then type the destina-
tion IP address or the host name for the ping.
6 If you selected the Ping application, under Ping, specify the following settings:
a In Ping Type, indicate whether you want to transmit a Single ping packet,
Multiple ping packets, a Continuous stream of ping packets, or a Fast
stream of ping packets. If you specify Multiple, enter the number of packets to
transmit.
NOTE: The instrument sends multiple and continuous pings at a rate of 1
ping per second.
It sends fast pings at a rate of once every 100 ms; assuming a response is
received within 100 ms. If the unit doesn’t receive a reply within 100 ms, it will
wait up to one additional second for a reply. If a reply is received, it will then

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 155
Layer 3 testing
send another ping packet. Therefore, this setting may result in very fast ping
transmissions, or slower transmissions, depending on the responsiveness of
the network.
b In Packet Size (Bytes), enter the size of the ping request packet or packets.
c In TOS Type, specify Type of Service or DSCP, and then enter the type of
service code (see “Specifying transmitted IPv4 packet settings” on page 147).
d In Time To Live, specify the number of hops the packet can travel before
being dropped.
NOTE: The default TTL for ping packets is 64.
7 If you selected the Traceroute application, under Traceroute, specify the following
settings:
a In TOS Type, specify Type of Service or DSCP, and then enter the type of
service code *(see “Specifying transmitted IPv4 packet settings” on
page 147).
b In Max Num. Hops (TTL), enter the number of hops or TTL after which the
TTL value stops increasing.
c In Response Time (s), enter the number of seconds the module will wait for a
response from a hop.
The IP settings for ping testing are specified.
Transmitting ping request packets

After you specify interface, frame, and IP settings, you can transmit ping request
packets to verify connectivity.
To transmit ping packets
1 Use the Test Menu to select the layer 3 Ping test application for the interface you
are testing (refer to Table 4 on page 79 through Table 5 on page 80 for a list of
applications).
3 Select the Ethernet Frame tab to specify settings that define the frame character-
istics of the transmitted traffic, and then select the IP tab to specify settings that
characterize the ping packets (see “Specifying IP settings for Ping and Traceroute
testing” on page 155).

Page 156 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Layer 3 testing
illuminated.
8 On the Main screen, select the Ping button to transmit the packet or packets.
9 At a minimum, observe the ping and IP configuration status test results.
You have transmitted ping request packets.
Running Traceroute
Before you run the traceroute application to determine where problems in the network
are occurring, you specify the interface settings, frame characteristics of the traffic, and
settings that control the traceroute application, such as the source and destination IP
addresses, maximum number of hops, and the response time.
To run traceroute
1 Use the Test Menu to select the Traceroute application for the interface you are
testing (refer to Table 4 on page 79 through Table 5 on page 80 for a list of appli-
cations).
3 Select the Setup soft key, select the Ethernet tab, and then specify the Ethernet
frame settings (see “Specifying Ethernet frame settings” on page 105). Be certain
to set the data mode (IPoE or PPPoE).
4 Select the IP tab, and then specify the IP settings for the traceroute (see “Speci-
fying IP settings for Ping and Traceroute testing” on page 155).
illuminated.
9 Using the View menu, set the result display to a full view (Full Size), and then
select the Traceroute result category.
10 Press the Traceroute action button.
11 Observe the traceroute.
The traceroute application is finished.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 157
Layer 3 testing
Monitoring IP traffic
You can use the instrument to monitor IP traffic when you test each of the Ethernet inter-
faces. Before you monitor traffic, you can specify interface settings and settings that
characterize and filter the received IP traffic.
NOTE:
If you are analyzing traffic on an optical circuit, be certain to turn the laser on.
To monitor IP traffic
1 Use the Test Menu to select the layer 3 monitor/through application for the inter-
face you are testing (refer to Table 4 on page 79 through Table 5 on page 80 for a
list of applications).
– If you want to filter the received packets based on their Ethernet frame
settings, select the Ethernet Filter tab, and then proceed to step 4 and
step 5; otherwise, proceed to step 8.
– If you want to filter received MPLS packets based on the MPLS packet
settings, select the Ethernet Filter tab, set encapsulation to MPLS, and then
specify the filter criteria (see “Filtering traffic using MPLS criteria” on
page 121).
4 Under Configure incoming frames, do the following:
– In Destination Type, specify the destination address type corresponding to
the Destination Address in the received frames.
– In Source Type, specify the source address type corresponding to the
Source Address in the received frames.
– If you specified a Unicast or Multicast Source or Destination Type, enter the
corresponding MAC address in the field provided.
5 In Encapsulation, do the following:
– If you want to monitor VLAN, Q-in-Q, or MPLS encapsulated traffic, select the
encapsulation, and then specify the corresponding filter settings.
– If you want to monitor traffic with no encapsulation, select None.
– If you don’t care whether they are tagged, select Don’t Care.
6 If you want to filter the received packets based on their source IP address, desti-
nation IP address, type of service, or IP version, select the IP Filter tab, and then
proceed to step 7; otherwise, proceed to step 8.

Page 158 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
7 In IP Filter, select Enable, and then specify the following filter criteria:
– To filter traffic for a specific source IP address, select Yes, and then type the
source address.
– To filter traffic for a specific destination IP address, select Yes, and then type
the destination address.
– Specify whether you want to filter traffic in a single direction, or in either direc-
tion.
– To filter traffic for a specific source or destination subnet, select Prefix
Length or Subnet Mask, and they type the corresponding value in the field
provided.
– To filter traffic for a specific type of service or DSCP, select TOS or DSCP,
and then type the corresponding value (see “Specifying transmitted IPv4
packet settings” on page 147).
illuminated.
12 If you selected an optical application, select Connect Rx to Tx. This setting does
not appear for electrical applications.
13 At a minimum, observe the summary, layer 3 link statistics and counts, layer 3
filter statistics and counts, layer 3 configuration status, and error statistics.
Layer 3 IP traffic is monitored.

received Ethernet packets, save them on the instrument or to an external USB key, and
using the Wireshark® protocol analyzer.
NOTE:
the traffic stream.
For details, refer to “Capturing packets for analysis” on page 6 of Chapter 1 “Basic
Testing”.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 159
Loop back testing
Loop back testing

Loop back testing allows you to transmit traffic from one Viavi Ethernet test set, and
then loop the traffic back through a second unit on the far end of a circuit. For details,
refer to Chapter 11 “Loop Back Testing”.
Inserting errors or pause frames

Action buttons on the Main screen allow you to insert errors and pause frames into the
traffic stream. If you turn on a particular error insertion rate, the error insertion continues
even after you restart a test or change the test configuration.
If you select a 10 Gigabit WAN application, you can also insert SONET/SDH errors and
alarms as appropriate. For details, see the T-BERD / MTS / SC Sonet / SDH, OTN and
PDH Testing Manual that supports your instrument.
NOTE:
Only errors that are applicable to your test appear for selection. For example,
IP Checksum errors only appear if you selected a layer 3 or layer 4 test appli-
cation; TCP/UDP Checksum errors only appear if you selected a layer 4 test
application.
To insert errors or pause frames
1 Using the Test Menu or Quick Launch screen, select the terminate test application
for the signal, rate, and payload you are testing.
Refer to Table 4 on page 79 for a list of applications.
2 If you are inserting pause frames, specify the pause quanta on the Interface tab
(see “Specifying interface settings” on page 102); otherwise, proceed to step 3.

Page 160 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
3 If you are inserting errors, select one of the following error types; otherwise,
proceed to step 5:
– Code (optical applications only)
– FCS
– BIT (BERT payload only)
– Pattern (Layer 1 BERT, 1 GigE or 10 GigE applications only)
– IP Checksum (Layer 3 only)
– TCP/UDP Checksum (Layer 4 only). TCP/UDP Checksum errors are only
available if you are transmitting fixed BERT patterns. They are not available
when transmitting PRB patterns.
– ATP Payload. You must configure the module to transmit an Acterna payload
to insert ATP Payload errors.
– 10 GigE, 40 GigE and 100 GigE applications
- Remote Fault - Layer 2 and above
- Local Fault - Layer 2 and above
– 40 GigE and 100 GigE applications:
- Alignment Marker
- BIP-8 AM (40 GigE or 100 GigE applications only)
- Block Error on L1 PCS (40 GigE or 100 GigE applications only)
4 Do the following:
– Specify the Insertion Style (Single, Burst, Rate, or Continuous).
- If you specified Burst, specify the number of errors in the burst.
- If you specified Rate, select a rate.
- Select OK.
– For 40GigE or 100GigE lane errors (Code, Alignment Marker, or Bip-8),
select the lane(s) into which the error is to be inserted.
– If you are inserting errors, press the Error Insert button.
– If you are inserting pause frames, select the Actions tab, and then press the
Pause Frame Insert button.
6 At a minimum, observe the summary, layer 2 and 3 link counts and statistics, error
statistics, and event log.
Error or pause frame insertion starts. If you are inserting errors at a particular rate, the
associated button turns yellow. To stop insertion, press the corresponding button again.
Error insertion stops, and the associated button turns gray.
NOTES:
Code Errors. When inserting code errors at a rate of 1E-3 on 10 GigE circuits,
the large volume of errors will bring down the Ethernet link. Per IEEE 802.3ae,
a maximum of 16 code violations (invalid synchronization headers) are to be
counted per 125 μs. Therefore, inserting a burst of code errors with a quantity
greater than 16 will typically be counted as 16 code violations on the receiver.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 161
Inserting alarms or defects
Inserting alarms or defects

You can insert multiple types of alarms or defects simultaneously into a single or
multiple streams.
To insert alarms or defects
1 Using the Test Menu or Quick Launch screen, select the terminate test application
for the signal, rate, and payload you are testing.
Refer to Table 4 on page 79 for a list of applications.
2 Connect a cable from the appropriate TX connector to the network’s RECEIVE
access connector.
4 Select an alarm or defect type. For example:
– If you selected a terminate application for anything other than 100GigE
RS-FEC testing, you might select LOBL, LOAML, or HI-BER.
– If you selected a 100GigE RS-FEC application, you might select LOAMPS
continuous, HI SER continuous, FEC-Uncorrectable, or FEC-Correct-
able. The same is true about 25GigE application, except that instead of
LOAMPS you will have LOCWMS.
NOTE:
100GigE RS-FEC on Port 2 does not support RS-FEC-Correctable and RS-
FEC-Uncorrectable error injection, nor Hi SER alarm. Port 1, however, does
support all of the above on the 5800-100G platform.
5 For alarms that apply to multi-lane applications, specify the number of the lane in
which the alarm is to be inserted or select All.
6 Press the Alarm Insert or Defect Insert button.
The module inserts an alarm or defect, and the button turns yellow.
To stop insertion (Multiple alarms)
• Press the Alarm Insert or Defect Insert button again.
NOTE:
When HP-UNEQ or UNEQ-P alarm/defect insertion is stopped, the C2 path
overhead byte will be populated by the value configured on the Setup overhead
tab.
Alarm or defect insertion stops, and the button turns gray.
Test results associated with the alarm or defect appear in the Status result category.

Page 162 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Measuring round trip delay or packet jitter
Measuring round trip delay or packet jitter

You can measure round trip delay or packet jitter by transmitting an Acterna payload.
The Acterna payload carries frames with time stamps, enabling the instrument to calcu-
late the delay and jitter. To measure round trip delay, you must use a loopback config-
uration.
You can measure packet jitter (the difference in one-way-delay as experienced by a

series of packets) using either a loopback or an end-to-end configuration. When
measuring packet jitter, your unit must receive three or more Acterna frames or packets
before measurement begins.
To measure round trip delay or packet jitter
1 Use the Test Menu to do one of the following:

– Select the layer 2 or layer 3 traffic terminate test application for the interface
you are testing (refer to Table 4 on page 79 through Table 5 on page 80 for a
– If you selected a layer 2 traffic application, select the Ethernet setup tab, or if
you selected a layer 3 traffic application, select the IP setup tab.
– Select the DATA field to specify that transmitted frames will carry an Acterna
payload.
– If you are measuring delay on a 10 Gigabit Ethernet or 10 Gigabit Fibre
Channel circuit, verify that the RTD Setup setting is set to High Precision -
Low Delay.
wise, press Results to return to the Main screen. If delay through the optic needs
to be accounted for, the user needs to enter the latency in the RTD Optic offset
field, so that it can be subtracted from the delay measurement (enter in microsec-
onds). For more information, see “Optics Expert Mode” in the Getting Started
Guide.
illuminated.
7 At a minimum, observe the delay and jitter test results in the Ethernet L2 Link
Stats or L3 Link Stats category and the L2 Filter Stats or L3 Filter Stats category.
If your delay results (measurements) display “Out of Range”, change the RTD Setup to
Low Precision - High Delay, and then restart the test.
Round trip delay and packet jitter are measured.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 163
Measuring one way delay

One way delay measurements are measurements of delay in a single direction (from a
source node to a destination node). They differ from round trip delay measurements
because they do not include the cumulative network delays associated with inbound
and outbound traffic.
NOTE: 5800v2 Input Connections for 1 PPS Reference Signals

5800v2s running Software Version 6.3 or above must obtain 1 PPS external
reference signals via the CLK1 (red) cables on the Multi Access SMA Timing
Cable Adapters (which are connected to the EXT CLK connector on the 5800v2
instruments).
5800v2s running Software Versions prior to 6.3 must obtain 1 PPS external ref-
erence signals via the CLK2 blue cables on the timing cable adapters.
Things to consider
Before measuring one way delay, consider the following:
• Two GNSS or GPS synchronized instruments are required to accurately measure
one way delay. No communication is required over the Transport network to
synchronize the time.
• To attain GPS synchronization, both instruments must operate within a CDMA or
GPS network.
• Both ports can be used on the instruments for one way delay testing.
• A GNSS or GPS synchronized instrument and an unsynchronized instrument can
be used for testing; however, they can not be used to measure one way delay.
Neither instrument will provide one way delay measurements.
• Follow the guidelines included in the documentation that shipped with the GPS
receiver regarding preparation time and hold-over stability to ensure maximum
accuracy and stability.
• Acterna traffic can be looped back from an unsynchronized instrument; however,
the receiving synchronized instrument will not be able to measure one way delay
on the looped back traffic. Round trip delay will be measured instead.
• If instrument B is synchronized, and traffic from instrument A is looped back
through B to A, instrument B will measure one way delay (from A to B), but instru-
ment A will only measure round trip delay because it can not measure one way
delay on traffic that has traveled both directions (in a round trip). Instrument A will
measure round trip delay for the returned (looped back) traffic.
Although it might seem like you can estimate the one way delay from instrument B
to instrument A by subtracting the one way delay measurements reported on B
from the round trip delay measurements reported on A, the calculation will not be
correct. Round trip delay measurements include internal loopback delays, which
vary and depend on the size of looped back frames. Therefore, the estimate will
not be accurate, and the delay measured will be slightly exaggerated.

Page 164 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
• The two instruments used to measure one way delay must use the same BERT
software version in order to synchronize timing.
– Version 10 uses UTC timing, so if measuring one way delay using an instru-
ment running BERT software version 10, the other instrument must also run
version 10.
– Version 11 uses GPS timing, so if measuring one way delay using an instru-
ment running BERT software version 11, the other instrument must also run
BERT software version 11.
• An optional Timing Expansion (TEM) Module is available for the T-BERD /
MTS-5800v2 which allows you to more precisely synchronize your instruments
before performing measurements. For details concerning the TEM Module, see
the T-BERD / MTS 5800 GNSS and Timing Expansion Module User Manual that
shipped with your module.
About the One Way Delay test option and accessory kit
One way delay testing is offered as a test option for your instrument. When you
purchase an OWD test option (CDMA or GPS), you receive an accessory kit. The
accessory kit can be used with the T-BERD / MTS 5800, 6000A with MSAM, 8000 with
DMC, or 8000 with Transport Module, so all parts are not used for any given product.
CDMA Receiver Kit

• Præcis2 CDMA Receiver Package. This package includes a CDMA receiver, AC
power adapter, Ethernet cable, DB-9 to RJ-45 adapter, Mag mount 14” antenna,
and documentation for the items in the package.
• Antenna stub and magnetic-mount antenna.
• J-Bullet custom attenuator
• BNC (male) to BNC (male) cable
• SMA to BNC Adapter
• SMA to BNC cable
• SMA to SMA cable
• RS-232 Serial cable
• RS-232 to USB converter
• Serial DB-9 to RJ-45 cable
GPS Receiver Kit

• Spectrum Instruments TM=4M GPS receiver
• Antenna
• J-Bullet attenuator, 500 ohm - Viavi
• BNC (male) to BNC (male) cable
• SMA to BNC Adapter
• SMA to BNC cable

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 165
• SMA to SMA cable

• RS-232 Serial Cables
– DB9 (female) to RJ-45 (1)
– DB9 to DB9 (1)
• RS-232 to USB converter
• Documentation and software for items in the package
Signal Input
Table 12 lists the connections required to provide the external timing reference signal
and analyzed signal to 5800v2 test instruments when measuring one way delay. The
CLK1 (IN) red cable is provided by the Multi Access SMA Timing Cable Adapter.
Table 12 5800v2 One Way Delay Signal Input
External Source1 Reference Signal2 Analyzed Signal

High Accuracy Timing 1PPS via CLK1 (IN) red cable 5800v2 connector supporting the
Source (for example, a TOD via USB analyzed signal / line rate.
GPS Receiver)
TEM TEM Time of Day (TOD) and 5800v2 connector supporting the
1PPS analyzed signal / line rate.
1. When signals are provided by an external source and a TEM; the signal(s) provided to the 5800v2 via the Multi Access SMA Timing
Cable Adapter take precedence.
2. 5800v2 instruments running Software Version 6.2 or below must use the CLK2 blue cable on the connected timing cable adapter to
input the 1PPS reference signal.

Two synchronized instruments are required to measure one way delay. On both instru-
ments, you select a traffic application for the line rate of the circuit you are testing, and
you configure the traffic to carry an Acterna payload. This payload carries frames with
time stamps, enabling the receiving instrument to calculate the delay.
To measure one way delay
1 On each instrument, connect either the CDMA receiver, GPS receiver, or optional
TEM Module, and synchronize the instruments’ timing.
– Instructions for connecting CDMA or GPS receivers and using the receivers
to synchronize timing are provided in the Getting Started Guide that shipped
with your instrument.
– Instructions for connecting a TEM Module to the 5800v2, and using the
module to synchronize test instruments are provided in the T-BERD / MTS
5800 GNSS and Timing Expansion Module User Manual that shipped with
your module.

Page 166 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Measuring Peak IFG
2 On each instrument, use the Test Menu to select the layer 2 or layer 3 traffic termi-
nate test application for the interface you are testing (refer to Table 4 on page 79
through Table 5 on page 80 for a list of applications).
3 On each instrument, select the Setup soft key, and then do the following:
a If you selected a layer 2 traffic application, select the Ethernet setup tab, or if
you selected a layer 3 traffic application, select the IP setup tab.
b Select the Data field to specify that transmitted frames will carry an Acterna
payload. The payload can be populated with a BERT pattern or Fill Byte
pattern.
c If you are using a CDMA or GPS receiver to synchronize your instruments,
select the Interface tab, and then on the CDMA/GPS Receiver tab, do the
following:
i Enable the CDMA or GPS receiver.
ii If using a CDMA receiver, choose a Channel Set. The selections will
vary based on the CDMA receiver that is being used.
5 Connect the instruments to the circuit. For details, refer to the Getting Started
manual that shipped with your instrument or upgrade.
7 Select the Restart button.
illuminated on each instrument.
9 At a minimum, observe the one way delay test results in the Ethernet L2 Link
Stats or L3 Link Stats category and the L2 Filter Stats or L3 Filter Stats category.
CDMA/GPS Receiver results are also available for review.
You have measured one way delay.
Measuring Peak IFG

You can use two instruments in an end-to-end configuration to measure the Peak IFG
resulting from a switch in service to a protect line. The traffic originating unit must
transmit a constant rate of traffic to obtain accurate measurements.
By default, all units stop Tx traffic when they detect a break in the Rx link. This means
that recorded Peak IFG times will include the time that the Rx line was down plus the
time needed to restart traffic and auto-negotiate (if enabled).
With some optical applications (100M, 1GigE,10GigE LAN, 40GigE, and 100GigE),
configured with full duplex communication, it is possible to decouple the Rx line from
the Tx line and prevent this condition from occurring, thus achieving a much more accu-
rate Peak IFG measurement. If the unit is capable of decoupling there will be an active

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 167
Measuring Peak IFG
Decouple Tx/Rx option next to the Reset Peak IFG Result button on the Actions panel
at the bottom of the main screen.
NOTE:
Decoupling the Tx and Rx links is only applicable to the Service Disruption or
Peak IFG measurement on Ethernet interfaces (except L4 TCP Wirespeed).
Take decoupled SD measurements exclusive of other measurements as the
decoupling has varying affects on other measurements.
Disable the decoupling before making any other measurements or analysis.
When using the 400G/100G module, the CFP FIFO reset is bypassed to get
more accurate measurements in decouple mode. (More details in “Optics
Expert Mode” in the Getting Started Guide.)
To measure Peak IFG
1 Using the Test Menu, do one of the following:

– If you are using two Transport Modules, on both units, use the Test Menu to
select the layer 2 or layer 3 traffic terminate test application for the interface
you are testing (refer to Table 4 on page 79 through Table 5 on page 80 for a
2 Configure the traffic originating unit to transmit a constant load of traffic. If you are
using a Transport Module to generate traffic, the load is configured on the Traffic
setup tab. For instructions on configuring a constant load of traffic to transmit to
another instrument, see “Transmitting a constant load” on page 124.
3 If you are using a Transport Module or Transport Module to originate traffic, and
you need to specify other settings for the test, select the appropriate tab; other-
4 Connect the near and far end units to the circuit under test. When connecting
Transport Modules to the circuit, blinking LEDs on the connector panels indicate
which connectors to use for your test.
5 If you are testing on an optical circuit, on the traffic originating unit, select the
Laser button.
6 On the instruments, verify that the green Signal Present, Sync Acquired, and Link
Active LEDs are illuminated.

Page 168 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Measuring Ethernet Service Disruption (ESD) Time
7 On the traffic originating unit, do the following:

a Start traffic.
b If you are using a Transport Module or Transport Module to transmit traffic,
clear the Peak IFG time by selecting the Reset Peak IFG Result button on
the Main screen.
c If desired, enable Decouple Tx and RX.
The coupling selection is only available if testing full duplex 100M, 1G, or 10G
LAN optical circuits, or on the 40G/100G module or CSAM in OTU4 Ethernet
Client and Line Rate Ethernet.
8 Initiate the switch to the protect line.
9 Observe the Peak IFG result in the Ethernet L2 Link Stats result category.
You have measured Peak IFG time.

You can use the instrument to measure the service disruption time resulting from a
switch in service to a protect line. Before measuring the disruption time, you can:
– Indicate which events to measure (such as a Signal Loss or Sync Loss).
– Establish an acceptable length of time for the measurements by specifying a
Threshold Time. Measured times for an event that are less than or equal to
the Threshold Time pass the test, measured times that exceed the Threshold
Time fail the test.
– Specify a Separation Time to indicate that the unit should count separate
events that occur within a very brief period of time as a single event. For
example, if you specify a Separation time of 300.000ms and select Sync
Loss as an event trigger, if more than one Sync Loss occurs during a
300.000ms period, the unit will interpret the events as a single Sync Loss
disruption. The count will not increase when another Sync Loss occurs until
at least 300.000ms has transpired since the previous Sync Loss.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 169
To measure service disruption time
1 Using the Test Menu or Quick Launch screen, select the test application for the
signal and payload you are testing (refer to the tables below for a list of applica-
tions). See the table below for supported test applications for Ethernet.
Table 13
Payload Rate Application Platform(s)

1GigE Optical Layer 2 Traffic MSAM2, 5800v2, 5800-100G
10GigE LAN Layer 2 Traffic MSAM2, 5800v2, 5800-100G
25GigE Layer 2 Traffic 5800-100G
100GigE Layer 2 Traffic 5800-100G
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the Service Disruption tab.
3 Under Event Settings, do the following:
a Select Enable Service Disruption.
b Optional. To edit the displayed Separation Time, select the field, and then
type the new time in milliseconds (ms), or select Default to restore the time to
its default value (300.000ms). This is the duration during which each trigger
of a specific type will be counted as a single disruption event.
c Optional. To edit the displayed Threshold Time, press the keypad icon, and
then type the new time in milliseconds (ms), or select Default to restore the
time to its default value (50.000ms). Disruption measurements that exceed
this duration will be interpreted as failed.
4 Under Event Triggers, do one of the following:
a To measure the disruption time for each of the triggers listed, select Set ALL.
b To measure disruption time for a specific trigger or group of triggers, select
Clear ALL, and then select each of the triggers for the measurements. Note,
The Interframe Gap trigger is based on the size of the IFG between any 2
incoming frames. Any IFG larger than the Minimum Threshold will cause
the trigger to activate. Minimum Threshold should be greater than
measured Peak IFG in normal traffic conditions.
5 If additional settings need to be modified to reflect the network configuration,
select the appropriate tab, and then modify the settings as required.
6 To return to the Main screen, select the Results soft key.
7 Connect a cable from the appropriate RX connector to the network’s TRANSMIT
access connector.
8 Connect a cable from the appropriate TX connector to the network’s RECEIVE
access connector.

Page 170 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
OAM service and link layer testing
9 To observe the service disruption results, set one of the result windows to display
the Service Disruption Log, and set another window to display the Service
Disruption Log Stats. Service disruption is measured for each of the triggers you
selected. For details on the associated test results, see “Service Disruption
Results” below.
Service Disruption Results
To observe results associated with service disruption measurements, you must enable
Service Disruption when you configure your test.
SD Summary
The SD - Summary category provides the service disruption number, the start time, and
the duration for the disruption.
SD Details
The SD - Details category displays a log providing the time a disruption event (such as
a Bit/TSE error) occurred, and it’s duration in milliseconds. The instrument alerts you
when the log becomes full and prompts you to clear it.
SD Statistics
The SD - Statistics category displays the longest, shortest, last (most recent), and
average disruptions logged during the course of your test. It also provides a total count
of disruptions.

You can position the instrument at various endpoints in a Maintenance Domain (MD) or
Maintenance Association (MA) area to verify that no trunk problems occur per ITU-T
Rec. Y.1731 and IEEE 802.1ag.
You can also use the instrument to verify point-to-point link layer performance per IEEE
802.3ah, and conduct link aggregation (LAG) testing. You can observe results associ-
ated with your test in the OAM result category. For details, refer to “Ethernet OAM
Service OAM results” on page 513 of Chapter 16 “Test Results”.
Service layer features

When using your instrument for service layer OAM testing, you can do the following:
• Specify the Maintenance Domain (MD) level, Maintenance Entity Group (MEG)
End Point IDs, and Maintenance Association (MA) IDs.
• Specify the Continuity Check Message (CCM) transmission rate (non-MPLS).
• Specify the CCM and LBM Multicast address when running non-MAC-in-MAC
applications.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 171
• Choose from a variety of defect and continuity detection options -Continuity Verifi-
cation (CV), Fast Failure Detection (FFD), Backward Defect Indication (BDI) and
Forward Defect Indication (FDI)- for MPL S applications.
• Specify thresholds for declaring a loss of continuity (LOC) if the number of
consecutive missing CCM exceeds the number of messages expected within the
calculated interval. This state may be used by Maintenance End Point devices to
initiate a switch to a protect line.
NOTE: Service OAM testing is not applicable using the 40G/100G Transport
Module or CSAM.
• Fast OAM “heartbeat” messages (CCM/FFD) for
– Y.1731 (OAM for Ethernet)
– G.8114/G.8113.1 (OAM for T-MPLS)
– Y.1711 (OAM for MPLS)
• MEP Discovery – identifies various EVCs (Ethernet Virtual Circuits), such as a
VLAN or Q-in-Q in the network, to verify that the correct MEPs are in the correct
MD (maintenance domain) level and within the correct EVC.
Link layer features

When using your instrument for link layer OAM testing, you can do the following:
• Identify a discovered OAM as a peer, matching all setups to its detected capabili-
ties.
• Indicate whether you want the instrument to serve in an active or passive role.
• Specify the Vendor OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier) for the instrument.
• Indicate whether the instrument will advertise that it provides unidirectional
support for failure detection, remote loopback, link events, and variable retrieval.
• Indicate whether you want the instrument to generate link faults, dying gasps, and
critical events.
• Indicate whether you want the instrument to issue a remote loopback command to
place its peer in loopback mode if the instrument is in active mode and its peer is
capable of remote loopbacks.
NOTE: Link layer OAM testing is not applicable using the 40G/100G Transport
Module or CSAM.
Specifying OAM settings

OAM settings are specified for the traffic originating instrument on the OAM setup tab
when configuring Layer 2 Traffic tests in Terminate mode.
To specify OAM settings

Page 172 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
3 Specify the settings that characterize the transmitted traffic (see “Specifying
Ethernet frame settings” on page 105), and then specify the filter settings (see
“Specifying Ethernet filter settings” on page 114).
4 Select the OAM tab. The pane on the left of the tab groups the link settings
(L-OAM) and service settings (S-OAM).
5 To specify link OAM settings, do the following:
a In the left pane, under L-OAM, select Local Config, then specify the
following settings:
Setting Parameters
Link OAM State If you want to enable link OAM, select On; otherwise,
select Off. Link OAM must be enabled when conducting
link aggregation (LAG) testing.
Mode Select one of the following:
– Active. Select Active if you want the instrument to
automatically discover and monitor the peer on the link.
– Passive. Select Passive if you want the peer to initiate
the discovery process.
Vendor OUI Specify the Vendor OUI (Organizationally Unique Identi-
fier) for the instrument.
Unidirectional Select this setting if you want to advertise that the instru-
ment is capable of sending OAM PDUs when the receiving
path is non-operational.
Remote Loopback Select this setting if the instrument supports OAM remote
loopback mode.
Vendor Specific Info Enter the value used to differentiate the vendor’s product
models or versions. Entry of a value is optional.
Link Events Select this setting if the instrument supports Link Event
interpretation.
Variable Retrieval Select this setting if the instrument can send Variable
Response OAM PDU.
Max PDU Size Specify the largest OAM PDU size.
b In the left pane, under L-OAM, select Events, then specify the following
settings:
Setting Parameters
Link Fault Select this setting if you want to indicate to the peer a
fault has occurred.
Critical Event Select this setting if you want to indicate to the peer
that a critical event has occurred.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 173
Setting Parameters
Dying Gasp Select this setting if you want to indicate to the peer
that an unrecoverable local failure condition has
occurred.
Errored Symbol Period Event
Event Window Specify the number of symbols that can be received in
(total symbols) the period on the underlying physical layer.
Event Threshold Specify the number of errored symbols in the window
(errored symbols) specified required for an error to be declared.
Errored Frame Event
Event Window Specify the duration of the frame window in terms of the
(100ms intervals) number of 100 ms period intervals. For example, 2 indi-
cates that the window spans a 200 ms period interval.
Event Threshold Specify the number of detected errored frames required
(errored frames) within the window specified for an error to be declared
Errored Frame Period Event
Event Window Specify the duration of the window in terms of frames.
(total frames)
Event Threshold Specify the number of frame errors that must occur in
(errored frames) the window to declare an error.
Errored Frame Second Summary Event
Event Window Specify the duration of the period in terms of the
(100ms intervals) 100 ms interval.
Event Threshold Specify the number of errored frame seconds that must
(errored sec) occur in the window to declare an error.

Page 174 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
6 To specify service OAM settings, do the following:

a In the left pane, under S-OAM, select CCM, and then specify the following
settings:
Setting Value
Continuity Checking Select one of the following:
– On. Select On if you intend to test for loss of con-
tinuity (LOC).
– Off. Select Off if you do not intend to test for loss
of continuity.Go to step b.
LOC Threshold (mes- Specify the number of messages that must be
sages) received within the calculated interval (see “CCM
Rate”).
CCM Rate Specify the rate at which the instrument will transmit
CCM messages.
The instrument will transmit CCM messages at the
rate specified; if it does not receive the number of
messages back that you specify as the threshold
within the calculated interval (CCM Rate times LOC
Threshold (messages)), the instrument declares a
loss of continuity (LOC).
CCM Type Select one of the following:
(non-MAC-in-MAC – Unicast. Select Unicast to send CCMs to its
applications only) destination address.
– Multicast. Select Multicast to send CCMs to a
reserved multicast MAC address.
This setting does not appear when running
Mac-in-Mac applications.
MEG End Point ID Specify the Maintenance Entity Group End Point ID
for the instrument.
The instrument encodes the ID that you specify in
the CCMs that it sends to its peer.
Peer MEG End Point ID Specify the Maintenance Entity Group End Point ID
for the instrument’s peer.
The instrument uses the peer ID that you specify to
indicate whether CCMs are detected with unex-
pected MEG End Point IDs.
Maintenance Domain Level Specify the level for the Maintenance Domain (MD).
The instrument uses the level that you specify to
indicate whether CCMs for unexpected lower levels
are detected in the traffic stream.
Specify Domain ID Select one of the following:
– If you are testing per IEEE 802.1ag, select Yes.
– If you are testing per ITU-T Rec. Y.1731, select
No.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 175
Setting Value
Maintenance Domain ID The instrument uses the ID that you specify to indi-
(Specify Domain ID must cate whether CCMs are detected with different IDs.
be Yes) If you indicated that you want to specify a domain
ID, enter the ID using from 1 - 43 characters. The
combined length of the Maintenance Domain ID field
and the Maintenance Association ID field may not
exceed a total of 44 bytes. Modifying either field may
thus result in the other being truncated in order to
meet this requirement.
Maintenance Association The instrument uses the ID that you specify to indi-
ID cate whether CCMs are detected with different IDs.
If you indicated that you want to specify a domain
ID, Specify the Maintenance Association ID, using
up to 43 characters. The combined length of the
Maintenance Domain ID field and the Maintenance
Association ID field may not exceed a total of 44
bytes. Modifying either field may thus result in the
other being truncated in order to meet this require-
ment.
b In the left pane, under S-OAM, select AIS, and then specify the following:
Setting Parameters
AIS State If you want to test AIS, select On; otherwise,
select Off. Go to step c.
Maintenance Domain Level Specify the level for the Maintenance Domain
(MD).
The instrument will indicate whether AIS for the
specified level are detected in the traffic stream.
AIS Rate Specify the rate at which the instrument will
transmit AIS.
AIS Type Select one of the following:
(non MAC-in-MAC applica- – Unicast. Select Unicast to send AIS to its
tions only) destination address.
– Multicast. Select Multicast to send AIS to a
reserved multicast MAC address.
This setting does not appear when running Mac-
in-Mac applications.

Page 176 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
c In the left pane, under S-OAM, select LBM/LBR, and then specify the
following settings:
Setting Value
LBM/LBR (ping) Select one of the following:
– On. Select On if you intend to verify connectiv-
ity by transmitting ping messages.
– Off. Select Off if you do not intend to verify
connectivity. Go to step d.
Maintenance Domain Specify the level for the Maintenance Domain
Level (MD).
The instrument uses the level that you specify to
indicate whether loopback replies (LBRs) for
unexpected lower levels are detected in the traffic
stream.
LBM Type Select one of the following:
(non-MAC-in-MAC appli- – Unicast. Select Unicast to send CCMs to its
cations only) destination address. Unicast is the default set-
ting.
– Multicast. Select Multicast to send CCMs to
a reserved multicast MAC address.
This setting does not appear when running
MAC-in-MAC applications.
d In the left pane, under S-OAM, select LTM/LTR, and then specify the
following settings:
Setting Value
LTM/LTR (trace) Select one of the following:
– On. Select On if you intend to verify connectivity by
transmitting trace messages.
– Off. Select Off if you do not intend to verify connectivity.
Go to step 7
Maintenance Domain Specify the level for the Maintenance Domain (MD).
Level The instrument uses the level that you specify to indicate
whether loopback replies (LBRs) for unexpected lower
levels are detected in the traffic stream.
NOTE:
Before turning the laser ON (if you are testing on an optical circuit), and starting
traffic, be certain to verify that the filter settings on the receiving instrument
match the settings for transmitted traffic on the traffic originating unit. For
example, be certain to specify the same protocol or data length for transmitted
traffic on the traffic originating unit, and filtered traffic on the receiving unit.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 177
MAC-in-MAC testing
8 If testing on an optical circuit, at the bottom of the main page, select the Laser tab
on the action bar then select Laser On.
9 Select the Action tab on the action bar, and then click Start Traffic.
10 Select the OAM tab on the action bar and then click BDI and/or FDI to begin inser-
tion of Backward and/or Forward Defect Insertion.
The OAM settings are specified.
Turning AIS or RDI analysis ON

If you want to analyze traffic for AIS or RDI during the course of your test, you must turn
AIS or RDI analysis ON.
To turn AIS or RDI analysis ON
1 On the Main (Results) screen, select the OAM action panel.

2 Select AIS or RDI.
AIS or RDI analysis is on, and your instrument will indicate whether AIS or RDIs have
been detected. When AIS analysis is On, pressing Restart will not interrupt analysis;
you must turn AIS analysis off to clear AIS test results.
Sending LBM or LTM messages

If you turned LBM/LBR or LTM/LTR on when you configured the OAM settings, you can
send LBM ping messages or LTM trace messages, and then ensure that you receive
LBR or LTR messages to verify OAM connectivity.
To send an LBM or LTM message
1 On the Main screen, select the OAM action panel.

2 Select LBM or LTM.
The instrument sends an LBM or LTM, and reports the number of transmitted LBM or
LTM frames, and received LBR or LTR frames in the OAM result category.
MAC-in-MAC testing
If you purchased the MAC-in-MAC option for your instrument, a series of MAC-in-MAC
(MiM) applications are available which allow you to transmit and analyze unicast layer 2
Ethernet traffic carried on a PBB (Provider Backbone Bridged) trunk. When configuring
the traffic, you specify a backbone destination address (B-DA), backbone source
address (B-SA), and backbone tag (B-TAG) which designate the path for the backbone
frame to the destination.You can also characterize the customer frame (carried in the

Page 178 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
MAC-in-MAC testing
backbone frame) by specifying the frame type, I-TAG settings, encapsulation settings,
and frame size.
When analyzing MiM traffic, you can set up a filter on the receiving instrument to
observe test results for traffic sharing the same B-TAG (tag settings for the backbone
frame), I-TAG (tag settings for the customer frames), customer frame settings such as
the frame type, encapsulation values, and the pattern carried in the customer frame
payload.
Understanding MAC-in-MAC test results

When the instrument is configured for MiM testing, a subset of the standard layer 2 test
results is provided for the backbone and customer frames (see “CPRI/OBSAI results”
on page 469 of Chapter 16 “Test Results”). When observing results for the backbone
frames, B-TAG and I-TAG information is also provided.
Understanding the MAC-in-MAC LEDs

In addition to the standard LEDs provided for layer 2 Ethernet testing, a
PBB Frame Detect LED is available which indicates whether the unit has detected MiM
traffic on the circuit.
Configuring layer 2 MAC-in-MAC tests

Before transmitting or analyzing traffic on a PBB trunk, you must select the appropriate
MAC-in-MAC (MiM) test application, specify interface settings, specify frame and frame
filter settings, and then configure the traffic load. Instructions are provided in this section
for the following:
• “Specifying Ethernet frame settings” on page 180
• “Specifying Ethernet filter settings for MiM traffic” on page 182

Before you transmit layer 2 MiM traffic, you can specify interface settings that provide
the speed and duplex settings for 10/100/1000 Ethernet traffic, indicate how you want
the unit to handle flow control, provide the pause quanta for transmitted pause frames,
and identify all traffic originating from your particular Transport Module.
For detailed instructions on specifying these settings, refer to “Specifying interface


May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 179
MAC-in-MAC testing

Before you transmit layer 2 Ethernet traffic over a PBB trunk, you can specify the frame
characteristics of the traffic, such as the backbone source address, destination
address, tag settings, and payload (Acterna test frames or BER patterns).
page 80 for a list of MiM applications.
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the Ethernet tab. A graphical display of
a MiM frame appears.
Figure 30 Backbone frame (MiM Traffic application)
3 In Frame Size (Bytes), select one of the seven IEEE recommended frame
lengths, Random (to transmit frames of randomly generated sizes based on the
seven RFC 2544 frame length recommendations), or enter a specific Jumbo,
Undersized, or User Defined frame length.
repeating. To define the number of frame entries, enter a number between 1 and
8.
NOTE:
Undersized is available in the Frame Size menu if the TX payload is something
other than Acterna with BERT payload.
4 Use the graphical display of a backbone frame (illustrated in Figure 30 on

page 180) to specify the following:
Frame
Setting Value
Label
B-DA Destination Enter the destination address using a 6 byte
MAC hexadecimal format.

Page 180 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
MAC-in-MAC testing
Frame
Setting Value
Label
B-SA Source Type Select Factory Default or User Defined.
User MAC If you specified User Defined, enter the source
MAC address using a 6 byte hexadecimal format.
B-TAG B-Tag VLAN ID Enter the ID for the backbone VLAN used as the
path to the destination.
B-Tag Priority Enter the priority code point (PCP) ID represent-
ing the type of service the transmitted traffic is
emulating.
B-Tag DEI BIT Indicate whether the traffic is drop eligible by set-
ting the DEI bit for the transmitted traffic.
I-TAG I-Tag Priority Enter the priority code point (PCP) ID represent-
ing the type of service the transmitted traffic is
emulating.
I-Tag DEI Bit Indicate whether the traffic is drop eligible by set-
ting the DEI bit for the transmitted traffic.
I-Tag UCA Bit Indicate whether you want to use the customer
address by setting the bit.
I-Tag Service Specify the backbone service instance ID for the
ID traffic.
5 On the backbone frame graphic, select Data, and then specify the settings that
characterize the customer frame (illustrated in Figure 31 on page 181).
Figure 31 Customer Frame (MiM Traffic application)

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 181
MAC-in-MAC testing
6 On the customer frame graphic, select Data, and then specify one of the following
for the Tx Payload:
– Acterna. To transmit frames that contain a sequence number and time stamp
so that lost frames, round trip delay, and jitter can be calculated, select
Acterna.
If you are measuring round trip delay on a 10 Gigabit circuit, in RTD Setup,
count lost packets.
– BERT. To transmit frames with payloads filled with the BERT pattern you
specify, select BERT, and then select a pattern.
- Various pseudo-random and Fixed patterns are available. The Pseudo-
random patterns continue from one frame into the next. The fixed patterns
restart each frame, such that the frame will always start with the beginning of
the pattern.
- If you set the BERT Pattern to User Defined, in the User Pattern field,
specify the 32 bit fixed pattern that will be repeated in the payload.
NOTE:
The Transport Module transmits the bytes in user defined patterns from left to
right; the FST-2802 transmits the bytes in user defined patterns right to left.
For example, a user defined hexadecimal pattern of 12345678 populates the
frame as: 12345678.Using the same hexadecimal pattern, the FST-2802
would populate the frame as 78563412.
The transmitted frame settings are specified.
Specifying Ethernet filter settings for MiM traffic

Before transmitting or monitoring layer 2 traffic on a MiM trunk, you can specify settings
that indicate the expected received payload and determine which backbone frames will
pass through the receive filter and be counted in the test result categories for filtered
layer 2 traffic. The settings may also impact other results.
If you want to observe results for the Customer Link (counts or statistics), ensure that
the B-TAG and I-TAG filter settings, and the Customer filter settings match those carried
in the analyzed traffic.
NOTE:
During layer 2 BER testing, incoming frames must pass the filter to be analyzed
for a BERT pattern. Local loopback is also only performed on frames that pass
the filter. Use the filter when analyzing BERT frames and non-test frames are
present.

Page 182 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
MAC-in-MAC testing
To specify Ethernet filter frame settings
page 80 for a list of MiM applications.
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the Ethernet Filter tab.
3 Specify the settings required to filter received traffic for analysis:
Frame
Setting Value
Label
B-TAG B-Tag VLAN ID Filter If you don’t want to filter traffic for a specific
VLAN, select Don’t Care; otherwise, select
Specify Value.
B-Tag VLAN ID Enter the ID for the backbone VLAN used
as the path to the destination.
This setting only appears if B-Tag VLAN ID
Filter is set to Specify Value.
B-Tag Priority Enter the priority code point (PCP) ID repre-
senting the type of service the filtered traffic
is emulating, or select Don’t Care.
B-Tag DEI BIT Indicate whether the filtered traffic is drop
eligible by setting the DEI bit for the traffic,
or select Don’t Care.
I-TAG I-Tag Priority Enter the priority code point (PCP) ID repre-
senting the type of service the filtered traffic
is emulating, or select Don’t Care.
I-Tag DEI Bit Indicate whether the filtered traffic is drop
eligible by setting the DEI bit for the traffic,
or select Don’t Care.
I-Tag UCA Bit Indicate whether the filtered traffic uses the
customer address by setting the bit, or
I-Tag Service ID Filter Specify the backbone service instance ID
carried in the filtered traffic by selecting
Specify Value, or select Don’t Care.
I-Tag Service ID If you set the I-Tag Service ID Filter to Spec-
ify Value, specify the service instance ID
carried in the filtered traffic.
This setting only appears if I-Tag Service ID
Filter is set to Specify Value.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 183
MAC-in-MAC testing
4 Select the Data field on the illustration of the backbone frame, and then specify
the following for the customer frame:
Setting Value
Encapsulation Select one of the following:
– None. To analyze unencapsulated traffic, select None.
– VLAN. To analyze VLAN tagged traffic, select VLAN, and
then select the VLAN field on the illustration of the customer
frame to specify the ID and priority.
– Q-in-Q.To analyze Q-in-Q tagged traffic, select Q-in-Q, and
then select the SVLAN field on the illustration of the customer
frame to specify the SVLAN settings, and the VLAN field to
specify the VLAN ID and priority.
– Don’t Care. To analyze all customer frames irrespective of
encapsulation, select Don’t Care.
For details on the VLAN or Q-in-Q filter settings, refer to “Speci-
fying Ethernet filter settings” on page 114.
Frame Type Select one of the following:
– DIX
– 802.3
5 Select the Data field on the illustration of the customer frame, and then do one of
the following:
– If you want the module to monitor and analyze live Ethernet traffic by
suppressing lost frames (LF) or BERT errors in their associated result counts
and as triggers for LEDs during payload analysis, turn Payload Analysis Off.
– If you want to filter traffic for a particular pattern, turn Payload Analysis On,
and then specify the BERT pattern.
The received frame settings are specified.
Specifying OAM settings

You can position the instrument at various endpoints in a Maintenance Domain (MD) or
Maintenance Association (MA) area to verify that no OAM trunk problems occur. For
details, refer to “OAM service and link layer testing” on page 171

Before transmitting layer 2 traffic over a MiM trunk, you can specify the type of traffic
load the unit will transmit (Constant, Burst or Ramp). The settings vary depending on
the type of load.
When configuring a load, you can specify the bandwidth of the transmitted traffic in
0.001% increments for 1 Gigabit or 10 Gigabit circuits, or 0.01% increments for 10/100/
1000 Mbps electrical or 100 Mbps optical circuits.

Page 184 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
MAC-in-MAC testing
For an overview of the available traffic loads, see “Specifying traffic load settings” on
page 123.
Transmitting layer 2 MiM traffic

Before you transmit layer 2 traffic over a MiM trunk, you must specify:
• Frame characteristics of the transmitted traffic (see “Specifying Ethernet frame
• Frame characteristics used to filter received traffic (see “Specifying Ethernet filter
settings for MiM traffic” on page 182).
After you specify the layer 2 settings, you are ready to transmit and analyze the traffic.
select the MiM terminate test application for the interface you are testing.
4 Select the Ethernet Filter tab to specify settings that filter the received traffic
based on specified frame characteristics (see “Specifying Ethernet filter settings
for MiM traffic” on page 182).
10 Verify that the green Signal Present, Sync Acquired, Link Active, and PBB Frame
11 At a minimum, observe the test results in the Summary Status result category.
You have analyzed layer 2 MiM traffic.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 185
Ethernet over Ethernet (EoE) testing

For detailed instructions on error and pause frame insertion, see “Inserting errors or
pause frames” on page 160.
Measuring round trip delay and packet jitter

You can measure round trip delay and packet jitter by transmitting traffic carrying an
Acterna payload. Frames with an Acterna payload provide time stamps, enabling the
unit to calculate the delay and jitter. For instructions on looping back a unit, see
Chapter 11 “Loop Back Testing”.
For detailed instructions, see “Measuring round trip delay or packet jitter” on page 163.
Measuring service disruption time

You can use two units in an end-to-end configuration to measure the service disruption
time resulting from a switch in service to a protect line. The traffic originating unit must
For detailed instructions, see “Measuring Peak IFG” on page 167.
Monitoring layer 2 MiM traffic

Use the MiM Traffic Monitor/Through application whenever you want to analyze
received traffic. When you configure your test, you can specify settings that indicate the
expected received payload and determine which frames will pass through the receive
filter and be counted in the test result categories for filtered layer 2 traffic. The settings
may also impact other results.
NOTE:
If you are testing from an optical interface, you must turn the laser on using the
associated button to pass the signal through the unit’s transmitter.
For detailed instructions, see “Monitoring layer 2 traffic” on page 130.

If you purchased the Ethernet over Ethernet (EoE) option for your instrument, a series
of EoE applications are available which allow you to transmit and analyze unicast layer
2 Ethernet traffic carried on a PBB (Provider Backbone Bridged) trunk. When config-

Page 186 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
uring the traffic, you specify a backbone destination address (B-DA), backbone source
address (B-SA), and backbone tag (S-TAG) which designate the path for the backbone
frame to the destination.You can also characterize the customer frame (carried in the
backbone frame) by specifying the frame type, EoE-TAG settings, encapsulation
settings, and frame size.
Understanding EoE test results

When the instrument is configured for MiM testing, a subset of the standard layer 2 test
results is provided for the backbone and customer frames (see “CPRI/OBSAI results”
on page 447 of Chapter 15 “Test Results”. When observing results for the backbone
frames, S-TAG and EoE-TAG information is also provided.
Understanding the EoE LEDs

In addition to the standard LEDs provided for layer 2 Ethernet testing, an EoE Frame
Detect LED is available which indicates whether the unit has detected EoE traffic on the
circuit.
Configuring layer 2 EoE tests

Before transmitting or analyzing traffic on a PBB trunk, you must select the appropriate
EoE test application, specify interface settings, specify frame and frame filter settings,
and then configure the traffic load. Instructions are provided below.

Before you transmit layer 2 EoE traffic, you can specify the duplex settings for Ethernet
traffic, indicate how you want the unit to handle flow control, provide the pause quanta
for transmitted pause frames, and identify all traffic originating from your particular
Transport Module.
For detailed instructions on specifying these settings, refer to “Specifying interface


Before you transmit layer 2 Ethernet traffic over a PBB trunk, you can specify the frame
characteristics of the traffic, such as the backbone source address, destination
address, tag settings, and payload (Acterna test frames or BER patterns).
page 80 for a list of EoE applications.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 187
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the Ethernet tab. A graphical display of
a MiM frame appears.
Figure 32 Backbone frame (EoE Traffic application)
3 In Frame Size (Bytes), select one of the seven IEEE recommended frame
lengths, Random (to transmit frames of randomly generated sizes based on the
seven RFC 2544 frame length recommendations), or enter a specific Jumbo,
Undersized, or User Defined frame length.
repeating. To define the number of frame entries, enter a number between 1 and
8.
4 Use the graphical display of a backbone frame (illustrated in Figure 30 on
page 180) to specify the following:
Frame
Setting Value
Label
B-DA Destination Enter the destination address using a 6 byte
MAC hexadecimal format.
B-SA Source Type Select Factory Default or User Defined.
User MAC If you specified User Defined, enter the source
MAC address using a 6 byte hexadecimal format.
S-TAG S-TAG Enter the value for the S-Tag or leave the default.
EtherType
EoE- EoE-Tag Enter the value for the EoE-Tag EtherType or
TAG EtherType leave the default.
EoE-Tag TTL Enter the value for the EoE-Tag TTL or leave the
default.
EoE-Tag Enter the value for the EoE-Tag Service ID or
Service ID leave the default.

Page 188 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
5 On the backbone frame graphic, select Data, and then specify the settings that
characterize the customer frame (illustrated in Figure 31 on page 181).
Figure 33 Customer Frame (EoE Traffic application)
The transmitted frame settings are specified.
Traffic load settings

Before transmitting layer 2 traffic over a EoE trunk, you can specify the type of traffic
load the unit will transmit (Constant, Burst or Ramp). The settings vary depending on
the type of load.
When configuring a load, you can specify the bandwidth of the transmitted traffic in
0.001% increments for 1 Gigabit or 10 Gigabit circuits.
For an overview of the available traffic loads, see “Specifying traffic load settings” on
page 123.
Transmitting layer 2 EoE traffic

Before you transmit layer 2 traffic over a EoE trunk, you must specify:
• Frame characteristics of the transmitted traffic (see “Specifying Ethernet frame
After you specify the layer 2 settings, you are ready to transmit and analyze the traffic.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 189
select the EoE terminate test application for the interface you are testing.
9 Verify that the green Signal Present, Sync Acquired, Link Active, and EoE Frame
10 At a minimum, observe the test results in the Summary Status result category.
You have analyzed layer 2 EoE traffic.

For detailed instructions on error and pause frame insertion, see “Inserting errors or
pause frames” on page 160.
Measuring round trip delay and packet jitter

You can measure round trip delay and packet jitter by transmitting traffic carrying an
Acterna payload. Frames with an Acterna payload provide time stamps, enabling the
unit to calculate the delay and jitter. For instructions on looping back a unit, see
For detailed instructions, see “Measuring round trip delay or packet jitter” on page 163.

You can use two units in an end-to-end configuration to measure the service disruption
time resulting from a switch in service to a protect line. The traffic originating unit must

Page 190 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Synchronous Ethernet testing
For detailed instructions, see “Measuring Peak IFG” on page 167.
Synchronous Ethernet testing

Synchronous Ethernet (Sync-E) is the ability to provide frequency distribution through
an Ethernet port. Physical layer timing transport is required to guarantee frequency
distribution to the extent necessary for encapsulated signals to meet network perfor-
mance requirements. Although other methods may be used for this purpose, physical
layer Sync-E provides the best technical option for guaranteed frequency accuracy and
stability because it is impervious to the effects of traffic load. On a Sync-E network, each
node in the network recovers the clock.
To test a signal containing Sync-E timing signals requires a Sync-E PIM and trans-
ceivers inserted into a Sync-E SFP PIM. If a non-Sync-E PIM is being used, it will not
be able to receive or transmit Sync-E SSM signals.
To test Sync-E
2 Press the Setup soft key, and then select the Interface tab.
3 On the Physical Layer tab, check the box beside Enable Synchronous Ethernet.
This specifies whether SSM messages are transmitted, decoded and have statis-
tics collected about them.
– If you want to transmit SSM messages, enable the SSM Tx.
– To define the rate of transmission (in PDUs/sec), select the Tx Rate from the
drop-down box.
– Select whether the message type will be Informational or Event.
– Select the quality level (QL Value) of the clock - EEC2, EEC1 or DNU.
4 Select the Results soft button to return to the main screen and connect the instru-
ment to the circuit.
5 Select the Laser button to turn on the laser.
7 Use the Actions buttons to add positive or negative frequency offset on the
transmit line frequency. It should appear in the Rx Freq Deviation result on the far
end, in the Interface category.
8 Observe the test results in the Signal category (in the Interface group) and the
Sync Status Messages category (in the Ethernet group). For details, see “Inter-
face results” on page 493 and “Sync Status Messages” on page 536 of
Chapter 16 “Test Results”.
You have tested Synchronous Ethernet.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 191
Discovering traffic using J-Profiler

If your instrument is optioned and configured to do so, you can use the J-Profiler appli-
cation to automatically discover and monitor up to 128 streams of traffic that satisfy your
profile criteria on 10/100/1000 electrical, 100M optical, and 1GigE optical circuits. After
discovering the streams, you can sort them based on the bandwidth utilized by each
stream to identify the top talkers for the discovered streams. If there are less than 128
streams present on the link, this represents the top talkers for the link. If there are more
than 128 streams present on the link, this represents the top talkers for the streams
satisfying your profile criteria.
When running the J-Profiler application, standard link and filtered results are provided
in addition to the Traffic Profiler Streams results.
To discover traffic using J-Profiler
1 Use the Test Menu or Quick Launch screen to select the J-Profiler test application
for the interface you are testing.
Disable J-Profiler before changing IPv6 address modes. Failure to do so may
cause the instrument to lock up.
3 If you want to discover streams sharing specific criteria (such as a particular
VLAN, Source MAC address, or well-known TCP/UDP port), select the Filter tab,
then specify the settings. For details, see:
– “Specifying Ethernet filter settings” on page 114
– “Specifying IPv4 filter settings” on page 149
– “Filtering received traffic using layer 4 criteria” on page 243
Only streams that satisfy the filter criteria will be discovered and displayed.
4 Select the Profile tab. The illustration in Figure 34 appears to guide you through
the profile process:
Figure 34 J-Profiler illustration

Page 192 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
5 Specify how the discovered (and optionally filtered) traffic will be displayed:
– VLAN ID. Both the VLAN ID and SVLAN ID will be considered. Traffic must
contain at least one VLAN tag to be included in the profile.
– VLAN ID and Source MAC Address. Both VLAN IDs and the source MAC
address will be considered. The traffic does not need to carry a VLAN tag to
be included in the profile.
– VLAN ID, Source MAC and Destination MAC. Similar to VLAN ID and Source
MAC Address, but also considers the destination MAC address. Use this
setting if you want to observe MAC-to-MAC conversations.
– VLAN ID and Source IP Address. Both VLAN IDs and the source IP address
will be considered. The traffic does not need to carry a VLAN tag, but it must
have a source IP address to be included in the profile.
– VLAN ID and well-known (0-1023) TCP/UDP port. Both VLAN IDs and the
TCP/UDP port number will be considered. The traffic does not need to carry a
VLAN tag, but it must be TCP or UPD traffic to or from a well known port to be
included in the profile. Use this setting if you want to see which services are
running (well-known ports typically identify services).
– MPLS Labels with VLAN ID. Both MPLS labels and VLAN IDs will be consid-
ered. The traffic does not need to carry a VLAN tag to be included in the
profile.
– PW (Pseudowire) Labels with VLAN ID. Both MPLS labels and PW labels
along with VLAN IDs will be considered. The traffic does not need to carry a
VLAN tag to be included in the profile.
– Source IP, Destination IP, Source Port and Destination Port. All four parame-
ters will be considered. These parameters form the two ends of a TCP or
UDP conversation, so use this setting if you want to observe these conversa-
tions.
10 At a minimum, verify that the green Signal Present, Sync Acquired, Link Active,
and Frame Detect LEDs are illuminated.
11 At a minimum, observe the test results in the Traffic Profile group, in the Streams
category. For details, see “J-Profiler results” on page 543 of Chapter 16 “Test
Results”.
You have discovered traffic using J-Profiler.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 193

Page 194 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
6
Chapter 6 25GigE and 100GigE RS-FEC Testing
This chapter provides information on 25GigE testing (on T-BERD/MTS 5800-100G)

and 100GigE RS-FEC testing (on CSAM or TBERD/MTS 5800-100G). Topics
discussed include the following:
• “About the 25GigE and 100GigE RS-FEC testing” on page 196
• “Specifying RS-FEC settings” on page 199
• “Specifying layer 2 and layer 3 settings” on page 200
• “Transmitting traffic” on page 200
• “Inserting RS-FEC alarms and errors” on page 201
• “Calibrating and resynchronizing CSAM transceivers for RS-FEC” on page 202

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 195
About the 25GigE and 100GigE RS-FEC testing

There are very few differences in testing 25GigE when compared to testing 100GigE
with RS-FEC. If your test instrument is optioned to do so, you can perform RS-FEC
testing of 100 Gigabit Ethernet circuits to ensure that network elements on the circuit
handle FEC per IEEE 802.3bj Clause 91. Multi-mode fiber (MMF) at 25 Gb/s often suf-
fers from dispersion, causing inter-symbol interference (ISI). As a result, forward error
correction (FEC) is needed to ensure that a mechanism is in place to correct resulting
errors and extend the transmission distance for each 25Gb/s lane comprising a
100GigE circuit. To meet this need, IEEE 802.3bj introduced the Reed Solomon Layer
in Clause 91 (shown in Figure 35).
Figure 35 SR4 100GigE Sub-layers
The RS-FEC layer uses a 64 bit / 66 bit to 256 bit / 257 bit Physical Coding Sublayer
(PCS) transcoder to maintain throughput such that the information rate over the
100GigE circuit remains 103.125 Gbits/s. Figure 36 shows a FEC Block with the redun-
dant area (comprised of 14 symbols) and message area (comprised of 514 symbols).
The message area information is passed on to the PCS sublayer; the redundant area
is strictly used to identify and correct symbol errors. RS-FEC can be used to detect and
correct up to 7 symbol errors per block, or detect between 8 and 14 symbol errors per
block without correcting the errors.
Figure 36 FEC Block

Page 196 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
NOTE
Optical transceivers using Short Reach 4 Lane (SR4), Parallel Single Mode 4
Lane (PSM4), or Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing 4 Lane (CWDM4)
optics typically use the same FEC block. Other types of short reach optics may
also use RS-FEC.

If your test instrument is configured and optioned to do so, you can perform RS-FEC
testing of 25 and 100 Gigabit Ethernet circuits by using your instrument to:
• Troubleshoot pluggable optics errors and verify the stability of a connected
QSFP28 transceiver or CFP4 or CFP2 transceiver by running the Optics Self-test.
Before running the Optics Self-test on CSAM, you can establish thresholds for
passing or failing the test based on pre-FEC or post-FEC errors criteria. 25GigE
testing uses SFP28.
• Monitor the RS-FEC layer of received traffic for errors (for example, correctable
bit errors and uncorrectable symbol errors).
• Insert correctable FEC errors into transmitted signals to verify that receiving
network elements correct the errors as expected and issue a high symbol error
rate (HI-SER) alarm if the correctable errors are received at a rate that exceeds
the network element’s ability to correct them.
• Insert uncorrectable FEC errors into transmitted signals, and then observe alarm
LEDs and counts, ratios and seconds of received uncorrectable FEC errors to
determine the maximum number of uncorrectable errors that a network element is
able to detect.
• Stress test a network element by transmitting the maximum number of correctable
FEC errors that a network element should be able to correct per IEEE 802.3bj
clause 91 and determining whether a HI-SER alarm is declared.
• Monitor and insert RS-FEC alarms and errors while performing Layer 2 (traffic,
multiple streams) or Layer 3 tests (traffic, multiple streams, Ping, Traceroute) to
verify connectivity to the network and determine the latency (delay) between the
instrument and the destination network element under alarm and error conditions.
• 100GigE RS-FEC is supported on Port 2 on the 5800-100G instrument if the
option is available.
NOTE
On the CSAM, a calibration procedure is used to accurately map physical
lanes to virtual lanes before performing RS-FEC testing. A fiber loopback con-
nected directly to the transceiver is required to map the lanes. For details, see
“Calibrating and resynchronizing CSAM transceivers for RS-FEC” on
page 202.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 197
25GigE and 100GigE RS-FEC test applications

If your test instrument is optioned to do so, the 100GigE RS-FEC applications listed in
Table 14 are supported.
Table 14 100GigE RS-FEC applications
Application Test Mode

Layer 2 Traffic Terminate
Monitor/Through
Layer 2 Multiple Streams Terminate
Layer 3 Ping Terminate
Layer 3 Traceroute Terminate
Layer 3 Traffic IPv4 Terminate
Monitor/Thru
Layer 3 Traffic IPv6 Terminate
Monitor/Thru
Layer 3 Multiple Streams IPv4 Terminate
Layer 3 Multiple Streams IPv6 Terminate
NOTE
100G RSFEC does not support multiple stream application on Layer 2 and
Layer 3 on port 2 on 5800-100G platform.
Correctable RS-FEC errors

Correctable RS-FEC errors are expected when running 100GE RS-FEC applications;
therefore, they are not reported as errors in the event log, histogram, or error statistics
result category. However, correctable errors are reported within the RS-FEC Stats cate-
gories. If the rate of correctable RS-FEC errors received exceeds the level deemed
acceptable per IEEE 802.3bj clause 91, a high symbol error rate (HI SER) alarm is
declared and reported as an error. Uncorrectable errors are a severe condition tracked
in the event log.
Optics Self-test and Cable Test

The Optics Self-test and Cable Test have a similar user interface and allow you to trou-
bleshoot errors and verify the proper operation and stability of the transceiver that is
connected to your instrument. The tests verify signal presence, level, and BER in order
to identify bad optics. The Optics self-test allows you to select a BER threshold type
(Pre-FEC or Post-FEC), BER threshold value, and maximum Offset (in PPM). Note that

Page 198 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Specifying RS-FEC settings
the Pre-FEC or Post-FEC selection only applies to 25Gig and 100Gig RS-FEC Ethernet
applications.
• If you select a Pre-FEC BER threshold type (the default type), the Correctable Bits
Error Rate is used as the BER threshold, and the BER will be reported as the
Pre-FEC Correctable BER (the ratio of bit errors to the number of bit errors
before applying forward error correction).
• If you select a Post-FEC BER threshold type, the Uncorrectable Codeword Error
Rate is used as the BER threshold, and the BER will be reported as the
Post-FEC Uncorrectable BER (the ratio of bit errors to the number of bits
received after applying forward error correction).
The two-port cable test is available on correctly optioned dual port units. It will launch
the appropriate test application to test a cable from port 1 to port 2. Note that any appli-
cation already running on the other port will be closed.
For more information on running the Optics self-test and testing Active Optical Cables
(AOC) and Direct Attach Copper (DAC) cables using T-BERD/MTS, refer to the “Basic
Testing” chapter of the Getting Started Manual.
Specifying RS-FEC settings

When configuring your test instrument for RS-FEC testing, you can optionally indicate
how the instrument should handle detected errors (fix and report, report only, or ignore).
You can also optionally indicate that your test instrument should not declare HI SER
Alarms.
To specify RS-FEC settings

1 Using the Test Menu or Quick Launch screen, select the 25GigE or 100GigE RS-
FEC application. For example: 100GigE RS-FEC > Layer 2 Traffic > Terminate,
or: 25GigE > Layer 2 Traffic > Terminate.
Refer to Table 14 on page 198 for a list of 100GigE RS-FEC and 25GigE applica-
tions.
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the RS-FEC tab.
3 In Incoming FEC, select one of the following:
– Find and fix errors (the default)
– Find but don’t fix
– Ignore
4 Set Disable HI SER Alarm to Off (the default), or On. When Off, the test instru-
ment will declare HI SER Alarms when they are detected; when On, the test
instrument will ignore HI SER Alarms.
You have specified the RS-FEC settings.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 199
Specifying layer 2 and layer 3 settings

Before you perform RS-FEC testing, be certain you are comfortable configuring and
running basic layer 2, layer 3, and multiple stream tests. You must first initialize the
Ethernet link and specify the appropriate layer 2 settings (for example, the frame type
and frame encapsulation settings). If you are configuring a layer 3 RS-FEC test, you
must also indicate whether you will be testing using IPv4 or IPv6 traffic, then specify the
layer 3 settings (for example, the source and destination IP address, time to live, and
type of service). If you are testing multiple streams, you also need to configure the
stream settings. For details, refer to:
• Chapter 5 “Ethernet and IP Testing” on page 73.
• Chapter 10 “Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing” on page 255.
Transmitting traffic
After you verify and, if necessary, modify the default RS-FEC settings and specify the
required layer 2, and if applicable, layer 3 settings, you are ready to transmit RS-FEC
traffic.
To transmit RS-FEC traffic
select the 25GigE or 100GigE RS-FEC application for the layer, type of test, and
test mode (for example, 25GigE RS-FEC > Layer 3 Traffic > Terminate, or
100GigE RS-FEC > Layer 3 Traffic > Terminate).
Refer to Table 14 on page 198 for a list of 25GigE and 100GigE RS-FEC applica-
tions.
3 Specify the RS-FEC settings (see “Specifying RS-FEC settings” on page 199)
4 Specify the Layer 2, and, if applicable, Layer 3 and Multiple Stream settings For
details, refer to:
– Chapter 5 “Ethernet and IP Testing” on page 73.
– Chapter 10 “Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing” on page 255.
6 Select the Laser action button, then select one of the following:
– If you are running the Layer 2 or Layer 3 Traffic application, press Start
Traffic to transmit traffic over the circuit.
– If you are running the Layer 3 Ping application, press the Ping button to
transmit a packet or packets.
– If you are running the Layer 3 Traceroute application, press the Traceroute
button to transmit and observe the route of the traffic through the network.
– If you are running the Layer 2 or Layer 3 Multiple Streams application, press
Start Traffic to transmit the streams of traffic over the circuit.

Page 200 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Inserting RS-FEC alarms and errors
7 Verify that the green Signal Present, Sync Acquired, Link Active, and Marker Lock
LEDs are illuminated.
8 Observe the RS-FEC results. At a minimum, observe the test results in the
following categories:
– Summary
– RS-FEC Stats
RS-FEC traffic has been transmitted. For descriptions of RS-FEC test results, see “RS-
FEC results” on page 544 of Chapter 6 “25GigE and 100GigE RS-FEC Testing”
Inserting RS-FEC alarms and errors

Using the 100GigE RS-FEC Layer 2 and Layer 3 applications, you can insert (and
analyze received traffic for) HI-SER or Loss of Alignment Marker Payload Sequence
(LOAMP) alarms, correctable FEC errors, and uncorrectable FEC errors. The 25GigE
Layer 2 and 3 applications will enable you to insert LOCWMS instead of LOAMPS
alarms.
Correctable RS-FEC errors are expected when running 100GE RS-FEC applications;
therefore, they are not reported as errors in the Event Log, Histogram, or Error Stats
result category. A count and the rate of correctable errors are reported within the RS-
FEC Stats result category.
NOTE
You can also insert (and analyze received traffic for) BIP-8, Undersized, Runt,
FCS, layer 2 Bit errors, and layer 3 IP Checksum and Acterna Payload errors.
For details, see “Inserting errors or pause frames” on page 160 of
Chapter 5 “Ethernet and IP Testing”.
To insert RS-FEC alarms or errors
select the 25GigE or 100GigE RS-FEC application for the layer, type of test, and
test mode (for example, 100GigE RS-FEC > Layer 3 Traffic > Terminate).
Refer to Table 14 on page 198 for a list of 25GigE and 100GigE RS-FEC applica-
tions.
2 Configure the test (see “Specifying RS-FEC settings” on page 199 and “Speci-
fying layer 2 and layer 3 settings” on page 200).
3 Transmit RS-FEC traffic (see “Transmitting traffic” on page 200).
4 Verify that the green Signal Present, Sync Acquired, Link Active, and Marker Lock
LEDs are illuminated.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 201
Calibrating and resynchronizing CSAM transceivers for RS-FEC
5 On the Actions Panel, do one of the following:

– Alarm insertion: If you intend to insert an alarm, select the Alarms tab, then
select HI SER (the default alarm) or LOAMP (LOCWMS for 25GigE testing).
– Error insertion: If you intend to insert an error, select the Errors tab, then
- Select FEC-Uncorrectable (the default error), or FEC-correctable.
- Specify the Insertion Style (Single or Continuous).
6 Press the Alarm Insert or Error Insert button.
7 At a minimum, observe the Summary, RS-FEC Stats, Error Stats, and Event Log.
Alarm or error insertion starts.
If you are inserting errors continuously, the associated button turns yellow. To stop
insertion, press the corresponding button again. Error insertion stops, and the associ-
ated button turns gray.

Before using some transceivers with SR4, PSM4, or CWDM4 optics for RS-FEC
testing, the CSAM needs to internally map the transceiver’s virtual lanes to physical
lanes. This process is referred to as calibration. This step is for CSAM only. Does not
apply to TBERD/MTS 5800-100G.
NOTE
If you do not calibrate the transceiver before testing, then testing with RS-FEC
cannot proceed.
Calibrating the transceiver

Lane mapping is accomplished by 1) inserting the transceiver into your CSAM, 2)
inserting a Viavi qualified fiber loopback device into the transceiver, then 3) calibrating
the transceiver to the physical-to-virtual mapping that is provided by the fiber loopback
device.
To calibrate your transceiver
1 Insert the required adapter (CFP2 to QSFP28, or CFP2 to CFP4) into the CFP2
40/100G port on your CSAM.
2 Insert the QSFP28 or CFP4 transceiver into the adapter.
3 Insert the fiber loopback device into the transceiver.
4 Using the Test Menu or Quick Launch screen, select the 100GigE RS-FEC appli-
cation (for example, 100GigE RS-FEC > Layer 2 Traffic > Terminate).
Refer to Table 14 on page 198 for a list of 100GigE RS-FEC applications.

Page 202 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
The CSAM will prompt you to calibrate the transceiver by displaying the RS-FEC
Calibration dialog box, which provides instructions for performing the calibration,
and then resynchronizing the lanes to the device under test (DUT).
5 Select Calibrate.
The instrument’s laser automatically turns ON, a status message appears indi-
cating that the transceiver is being calibrated, and the instrument starts to map the
physical lanes to virtual lanes.
6 After calibration is complete, the Status will indicate whether or not the calibration
was successful. If calibration failed, potential reasons for the failure will appear
under the status.
If the calibration succeeded, the virtual lanes have been mapped. The lane mapping
remains valid until a major change occurs (such as an interface reset). Proceed to
“Resynchronizing the transceiver to the device under test” on page 203.
Resynchronizing the transceiver to the device under test

After calibrating a transceiver to an inserted loopback device, you must resynchronize
the transceiver to the device that you are testing (DUT) on the 100 GigE circuit. You
also need to resynchronize the transceiver whenever lane mappings for the DUT
change (for example, in a laboratory setting). This step is for CSAM only. Does not
apply to TBERD/MTS 5800-100G.
NOTE
A red LOAMP alarm in the LED panel and the RS-FEC Stats result category of
your CSAM indicates that DUT lane mappings changed after the transceiver
was last synchronized to the DUT.
To synchronize your transceiver to the DUT
1 Remove the fiber loopback device from the transceiver.

2 Establish a connection from your CSAM to the DUT.
3 On the DUT, turn the laser ON, then verify that the Signal Present LED on your
CSAM is green.
– On the RS-FEC Calibration screen, select Lane Resync.
– On the Main screen, select the RS-FEC action tab, then select Lane Resync.
The transceiver is resynchronized to the DUT, and a message appears indicating that
resynchronization is complete.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 203

Page 204 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
7
Chapter 7 PTP/1588 Testing
This chapter provides information on testing during the turn-up or installation of PTP
links or when troubleshooting an active link. Topics discussed in this chapter include
the following:
• “About PTP/1588 testing” on page 206
• “Optional Time Sources” on page 207
• “Monitoring 1GigE Layer 2 PTP traffic in Dual Monitor Mode” on page 209
• “Analyzing PTP traffic” on page 210
• “Analyzing PTP traffic for wander” on page 213
• “Running the PTP Check work flow” on page 217
• “PTP Check profiles” on page 221

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 205
About PTP/1588 testing
About PTP/1588 testing

Due to growing wireless traffic volume, 3G and 4G networks are being deployed. In
order to ensure accuracy and that inter-cell handoffs are manageable, every base
transmission station in the network needs to be able to trace its frequency synchroni-
zation back to a primary reference clock. Without synchronization, the mobile devices
lose lock which can adversely affect voice and data services or result in dropped calls.
Precision time protocol (PTP) is an industry-standard protocol that enables the precise
transfer of frequency and time to synchronize clocks over packet-based Ethernet
networks, and is based on IEEE 1588. The PTP protocol specifies master and slave
clocks. It synchronizes the PTP local slave clock on each PTP network device with a
PTP system Grandmaster clock. PTP distributes the timing at layer 2 or 4 using time-
stamps embedded within an Ethernet frame or IP/UDP packet; thus, PTP can be trans-
ported over native Ethernet or any transport that supports IP/UDP.
If your instrument is optioned to do so, it can be configured as either a slave or a master

device in a PTP system. The measurement of the relative stability of this system is the
Packet Delay Variation (PDV).

If configured and optioned to do so, you can use your instrument during the turn-up or
installation of PTP links or to troubleshoot an active link by doing the following:
• Connecting an optional GPS as a timing source
• Connecting the optional TEM Module as a synchronization or high accuracy
timing source
• Verifying that the link can support PTP
• Verifying that the PTP Master is reachable and can be communicated with
• Verifying that PTP timing messages are received
• Reviewing packet delay variation (PDV) measurements in microseconds
• Measuring master-to-slave and slave-to-master delay
• Loading a network background traffic stream simultaneously with a PTP session
to see effect network traffic has on PTP
• Monitoring a single Layer 2 PTP sessions from separate 5800v2 ports at 1 Gigabit
Ethernet line rate.
• Measuring and recording T1 - T4 timestamps, and optionally exporting the time-
stamps for offline wander analysis.
• Measuring T1, T4, and two-way constant time errors (cTE) in microseconds.
• Generating, then loading Time Interval Error (TIE) data for Wander Analysis on
your instrument.
• Calculating the Maximum Time Interval Error (MTIE) and Time Deviation (TDEV),
then loading the MTIE and TDEV results for Wander Analysis on your instrument.
• Running the PTP Check work flow to determine whether the maximum difference
in timestamps acceptable per the threshold that your supervisor specified when
creating the PTP Check profile.

Page 206 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Optional Time Sources
PTP/1588 test applications

If your instrument is optioned to do so, this release supports the PTP/1588 applications
listed in Table 15.
Table 15 PTP/1588 applications

10/100/1000 Layer 2 PTP/1588 Terminate
Layer 4 PTP/1588
100M Optical Layer 2 PTP/1588 Terminate
Layer 4 PTP/1588
1GigE Optical Layer 2 PTP/1588 Terminate
Dual Monitor
Layer 4 PTP/1588 Terminate
10 GigE LAN Layer 2 PTP/1588 Terminate

Layer 4 PTP/1588 Terminate
NOTE:
When running a PTP test using a Version 1 MSAM (MSAMv1), it is recom-
mended you avoid CPU intensive actions (such as launching another applica-
tion, launching Wireshark, or saving a capture) until the test is complete. These
actions can cause a spike in PDV statistics when the test is running.

In those systems where PDV results indicate the need for greater stability, an option is
available that utilizes a GPS Time of Day (ToD) and 1PPS signal to generate time-
stamps and provide a reference to a Grandmaster clock. You can also determine the
difference between the timestamps of a PTP slave and the timestamps that are
provided by an optional, attached GPS receiver.
An optional Timing Expansion (TEM) Module is also available for the T-BERD /
MTS-5800v2 which provides a GPS receiver and supports more precise PTP
measurements. For details concerning the TEM Module, see the T-BERD / MTS 5800
GNSS and Timing Expansion Module User Manual that ships with the module.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 207
NOTE: 5800v2 Input Connections for 1 PPS Reference Signals

5800v2s running Software Version 6.3 or above must obtain 1 PPS external
reference signals via the CLK1 (red) cables on the Multi Access SMA Timing
Cable Adapters (which are connected to the EXT CLK connector on the 5800v2
instruments).
5800v2s running Software Versions prior to 6.3 must obtain 1 PPS external ref-
erence signals via the CLK2 blue cables on the timing cable adapters.
Wander Analysis of TIE, MTIE, and TDEV data on your instrument requires a highly
stable timing reference; therefore, a GPS receiver or the optional TEM Module must be
connected to your instrument before generating the data, calculating results, and then
analyzing the results.
Signal Input
Table 16 lists the connections required to provide the timing reference signal and
analyzed signal to a 5800v2 test instrument when performing PTP analysis. The CLK1
(red) cables and CLK2 (blue) cables are provided by the Multi Access SMA Timing
Cable Adapter.
Table 16 5800v2 PTP Analysis Signal Input

External Source1 Reference Signal2 Analyzed Signal
High Accuracy Timing 1PPS via CLK1 (IN) red cable 5800v2 connector supporting the
Source (for example, TOD via USB analyzed signal / line rate.
an external TM4 -M
GPS Receiver)
TEM TEM Time of Day (TOD) and 5800v2 connector supporting the
1PPS analyzed signal / line rate.
1. When signals are provided by an external source and a TEM; the signals provided to the 5800v2 via the Multi Access SMA Timing
Cable Adapter take precedence.
2. 5800v2 instruments running Software Version 6.2 or below must use the CLK2 blue cable on the connected timing cable adapter to
input the 1PPS reference signal.
Connecting a GPS receiver or TEM Module

The optional TM4-M GPS receiver or TEM supplies the 1PPS and the ToD signal that
are required to generate PTP timestamps. Instructions for connecting a GPS receiver
are provided in the “Basic Testing” chapter of the Getting Started Guide that shipped
with your instrument. Instructions for connecting the TEM are provided in the User
Manual that ships with the module.
T-BERD / MTS 5800-100G instrument has an internal GNSS receiver that is used when
the TEM is not available.

Page 208 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Monitoring 1GigE Layer 2 PTP traffic in Dual Monitor Mode
Before testing, verify that the optional TM4-M GPS receiver or TEM and your instru-
ment are synchronized.
• Verify that the appropriate LEDs on optional TM4-M GPS receiver or TEM are
flashing or steadily on.
• Verify that the TOD Sync and 1PPS LEDs on the instrument are on.
To ensure maximum accuracy and stability, follow the guidelines regarding preparation
time and hold-over stability included in the documentation shipped with the optional
TM4-M GPS receiver or TEM.
Monitoring 1GigE Layer 2 PTP traffic in Dual Monitor Mode

If your instrument is optioned and configured to do so, you can monitor 1GigE Layer 2
PTP traffic in Dual Monitor Mode, and capture PTP frames received on both monitored
ports.
To monitor PTP traffic
1 Connect the optional TM4-M GPS receiver or a TEM to your instrument.

– Instructions for connecting the optional GPS receiver are provided in the
Basic Testing chapter of the Getting Started Guide that shipped with your
instrument.
– Instructions for connecting a TEM to the 5800v2 and using the module to
synchronize test instruments are provided in the T-BERD / MTS 5800 GNSS
and Timing Expansion Module User Manual that shipped with your module.
2 Use the Test Menu to select the 1GigE Optical Layer2 PTP/1588 application in
Dual Thru mode.
3 Select the Setup soft key, then select the Interface tab.
4 Select the GPS Receiver tab to verify that the Enable GPS receiver check box is
selected.
5 Select the PTP tab, then specify the observation interval for sampling monitored
traffic for time errors as the Constant Time Error Sample Time (s) setting. The
default value is 1000 seconds.
7 Connect the instrument to the circuit, then verify that the green Signal Present
and Link Active LEDs are illuminated for both ports.
8 Observe the PTP Link Stats and PTP Link Counts. In particular, review the
Constant Time Error and Time Error results.
You are monitoring 1GigE Layer 2 PTP traffic.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 209
Analyzing PTP traffic

You can use the instrument to send, receive, and analyze traffic to troubleshoot a PTP
link.
To transmit and analyze PTP traffic
1 On each instrument, connect the optional TM4-M GPS receiver or a TEM.

– Instructions for connecting the GPS receiver are provided in the Basic Testing
chapter of the Getting Started Guide that shipped with your instrument.
– Instructions for connecting a TEM to the 5800v2 and using the module to
synchronize test instruments are provided in the T-BERD / MTS 5800 GNSS
and Timing Expansion Module User Manual that shipped with your module.
select the PTP/1588 application for the interface you are testing. Refer to Table 15
on page 207 for a list of applications.
3 Select the Setup soft key, then select the Interface tab.
a Select the GPS Receiver tab to verify that the Enable GPS receiver check
box is selected.
b Select the Physical Layer tab, then specify the Auto-negotiation settings
required to negotiate and establish a link on Port 1 and Port 2 (for details, see
“Specifying interface settings” on page 102).
4 Select the PTP tab, then specify the following settings:
Setting Description
Mode Specifies master or slave mode.
Address Mode In Slave mode, specifies the type of message: unicast or multicast.
Multicast: PTP message (announce, sync and delay request) rates
configured on Master.
Unicast: PTP message rates configured on Slave.
NOTE: If you select Unicast, you can optionally disable the transmis-
sion of unicast signaling messages by selecting Disable Signaling.
Domain Specifies the domain number that is using PTP. The domain is a logi-
cal grouping of clocks that synchronize to each other using PTP.
Use 01-80-C2-00-00-0E If you selected Multicast as your address mode, select this option to
Destination MAC ensure that a non-forwardable MAC address is used (01-80-C2-00-
00-0E).
Sync Type In Master mode, indicates that the synchronization type is two step. In
1GigE Optical Layer 2/Layer 4 PTP/1588 applications on the 5800v2,
the user can configure the Sync Type to 1 step or 2 step.
Master IP Address If testing layer 4 streams in slave mode, and the address mode is uni-
cast, enter the IP destination address of the master.
Master MAC Address If testing layer 2 streams in slave mode, and the address mode is uni-
cast, enter the MAC destination address of the master.

Page 210 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Setting Description
Encapsulation Specify the encapsulation: VLAN, Q-in-Q or None.
If Encapsulation is set to VLAN, specify the ID and priority for the
VLAN.
If Encapsulation is set to Q-in-Q, specify the SVLAN ID and the
SVLAN TPID.
TOS Type If testing layer 4 streams, specify the TOS type: TOS or DSCP.
TOS If TOS type is TOS, specify the TOS code.
DSCP If TOS type is DSCP, specify the DSCP code. DSCP values are
shown as code points with their decimal values following in ( ). For
example, EF(46).
Message Interval
Announce Rx Timeout If in Slave mode, specify the amount of time that has to pass without
receipt of an announce message to trigger a Timeout event.
Query If testing in the Slave mode and using unicast address mode, speci-
fies the rate at which unicast signaling messages are transmitted.
Announce Specify the announce message rate - the rate at which announce
messages are transmitted.
NOTE: When using multicast address mode, the announce rate must
match for the Master and Slave. Although the Master controls the rate,
the Slave must use the same rate, otherwise timeouts occur.
Lease Duration If testing in the Slave mode and using unicast address mode, speci-
fies the unicast lease duration, in seconds.
Sync Specify the sync message rate - the rate at which sync messages are
transmitted.
Delay Request Specify the delay request message rate - the rate at which delay
request messages are transmitted.
Always configure clock In Master mode, selecting this option allows for the following setups to
attributes manually. be configured independently of timing source.
Priority 1 In Master mode, specify the priority 1 value - the priority is used in the
execution of the best master clock algorithm.
Priority 2 In Master mode, specify the priority 2 value - the priority is used in the
execution of the best master clock algorithm.
Class Specify the clock class - the traceability of the time and frequency dis-
tributed by the grandmaster clock.
Time Source Specify the source of time used by the grandmaster clock.
Clock Accuracy Specify the estimated accuracy of the grandmaster clock.
UTC Offset (s) Specify the difference in seconds between International Atomic Time
(TAI) and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 211
Setting Description
Frequency Traceable Specify if the frequency determining the timescale is traceable to a pri-
mary reference.
Time Traceable Specify if the timescale and UTC offset are traceable to a primary ref-
erence.
5 Select the Thresholds tab, then enable and specify the packet delay variation
(PDV) thresholds for the PTP traffic to be analyzed in microseconds (us). Avail-
able thresholds are:
– Sync PDV Max (us)
– Delay Request PDV Max (us)
– Floor Packet Measurement. If enabled, opens the following pane:
Window Duration (in seconds). The amount of time to collect packets for each
measurement window.
Cluster Range (in microseconds). Adding this value to the measured Floor
Packet Delay Minimum defines the upper bound for a floor packet.
FPP Limit (%). This value defines the Pass/Fail threshold for the test. If the FPP
(%) for any measurement window is less than the configured FPP Limit then the
test will fail.
Window Spacing.
Jumping Window: collects packets for the configured Window Duration and
then calculates the Floor Packet Measurement results. Each received packet
is included in the results for only a single measurement window.
Sliding Window: Each received packet causes the oldest packet measure-
ment to be discarded and new Floor Packet Measurement results to be
calculated. Each received packet is included in the results for many measure-
ment windows.
Settling Time (in seconds). The amount of time to wait before collecting and
calculating Floor Packet Measurement results.
Message Type. This control defines whether Floor Packet Measurements are
based on Sync or Delay Request messages.
6 If you have connected an optional TM4-M GPS receiver or TEM, the following
thresholds are also available:
– Slave to Master Delay
– Master to Slave Delay
– Time Error

Page 212 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Analyzing PTP traffic for wander
If testing toward a unit that is in loopback mode, limit the stream bandwidth to
95% (on the “All Streams” tab, using “Configure Streams”).
If testing layer4 streams, the Stream IP destinations must complete ARP success-
fully before PTP Session can be started.
10 Select the Start PTP session button.
11 Verify that the green Signal Present and Link Active LEDs are illuminated.
12 Observe the PTP Link Stats and PTP Link Counts. In particular, review the
Constant Time Error and Time Error results.
NOTE:
The PTP session will be terminated if a loop down request is received. If you
wish to save the test results, do so before looping down.
You have analyzed PTP traffic.

If your instrument is optioned and configured to do so, you can use the Time Error Anal-
ysis tool to graphically analyze captured TIE data and calculated TDEV and MTIE
results. You can also export the data and results for analysis using an off-line
utility.
NOTE:
The time it takes to update the TIE data or calculate MTIE/TDEV depends on
the amount of data collected.
For information about jitter and wander principles and specifications, refer to the
appendix “Principles of Jitter and Wander Testing” in the T-BERD / MTS / SC Sonet/
SDH, OTN and PDH Testing Manual.
To analyze PTP traffic for wander
1 Connect the optional TM4-M GPS receiver or a TEM to your instrument.

– Instructions for connecting a GPS receiver are provided in the Basic Testing
chapter of the Getting Started Guide that shipped with your instrument.
– Instructions for connecting a TEM Module to the 5800v2 and using the
module to synchronize test instruments are provided in the T-BERD / MTS
5800 GNSS and Timing Expansion Module User Manual that shipped with
your module.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 213
select the PTP/1588 application for the interface you are testing. Refer to Table 15
3 Configure the test per the instructions provided in “Analyzing PTP traffic” on
page 210 or “Monitoring 1GigE Layer 2 PTP traffic in Dual Monitor Mode” on
page 209.
4 Select the Toolkit soft key.
5 If your instrument is optioned and configured to do so, you can also perform
synchronous Ethernet wander analysis from within this application (1GigE Optical
rate only). See “Measuring and analyzing wander” on page 225” for more informa-
tion. The SyncE Wander Analysis button will only appear if the instrument is
configured to test SyncE wander within the PTP test.

Page 214 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
6 Select the Time Error Analysis button. The graphical Time Error Analysis screen
appears with the TIE tab selected.
NOTE:
• You can run on-board Time Error Analysis while the test is in progress;
however, if you restart the test, the wander data collected previously will
be cleared. If you want to preserve the wander data for the previous
measurement, save the data before restarting a test.
• Saved data cannot be loaded into the on-board Time Error Analysis tool; it
calculates MTIE and TDEV on all the data accumulated so far.
• Time Error Analysis is restricted to the first 8.64 million samples. If your
measurement contains more samples, you must export the wander data
for offline analysis.
7 Select the Update TIE Data soft key.

This refreshes the data in the Time Error Analysis screen. All of the TIE samples
accumulated so far (including those gathered since the tool itself was launched)
are redrawn, and then MTIE and TDEV are recalculated.
The TIE graph appears. The Time Error Analyzer automatically displays the last
block of continuous valid data.
1 The Pre-processing drop-down menu allows you to set the options for pre-
processing of PTP time error data.
2 A block of TIE data is a contiguous subset of all TIE samples that is not inter-
rupted by any alarms. For Time Error measurements, TIE values are sampled at a
constant rate. If an alarm occurs (e.g. LOS), the receiver is not able to produce
meaningful TIE values and stops producing TIE entries until it is able to recover.
These alarms separate the whole measurement into sections, or “blocks”.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 215
Do any or all of the following:

– If you want to observe the frequency offset curve, clear the Remove Offset
checkbox.
– To refresh the graph, select the Update TIE Data soft key again.
– To take a screenshot of the graph, select the Take Screenshot soft key.
3 To observe the MTIE/TDEV result graph, select the MTIE/TDEV tab.
The MTIE/TDEV graph screen appears.
4 Select Calculate MTIE/TDEV to start calculating MTIE and TDEV results.
The MTIE/TDEV graphs appears.
5 To customize the graph, do any or all of the following:

– To select the data curves you want to observe, use the first field to select
MTIE only, TDEV only, or MTIE+TDEV.
– To select the curve style, select the arrows to the right of the Curve Style field,
and then select Line+Dots, or Dots only.
– If you want to select a mask to compare the data against, do the following:
- In the Mask Type field, specify a mask type.
- In the Mask field, specify a mask to compare the data to.
The mask curve appears on the result graph.
If you do not want to compare the data against a mask, in the Mask field,
select None.
6 Do any or all of the following:
– To stop calculating MTIE/TDEV before the calculation is complete, select the
Stop Calculation soft key.
– To refresh the graph, select Calculate MTIE/TDEV again.
– To take a screen shot of the graph, select the Take Screenshot soft key.

Page 216 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
7 To create a report containing snapshots of the TIE and MTIE/TDEV graphs

including the settings, select Create Report soft key. Specify the filename to be
used for saving the report. Select PDF for the report format if you would like the
graphs to be included in the report.
– To return to the Main screen, select the Results soft key.
– To stop Time Error analysis and return to the Main screen, select the Close
Analysis soft key. For detailed information about saving and exporting
wander data for use with the offline analysis tool, see “Saving and exporting
wander measurement data” on page 230 of Chapter 8 “1GigE Optical SyncE
& 1000BASE-T Wander Testing”.

received PTP packets, save it on the instrument or to an external USB key, and then
either send the packets to another technician for analysis, or analyze it yourself using
the Wireshark® protocol analyzer.
NOTE:
the traffic stream.
For details, refer to “Capturing packets for analysis” on page 6 of Chapter 1 “Basic
Testing”.
Running the PTP Check work flow

If your 5800v2 is configured and optioned to support PTP testing, you can run the PTP
Check work flow to verify that a Master PTP device is reachable and can be communi-
cated with, and determine whether the maximum difference in timestamps is less than
the threshold that your supervisor specified when creating the PTP Check profile. A
measurement equal to or greater than the threshold will result in an overall fail status
for the test.
The PTP Check work flow automates the Time Error Maximum test over 1GigE circuits.
This test uses the threshold specified in the selected work flow profile to determine the
test status:
• If the measured Time Error Maximum result is less than the specified threshold,
the test will PASS.
• If the measured result is greater than or equal to the specified threshold, the test
will FAIL.
• If the threshold was disabled in the profile, the test will be reported as
COMPLETED.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 217
Before you begin

Before running the work flow, your supervisor must create and save a work flow profile
on your instrument (or provide the profile to you to load onto your instrument yourself).
The profile provides the settings that are required to 1) establish a PTP session from
your instrument to the PTP Master device, and 2) establish the threshold to determine
whether the Time Error Maximum measurement (result) is acceptable.
Before running the work flow, verify the following:

• You have connected the 5800v2 to the circuit under test.
• You have input the timing reference signal and analyzed signal to the 5800v2 per
the connections listed in Table 16 on page 208.
Step 1: Launching PTP Check
To launch the PTP Check work flow
• Using the Test Menu, do one of the following:

– To go directly to the work flow, select the Ethernet > 1GigE Optical > Layer
4 PTP/1588 > PTP Check application.
– To launch the work flow using the corresponding soft key, select the Ethernet
> 1GigE Optical > Layer 4 PTP/1588 application, then select the
PTP Check soft key.
The work flow is launched and the Load Profiles screen appears.
Step 2: Loading a profile

After launching the work flow, you must load the profile.
To load a PTP Check work flow profile
1 On the Load Profiles screen, select the profile that your supervisor provided for
the work flow, then select Load Profiles.
A message appears indicating that the load was successful.
2 Select OK to acknowledge the message.
The profile is loaded.
Step 3: Running a Quick Test

After loading the profile, you specify the settings that are required to connect to the PTP
Master device, and run a Quick Test to verify that the session has been established.

Page 218 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
To run the Quick Test
1 On the Load Profiles screen, select Next.

The PTP Check Quick Check screen appears.
a Enter the IP address, default gateway, and subnet mask for the instrument
(slave).
b In Master IP Address, enter the IP address of the master device that you
intend to establish a session with.
c In PTP Domain, enter the domain number that the master and slave (your
instrument) belong to. The domain is a logical grouping of clocks that
synchronize to each other using PTP.
3 Select Start Check. The button changes from grey to yellow, and states Starting
Session.
– If the instrument successfully establishes a PTP session, the Quick Check
will pass, and you will be prompted to run the PTP Check work flow.
– If any of the following conditions is detected, the Quick Check will fail, and a
message will appear explaining the cause of the failure:
- No valid timing reference signal has been detected. Verify that the refer-
ence signal is input per the connections provided in Table 16 on
page 208.
- The instrument was not able to establish a PTP session with the Master
device. Verify that you specified the correct IP address and PTP domain
for the device.
Step 4: Running PTP Check

After verifying that a session was successfully established (using Quick Check), you are
ready to run the PTP Check work flow.
To run the PTP Check work flow
1 After notification that the Quick Check passed (and the instrument has estab-
lished a PTP session with the master device), select Next.
The Run PTP Check screen appears.
2 Click Run Test.
– The button turns yellow, and the label changes to Stop Test.
– The test status bars keeps you informed of the progress and the success or
failure of the test.
3 After the test finishes, to create a report of the results of the test that just
completed, select the Go arrow on the “Create Report” line. Go to step 4.
The detailed results are presented on a sequence of windows that vary depending
upon the steps in the test that were selected to be run.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 219
On the last page of the results select the right-pointing green arrow. Go to step 4.
4 Enter report information, including:
– Customer Name
– Technician ID
– Test Location
– Work Order
– Comments/Notes
– Logo (must be saved in the /user/bert/images directory)
5 Select Create Report (the green arrow).
Do the following:
a Select the format in which the report is to be saved by selecting the radio
button in Format pane.
b Specify the filename of the report.To review the filenames of other, currently
saved reports on the unit, select the Select button.
c You may view saved reports by selecting the View Report button.
d To show a copy of the current report after saving it, select the View report
after creation check box. The report will automatically load into the appro-
priate reader (if available) depending upon the format in which it has been
saved.
e To include the message log with the report, select the Include Message log
check box.
f When ready to save the report, select the Create Report button. After it has
been saved (and viewed), select the right-pointing green arrow.
6 The post-report/results window appears. Select the Exit soft key to return to the
PTP Check test window.
7 To exit the test application, select the Exit button.
The PTP Check is finished. The report provides the following information:
• A cover sheet with the details that you specified before creating the report (for
example, the customer name, your technician ID, or the work order associated
with the test).
• The overall test result (Pass, Fail, or Complete).
• The maximum Time Error Max (ns) value measured during the course of the test,
in nanoseconds.
• A graph of the Time Error Cur (us) measured over time.
• The test duration.
• The selected profile settings.
• The specified PTP session settings.

Page 220 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
PTP Check profiles
PTP Check profiles

If you supervise the technicians responsible for running the PTP Check work flow, and
you are authorized to create and distribute the required profiles, you can do so using
the Expert PTP Check work flow.
CAUTION: Disruption of PTP Sessions

The Expert PTP Check work flow should only be used by personnel with the
authority to create and distribute work flow profiles. Running the PTP Check
work flow with an incorrectly configured profile may result in the uninten-
tional disruption of a PTP session.
NOTE:
The following procedure takes you through the steps for configuring a new PTP
Check work flow profile. You can also optionally select, then modify a previously
configured profile.
To create a PTP Check profile
1 Select the Ethernet > 1GigE Optical > Layer 4 PTP/1588 > PTP Check applica-
tion.
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the Expert PTP soft key.
The Expert PTP Setups screen appears.
3 Specify the following profile settings (required to establish a session with the PTP
Master device):
Setting Description
TOS Type Specify the TOS type: TOS or DSCP.
TOS If the TOS type is TOS, specify the TOS code.
DSCP If TOS type is DSCP, specify the DSCP code. DSCP values are
shown as code points with their decimal values following in ( ). For
example, EF(46).
Announce Specify the announce message rate - the rate at which announce
messages are transmitted.
Announce Rx Timeout Specify the amount of time that has to pass without receipt of an
announce message to trigger a Timeout event.
Sync Specify the sync message rate - the rate at which sync messages are
transmitted.
Lease Duration If testing in the Slave mode and using unicast address mode, speci-
fies the unicast lease duration, in seconds.
Delay Request Specify the delay request message rate - the rate at which delay
request messages are transmitted.
4 Select Next.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 221
PTP Check profiles
The Expert PTP Thresholds screen appears.

5 Specify the Time Error Max (ns) threshold by doing the following:
a Select the checkbox to enable the setting.
b Specify the period of time that is considered unacceptable in nanoseconds
(ns).
If the measurement for the Time Error Max result is greater than or equal to the
specified threshold level, this test will FAIL.
6 Specify the test duration in minutes. You can configure the profile to run the PTP
Check work flow for up to 180 minutes (3 hours).
7 Select Next.
The Save Expert PTP Profile screen appears. Save the profile, then select Exit to
leave the Expert PTP Check work flow.
If you did not define the profile on the 5800v2 instrument that will be used to run the
PTP Check work flow, you can copy the profile to a USB, and provide it to a technician
to load on their instrument, or you can use the Smart Access Anywhere utility to load
the profile remotely. For details concerning the Smart Access Anywhere utility, please
see the Getting Started Guide that shipped with your instrument.

Page 222 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
8
1GigE Optical SyncE & 1000BASE-T
Chapter 8
Wander Testing
This chapter provides step-by-step instructions for measuring wander on 1GigE Optical
SyncE and 1000BASE-T networks using the instrument. Topics discussed in this
chapter include the following:
• “About wander testing” on page 224
• “Measuring and analyzing wander” on page 225

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 223
Chapter 8 1GigE Optical SyncE & 1000BASE-T Wander Testing
About wander testing
About wander testing

If your MSAMv2 (for 1GigE Optical SyncE only), T-BERD / MTS 5800v2 or 5800-100G
are configured and optioned to do so, you can use them to measure wander on a
1000BASE-T and 1GigE Optical SyncE interfaces (both the SyncE and Wander options
must be installed). For details on the device and interface standards for measuring jitter
and wander on Ethernet interfaces, refer to ITU-T Recommendations O.174.
The wander option allows you to analyze system wander performance. An optional
Timing Expansion (TEM) Module is available for the T-BERD / MTS-5800v2 and 5800-
100G which allows you to provide a highly accurate timing reference when performing
wander analysis. For details concerning the TEM Module, see the T-BERD/MTS/MAP-
2100 GNSS and Timing Expansion Module User Manual that shipped with your device.
NOTE:
Due to intense resource requirements, the Wander test must be run exclu-
sively. No other test may be run simultaneously on a unit making wander mea-
surements.
Wander testing is only applicable to 8000 UIMv2, MSAMv2, 5800v2 or higher.
NOTE:
The MSAM has a maximum wander test duration of 48 days 23 hours 59 min-
utes and 56 seconds, but may be limited by file system storage capacity
(actual time available may be less).
When running a test, you can observe the remaining test time in the Time cate-
gory of the Summary result group or in the Wander category of the Interface
result group.
For information about jitter and wander principles and specifications, refer to the
appendix “Principles of Jitter and Wander Testing” in the T-BERD/MTS/SC/MAP-2100
SONET, SDH, OTN and PDH Testing Manual.

The wander measurement option allows you to:
• Test and analyze the wander results in a graphical manner.
• Export the wander TIE result to be analyzed on a remote PC. Optional O.172
MTIE/TDEV Offline Analysis software is also available for purchase that allows
you to export the wander TIE results for analysis on a remote workstation. For
details, see “Saving and exporting wander measurement data” on page 230.
Signal Input
Table 17 lists the connections required to provide the external timing reference signal
and analyzed signal to a 5800v2 or 5800-100G test instruments when performing

Page 224 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Measuring and analyzing wander
SyncE Wander analysis. The EXT_CLK (white) cab provided by the Multi Access SMA
Timing Cable Adapter.
Table 17 5800v2/5800-100G SyncE Wander Analysis Signal Input
External Source1 Reference Signal Analyzed Signal

High Accuracy Timing EXT_CLK (white) cable 5800v2/5800-100G connector
Source (for example, a supporting 1000BASE-T and
GPS Receiver) 1GigE Optical signals / line rates.
TEM TEM 10 MHz 5800v2/5800-100G connector
supporting 1000BASE-T and
1GigE Optical signals / line rates.
1. When signals are provided by an external source and a TEM; the signals provided to the 5800v2/5800-100G via the Multi Access SMA
Timing Cable Adapter take precedence.
Accessing wander test results

When you configure your unit to measure wander, measurement results are available
in the Interface result group.

If you purchased the wander testing option, you can measure Time Interval Error (TIE)
and calculate MTIE/TDEV (Maximum Time Interval Error/Time Deviation) to evaluate
the condition of your network elements.
NOTE:
The time it takes to update the TIE data or calculate MTIE/TDEV depends on
the amount of data collected.
Measuring TIE and calculating MTIE

Measuring TIE and calculating MTIE involves specifying the settings for the test inter-
face you selected and the Tx and Rx parameters. After the test starts, you can observe
the TIE and MTIE results in the Wander category.
To measure TIE and MTIE
1 For 1000BASE-T or 1GigE Optical SyncE Wander analysis:

a Using the Test Menu or Quick Launch screen, select either test application:
Ethernet>1GigE Optical>SyncE Wander
Ethernet>10/100/1000>SyncE Wander

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 225
b Select the Setup soft key, and then select the Wander tab.
c Specify the Wander sample rate.
For 1000BASE-T Wander analysis only:

d Select the Interface tab, and set the Master/Slave control to Slave.
3 Connect the cable from the appropriate TX connector to the network’s Rx access
connector.
4 Connect the reference signal to the appropriate input.
5 Select the Laser button. The button label becomes Laser On.
6 Verify the LEDs.
– Verify that the Signal Present, Sync Acquired, and Link Active LEDs are
green.
– Verify that the Wander Reference Present is green.
7 Select Restart.
8 Run the test for an appropriate length of time. To ensure accuracy of your results,
let the test run for at least one minute.
9 To view the Wander results, set one of the result windows to display the
Summary group, set another results window to display the Interface group, and
then select the Wander Category.
To view the wander results in a graphical format, select the Wander Graph cate-
gory. For details, see “Wander Interface results” on page 550.
TIE and MTIE results are measured.
SyncE Reference Timing Wander

If your MSAMv2, 5800v2 or 5800G-100 are configured and optioned to do so, you can
use them to measure the wander of a Synchronous Ethernet timing signal to a stable
reference signal.
To measure SyncE wander to timing reference signal
1 Using the Test Menu or Quick Launch screen, select the wander application for
the signal you are testing.

Page 226 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018

3 On the Wander tab specify the desired Low Pass Filter/Sample Rate from the
drop down box.Select the arrows to the right of the Low-Pass Filter field, and then
select the desired Rx filter value.
The filter you specify automatically determines the sampling rate for the wander
measurement.
4 On the Timed Test tab define the starting time and length of test parameters.
5 Select the Results soft key.
6 Verify that the reference signal is provided per the connections listed in Table 17
on page 225. If the instrument is not properly configured to accept a particular
reference signal, a message will be displayed indicating the reference signal is
not supported.
7 Select Restart.
8 Run the test for an appropriate length of time. To ensure accuracy of your results,
let the test run for at least one minute.
9 To view the wander results, set one of the result windows to display the Summary
group, set another results window to display the Interface group, and then select
the Wander category.
To view the wander results in a graphical format, select the Wander Graph cate-
gory.
SyncE TIE and MTIE results are measured.
Analyzing wander
After you have accumulated some TIE data samples, the MSAM or 5800v2/5800-100G
can do more detailed MTIE and TDEV calculations on it using the On-board Wander
Analysis tool. This provides much more detail than the results available in the Interface/
Wander category.
1 To analyze wander, follow step through step 9 of “Measuring TIE and calculating
MTIE” or step 1 through step 9 of “SyncE Reference Timing Wander”.
2 Select the Wander Analysis soft key.
The graphical wander analysis screen appears with the TIE tab selected.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 227
NOTE:
• You can run on-board Wander Analysis while the test is in progress;
however, if restart the test, the wander data collected previously will be
cleared. If you want to preserve the wander data for the previous
measurement, save the data before restarting a test.
• Saved data cannot be loaded into the on-board Wander Analysis tool; it
calculates MTIE and TDEV on all the data accumulated so far.
• Wander analysis is restricted to the first 8.64 million samples. If your
measurement contains more samples, you must export the wander data
for offline analysis.
For detailed information about saving and exporting wander data, see “Saving
and exporting wander measurement data” on page 230.
3 Select the Update TIE Data soft key.

This refreshes the data in the Wander Analysis screen. All of the TIE samples
accumulated so far (including those gathered since the tool itself was launched)
are redrawn, and then MTIE and TDEV are recalculated.
The TIE graph appears. The Wander Analyzer automatically displays the last
block of continuous valid data.
4 To observe another block of data, select the Current Block field, type the block
number, and then select OK.
The data block you specified appears.

Page 228 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
A block of TIE data is a contiguous subset of all TIE samples that is not inter-
rupted by any alarms. For Wander measurements, TIE values are sampled at a
constant rate. If an alarm occurs (e.g. LOS), the receiver is not able to produce
meaningful TIE values and stops producing TIE entries until it is able to recover.
These alarms separate the whole measurement into sections, or “blocks”.
5 If you want to observe the frequency offset curve, clear the Remove Offset
checkbox.
6 To select the data curve to observe, under Curve Selection, do one of the
following:
– To observe both TIE and frequency offset data curves, select Both Curves.
– To observe only the frequency offset data curve, select Offs.rem.only.
7 To refresh the graph, select the Update TIE Data soft key again.
8 To observe the MTIE/TDEV result graph, select the MTIE/TDEV tab.
The MTIE/TDEV graph screen appears.
9 Select Calculate MTIE/TDEV to start calculating MTIE and TDEV results.
The MTIE/TDEV graphs appear.
10 To customize the graph, do the following:

a To select the data curves you want to observe, use the first field to select
MTIE only, TDEV only, or MTIE+TDEV.
b To select the curve style, select the arrows to the right of the Curve Style field,
and then select Line+Dots, or Dots only.
11 If you want to select a mask to compare the data against, do the following:
a In the Mask Type field, specify a mask type.
b In the Mask field, specify a mask to compare the data to.
The mask curve appears on the result graph.
If you do not want to compare the data against a mask, in the Mask field, select
None.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 229

– To stop calculating MTIE/TDEV before the calculation is complete, select the
Stop Calculation soft key.
– To refresh the graph, select Calculate MTIE/TDEV again.
13 To create a report containing snapshots of the TIE and MTIE/TDEV graphs
including the settings, select Create Report soft key. Specify the filename to be
used for saving the report. Select PDF for the report format if you would like the
graphs to be included in the report.
– To return to the Main screen, select the Results soft key.
– To stop wander analysis and return to the Main screen, select the Close
Analysis soft key.
NOTE:
Selecting the Close Analysis soft key stops analyzing the data and clear all
MTIE and TDEV results calculated inside the Analysis tool. It will not discard the
real-time MTIE results displayed in the Interface/Wander category. To return to
the Main screen without ending the current analysis, use the Results soft key.
Saving and exporting wander measurement data

You can save the TIE result data to a .hrd file or .chrd (compressed and encrypted .hrd
file) on the base unit’s hard drive, and then export the saved file to a USB memory key.
Then you can do further analysis of MTIE and TDEV by loading the file on a remote PC
using an offline analysis tool.
NOTE:
Restarting a test clears the wander history data. If you want to preserve the
wander data for the current measurement, you must export the data before
restarting a test.
In the case of PTP applications, the TIE data is stored in a .ptp file.
For your convenience, you can also plug a micro SD card in your unit before running
the test. The application will automatically detect the card and save the results on it. The
SD card has a much larger storage capacity than that of the hard drive and can be used
as a source. The maximum supported SD card storage is 32GB. Note, if you remove
the card during the test, you will need to press the Restart button to restart the test.
To save the TIE data in the absence of the SD card
1 For non-PTP applications, select the Save TIE Data soft key.
The wander data is saved into a .hrd or .chrd file in the following folder on your
unit:
../acterna/user/disk/bert/reports
The file name is automatically assigned with a TIE_ prefix followed by date, time,
test mode, and interface information as shown in the following example:

Page 230 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
TIE_2007-08-16T15.59.19_TermDs1WanderTieEvalMsec.hrd
2 For PTP applications, select the Save PTP Data soft key. The wander data is
saved into a .ptp file in the following folder on your unit: . ./user/bert/reports. The
file name is automatically assigned with a TIE_ prefix followed by date, time, port
number, and interface information as shown in the following example:
TIE_2016-10-16T15.59.19_PtpPort1.ptp
The TIE data is saved.
NOTE:
The offline analysis tool TIE - MTIE/TDEV Analyzer can analyze .hrd files only.
To export the TIE data to a USB memory key
1 Insert a USB memory key into one of the two slots provided on the top panel of
the base unit.
2 Select the Export TIE Data soft key.
The Wander Data Files screen appears, listing the wander data files in:
../acterna/user/disk/bert/reports
3 Select the wander data file you want to export, and then press the Export to USB
soft key.
The File Export dialog box appears, indicating that the unit is copying the selected
report file to the USB memory key.
The TIE data is exported. If desired, it can now can be loaded into the PC-based
Wander Analysis Tool.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 231

Page 232 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
9
Chapter 9 TCP/UDP Testing
This chapter provides step-by-step instructions for testing TCP/UDP service. Topics
discussed in this chapter include the following:
• “About TCP/UDP testing” on page 234
• “Specifying layer 2 and layer 3 settings” on page 239
• “Specifying layer 4 settings” on page 239
• “Transmitting layer 4 traffic” on page 244
• “Inserting errors or pause frames” on page 245
• “Loopback testing” on page 245
• “Running TCP Host or Wirespeed applications” on page 245
• “TrueSpeed” on page 253

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 233
About TCP/UDP testing

If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so, you can use it to verify layer 4
performance by transmitting and analyze TCP or UDP traffic, verifying that routers are
prioritizing traffic for various ports properly, and verifying that the bandwidth allocated
to a customer per their Service Level Agreement is available. Figure 37 illustrates the
Main screen when running a Layer 4 TCP/UDP application.
Figure 37 Main screen, Layer 4 Traffic application
Group Test Category

Battery Indicator
Menu Bar
Message Bar
Quick Config
LED Panel
Soft keys
Actions Panel
Result Window

Features and capabilities of the instrument include the following when testing TCP/
UDP:
• Performance measurements—Layer 4 bandwidth, data loss, out of sequence,
jitter, and latency measurements are available when evaluating layer 4 perfor-
mance.
• Stateless firewall verification—You can configure and transmit TCP and UDP
traffic destined for a particular port, and then verify that the traffic successfully
passes through a stateless firewall.
• TCP connection support—The instrument can establish a TCP connection,
enabling you to verify that traffic destined for a particular port can pass through
stateful devices on the network.

Page 234 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
• Multiple stream testing—You can transmit and analyze up to ten streams of

layer 4 traffic, with each stream depicting a particular type of traffic. After transmit-
ting the streams, you can analyze each stream to verify that network routing and
switching devices are handling the traffic properly (based on each stream’s
priority). For details, see “Specifying layer 4 stream settings” on page 271.
• Layer 4 Toolkit—When running multiple streams applications, a variety of scripts
have been provided in the Layer 4 Toolkit which allow you to determine the ideal
window size, and measure throughput and latency for a particular connection.
ment or to an external USB key, and then either send the data to another techni-
cian for analysis, or analyze it yourself using the Wireshark® protocol analyzer
(provided on the instrument). For details, see “Capturing packets for analysis” on
page 6.
analyze IPv6 traffic using the terminate and monitor/thru applications. For details,
see “Configuring IPv4 and IPv6 tests” on page 85.
• TCP Wirespeed throughput analysis—If your instrument is configured and
optioned to do so, you can use it to verify that your network meets or exceeds the
throughput specified in service level agreements at the TCP layer, and optimize
layer 4 throughput by testing using a variety of window sizes. For details, see
“Running the TCP Wirespeed application” on page 251.

When you configure your module for testing, graphical displays of TCP packets or UDP
datagrams are provided on the setup tabs for the application you selected. You can
specify characteristics for transmitted and filtered traffic by selecting the corresponding
field on the graphic, and then entering or selecting a value. Colored fields can be edited;
fields in gray can not be modified.
Figure 38 illustrates the TCP packet details for a layer 4 traffic test.
Figure 38 TCP Packet Details
For details on specifying layer 4 traffic characteristics, see “Specifying TCP/UDP

settings for transmitted traffic” on page 240.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 235
TCP/UDP test applications

If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so, the applications listed in Table 18
are supported.
Table 18 TCP and UDP applications
Circuit Application Test Mode1

10/100/1000 Layer 4 Traffic P1 Terminate
P1 Loopback
P2 Terminate
P2 Loopback
Layer 4 Multiple Streams P1 Terminate
P1 Loopback
P2 Terminate
P2 Loopback
Layer 4 TCP Wirespeed2 P1 Terminate
P2 Terminate
100M Optical Layer 4 Traffic P1 Terminate
P1 Loopback
P2 Terminate
P2 Loopback
P1 Loopback
P2 Terminate
P2 Loopback
Layer 4 PTP/1588 P1 Terminate
P2 Terminate
1GigE Optical Layer 4 Traffic P1 Terminate
P1 Loopback
P2 Terminate
P2 Loopback
P1 Loopback
P2 Terminate
P2 Loopback
Layer 4 PTP/1588 P1 Terminate
P2 Terminate
P2 Terminate

Page 236 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Table 18 TCP and UDP applications (Continued)
Circuit Application Test Mode1

10GigE LAN Layer 4 Traffic P1 Terminate
P1 Loopback
P2 Terminate
P2 Loopback
P1 Loopback
P2 Terminate
P2 Loopback
P2 Terminate
1. When running loopback tests, if both units are capable of transmitting traffic, select a Terminate mode application
for each unit. If the loopback unit cannot transmit traffic, place it in Loopback mode. Loopback mode does not
appear if your unit is capable of transmitting traffic.
2. IPv4 traffic only.
In addition to the single stream applications, you can also transmit and analyze up to
ten streams of layer 4 traffic using the Layer 4 Multiple Streams application, or four
streams using the Layer 4 TCP Wirespeed application. When running the Multiple
Streams or Wirespeed applications, you can configure your instrument to emulate a
TCP client or server, and then use the TCP Host to initiate a stateful TCP session with
another device. For details, see “Specifying layer 4 stream settings” on page 271 and
“Running the TCP Host script” on page 280 of Chapter 10 “Triple Play and
Multiple Streams Testing”.
Understanding the ATP Listen IP and Port

Many applications (such as delay measurements, out of sequence counts, lost frames
counts, and packet jitter measurements) and multiple-stream tests must be performed
using traffic that carries an Acterna Test Packet (ATP) payload. Each of these packets
has a time stamp and a unique sequence number which are used to calculate a variety
of test results.
The instrument uses the ATP Listen IP Address and ATP Listen Port to determine
whether received layer 4 traffic carries an ATP payload; therefore, it is essential that
you specify the correct ATP Listen IP Address and ATP Listen Port on the receiving unit
when you configure tests that require an ATP payload.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 237
Figure 39 illustrates the settings required to analyze layer 4 traffic carrying an Acterna
payload when testing end-to-end.
Figure 39 ATP Listen Scenario: End-to-End testing
Transport Network
UNIT A: TCP/UDP tab UNIT B: TCP/UDP tab

Specify settings to “listen” for ATP traffic received Specify settings to “listen” for ATP traffic received
from Unit B from Unit A
ATP Listen IP = ATP Listen IP =

Destination IP Address carried in Unit B traffic Destination IP Address carried in Unit A traffic
ATP Listen Port = ATP Listen Port =
Destination Port carried in Unit B traffic Destination Port carried in Unit A traffic
When initiating a loop back from the local unit (using the Loop Up command), no ATP
listen settings need to be specified for either unit (see Figure 40).
Figure 40 ATP Listen Scenario: Loop Up initiated from Unit A
Transport Network
UNIT A: Issues “Loop Up” command UNIT B: Loops received traffic back to Unit A
TCP/UDP tab: Swaps Destination IP Address and Destination Port

ATP Listen IP and ATP Listen Port are automatically carried in received traffic with Unit A’s Source IP
set to Unit A’s Source IP and Source Port. You do Address and Source Port. Sends ATP traffic back to
not need to specify “Listen” settings. Unit A.

Page 238 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Figure 41 illustrates the settings required for Unit A when traffic is looped back from the
Unit B using the LLB action.
Figure 41 ATP Listen Scenario: LLB initiated from Unit B
Transport Network
UNIT A: Sends traffic to UNIT B UNIT B: Placed into Loopback Mode using LLB
TCP/UDP tab: Swaps Destination IP Address and Destination Port

ATP Listen IP = carried in received traffic with Unit A’s Source IP
UNIT A’s Source IP Address Address and Source Port. Sends ATP traffic back to
ATP Listen Port = Unit A.
UNIT A’s Source Port
For details, see “Specifying TCP/UDP settings for transmitted traffic” on page 240.

Before you transmit layer 4 traffic, you must first initialize the link, and specify the appro-
priate layer 2 and layer 3 settings for the traffic, such as the frame type, frame encap-
sulation, time to live, and type of service. After you initialize the link and specify the
layer 2 and layer 3 settings, you then specify the required layer 4 settings before trans-
mitting the traffic over the circuit.
For details on link initialization, see “Specifying interface settings” on page 102. For
details on specifying layer 2 and layer 3 settings, see “Layer 2 testing” on page 101 and
“Layer 3 testing” on page 141.
Specifying layer 4 settings

After initializing the link and specifying layer 2 and layer 3 settings, you specify the
layer 4 settings before transmitting traffic over the circuit. Step-by-step instructions are
provided in this section for the following:
• “Specifying TCP/UDP settings for transmitted traffic” on page 240
• “Configuring the traffic load” on page 242
• “Specifying the frame or packet length for transmitted traffic” on page 242
• “Filtering received traffic using layer 2 or layer 3 criteria” on page 242
• “Filtering received traffic using layer 4 criteria” on page 243

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 239
NOTE:
If during the course of testing you change the frame or packet length (or settings
that impact the calculated length) while the unit is already transmitting traffic, the
unit resets your test results, but some residual frames or packets of the old
length may be counted because they are already in the traffic stream.
Well known ports

A port is an endpoint to a logical connection and the way a client program specifies a
specific server program on a computer in a network. Some ports, known as well known
ports, have numbers that are pre-assigned to them by the IANA (as specified in RFC
1700). Port numbers can range from 0 to 65535, but only ports numbers 0 through 1024
are reserved for privileged services and designated as well-known ports. This list of
well-known port numbers specifies the port used by the server process as its contact
port.
When configuring layer 4 traffic, you can select from a list of well known ports, or you
can specify your own user-defined port.
Specifying TCP/UDP settings for transmitted traffic

Before transmitting layer 4 traffic you must specify the traffic mode, source and desti-
nation port numbers, and the type of payload carried.
Port 0 (zero) is reserved by TCP/UDP for networking; therefore, it is not available when
you configure your traffic.
The following port numbers are also reserved, and should not be used during testing.
– 53 – 3000
– 68 – 3001
– 111 – 5353
– 1022 – 8192
– 1023
If DHCP is enabled in the near-end unit, a far-end unit should not send UDP traffic to
port 68 for IPv4 and 546 for IPv6. Such UDP traffic may cause the near-end unit to lock
up.
To specify the TCP/UDP settings for transmitted traffic
1 Using the Test Menu or Quick Launch screen, select the Layer 4 Traffic applica-
tion for the circuit you are testing (refer to Table 18 on page 236 for a list of appli-
cations).

Page 240 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the TCP/UDP tab.
Setting Parameter
Traffic Mode Indicate whether you want to transmit TCP or UDP traf-
fic.
ATP Listen IP Type – To analyze ATP traffic carrying the source IP address
of your unit as the destination address, select Auto
Obtained.
– To analyze ATP traffic carrying a different destination
address (for example, a multicast address), select
User Defined.
Refer to “Understanding the ATP Listen IP and Port” on
page 237 for illustrations explaining the ATP Listen set-
tings for end-to-end and loop back tests.
ATP Listen IP Address Specify the destination IP address carried in the ATP
(if ATP Listen IP Type is traffic that you want to analyze.
User Defined) NOTE:
If your unit has been looped up by another unit, the ATP
Listen IP Address will automatically be populated for
you.
Listen Port Service – To analyze ATP traffic with a specific service type,
Type select the type. The ATP Listen Port will automati-
cally be assigned for you.
– To analyze ATP traffic with a service type that is not
pre-defined, select User Defined.
ATP Listen Port Specify the port number carried in the ATP traffic that
(if Listen Port Service you want to analyze.
Type is User Defined)
Source Port Select a a pre-defined port number, or select User
Defined to enter a different number.
Destination Port Select a a pre-defined port number, or select User
Defined to enter a different number.
Data Select one of the following:
– Acterna. To transmit packets that contain a
sequence number and time stamp so that lost pack-
ets, round trip delay, and jitter can be calculated,
select Acterna, and then specify the byte value that
will be used to fill the rest of the payload using a 1
byte hexadecimal format.
– Fill Byte. To transmit packets with payloads popu-
lated with a specific pattern of bytes, select Fill Byte,
and then specify the byte value using a 1 byte hexa-
decimal format.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 241
The layer 4 settings are specified for transmitted traffic.
Configuring the traffic load

Before transmitting TCP or UDP traffic, you can specify the type of traffic load the unit
will transmit (Constant, Bursty or Ramp) in 0.001% increments, beginning at 0.001%.
For details on configuring a traffic load, see “Specifying traffic load settings” on
page 123 of Chapter 5 “Ethernet and IP Testing”.
Specifying the frame or packet length for transmitted traffic

Before transmitting TCP or UDP traffic, you must indicate the frame or packet length for
each transmitted packet or datagram.
To specify the frame or packet length
select the Layer 4 Traffic application for the circuit you are testing (refer to
Table 18 on page 236 for a list of applications).
a Go to the Ethernet tab.
b If you are specifying the length as a frame size, set the Length Type to Frame
Size, and then select or specify the size.
The automatically calculated packet length appears to the right of the Length
Type setting.
c If you are specifying the length as a packet length, set the Length Type to
Packet Length, and then select or specify the size.
The automatically calculated frame size appears to the right of the Length
Type setting.
The frame or packet length is specified.
Filtering received traffic using layer 2 or layer 3 criteria

If you want to filter received traffic using layer 2 or layer 3 criteria, set the Filter Mode
to detailed on the Filters tab, select Ethernet or IP on the left pane, and then specify the
criteria. For details, see “Specifying Ethernet filter settings” on page 114, “Specifying
IPv4 filter settings” on page 149, or “Specifying IPv6 filter settings” on page 152 of
Chapter 5 “Ethernet and IP Testing”.
IPv6 traffic is not supported when running the TCP Wirespeed application.

Page 242 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Filtering received traffic using layer 4 criteria

You can specify settings that determine which packets will pass through the layer 4
(TCP/UDP) receive filter and be analyzed and reported in the test result categories, or
looped back to another unit. Traffic that does not pass filter criteria is not reported or
looped back.
FILTER TIPS:
• If you want to analyze all received traffic, Filter Mode is set to Basic.
• If you want to analyze only layer 4 traffic, be certain to set the Filter Mode
to Detailed, and then Enable the TCP/UDP filter.
To specify TCP/UDP filter criteria
select the Layer 4 application for the circuit you are testing (refer to Table 18 on
page 236 for a list of applications).
2 Select the Setup soft key, then select the Filters tab.
Detailed.
4 Specify the Ethernet and the IP filter settings (see “Specifying Ethernet filter
settings” on page 114, “Specifying IPv4 filter settings” on page 149, or “Specifying
IPv6 filter settings” on page 152 of Chapter 5 “Ethernet and IP Testing”).
5 To specify layer 4 filter settings, in the panel on the left side of the tab, select TCP/
UDP, and then specify values for the following settings:
Setting Parameter
Filter Enable – If you want to filter received traffic using layer 4 crite-
ria, select Enable. If you want to analyze only layer 4
traffic, you must enable the filter.
– If you do not want to filter received traffic using layer 4
criteria, select Disable.
Protocol – To analyze TCP traffic, select TCP.
(if filter is Enabled) – To analyze UDP traffic, select UDP.
– To analyze all layer 4 traffic, select Don’t Care.
Port Filter – Single Direction. To pass through the filter, traffic
must satisfy the source and destination port criteria
you specified for the filter to be reflected in the L4 Fil-
ter Counts and L4 Filter Stats result categories.
– Either Direction. The filter will not care which direc-
tion the traffic is coming from; therefore, the source
port carried in the filtered traffic can be the source port
of the near-end instrument or port, or the source port
of the far end instrument or port. Traffic from either
source will be reflected in the L4 Filter Counts and L4
Filter Stats result categories.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 243
Transmitting layer 4 traffic
6 On the graphic of the TCP/UDP packet, specify the following:
Setting Parameter
Source Port Two filters are available. If you define a single filter, traf-
(if filter is Enabled) fic must match the criteria in the filter. If you define both
filters, traffic must match the criteria for either filter.
– Under Filter 1, if you want to filter traffic for a particu-
lar service type or source port, select the box to the
left of Source Service Type.
– To analyze traffic originating from one of the pre-
defined specific service types, select the type. The
port number is assigned automatically for you.
– To analyze traffic originating from a different port,
select User Defined, then specify the port number.
– If you would like to define a second filter, specify the
settings for Filter 2.
Destination Port Two filters are available. If you define a single filter, traf-
(if filter is Enabled) fic must match the criteria in the filter. If you define both
filters, traffic must match the criteria for either filter.
– Under Filter 1, if you want to filter traffic for a particu-
lar service type or destination port, select the box to
the left of Destination Service Type.
– To analyze traffic destined for one of the pre-defined
specific service types, select the type. The port num-
ber is assigned automatically for you.
– To analyze traffic destined for a different port, select
User Defined, then specify the port number.
– If you would like to define a second filter, specify the
settings for Filter 2.
7 If you want to specify received payload settings, see “Filtering traffic using
payload criteria” on page 122.
The unit is configured to analyze received traffic satisfying the layer 4 filter criteria.
Transmitting layer 4 traffic

After you configure the layer 4 settings, you are ready to transmit traffic over the circuit.
To transmit layer 4 traffic
select the Layer 4 Traffic application for the circuit you are testing (refer to

Page 244 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
2 Specify the settings required to initialize the link (see “Specifying interface
3 Configure the instrument as appropriate for your test (see the appropriate proce-
dures below):
– “Specifying Ethernet frame settings” on page 105
– “Specifying Ethernet filter settings” on page 114
– “Specifying traffic load settings” on page 123
– “Specifying transmitted IPv4 packet settings” on page 147
– “Specifying IPv4 filter settings” on page 149
– “Specifying TCP/UDP settings for transmitted traffic” on page 240
– “Specifying the frame or packet length for transmitted traffic” on page 242
– “Filtering received traffic using layer 4 criteria” on page 243
5 Select the Action tab, and then select Start Traffic (if you configured a constant
or bursty load), or Start Ramp (if you configured a ramped traffic load).
The instrument transmits traffic over the circuit.

You can use the instrument to insert errors (such as TCP/UDP checksum errors) or
pause frames into layer 4 traffic when you perform end-to-end and loop back tests. For
details on error and pause frame insertion, see “Inserting errors or pause frames” on
page 160.
Loopback testing
Running TCP Host or Wirespeed applications

If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so, the TCP Host application allows
you to establish a TCP connection to a peer, and then measure layer 4 (TCP)
throughput to demonstrate that poor application performance is not due to IP network
issues. You can also determine the window size and latency associated with the
connection. The TCP Host application is available when testing using a Transport
Module or MSAM.
When testing using an MSAM, you can also use the TCP Wirespeed application to
verify that your network meets or exceeds the layer 4 TCP throughput specified in
customer’s service level agreements for 10 Mbps through 10 Gbps circuits. Using TCP

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 245
Wirespeed, you can demonstrate that problems are occurring due to customer applica-
tions such as file downloads, email, or internet access, rather than poor throughput on
your network.
Unlike PC-based test solutions such as Iperf, the TCP Wirespeed application resides
on your MSAM, eliminating many of the limitations and inaccuracies associated with
poor PC performance. The application is not available on the Transport Module.
When configuring these applications, you can indicate whether you want the instrument
to report throughput in kilobits, megabits, kilobytes, or megabytes per second. When
configuring the TCP Host application, you can also specify the interval at which the
instrument is to refresh reported test results.
IMPORTANT:
The TCP Host and TCP Wirespeed applications are resource intensive applica-
tions. To ensure optimal performance, be certain to configure one instrument as
the client, and the other as a server (if you are using a second instrument rather
than an Iperf server).
NOTE: Interrupted Connections

If a TCP connection is lost unexpectedly (or intentionally, for example, because
someone brings the link down), the connection may not be restored automati-
cally. This is expected behavior because there is no way to ensure that the
server will become active before the client.
Changing settings during the test

When running the TCP Host and TCP Wirespeed applications, the instrument locks the
Setup soft key and does not allow you to change application settings. This is to prevent
you from mistakenly bringing the connection or connections down. If TCP connections
come down when testing, there is no way to ensure that the server will become active
before the client, and as a result, the instrument might not be able to restore the
connection automatically.
Streams pipe: multiple TCP streams

When running the TCP Host or TCP Wirespeed application, you can use the Streams
Pipe soft key to specify the load unit, and to access the Load Distribution dialog box.
The Load Distribution dialog box is used to enable the background streams that you
want to transmit, and to specify the traffic load carried in each stream.
Figure 44 on page 260 of Chapter 10 “Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing” illus-
trates the Streams Pipe display for regular layer 4 traffic streams. When running the
TCP Wirespeed application, the display is limited to the six analyzed streams.
You can start and stop traffic from the pipe display. You can also specify the load unit,
and use the Configure Streams button to enable specific streams and specify the traffic
load carried in each stream.

Page 246 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Understanding the LED panel

When you select a TCP Host or TCP Wirespeed application, the module provides LEDs
in the panel for each analyzed traffic stream. Figure 42 illustrates the LEDs provided
when running the Wirespeed application.
Figure 42 TCP Wirespeed LEDs
Understanding TCP Host and Wirespeed test results

When running the TCP Host and Wirespeed applications, you can observe cumulative
test results for the entire link and detailed test results for each analyzed background
stream.
Viewing results for a specific stream

You can view detailed test results for a particular stream on the result display by spec-
ifying the stream number as the result group, and then selecting the category with the
results you want to observe.
Viewing cumulative link results

You can observe cumulative link results for all transmitted streams by selecting the Link
group, and then the corresponding Stats, Counts, Error Stats, or AutoNeg Status
category.
Viewing TCP Host results

You can observe summarized and detailed results associated with each TCP connec-
tion in the TCP Host result group. IPerf output and layer 3 configuration status results
are also available for each connection.
Focusing on key results

Some categories provide so much information you may need to scroll to the right signifi-
cantly to observe a particular result. To focus on a particular subset of results (and mini-
mize scrolling), you can use the Columns key under the result panes to specify which
result columns appear, and hide those you are not interested in. For example, if you
want to focus on the delay measurements for each connection, you may choose to hide
the Tx Mbps columns or Send Window columns. You can always display them later if
you need to.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 247
Configuring the streams

Before running the TCP Host or Wirespeed applications, you must first configure the
traffic streams.
To configure the traffic streams
select the Layer 4 Multiple Streams application for the circuit you are testing.
2 Configure the streams by doing the following:
a Specify the load unit (see “Enabling multiple streams” on page 263) for traffic
carried on the streams.
b Enable the streams you intend to transmit (see “Enabling multiple streams”
on page 263), and then specify the traffic load for each stream (see “Speci-
fying the load type for all streams” on page 264).
c Specify the settings that are common to all enabled streams (see “Specifying
common traffic characteristics for multiple streams” on page 266).
d Specify the layer 2 (see “Specifying layer 2 stream settings” on page 268),
layer 3 (see “Specifying layer 3 stream settings” on page 270), and if appli-
cable, layer 4 settings (see “Specifying layer 4 stream settings” on page 271)
for each enabled stream.
You can optionally copy the settings for one stream to all other streams by
selecting the Copy Setups to other Streams button. Frame or packet char-
acteristics will be copied. Traffic load settings can not be copied; you must
specify the type of load (Constant or Ramp) for each individual stream on the
Traffic tab.
The actual load for each enable stream is specified on the Load Distribution
screen (see “Specifying the load type for all streams” on page 264).
The streams are configured.
Specifying TCP Host settings

Before running the TCP Host or Wirespeed applications, you must specify TCP Host
settings. The TCP Host setup tab allows you to configure your instrument as a TCP
client or server, and specify key settings such as the TCP port that you are establishing
a stateful connection to, the client or server window size, the maximum segment size,
and the type of service that the unit is emulating (if your instrument is operating as a
client). When configuring the TCP Wirespeed application in Client mode, you can indi-
cate that you want to establish up to 64 connections.
To specify TCP Host settings
select the Layer 4 Multiple Streams or Layer 4 TCP Wirespeed application for the
circuit you are testing.

Page 248 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
2 Select the TCP Host tab, then select the TCP Host Settings sub-tab. Specify the
following settings:
TCP Host Server
TCP Wirespeed
TCP Wirespeed
TCP Host
Setting
Client1
Server
Client
Value
TCP Host X X X X Indicate whether the unit is oper-
Mode ating as a Client, or as a Server.
Connect to X X If the instrument is connecting to a
Server server as a client, specify the IP
address for the server.
Connect to X X The port that the TCP client is
Port connecting to.
Listen Port X X The port that the TCP server is lis-
tening on.
Window Size X X X X The TCP window size for the con-
nection. Be certain to indicate the
unit of measure for the size (KB,
MB, or bytes). In Client Mode, the
actual window size used may be
lower and will be based on the
negotiated MSS.
Max Seg X X X X The maximum segment size (in
Size Bytes bytes) supported by the connec-
tion. This is typically 40 bytes less
than the maximum transmission
unit (to accommodate the TCP/IP
header data).
The default is 1460 bytes.
Type of X X To specify the type of service sup-
Service ported by the connection, select
DSCP, then select from the list.
The entries show the code points
followed by their decimal equiva-
lents in ().
If you want to transmit traffic with-
out a particular TOS, select TOS.
0x00 will be carried in the TOS
field.
Transmit X Indicate whether you intend to
Mode transmit a specific number of
Bytes, or traffic for a specific
length of Time.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 249
TCP Host Server
TCP Wirespeed
TCP Wirespeed
TCP Host
Setting
Client1
Server
Client
Value
Number of X If you set the transmit mode to
Bytes Bytes, specify the number of
bytes you intend to transmit.
Time (sec) X If you set the transmit mode to
Time, specify the number of sec-
onds that traffic will be transmit-
ted.
Number of X Specify the number of connec-
Connections tions to the server you want to
establish.
Report Rate X X X X Indicate whether you want the
Format instrument to report throughput in
kilobits (Kb), megabits (Mb), kilo-
bytes (KB), or megabytes (MB).
Report X X Specify the interval at which the
Interval instrument is to refresh reported
test results.
1. Available on the MSAM only. MSAM must be optioned and configured for the Wirespeed application.
The TCP Host settings are specified.
Running the TCP Host application
To run the TCP host
select the Layer 4 Multiple Streams application for the circuit you are testing.
settings” on page 102). Be certain to configure a full duplex connection.
3 Configure the traffic streams (see “Configuring the streams” on page 248).
4 Specify the TCP Host settings (see “Specifying TCP Host settings” on page 248).

Page 250 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
5 Press Results to return to the main screen, and then do the following:
a If you are measuring throughput on an optical circuit, turn the laser on.
b Select the Actions tab.
c If your unit is operating as a client, select Start Traffic.
d Select Start TCP Server or Start TCP Client (depending on the mode you
specified).
6 At a minimum, observe the following test results:
– To verify layer 2 or layer 3 performance, set a result group to Link, and then
display and observe results in the corresponding Link Stats category.
– To verify layer 4 TCP performance, set a result group to TCP Host, and then
display and observe results in the L4 Link Stats and Output categories.
– Throughput, Latency (RTD), Packet Jitter, and Frame Loss graphs are
also available in the All Streams result group.
TCP throughput is measured. For descriptions of the available result categories, test
results, and graphs refer to “Ethernet, IP, TCP/UDP, and Fibre Channel results” on
page 476. You can also optionally create a report detailing the TCP Host settings that
you used when measuring TCP throughput.
NOTE:
The tool used to run the TCP Host application may take up to two seconds to
launch. This impacts test results derived using the timestamp provided in traffic
carrying an ATP payload, such as latency/delay measurements, packet jitter or
packet jitter.
Running the TCP Wirespeed application

When configuring the TCP Wirespeed applications, many of the settings are the same
as those used to run the TCP Host application. When running TCP Wirespeed,
consider the following:
• Optimal window size. When turning up TCP service, you can test using a variety
of window sizes to determine the size that provides the best layer 4 throughput.
• Customer traffic emulation. When running the application, your instrument
emulates a true TCP client/server, allowing you to establish up to 64 stateful TCP
connections, and collect pertinent throughput, latency, and loss results for many
sessions. This provides a more accurate assessment of the network's ability to
carry application traffic than layer 3 throughput tests, and provides the data you
need to assure customers that issues are not due to poor layer 4 throughput.
• Filters. When running the Wirespeed application, filter settings apply to the back-
ground streams; they do not impact the TCP connections.
• Traffic off load. You can determine whether the proper CoS/QoS settings are
specified in the network and verify proper prioritization of background streams by
offloading up to four concurrent streams of traffic for analysis.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 251
• Iperf compatibility. You can use the TCP Wirespeed application with Iperf to
sectionalize TCP performance issues, and demonstrate to the customer that CPE
equipment may be the root cause of performance problems.
• J-Mentor data analysis. When running the TCP Wirespeed application from
1 Gigabit Optical Ethernet interfaces, you can capture the data, and then analyze
it using the J-Mentor application provided on your instrument.
The TCP Wirespeed application is not available for 100 Mbps optical circuits, 802.3
frames, or Q-in-Q encapsulated traffic. IPv6 traffic is also not supported in this release.
NOTE: TCP connections

If you issue a loopup command to an instrument that is actively running the
TCP Wirespeed application, the command tears down any TCP connections
that were established.
Pressing Restart while running the application will not tear down the
TCP Connections; it will simply refresh your test results.
To run the TCP Wirespeed application
1 Verify that you are not running any other tests.

select the TCP Wirespeed application for the interface you are testing (refer to
3 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the Interface tab to specify the settings
required to initialize the link (see “Specifying interface settings” on page 102).
4 Configure the traffic streams (see “Configuring the streams” on page 248).
5 Specify the TCP Host settings (see “Specifying TCP Host settings” on page 248).
6 Press Results to return to the main screen, and then do the following:
a If you are measuring throughput on an optical circuit, turn the laser on.
b Select the Actions tab.
c If your instrument is operating as a client, select Start Traffic to transmit the
background streams.
d Select Start TCP Server or Start TCP Client (depending on the mode you
specified).
7 At a minimum, observe the following test results:
– To verify layer 2 or layer 3 performance, set a result group to Link, and then
display and observe results in the corresponding Link Stats category.
– To verify layer 4 TCP performance, set a result group to TCP Host, and then
display and observe results in the L4 Link Stats and Output categories.
– Throughput, Latency (RTD), Packet Jitter, and Frame Loss graphs are
also available in the All Streams result group.
The application is running. When running the TCP Wirespeed application, detailed
statistics are provided for each established connection, including bandwidth measure-
ments, delay measurements, window statistics, and frame counts.

Page 252 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
TrueSpeed
TrueSpeed
If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so, you can use it to run the True-
Speed Test. This test uses the Wirespeed application and automates TCP throughput
testing per the IETF draft standard “ippm-tcp-throughput-framework” and allows TCP
throughput testing for up to 64 connections. For more information, see “TrueSpeed
Test” on page 415.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 253
TrueSpeed

Page 254 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
10
Chapter 10 Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing
This chapter provides information on testing triple play services and multiple Ethernet
(layer 2), IP (layer 3), or TCP/UDP (layer 4) streams of traffic. Topics discussed in this
chapter include the following:
• “About Triple Play and Multiple Streams testing” on page 256
• “Multiple Streams testing” on page 258
• “Triple Play testing” on page 273
• “Looping back multiple streams” on page 279
• “Running the TCP Host script” on page 280
• “Playing audio clips” on page 280
T-BERD/T-BERD/MTS/SC Ethernet and Fibre Channel Testing Manual

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 255
About Triple Play and Multiple Streams testing

Before running Triple Play or Multiple Streams applications, be certain you are comfort-
able configuring and running basic layer 2, layer 3, and layer 4 tests. For details, refer
to:
• Chapter 5 “Ethernet and IP Testing” on page 73.
• Chapter 6 “25GigE and 100GigE RS-FEC Testing” on page 195.
• Chapter 9 “TCP/UDP Testing” on page 233.

Features and capabilities include the following when running Triple Play or Multiple
Streams applications:
• 10/100/1000 electrical, 1 GigE optical, and 10 GigE LAN testing—You can
configure up to ten streams of layer 2, or layer 3, or layer 4 traffic per port, for a
total of 20 streams (if your instrument is configured for dual port testing).
• 10 GigE WAN testing—You can configure and transmit up to eight streams of
layer 2, layer 3, or layer 4 traffic.
• Uniquely characterize each stream of traffic—For example, you can verify that a
network handles VLAN tagged traffic properly by assigning a high priority to one
stream, and a lower priority to a second stream.
analyze multiple streams of IPv6 traffic using the terminate and loopback applica-
tions (40G and 100G— Terminate only). When configuring your test, you can
specify the required addresses manually, or you can use stateless or stateful
auto-configuration to assign addresses for you.
• Triple Play testing—You can transmit and analyze up to seven streams of traffic
carrying voice, video, or data payloads to verify triple play service on 10/100/
1000, 1 GigE Optical, and 10 GigE LAN circuits.
• When testing triple play, can transmit an actual audio stream (pre-recorded tone
or actual voice) to test the audio quality of a triple play network with specific traffic
levels before deployment.
• Layer 4 TCP/UDP streams—If you purchased the TCP/UDP option, you can
transmit and analyze multiple streams of traffic with TCP or UDP headers in termi-
nate mode. For details, see “Specifying layer 4 stream settings” on page 271.
• TCP throughput measurements—If you purchased the TCP/UDP option, you can
establish a TCP connection to a peer, and then measure layer 3 (IP) and layer 4
(TCP) throughput to demonstrate that poor application performance is not due to
IP network issues.
• Unique MAC and IP addresses per stream—When running Layer 2 or Layer 3
Triple Play or Multiple Streams applications, you can assign a unique destination
MAC and IP address to each individual stream, or you can continue to use the
same addresses for all streams. For details, see “Specifying layer 2 stream
settings” on page 268 and “Specifying layer 3 stream settings” on page 270.

Page 256 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018

ment or to a USB key, and then either send the data to another technician for
analysis, or analyze it yourself using the Wireshark® protocol analyzer (provided
on the instrument). For details, see “Capturing packets for analysis” on page 6. In
addition, if capturing VoIP packets, the data can by analyzed with the PVA-1000
utility from Viavi.
NOTE: PVA-1000 is used for VoIP analysis only.
• Streamlined filter configuration—Ethernet, IP, and TCP/UDP filter settings are
available on the same setup tab, reducing the need to move from tab to tab when
you configure your test. For details, see “Filtering received traffic using layer 4
criteria” on page 243.
• When configuring Multiple Streams tests, the Load units can be displayed in either
kbps/Mbps or frames per second (fps). Streams pipe displays can also be speci-
fied to display in units of fps, kbps or Mbps independently of the Load unit display
setting.
Streams Pipe soft key

You can press the Streams Pipe soft key to observe summarized test results and infor-
mation for each individual stream. For details, see “Streams pipe: multiple streams” on
page 259 and “Streams pipe: Triple Play streams” on page 274.
Depending on the application you are running, a variety of views are provided for the
pipe.
• Overview. This view provides key source and destination addresses and the
bandwidth received and transmitted for each stream.
• Addressing. This view shows the source and destination IP addresses carried in
each transmitted stream. The default gateway and subnet mask for each stream
are also provided.
• Traffic Loads. This view provides more detailed information for the traffic carried
in each stream, such as the currently received frame size, the received band-
width, the transmitted traffic load type (constant or ramped), the transmitted band-
width, and a count of transmitted Acterna frames.
• VLAN/VPLS. These views show key encapsulation data for each stream. For
example, if you are analyzing layer 2 Q-in-Q streams, the SVLAN ID and priority
for received and transmitted streams appears.
Using the action buttons

The buttons on the Main screen are used to perform actions for all enabled streams.
For example, if stream 1, stream 2, and stream 3 are enabled, or if you have selected
a voice, HDTV, and data stream, pressing the Start Traffic button transmits traffic for
all three streams simultaneously.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 257
Multiple Streams testing

If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so, you can use it to transmit multiple
streams of layer 2, layer 3, or layer 4 traffic. You can configure each individual stream
to depict a particular type of traffic, transmit the streams, and then analyze each stream
to verify that network routing and switching devices are handling each stream properly
(based on the stream’s priority). You can also observe the bandwidth utilized, and a
count of transmitted, received, and lost frames for each individual stream.
Multiple Streams test applications

This release supports the Multiple Streams applications listed in Table 19. Loop back
applications are listed in Table 19 on page 258 of Chapter 11 “Loop Back Testing”.
Table 19 Multiple Streams applications

Circuit Application Test Mode
10/100/1000 Layer 2 Multiple Streams Terminate
Dual Terminate1
Dual Terminate1
100M Optical Layer 2 Multiple Streams Terminate
Dual Terminate1
Dual Terminate1
1GigE Optical Layer 2 Multiple Streams Terminate
Dual Terminate1
Dual Terminate1
10GigE LAN Layer 2 Multiple Streams Terminate
10GigE WAN Layer 2 Multiple Streams Terminate
100GigE Layer 2 Multiple Streams Terminate
100GigE RS-FEC Layer 2 Multiple Streams Terminate

Page 258 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
1. Transport Modules must use two PIMs for the selected interface to test in dual terminate mode. Dual terminate
mode is not available when testing 10 Gigabit Ethernet LAN or WAN interfaces using an MSAM.
In addition to the standard Multiple Streams applications, if your instrument is config-

ured and optioned to do so, you can run TCP Wirespeed test applications with up to
four streams of layer 4 traffic. For details, see “Running the TCP Wirespeed application”
on page 251.

When you select a Multiple Streams application, the module provides LEDs in the panel
for each enabled traffic streams (see Figure 43).
Figure 43 Multiple Stream LEDs (Layer 4)
If you run a Multiple Streams application in Dual Terminate mode, LEDs are provided
for both ports.
Streams pipe: multiple streams

When running multiple streams applications, you can use the Streams Pipe soft key to
specify the load unit (see “Enabling multiple streams” on page 263), and to access the
Load Distribution dialog box. The Load Distribution dialog box is used to enable the
streams that you want to transmit (see “Enabling multiple streams” on page 263), and
to specify the traffic load carried in each stream (see “Specifying the load type for all
streams” on page 264).

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 259
Figure 44 illustrates the Streams Pipe display for layer 4 traffic streams.
Figure 44 Streams Pipe Display: layer 4 stream
You can start and stop traffic from the pipe display. You can also specify the load and
Throughput units, and press the Configure Streams button to enable specific streams,
and specify the traffic load carried in each stream.
NOTE:
When observing the pipe for layer 2 or layer 3 traffic, the Frame Length or
Packet Size displayed represents the maximum length or size received for
each individual stream.
When transmitting multiple VPLS encapsulated streams, the frame length on
the Streams Pipe Display represents the customer frame length; the load per-
centage displayed represents the load as configured for the service provider.
Understanding multiple streams test results

When running Multiple Streams applications, you can observe cumulative test results
for the entire link, detailed test results for a particular stream, and graphical results for
all analyzed streams.
Viewing results for a specific stream

You can view detailed test results for a particular stream on the result display by spec-
ifying the stream number as the result group, and then selecting the category with the

Page 260 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
results you want to observe. Figure 45 illustrates the L2 Link Results for Stream 1, and
the Summary/Status results for all enabled streams.
Figure 45 Multiple Streams result display

group, and then the corresponding Stats, Counts, Error Stats, or AutoNeg Status
category.
Viewing graphical results for all streams

Throughput, latency (RTD), packet jitter, and frame loss results can be observed graph-
ically by selecting the All Streams group, and then the category with the results you
want to observe. When observing graphical results, it’s helpful to view the entire result
window by selecting View > Result Windows > Full Size.
Figure 46 illustrates the Throughput Graph for multiple traffic streams.
Figure 46 Throughput Graph: Multiple Streams application
A color coded legend appears under the graph indicating which color is used to present
results for each of the analyzed streams. In Figure 46, the green lines provide results
for Stream 3, the blue lines provide results for Stream 1, and the bright pink line
provides results for Stream 8.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 261
Changing graph properties

To simplify the graph, you can select the legend, and then choose the data that you
want to observe for each analyzed stream, and hide the rest. You can also focus on a
subset of streams by hiding those that you do not want to observe anymore.
To change graph properties
1 Select the legend at the bottom of the graph (see Figure 47).
Figure 47 Graph Legend: Multiple Streams application
The Graph properties dialog box appears (see Figure 48 on page 262).
2 Under Graph properties, select one of the following:
– Stream
– Frame Size
– CVLAN ID
– SVLAN ID
– MPLS1 ID
– MPLS2 ID
Figure 48 Graph properties dialog box

Page 262 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
3 Clear the boxes next to the types of streams, the frame sizes, or the SVLAN/
CVLAN/MPLS IDs for streams that you do not want to observe.
4 Select Close to return to the Main screen.
The graph displays data for streams with the selected properties.
Enabling multiple streams

If you selected a Multiple Streams application, you enable streams on the Load Distri-
bution dialog box using the following procedure.
To enable multiple streams
select the Multiple Streams test application for the interface you are testing (refer
to Table 21 on page 273 for a list of applications).
2 Select the Streams Pipe soft key.
3 Select Configure Streams.
The Load Distribution screen appears.
4 Select the streams you want to transmit.
Streams are enabled. If you have already specified the load type for each stream (see
“Specifying the load type for all streams” on page 264), you can specify the load.
NOTE:
The Auto Distribute button is disabled if one or more traffic streams is config-
ured to transmit a ramped load of traffic.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 263
Specifying the load type for all streams

If you selected a Multiple Streams application, you can transmit a constant load or a
ramped load of traffic in any stream.
NOTE:
A single stream may be defined as having a a burst load.See “Specifying the
load unit on a stream with burst” on page 265.
To specify the load type for all streams
3 By default, the module transmits a constant load of traffic for each enabled
stream. If this is acceptable, proceed to step 4. If you want to transmit a ramped
load of traffic for a particular stream or streams, do the following:
a Select the tab corresponding to the stream.
b Select the Traffic sub-tab.
c In Load Type, select Ramp, and then specify the time step (in seconds) and
the load step (in Mbps, as a percentage of the line rate or in frames per
second). For details, see“Transmitting a ramped load” on page 126.
NOTE: When configuring a ramped load of traffic for a stream, the triggers
used to stop the ramp are not available.
d Repeat step a through step c for each ramped stream of traffic, and then
proceed to step 4.
4 Select the Streams Pipe soft key, and then select Configure Streams.
The Load Distribution screen appears.
– If you are transmitting a constant load of traffic for every enabled stream, and
you want to distribute the load evenly across the streams, select
Auto Distribute. The module automatically calculates the load for each
stream.
– If you are transmitting one or more ramped streams of traffic, or a combina-
tion of constant and ramped loads, enter the load for each enabled stream.
6 Select OK to store the loads and return to the Streams Pipe dialog box.
7 If you do not need to specify other settings, select the Results soft key to return to
the Main screen.
The traffic load is specified.

Page 264 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Specifying the load unit on a stream with burst

If a burst signal is necessary in a multiple streams signal, any stream may be defined
to carry that bursty signal. Only one stream may be defined as carrying a bursty signal.
Defining a stream as having a Burst load type automatically changes any other stream
defined as Burst to the Constant Load Type. It also restricts all enabled streams to be
configurable based on Layer 2 bit rate (Eth. IR (Mbps)).
To configure the load unit on a stream with burst load type
to Table 19 on page 258).
3 Select the All Streams tab. Verify that a burst Stream has been specified in the
Stream Selection portion of the window. If not specified, select the desired stream
from the Burst Stream drop-down list.
4 Select the tab of the individual stream specified as being the Burst Stream.
5 On the Traffic tab, select a Load Unit, then do the following:
– If you selected Burst Time and Information Rate, enter the Burst Time, then
enter the units for the Burst Time.
– If you selected Bytes and Information Rate, enter the Burst Kbytes. The
actual Kbytes will be recalculated and appear in the window with the Informa-
tion Rate (based on the value you entered when you configured the individual
stream).
– If you selected Gap Time and Information rate, enter the Gap Time (period
that burst is not being transmitted). The Burst Rate will appear based on the
Gap Time specified.
Specifying the load unit for multiple streams

If you selected a Multiple Streams application, the traffic load for each stream trans-
mitted (except when configured for burst) can be specified in Mbps, or as a percentage
of the line rate. If a stream is to be configured with a Burst load type (only one stream
may be defined to have a Burst load type), see “Specifying the load unit on a stream
with burst” on page 265 for instructions on selecting the load unit on the stream carrying
the burst signal.
To specify the load unit

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 265
3 In the Stream Selection section, verify that the Burst Stream is set to None and
then under Load Unit, select one of the following:
– Bit Rate
– Percent
– Frames Per Second (fps)
4 Select the Allow flooding checkbox to transmit true 100% load in those circuits
that can certainly handle the signal.
5 If you selected Bit Rate, the Throughput Bit rate definition source must also be
specified. Select either L(ayer)1 (Mbps) or L(ayer)2 (Eth IR (Mbps).
The load unit is specified. You can specify the traffic load for each stream (see “Speci-
fying the load type for all streams” on page 264).
Specifying common traffic characteristics for multiple streams

If you selected a Multiple Streams application, common characteristics shared by all
streams are specified on the All Streams tab.
To specify traffic characteristics shared by every enabled stream
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the All Streams tab.Depending upon
the application being used, it may be desired to set one of the following:
– Layer 2 VPLS streams. If you want to transmit VPLS encapsulated traffic,
set VPLS mode to Enabled, and then specify the SP source and destination
MAC addresses, and the customer’s source MAC address.
NOTE:
Although the SP source and destination MAC addresses, and the customer’s
source MAC address are assigned to every enabled stream, you can specify a
unique customer destination MAC address for each individual stream. See
“Specifying layer 2 stream settings” on page 268.
– Layer 2 Non-VPLS streams. If you do not want to transmit VPLS encapsu-

lated traffic, set VPLS mode to Disabled. You can optionally specify source
MAC address to be carried in every enabled stream of traffic, or you can
specify a unique MAC address for each stream.
To specify a single address, in Source MAC Mode, select Single, and then
indicate whether you want to use the factory default address, or specify your
own.
To specify an address for each stream, in Source MAC Mode, select Per
Stream, and then specify the addresses on the tabs corresponding to each
enabled stream (see “Specifying layer 2 stream settings” on page 268).

Page 266 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
To specify the LBM/:LBR traffic mode on Layer 2 Traffic Terminate applica-

tions, select LBM Traffic from the options in the Test Mode drop-down box.
This option is not applicable to VPLS streams and will automatically change
VPLS Mode to Disabled, when selected.
– Layer 3 MPLS streams. If you want to transmit MPLS encapsulated traffic,
set MPLS mode to Enabled, and then specify the source MAC address.
Enable or disable ARP mode. If you enable ARP mode, specify the source IP
for this hop, the destination IP address and subnet mask for the next hop.
Next, specify the source IP address, default gateway, and subnet mask for
the customer (Layer 3). These addresses will be used for all enabled
streams.
– Layer 3 Non-MPLS streams. If you do not want to transmit MPLS encapsu-
lated traffic, set MPLS Mode to Disabled, then enable or disable ARP mode.
In the Layer 3 section of the window, define the Source IP Type. Indicate
whether it is desired to use DHCP to assign a single source IP address to all
enabled streams, to manually assign a static address to be carried in all
enabled streams, or to assign a unique source IP address to each enabled
stream.
To specify a single static address, in Source Type, select Static, and then
specify the source IP address, default gateway, and subnet mask for the
customer.
To specify an address for each stream, in Source Type, select Static - Per
enabled stream (see “Specifying layer 3 stream settings” on page 270).
To have DHCP assign a single source address to all enabled streams, in
Source Type, select DHCP.
To be able to assign your instrument with both a LAN IP and a WAN IP so
that it can both act as a device connected behind a CPE router and emulate a
CPE router, in Source Type, select Static - WAN IP. You can then specify a
WAN Source IP, WAN Gateway, WAN Subnet Mask, a Traffic Source IP (LAN
IP) and a Traffic Subnet Mask (LAN IP).
To increment the IP ID, enable the IP ID Increment setting.
– Layer 4 streams. Specify the source MAC address, enable or disable ARP
mode, and then specify the source IP address, default gateway, and subnet
mask for the customer (Layer3). The source MAC and IP addresses will be
carried in each enabled stream of traffic.
Under Layer 4, indicate whether you want to use the unit’s source IP address
as the ATP Listen IP Address (by setting the ATP Listen IP Type to Auto
Obtained), or select User Defined and then assign your own address. If you
do not want to use the default fill pattern (AA) to populate the payloads,
specify a different pattern.
NOTE:
The ATP version is set on the “All stream” page. It can be set per stream or all
streams. ATPv3 available on the10M/100M/1GbE/10GbE/40G/100G modules.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 267
3 To specify the parameters located in the Stream Selection section of the window,
follow the procedures for “Specifying the load type for all streams” on page 264,
“Specifying the load unit on a stream with burst” on page 265 or “Specifying the
load unit for multiple streams” on page 265.
4 40G/100G applications only. Specify the Optic Latency Factor. This setting
provides a means to compensate for significant intrinsic delays, especially when
using certain types of pluggable optics affecting Frame Delay (latency) measure-
ment results.
In particular, 100G LR4 CFP optics equipped with gearbox functionality have
been shown to introduce delays in the range of 70 to 170 nanoseconds. Should
this intrinsic delay be deemed significant, the optic latency factor allows you to
calibrate this delay out of the measurement by specifying a value between 0 and
100 microseconds, with nanosecond granularity. This factor will be subtracted
from latency calculations.
To specify the Optic Latency Factor, do the following:
– Run an RTD test with a very short fiber self-loop.
– Enter the returned RTD value in the Optic Latency Factor field on the Setup
page.
5 10 GigE applications only. In Delay, indicate whether you want to make measure-
ments using a high degree of precision, or a low degree of precision. In most
instances, you should select the high precision setting.
6 To specify additional settings for each individual stream, see “Specifying layer 2
stream settings” on page 268, “Specifying layer 3 stream settings” on page 270,
or “Specifying layer 4 stream settings” on page 271.
the Main screen.
Common traffic characteristics are specified.
Specifying layer 2 stream settings

You can specify the frame type, frame size, and encapsulation settings for each indi-
vidual stream when configuring standard Multiple Streams applications, or for each type
of stream (VoIP, SDTV, HDTV, Data 1, Data 2, Data 3 and Data 4) when configuring
Triple Play applications. After specifying settings for a stream (or type of stream), you
can optionally copy the settings to every stream.
To specify layer 2 stream settings
select the Multiple Streams, Triple Play, or TCP Wirespeed test application for the
interface you are testing (refer to Table 19 on page 258 and Table 21 on page 273
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the tab corresponding the stream or
type of stream you are configuring.

Page 268 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
3 Select the Ethernet sub-tab, and then specify the frame type, length type, and
optional encapsulation settings. For details, refer to:
– “Specifying Ethernet frame settings” on page 105.
– “Configuring VLAN tagged traffic” on page 112.
– “Configuring Q-in-Q traffic” on page 113.
– “Configuring VPLS traffic” on page 113.
– Select the tab corresponding to the next stream or the next type of stream
you want to characterize, then repeat step 3.
– Optional. If you want to use the same settings for all enabled streams, select
Copy Setups to other Streams.
Traffic load settings are not copied. Load settings must be configured for each
individual stream.
the Main screen.
Layer 2 traffic characteristics are specified.
Automatically incrementing configured MAC addresses or VLAN

IDs
When configuring layer 2 multiple streams tests, you can indicate that you want the
instrument to automatically increment the MAC address and VLAN ID for each stream
when you configure the first stream. After you specify the MAC address or VLAN ID for
the first stream, you use the Copy Setups to other Streams button to copy the values
and populate the MAC addresses or VLAN IDs with incremented values.
Table 20 shows the values assigned for each stream’s MAC address and VLAN ID if
the increment options are selected for stream one.
Table 20 Example: Incremented MAC addresses and VLAN IDs
Stream MAC Address VLAN ID

1 00-06-5B-15-04-03 2
2 00-06-5B-15-04-04 3
3 00-06-5B-15-04-05 4
4 00-06-5B-15-04-06 5
5 00-06-5B-15-04-07 6
To increment configured MAC addresses or VLAN IDs
select the layer 2 Multiple Streams test application for the interface you are testing
(refer to Table 19 on page 258 and Table 21 on page 273 for a list of applications).

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 269
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then enable the streams you intend to transmit
(see “Enabling multiple streams” on page 263). Be certain to enable stream 1.
3 Select the tab for stream 1, then select the Ethernet sub-tab.
4 Specify the frame settings (see “Specifying layer 2 stream settings” on page 268),
then do the following:
– If you want to increment the configured MAC addresses for the remaining
streams, on the graphic of the frame, select DA, then specify the destination
MAC address for the first stream. Select Enable Increment During Copy.
– If you want to increment the configured VLAN ID for the remaining streams,
specify VLAN or Q-in-Q as the frame encapsulation, then select VLAN on the
graphic of the frame. Specify the VLAN ID for the first frame, then select
Enable Increment During Copy.
5 Select Copy Setups to other Streams.
The instrument copies the values for stream 1 to each stream, and increments the
values for the MAC address or VLAN ID as you specified.

When running layer 3 and layer 4 Multiple Streams or layer 3 Triple Play applications,
you can specify layer 3 settings for each individual stream or type of stream. After spec-
ifying settings for a stream (or type of stream), you can optionally copy the settings to
every stream.
select the Multiple Streams, Triple Play, or TCP Wirespeed test application for the
interface you are testing (refer to Table 19 on page 258 and Table 21 on page 273
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the tab corresponding the stream or
type of stream you are configuring.
3 Select the IP sub-tab, and then specify the length type, the packet length, the
TOS/DSCP, TTL, and source and destination IP addresses. For details, refer to:
– “Layer 3 testing” on page 141.
– “Configuring MPLS over Ethernet tests” on page 83 (if you are transmitting
multiple streams of MPLS encapsulated traffic). MPLS encapsulation is not
available when running Triple Play applications.
– Select the tab corresponding to the next stream or the next type of service
you want to characterize, then repeat step 3.
– Optional. If you want to use the same settings for all streams, select Copy
Setups to other Streams.
Traffic load settings are not copied. Load settings must be configured for
each individual stream.

Page 270 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
The source IP address is not copied. If you want to use the same source IP
address for each stream, select Static as the Source Type on the All Streams
or All Services tab, and then specify the shared Source IP address.
the Main screen.
The layer 3 traffic characteristics are specified.

When running layer 4 Multiple Streams applications, you can specify layer 4 settings for
each individual stream. After specifying settings for a stream, you can optionally copy
the settings to every enabled stream.
select the Multiple Streams or TCP Wirespeed test application for the interface
you are testing (refer to Table 19 on page 258 for a list of applications).
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the tab corresponding the stream you
are configuring.
3 Select the TCP/UDP tab, and then specify the traffic mode (TCP or UDP), the
listen port service type (and if applicable, listen port number), the source port
number, the destination port number, and the payload (Acterna or Fill Byte). For
details, refer to “Specifying layer 4 settings” on page 239.
4 Specify the traffic load for the stream (see “Specifying the load type for all
streams” on page 264).
5 Optional. If you want to use the same settings for all enabled streams, select
Copy Setups to other Streams. Traffic load settings are not copied. Load
settings must be configured for each individual stream.
the Main screen.
The layer 4 traffic characteristics are specified.
Transmitting multiple streams

Before transmitting multiple traffic streams, you must:
• Specify the interface settings required to initialize the link (see “Specifying inter-
face settings” on page 102).
• Specify the load unit for the transmitted traffic (frames per second (fps), Bit Rate
or Percent). This setting indicates whether you want to specify the load for each
stream in frames per second, as bit rate, or as a percent of the line rate. For
details, see “Enabling multiple streams” on page 263.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 271
• Enable the streams you want to transmit (see “Enabling multiple streams” on
page 263, or “Specifying layer 2 and layer 3 settings for Triple Play services” on
page 279).
• Specify common traffic characteristics for all enabled streams. For example, if you
intend to use the factory default source MAC address, and a static IP address as
the source addresses for every enabled stream, these are specified on the All
Streams tab. For details, see “Specifying common traffic characteristics for
multiple streams” on page 266.
• Specify unique traffic characteristics for each enabled stream or type of stream.
For example, you can verify that a network handles VLAN tagged traffic properly
by assigning a high priority to one stream, and a lower priority to a second stream.
Or you can configure and transmit unencapsulated layer 3 VoIP streams and
VLAN tagged SDTV streams.
For details, see “Specifying layer 2 stream settings” on page 268, “Specifying
layer 3 stream settings” on page 270, “Specifying layer 4 stream settings” on
page 271, and “Specifying layer 2 and layer 3 settings for Triple Play services” on
page 279.
• Specify the load for each enabled stream, or let the module automatically
distribute the load evenly between enabled streams. For example, if you specify
the load unit as a percent and enable 4 traffic streams, selecting Auto Distribute
distributes a 25% traffic load to each stream. For details, see “Specifying the load
type for all streams” on page 264.
If you intend to run the TCP Host application, additional settings are required (see
“Running the TCP Host script” on page 280).
If you are running a Triple Play application, see “Transmitting multiple Triple Play
streams” on page 279.
To transmit multiple streams
3 Configure the test. For details, refer to:
– “Enabling multiple streams” on page 263.
– “Specifying the load type for all streams” on page 264.
– “Specifying common traffic characteristics for multiple streams” on page 266.
– “Specifying layer 2 stream settings” on page 268.
4 Select Results to return to the Main screen.
5 Select Start Traffic to transmit the streams over the circuit.

Page 272 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Triple Play testing
Multiple streams are transmitted. For an overview of the test results presented when
transmitting multiple streams, see “Understanding multiple streams test results” on
page 260.
SAMComplete
If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so, you can use it to run the
SAMComplete test. This test is a multi-stream test based on ITU-T Y.156sam that
performs a two-phase test. First, the test verifies whether each Ethernet service is prop-
erly configured. Second, multiple Ethernet service instances are verified simultane-
ously, each meeting its assigned Committed Information Rate (CIR). See “About the
SAMComplete test” on page 394.
Triple Play testing

If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so, you can use it to transmit and
analyze traffic emulating Triple Play services. When running Triple Play applications,
you can configure each type of stream (voice, video, or data) with unique layer 2 or
layer 3 characteristics. For example, if you are running a Layer 3 Triple Play application,
you can setup all voice streams to use Q-in-Q encapsulation, all SDTV (or HDTV) video
streams to use VLAN tags, and all data streams to use no encapsulation. You can also
transmit an actual audio stream (pre-recorded voice, tone, or voice conversation) to test
the audio quality of a triple play network with specific traffic levels before deployment.
Triple Play test applications

This release supports the Triple Play applications listed in Table 21.
Table 21 Triple Play applications
Circuit Application Test Mode

10/100/1000 Layer 2 Triple Play Terminate
Layer 3 Triple Play Terminate
100M Optical Layer 2 Triple Play Terminate
1GigE Optical Layer 2 Triple Play Terminate
10GigE LAN Layer 2 Triple Play Terminate

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 273
Triple Play testing

When you select a Triple Play application, the module provides LEDs in the panel for
each type of traffic transmitted in each enabled stream (see Figure 49).
Figure 49 Triple Play LEDs (Layer 3)
Streams pipe: Triple Play streams

Figure 50 illustrates the Streams Pipe Display for Layer 3 Triple Play streams.
Figure 50 Streams Pipe Display: Layer 3 Triple Play streams
You can start and stop traffic directly from the pipe display. You can set the Throughput
units display to kpbs or Mbps. You can also press the Configure Triple Play Services
button to select the type of services you want to emulate, and specify parameters for
each type. For example, if you are emulating voice service, you can specify the Codec,
sampling rate, and the number of calls.
Understanding Triple Play test results

When running Triple Play applications, you can observe cumulative test results for the
entire interface and link. You can also observe throughput, latency (RTD), packet jitter,
and frame loss graphs for all analyzed streams.

Page 274 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Triple Play testing

group, and then the corresponding Stats or Counts category.
Viewing graphs
Throughput, latency (RTD), packet jitter, and frame loss results can be observed graph-
ically by selecting the Graphs group, and then the category or the results that you want
to observe. When observing the graphs, it’s helpful to view the entire result window by
selecting View > Result Windows > Full Size.
Figure 51 illustrates the Throughput Graph for Triple Play streams.
Figure 51 Throughput Graph
A color coded legend appears under the graph indicating which color is used to present
results for each type of analyzed streams. In Figure 51, the green line provides results
for HDTV traffic, the red line provides results for SDTV traffic, and the purple and light
blue lines provide results for the data traffic. The bright blue line provides results for
simulated voice traffic. NOTE: The bright blue reflects simulated voice, not the audio
frames.
Changing graph properties

If you would like to focus on results for a specific type of stream, frame size, CVLAN,
SVLAN, or VLAN ID, you can change the graph properties.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 275
Triple Play testing
To change graph properties
1 Select the legend at the bottom of the graph (see Figure 52).
Figure 52 Graph Legend: Triple Play application
The Graph properties dialog box appears.

2 Under Graph properties, select one of the following:
– Stream
– Frame Size
– CVLAN ID
– SVLAN ID
– VLAN ID
3 Clear the boxes next to the types of streams, the frame sizes, or the SVLAN/
CVLAN/VLAN ID for streams that you do not want to observe.
4 Select Close to return to the Main screen.
The graph displays data for streams with the selected properties.
Characterizing Triple Play services

Before transmitting multiple streams of Triple Play traffic, you must characterize each
type of service, and indicate the number of calls (VoIP), channels (SDTV and/or HDTV),
and data streams that you intend to transmit and analyze.
The maximum utilization threshold is equal to the line rate for the application; therefore,
if you utilize all of the bandwidth for one type of stream, you can not transmit the other
types concurrently.
To characterize each type of service
select the Triple Play test application for the interface you are testing (refer to
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the All Services tab.
– Layer 2 Triple Play. To specify a single source MAC address shared by all
streams, in Source MAC Mode, select Single, and then indicate whether you
want to use the factory default address, or specify your own.

Page 276 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Triple Play testing
To specify a source MAC address for each stream, in Source MAC Mode,
select Per Stream, and then specify the addresses on the tabs corre-
sponding to each type of service (see “Specifying layer 2 and layer 3 settings
for Triple Play services” on page 279).
– Layer 3 Triple Play. Under MAC Address setup, indicate whether you want
to use the factory default address, or specify your own.
Under Customer Information, in Source Type, indicate whether you want to
use DHCP to assign a single source IP address to all streams (for all
services), manually assign a static address to be carried in streams for all
services, or assign a unique source IP address to each stream.
To specify a single static address, in Source Type, select Static, and then
specify the source IP address, default gateway, and subnet mask for the
customer.
To specify an address for each stream, in Source Type, select Static - Per
type of service (see “Specifying layer 2 and layer 3 settings for Triple Play
services” on page 279).
4 Press Configure Triple Play Services. The Define Triple Play Services dialog
box appears. Specify the following:
– Voice service. If you intend to simulate and analyze voice traffic, select the
checkbox next to Simulated. If your instrument includes the VoIP option, a
second voice selection is available. Choose Voice Conversation, IP Voice
Announce, or Transmit Tone. Specify the Codec, sampling rate (in ms), and
the number of calls to emulate. Your instrument automatically calculates the
bandwidth utilized by each call (in kbps), the total rate (in Mbps) for all calls,
and the frame size (in Bytes).
NOTE: Increasing the sampling rate reduces required bandwidth; increasing
the number of calls utilizes additional bandwidth. If you utilize all of the band-
width for voice data, you can not transmit SDTV, HDTV, or data traffic at the
same time.
IMPORTANT: The Codec type on the receiving and transmitting unit must
match for the audio to work properly.
– Video service. If you intend to emulate and analyze SDTV and/or HDTV
traffic, select the corresponding checkbox, and then specify the number of
channels, and the compression rate (MPEG-2, at 4.00 Mbps or 19.00 Mbps,
or MPEG-4, at 2.00 Mbps or 7.00 Mbps).
NOTE: Each additional SDTV channel increases the rate by 4.0 or 2.0 Mbps.
Each additional HDTV channel increases the rate by 19.0 or 7.0 Mbps. If you
utilize all of the bandwidth for video data, you can not transmit voice and data
traffic with the video traffic.
– Data streams. If you intend to emulate and analyze data traffic, select any, or
all of the four checkboxes, and then configure the rate (up to the maximum
utilization threshold), and a constant or ramped load of traffic for the selected
data streams. If you select Ramp, specify the Time Step (in seconds) and

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 277
Triple Play testing
Load Step (in fps or Mbps). Finally, specify the frame size to transmit (in
Bytes), or select the Random check box to transmit frames of randomly
generated sizes.
– After specifying the settings, select the OK button to return to the setup
menu.
5 Select the Voice tab, and then in the left pane, select Audio Codec.
Setting Description
Primary Codec Select the codec type to be advertised/supported for
receiving audio packets.
IMPORTANT: The Codec type on the receiving and
transmitting unit must match for the audio to work prop-
erly.
Speech Per Frame Specify the number of milliseconds of speech per trans-
mission frame the unit will transmit.
Jitter buffer Set the jitter buffer length.This is the number of millisec-
onds of speech that will be collected before an attempt
will be made to play the speech back. This allows lost,
late, or out-of-sequence packets time to arrive and be
reassembled before playback.
Transmit Source Select the transmit source: Voice conversation (trans-
mits and receives live voice), IP voice announce (the
unit repeats a sequence of words including the calling
party’s IP address), Tone (transmits the specified fre-
quency).
Language If the Transmit Source is set to IP Voice Announce, the
Language selection becomes available. This specifies
the language for the transmitted voice announcement.
Silence Suppres- Specify whether silence suppression is enabled.
sion
7 In the left panel on the side of the tab, select QoS and then specify the following:
Setting Description
MOS Scaling Specify the scale used for MOS results.
Jitter Threshold Specify the pass and fail thresholds for the jitter result.
Delay Threshold Specify the pass and fail thresholds for the delay result.
Loss Threshold Specify the pass and fail thresholds for the loss result.
Content Threshold Specify the pass and fail thresholds for the MOS results.
the Main screen.

Page 278 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Looping back multiple streams
Triple Play service is characterized.
Specifying layer 2 and layer 3 settings for Triple Play services

You can specify layer 2 and layer 3 settings for each type of service on the Voice, SDTV,
HDTV, Data 1, Data 2, Data 3,and Data 4 setup tabs. For details, see:
• “Specifying layer 2 stream settings” on page 268
• “Specifying layer 3 stream settings” on page 270
Transmitting multiple Triple Play streams

Before transmitting multiple Triple Play streams, you must:
• Specify the interface settings required to initialize the link (see “Specifying inter-
face settings” on page 102).
• Specify setting that characterize each type of service, and indicate the bandwidth
utilized by each type (see “Characterizing Triple Play services” on page 276).
• Specify layer 2 and layer 3 settings for the streams (see “Specifying layer 2
stream settings” on page 268 and “Specifying layer 3 stream settings” on
page 270).
To transmit multiple Triple Play streams
select the Triple Play test application for the interface you are testing (refer to
Table on page 273 for a list of applications).
3 Configure the test. For details, refer to:
– “Characterizing Triple Play services” on page 276.
– “Specifying layer 2 and layer 3 settings for Triple Play services” on page 279.
4 Select Results to return to the Main screen.
5 Select Start Traffic to transmit the streams over the circuit.
Multiple Triple Play streams are transmitted. For an overview of the test results
presented when transmitting Triple Play traffic, see “Understanding Triple Play test
results” on page 274.
Looping back multiple streams


May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 279
Running the TCP Host script
Running the TCP Host script

When running layer 3 and layer 4 multiple streams applications, you can configure and
run the TCP Host script to establish a stateful TCP connection with another device, and
then determine the TCP throughput, window size and latency associated with the
connection.
For details, refer to “Running TCP Host or Wirespeed applications” on page 245.
Playing audio clips

When running layer 3 triple play applications, you can transmit an actual audio stream
(pre-recorded voice, tone, or voice conversation). This allows testing of the audio
quality of a triple play network with specific traffic levels before deployment.
To play audio clips
select the layer 3 Triple Play test application for the interface you are testing (refer
to Table on page 273 for a list of applications).
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the All Services tab.
3 Tap the Configure Triple Play Services button.
The Define Triple Play Services dialog box appears
4 In the Voice section, do the following:
a Select one or both Voice types:
– Simulated — a stream of Acterna test packets.
– Choose one of the following:
- Voice Conversation— typical voice call
- Transmit Tone— a single frequency tone transmitted via RTP packets
- IP Voice Announce — pre-recorded audio clip transmitted via RTP
packets
b Specify the Codec, sampling rate (in ms), and the number of calls to emulate,
as described in step 4 on page 277.
IMPORTANT: The audio will work properly only when the Codec type
matches on the receiving and transmitting unit.
5 Verify the settings on the Voice tab, as described in step 5 on page 278.
6 Select the Results soft key to return to the test result menu.
7 Select the Play Audio action button to transmit the audio stream.

Page 280 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Playing audio clips
8 Verify the audio by doing the following:

– Observe the Audio Detect LED. It illuminates when audio packets are
received.
– Observe the Sim. Voice LED.
– Use a headset to listen to the audio.
NOTE:
If playing audio on a MTS8000 with DMC, no audio path is available. You can
use the simulated voice and observe results but will not hear audio.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 281
Playing audio clips

Page 282 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
11
Chapter 11 Loop Back Testing
This chapter provides information on looping back Ethernet, IP, TCP/UDP, Fibre
Channel, and multiple streams of traffic.

• “About Loop back testing” on page 284
• “Specifying a unit identifier” on page 289
• “Using LLB to loop received traffic back to the local unit” on page 290
• “Using Loop Up to initiate a loop back from the local unit” on page 291

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 283
About Loop back testing

If your instruments are configured and optioned to do so, you can use two
Transport Modules (or other Viavi compliant Ethernet test instruments) to transmit
Ethernet, IP, TCP/UDP, or Fibre Channel traffic from one instrument, and then loop the
traffic through a second instrument back to the sending instrument. By transmitting and
then looping traffic back, you are essentially emulating a longer circuit on the network.
Before looping back traffic, it is important to understand the terminology and concepts
in the following sections.
Loop back terminology

The following terms are used to explain loop back testing in this chapter.
Local unit
Used in this chapter to refer to the traffic-originating unit (which is always placed in
Terminate mode).
Loop back unit

Used in this chapter to refer to the unit that loops received traffic back to the traffic-orig-
inating (local) unit. If the loop back unit is capable of generating traffic, place it in termi-
nate mode when you want to loop traffic through to the transmitter. If the loop back unit
is not capable of generating traffic (it is a loop back-only unit), place it into loop back
mode.
Terminate mode
Mode used for loop back applications when both the local unit and the loop back unit
are capable of generating traffic. Also used by local unit to generate traffic that will be
looped back by a unit that is only capable of looping received traffic back. In this
scenario, the loop back unit is placed in loop back mode.
All Dual Module Carrier, Transport Module, and MSAMs and Transport Modules with
Ethernet testing capability are shipped with the ability to generate and transmit traffic;
therefore, when running loop back applications using two Dual Module Carrier,
Transport Module, and MSAMs, two Transport Modules, or an MSAM and a Transport
Module, both instruments should be placed in terminate mode.
Loop back mode

Previously, loop back tests were always performed with both the local traffic transmit-
ting unit and the loop back unit in Terminate mode. Assuming both units can transmit
traffic, this is still the case.

Page 284 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
When you purchase an Multiple Services Application Module, you can order a unit that
is capable of generating, transmitting, and analyzing Ethernet traffic, or you can order
a unit that simply loops back traffic received from another transmitting unit. The loop
back unit is not capable of generating its own traffic; it functions simply as a loop back
device.
If you are using a loop back-only unit at the far end, you must place the local unit in
Terminate mode; the loop back unit must be placed in Loop back mode. Configure and
transmit traffic from the local unit just as you would for an end-to-end test; and verify
that the filter settings on the loop back unit will allow traffic to pass from its receiver
through to its transmitter.
You can still initiate the loop back from your local unit using the Loop Up action button,
or you can actively loop traffic back from the loop back unit using the LLB action button.
Key loop back concepts

The following concepts apply when configuring loop back applications.
ARP settings
If you are looping back layer 3 or layer 4 traffic, and you want to use ARP to obtain the
units MAC addresses, be certain to enable ARP on both units.
If ARP is disabled on all units on the circuit, you can issue a broadcast request to loop
up the first device that responds (rather than a specific unit).
Address swapping
On the loop back unit, received frames and packets are looped through to the trans-
mitter after the destination and source MAC addresses (layer 2, 3, and 4 loop backs),
IP addresses (layer 3 and 4 loop backs), and if applicable, port numbers (layer 4 loop
backs) are swapped.
Filter criteria on the loop back unit

Only Unicast frames that pass the filter criteria specified on the loop back unit are
looped back to the local unit.
If the Ethernet filter settings are all Don’t Care, and/or the IP and TCP/UDP filters are
both disabled, traffic carrying any payload will pass through the filter for analysis.
Loop types
When configuring the local traffic-generating unit, you can specify that you want to issue
a Unicast loop-up command, or a Broadcast loop-up command.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 285
If you are running an Ethernet application, Unicast commands are used to loop up a
specific test instrument on the far end; Broadcast commands are used to loop up the
first instrument on the circuit that responds.
If you are running a Fibre Channel application, and you suspect that a switch on the
circuit you are testing discards Broadcast frames, be certain to specify a Unicast loop
type. Otherwise, the switch will discard the Broadcast loop up frame, and the unit on
the far end will not be looped up.
LBM Traffic
Used for Loop back Message/Loop back Reply (LBM/LBR) frame analysis where the
far-end unit (any equipment that responds to LBM messages) loops back any packet
containing the LBM message.
VLAN and Q-in-Q traffic

The loop back unit uses the same IDs and priorities assigned to the received traffic, and
loops the traffic back on the same virtual LAN using the same priority.
VPLS labels
The labels for traffic received by the loop back unit are replaced with the labels specified
for transmitted traffic on the Ethernet tab before the traffic is passed through to the loop
back unit’s transmitter.
If you are looping back multiple streams of VPLS traffic, you can specify a unique tunnel
label and VC label for each individual stream, or you can specify the labels for one
stream, and then copy them to the other streams.
VPLS service provider and customer destination addresses

When looping back VPLS traffic, the loop back unit swaps the service provider destina-
tion address (SP DA) and service provider source address (SP SA) carried in received
traffic before looping the traffic through to the transmitter. When configuring traffic on
the local unit, you must specify the service provider source address of the loop back
unit as the service provider destination address for all traffic transmitted from the local
unit. This is because when looping back VPLS traffic, the local unit will not issue a
broadcast request to loopup the next Viavi Ethernet test instrument on the circuit.
Essentially, you must tell it to loop up a specific test instrument by specifying the correct
service provider DA.
Where are the VPLS addresses specified?
The SP destination address is specified on the Ethernet tab by selecting the DA field
for the service provider frame; the customer destination address is specified by
selecting the Data field for the SP frame, and then selecting the DA field for the
customer frame (displayed graphically underneath the SP frame).

Page 286 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Looping back multiple streams of VPLS traffic.
If you are looping back multiple streams of VPLS traffic, you must specify a destination
SP address for all enabled streams (on the All Streams tab), but you can specify a
unique customer destination address for each individual stream on it’s corresponding
setup tab. You can also copy the customer destination address for one stream to all
enabled streams.
MPLS labels
Before received traffic is passed through to the loop back unit’s transmitter, the labels
for the traffic are automatically replaced with the labels specified for traffic transmitted
from the loop back unit; therefore:
• If your local unit is configured to transmit traffic with a second MPLS label, but the
loop back unit is configured to transmit traffic with a single label, the out of
sequence and lost frames counts reported by the local unit may increment if the
incoming frame rate is too high.
• If your local unit is configured to transmit traffic with a single MPLS label, but the
loop back unit is configured to transmit traffic with a second label, the local unit’s
receive bandwidth utilization will exceed its transmitted bandwidth utilization.
NOTE:
Applications using the100G interface do not automatically replace labels speci-
fied for traffic transmitted from the loop back unit.
If you are looping back multiple streams of MPLS traffic, you can specify unique labels
for each individual stream, or you can specify the labels for one stream, and then copy
them to the other streams.
MPLS destination addresses

If you initiate a loop back from a local unit using the Loop Up button, and ARP is
enabled on both units, you must specify the destination IP address and subnet mask
for the next hop on the circuit.
If you use the LLB button on the loop back unit to loop traffic back to the local unit, and
ARP is enabled on both units, you must manually specify the destination IP addresses
for the traffic transmitted from the local unit and for the traffic looped back by the loop
back unit.
If ARP is disabled, you must also specify the destination MAC address for traffic trans-
mitted by the local unit.
If you are looping back multiple streams of MPLS traffic, and ARP is disabled, you can
specify a unique destination MAC address (on the Ethernet tab), and a unique destina-
tion IP address (on the IP tab) for each individual stream, or you can specify the
addresses for one stream, and then copy them to the other streams.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 287
TCP/UDP ATP Listen IP Address and Listen Port

The Transport Module and Multiple Services Application Module use an
ATP Listen IP Address and ATP Listen Port to determine whether received layer 4
traffic carries an ATP payload.
If you issue a Loop Up command from a local unit, after the local unit receives a
response from the loop back unit indicating that the loopup was successful, the local
unit’s ATP Listen IP Address and ATP Listen Port are automatically set to the
destination IP address and destination port number carried in the looped back traffic.
The loop back unit’s ATP Listen IP Address and ATP Listen Port will also automatically
be set to the destination IP address and destination port carried in the traffic it receives
from the local unit.
If you use the LLB action button on the loop back unit, it is essential that you specify
the destination IP address and port carried in received traffic as the ATP Listen IP
Address and ATP Listen Port when you configure tests that require an ATP payload
(such as delay measurements, out of sequence counts, lost frames counts, and packet
jitter measurements).

When running loop back tests, the user interface looks much like it does for standard
end-to-end or multiple streams tests.
Loop back action buttons

Three action buttons are used for the purpose of initiating or ending loop back tests,
and placing a unit into loop back mode.
Loop Up
Press Loop Up when you want to initiate the loopup of another unit on the circuit from
your unit. In this scenario, you are initiating the loopup from the local unit.
Loop Down
Press Loop Down when you want to end the loopup of another unit on the circuit. In
this scenario, you are ending the loopup from the local unit.
LLB
Press LLB to loop received traffic back through to a units transmitter, or to stop looping
traffic back through to the transmitter. In this scenario, you are initiating or ending the
loopup from the loop back unit itself.

Page 288 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Specifying a unit identifier
Loop back messages

During loop back testing, if you initiate or end the loop back from the local unit using the
Loop Up and Loop Down actions, messages are sent to each loop back partner indi-
cating the status of the loop back. These messages appear in the Message Bar
provided on the Main screen of the user interface.
When you configure your unit for a loop back test, you can specify a “Unit Identifier”
which will be provided in each loop up or loop down frame sent from the unit.
Loop back tests

If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so, you can run a loop back test
using each of the applications listed in Table 22.
Table 22 Applications used for loop back testing
1 GigE 2 Gig,
100 FX Optical 4 Gig or 10 GigE 10 GigE
10/100/
Application1 Optical Ethernet 8 Gig2 LAN WAN
1000
Ethernet or Fibre Fibre Ethernet Ethernet
Channel Channel
Layer 2 Traffic X X X X X X
Layer 2 Multiple X X X N/A X X
Streams
Layer 3 Traffic X X X N/A X X
Layer 3 Multiple X X X N/A X X
Streams
Layer 4 Traffic X X X N/A X N/A
Layer 4 Multiple X X X N/A X N/A
Streams
1. If both units are capable of generating traffic, select a Terminate mode application for each unit. If the loop back unit cannot generate
traffic, place it in Loop back mode.
2. 8Gigabit Fibre Channel XFPs require an MSAMv2 for proper operation.
You can also loop back layer 2 and layer 3 traffic when running NextGen applications
carrying a GFP payload.
Specifying a unit identifier

You can specify an identifier to be carried in all loop up and loop down frames origi-
nating from your unit. This allows a technician on the far end to determine where the
loop commands came from.
The default identifier for the Dual Module Carrier, Transport Module, and MSAM is
“Viavi 6000”. The default identifier for the Transport Module is “Viavi 8000”.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 289
Using LLB to loop received traffic back to the local unit
To specify a unit identifier
select the application for the interface you are testing.
3 Select the Unit Identifier setting, and then type the identifier using up to 25 charac-
ters.
The identifier is specified.
NOTE:
If you are observing loop up or loop down messages on another Transport
Module or MSAM, the full unit identifier appears in the messages. If you are
observing the messages on other Viavi Ethernet testers, such as the FST-2802
or the HST (with an Ethernet SIM), the identifier will be truncated, and will dis-
play only the first ten characters.
Using LLB to loop received traffic back to the local unit

You can loop received traffic through to a unit’s transmitter and back to the local
(traffic-originating) unit by selecting the LLB action button provided on the loop back
unit.
To loop received traffic back using LLB
1 If you haven’t already done so, on both units, launch the layer 2, layer 3, layer 4,
triple play, or multiple streams application for the circuit you are testing (see “Step
1: Selecting a test application” on page 3).
If you are looping back traffic on an Ethernet circuit, and both units are capable of
transmitting traffic, place each in Terminate mode; otherwise, if the loop back unit
is not capable of generating traffic, place it in Loop back mode.
If you are looping back traffic on a Fibre Channel circuit, place both units into
Terminate mode. Loop back mode is not available for Fibre Channel applications.
Refer to the sections below for a list of available applications:
– “Ethernet and IP test applications” on page 79
– “MiM applications” on page 80
– “TCP and UDP applications” on page 236
– “Multiple Streams testing” on page 258
– “Fibre Channel test applications” on page 330
2 On the local unit, specify the link initialization settings.
– If you are looping back traffic on an Ethernet circuit, see “Specifying interface
– If you are looping back traffic on a Fibre Channel circuit, see “Specifying inter-
face settings” on page 333.

Page 290 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Using Loop Up to initiate a loop back from the local unit
3 On the local unit, specify the settings for transmitted traffic.

If you are looping back a single stream of layer 2 traffic, refer to one of the
following:
– “Layer 2 testing” on page 101
– “Configuring layer 2 MAC-in-MAC tests” on page 179
– “Configuring layer 2 Fibre Channel tests” on page 332
If you are looping back a single stream of layer 3 traffic, refer to the following:
If you are looping back a single stream of layer 4 traffic, refer to the following:
– “Specifying layer 4 settings” on page 239
If you are looping back multiple streams of traffic, refer to the following as appro-
priate for your application:
– “Enabling multiple streams” on page 263
– “Specifying layer 2 stream settings” on page 268
– “Specifying layer 2 and layer 3 settings for Triple Play services” on page 279
4 On the loop back unit, do the following:
a If you are running a single-stream application, verify that the applicable filter
settings are either disabled, set to Don’t Care, or that they match the settings
for the traffic transmitted from the local unit.
b On the Main screen, select the Actions tab, and then select LLB.
5 On the local unit, select the Actions tab, and then select one of the following:
– Start Traffic (if you configured a constant or bursty load).
– Start Ramp (if you configured a ramped traffic load).
– When the loop back unit receives the traffic, it does the following:
– Determines which frames or packets satisfy its filter criteria. Only traffic that
satisfies the criteria will be looped back to the near end unit.
– Swaps the destination and source addresses or port IDs, and if applicable,
port number for every frame or packet it receives.
– Transmits the traffic back to the local unit.
Traffic is looped back to the local unit.

You can select the Loop Up button on the local (traffic generating) unit to loop up
another unit on the circuit. After sending the Loop Up frame, a confirmation message

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 291
from the loop back unit appears in the message bar of the Main screen of your local unit
informing you that the loop back is successful.
Before sending the Loop Up frame, your unit must be configured as follows:
• If you are looping back layer 2 non-VPLS Ethernet traffic, the near end unit auto-
matically detects the MAC address for the next unit on the circuit; therefore, you
do not need to configure the destination MAC address. It will be populated auto-
matically for you.
If you want to loop up a specific device, you can specify that you are using a
Unicast loop type, and then specify the destination MAC address for the device
you are looping up.
• If you are looping back layer 2 Fibre Channel traffic, the near end unit automati-
cally detects the source port ID for the next Fibre Channel port on the circuit;
therefore, you do not need to configure the destination port ID (D_ID). It will be
populated automatically for you.
• If you are looping back layer 3 traffic, you must specify the source IP address for
the unit on the far end of the circuit as the destination IP address for traffic trans-
mitted by the local unit.
Be certain to specify the same destination address for the filter on the receiving
loop back unit.
• If you are looping back layer 3 or layer 4 traffic, and you want to use ARP to popu-
late the units MAC addresses; be certain to enable ARP on both units.
• If you are looping back layer 4 traffic, after you issue the Loop Up command (from
the local unit), and the unit receives a response from the far end unit indicating
that the loopup was successful, the local unit’s ATP Listen IP Address and ATP
Listen Port are automatically set to the destination IP address and destination port
number carried in the looped back traffic. The far end unit’s ATP Listen
IP Address and ATP Listen Port will also automatically be set to the destination
IP address and destination port carried in the traffic it receives from the local unit.
• You can optionally specify unit identifiers for each unit (for example, “SamsUnit”
and “JoesUnit”). When the units send confirmation messages to each other indi-
cating the status of the loop back, the messages will identify each unit using the
identifier. For details, see “Specifying a unit identifier” on page 289.
To initiate a loop back from the local unit
1 If you haven’t already done so, launch the layer 2, layer 3, layer 4, triple play, or
multiple streams application for the circuit you are testing (see “Step 1: Selecting
a test application” on page 3). Refer to the sections below for a list of available
applications:
– “Ethernet and IP applications” on page 79
– “MiM applications” on page 80
– “TCP and UDP applications” on page 236
– “Multiple Streams testing” on page 258
2 On the local unit, specify the link initialization settings (see “Specifying interface

Page 292 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
3 On the local unit, specify the settings for transmitted traffic. Depending on the
application you selected, see:
– “Configuring layer 2 MAC-in-MAC tests” on page 179
– “Specifying layer 4 settings” on page 239
– “Enabling multiple streams” on page 263
– “Specifying layer 2 and layer 3 settings for Triple Play services” on page 279
4 If you are looping back a single stream of non-VPLS layer 2 traffic, proceed to
step 8.
5 If you are looping back a single stream of traffic, on the local unit, do the following
(as appropriate for your particular test); otherwise, if you are looping back multiple
streams of traffic, proceed to step 6:
– If you are looping back layer 2 VPLS traffic, specify the far end unit’s source
MAC address as the destination MAC address for transmitted traffic.
– If you are looping back layer 3 or layer 4 traffic, specify the far end unit’s
source IP address as the destination IP address for transmitted traffic.
– If you are looping back layer 4 traffic, specify the far end unit’s source port
number as the destination port for transmitted traffic.
6 If you are looping back multiple streams of traffic, source MAC addresses and IP
addresses can be specified for all enabled streams (on the All Streams tab) or on
a stream-by-stream basis (on the Ethernet or IP sub-tab for each individual
stream).
When looping back multiple streams of layer 4 TCP/UDP traffic, you can specify a
unique source service type and port number for each stream, or you can specify
the information for one stream, and then copy it to all other streams.
To specify source addresses and ports, on the local unit, do the following:
– If you want to assign a unique source MAC address to each layer 2 stream,
be certain to specify Per Stream as the Source MAC Mode on the All
Streams setup tab, then specify the source MAC addresses on the tabs
corresponding to each enabled stream.
– If you want to assign a unique source IP address to each layer 3 stream, be
certain to specify Static-Per Stream as the Source Type on the All Streams
setup tab, then specify the source IP addresses on the tabs corresponding to
each enabled stream.
– If you want to assign a unique source port number to each layer 4 stream,
specify the port number on the tabs corresponding to each enabled stream.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 293
7 On the far end unit, do the following:

a Ensure that automatic traffic generation is not enabled. If it is not disabled,
the unit will not respond to the loop up command.
b If you are looping back multiple streams of TCP/UDP traffic, specify a listen
port for each enabled stream that matches the destination port in the corre-
sponding stream received from the near end unit.
8 On the near end unit, select the Action tab, and then select Loop Up to put the far
end unit in loop back mode. The following occurs:
– A confirmation message appears in the message bar of the near end unit
indicating that the loop back was successful.
– For layer 4 loop backs, if a confirmation message appeared, the ATP listen
port (or ports for multiple streams) on the near end are automatically popu-
lated.
– If a layer 4 loop back at the far end was successful, and you are looping back
traffic using a single stream application, the ATP listen port on the far end is
automatically populated.
9 On the near end unit, select one of the following:
– Start Traffic (if you configured a constant or bursty load).
– Start Ramp (if you configured a ramped traffic load).
– When the far end unit receives the traffic, it does the following:
– Determines which frames or packets satisfy its filter criteria. Only traffic that
satisfies the criteria will be looped back to the near end unit.
– Swaps the destination and source MAC or IP address, and if applicable, port
number for every frame or packet it receives.
– Transmits the traffic back to the unit on the near end.
Traffic is transmitted and looped through the unit on the far end (if it passes the far end
unit’s filter criteria).
To loop down the far end unit
1 On the near end unit, select the Action tab, and then select Stop Traffic or Stop
Ramp.
2 On the near end unit, select Loop Down.
The far end unit is looped down, and a confirmation message appears in the message
bar of the near end unit indicating that the loop down was successful.

Page 294 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
12
Chapter 12 IP Video Testing
This chapter provides information on testing video over IP services. Topics discussed
in this chapter include the following:
• “About IP Video testing” on page 296
• “Populating the Address Book” on page 310
• “Specifying Video settings” on page 313
• “Specifying Ethernet filter settings” on page 313
• “Specifying result threshold settings” on page 315
• “Specifying latency distribution settings” on page 317
• “Specifying IGMP settings” on page 318
• “Joining streams” on page 319
• “Observing physical layer and link statistics” on page 320
• “Observing stream statistics” on page 321
• “Leaving streams” on page 321
• “Basic principles of IP Video testing” on page 322

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 295
About IP Video testing

If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so, you can use it to verify the proper
installation and configuration of IPTV and IP Video transport service, and then verify
that key quality of service (QoS) requirements have been satisfied per a customer’s
service level agreement (SLA).
The instrument allows you to:

• Automatically discover up to 32 MPTS or 512 SPTS video streams on a circuit.
• Quickly determine whether problems occur at the physical or link layer, on the
transport network, or in the video streams themselves by observing the
color-coded Summary Status results.
• Determine whether problems are occurring at the video head end, in the transport
network, or in the access network by conducting tests at various locations on the
network (see Figure 53).
• Validate video flows by configuring the module to emulate a service end point.
• Verify transport network performance of video streams by measuring critical
parameters such as bandwidth, packet loss, jitter, and loss distance.
• Analyze multiple streams sent to different end customers and locations to deter-
mine whether problems occur in the metro or access segment of the network.
Figure 53 IP Video network architecture
For a brief overview of the key concepts involved in IP Video testing, see “Basic princi-
ples of IP Video testing” on page 322.
Understanding MPEG video transport streams

At a minimum, each MPEG video transport stream is comprised of a source and desti-
nation IP address, and a UDP port number. They are typically encapsulated within RTP/
UDP/IP or UDP/IP streams. If a stream is encapsulated in an RTP stream, the RTP
header is also present. If applicable, the required VLAN, VPLS, or Q-in-Q tags or labels
are also carried in the stream.

Page 296 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Figure 54 illustrates a typical IPTV encapsulation scheme.
Figure 54 IPTV Encapsulation
Single program transport streams

Single program transport streams (SPTS) carry a single program; therefore, when you
run SPTS applications, each of the analyzed streams is carrying one program, and
when you observe results in streams view, program results appear for each stream on
a one-to-one basis.
Multiple program transport streams

Multiple program transport streams (MPTS) carry multiple programs; therefore, when
you run MPTS applications, each of the analyzed streams is carrying more than one
program, and when you observe results in streams view, multiple programs appear and
can be analyzed for any particular stream.
Understanding the Explorer and Analyzer applications

The MSAM allows you to quickly determine what is happening on a link by discovering,
then observing many MPTS or SPTS transport streams using the Explorer application.
If necessary, you can then analyze a single MPTS stream or a subset of SPTS streams
in greater detail to troubleshoot issues on the link.
Explorer applications
The Explorer applications allow you to discover and then monitor up to 32 MPTS or
512 SPTS streams, and observe key results such as the MPEG status, the number of
programs carried in the stream, the layer 1 bandwidth utilized by the stream (in Mbps),
packet loss, and packet jitter measurements. When running an Explorer application,
you can establish thresholds for declaring key errors, such as IP jitter and packet loss.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 297
Analyzer applications
The Analyzer applications allow you to monitor a single MPTS stream or 16 SPTS
streams, observe comprehensive transport layer and MPEG-2 layer results, and
observe aggregate physical layer and link statistics for the stream or streams. When
running an Analyzer application, you can establish detailed thresholds for declaring a
variety of errors, including:
• Continuity errors
• PCR Jitter
• Synchronization errors
• Transport (TEI) errors
• PAT, PMT and PID errors
• MDI delay factor and media loss rate (if optioned)
• Packet jitter, loss distance, and loss periods
• Packet Loss
Understanding MSTV
Microsoft media room television (MSTV) is Microsoft’s proprietary IPTV. It is a distrib-
uted operating system that runs both on the servers and on the STBs. It performs end-
to-end configuration, provisions the video servers, links the electronic program guide
(EPG) with the content, acts as a boot server for the STB and ensures that all STBs run
compatible software. MSTV Architecture contains a number of servers, running on
Microsoft platforms used to provide content storage and delivery in a service provider's
network. MSTV streams are almost always VBR streams.
Acquisition server (A-Server) performs live content acquisition from various local and
terrestrial sources for linear broadcast TV. A -Server packetize it over RTP and send it
to all D-server and STBs listening to the same sources.
Distribution servers (D-servers) are used to distribute frequently used content from
various points of presence in the provider's network for faster access and to minimize
channel switching time. D-Server serves the STB clients with both R-UDP and ICC,
which are transmitted as unicast packets of TS/RTP/UDP. Lost packets are also
restored between A and D server with R-UDP unicast or multicast packets.
STBs are customer premises equipment interfaced with the TV which also run Micro-
soft proprietary software. For a channel change, the STB sends ICCIGMP join request
to the D-server and D-server sends a response back, followed by a short unicast burst
of traffic to enable the channel change.
Instant Channel Change (ICC)

Unlike channel switching on cable TV, where changes are “instant”, inherent switching
and routing delays in an IP network cause channel switches to be visibly slower (one
to two seconds). To eliminate the channel change delay inherent in digital cable, satel-
lite, and IPTV networks set-top-boxes support Microsoft Instant Channel Change (ICC)
capability used to implement very fast channel change.

Page 298 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Microsoft uses a combination of short unicast burst of data (starting with an MPEG “I”
frame) at a 20-30% higher bitrate than normal at the beginning of channel tuning from
the STB to the D-Servers, Begins with I frame so that playback can begin immediately.
Fills the STB buffer. After the buffer is full it joins the multicast stream. The first request
implements ICC by accelerating video for the first seconds, followed by 'normal' video
flow.
Channel change time, also known as Zap time, is an important metric for IPTV QOS.
Zap time refers to the channel change delay, or how quickly and reliably the user can
change the channel. It is the time between sending of channel leave request and
receiving of first video stream data for the new, just joined video stream.
Microsoft R-UDP
MSTV uses R-UDP protocol for IPTV service delivery over multicast networks. This is
Microsoft proprietary protocol. It focuses on replacing lost packets as reported by a
STB. Retries between Dserver and STB is unicast. The source listens on a IP or UPD
port for the retries.The STB makes requests for the lost packets. The Dserver responds
with lost packets as unicast packets of TS/RTP/UDP. The Dserver uses the overhead
bandwidth allocated over the max bit rate to server the additional packets.The lost
packets are reported to the DServer in the format of the starting sequence number of
the hole, followed by the number of packets in this hole.

Features and capabilities of the Dual Module Carrier, Transport Module, and MSAM
include the following when testing IP Video service:
• Address book—If you need to monitor specific streams on a regular basis, you
can add them to the address book to expedite the setup process for future tests.
You can also import addresses from and export addresses to a USB key. After
adding them to the address book, you can quickly select them when joining
streams using IGMP requests. For details, see “Populating the Address Book” on
page 310.
• Timed tests and event log—You can schedule tests to run for a specific period of
time, and archive all events to a log for review at a later time. This is useful when
evaluating sporadic packet loss on a circuit, or correlating PCR jitter to instances
of overall packet jitter. For details on timed tests, see the Getting Started manual
that shipped with your instrument or upgrade. For details on the Event log, see
“Event Log results” on page 571 of Chapter 16 “Test Results”.
• IGMP Version 2 or Version 3—You can optionally use Version 2 or Version 3 of
IGMP to request specific video streams when testing.
• Traffic filters—You can optionally filter monitored streams for non-tagged, VLAN,
Q-in-Q, or VPLS traffic.
• Result thresholds—When running Explorer applications, you can monitor trans-
port streams for packet loss and packet jitter, and either use the default thresholds
for declaring QoS alarms for either condition, or establish your own thresholds.
Additional thresholds are available when running Analyzer applications.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 299
• Bandwidth utilization—You can determine the bandwidth utilized for each trans-
port stream, and then verify that error free traffic is received for each stream.
• TR 101 290 First Priority results—You can observe the first priority results recom-
mended in ETSI TR 101, such as transport stream synchronization loss, and
continuity, PAT, PMT, and PID error counts.
• Detailed result analysis—You can observe detailed information for a subset of
transport streams using the Analyzer application, and then compare results for the
streams to determine if errors are due to the same root cause.
• Identification of stream type. The instrument analyzes the stream to identify
whether it is a CBR or VBR stream. The available results vary depending on the
stream type.
• MSTV. Support for Microsoft IP TV in SPTS Analyzer mode. MSTV can monitor
up to 16 multicast streams.

When you configure your module for testing, the main screen provides three result
buttons that allow you to display physical/link quality results, transport streams quality
results, and video streams quality results. Setup tabs are provided that allow you to
specify filter criteria for monitored streams and establish thresholds for declaring certain
errors such as packet loss or packet jitter. If you intend to actively request specific
streams using IGMP, you can also specify settings that control the requests.
Action buttons
When running IP Video applications, buttons appear at the bottom of the Main screen
that allow you to select an SFP or specify the wavelength for an optical connector (if
applicable), turn the laser on or off, and, if you are using IGMP, actively join or leave
specific transport streams.
Restart button
When running IP Video applications, if streams are dropped during the course of your
test, they will continue to appear on your display, but the current bandwidth measure-
ment (Total Util %, Cur) will be zero. If this occurs, you can press the Restart
button to refresh the display and show all currently analyzed streams. The dropped
streams will be cleared from the display.

Page 300 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018

When you select an IP Video application, LEDs appear under the result window on the
Main screen (see Figure 55).
Figure 55 IP Video LEDs
The LEDs allow you to quickly determine whether a signal is present, synchronization
has been acquired, and whether or not the link is active. LEDs also indicate whether or
not frames or packets are detected on the link.
Understanding IP Video test results

IP video results are available that allow you to verify the quality of the physical layer,
the link, the transport quality of video streams, and the quality of the video streams and
programs themselves. Figure 56 illustrates the buttons used to verify the quality of
service in each area.
Figure 56 IP Video Quality Buttons
Layered view: Quality Layer Buttons

The layered view appears on the Main screen the first time you launch an IP Video
application. Color coded quality buttons appear which immediately indicate the current
and historical status of the physical layer and link, the transport of the video streams

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 301
(using IP, UDP, and RTP), and the video streams and programs themselves. Figure 57
illustrates the view when all results are OK and there is no history of errors at any layer.
Figure 57 Layered View - All Results OK
Physical/Link Quality (Interface, Ethernet)—This button displays aggregate results

(such as the bandwidth utilization, interface (layer 1) and Ethernet (layer 2) errors for
the link.
Transport Quality (IP, UDP, RTP)—This button displays test results for each monitored
IP, UDP, or RTP traffic stream.
Video Streams Quality (MPEG-2 TS)—This button displays test results for each moni-
tored MPEG-2 video transport stream.
After streams are discovered on the link, a count of the number of streams passing the
filter criteria, and the total layer 1 bandwidth utilized and appears under the buttons.
Navigation Tip:
You can always return to the layered view by setting the results group to Sum-
mary, and the category to Status.
Layered View: Button Colors

Figure 58 illustrates the view when there are errors at the transport stream layer and
there is a history of errors at both the transport stream and video stream layer. The
Video Streams Quality button indicates that it can not provide results for video streams

Page 302 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
because there are errors with the underlying transport streams (Lower Layers
Errored). No errors have occurred at the physical/link layer.
Figure 58 Layered View - Errored Transport Streams
Table 23 explains each of the colors used for the current and history buttons.
Table 23 Current and History Button Colors
Color Current History1

Green Indicates that all results are OK for N/A
that particular quality group. For an
example, see Figure 57 on
page 302.
Yellow Indicates that at least one result at Indicates that at least one
that particular layer triggered a result occurred within the
minor alarm or error based on the last test interval that trig-
established thresholds. gered a minor alarm or error
based on the established
thresholds. For an exam-
ple, see Figure 60 on
page 305.
Red Indicates that at least one result at Indicates that at least one
that particular layer triggered a result triggered a major
major alarm or error based on the alarm or error based on the
established thresholds. established thresholds
within the last test interval.
For an example, see
Figure 61 on page 306.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 303
Table 23 Current and History Button Colors (Continued)
Color Current History1

Light Gray Indicates that results are not avail- N/A
able because there is an issue at a
lower level that prevents your unit
from determining the status for that
particular quality group. For an
page 306.
If a button is gray, evaluate the test
results for the lower layer to deter-
mine the nature of the problem.
Dark Gray Indicates that your unit can not Indicates that nothing has
detect the signal, packets, or occurred within the last test
streams required to provide the sta- interval to trigger a yellow or
tus for the quality layer. A message red state.
appears on the button stating what
could not be detected (No Signal,
No IP Streams, or No MPEG-2
Streams). For an example, see
Figure 59 on page 304.
1. If errors are intermittent, the large quality button (indicating the current state of the results) will be green, but the
associated history button will be red or yellow. This is due to the five second refresh rate of your unit. Therefore, it
is important to check the state of the history button periodically during the course of your test to verify that intermit-
tent errors are not occurring.
Figure 59 illustrates the layered view when no IP or MPEG-2 streams are detected, and
there is a history of errors at the transport and video stream layers.
Figure 59 Layered View: No IP or MPEG-2 streams detected

Page 304 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Figure 60 illustrates the layered view when errors occurred at the transport layer, and
there is a history of warnings at the video stream layer.
Figure 60 Layered View: History of Warnings at Video Stream Layer
Streams view
The streams view appears by default after you select the Transport Streams Quality
or Video Streams Quality button.
• When you press the Transport Streams Quality button, all monitored streams
are listed.
• If you press the Video Streams Quality button while running an MPTS applica-
tion, all programs for each monitored MPTS appear.
• If you press the Video Streams Quality button while running an SPTS applica-
tion, monitored SPTS streams appear (see Figure 61).
To optimize the number of results that appear on your display, the result windows
appear in the Full Size view by default when you run IP Video applications.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 305
Figure 61 Video Results: Streams View (MPTS Transport Stream, Explorer

application)
Stream status icons

Table 24 explains each of the icons that may appear to the left of the monitored
streams.
Table 24 Stream Status Icons
Icon Indicates
No errors have been detected on the monitored stream.
One or more errors satisfying the alarm threshold have been detected
on the monitored stream. Errored results also appear with a red back-
ground.
If you see a stream with a red exclamation mark, but no results appear
in red, one of the hidden results is errored.
If this occurs, select the Columns button, and then press Select all to
show all of the results available for the stream. Scroll to the right of the
results display until you locate the errored result (or results).
One or more errors satisfying the warning threshold have been detected
on the monitored stream. Errored results also appear with a yellow
background.

Page 306 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Observing streams using the Explorer Application

You can do the following when running an Explorer application:
• Observe a list of transport traffic streams or video streams by pressing the
Transport Streams Quality or Video Streams Quality button provided in the
layered view to observe a list of transport traffic streams or video streams.
• Observe transport and video streams simultaneously by selecting the current
result group button (All Streams Video or All Streams Transport), and then
selecting All Streams Complete.
• Evaluate certain streams more thoroughly (using the Analyzer application) by
selecting the streams, and then pressing Launch Analyzer directly from the
streams display. It is not necessary to launch the application from the Test menu.
If you are analyzing streams on an optical circuit, you’ll need to turn the laser on
again after the Analyzer application launches. If you originally joined the streams
via an IGMP request, you must re-join them. See “Joining streams” on page 319.
If you have streams displayed in multiple result windows, you can only launch one
instance of the Analyzer application. You can not launch multiple instances of the
Analyzer from different windows.
Observing streams using the Analyzer Application

You can launch the Analyzer application using either method below:
• Via the Test Menu, which provides Analyzer applications for SPTS and MPTS
streams.
• From an Explorer application, if you want to analyze a subset of streams in
greater detail. A Launch Analyzer action button appears at the bottom of the
streams result display, allowing you to launch the application for selected streams
immediately (without returning to the Main screen).
You can do the following when running an Analyzer application:

• Press the Transport Streams Quality or Video Streams Quality button
provided in the layered view to observe a list of transport traffic streams or video
streams.
• If you would like to observe transport traffic streams and video streams simultane-
ously, select the current result group button (All Streams Video or
All Streams Transport), and then select All Streams Complete.
• If you would like to observe results for a particular stream, select the current result
group button, and then select the group corresponding to the stream number (for
example, Stream 3). If the stream is named, its name (for example, ESPN or
CNN) appears in the group list instead of a stream number.
• If you launched the Analyzer application from the Explorer application, after you
analyze the streams that were discovered by the Explorer application (which were
transferred to the Analyzer application), you can press the Rescan Streams soft

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 307
key to rescan the link and discover the current streams meeting your filter criteria.
Discovered streams will not be restricted to those that were previously discovered
using the Explorer application.
Navigation Tip:
You can always return to the streams view by setting the results group to All
Streams (Complete), All Streams Video, or All Streams Transport.
Restart Warning:
If you launch an Explorer or Analyzer application from the Test Menu, pressing
Restart clears all discovered streams from your display, and your unit rescans
the circuit and discovers streams that are currently on the circuit. Therefore, if
you are in the process of analyzing results for a particular stream, do not press
Restart.
If you launch the Analyzer application from an Explorer application (using the
Launch Analyzer button), pressing Restart will only clear your test results; it
will not rescan the circuit for new streams. The Rescan Streams soft key is
used to discover new streams.
Static and dynamic test results

When streams (and programs) are first discovered, values for certain results are deter-
mined, displayed, and then remain static. These values remain the same until you
“discover” streams or programs again. All other dynamic results are refreshed every
five seconds.
Table 25 lists static results for each stream when running the Explorer or Analyzer appli-
cations.
Table 25 Static IP Video Stream Test Results
Result Explorer? Analyzer?

IPv4 Source Address Yes Yes
IPv4 Destination Address Yes Yes
UDP Dest Port Yes Yes
UDP Source Port Yes Yes
RTP Present Yes Yes
VLAN ID Yes Yes
VLAN Priority Yes Yes
SVLAN ID Yes Yes
SVLAN Priority Yes Yes
VC Label (VPLS) Yes Yes
Tunnel Label (VPLS) Yes Yes
Number of Programs Yes Yes

Page 308 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Table 25 Static IP Video Stream Test Results (Continued)
Result Explorer? Analyzer?

Transport Stream ID No Yes
Table 26 lists static results for each program when running an Analyzer application.
Table 26 Static IP Video Test Results - Analyzed Programs
Result
PMT PID
Program Number
# of PIDs
PID ID
PID Types (such as Audio, Video, Other)
Navigating the results display

When navigating through the IP Video results, consider the following:
• When you launch an application for the first time, the Summary group and Status
category appear. This is also referred to as the “layered” view (see “Layered view:
Quality Layer Buttons” on page 301).
• When you launch applications subsequent times, the result view that was
displayed the last time you ended a test appears. For example, if the
All Streams Video results were displayed the last time you ran the MPTS Explorer
application, the next time you launch the application, the All Streams Video results
will appear (see Figure 61 on page 306).
• Use the Result Group button to switch between the Summary, Physical/Link, All
Streams (Complete), All Streams Video, and All Streams Transport groups.
• When observing results in the Physical/Link group, Stats and AutoNeg Status
categories are available. Use the category button to switch categories.
• When observing results in one of the All Streams groups, the only category that is
available is the All category.
• If you’d like to observe more detailed information for a particular stream, you can
select the stream, and then press Stream Details. Some results are only avail-
able when viewing detailed results for a particular stream. For example, if you are
analyzing video streams carried on a VPLS network, you must press Stream
Details to see the VLAN, SVLAN, Tunnel, and Virtual Channel (VC) for the
stream.
• If you’d like to observe detailed results for a particular stream or program, tap
twice quickly (double-click) on the stream or program. For example, if you are
analyzing SPTS, double clicking on the first stream displays the bandwidth
utilized for the stream or program, PCR jitter measurements, and counts for a
variety of errors.
• If an up or down arrow appears in a column label, you can tap on the label to sort
the streams in ascending or descending order.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 309
Populating the Address Book
Customizing the results display

Some categories provide so much information you may need to scroll to the right signifi-
cantly to observe a particular result. In other instances, you may be monitoring a large
number of transport or MPEG-2 streams, which forces you to scroll up and down to
observe results for each analyzed stream.
To focus on a particular subset of results (and minimize scrolling), you can specify
which result columns appear on your display, and hide those that do not apply to your
test. For example, if each of the streams you are analyzing is named, and the circuit is
not configured for VPLS traffic, you may choose to hide the IP Address, Tunnel, and VC
(virtual channel) columns since they are not necessary when evaluating your results.
To reduce the number of streams displayed, you can optionally show only errored
streams (rather than all monitored streams).
IP Video test applications

This release of the instrument supports the IP Video test applications for the interfaces
listed in Table 27.
Table 27 IP Video test applications
10/100/ 1 GigE 10 GigE LA 10 GigE WA

Application 100M Optical
1000 Optical N N
MPTS X X X X N/A
Explorer
SPTS Explorer X X X X N/A
MPTS Ana- X X X X N/A
lyzer
SPTS Ana- X X X X N/A
lyzer

The Dual Module Carrier, Transport Module, and MSAM provides an Address Book
which you can populate with the streams that you know you intend to request and
monitor on a regular basis. When running MPTS applications, you can also add and
name specific programs carried in each stream.
After you store streams and programs in the address book, you can join them using the
Join Streams button provided on the Main screen.

Page 310 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Adding streams
To add streams to the address book
1 If you haven’t already done so, launch an IP Video application. For a list of appli-
cations, see Table 27 on page 310.
2 Press the Address Book soft key.
3 Under New Entry, specify the following:
a If the stream is identified using a combination of source IP address and desti-
nation address, in Source IP, enter the source address for the stream; other-
wise, accept the default value of 0.0.0.0 (which indicates that streams with
any source address carrying the specified destination address will be added).
A source IP address is only required if you are issuing requests using
IGMPv3.
b In Dest. IP, specify the destination address carried in the stream. The destina-
tion IP address is required.
c Optional. If you are running an MPTS Analyzer application, and you want to
specify the program ID carried in the program mapping table (PMT) for the
stream, in PMT PID, enter the PID. If you intend to name the stream, you
must specify the PID (to distinguish the program from other programs carried
in the stream).
d In Name, type the name you want to use to identify the stream or program.
4 Select Add Entry.
The stream is added to the address book, and it appears in the streams list. Delete and
Delete All buttons are provided if you need to remove streams from the book.
Updating stream data

After you add a stream, you can update the name, source IP address, destination IP
address, and if applicable, PID by selecting the corresponding data on your touch
screen.
To update stream data
1 Select the data you want to update (Name, Source IP, Destination IP, or PMT
PID).
A keypad appears.
2 Type the new name, address, or PID, and then select OK.
The data is updated.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 311
Importing or exporting streams

You can store a list of streams as a CSV file on a USB key, and then import them into
the address book. You can also export address book data to a USB key, and then load
it onto another unit.
To import streams
1 If you haven’t already done so, launch an IP Video application. For a list of appli-
cations, see Table 27 on page 310.
2 Press the Address Book soft key.
3 Insert the key with the CSV file into a USB slot on your unit.
The unit beeps to indicate that it recognized the key.
4 To import stream entries, do the following:
a Select Import. The Import Entries From USB dialog box appears.
b Select the .csv file with the entries that you want to import, and then select
Import Entries.
Streams are imported, and appear on the dialog box.
5 To export stream entries, do the following:
a Select Export. The Export Entries To USB dialog box appears.
b Type a file name for the CSV file that will contain the exported stream entries,
or accept the default file name (IPTV_Address_Book_YYYY-MM-DD, where
YYYY represents the current year, MM represents the month, and DD
represents the day). If you enter your own filename, you do not need to type
the .csv extension.
c Select Export Entries.
Streams are exported to the USB key.
Stream entries are imported or exported.
TIP: SORTING PHONE BOOK ENTRIES

You can easily sort the entries in ascending or descending order using the data
provided. For example, to sort the entries by name, select the heading for the
Name column. To sort the entries in descending order by destination IP
address, select the Destination IP heading. Selecting a heading a second time
reverses the order.

Before monitoring IP Video traffic on an optical circuit, you can specify interface settings
which:
• Indicate which SFP jack you are using (if your unit is equipped with SFP jacks).

Page 312 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Specifying Video settings
• Specify the transmitted wavelength (if your unit is equipped with 850 nm,
1310 nm, and 1550 nm connectors).
• Allow your unit to communicate with another Ethernet device (when requesting
video traffic using IGMP).
For details on the various connectors used to connect to the circuit, refer to the printed
Getting Started User’s Manual that shipped with your unit. For details on specifying the
information required to establish a link to another device, see “Specifying interface
settings” on page 102 of Chapter 5 “Ethernet and IP Testing”.
Specifying Video settings

After specifying interface settings, specify the Video settings. These settings are only
available in SPTS Analyzer applications.
To specify video settings
page 310 for a list of applications.
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the Video tab.
3 Specify the Protocol Mode: IPTV (typical IPTV) or MSTV (Microsoft proprietary
IPTV).
The video settings are specified.

Before monitoring video traffic, you can specify settings that determine which traffic
passes through the filter for analysis. For example, you can set up the filter to observe
multicast traffic carried on a specific VLAN, or unicast and multicast traffic carried on a
particular VPLS tunnel, or traffic for a specific STB.
NOTE:
If you are joining specific streams using IGMP requests, be certain to configure
the filter using the same encapsulation criteria to ensure that the streams pass
through the filter for analysis. For details, see “Joining streams” on page 319.
To filter received traffic
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the Ethernet Filter tab.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 313
3 If you do not want to analyze video streams on a VPLS circuit, skip this step and
proceed to step 4.
If you want to analyze video streams on a VPLS circuit, specify the following filter
settings:
Setting Specify
VPLS Enabled Yes
Tunnel ID Filter If you want to analyze video streams carried on a specific
tunnel, select Yes; otherwise, to analyze streams carried on
any tunnel, select Don’t Care.
Tunnel ID Enter the ID for the tunnel carrying the video streams that
(Tunnel ID Filter you want to analyze.
is Yes)
VC ID Filter If you want to analyze video streams carried on a specific
virtual circuit, select Yes; otherwise, to analyze streams
carried on any circuit, select Don’t Care.
VC ID Enter the ID for the virtual circuit carrying the video streams
that you want to analyze.
4 In Encapsulation, specify the type of traffic you want to analyze:
Encapsulation Settings
None, VLAN, or No additional settings required. Only unencapsulated,
Q-in-Q VLAN-tagged, or Q-in-Q tagged traffic will pass through the
filter for analysis. VPLS traffic will not be analyzed.
None No additional settings required. Only unencapsulated traffic
will pass through the filter for analysis. VPLS traffic will not
be analyzed.
VLAN Specify VLAN ID
If you want to analyze traffic carried on a specific VLAN,
select Yes; otherwise, to analyze traffic on multiple VLANs,
VLAN ID (Specify VLAN ID must be Yes)
Specify the ID of the VLAN carrying the traffic you want to
analyze.

Page 314 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Specifying result threshold settings
Encapsulation Settings
Q-in-Q Specify CVLAN ID
If you want to analyze traffic on a specific customer or ser-
vice provider VLAN, select Yes; otherwise, to analyze traffic
on multiple VLANs, select Don’t Care.
CVLAN ID (Specify CVLAN ID must be Yes)
Specify the ID of the customer VLAN carrying the traffic you
want to analyze.
SVLAN ID (Specify CVLAN ID must be Yes)
Specify the ID of the service provider VLAN carrying the
traffic you want to analyze.
5 In Traffic Type, specify whether you want to analyze Multicast traffic (traffic sent
to a variety of destinations), or Multicast & Unicast traffic (traffic sent to a variety
of destinations, or to a single destination).
The settings are specified to filter traffic for analysis.

Before analyzing traffic, you can specify settings that control how your unit interprets a
variety of test results. Thresholds for declaring that certain results are in an alarm state
(and reported in red on your results display), and whether they are approaching an
alarm state (and reported in yellow) are available. Red results (results in an alarm state)
are also reported in the Event Log.
For example, when configuring an Explorer application, you can indicate that if more
than two packets are lost during a test interval (5 seconds), the packet loss result (and
any associated result buttons) should appear in red. You can also indicate that if more
than one packet is lost, the result and buttons should appear in yellow (to serve as a
warning that something may be wrong).
When configuring Analyzer applications, you can also indicate when certain errors,
such as period errors or distance errors should be declared.
The test interval used to calculate alarm results varies depending on the type of result
(see Table 28). Each test interval is treated as a separate time slot.
Table 28 Alarm Test Intervals
Test Explorer Analyzer

Result
Interval Application Application
Packet Loss 5 seconds Yes Yes
Continuity Counter Errors 5 seconds No Yes
MDI Media Loss Rate 5 seconds No Yes
Sync Errors 5 seconds No Yes

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 315
Table 28 Alarm Test Intervals
Test Explorer Analyzer

Result
Interval Application Application
PAT/PMT Errors 5 seconds No Yes
Transport Errors (TEI) 5 seconds No Yes
PID Errors 5 seconds No Yes
Packet Jitter (ms) 1 second Yes Yes
MDI Delay Factor 1 second No Yes
MDI Media Loss Rate 1 second No Yes
To specify result threshold settings
select the IP Video application for the interface you are testing. Refer to Table 27
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the Result Thresholds tab.
3 Under QoS Alarm Thresholds, for each result listed, specify the following:
– In Raise alarm if above, specify the threshold for displaying the result (and
any associated buttons) in red.
– In Warn if at least, specify the threshold for displaying the result (and any
associated buttons) in yellow.
If you are configuring an Explorer application, or if the streams you are analyzing
are not encapsulated using RTP, the thresholds are specified. You do not need to
proceed to step 4.
4 If you are configuring an Analyzer application, and the analyzed streams are
carried in RTP, specify the following under QoS Error Thresholds:
– Period Error - Loss Period must exceed. Enter the threshold for declaring
a Period Error. The threshold represents the number of packets lost sequen-
tially before a Period Error is declared. The number of sequentially lost
packets constitutes the “Loss Period”.
– Distance Error - Distance between periods must fall below. Enter the
threshold for declaring a Distance Error. The threshold represents the
minimum number of packets that must be received in between declared Loss
Periods to constitute an acceptable distance between errors. If the number
of received packets between Loss Periods falls below the threshold, a
Distance Error is declared. Essentially, the specified number of packets
constitutes the “distance”.
The result thresholds are specified. Alarms, warnings, errors, and the Event Log will be
handled according to your settings.

Page 316 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Specifying latency distribution settings
Specifying latency distribution settings

If you are testing Mirosoft IPTV streams (selected MSTV on the Video setup screen),
the latency distribution settings are available.
To specify latency distribution settings
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the Latency Dist. tab.
3 Specify the following:
Setting Description
ICC Latency Distribution Specify the minimum and maximum amount of
(with Burst) time, in milliseconds, of an MSTV ICC request
message to the first unicast media packet.
ICC Latency Distribution Specify the minimum and maximum amount of
(without Burst) time, in milliseconds, of an MSTV ICC request
message to the first multicast media packet.
RUDP Latency Distribution Specify the minimum and maximum amount of
time, in milliseconds, of an MSTV RUDP
request message to the first unicast retry media
packet.
The latency distribution settings are specified.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 317
Specifying IGMP settings
Specifying IGMP settings

Before testing, you can set up your unit to emulate a downstream IGMP client, and then
actively request video streams from an IGMP router. To do so, you specify the version
of IGMP to use (Version 2 or 3), and the source IP address, subnet mask, and default
gateway for the unit. You can also optionally use DHCP to assign the IP address data
for you.
After specifying the IP address data, you can specify a user-defined source MAC
address for your unit, or you can use the factory assigned MAC address Finally, you
should specify the frame format used on the network to ensure that streams are not
dropped during the course of your test. You can optionally encapsulate the requests in
VLAN or Q-in-Q tagged Ethernet frames. If you do so, you must specify the associated
VLAN IDs and priorities.
If you are issuing the requests using IGMP Version 2, you can specify durations to wait
before retrying requests for a single stream or multiple streams.
IGMP WARNING:
Be certain to configure IGMP on your unit before using it to join streams. If you
change any setting on the IGMP setup screen after joining streams, the unit
will automatically leave all currently joined streams.
To specify your unit’s IGMP settings
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the IGMP tab.
3 Under Customize IGMP Requests, in Format, select IGMP v2 or IGMP v3.
4 If no reply is received to in response to a request, your unit will wait 120 seconds
before issuing another join request for a single stream and 50 milliseconds
between consecutive stream requests.
If you are using IGMP v3, your unit will wait for a response for the default intervals
before issuing another request; proceed to step 5.
If you selected IGMP v2, and you would like to change the default intervals, select
the appropriate field, and then specify the interval.
5 In Source IP Type, indicate whether you are using a static IP address, or whether
you want to use DHCP to assign the address for you. If you use a static address,
specify the Source IP address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway carried by the
requests.
6 Specify the Source MAC address type (Factory Default or User Defined). If you
select User Defined, specify the address.
7 In Ethernet Frame Type, indicate whether the requests are made using DIX or
802.3 frames. Be certain to enter the same format used by switches on the circuit
you are monitoring.

Page 318 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Joining streams
8 In Encapsulation, select None, VLAN, or Q-in-Q. If you select VLAN or Q-in-Q,

specify the required encapsulation settings. For details on the settings, refer to
“Configuring VLAN tagged traffic” on page 112 and “Configuring Q-in-Q traffic” on
page 113 of Chapter 5 “Ethernet and IP Testing”.
9 If you specified VLAN or Q-in-Q as your encapsulation setting, to ensure that
traffic passes through the filter for analysis, select the Ethernet Filter tab, and
then specify the same encapsulation settings.
The settings are specified. You are ready to join streams (see “Joining streams” on
page 319).
Joining streams
To join a particular stream (or streams), you press the Join Streams button on the Main
screen, and then either select the stream from the address book, or specify the address
(or addresses) for the stream that you want to join manually. Table 29 lists the number
of streams you can join when running each of the IP Video applications.
Table 29 Maximum number of streams analyzed

Application SPTS MPTS
Explorer 512 32
Analyzer 16 1
After your instrument discovers streams for analysis, you can only actively join streams
up to the maximum number supported. For example, if you are running an MPTS
Explorer application, and your instrument discovers 30 video streams, you can only
actively join and then analyze two additional streams.
Although you can add streams as you need them on the Join Streams screen, if you’d
like to name the stream or name a PMT PID for a specific program for a stream, you
must use the Address Book soft key provided on the Main screen. For details, see
“Populating the Address Book” on page 310.
To join streams
2 On the Main screen, select the Join Streams button.
The Join Streams screen appears.
3 For each of the streams you want to join, do one of the following:
If.... Do this ...

The stream appears in the Tap on the stream, and then press Select. The
Address Book stream appears under Selected Streams.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 319
Observing physical layer and link statistics
If.... Do this ...

You are using IGMP v2, Tap the Dest. IP field, and then use the keypad
and the stream does not to enter the destination IP address for the
appear in the Address Book stream.
You are using IGMP v3, If you want to request the stream using just the
and the stream does not destination IP address, accept the default source
appear in the Address Book IP address (0.0.0.0), and then enter the destina-
tion IP address.
If you want to request the stream using a source
IP address and destination IP address, tap each
field to enter the addresses.
The streams are selected, and appear under Selected Streams.

4 After selecting the streams, press Join Streams.
You are returned to the Main screen. Your unit issues IGMP requests to join the
streams, and messages concerning the status of the request appear in the
Message bar at the top of the screen.
5 Select the All Streams Complete, All Streams Transport or All Streams Video
result group.
Results for the requested streams appear.
If, after waiting for 5 seconds, streams do not appear, press Setup, and then verify that
you have specified the correct Ethernet Filter and IGMP settings (see “Specifying
Ethernet filter settings” on page 313 and “Specifying IGMP settings” on page 318).
Observing physical layer and link statistics

When monitoring video streams, you can quickly verify the state of the physical layer
and the link by observing the Physical/Link Quality button. If green, all results are OK
at these two layers.
If the button is yellow or red, you must investigate and resolve the problem before eval-
uating transport and video stream results.
To observe physical layer and link statistics
2 On the Main screen, press the Physical/Link Quality button.
The Physical/Link result group appears, showing aggregate statistics for the phys-
ical layer and the link. For example, the total number of Sync Loss Seconds or Rx
IGMP frames are provided in the Stats category.

Page 320 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Observing stream statistics
3 If you want to observe results associated with the auto-negotiation of the link, set
the result category to AutoNeg Status.
The physical layer and link statistics were displayed. For descriptions of each of the
results, refer to “CPRI/OBSAI results” on page 469 of Chapter 16 “Test Results”.
Observing stream statistics

You can quickly verify the state of monitored transport and video streams by observing
the colors of the Transport Streams Quality and Video Streams Quality buttons.
Pressing the buttons allows you to observe results at each layer in more detail.
To observe stream statistics
2 On the Main screen, press one of the buttons:
– Transport Streams Quality. The All Streams Transport result group
appears.
– Video Streams Quality. The All Streams Video result group appears.
3 Use the scroll bars to browse through the monitored streams. To customize your
results, you can optionally do the following:
– If you are monitoring a large number of streams, and you want to focus only
on errored streams, select Show only errored streams.
– If too many results appear for the streams, or if the results you expected to
see do not appear, select Columns..., and then clear the check box next to
the results you want to remove, or select the check box next to the results
you want to add to the display. Press Ok to return to the result display.
– If you are running an Explorer application, and there are streams that you
want to analyze in more detail, select the Analyze check box (to the left of the
stream results), and then press Launch Analyzer.
The SPTS or MPTS analyzer application is launched. If you are monitoring
streams on an optical circuit, turn the laser back on. If you originally joined the
streams using an IGMP request, re-join the streams (see “Joining streams” on
page 319).
A more detailed set of results appears for the analyzed streams.
You are observing stream statistics.
Leaving streams
If you actively joined streams using IGMP requests, when you are done testing, you
should leave them.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 321
Basic principles of IP Video testing
To leave a stream
1 On the Main screen, press Leave Streams ....

The Leave Streams dialog box appears, listing each of the streams you actively
joined.
2 Select each of the streams you want to leave, and then press Leave Streams.
You are returned to the Main screen. Your unit issues IGMP requests to leave the
streams, and messages concerning the status of the request appear in the Message
bar at the top of the screen.

This section presents some of the basic principles behind IP Video testing. For a
comprehensive discussion of IP Video troubleshooting, please contact Customer Care
for a copy of the Viavi Triple Play Service Deployment Guide.
IP Video network architecture

Figure 53 on page 296 illustrates a typical IP Video network. When troubleshooting IP
video service, the first step is to determine whether problems are originating from the
source of the video (indicating that there are content issues in the actual video payload),
or due to issues on the transport network.
Using the MSAM, you can identify both source and transport network issues. Symp-
toms of source content errors include:
• Errors that occur on a single stream, rather than on all monitored streams. You
can quickly identify errored streams, and filter your results to only show errored
streams in the All Streams Video or All Streams (Complete) result groups.
• Transport Error Indicators. The transport error indicator is a bit that is set in the
packet header by encoders if they detect corrupted content from the source. It
always indicates that there is an issue with the video content.
• Continuity Counter Errors. These errors are usually detected by a monitoring
system placed close to the video headend; therefore, they are typically corrected
before reaching a downstream test instrument. When running analyzer applica-
tions, you can verify that there are no continuity counter errors by observing
results in the All Streams Video or All Programs result groups.
• Continuous PCR (Program Clock Reference) jitter in the absence of excessive
packet jitter. This is typically due to transcoding problems in the encoder. When
running analyzer applications, you can observe PCR jitter measurements in the
All Streams Video result group; packet jitter measurements are available in the
All Streams Transport result group. If you are specifically comparing PCR jitter
to overall packet jitter, select the All Streams (Complete) result group.

Page 322 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
• PAT and PMT errors. Program specific information is comprised of tables of data
associated with the programs carried in each stream; in particular, the PAT and
PMT tables. This data must be present at regular intervals. PMT and PAT error
counts are counts of sections that don’t occur within the minimum required
interval. You can observe these counts in the All Streams Video result group.
Symptoms of transport network problems include:

• Simultaneous packet loss and packet jitter. This is typically evaluated using the
optional Media Delivery Index (MDI) analysis, which calculates the delay factor
(DF) and media loss rate (MLR). The delay factor indicates how long a data
stream must be buffered at its nominal rate to prevent packet loss. The media loss
rate is a count of lost or out-of-sequence packets over time. Packet loss and jitter
measurements are available in the All Streams Transport result group.
• Persistent packet loss and packet jitter. Packet loss and jitter measurements are
available in the All Streams Transport result group.
MPEG-2 transport streams

When monitoring transport streams using the Dual Module Carrier, Transport Module,
and MSAM, you can observe test results associated with transport stream header data
and errors. Figure 62 illustrates a packetized transport stream. The module provides
test results for each of the shaded header fields when running analyzer applications.
Figure 62 Packetized transport stream
Navigation Tip:
To observe results associated with MPEG-2 transport streams, run an analyzer
application, and then select the top Video Streams Quality button on the
Summary/Status display, or the All Streams Video result group.
The Transport Quality (IP, UDP, RTP) button and All Streams Transport result
group provide test results associated with the transport of packets over the IP
video network. They do not provide results associated with the actual MPEG-2
transport streams.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 323
Packetized elementary streams (PES)

ES (elementary streams) carry video and audio payloads, which are then packetized,
resulting in PES (packetized elementary streams). Each PES packet is then broken into
fixed length transport packets, which are carried inside MPEG-2 transport streams.
Signaling tables
Three signaling tables are carried in a dedicated set of elementary streams for each
transport stream. The tables, referred to as PSI (Program Specific Information), consist
of a description of the elementary streams that are required to build particular
programs, and descriptions of the programs.
Program Association Table (PAT)—Lists the program IDs of tables describing each indi-
vidual program.
Program Map Table (PMT)—Lists the set of PIDs associated with a particular program.
When running an analyzer application, you can determine the PMT ID for a particular
stream, and observe results associated with PAT and PMT errors.
IP Video encapsulation
MPEG-2 transport streams are typically encapsulated within RTP/UDP/IP or UDP/IP
streams.
RTP
When MPEG-2 transport streams are encapsulated in RTP/UDP/IP/Ethernet streams,
results are derived as follows:
• When running Explorer applications, packet jitter is measured using the average
IP inter-arrival time; packet loss is measured using the RTP sequence number.
• When running Analyzer applications, packet jitter and packet loss are measured
on the circuit using the RTP timestamps and sequence numbers, respectively.
• When running Analyzer applications, MDI DF results are measured using the
average IP inter-arrival time; MDI MLR results are measured using the RTP
sequence number. (MDI results are only available if you purchased the MDI
option.)
When configuring a test, you can establish thresholds for declaring RTP loss distance
and loss period errors. While running the test, you can easily determine whether trans-
port streams are encapsulated in an RTP payload by observing the RTP Present
result in the All Streams Transport result group.
Non-RTP
When MPEG-2 transport streams are encapsulated in UDP/IP/Ethernet streams,
results are derived as follows:

Page 324 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
• When running Explorer and Analyzer applications, packet jitter is measured using
the average IP inter-arrival time; packet loss is measured using the MPEG conti-
nuity counter.
• When running Analyzer applications, MDI DF results are measured using the
average IP inter-arrival time; MDI MLR results are measured using the MPEG
continuity counter.(MDI results are only available if you purchased the MDI
option.)
Packet loss measurements are provided in the All Streams Transport result group;
continuity counter errors are provided in the All Streams Video result group.
For descriptions of the IP Video test results, refer to Chapter 16 “Test Results”.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 325

Page 326 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
13
Chapter 13 Fibre Channel Testing
This chapter provides information on testing Fibre Channel services. Topics discussed
• “About Fibre Channel Testing” on page 328
• “Features and capabilities” on page 328
• “Configuring layer 1 tests” on page 331
• “Configuring layer 2 Fibre Channel tests” on page 332
• “Transmitting and analyzing layer 2 traffic” on page 339
• “Loopback testing” on page 340
• “Transmitting and analyzing patterns” on page 340
• “Measuring service disruption time” on page 341
• “Inserting errors” on page 342
• “Measuring round trip delay” on page 342
• “Monitoring layer 2 traffic” on page 343
• “Emission Lowering Protocol” on page 344
• “32G Fibre Channel Testing” on page 344

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 327
About Fibre Channel Testing
About Fibre Channel Testing

If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so, you can use it to provision Fibre
Channel service, verify end-to-end connectivity, and analyze link performance by simu-
lating different traffic conditions. Figure 63 illustrates the Main screen when running a
10 Gigabit Fibre Channel application.
Group Test Category

Battery
Message Bar
Quick Config
LED Panel
Actions Panel
Result Window Soft keys
Figure 63 Main screen, 10 Gigabit Fibre Channel application
This release of the instrument supports 1, 2, 4, 8,10 and 16 Gigabit Fibre Channel
testing. 32 Gigabit testing is supported on T-BERD/MTS 5800-100G only.

Features and capabilities of the Dual Module Carrier, Transport Module, CSAM,
MSAM, and T-BERD/MTS (5800v2 and 5800-100G) include the following when testing
Fibre Channel service:
• 1 Gigabit, 2 Gigabit, and 4 Gigabit testing—You can run Layer 1 BER,
Layer 2 Traffic, and Layer 2 Pattern tests over 1, 2, and 4 Gigabit Fibre Channel
circuits. Dual port testing is possible in Terminate and Monitor/Thru modes.
• 8 Gigabit testing—You can run Layer 2 Traffic tests in Terminate and Monitor/
Thru modes, and Layer 2 Pattern tests in Terminate mode over 8 Gigabit Fibre
Channel circuits. For the MSAM v2 assembly you need an XFP. All other plat-
forms use an SFP+ port.
• 10 Gigabit testing—You can run Layer 1 BER and Layer 2 Traffic tests over 10
Gigabit Fibre Channel circuits in Terminate and Monitor/Thru modes. For the
MSAM v2 assembly you need an XFP, all other platforms use an SFP+ port.

Page 328 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
• 16 Gigabit testing—You can run Layer 1 BER and Layer 2 Traffic tests over 16
Gigabit Fibre Channel circuits in Terminate and Monitor/Thru modes using an
SFP+ port in a T-BERD/MTS 5800 v2 platform.
• 32 Gigabit testing (for T-BERD/MTS 5800-100G only)—You can run only Layer 2
traffic tests over 32Gb Fibre Channel circuits in Terminate and Monitor/Thru
modes using an SFP28 optic module. RS-FEC is supported for 32 Gigabit testing.
• Fibre Channel login and flow control — The instrument supports Exchange of Link
Parameters (ELP) through distance extension equipment when turning up a
circuit, allowing you to login to another module at the far end. Before logging into
another module, you can specify the number of buffer credits to verify that flow
control is functioning properly.
• Frame verification — You can verify that the size and format of Fibre Channel
frames conform to ANSI X3T11 requirements, ensuring that network elements
can support reliable communications.
• BER testing — You can verify circuit performance by sending BERT patterns over
switched (layer 2) and unswitched (layer 1) networks.
• Scrambling (For 8 Gigabit only) — You can select to scramble all words trans-
mitted between Start of Frame (SOF) and the End of Frame (EOF) delimiters in
Terminate applications and descramble received traffic in Monitor/Through appli-
cations.
• Emissions Lowering Protocol (ELP) (For 8 Gigabit only) — You can configure ELP
by specifying the ordered set to be transmitted during the Link INIT and for fill
words. The three configurable modes are OFF (IDLE/IDLE), ON/Enabled IDLE/
ARBff and ON Enabled ARBff/ARBff.
• Explicit Fabric/N-Port login; fabric topology —You can use your instrument to login
to an N_Port, and then verify that it can establish an operating environment with a
fabric and communicate with other destination N Ports by indicating that the
service you are testing uses a fabric topology. When testing on a fabric topology,
you specify source and destination N Port and Node names for the login process.
• Explicit Fabric/N-Port login; point-to-point topology —You can use your instrument
to login to an N_Port, and then verify that it can communicate with other destina-
tion N Ports by indicating that the network you are testing uses a point-to-point
topology. When testing on a point-to-point topology, you specify a source N Port
and Node name, and a destination and source ID for the login process.

When you configure your instrument for testing, graphical displays of Fibre Channel
frames are provided on the setup tabs for the application you selected. You can specify
frame characteristics for transmitted and filtered traffic by selecting the corresponding
field on the graphic, and then entering the value for transmitted or filtered traffic.
Colored and white fields can be edited; fields in gray can not be modified.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 329
Figure 64 illustrates the Frame Details for a layer 2 traffic test.
Figure 64 Frame Details
For details on specifying frame characteristics, see “Specifying Fibre Channel frame
settings” on page 336 and “Specifying Fibre Channel filter settings” on page 337.
Fibre Channel test applications

This release supports the applications listed in Table 30 when testing 1 Gigabit,
2 Gigabit, 4 Gigabit, 8 Gigabit and 10 Gigabit Fibre Channel circuits.
Table 30 Fibre Channel applications
Signal/Rate Application Test Mode1

1Gig, 2Gig, and 4Gig Layer 1 BERT Terminate
Monitor/Through
Layer 2 Patterns Terminate
Monitor/Through
8Gig Layer 2 Patterns Terminate
Monitor/Through
10Gig, 16Gig Layer 1 BERT Terminate
Monitor/Through
Monitor/Through
32Gig Layer 2 Traffic Terminate
Monitor/Through
1. You must use two Fibre Channel SFPs or XFP s (8Gig and 10Gig) to test in monitor/through.

Page 330 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Configuring layer 1 tests
Configuring layer 1 tests

When testing Fibre Channel service, you can generate and receive layer 1 test patterns
utilizing 1, 2, 4, 10 and 16 Gigabit Fibre Channel-capable PIMs or ports. You can also
monitor and analyze Layer 2 Traffic and Patterns utilizing 1, 2, 4, 8, 10 and 16 Gigabit
Fibre Channel-capable PIMs or ports.
When running a Layer 1 BERT test on a Fibre Channel circuit, you must actively start
transmission of the test pattern by pressing the Start BERT Pattern action button.
NOTE:
Refer to IEEE 802.3ae-2002, Sections 49.2.8, 49.2.12, and 52.9.1 for detailed
descriptions of each pattern available when testing 10 Gigabit and 16 Gigabit
Fibre Channel circuits. For 1 Gigabit, 2 Gigabit, and 4 Gigabit MF, LF, and HF Fibre
Channel patterns, refer to the IEEE 802.3, 2000 Edition, Annex 26A. For 1 Gigabit
RDPAT, JTPAT, and SNPAT patterns, refer to the NCITS TR-25-1999 specifications.
BER testing layer 1

Use the layer 1 BERT terminate application to generate and receive layer 1 test
patterns.
To BER test layer 1
1 Using the Test Menu or Quick Launch screen, select the layer 1 BERT terminate
test application for the interface you are testing (refer to Table 30 on page 330 for
a list of applications).
2 To specify the BER pattern, select the Setup soft key, select the Interface tab, and
do the following:
a If you want the unit to use the Tx BERT pattern as the Rx BERT pattern, in
BERT Rx<=Tx, select On; otherwise, select Off.
b Select a Tx Pattern.
c If the Rx=Tx setting is Off, select an Rx Pattern.
d If you are using SFPs and are testing in Monitor/Through mode, select the
tab corresponding to the second SFP jack, and then repeat step a through
step c.
4 On the Main screen, select the Laser button.
5 Verify that the green Signal Present and Pattern Sync LEDs are illuminated.
– Summary
– Error Stats
Layer 1 BER testing is complete.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 331
Configuring layer 2 Fibre Channel tests
When running the L1 BERT application, your LEDs may indicate that you have L1
Pattern Sync without word sync. The word sync status is indicated on your unit using
a red Sync Acquired LED (if word sync was obtained, then lost), or an extinguished
LED (if word sync was never obtained since starting your test). This is usually due to a
temporary loss of signal or word sync when receiving an L1 pattern that does not
contain Fibre Channel compliant link characters (for example, IDLE). To resolve this,
stop transmitting the L1 pattern momentarily to allow the receiver to regain sync, and
then begin transmitting the pattern again.
If this occurs, be certain to determine why the signal or word sync was lost temporarily.
Monitoring layer 1 BER

Use the layer 1 BERT monitor application to analyze the received signal.
NOTE:
To pass the signal through to the unit’s transmitter, you must turn the laser on
using the button on the Main screen.
To monitor layer 1 BERT
1 Using the Test Menu or Quick Launch screen, select the layer 1 BERT monitor/
through test application for the interface you are testing (refer to Table 30 on
page 330 for a list of applications).
2 To specify the BER pattern for the traffic you are monitoring, select the Setup soft
key, select the Pattern tab, and then select the Rx Pattern.
– Summary
– Error Stats
You are monitoring layer 1 traffic carrying the BERT pattern that you specified.

Using the instrument, you can transmit, monitor, and analyze layer 2 Fibre Channel
traffic. Step-by-step instructions are provided in this section for the following:
• “Specifying Fibre Channel frame settings” on page 336
• “Specifying Fibre Channel filter settings” on page 337

Page 332 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018

Before you transmit layer 2 traffic, you can specify interface settings which:
• Turn flow control on, and specify the login method (Implicit, Explicit E-Port, or
Explicit Fabric/N-Port) and the number of transmit or receive buffer to buffer
credits to communicate to the module’s link partner during the login process.
When you turn flow control on, the module:
– Generates an R_RDY message for each frame received.
– Provides a count of received R_RDY messages.
• Specify the connector to use for the test (if more than one transceiver is inserted
in the PIMs).
• Specify a unit identifier to identify all traffic originating from the module. It uses its
default source ID when doing E-Port login and its user-specified port name when
logging into a fabric.
To specify interface settings
select the layer 2 terminate test application for the interface you are testing (refer
2 Select the Setup soft key, then select the Connector sub-tab to specify which
optical connector you are using for the transceiver.
3 Select the Physical Layer sub-tab, and then specify the settings required for the
type of login and, if applicable, topology that you specify:
Table 31 Fibre Channel Physical Layer settings
Explicit (Fabric/N-Port)
Explicit Point-to-
Setting Values Implicit Fabric
(E-Port) Point
Topology
Topology
FlowControl – Select On if you X X X X
want the instrument
to operate as a
credit-based trans-
mitter.
– Select Off to gener-
ate frames without
crediting.
NOTE: You must turn
flow control ON to
specify Login settings.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 333
Table 31 Fibre Channel Physical Layer settings (Continued)
Explicit Point-to-
(E-Port) Point
Topology
Topology
Login – To verify that both X X X X
(FlowControl is devices use flow
On) control and no login
is required, select
Implicit, and then
specify the Tx Buffer
to Buffer credits.
– To discover another
instrument or
device’s settings,
select Explicit (E-
Port), and then
specify the Rx Buf-
fer to Buffer credits.
– To login to an N-Port
on a circuit using a
Point-to-Point or
Fabric topology,
select Explicit (Fab-
ric/N-Port), and
then specify the Rx
Buffer to Buffer
Credits.
Tx Buffer to If you specified an X N/A N/A N/A
Buffer Credits Implicit login, select
(Near-end B-B) this field, and then type
the number of buffer
credits the far end
device can support.
This number should
match the receive buf-
fer size for the far end
device.
Rx Buffer to Buf- If you specified an N/A X X X
fer Credits Explicit (E-Port) or
(Far-end B-B) Explicit (Fabric/
N-Port) login, select
this field, and then type
the number of buffer
credits the instrument
will advertise that it can
support during the ELP
login exchange with the
far end device.

Page 334 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Table 31 Fibre Channel Physical Layer settings (Continued)
Explicit Point-to-
(E-Port) Point
Topology
Topology
Topology – To login to an N/A N/A X X
N Port, and then
verify that it can
communicate with
other destination N
Ports, select
Point-to-Point.
– To login to an
N_Port, and then
verify that it can
establish an operat-
ing environment with
a fabric and commu-
nicate with other
destination N Ports,
select Fabric.
Source N Port Specify the source port N/A N/A X X
Name name carried in the
login request.
Source Node Specify the source N/A N/A X X
Name node name carried in
the login request.
Destination N Specify the destination N/A N/A N/A X
Port Name port name carried in
the login request.
Destination Specify the destination N/A N/A N/A X
Node Name node name carried in
the login request.
Destination ID Specify the destination N/A N/A X N/A
ID carried in the login
request.
Source ID Specify the source ID N/A N/A X N/A
carried in the login
request.
NOTE:
When you test flow control on a Fibre Channel circuit, specify the same num-
ber of buffer credits for both the near-end and far-end instruments. If you spec-
ify a different number of credits, or if you specify a very low number, you may
not achieve desired bandwidth utilization.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 335
4 Optional. If you want to transmit an ID for all loop up and loop down frames origi-
nating from the module, select the Unit Identifier field, and then type the ID. The
default ID is Viavi 6000.
The interface settings are specified. You can verify the login status and observe test
results associated with the login process by displaying the Fibre Channel Login Status
result category (see “Login Status results” on page 538).
Specifying Fibre Channel frame settings

Before you transmit layer 2 traffic, you can specify the frame characteristics of the
traffic, such as the frame length, and the type of payload carried in the frames. You can
also optionally specify the destination, source, sequence, originator exchange, and
responder IDs for transmitted frames.
NOTE:
If you change the frame length when the unit is already transmitting traffic, the
unit resets your test results, but some residual frames of the old length may be
counted if they are already in the traffic stream.
To specify Fibre Channel settings
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the Fibre Channel tab.
3 In Tx Payload, select one of the following:
– Acterna. To transmit frames that contain a sequence number and time stamp
so that lost frames and round trip delay can be calculated, select Acterna.
If you are measuring round trip delay on a 10 Gigabit circuit, in RTD Setup,
count lost packets. For details, see “Measuring round trip delay” on page 342.
– BERT. To transmit frames with payloads filled with the BERT pattern you
specify, select BERT, and then select a pattern.
Various pseudo-random and Fixed patterns are available. The Pseudo-
random patterns continue from one frame into the next. The fixed patterns
restart each frame, such that the frame will always start with the beginning of
the pattern.

Page 336 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
If you set the BERT Pattern to User Defined, in the User Pattern field, specify
the 32 bit fixed pattern that will be repeated in the payload.
NOTE:
The Transport Module and Multiple Services Application Module transmit the
bytes in user defined patterns from left to right; the FST-2802 transmits the
bytes in user defined patterns right to left.
For example, a user defined hexadecimal pattern of 12345678 populates the
frame as: 12345678.Using the same hexadecimal pattern, the FST-2802 would
populate the frame as 78563412.
4 In Frame Length, select one of the listed frame lengths, or select User Defined,
and then enter a specific frame length in the USER Frame Length field.
5 Under Frame Channel Details, specify the following settings for the transmitted
frames:
Settings Values
D_ID Type the destination ID of the port the frames will be transmit-
ted to using a 3 byte format.
S_ID Type the source ID for the port transmitting the frames using a
3 byte format.
SEQ_ID Type the sequence ID for the frames using a 1 byte hexadeci-
mal format.
OX_ID Type the originator exchange ID for the frames using a 2 byte
hexadecimal format.
RX_ID Type the responder ID for the frames using a 2 byte hexadeci-
mal format.
The frame settings are specified.
Specifying Fibre Channel filter settings

Before transmitting layer 2 traffic, you can specify settings that indicate the expected
received payload and determine which frames will pass through the receive filter and
be counted in the test result categories for filtered layer 2 traffic. The settings may also
impact other results.
For example, the incoming frames must pass the filter to be analyzed for a BERT
pattern. Local loopback is also only performed on frames that pass the filter.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 337
To specify Fibre Channel filter settings
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the Fibre Channel Filter tab.
3 If you want to filter received traffic for a specific destination or source ID, or using
routing control, data type, or sequence control criteria, under Frame Channel
Details, select the corresponding field, enable the filter, by selecting Yes, and then
specify the filter value:
Settings Values
R_CTL Enter the routing control for filtered frames.
D_ID Enter the destination ID for filtered frames.
S_ID Enter the source ID for filtered frames.
Data Type Enter the data type for filtered frames.
SEQ_CNT Enter the sequence ID for filtered frames.
4 If you want to filter traffic using payload criteria, select Data on the Fibre Channel
graphic, and then do the following:
– In Payload Analysis, select On.
– To use the Tx BERT pattern as the Rx BERT pattern, in Rx<=Tx, select On;
otherwise, select Off.
– If you are analyzing BERT data, and you turned Rx=Tx Off, specify a BERT
pattern.
The filter settings are specified.

Before transmitting layer 2 traffic, you can specify the type of traffic load the unit will
transmit (Constant, Bursty, or Ramp). The settings vary depending on the type of load.
When configuring a load, you can specify the bandwidth of the transmitted traffic in 1%
increments.
For details on the various loads, refer to “Specifying traffic load settings” on page 123
of Chapter 5 “Ethernet and IP Testing”. Before configuring a traffic load for a Fibre

Page 338 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Channel test, simply select a layer 2 Fibre Channel application (instead of an Ethernet
application).
NOTE:
When testing from 1Gig, 2Gig, or 4 Gig Fibre Channel interfaces, if you config-
ure the instrument to transmit a constant, bursty, or ramped load of 100%, it is
designed to transmit slightly less than 100% traffic (99.90%) as a safeguard
against overrunning network elements that can not support 100%. When test-
ing from an 8Gig, 10Gig or 16Gig Fibre Channel interface, the module trans-
mits traffic at 99.996% of the line rate.
If you are certain the elements can support true 100% traffic, select the Allow
flooding check box when configuring the Constant load.

Before you transmit layer 2 traffic, you must specify:
• Frame characteristics of the transmitted traffic (see “Specifying Fibre Channel
frame settings” on page 336).
• Frame characteristics used to filter received traffic (see “Specifying Fibre Channel
filter settings” on page 337).
After you specify the layer 2 settings, you are ready to transmit and analyze the layer 2
traffic.
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the Interface tab to specify settings
that control the Fibre Channel interface (see “Specifying interface settings” on
page 333).
3 Select the Fibre Channel tab to specify settings that define the frame characteris-
tics of the transmitted traffic (see “Specifying Fibre Channel frame settings” on
page 336).
4 Select the Fibre Channel Filter tab to specify settings that filter the received
traffic based on specified frame characteristics (see “Specifying Fibre Channel

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 339
Loopback testing
NOTE:
The Gap/Idle time parameter that rounds to 0.001% in Ethernet applications
rounds to the nearest 1% in FibreChannel applications.

10 Verify that the green Signal Present, Sync Acquired, Link Active, and Frame
filter statistics and counts, error statistics, and layer 2 BERT statistics.
You have analyzed layer 2 traffic.
Loopback testing
Loopback testing allows you to transmit traffic from one Viavi test set, and then loop the
traffic back through a second unit on the far end of a circuit. For details, refer to
Transmitting and analyzing patterns

Using the instrument, you can stress the jitter and noise characteristics of 1 Gigabit,
2 Gigabit, 4 Gigabit, and 8 Gigabit Fibre Channel components and systems by trans-
mitting continuous random test patterns (CRPAT), continuous jitter test patterns
(CJPAT), and the compliant supply noise pattern (CSPAT). These patterns are always
transmitted automatically when you turn the laser on.
To transmit a pattern
select the layer 2 pattern test application for the interface you are testing (refer to
2 Select the Setup soft key. The Setup tab appears.

Page 340 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
3 Select a pattern:
To… Select…
Emulate a worst case scenario for deterministic jitter by transmit- CRPAT
ting frames with a broad spectral content.
Stress the timing margins in the received eye by exposing the data CJPAT
sampling circuits to large systematic phase jumps.
Emulate a worse case scenario for power supply noise within net- CSPAT
work transceivers.

7 Verify that the green SIGNAL LED is illuminated.
8 Select Start Pattern to transmit the pattern over the circuit.
– Summary
– Pattern Stats
You have transmitted layer 2 patterns.

You can use two instruments in an end-to-end configuration to measure the service
disruption time resulting from a switch in service to a protect line.
To measure service disruption time
1 On the near-end and far end units, if you haven’t already done so, use the Test
Menu or Quick Launch screen to select the layer 2 terminate test application for
the interface you are testing (refer to Table 30 on page 330 for a list of applica-
tions).
2 On the near-end unit, select the Setup soft key, and then select the Traffic tab to
configure a constant load of traffic (see “Transmitting a constant load” on
page 124).
3 If you need to specify other settings for the test on the near-end unit, select the
appropriate tab; otherwise, press Results to return to the Main screen.
4 Connect the units to the circuit.
illuminated.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 341
Inserting errors
7 On the near-end unit, do the following:

a Start traffic.
b Clear the service disruption time by selecting the Reset Service Disruption
Test button.
8 Initiate the switch to the protect line.
9 Observe the service disruption result in the Fibre Channel L2 Link Stats category.
Service disruption time is measured.
Inserting errors
Buttons on the Main screen allow you to insert errors into the traffic stream. If you turn
on a particular error insertion rate, the error insertion continues even after you restart a
test or change the test configuration.
To insert errors
1 Select one of the following error types.

– Code
– CRC
– Bit (BERT payload only)
2 Do the following:
– Specify the insert type (Single, Burst, or Rate).
– If you specified Burst, enter the quantity of errors in the burst, and then select
OK.
– If you specified Rate, select the rate.
3 Press the Error Insert button.
Error insertion starts, and the associated button turns yellow. To stop error insertion,
press the button again. Error insertion stops, and the associated button turns gray.
Measuring round trip delay

When you perform loopback tests, you can measure round trip delay by transmitting an
Acterna payload. Frames with an Acterna payload carry time stamps, enabling the
instrument to calculate the delay.
NOTE:
If you perform an end-to-end Fibre Channel test, invalid delay results appear.
You must use a loopback configuration when measuring round trip delay. For
details, refer to Chapter 11 “Loop Back Testing”.

Page 342 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
To measure round trip delay
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the Fibre Channel tab.
3 Under Tx Payload, select an Acterna payload. The Acterna payload transmits
frames with a time stamp and sequence number. You must select an Acterna
payload to measure round trip delay.
4 In Frame Length, select one of the listed frame lengths, or select User Defined,
and then enter a specific frame length in the USER Frame Length field.
illuminated.
10 At a minimum, observe the delay test results in the Fibre Channel L2 Link Stats
category.
Round trip delay is measured.

Use the layer 2 traffic monitor application whenever you want to analyze the received
signal. When you configure your test, you can specify settings that indicate the
expected received payload and determine which frames will pass through the receive
filter and be counted in the test result categories for filtered layer 2 traffic. The settings
may also impact other results.
NOTE:
You must turn the laser on using the associated button to pass the signal
through the unit’s transmitter.
To monitor layer 2 traffic
select the layer 2 monitor/through test application for the interface you are testing
(refer to Table 30 on page 330 for a list of applications).
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the Fibre Channel Filter tab, and then
specify the filter settings for the traffic you want to monitor (see “Specifying Fibre
Channel filter settings” on page 337).

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 343
Emission Lowering Protocol

illuminated.
filter statistics and counts, error statistics, and layer 2 BERT statistics test results.
Layer 2 traffic is monitored.
Emission Lowering Protocol

Use the Emission Lowering Protocol (ELP) configuration settings to change the
Ordered Sets that will be transmitted during the Link INIT and as fill words after the link
goes into the active state.
Depending on the hardware in the network, interoperability may be improved by the use
of a different configuration.
ELP configuration
1 Select ELP configuration from the Physical Layer subtab of the Interface Tab in
the Interface Quick Config settings area.
2 Select Mode. Then select the combination of Link INIT and Fill Words desired.
a ELP OFF/Disabled - IDLE link INIT and IDLE fill words.
b ELP ON/Enabled IDLE/ARBff - IDLE Link INIT and ARBff fill words.
c ELP ON//Enabled ARBff/ARBff- ARBff Link INIT and ARBff fill word.
32G Fibre Channel Testing
32Gig RS-FEC Testing

32Gig RS-FEC Testing is conducted similarly to 100GigE RS-FEC Testing (see “About
the 25GigE and 100GigE RS-FEC testing” on page 196), except that is operates on
Layer 2 only and does not support Code Violation, nor Loss of Alignment Marker
Payload Sequence (LOAMP) alarms.
To specify RS-FEC settings
1 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the RS-FEC tab.

Page 344 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
2 In Incoming FEC, select one of the following:

– Find and fix errors (the default)
– Find but don't fix
– Ignore
3 Set Disable HI SER Alarm to Off (the default), or On. When Off, the test instru-
ment will declare HI SER Alarms when they are detected; when On, the test
instrument will ignore HI SER Alarms.
You have specified the RS-FEC settings.
Alarm insertion:
If you intend to insert an alarm, select the Alarms tab, then select HI SER (the default
alarm).
If you intend to insert an error, select the Errors tab, then select FEC-Uncorrectable
(the default error), or FEC-correctable. Specify the Insertion Style (Single or Contin-
uous).
TTS and Fabric Login

In order to connect to fibre channel fabrics at 32GFC, it is necessary to complete the
TTS speed negotiation process.
In a 32GFC Terminate application, do the following:

1 TTS is available for Fabric Login Type and Fabric Topology only. Go to the Setup
page. Under the physical Layer Tab set Flow Control to On. Then set Login to
Explicit (Fabric/N-Port). TTS will not be available unless the Topology and Login
are set to Fabric.
2 On the Results screen when Laser is enabled and TTS process will begin auto-
matically. On completion application would be able to get sync and link to start the
fabric login and send traffic. Once the TTS process is complete the TTS button is
made non executable.
3 Auto TTS is done every time the TTS is lost or the unit sees the RSFEC-LOCWS
alarm by default. To turn off the Auto TTS setup, go to Setup-> Physical Layer Tab
-> Auto-start TTS when laser turned on" and set this to No. In this case user
needs to manually turn the TTS button ON.
4 If for some reason TTS is not successful and the TTS process times out, the user
can do manual TTS by going to Results page under the Actions Tab. The TTS
button is there if needed. Also check the connection or cables if there is any other
reason for the failure not due to TTS.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 345

Page 346 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
14
Chapter 14 Automated Testing
This chapter provides information on using the automated scripting programs that are
available, depending on the how the unit is equipped and configured. These programs
include TrueSAM, J-QuickCheck, Automated RFC 2544, SAMComplete, Fiber
Channel, FTP Throughput, HTTP Throughput, TCP Throughput, and the proprietary
TrueSpeed sequence of tests that includes a Walk the Window test.
The following topics are discussed in this chapter:

• “About the TrueSAM function” on page 348
• “J-QuickCheck” on page 369
• “Launching a single automated test” on page 364
• “Automated RFC 2544 (RFC 5180) and Fibre Channel tests” on page 368
• “About the SAMComplete test” on page 394
• “Automated VLAN tests” on page 410
• “Automated FTP Throughput tests” on page 411
• “Automated HTTP Throughput tests” on page 413
• “Automated TCP Throughput tests” on page 414
• “TrueSpeed Test” on page 415
• “TrueSpeed VNF Test” on page 428
• “Testing using TAM automation” on page 440
• “Saving automated test report data” on page 445

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 347
About the TrueSAM function

To assist in the turnup process of a single service, the TrueSAM function provides a
simple and complete method to run multiple tests on the system without having to
reconfigure each time a test is run. After answering a few prompts, the tests will run
automatically, without input from the user, and store the test results in a report.
TrueSAM contains a number of different predefined testing options that are readily
available and allows selection of the following automated tests:
• J-Quick Check
• RFC 2544 or SAMComplete
• J-Proof
• TrueSpeed
NOTE: Depending upon how your unit is optioned and configured, your unit may not
have all of these options available.
To assist the user in the configuration process, TrueSAM has implemented a Guide Me
feature to step through the necessary configuration sequence. This allows technicians
with less experience to be able to effectively run the tests for the environment in which
they are operating.
To simplify the interface, TrueSAM now provides the complete, interactively linked map
of the configuration process as an optional display for the more advanced user. This
navigational aid is especially useful when reconfiguring a saved profile.
After configuring the test settings, the setup profile can be saved for future use.
TrueSAM operates with the following constraints

– TrueSAM does not support one-way delay (OWD) measurements.
– TrueSAM is not available for the CSAM.
The following topics are discussed in this section:

• “Setting up TrueSAM” on page 348
• “Loading TrueSAM Profiles” on page 362
• “Running TrueSAM” on page 363
Setting up TrueSAM
Although TrueSAM is a scripting file that runs tests automatically, the appropriate tests
(for the circuit being tested) must be selected, and the communications parameters
defined, to have the equipment and links between them tested.
NOTE:
If it desired that the tests included in this feature be run end-to-end (both local
and remote unit running tests) both units will have to be configured and
optioned to do so.

Page 348 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
TrueSAM Initiation and communication configuration
1 From the Test menu, select the interface, and then TrueSAM Terminate.
2 The Profile Selection page appears.
Figure 65 TrueSAM Profile Entry Method Selection
To load configuration settings set from a previously saved file, select Go (green
arrow) to the right of Load Configuration from a Profile. Go to “Loading TrueSAM
Profiles” on page 362.
To configure all options yourself, select Go (green arrow) to the right of Start a
New Profile. Go to step 3.
3 The Operating Layer Select page appears.
Select Go (green arrow) after selecting the layer on which your service operates -
either Layer 2 or Layer 3.
4 After initializing, the TrueSAM main page appears.
Figure 66 TrueSAM Main Page
This page is used to initiate some of the major actions in the application.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 349
Actions that are not valid at any given time will be grayed out. For example, when
the test is first initiated, the Run TrueSAM button will be grayed out because the
test has not yet been configured.
To view the component parts of these major actions, the Show Steps checkbox
can be selected. The configuration steps are displayed and can be used to
access these component steps by selecting them (see Figure 67). Configuration
steps not applicable for the chosen sequence of tests will be grayed out.
Figure 67 TrueSAM Main Page with Steps shown
From this page you can initiate the following actions:

– Configure TrueSAM. To define all the parameters for the test at this time,
select Configure TrueSAM. For more information on configuring the
TrueSAM tests, go to step 5.
– Run TrueSAM. To initiate a configured test script, select Run TrueSAM. For
more information on running the TrueSAM tests, go to “Running TrueSAM”
on page 363
– View TrueSAM Report. To review a detailed report of the results obtained
from running the test, select View TrueSAM Report. For more information on
viewing the TrueSAM reports, go to “Running TrueSAM” on page 363.
– Guided Configuration. To follow a guided path, accessing every applicable
page in the configuration and testing sequence, the Guide Me (green arrow)
may be selected at the bottom of the window. Continue selecting the green
arrow at the bottom of every page until the necessary configuration selections
have been made and the entire configuration and testing sequence is
completed.
5 A status screen will momentarily appear with the current action being imple-
mented highlighted in the list. This list will appears at various times while using the
TrueSAM application to inform the user of the current action and to indicate to the
user actions that are valid. Valid actions will be preceded by a green check mark.
6 The Select Tests screen appears.

Page 350 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
The following tests are available to be included in the TrueSAM test.

– J-QuickCheck - automatically selected for all users to verify the ability to run
other tests.
– Enhanced RFC 2544 - not able to be run simultaneous with SAMComplete.
For more information about this test, see “Automated RFC 2544 (RFC 5180)
and Fibre Channel tests” on page 368.
– SAMComplete - not able to be run simultaneous with Enhanced RFC 2544.
For more information about this test, see “About the SAMComplete test” on
page 394.
– J-Proof - used to verify Layer 2 transparency (layer 2 services only). For more
information about this test, see “Using J-Proof to verify layer 2 transparency”
on page 136.
– TrueSpeed - used to determine Throughput and Performance of the circuit.
For more information about this test, see “TrueSpeed Test” on page 415.
If a test is not applicable for the current configuration it is grayed out.
Select the tests to be included in the TrueSAM test, then select Next (the green
arrow).
Configuring communications channels
1 The Connect Local Settings parameters screen appears.

Specify the communication parameters for the local unit.
a Choose whether the Source MAC address is to be User Defined or should
the Factory Default be accepted.
b For Layer 3 services, select the L3-Source Type - Static or DHCP.
c Enter the Source IP, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway to be used for this
test.
Select Next (the green arrow).
2 The Connect Channel parameters screen appears.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 351
Specify the channel communication parameters for the remote unit.

– Specify the Encapsulation Method - None, VLAN, or Q-in-Q.
– Specify the FrameType - DIX or 802.3.
– If you selected VLAN, specify the VLAN ID.
– Specify the Interface connector, if multiple interfaces are available. Select
Details to access the Interface parameters and change frequency offset or
flow control settings.
– Specify the destination IP of the remote unit on the network or select Help me
find the Destination IP which will scan the subnet for connected IP
addresses. After highlighting the desired unit in the list of available units
found, select Use selected.
NOTE:
If you are testing L3 services and are using DHCP to assign an IP address for
the remote unit, communication issues may occur when using TrueSAM. This
is because the local end will switch tests on the far end as necessary in order
to run the selected tests. This test switching may cause the far end to acquire
a new IP address, in which case the near end would not be able to communi-
cate with it anymore. As an alternative, you could try using longer DHCP
leases on the far end (so the IP address will be maintained for longer), or use
static IP addresses.
To verify that the address entered is accessible, select Ping, After address has
been confirmed, select Connect to Channel to establish communications with
the remote unit. After the physical link has been established, the button turns
yellow.
NOTE:
Upon connection to the remote unit, if there is some form of incompatibility, a
message will appear on the screen and make a suggestion to alleviate the sit-
uation, e.g., upgrade the software on one of the units. For assistance in this
process see “Synchronizing to the StrataSync Server” in the Getting Started
Manual shipped with this unit.
Select the right-facing green arrow at the bottom of the screen.
Configuring RFC 2544 within TrueSAM
The next number of screens are used to configure the RFC2544 test if selected in
step 6 “TrueSAM Initiation and communication configuration” on page 349.
1 The Symmetry screen appears.
a Select the Throughput type:

Page 352 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Symmetric – used where only one set of throughput parameters are defined
because upstream and downstream transmission is identical as the signal is
being looped back to the source or transmitted both downstream and
upstream.
Figure 68 Symmetric Connection - Loopback Option
Figure 69 Symmetric Connection- Bidirectional Option

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 353
Asymmetric – used where upstream and downstream parameters in a bi-direc-

tional test are individually specified and may be different.
Figure 70 Asymmetric Connection Option
NOTE:
ARP must be enabled on both units if running a bi-directional TrueSAM test in
L3 or Wirespeed applications.
Unidirectional – test is only conducted in one direction. May be either

upstream or downstream.
Figure 71 Unidirectional Connection Options

Page 354 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
b Depending upon the chosen Throughput Type, select Loop back or One-Way
Transmission and Direction, if needed:
– Loop back - only available with Symmetric throughput type as the signal is
being looped back to the source, thus identical parameters are required.
– One-Way Transmission - tests are only conducted in a single direction. For
Unidirectional Throughput type direction, Upstream or Downstream must be
specified.
Note that the diagram on the right of the interface page indicates the type of
testing to be done, and indicates if a second Viavi test instrument is required
at the remote location.
c Select Next (the green arrow).
2 If layer 3 testing has been selected, the Local Network Setting screen appears to
define the IP prioritization of the Local unit. If layer 2 testing is being done, go to
step 4.
a Enter the TOS value or
b Select the DSCP value.
c To further configure the local network settings select the Set Time to Live
link at the end of the IP prioritization pane. Set the number of hops constraint
and then select the Back button (left green arrow).
d Select Next (the green arrow).
3 The Remote Network Setting screen appears to define the IP prioritization of the
remote unit.
a Enter the TOS value or
b Select the DSCP value
c To further configure the remote network setting select the Set Time to Live
link at the end of the IP prioritization pane. Set the number of hops constraint
and then select the Back button (left green arrow).
4 The configuration template screen appears allowing the user to select from a
number of pre-configured templates to define the parameters to test different
types of networks.
a If a configuration template is desired, select the Yes radio button.
b Select the desired template from those available in the drop-down box.
c When the selected parameters have been applied, a notice is given. Select
OK to return to configuration template screen.
5 The Select Tests Window appears to allow the selection of the desired tests to be
run. If a configuration template has been applied certain selections will be
predefined but all options may be changed, if desired.
a Select or confirm the tests to be run.
b Select Next (the green arrow).

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 355
6 The Utilization window appears. Specify the bandwidth parameters:

– To choose whether the bandwidth units used for the tests are chosen from
Layer 1 or Layer 2, make the selection in the Bandwidth Unit drop-down
box. Then enter the Max Bandwidth (in Mbps) in the entry box (Upstream
and/or Downstream for non-symmetric test).
– To further refine the Utilization configuration, select Set advanced Utilization
settings and then select Allow True 100% Traffic, if desired. Select Back to
return to previous screen.
– Select Next (the green arrow).
7 The Frame Lengths screen appears to allow the definition or confirmation of the
frame or packet length parameters,
a Select whether the length type of Frames or Packets.
b Select the number of frame or packet lengths to be tested by checking the
appropriate number of boxes and then entering a value for each checked
Upstream and/or Downstream (depending on the symmetry selection) Frame
or Packet length to be tested.
8 If selected, the Throughput Test screen appears to allow selection or confirmation
of the throughput parameters.
a Select or confirm whether the RFC 2544 Standard or the JDSU Enhanced
zeroing-in process is to be used.
b Confirm or define the Measurement Accuracy from the drop-down box
values.
9 If selected, the Frame Loss Test screen appears to allow configuration of the
parameters necessary for the Frame Loss Test.
a Select the desired Test Procedure from these options:
RFC 2544. Transmits traffic at the maximum bandwidth, and then decreases
the bandwidth for each trial by the granularity you specify. The test ends after
two successive trials with no frames lost. This procedure also requires speci-
fication of Bandwidth Granularity in Mbps.
Top Down. Transmits traffic at the maximum bandwidth specified in the Test
Range setting, and then decreases the bandwidth for each trial by the
Number of Steps specified until the minimum bandwidth is reached for the
specified Test Range.
Bottom Up. Transmits traffic at the minimum bandwidth specified in the Test
Range setting, and then increases the bandwidth for each trial by the
Number of Steps specified until the maximum bandwidth is reached for the
b To further refine the frame loss configuration, select Set advanced Frame
Loss measurement settings and then choose to Measure Packet Jitter by
selecting the checkbox, if desired. Select Back to return to previous screen.

Page 356 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
10 If selected, the Back to Back Test screen appears to define the parameters for the
Back to Back test
a Set the Max Burst Duration (Upstream and/or Downstream for non-
symmetric test) of each test and Burst Granularity in Frames (L3).
b To further refine the Back to Back test, select Set advanced Back to Back
settings and then choose the Ignore Pause Frames checkbox. Select Back
to return to previous screen.
11 If selected, the Burst Test screen appears to allow the confirmation or configura-
tion of the Burst Test parameters
a Select the Burst Test Type - either Committed Burst Size (CBS), CBS
Policing (MEF 34) or Burst Hunt.
b Define the CBS (in kB) (Upstream and/or Downstream for non-symmetric
test), CBS Duration and Burst Sizes (kB) (Upstream and/or Downstream for
non-symmetric test) depending on which Burst test type is chosen.
c To further refine the Burst Test, select Set advanced CBS settings and then
select the Ignore Pause Frames checkbox, if desired. Select Back to return
to previous screen.
12 The Test Durations screen appears for specification of whether all tests are to
have common durations or are individual tests to have their durations specified
separately.
a To choose common durations, select or confirm the No radio button. If indi-
vidual setting are desired, select or confirm the Yes radio button.
b Specify or confirm the Durations and the Number of Trials for all tests.
13 The Test Threshold screen appears to allow setting of the pas/fail threshold for
the selected tests.
a Place a check mark in the box in front of the each test where a pass/fail
threshold is desired.
b Enter or confirm the threshold value in the entry box after the test name.
All RFC 2544 tests have been configured.

• If doing layer 2 testing and J-Proof has been selected, got to “Configuring J-Proof
test within TrueSAM” on page 358.
• If TrueSpeed test has been selected, go to “Configuring TrueSpeed tests within
TrueSAM” on page 359.
• If TrueSpeed test has not been selected, go to “Saving TrueSAM profile” on
page 361.
Configuring SAMComplete test within TrueSAM
The configuration of the SAMComplete test initiated from within TrueSAM is nearly
identical to that for the standalone SAMComplete test. The configuration of the

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 357
TrueSAM version can be accomplished by starting on step 2 of “Configuring SAMCom-

plete test settings” page 397 with one exception - the local and remote connection
settings (step 3 and step 4) will have already been configured by J-QuickCheck. Skip
to step 5 and continue.
After SAMComplete configuration step 9has been completed, return to this point in the
TrueSAM configuration procedure.
• If doing layer 2 testing and J-Proof has been selected, got to “Configuring J-Proof
test within TrueSAM” on page 358.
• If TrueSpeed test has not been selected, go to “Saving TrueSAM profile” on
page 361.
Configuring J-Proof test within TrueSAM
If layer 2 testing is being done and the J-Proof test has been selected, the J-Proof
frames screen appears. By default, a single test frame appears in the frame list. You
can specify a name for the frame, the control protocol format, the number of frames of
this type to transmit (the count), the frame rate, and the time-out period.
1 To modify the settings for the transmitted frame:
a If you want to name the frame, select Test Frame in the Name column and
then enter a name of up to twenty characters on the pop-up keypad or the
remote keyboard. Select OK to close the keypad and store the name.
b In the Protocol column, select the control protocol format for the frame from
the drop-down options.
c In the Count column, specify the number of frames you want to transmit.
d In Rate (fr/sec) column, enter the rate at which you want to transmit the
frames.
e In Time-out (msec) column, enter the number of milliseconds the instrument
will wait to receive the looped back frame before stopping transmission of
frames.
2 If you want to transmit control frames for different protocols, do one of the
following:
– Select the Add Frame soft key. Specify the settings listed in step 1.Repeat
this step for each type of frame desired. Select Remove frame to remove the
highlighted frame from the list
or
– Use the Quick Config soft key populate the frame list with a group or all
protocol control frame types. See “Using Quick Config to configure test
frames” on page 138 for more information.
3 Select Next (the green arrow).
The J-Proof test within TrueSAM is configured.

Page 358 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018

If TrueSpeed test has not been selected, go to “Saving TrueSAM profile” on page 361.
Configuring TrueSpeed tests within TrueSAM
The next two screens are used to configure the TrueSpeed test within TrueSAM, if
selected in step 6 of “TrueSAM Initiation and communication configuration” on
page 349.
1 The first screen allows for the setting or confirmation of how the throughput is to
be configured.
a If you want to obtain throughput parameters from the RFC 2544 test, select
Set Bottleneck Bandwidth to match RFC 2544 Max Bandwidth when
loading TrueSpeed configuration.
Figure 72 TrueSAM TrueSpeed throughput definition
NOTE:
Use the Set Bottleneck Bandwidth to match RFC 2544 Max Bandwidth set-
ting when the bandwidth is L1/L2 Mbps or L1/L2 Kbps.
b If throughput parameters are not obtained from the RFC 2544 test, select
either My downstream and upstream throughputs are the same or My
downstream and upstream throughputs are different.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 359
2 The next screen provides for the configuration of the parameters pertaining to the
Committed Information Rate (CIR) and TCP Threshold.
Figure 73 TrueSpeed Symmetrical Turnup Configuration
Figure 74 TrueSpeed Asymmetrical Turnup Configuration
a Specify or confirm whether to Run the Walk the Windows Test by selecting
the checkbox.
b Specify or confirm whether to Automatically find MTU size by selecting the
checkbox. If not checked, enter the desired MTU Size in bytes.

Page 360 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
c Enter or confirm the IP Prioritization for both the local and remote end, if
necessary. Select TOS and enter the value or select DSCP and enter its
value.
d Enter or confirm the CIR in Mbps. This will be unavailable for entry if Set
Bottleneck Bandwidth to match RFC 2544 Max Bandwidth when loading
TrueSpeed configuration was checked on previous screen.
e To further configure the remote network setting select the Advanced button.
Define the Port Connection, TCP Pass %, the MTU Upper Limit (in bytes)
and whether Multiple Connections are desired. When these have been
defined, select Back (left green) arrow.
f After all parameters have been specified, select Next (the green arrow).
Saving TrueSAM profile
The Save Profile window appears.

– If no Profile is to be saved at his time, select Next (the green arrow). Go to
step 5.
– If it is desired that the configuration be saved to memory (disk or USB),
specify the filename.
2 To save somewhere other than the default location, press the Select button after
the filename to define the directory where it is to be stored.
3 If it is desired that subsequent users be restricted from being able modify this
profile (may be modified if saved under different filename), check the box Save as
read-only.
4 To save the file to memory, select the Save Profiles button. Then select the Next
(the green arrow).
NOTE:
Any TrueSAM profile saved from BERT software prior to v.17 is not compatible
with the subsequent versions of the application. These profiles must be re-con-
figured and saved again to remove the incompatible settings.
Attempts to configure a unit with a TrueSAM application in BERT software
older than v.17 with profiles saved on a current unit (transferred on USB stick,
over network, etc.) will also be unsuccessful.
5 The TrueSAM Edit/Run screen appears.

Go to step 4 of“TrueSAM Initiation and communication configuration” on
page 349.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 361
Loading TrueSAM Profiles

Test profiles that configure all parameters of TrueSAM may have been previously saved
into the memory. These tests can be loaded and run without any changes or may be
used as templates where any number of parameters may be modified after loading.
NOTE:
Any TrueSAM profile saved from BERT software prior to v.17 is not compatible
with the subsequent versions of the application. These profiles must be re-con-
figured and saved again to remove the incompatible settings.
Attempts to configure a unit with a TrueSAM application in BERT software older
than v.17 with profiles saved on a current unit (transferred on USB stick, over
network, etc.) will also be unsuccessful.
If you load a profile that was configured on another unit, and that profile speci-
fied including a logo in the test report, make sure that the .png, .jpg, or .jpeg is
in the following folder on your unit:
/acterna/user/disk/bert/images
Loading profile from memory
The Profile selection window appears.
Figure 75 Saved Profiles window
The filenames of the saved profiles will be listed in the center of the window.
Do the following:

Page 362 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
1 The default display will be of saved profiles for the currently selected interface. To
select a configuration saved from another interface, select from the drop-down list
accessible by clicking on the up-down arrow at the right end of the File Type field
displayed under the files list window.
2 To manage files on the displayed list, select the desired file(s) and then select the
Delete or Delete All buttons to remove them from the memory.
3 To load a profile, select one from the list whose configuration is to be loaded.
4 Select the Load Profile button to load the configuration for all tests. After profile
has successfully loaded select, OK and then select Next (the green arrow).
The TrueSAM profile has been loaded.
5 The TrueSAM Edit/Run screen appears.
– To change the configuration, go to step 4 of “TrueSAM Initiation and commu-
nication configuration” on page 350.
– To run the test, go to “Running TrueSAM” on page 363
Running TrueSAM
After specifying settings or loading a profile, you are ready to run the test.
To run TrueSAM
1 Select Run tests.

2 The report info screen will display.
This screen allows the user to enter information about the test which will be added
to the report that is automatically generated as the test is run.
This information includes:
– Customer Name
– Technician ID
– Test Location
– Work Order
– Comments/Notes
– Custom Logo (from memory)
3 After all the desired data is entered into the entry boxes, select Next (the green
arrow).
4 A number of screens will appear providing data about how the test is configured. If
everything appears as desired, select Next (right-pointing green arrow) until it
displays the Run Tests button on the bottom of the screen. Select Run Tests.
5 As the test are running, an overall result view, including screen shots of the
various tests, is available and shows real-time status of the tests as they execute.
The test displays a green (Passed) or Red (Failed) banner at the top of the screen
when the test is completed.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 363
Launching a single automated test
When all test are completed, the report is automatically generated and saved to
memory.
Select the Next (the green arrow).
The TrueSAM Edit/Run/View screen appears. Go to step 4 in “TrueSAM Initiation and

communication configuration” on page 349.

The TrueSAM application is ideal for service turn-ups. But, if the service is already func-
tioning and a specific problem needs to be examined, there are automated tests that
can be run individually.
There are two ways to launch automated test scripts from the Test Select application
and the automated script in which it is to be run.
• Directly from the Select Test menu, for example by choosing Ethernet, then the
line rate 1GigE Optical, then the automated test RFC 2544, then the layer L2
Traffic and then the port P1 Terminate.
• From within a base application, such as “1GigE>Layer 2 Traffic> Term”, specifying
the automated test to be run by a soft key on the right side of the interface, or by a
button inside the Toolkit which is opened by the Toolkit softkey. Note that all toolkit
functions are also provided in the Tools menu (depending on your model,
accessed from the menu bar along the top of the interface, or from the Tools icon
in the lower-left corner.)
In most cases, the relevant configuration settings are available within the automated
test, but if the base application configuration must be changed before running the auto-
mated test, use option 2 above to launch the base application, then make the neces-
sary configuration changes, then launch the automated test. You may also use the
‘Load Test…’ menu choice to configure the base application from a Saved Test file
before starting the automated test.

Page 364 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
To launch from the Select Test menu
1 From the Select Test application tree, select the technology and interface desired.
All the applications available for the current configuration of the unit will be
displayed.
Figure 76 Select Test application tree
2 Select the automated script from the top levels of the tree, then the specific test
desired. The automated script is launched.
To launch for later use
1 Select the technology and interface desired. All the applications available for the
current configuration of the unit will be displayed. (See Figure 76 above).
2 Select the base application (from the lower part of the application tree) and then
initiate the desired automated script using the on-screen soft key on the right side
of the interface.
The automated script will be launched, ready to be configured.
NOTE:
The Quick Launch window displays previously run and/or saved configura-
tions of applications. Automated scripts launched simultaneously with base
applications are fully identified with the script.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 365
To launch from a running application
select the appropriate application. Be certain to select Terminate or Dual Termi-
nate mode.
2 Connect the modules on the near-end and the far end to the circuit.
3 If you are testing an optical interface, on both units, select the Laser button to turn
the laser on.
4 On both modules, verify that the green Signal Present, Sync Acquired, and Link
Active LEDs are illuminated.
5 If you are running the test with layer 3 traffic, and you enabled ARP, observe the
Message Log to verify that ARP successfully determined the destination MAC
address.
6 On the Main screen, do one of the following:
– If you are running the RFC 2544 test, press the Enhanced RFC 2544 Test
soft key, and proceed to “Configuring the Enhanced RFC 2544 or Fibre
Channel tests” on page 379.
– If you are running the automated Fibre Channel test, press the FC Test or
Enhanced FC Test soft key, and proceed to “Configuring the Enhanced
RFC 2544 or Fibre Channel tests” on page 379.
– If you are running the automated multiple Ethernet service verification
SAMComplete test, press the SAMComplete soft key, and proceed to “About
the SAMComplete test” on page 394.
– If you are running the FTP Throughput or HTTP Throughput automated test,
press the press the Toolkit soft key, and then select the test you want to run
from the Select Tool menu. Proceed to “Throughput test” on page 372 or
“Automated HTTP Throughput tests” on page 413.
– If you are running the TCP Throughput automated test, press the Toolkit soft
key, and then select TCP Throughput. Proceed to “Running TCP Host or
Wirespeed applications” on page 245 of Chapter 9 “TCP/UDP Testing”.
The automated test is launched.
Automated Test Availability

Table 32 lists the available automated tests for each application.
Table 32 Automated Tests
Automated Test Application1

QuickCheck Ethernet
– Layer 2 Traffic
– Layer 3 Traffic

Page 366 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Table 32 Automated Tests (Continued)
Automated Test Application1

Enhanced RFC 2544 Test Ethernet
– Layer 2 Traffic
– Layer 3 Traffic
– Layer 4 Traffic
FC Test Fibre Channel
– Layer 2 Traffic
SAMComplete ( Ethernet
– Layer 2 Traffic
– Layer 2 Multiple Streams
– Layer 3 Traffic
– Layer 3 Multiple Streams
– Layer 4 TCP Wirespeed
VLAN Ethernet
– Layer 2 Traffic
– Layer 3 Traffic
– Layer 4 Traffic
FTP Throughput Ethernet
– Layer 3 Traffic
– Layer 4 Traffic
HTTP Throughput Ethernet
– Layer 3 Traffic
– Layer 4 Traffic
TCP Throughput Ethernet
– Layer 2 Traffic
– Layer 3 Traffic
– Layer 4 Traffic
RFC 6349 TrueSpeed Test Ethernet
– Layer 4 TCP Wirespeed
1. The RFC tests are not available when running NextGen or GFP applications. RFC tests are available when test-
ing high-speed OTN circuits at OTU3 and OTU4 rates using the 40G/100G High-Speed Transport Module.
When running a script in Dual Terminate mode, you can only launch a script for one
port. You can not run scripts from both ports.
ALERT: CORRUPTED RESULTS
Pressing Restart during a test could corrupt the results. To ensure accurate
script results, wait for the script to complete before pressing Restart.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 367
Automated RFC 2544 (RFC 5180) and Fibre Channel tests

If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so, you can use it to run tests that
automate the procedures recommended in RFC 2544 for layer 2 Ethernet, layer 3 IP,
or layer 4 TCP/UDP. You can also run a test that uses similar parameters for layer 2
Fibre Channel. The tests prompt you to select key parameters for throughput, round trip
delay, frame loss rate, and back to back frame tests, run the tests, and then automati-
cally generates a text file of results for the tests and a log file detailing the progress of
the script. A PDF file is also generated which includes the test results in tabular and
graphical formats.

• “Features and capabilities” on page 368
• “About loopbacks” on page 369
• “J-QuickCheck” on page 369
• “Asymmetrical tests” on page 372
• “Throughput test” on page 372
• “Latency (RTD) test” on page 374
• “Packet Jitter test” on page 375
• “About the System Recovery test” on page 376
• “Frame Loss test” on page 376
• “Back to Back Frames test (Burst test)” on page 377
• “Optimizing the test time” on page 377
• “Importing and exporting RFC config files” on page 378
• “Configuring the Enhanced RFC 2544 or Fibre Channel tests” on page 379
• “Specifying the external test settings” on page 379
• “Setting Connection parameters” on page 381
• “Test selection” on page 384
• “Running Enhanced RFC 2544 and FC tests” on page 388

The instrument supports the following features when running the RFC 2544 tests:
• Support for all Ethernet line rates and Ethernet clients of 11.1G OTN rate layer 2
traffic.
• J-QuickCheck—Before running the Enhanced RFC 2544 test, you can run the
J-QuickCheck application to verify that the local and remote instruments are
configured properly to bring up the link, verify auto negotiation of the link, estab-
lish the link, establish a loop back, and then verify that the link can support 100%
traffic utilization. There is also an extended Layer 2 traffic test useful for quick
turn-ups. For details, see “Asymmetrical tests” on page 372.
• Graphical output of key results. When running the tests, frame loss, throughput,
and latency (round trip delay) results are now displayed graphically in their own
result categories.

Page 368 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
• Status bar. A status bar is also provided that lets you know how far the test has
progressed, and provides an estimate of the time remaining to run the test.
• Report output. You can save the test results to a user-named file in PDF, XML, or
TXT format.
• Enhanced test. You can run the Enhanced RFC 2544 test, and indicate whether
you want to run a symmetrical test, or an upstream, downstream, or combined
asymmetrical test.
• Asymmetric RFC 2544 (not applicable with 40G/100G High Speed Transport
Module). You can run the Enhanced RFC 2544 test in asymmetric mode in an
end-to-end configuration. This is useful for testing circuits carrying traffic at
different upstream and downstream line rates. The test is initiated by a master
tester (on the near end). The master tester then automatically configures the
slave tester on the far end.
• TAM (Test Access Management) automation—If your instrument is configured
and optioned to do so, you can now use it to remotely log into and provision
network elements (for example, switches and routers) from a Mobility Switching
Center (MSC) by issuing TL1 commands. For details, see “Testing using TAM
automation” on page 440.
• System recovery testing per RFC 2544 (not applicable with 40G/100G High
Speed Transport Module). You can use the instrument to determine the amount of
time it takes for a network element to recover from a state where it is dropping
frames.
• Exporting and importing of configurations for the Enhanced RFC test.
• The Enhanced RFC tests supports both round-trip delay (RTD) and one-way
delay (OWD). If your instrument is optioned and configured for one-way delay,
you can choose whether to run a Latency (RTD) or Latency (OWD) test.
• TCP Wirespeed test. This is a 5-step test to analyze TCP throughput for 64
connections.
About loopbacks
During the automated tests, the instrument checks for a loopback. It could be one of the
following types:
Active loop — the destination has responded to a loop command.
Hard loop — the source and destination addresses are the same for both the returned
frames and the outgoing frames.
Permanent loop — the source and destination addresses are switched in the returned
frames. Permanent loop is not available L2 or in L3 when ARP is disabled.
J-QuickCheck
The J-QuickCheck application is used to verify that the local and remote instruments
are configured properly to bring up the link, verify auto negotiation of the link, establish

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 369
the link, establish a loop back, and then verify that the link can support 100% traffic utili-
zation.
There are a number of ways in which the J-QuickCheck test may be initiated:
• launch QuickCheck directly from the Test menu (If you are testing 10/100/1000M
Electrical, 1GE Optical, 100M Optical, 10GE LAN, 40GE, 100GE. Layer 2 Single
Stream TERM or Layer 3 Single Stream TERM, you can launch directly from the
Test menu, For example: Tests>10GE LAN>QuickCheck.)
• relaunch Quick-Check from an underlying L2 or L3 traffic application via the
Quick-Check button on the right side of the screen.
• the original simple verification that the local and remote instruments are config-
ured properly to bring up the link accessed through the Quick Check button in the
tool kit.
• an extended Layer 2 Turnup test
• an automatic initiation of the full RFC 2544 test upon completion of the J-Quick-
Check test link verification utilizing maximum throughput rates determined by the
J-QuickCheck test
These options can be run in combination or separately.
NOTE:
After specifying settings for QuickCheck in the standalone QuickCheck test
(from the Test menu), you may return to the main app if desired, but you should
not change any settings or you must change them back before re-entering
QuickCheck. Running the test with settings different than originally set may
result in some unexpected errors or failures. To restore test defaults, select
restore test to defaults or manually restore any settings that were changed.
Understanding the J-QuickCheck stages

At each of the three stages of the J-QuickCheck application, the instrument automati-
cally performs certain actions. Some actions must occur before others can take place.
For example, the local port must be up before a loopback can take place.
Local Port
If application for an optical circuit indicates that the local port is down, (indicated by a
red Not Connected button), verify that the laser is ON on both near and far end instru-
ments. If the application is for an electrical circuit, verify that frame sync and link LEDs
are illuminated on both instruments.
Auto-negotiation
Auto-negotiation can not take place until the physical link is established (indicated by a
green UP button for the local port). If the local port is UP, during the auto-negotiation
stage, the instrument does the following:

Page 370 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
• If the near end instrument determines that the far end instrument advertises that it
supports auto-negotiation, the near end instrument automatically turns auto-nego-
tiation ON, and indicates the negotiated speed and duplex capabilities.
• If you are running the application on an electrical circuit, and the near end instru-
ment determines that the far end instrument does not support auto-negotiation,
the near end instrument automatically turns auto-negotiation OFF, sets the duplex
setting to FULL, and the line rate to the detected speed. A warning also appears
informing you that it’s possible the far end port is in half duplex mode.
• If you are running the application on an optical circuit, and the near end instru-
ment determines that the far end instrument does not support auto-negotiation,
the near end instrument automatically turns the laser OFF, turns auto-negotiation
OFF, then turns the laser back ON. It then indicates the speed and duplex
settings.
If at any time during this phase the link or frame synchronization is lost, the instrument
will alert you, and will then restart the application automatically.
Remote Loop (traffic test mode)
A remote loop up can not take place until the physical link is established and auto-nego-
tiation succeeds (is either ON or OFF). The instrument sends a loop down, followed by
a loop up. If the second attempt fails:
• If running a Layer 2 test (in traffic test mode):
The instrument checks for a hardware loop. If a hardware loop is not found, it then
checks for a permanent loop. If a permanent loop is not found, the instrument
declares “No Loop Found”.
• If running a Layer 3 or 4 test:
The instrument checks for a permanent loop. If a permanent loop is not found and
if ARP is Disabled, the instrument checks for a hardware loop. If a hardware loop
is not found, the instrument declares “No Loop Found”. If ARP is Enabled, the
instrument declares “No Loop Found”. If all three attempts fail, verify that the
correct destination address or port is specified in your application settings, then
run the J-QuickCheck application again.
Remote Loop (LBM/LBR test mode)
A remote loop up can not take place until the physical link is established and auto-nego-
tiation succeeds (is either ON or OFF). After link and negotiation have been satisfied,
the unit attempts a LBM/LBR loop. If established, the Load Test and Throughput will
run. If a LBM/LBR loop is not established, the Remote Loop and Basic Load Test indi-
cators will turn red indicating a failed test.
Basic Load Test
The load test can not take place until a remote loop is established or detected. If a loop
is in place, the near end instrument automatically transmits a full load of traffic (100%
at the selected line rate) using the frame or packet size that was specified for the appli-
cation. The instrument then calculates the average layer 2 bandwidth utilization, and
displays it as a percentage.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 371
Test at configured Max Bandwidth

With this option selected, the RFC 2544 test will automatically be run upon completion
of the J-QuickCheck test using the Max Bandwidth setting pre-configured on the Setup-
All Tests tab.
This option may both be selected simultaneously with the “Layer 2 Quick Test”.
Layer 2 Quick Test

The Layer 2 Quick Test extended test option operates in the symmetric, loopback mode
only thereby eliminating the number of configuration options. The test can be config-
ured to set the length of time the test is to be run and to configure the CIR in the RFC
2544 settings with a percentage of the Throughput value detected. The default value
will be 100% (i.e. CIR will be 100% of the JQuickCheck Throughput).
This option may both be selected simultaneously with “Test at configured Max Band-
width”.
Asymmetrical tests
When testing upstream and downstream circuits at different line rates, you must run an
asymmetric RFC test. Two Viavi Ethernet test instruments must be used at each end of
the circuit. One test instrument operates as the master instrument, and executes the
RFC test. The other instrument operates as a slave instrument, and is controlled
remotely by the master instrument.
Throughput test
The throughput test is used to determine the highest possible bandwidth at which no
frames are lost.
Viavi zeroing-in method

The Viavi zeroing-in method functions as follows:
Attempting Phase
• The test starts transmitting traffic at the Maximum Bandwidth, then waits 3
seconds.
• The test does a restart, then waits 5 seconds.
• The test calculates the average layer 2 bandwidth utilized (L2 Avg. % Util).
• If the Bandwidth Accuracy is 1% and the L2 Avg. % Util is less than 99.98%, the
throughput is the integer value of the measurement. Otherwise, throughput is
100%.

Page 372 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
• If the Bandwidth Accuracy is .1% or .01%:

– For 1Gig, the test increases the load 3% over the L2 Avg. % Util measured
above.
– For 10 Mb, the test increases the load 30% over the L2 Avg. % Util measured
above.
– For 100 Mb, the test increases the load 3% over the L2 Avg. % Util measured
above, or to 100%, if the above increase would exceed 100%.
• If the Bandwidth Accuracy is .1% or .01%:
– Start traffic at the rate calculated above
– Wait 3 seconds
– Do a test restart
– Wait 5 seconds
– Get the L2 Avg. % Util
For .1% accuracy, Throughput is calculated as:

• The (integer value of L2 Avg.) % Util * 10 divided by 10
For .01% accuracy, Throughput is calculated as:

• The (integer value of L2 Avg.) % Util * 100 divided by 100
NOTE:
The minimal throughput values for mismatched (asynchronous) rates are 100k
to 10G. Anything below 100k (such as 10k) that comes into a 10G unit will not
be detected because it is below the threshold granularity supported. (0.001%
of 10G = 100k)
Verifying Phase
The load is set to the calculated throughput value, and transmitted for the Throughput
Duration time. If the frame loss tolerance is exceeded, instructions are provided for
testing the link manually for intermittent problems, and the test is aborted.
Throughput test results

The following results are reported for every frame length selected.
Cfg Length (Mbps)
The bit rate for transmitted traffic (expressed in Mbps) at which no frames were lost for
a particular frame length.
Measured Rate (Mbps)
The measured bit rate (expressed in Mbps) at which no frames were lost for a particular
frame length.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 373
Measured Rate (%)
The bit rate (expressed as a percentage of the line rate) at which no frames were lost
for a particular frame length.
Measured Rate (frms/sec)
The peak frame rate (expressed in frames per second) at which no frames were lost for
a particular frame length.
Pause Detected
Indicates whether or not pause frames were detected at the point where no frames
were lost for a particular frame length.
These results are also reported when you run the Latency and Packet Jitter tests.
NOTE:
If J-Quick Check is not performed, the report may show loop type achieved.
Pass/fail threshold
You can configure the test to optionally indicate whether the Throughput test passed or
failed. To do so, you specify the bandwidth for the Throughput Pass Threshold. If the
highest rate at which frames are not lost is equal to or exceeds the threshold, the test
indicates that the test passed for each transmitted frame length. If it falls below the
threshold, the test indicates that the test failed.
Latency (RTD) test

If the Latency test is a desired part of the test, the Throughput test must also be run.
About the latency test

The Latency test transmits traffic at a specified percentage of the bandwidth at which
no frames were lost (as determined during the Throughput test) for each frame length
you selected. The average delay is then measured after transmitting traffic for each
frame length for the period of time that you specified as the Latency (RTD) Trial Dura-
tion.The test measures delay for each trial (specified as the Number of Latency (RTD)
Trials), and each measurement is then added to a running total. After all of the trials are
complete, the running total is divided by the number of trials to come up with a total trial
average.
If the Throughput test reached the lowest bandwidth limit without ever successfully
receiving all transmitted frames (in other words, it lost frames), the average delay will

Page 374 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
also be unavailable. Delay measured under 4 microseconds is averaged as 4 micro-

seconds. Unavailable measurements are not included in the total trial average.
NOTE:
When running the Latency test in asymmetric mode, after looping up the instru-
ment on the far end, the instrument performs a symmetric throughput test.
Because the instrument loops up the far end instrument, the upstream and
downstream latency measurements in asymmetric mode are actually the same
measurement. All other tests are performed end-to-end (no loopback is per-
formed).
Pass/fail threshold
You can configure the test to optionally indicate whether the Latency test passed or
failed. To do so, you specify the Latency (RTD) Pass Threshold. If the total trial average
for measured average delay is equal to or less than the threshold, the test indicates that
the test passed for each transmitted frame length. If it exceeds the threshold, the test
indicates that the test failed.
Packet Jitter test

If you intend to run the Packet Jitter test as part of the test, you must also run the
Throughput test.
About the Packet Jitter test

The Packet Jitter test transmits traffic at the maximum bandwidth at which no frames
were lost (determined using the Throughput test) for each frame length you selected.
The packet jitter is then measured after transmitting traffic for each frame length for the
period of time that you specified as the Packet Jitter Trial Duration.
The test measures the average packet jitter and maximum packet jitter for each trial
(specified as the Number of Packet Jitter Trials), and then each measurement is added
to a running total. After all of the trials are complete, the running total is divided by the
number of trials to come up with a total trial average measurement.
If the Throughput test reached the lowest bandwidth limit without ever successfully
receiving all transmitted frames (in other words, it lost frames), the packet jitter
measurements will also be unavailable. Unavailable average or maximum average
measurements are not included in the total trial average.
Packet Jitter test results

Packet Jitter results are presented statistically.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 375
Pass/fail threshold
You can configure the test to optionally indicate whether the Packet Jitter test passed
or failed. To do so, you specify the Packet Jitter Pass Threshold. For each frame length
you selected, the test compares the average packet jitter for the trial to the value that
you specified as the threshold. If the average packet jitter is less than or equal to that
specified for the threshold, the test indicates that the test passed. If it exceeds the
threshold, the test indicates that the test failed.
About the System Recovery test

If you intend to run the System Recovery test, the Enhanced RFC 2544 mode must be
Symmetric, and you must also select and run the Throughput test.
About the System Recovery test

The instrument uses the Throughput test to determine the maximum bandwidth at
which no frames were lost, then the System Recovery test transmits traffic at 110% of
the bandwidth (referred to as the “overload rate”) to force the receiving network element
to drop frames for each frame length you selected. The instrument transmits the over-
load rate for at least 60 seconds, then reduces the transmission rate to 50 percent of
the overload rate (referred to as the “recovery rate”). The instrument then measures the
time it takes for the network element to reach a state where it is no longer dropping
frames.
If the Throughput test reaches the lowest bandwidth limit without ever successfully
receiving all transmitted frames (in other words, it lost frames), the System Recovery
test will not run.
For optimum results, the system recovery test should be run for at least 30 seconds.
System Recovery test results

System Recovery results are presented statistically and graphically.
Frame Loss test

The Frame Lost test measures bandwidth until no frames are lost.
About the frame loss test

For each frame length you select, beginning at the maximum test bandwidth you spec-
ified, the instrument transmits traffic for the amount of time you specified as the Frame
Loss Trial Duration. If frames are lost during that time frame, the instrument reduces the
transmitted bandwidth by the amount you specified as the Frame Loss Bandwidth
Granularity, and then transmits the traffic at the reduced bandwidth.

Page 376 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
The test decreases the transmitted bandwidth accordingly until either no frames are lost
during the duration specified, or the transmitted bandwidth reaches the lowest band-
width limit (specified as the Frame Loss Bandwidth Granularity).
If the instrument succeeds in transmitting frames without losing any at a particular

bandwidth, it then reduces the bandwidth one more time (by the granularity amount). If
no frames are lost, the test stops. If frames are lost, the instrument starts the entire
process over again until two successive trials occur without losing frames.
Frame Loss test results

Frame Loss results are presented in a tabular format, illustrating the frame loss rate
versus the percent of the bandwidth.
Back to Back Frames test (Burst test)

This test determines the maximum back to back burst size supported by the network
under test. Upstream and downstream back to back (burst size) tests can now be run
concurrently (rather than sequentially).
About the Back to Back Frames test

Using the frame length and other settings such as the frame type and encapsulation,
the instrument calculates the burst size required to transmit back to back frames for the
duration that you specify as the Back to Back Max Trial Time. It then transmits the burst
of frames over the circuit. If the number of frames transmitted carrying an Acterna
payload does not equal the number of received frames carrying an Acterna payload
(indicating that frames were lost during the transmission), the instrument goes through
the stages described for the Throughput test (see “Throughput test” on page 372) until
no frames are lost, or until the number of frames per burst from the last successful burst
exceeds the Back to Back Frames Granularity by a 1 frame burst.
The test counts the number of frames received for each trial (specified as the Number
of Back to Back Frame Trials), and each count is added to a running total. After all of
the trials are complete, the running total is divided by the number of trials to come up
with a total trial average count. The test then uses this count to calculate the average
amount of time a burst can be transmitted before a frame is dropped.
Back to Back test results

Back to Back test results are presented in a table.
Optimizing the test time

When you configure an Enhanced RFC test in symmetric mode, you can optimize the
time it takes to run the test time by doing the following:

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 377
• Ensure that the duration time for the Throughput, Packet Jitter, and Latency
(RTD) tests is the same.
• Ensure that the number of trials for the Latency (RTD) and Packet Jitter tests is
“1” (one trial only).
If you configure the test in this manner, all three tests (Throughput, Latency, and
Packet Jitter) will be run simultaneously. If the duration times vary, or if you indicate that
you want to run more than one trial, each test will be executed in succession. As a
result, the test will take longer to complete.
When running the Enhanced RFC 2544 test in asymmetric mode, the Latency test is
run after the Throughput test, because it needs the symmetric Throughput measure-
ment before it can measure latency.
In addition to the duration time and number of trial settings, you can control the band-
width transmitted during the course of the test.
• If you select Top Down, the test transmits traffic at the maximum bandwidth spec-
ified, and then decreases the bandwidth for each trial by the granularity you
specify until you reach the minimum bandwidth specified.
• If you select Bottom Up, the test transmits traffic at the minimum bandwidth spec-
ified, and then increases the bandwidth for each trial by the granularity you
specify until you reach the maximum bandwidth specified.
Importing and exporting RFC config files

The instrument allows importing and exporting of configuration files. This allows consis-
tent testing configurations which yield more reliable test results. You will need a USB
stick for transferring the files.
To export a RFC configuration
1 Verify that you have a USB stick inserted into the instrument.
2 After specifying the settings for your Enhanced RFC test, save the configuration.
3 Exit the test.
4 From the Tools menu, select Export to USB, and then Saved Test Config.
5 Locate the *.expert_rfc file or files you wish to export. Click on the file to
select it (click again to clear it).
– If exporting multiple files and you wish to zip them before exporting, click the
Zip selected files as box and specify a file name for the resulting .tar file,
and then click Zip &Export.
– If exporting files without zipping or are exporting a single file, Click Export.
The files are copied to the USB stick.

Page 378 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
To import a RFC configuration
1 Verify that you have a USB stick inserted into the instrument.
2 From the Tools menu, select Import from USB, and then Saved Test Config.
3 Locate the file or files you wish to import. Click on the file to select it (click again to
clear it).
– If importing a zipped file, click Unzip& Import.
– If importing one or more files that are not compressed, click Import Test.
The files are copied to the instrument’s file directory. The next time you launch the test,
the imported configuration(s) appear in the configuration list.
Initiating the Enhanced RFC2544 Test

There are two ways to initiate the RFC2544 test using the on screen softkey.
– Select the base application and then initiate the RFC2544 test using the on
screen soft key.
– Select the RFC2544 implementation for the technology and interface you
want to use.
The first option will be necessary if you have “No Configurations” saved where you can
load the parameters of the test to be run. Alternatively, if you are coming back to run of
a saved configuration (or modify an existing profile), you can select the direct initiation
of the automatic script, load the existing profile and start testing. For more information
see “Launching a single automated test” on page 364.
Configuring the Enhanced RFC 2544 or Fibre Channel tests

Before running these tests, it’s important to understand which settings need to be spec-
ified externally (outside of the automated test screens), and how to navigate through
the screens and menus presented when you run the tests.
Specifying the external test settings

The automated tests allow you to specify most required settings; however, certain
settings need to be specified outside of the automated test screens (using the proce-
dures listed in Table 33.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 379
Table 33 RFC 2544 and Fibre Channel Setup Tab Settings
Layer/Setting To specify, see....

Ethernet Layer 2 “Specifying Ethernet frame settings” on page 105
– Frame Type
– Destination Type
– Ether Type
– Unit Identifier “Specifying interface settings” on page 102
Fibre Channel Layer 2 “Specifying interface settings” on page 333
– Flow Control: ON
Layer 3
– ARP “Specifying Ethernet frame settings” on page 105
– TTL “Specifying transmitted IPv4 packet settings” on
– TOS/DSCP page 147
Layer 4 “Specifying TCP/UDP settings for transmitted traffic”
– ATP Listen Port on page 240
To specify the external test settings
– If you are running the test with layer 2 Ethernet traffic, select the Ethernet tab
to specify settings that define the frame characteristics of the transmitted
traffic, such as an 802.3 frame type, or a VLAN ID and priority (see “Speci-
fying Ethernet frame settings” on page 105).
– If you are running the test with layer 3 Ethernet (IP) traffic, select the Ethernet
tab to enable or disable ARP, and then select the IP tab to specify settings
that define the packet characteristics of the transmitted traffic, such as the
destination IP address (see “Specifying transmitted IPv4 packet settings” on
page 147).
NOTE:
If running two 6000/8000 instruments end-to-end, keep in mind that the instru-
ment’s PPPoE server is a demo server and does not support full server func-
tionality. Thus, round trip delay cannot be measured. To measure round trip
delay, use a network server.
– If you are running the test with layer 2 Fibre Channel traffic, select the Fibre
Channel tab to specify settings that define the frame characteristics of the
traffic (see “Specifying Fibre Channel frame settings” on page 336).
– If you are running the test with layer 4 traffic, select the TCP/UDP tab to
specify the listen port settings and indicate whether you want to transmit TCP
or UDP traffic (see “Specifying TCP/UDP settings for transmitted traffic” on
page 240).

Page 380 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
2 Verify the following settings:

– Payload analysis is ON for your current test application. You can not run the
RFC 2544 or Fibre Channel test when the module is configured to analyze
live traffic.
– Traffic is not VPLS or MPLS encapsulated. You can not run the RFC 2544
test with VPLS or MPLS encapsulated traffic.
– The module is not configured to run a timed test. You can not run the RFC
2544 or Fibre Channel test during a timed test.
The external settings are specified.
Setting Connection parameters

Before running any of the RFC2544 automated tests, the connection parameters must
be defined so the local and remote units can link.
Configuration methods
Upon initiation of the RFC2544 Automated configuration, the user is given the option of
defining all parameters manually or restoring a configuration from a previously saved
file. In either case any parameter may be modified prior to running the tests.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 381
Retrieving configuration from previously saved file
1 To select a configuration currently saved on the unit, select the Go button (right
green arrow) after “Load Configuration from Profile”. The interface shown in
Figure 77 will appear..
Figure 77 RFC 2544 Load Profiles screen
2 After selecting one of the files on the left side, the configured scripts that comprise
the profile will be shown checked. To prevent any portion of the saved configura-
tion from loading, clear any of the activated sections. Any portion of the test may
be configured after the saved file is loaded.
3 Select the Load Profile button. The test will be configured as saved and if the
connect data is detailed in the file, the unit will attempt to establish that connec-
tion.
4 If a desired configuration is not found, select the Skip Load Profiles button (right
green arrow). Go to step 2 of “Manually configuring all parameters” on page 382.
Manually configuring all parameters
1 To manually configure the tests to be run, from the main menu, select the Go
button (right green arrow) after Configure Test Settings Manually.

Page 382 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
2 The first Connection parameters screen describes the Symmetry of the connec-
tion to be established.
a Select the Throughput.
- Symmetric - same parameters for up and downstream connections
- Asymmetric - different up and downstream parameters
- Unidirectional - only testing one direction, up or downstream
b Depending on the symmetry selected, define the Measurement Direction.
- Looped
- Upstream
- Downstream
3 For all symmetry schema, except loop back, the Connection parameters
pertaining to the local and remote instrument must be defined.
a The first screen specifies the local settings. These parameters are Frame
Type, and IP Settings - Source IP, Gateway and Subnet Mask.
Other optional settings are accessed via the Advanced button they are
MAC Address Source and Number, ARP Mode and Source IP type.
When all local settings have been specified, select Next (the green arrow).
b The Remote configuration screen defines the number of VLANs and the
Destination IP.
- To verify the Destination instrument is available, select the Ping button.
- To establish the connection with the remote instrument, select the
Connect to Remote button.
If the test is being configured for future use and/or the remote instrument is
not available, to continue with the configuration, select the Skip Connect
right arrow button.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 383
4 The next set of parameters to be defined pertain to network configuration.

Depending upon the symmetry scheme selected, screens defining the following
will appear in sequence.
Unit Parameter Options

Layer 2 Frame Type DIX
802.3
Encapsulation NONE
VLAN
Q-in-Q
Stacked VLAN
Source IP User entry
Default Gateway User entry
Subnet Mask User entry
Advanced Source MAC
Auto-Increment Address (L2 only)
ARP Mode (L3, L4)
Source IP type (L3, L4)
Layer 3 (L3 & L4 IP Prioritization NONE
applications only) TOS
DSCP
PPPoE
TOS User entry
Layer 4 applica- Traffic Mode TCP
tions only) UDP
Source Service Type Select from list
Source Port User entry
Destination Service Select from list
Type
Destination Port User entry
Test selection
After all connection parameters have been defined, the user is able to select which tests
are to be included in the automated sequence. In addition to the standard RFC 2544
tests: Throughput, Latency, Frame Loss, Back to Back and System Recovery (loop
back only), additional tests are included for Packet Jitter, Burst and Extended Load
(loop back only)

Page 384 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Choosing tests to be included
1 Upon opting to select which tests to run, one of the following screens appears.
Figure 78 FC 2544 test options
The Enhanced FC tests include Throughput, Latency, Frame Loss, Back to Back,
Buffer Credit and Buffer Credit Throughput.
Figure 79 Enhanced FC 2544 test options
2 Select the tests that are to be included in the Enhanced RFC 2544 or FC auto-
mated test by checking the box in front of the tests desired. Note that some tests
will be unavailable with certain connections or in combinations with other tests.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 385
When all desired tests have been chosen, select Next (the green arrow).
3 Depending upon which test(s) have been selected there are a number of parame-
ters that must be set to define the results.
a On the Utilization screen, the Bandwidth Unit and the Max Bandwidth can
be selected.
To choose whether the bandwidth units used for the tests are chosen from
Layer 1 or Layer 2, make the selection in the Bandwidth Unit drop-down box.
Then enter the Max Bandwidth (in Mbps) in the entry box (Upstream and/or
Downstream for non-symmetric test).
NOTE:
The load value cannot be set to a value that cannot be measured on the
other side due to an imbalanced line rate.
To further refine the Utilization configuration, select Set advanced Utilization

settings and then select Allow True 100% Traffic, if desired. Select Back to
return to previous screen.
b On the Frame Lengths screen, select the number of frame lengths to be
tested by checking the appropriate number of boxes and then entering a
value for each checked Upstream and/or Downstream Frame length to be
tested.
c On the Throughput Test screen, select whether the RFC 2544 Standard or
JDSU Enhanced version of the test is to be used for the Zeroing-in Process
and the level of Measurement Accuracy (Upstream and/or Downstream for
non-symmetric test).
To further refine the Zeroing-in Process configuration, select Set advanced
Throughput Latency measurement settings and then specify the Latency
Bandwidth or Configure Max Bandwidth per Frame Size. Select Back to
return to the previous screen.
d On the Frame Loss Test screen, select the test procedure to be used.
RFC 2544. Transmits traffic at the maximum bandwidth, and then decreases
the bandwidth for each trial by the granularity you specify. The test ends after
two successive trials with no frames lost. This procedure also requires speci-
fication of Bandwidth Granularity in Mbps.
Top Down. Transmits traffic at the maximum bandwidth specified in the Test
Range setting, and then decreases the bandwidth for each trial by the
Number of Steps specified until the minimum bandwidth is reached for the
Bottom Up. Transmits traffic at the minimum bandwidth specified in the Test
Range setting, and then increases the bandwidth for each trial by the
Number of Steps specified until the maximum bandwidth is reached for the

Page 386 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
To further refine the frame loss configuration, select Set advanced Frame
Loss measurement settings and then choose whether to Measure Latency
or Measure Packet Jitter by selecting their checkbox. Select Back to return
to previous screen.
e For the Back to Back Test screen, define the Max Duration (Upstream and/or
Downstream for non-symmetric test) of each test and Burst Granularity in
kB.
To further refine the Back to Back test, select Set advanced Back to Back
settings and then choose the Ignore Pause Frames checkbox. Select Back
to return to previous screen.
f For the Burst Test screen, select the Burst Test Type - either Committed
Burst Size, CBS Policing (MEF 34) or Burst Hunt and the CBS (in kB)
(Upstream and/or Downstream for non-symmetric test), CBS Duration and
Burst Sizes (kB) (Upstream and/or Downstream for non-symmetric test)
depending on which Burst test type is chosen.
g For the Extended Load test screen, enter Throughput Scaling (%) and
Frame Length values.
Select Next (the green arrow).Next (the green arrow).
h For the Buffer Credit screen (FC only), enter the Flow Control Login Type -
Implicit or Explicit; the Max Buffer Size and the Duration of each test in
seconds.
When the individual tests have been configured, select Next (the green arrow).
4 The overall test control configuration items need to be set.
a On the Test Duration screen, specify whether all tests are to have common
durations or are individual tests to have their durations specified separately
by selecting Yes or No radio button.
If Yes is chosen specify the Durations and the Number of Trials.
b On the Test Thresholds screen, specify whether Pass/Fail indications are to
be shown for individual tests and what is the pass/fail Threshold value
(Upstream and/or Downstream for non-symmetric test) for each test.
When the overall test control configuration items have been set, select Next (the
green arrow).
5 The RFC 2544 test has been completely configured.
a If it is not desired to save this configuration profile, at this time, go to step 6.
b To save the profile of this configuration, specify the filename under which it is
to be saved by entering the desired filename in the File Name box. To
discover the name of previously saved files click on Select.
To preserve the configuration so it won’t be changed by future users, select
the Save as read-only checkbox.
When all file attributes have been set, select the Save Profiles button. and
then select OK to return to the previous screen.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 387
6 The Run/Edit screen appears.

– To return to the beginning and modify the current configuration, select the Go
arrow after “Change Configuration”. Go to “Manually configuring all parame-
ters” on page 382.
– To load a previously saved set of configuration parameters, select the Go
arrow after “Load Configuration from a Profile”. Go to “Retrieving configura-
tion from previously saved file” on page 382.
– To run the test, as configured, select the Go arrow after “Run Tests”. The Run
J-QuickCheck screen appears. Go to “Running Enhanced RFC 2544 and FC
tests” on page 388
Running Enhanced RFC 2544 and FC tests

After configuration has been completed, the Enhanced RFC 2544 or FC tests can be
run.
The first test to be run is the J-QuickCheck test. The J-QuickCheck application uses the
configured parameters for the connection to either run a bi-directional test or establish
a loop back to verify that the link can support 100% traffic utilization allowing the other
tests to be run effectively.
The balance of the tests will run without any user intervention necessary after initiation.

Page 388 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Initiating J-QuickCheck test
1 The screen in Figure 80 appears. Notes appear on the left side of the screen indi-
cating the current settings to be used for the test. If different settings are desired
for throughput and Frame parameters, click the Not what you wanted? link.
Figure 80 J-QuickCheck Screen
a Select the Test using configured RFC 2544 Max Bandwidth or Use the
Measured Throughput measurement as the RFC2544 Max Bandwidth
check boxes and/ or enter a new frame size value via the pop-up keypad.
b When configured for layer 2 Loopback test, you can select VLAN Discovery.
This mode will transmit a burst of VLAN frames to automatically discover test
instruments on the network.
c When configured for a Loopback test, you can select Maximum Frame
Search. When selected after a successful loop detection, bursts of various
frame sizes will be transmitted in order to determine the largest frame size
you network can support.
d Select Back to return to previous screen.
2 To initiate the J-QuickCheck test, press the Start button.
3 Observe the network diagram. The following occurs:
a For both end running terminate application - The instrument indicates that it is
waiting for a link, then connecting the link, and provides the status of the
auto-negotiation capabilities. If negotiation succeeds, the Traffic Connectivity
box will turn green and display PASS.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 389
b For remote loop back -The instrument sends a loop down, followed by a loop
up. If the second attempt fails:
– If running a Layer 2 test:
The instrument checks for a hardware loop. If a hardware loop is not found,
we check for a permanent loop. If a permanent loop is not found, the instru-
ment declares “No Loop Found”.
– If running a Layer 3 or 4 test:
The instrument checks for a permanent loop. If a permanent loop is not found
and if ARP is Disabled, the instrument checks for a hardware loop. If a hard-
ware loop is not found, the instrument declares “No Loop Found”. If ARP is
Enabled, the instrument declares “No Loop Found”.
– The instrument checks for an active loop. If there is none, it issues a loopup
command to establish the loop. If the command fails, it sends it a second
time. If the second attempt fails, the instrument checks for a hard loop on the
far end. If a hard loop is not found, the instrument checks for a permanent
loop. Finally, the status of the remote loop up appears.
4 If the loopup is successful (indicated with a green arrows to and from the remote
unit or green loop arrow at remote), the instrument moves on to transmit traffic
over the link at 100% of the line rate to verify the link’s ability to support a full load
of traffic. If the test is successful, the button under Measured Throughput displays
the expected throughput (Up and Down if appropriate).
Green graphics on the screen indicate that an action was successful, yellow indi-
cates an action is currently taking place (for example, connecting the local port to
the link), and red indicates that an action failed (for example, the remote loop
failed).
Figure 81 J-Quick Check Complete
When J-QuickCheck has reported acceptable results, select Next (the green
arrow).

Page 390 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Initiating Enhanced RFC 2544 or FC test
The RFC 2544 testing status screen keeps the user informed of the progress and the
success or failure of the tests while they are running. A key of status indicators is avail-
able on the screen for easy reference.
Figure 82 RFC Run Tests status screen
1 To initiate the test sequence, select the Run Test button.

The time remaining displays in the top tab, and each test scheduled will be
displayed with its current status.
NOTE:
To switch between the test and the Setup panel on the user interface, click the
Go To button at the top of the screen and then click the Results button in the
dialog. This function is intended allow you to verify the settings. Note that the
RFC2544 button is yellow to indicate it has been launched. You should not
change the settings during a test, as you may get undesired results. To return
to the test, click the RFC2544 button.
2 When the tests have completed, select the Next (the green arrow).

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 391
The Test Complete page appears.
Figure 83 Enhanced RFC 2544 or FC Post-test Window

– To create a report of the results of the test that just completed, select the Go
arrow on the “Create Report” line. Go to step 3.
– To repeat the test that just ran, select the Go arrow on the “Repeat Test” line.
Go back to “Running Enhanced RFC 2544 and FC tests” on page 388.
– To reconfigure the test and then run it again, select the Go arrow on the
“Change Configuration and Rerun Test” line. Go to step 2 of “Manually config-
uring all parameters” on page 382.
– To view detailed results of the performance achieved during the test, select
the Go arrow on the “View Detailed Results” line.
The detailed results are presented on a sequence of windows that vary
depending upon the steps in the test that were selected to be run.
On the last page of the results select the right-pointing green arrow. Go to
step 3.
3 The report info screen will display.
This screen allows the user to enter information about the test environment which
will be added to the report.
This information includes-
Customer Name
Technician ID
Test Location
Work Order
Comments/Notes
Custom Logo (from memory)
4 After all the desired data is entered into the entry boxes, select Next (the green
arrow).

Page 392 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
5 The Report window appears.
Figure 84 RFC 2544 Report Window
Do the following:
a Select the format in which the report is to be saved by selecting the radio
button in Format pane.
b Specify the filename of the report.To review the filenames of other, currently
saved reports on the unit, select the Select button.
c You may view saved reports by selecting the View Report button.
d To show a copy of the current report after saving it, check the View report
after creation checkbox. The report will automatically load into the appro-
saved.
e To include the message log with the report, select the Include Message log
check box.
6 The post-report/results window appears.
All options available on this window are described in step 2 with the exception of
the “Exit RFC 2544 test”.
To exit the RFC 2544 test application, select the Go arrow after “Exit RFC 2544
test”.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 393
About the SAMComplete test
7 The Exit window appears.
Figure 85 Enhanced RFC 2544 or FC test exit page

– To exit to the base application, retaining all setups from the RFC2544 test,
– To restore the configuration setups to their default values when leaving the
application, check the box Restore Setups on Exit. To completely exit the
Enhanced RFC 2544 or FC application, select Exit.
The Enhanced RFC 2544 or FC test has been run.

This test is a multi-stream test based on ITU-T Y.1564 that performs a two-phase test.
First, the test verifies whether each Ethernet service is properly configured. Second,
multiple Ethernet service instances are verified simultaneously, each meeting its
assigned Committed Information Rate (CIR). All services are transmitted at CIR and
must pass all SLA parameters (FDV, FTD, RTD and Availability).

• “Initiating the SAMComplete test” on page 394
• “Configuring SAMComplete test settings” on page 396
• “Choosing SAMComplete tests” on page 406
• “Running SAMComplete tests” on page 406
Initiating the SAMComplete test

SAMComplete functionality is standard on all units and all Ethernet line rates are
supported. Although all applications do not include SAMComplete functionality, if your

Page 394 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
instrument is appropriately configured for a capable application (such as the Traffic

Terminate or Multistream applications on Layer 2 or Layer 3; or the TCP Wirespeed
application on Layer 4), you can use it to run the SAMComplete test.
There are two ways to initiate the SAMComplete test; both from the Select Test appli-
cation tree.
• Select the base application and then initiate the SAMComplete test using the on-
screen softkey.
• Select the SAMComplete implementation for the technology and interface you
want to use.
The first option will be necessary if you have no configurations saved to load the param-
eters of the test to be run. Alternatively, if you are coming back to run a saved configu-
ration (or modify an existing profile) you can select the direct initiation of SAM
Complete, load the existing profile and start testing. For more information see
“Launching a single automated test” on page 364.
To launch the SAMComplete test (from base application)
select the desired application for the circuit you are testing (see “Launching a
single automated test” on page 364), and connect the instrument to the circuit.
For details, refer to the Getting Started Manual that shipped with your instrument
or upgrade.
2 Select the SAMComplete soft key on the right side of the interface.
If the soft-key is grayed out, the test cannot be launched. This is typically due to
an invalid setup setting. For example, you may be configured for VPLS/MPLS or
Stacked VLAN.
3 Go to “Configuring SAMComplete test settings” on page 396
SAMComplete has been launched.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 395
To Launch SAMComplete simultaneously with base application
1 From the Select Test application tree, select the technology and interface desired.
All the applications available for the current configuration of the unit will be
displayed.
Figure 86 Test Select Tree
2 Select Y.1564 SAMComplete from the tree, then the specific test desired such as
Layer 2 Traffic >Term.
3 Go to “Configuring SAMComplete test settings” on page 396.
SAMComplete has been launched.
NOTE:
The Quick Launch window displays previously run and/or saved configura-
tions of applications. Automated scripts launched simultaneously with base
applications are fully identified with the script and base application. See
T–BERD/MTS/SC Getting Started Manual for more information on the Quick
Launch window.
Configuring SAMComplete test settings

From the configuration page, the settings can be configured manually, or if a profile has
been previously configured and saved, the test settings can be loaded into SAMCom-
plete.

Page 396 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
To configure test settings
To make changes to the existing settings, select the green arrow to the right of
Edit Previous Configuration. Go to step 2 on page 397.
To reset all settings to their default values and configure all options yourself,
select the green arrow to the right of Start a New Configuration. Go to step 2 on
page 397.
To load configuration settings set from a previously saved file, select the green
arrow to the right of Load Configuration from a Profile.
1 The Profile selection window appears.
The filenames of the saved profiles will be listed on the left side of the window and
all sections of the currently loaded profile will be listed on the right side of the
screen.
Do the following:
a Select a profile from the list whose configuration is to be loaded.
NOTE:
If you load a profile that was configured on another unit, and that profile speci-
fied including a logo in the test report, make sure that the .png, .jpg, or .jpeg is
in the following folder on your unit:
/acterna/user/disk/bert/images
b Check those sections, on the right side of the screen, that are to be loaded
into the test. If no profile has yet been selected, the currently configured
profile sections will be checked.
Any section not selected will not be configured into the test. Any parameter of
the test (checked or not checked) may be reconfigured at a later point in the
configuration process.
c Select the Load Profiles button to load all checked sections into the test.
After profile has successfully loaded select, OK and then select Next (the
green arrow). Go to “Choosing SAMComplete tests” on page 406.
TIPS:
1. Generally, selecting the Next button (right green arrow) on each page will
advance to the next step you need to do, but if at any time, you need to return
to the test configuration, skip to running tests, or review test results, select the
Go To... button, and then select the step to which you need to return.
2. To save a view of the screen on the unit for future reference, use the camera
icon to capture a screenshot.
2 The first Symmetry page appears.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 397
Do the following:
a Select the Throughput type:
NOTE:
Bidirectional tests must be initiated on an MSAM. The remote unit may be an
MSAM, T-BERD/MTS 5800 or a Transport Module. An HST-3000 (with Ethernet
SIM) cannot be used for bidirectional tests.
Symmetric – used where only one set of throughput parameters are defined
because upstream and downstream transmission is identical as the signal is
being looped back to the source or transmitted both downstream and
upstream simultaneously.
Figure 87 Symmetric Connection - Loopback Option

Page 398 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Figure 88 d Symmetric Connection- Bidirectional Option
NOTE:
The Delay measurement types available when doing bidirectional testing is
dependent upon the capabilities of the two units. Both units must be capable of
One Way Delay to use One Way Delay and both must be capable of Bidirec-
tional RTD to do Bidirectional RTD.
Asymmetric – used where upstream and downstream parameters in a bi-direc-

tional test are individually specified and may be different.
Figure 89 Asymmetric Connection Option

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 399
NOTE:
ARP must be enabled on both units if running a bi-directional SAMComplete
test in L3 or Wirespeed applications.
Unidirectional – test is only conducted in one direction. May be either

upstream or downstream.
Figure 90 Unidirectional Connection Options
b Depending upon the chosen Throughput Type, select Loopback or One-Way

Transmission and Direction, if needed:
- Loopback - only available with Symmetric throughput type as the signal
is being looped back to the source, thus identical parameters are
required.
- One-Way Transmission - tests are only conducted in a single direction.
For Unidirectional Throughput type direction, Upstream or Downstream
must be specified.
c If unit is configured with the One-Way Delay (OWD) sync hardware, One-
Way Delay will be an option in the Latency Measurement Type selection
box.Otherwise only RTD measurements will be available.
Note that the diagram on the right of the interface page indicates the type of
testing to be done, and indicates if a second Viavi test instrument is required
at the remote location.
3 The Local Settings page appears. Do the following:

Page 400 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
For IPv4:
a Specify the IP Settings (Source IP, Gateway and Subnet Mask) for Remote
Connections (Channel to Far End). This is not applicable for Loopback
testing so there is nothing to define.
b Advanced users: Select the Advanced button to specify other settings-
- Source MAC
- User Source MAC
- If Data Mode = PPPOE, the following will be available for specification-
- Use Authentication (checkbox)
- User Name
- Use Password
- Service Provider (checkbox)
- Service name (checkbox)
For IPv6:
Specify the IPv6 settings-
– Source Address Type (Stateless, Stateful, Manual)
- Src Link - Local Address (manual only)
- Src Global Addr (manual only)
- Default gateway (manual only)
- Subnet Prefix Length (manual only)
- Destination Address (all)
c Select Next (the green arrow). For Loopback go to step 5 on page 402.
NOTE:
If you are running SAMComplete, please take note of the following facts:
The default ATP version is ATPv2.
For high-resolution between two instruments running SAMComplete, set both
units to ATPv3.
4 The Connect to Remote page appears.

a Specify the type of tagging employed by selecting the radio button for the
desired type.
b Enter the IP address of the Destination device.
NOTE:
For PPOE, if the client.is not yet connected, the Ping button will be grayed out

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 401
c On Layer 3 or Layer 4 applications, to verify that there is a device at the

address specified, select the Ping button. If there is a device, a green check
mark will appear beside the Remote IP address.
d To connect to the remote unit, press the Connect to Remote button. When
the Communications Channel display turns green, a valid connection to the
remote device has been made.
e Select Next (the green arrow). If Skip Connect, is selected, the configuration
will advance to the next step without making the connection.
5 The Local Network Settings page appears. Do the following:
a If a Multistream application is being configured, select the number of services
to be configured.
b Select the Service Name for each of the services being configured. This
specifies which service you are configuring.
c Select Configure Triple Play, if needed. The Triple Play properties screen
appears. You can specify the properties for Voice, Data, HDTV and SDTV.
Repeat for each of the services defined.
d Select the Layer for bit rate layer definition mode.
When L2 is selected, the max value of the Load unit will remain in terms of
L1. L2 utilization is affected by frame size and therefore a value may be
selected that is greater than can actually be transmitted.
e If a layer 3 application has been selected, enter Packet Length which will
calculate and display the Frame Size.
f Select the Frame type desired - DIX or 802.3.
g Choose, from the drop-down list, which encapsulation is desired - None,
VLAN, or Q-in-Q.
h If a layer 2 loopback is being tested, select whether the test mode is to be
Traffic or LBM Traffic.
i For Layer 2 applications, select the frame size from the values in the drop-
down box.
j To specify Source and Destination MAC addresses, Loop Type and Auto-
Incrementing Address settings, select the Advanced link at the lower right
side of the window.
k Select the Next (the green arrow).
l Depending on the application selected, a number of other Network Connec-
tion parameters will need to be defined on a number of additional pages. For
more detail on these settings, see “Specifying Ethernet frame settings” on
page 105.
m On the final Network Connection parameters page, select Next (the green
arrow).

Page 402 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
6 The SLA Throughput page appears.

a For applications with multiple specified services, the Total CIR and/or EIR can
be aggregated and allocated to the individual services with a specified
weight % per service. If this is desired, check the Enable Aggregate Mode
checkbox. When Aggregate Mode is selected the CIR/EIR value in that line
specifies the Aggregate CIR or EIR value that will be distributed to each
service based on its configured Weight %.
b Specify the SLA values. Each service will have its own values. Depending
upon the application selected, the SLA Threshold and Throughput can be
specified for both the Local and Remote unit.
- Weight % – Only applies when Enable Aggregate Mode has been
checked. The % of the total EIR and/or CIR to be applied to this service.
All services % should add up to 100%. If they do not, a warning will
appear at the top of the window informing you what the current total
equals.
- CIR – Committed Information Rate. The threshold used to indicate the
maximum sustained throughput guaranteed by the SLA. If the CIR is 0,
the CIR test is skipped. When multiple services are specified and the
Enable Aggregate Mode checkbox is not selected, values entered into
the All line are copied to each service.
- EIR – Excess Information Rate. The threshold used to indicate the
maximum sustained throughput allowed by the SLA by which a service
can exceed the CIR. The throughput between CIR and EIR is not guar-
anteed. If the EIR is 0, the EIR test is skipped. When multiple services
are specified and the Enable Aggregate Mode checkbox is not selected,
values entered into the All line are copied to each service.
- Policing – Selects that policing be applied to the test. All traffic greater
than CIR + EIR is removed by the policier. (If the test shows frame loss,
the test passes – it indicates the policier is doing its job. If there is no
frame loss even with the overage percentage, the test fails.) When
multiple services are specified, selecting the Policing checkbox on the All
(or Total) line, selects Policing for all services.
- Max Load Display - Calculated from the values of CIR and EIR and
changes based upon policing selection, it is the maximum rate of traffic
to be generated. (If policing is not selected, Max Load is CIR+EIR. If
policing is selected, Max Load is CIR + 1.25xEIR, or when EIR is less
than 20% of CIR, Max Load is 1.25xCIR + EIR).
- M – Tolerance, or delta, in traffic rate which is allowed to be received
above CIR+EIR before declaring a policing failure. For some applica-
tions, the desired M value is specified on the SLA Throughput page. For
Multistream or Truespeed applications, M will be entered on a following
page labeled “SLA Policing”. Specify the desired value for M.
c If it is desired to transmit the burst at a true 100% load, in those circuits that
can handle the signal, select Set Advanced Traffic Settings and then check
the Allow True 100% traffic checkbox. Select the left green arrow to return
to SLA Throughput screen.
d Select the Next (the green arrow).

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 403
7 The SLA Burst page appears.(If SLA Policing appears, see discussion of M
above, in step a).
Figure 91 SAMComplete SLA Burst screen
Do the following:
a Specify whether burst testing will be performed by selecting the radio button
next to Yes or No.
If No is selected, go to step 8.
If Yes is selected, enter the CBS (in kB) where kB = 1000 bytes.
b Select whether to run the Committed Burst Size or the CBS Policing test
by selecting the radio button next to either.
c To further refine the SLA Burst test, select the Set Advanced Burst Setting
link.
– If desired, select the Ignore Pause frames checkbox.
– If CBS Policing was selected, specify the desired +% and -% tolerance to
specify Pass values from expected.
– Select the BACK button (left green arrow) to return to the SLA Burst screen.

Page 404 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
8 The SLA Performance page appears.

a Specify the desired Threshold values. Each service may have its own values.
– Frame Loss Ratio– The maximum ratio allowed of frames lost to total
frames.
– Frame Delay – The maximum allowed average OWD delay/latency for all
throughput values.
– Delay Variation – The maximum allowed frame delay variation for all
throughput values.
b Select Next (the green arrow).
9 The Test Controls page appears.
a Specify the Service Configuration and Service Performance settings.
– Number of steps below CIR – The number of steps, in information rate,
needed to reach the CIR.
The corresponding number of Step Values % CIR appear. The default values
will be equal parts, based on the number of steps (for example, if 3 steps are
used, each will be 25%). The values can be changed, if required.
– Step Duration – The duration, in seconds, that traffic is generated for each
step.
– Test Duration – The duration, in minutes, that traffic is generated before the
service performance test completes.
NOTE:
When running bidirectional tests, the service performance test duration applies
to each direction. So, if you run an upstream and downstream test and the test
duration is set to 3 minutes, the test will run for 6 minutes.
b To further refine the Test Controls select the Advanced button.

% CIR – These will be automatically populated with the equal part values
calculated from the Number of Steps below CIR parameter but can be
changed to any value between 0 and 100.
c Select the right green arrow.
10 The Save Profiles window appears.
a If no Profile is to be saved at his time, select the right-facing green arrow at
the bottom of the window. Go to step 11.
b If it is desired that the configuration be saved to memory (disk or USB),
specify the filename. To save somewhere other than the default location,
press the Select button after the filename to define the directory where it is to
be stored.
c If it is desired that subsequent users be restricted from being able modify this
profile, check the box Save as read-only.
d To save the file to memory, select the Save Profiles button. Then select the
OK button, then select the right-facing green arrow.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 405
11 The Run/Edit window appears.

– To return to the beginning and modify the current configuration, select the Go
arrow after “Change Configuration”. Go to step 2 of “To configure test
– To load a previously saved set of configuration parameters, select the Go
arrow after “Load Configuration from a Profile”. Go to step 1 of “To configure
test settings” on page 397.
– To run the test, as configured, select the Go arrow after “Select and Run
Tests”. Go to “Choosing SAMComplete tests” on page 406
SAMComplete has been configured.
Choosing SAMComplete tests

After specifying test settings, you must choose whether to run one or both of the tests:
Service Configuration or Service Performance.
To choose the tests
1 On the Select Y.1564 Tests page, select Enable if you wish to run the Service
Configuration and/or Service Performance tests.
2 If you wish to include the optional throughput measurement in the test, check
the box to enable the test, and then specify the Max throughput allowed.
3 Select Next (the green arrow).
The J-QuickCheck page appears. Go to “Running SAMComplete tests” on
page 406.
Running SAMComplete tests

After choosing the tests, you are ready to run the test.
To run tests
1 From the J-QuickCheck page, do one of the following:

– When you configured for layer 2 Loopback test, you can select VLAN
Discovery. This mode will transmit a burst of VLAN frames to automatically
discover test instruments on the network.
– When configured for a Loopback test, you can select Maximum Frame
Search. When selected after a successful loop detection, bursts of various
frame sizes will be transmitted in order to determine the largest frame size
you network can support.
– Select the Start button.

Page 406 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
The J-QuickCheck test, using the source and destination data entered, verifies
that the connections detailed in the test setup are functioning as needed for the
proper operation of the test. As J-QuickCheck is completing its analysis of the
circuit, graphics along the top of the page provide a visual indication of the circuit
structure and its suitability for the selected test.
If a remote device is necessary, J-QuickCheck first checks to see if a connection
to the remote device has been established. If it has not, a message is displayed
indicating the connection must first be established.
For Loopback tests, J-QuickCheck tests the Local port for proper operation and
then checks for loopback in a remote device. If no remote active loop is detected,
it then verifies whether a hard loop is in place.
After J-QuickCheck completes, select Next (the green arrow). Go to step 2.
– To skip the J-QuickCheck test, select the Skip J-QuickCheck button at the
bottom of the window.
2 The Run Y.1564 Tests page appears.
There is a display bar for each service under Service Configuration and also for
each test verdict under Service Performance. These indicate the status of each
test to be run. Please refer to the Test Status Key at the bottom of the page to
interpret these display bars.
Do the following:
a If you would like the test to continue when a failure occurs, clear the Stop on
failure box.
b Select the Start button.
The test begins.
As the tests are run, the status display bars will show the results of each test.
In each case, you may view detailed results of that test by selecting the
“magnifying glass” icon when it appears on the status bar.
While the tests are running, the status panel near the top of the screen
displays a blue progress bar and indicates the estimated time remaining to
complete the testing.
After the test finishes, the pass/fail results appear (green check mark or red
X) on each of the tests. The status panel near the top of the screen displays
an overall OK (PASS) or FAIL result
c Once the testing is completed, select Next (the green arrow).
NOTE:
To switch between the test and the Setup panel on the user interface, click the
Go To button at the top of the screen and then click the Results button in the
dialog. This function is intended allow you to verify the settings. Note that the
RFC2544 button is yellow to indicate it has been launched. You should not
change the settings during a test, as you may get undesired results. To return to
the test, click the RFC2544 button.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 407
3 The Test Complete page appears.
Figure 92 SAMComplete Post-test Window

Go back to “Choosing SAMComplete tests” on page 406.
“Change Configuration and Rerun Test” line. Go to step 2 of “Configuring
SAMComplete test settings” on page 396.
The detailed results are presented on a sequence of windows that vary depending
upon the steps in the test that were selected to be run.
On the last page of the results select the right-pointing green arrow. Go to step 5.

Page 408 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Figure 93 SAMComplete Report Window
Do the following:
a Select the items to be included in the report by putting a checkmark in front of
the item. Entire groups may be selected or individual items within a group. To
expand the group listing to see the individual items, select the “+” in front of
the group name.
b Select the format in which the report is to be saved by selecting the radio
button under Format.
c Specify the filename of the report.
d You may view saved reports by selecting the View Report button.
e To show a copy of the current report after saving it, check the “View report
after creation” checkbox. The report will automatically load into the appro-
saved.
the “Exit Y.1564 test”.
To exit the SAMComplete application, select the Go arrow after “Exit Y.1564 test”.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 409
Automated VLAN tests
Figure 94 SAMComplete Exit page

– To exit to the base application, retaining all setups from the SamComplete
test, select the Exit to Results button.
application, check the box Restore Setups on Exit. To completely exit the
SAMComplete application, select Exit.
The SAMComplete test has been run.
Automated VLAN tests

If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so, you can use it to run the auto-
mated VLAN test. This test is used to test a range of VLANs by transmitting and looping
back frames for each VLAN in the range for a user-specified test period, and then
comparing the number of frames transmitted to the number received. Pass criteria can
be specified as No frames lost or Some frames received as meet your needs.
To test a range of VLANs
1 Establish a LAN connection to the network using one of the Ethernet test inter-
faces on the Transport Module or MSAM. Do not use the RJ-45 connector
provided on the base unit.
select the Layer 2, Layer 3 or Layer 4 Traffic Terminate application for the circuit
you are testing (see “Launching a single automated test” on page 364), and
connect the instrument to the circuit. For details, refer to the Getting Started
Manual that shipped with your instrument or upgrade.

Page 410 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Automated FTP Throughput tests
settings” on page 102), and to establish a connection to the network (see “Layer 2
testing” on page 101 and “Layer 3 testing” on page 141).
4 To Launch the VLAN scan, select the Toolkit softkey on the lower right of the
Results screen. Then select the VLAN Scan button. The VLAN Scan Loading
intermediate screen appears followed by the VLAN Scan window.
5 Enter the Duration per ID(s). This specifies the length of time (in seconds) for
which each VLAN ID will be searched.
6 Enter the Number of ranges (the number of ranges of VLAN ID’s you want to be
searched).
7 Enter VLAN ID Min (one for each Range). The minimum value in the range to be
searched.
8 Enter VLAN ID Max (one for each Range). The maximum value in the range to be
searched.
9 To specify the Frame size, Bandwidth or the Pass Criteria, select the Advanced
VLAN Scan Settings link on the lower right corner. Select Back when complete
to return to VLAN Scan window.
10 To run the test, select Start Test.
11 A progress bar, and the remaining time to test completion, will appear at the top of
the screen. To cancel the test at any time press the Abort Test button.
12 When the test is complete, a dialog box appears asking if you would like to save a
test report. For details, see “Saving automated test report data” on page 445.
The VLAN test is complete. The report will provide the total number of VLANs tested,
the total number of successes, and the total number of failures. It can also optionally
include the test progress log that appeared as you were running the test.

If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so, you can use it to run the FTP
Throughput test. This test is used to transfer files of a known size using FTP, and then
measure the actual FTP throughput. When calculating the throughput, the test
considers key factors such as the link speed, frame size, latency on the link (delay), and
the TCP window size.
For details, contact Customer Care for a copy of the FTP Throughput Testing white
paper.
To run the FTP Throughput test

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 411
select the Layer 3 or Layer 4 Traffic application for the circuit you are testing (see
“About the TrueSAM function” on page 348).
4 Launch the FTP Throughput test (see “About the TrueSAM function” on
page 348), and then wait for the Current Script dialog box to appear. Depending
on the number of processes you have running, this may take several seconds.
5 Select or create a new configuration for your test. Refer to “Configuring the
Enhanced RFC 2544 or Fibre Channel tests” for detailed instructions.
After you select an existing configuration or create a new one, the Configuration
Summary dialog box appears listing the current settings for your test.
6 To modify the settings, press Next.
The Destination Configuration dialog box appears. Specify the Server ID, Login
Name, and Password required to establish a connection for the file transfer, and
then press Next.
The File Configuration dialog box appears.
7 Select the sizes of the files that you want to transfer, and then specify number of
trials for the transfers. Press Next to proceed to the Theoretical Calculation dialog
box.
8 To estimate the throughput, you must specify a theoretical bandwidth utilized by
the link, delay, and if applicable, encapsulation for the simulated traffic. Specify
each of these values, and then press Next.
The Configuration Summary dialog box appears, listing the settings that you
specified.
9 Review the settings. If they reflect the scenario that you want to emulate, press
Start to run the script.
10 The FTP Throughput dialog box appears, providing the status of the connection,
each of the file transfers, and throughput measurements. See Figure 95.

Page 412 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Automated HTTP Throughput tests
Figure 95 FTP Throughput dialog box
When the test is complete, a dialog box appears asking if you would like to save a
test report. For details, see “Saving automated test report data” on page 445.
The FTP Throughput test is complete. The report will provide a summary of the param-
eters that you specified when you configured the test, and then it will provide a
summary with the minimum and maximum time in Mbps that it took to send and receive
files for each size selected. A table listing theoretical and measured values follows the
summaries.
Automated HTTP Throughput tests

If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so, you can use it to run the HTTP
Throughput test. This test is used to determine the amount of time it takes to open an
HTTP connection, reach a specific web server, and then open the web page.
To run the HTTP Throughput test
“Launching a single automated test” on page 364).

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 413
Automated TCP Throughput tests
4 Launch the HTTP Throughput test (see “Launching a single automated test” on
page 364), and then wait for the Select URL dialog box to appear. Depending on
the number of processes you have running, this may take several seconds.
5 If the URL you want to connect to appears in the selection box, select it, other-
wise, type the URL into the field provided.
6 Press Start.
The HTTP Throughput Test dialog box appears, providing the status of the
connection, a list of the files downloaded to build the web page (such as the style
sheet and graphics, and the number of bytes retrieved from the site. The average
retrieval rate for the site is also listed (see Figure 96).
Figure 96 HTTP Throughput Test dialog box
You can select Refresh to issue a new request for the same web site, or you can
select New URL to connect to a different site.
When you are done testing, select Close. A dialog box appears asking if you
would like to save a test report. For details, see “Saving automated test report
data” on page 445.
The HTTP Throughput test is complete. The report will list each URL, the number of
times you visited it during the test, the size of the site in bytes, and the minimum,
maximum, and average rate in Mbps that it took to connect to the site.
Automated TCP Throughput tests

If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so, you can use it to run the TCP
Throughput test. This test is used to establish a TCP connection to a peer, and then
estimate the maximum TCP throughput on a link for a variety of window sizes (ranging
from 8 Kbps to 64 Kbps), when running up to 10000 parallel sessions and factoring in
the average delay. The window size represents the maximum number of bytes that can

Page 414 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
TrueSpeed Test
be transmitted before waiting to receive an acknowledgement that the receiving port is

receiving frames/packets.
For example, the test may show that, with a current average delay of 10.25 ms, the
maximum possible throughput for one TCP session with a window size of 8 Kbps would
be 0.098 Mbps.
The average delay value is obtained from the measurement provided in the
L2 Link Stats result category.
To run the TCP Throughput test
“Launching a single automated test” on page 364), and connect the instrument to
the circuit. For details, refer to the Getting Started Manual that shipped with your
3 Press Setup, and then do the following to configure your test:
a Specify the layer 2 Ethernet settings (see “Layer 2 testing” on page 101).
b Specify the layer 3 IP settings (see “Layer 3 testing” on page 141).
c If you are running a Layer 4 Traffic application, specify the layer 4 TCP
settings (see “Specifying layer 4 settings” on page 239).
4 Launch the TCP Throughput test (see “Launching a single automated test” on
page 364), and then wait for the Estimated TCP Throughput dialog box to appear.
Depending on the number of processes you have running, this may take several
seconds.
5 Estimated throughput for each of the window sizes appear in a tabular format.
The number of parallel sessions needed to obtain maximum throughput for each
window size is provided at the bottom of the dialog box.
The TCP Throughput test is complete.
TrueSpeed Test
Speed Test. This test uses the Wirespeed application to test the upstream and down-
stream links for transmission parameters. When testing using two instruments, you can
now position a “client” instrument behind a NAT/firewall to troubleshoot problems at a
customer premise.There are two distinct functions for which the TrueSpeed test may be
used - circuit troubleshooting and circuit turnup. Distinctly different configuration paths
are provided for these options.

• “TrueSpeed test steps” on page 416

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 415
TrueSpeed Test
• “Initiating the TrueSpeed test” on page 418

• “Configuring the TrueSpeed test” on page 419
• “Running the TrueSpeed test” on page 426
TrueSpeed test steps

Speed Test for the purpose of troubleshooting a circuit experiencing reduced perfor-
mance or when turning-up a new circuit. This test uses the Wirespeed application and
automates TCP throughput testing per the IETF RFC 6349 standard “ippm-tcp-
throughput-framework,” and allows TCP throughput testing for up to 64 connections.
Unlike the RFC 2544 test which uses layer 2/3, this test uses layer 4. The trouble-
shooting option validates that the network is tuned as expected, verifies prioritization of
services, and can eliminate finger-pointing between the end user and the network
provider.
In addition, the more basic turn-up testing is a mostly automated test that provides
push-button pass/fail testing of a newly installed circuit. The upload and download
CIR’s need to be added to the configuration before it is run. These parameters can be
obtained from the RFC 2544 test that is often run immediately prior to a TrueSpeed
Test.
NOTE:
TrueSpeed is run in the turnup mode when activated as a component test of
the TrueSAM automated test sequence.
About the test steps

Per the IETF draft standard, this test includes five steps, described in the following
section.
In the turnup option, the test is configured to run the Path MTU (if user-selected), RTT,
Walk the Window and TCP throughput steps (Steps 1, 2, 3 and 4). Bidirectional tests
can only be run in this mode.
When troubleshooting an existing circuit, it is recommended that the user run all five
steps for the first test and then run specific tests to further diagnose issues. This is
because the automated test uses results from prior steps (i.e. RTT) as input for subse-
quent steps and eliminates much of the manual configuration.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
In troubleshooting mode, a 6000 Server or Iperf server must be active and the
6000 Client (the 6000 running the automated test), must be configured to
communicate with the IP of the Server. This is specified in the Connect config-
uration tab (step 2 of “TrueSpeed Circuit Turnup Option” on page 420 and
step 1 of “TrueSpeed Circuit Troubleshooting Option” on page 423).

Page 416 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
TrueSpeed Test
Step 1: Determine the path MTU
Packetization Layer Path MTU Discovery (PLPMTUD) is a method for TCP to dynami-
cally discover the MTU of a path by probing with progressively larger packets. It
resolves many of the robustness problems of the classical techniques (PMTUD) since
it does not depend on the delivery of ICMP messages.
The general strategy is for the Packetization Layer to find an appropriate Path MTU by
probing the path with progressively larger packets. If a probe packet is successfully
delivered, then the effective Path MTU is raised to the probe size. The packet probe
size is raised until the packets fail to be delivered; this implies that the IP “Do Not Frag”
(DF) bit is set on all packets.
Step 2: Determine the baseline RTT
Before stateful TCP testing can begin, it is important to baseline the round trip delay
and bandwidth of the network to be tested.
These measurements provide estimates of the ideal TCP window size, which will be
used in subsequent test steps.
This test is equivalent to a “TCP Ping” and transfers a light load TCP traffic stream from
the client to the server and provides RTT values.
Step 3: Run an enhanced walk the windows scan
This step runs the traditional Walk the Window test with four different window sizes. A
saturation window can be added to determine the maximum throughput. The Results
screens are enhanced to show measured versus expected throughput results in trou-
bleshooting mode if the RTT test was also selected.
Step 4: Measure TCP throughput
This step estimates and measures the maximum TCP throughput on a link for a specific
window size and allows the user to specify a file size to transfer between the client and
the server.
This test produces a throughput dashboard result screen which clearly shows the
expected versus measured TCP throughput along with key loss and delay related
metrics. For the more advanced user, throughput versus loss and delay graphs are also
available.
Step 5: Evaluate traffic shaping
In most cases, the network connection between two geographic locations (such as
branch offices) is slower than the network connection of the host computers. An
example would be LAN connectivity of GigE and WAN connectivity of 100 Mbps. The
WAN connectivity may be physically 100 Mbps or logically 100 Mbps (over a GigE WAN
connection). In the later case, rate limiting is used to provide the WAN bandwidth per
the SLA.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 417
TrueSpeed Test
This step evaluates traffic shaping. Simply stated, traffic policing marks and/or drops
packets which exceed the SLA bandwidth (in most cases, excess traffic is dropped).
Traffic shaping employs the use of queues to smooth the bursty traffic and then send
out within the SLA bandwidth limit (without dropping packets unless the traffic shaping
queue is exceeded).
Traffic shaping can provide improved TCP performance since the retransmissions are
reduced, which in turn optimizes TCP throughput for the given available bandwidth.
The ability to detect proper traffic shaping is more easily diagnosed when conducting a
multiple TCP connection test. Proper shaping will provide a fair distribution of the avail-
able bottleneck bandwidth, while traffic policing will not. The traffic shaping evaluation
builds upon the concepts of testing multiple connections.
This test provides graphical test results which visually indicate whether the bottleneck
link is traffic shaped or policed.
NOTE:
Traffic shaping not applicable to stand-alone Wirespeed applications, any
IPv6 application or within Sam Complete.
Initiating the TrueSpeed test

There are two ways to initiate the TrueSpeed test; both from the Select Test application
tree.
• Select the Layer 4 TCP Wirespeed application for the interface and technology
you are testing. Then initiate the TrueSpeed test using the on-screen softkey.
From the Select Test menu, select the TrueSpeed Terminate implementation of
Layer 4 TCP Wirespeed application on the technology and interface you want to
use.
eters of the TrueSpeed test to be run. Alternatively, if you are coming back to run a
saved configuration (or modify an existing profile) you can select the direct initiation of
the TrueSpeed test, load the existing profile and start testing. For more information see
“Launching a single automated test” on page 364.
Launching the TrueSpeed test from L4 TCP Wirespeed application
1 Verify the following:

– The local and remote instrument are using the same firmware rev. The test
may not provide the expected result if the versions are different.
– If troubleshooting a circuit, verify that a TCP Server (such as another 6000A
running TCP Wirespeed) is activated or an Iperf server is available, and that
the IP address is specified. This will be automatically confirmed in turnup
mode.
2 If not already selected, use the Test Menu to select the L4 TCP Wirespeed appli-
cation for the interface you are testing. Refer to Table 32 on page 366 for a list of
applications.

Page 418 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
TrueSpeed Test
3 On the right side of the main screen, select TrueSpeed Test soft button. There
are two choices presented next; choose “Instrument TrueSpeed Test”.
The TCP RFC 6349 screen appears, prompting you to select the far end test
endpoint.
4 Select one of the following, then select Go:
– T-BERD/MTS Instrument or QT-600
– TrueSpeed VNF Server
The Configuration screen appears, prompting you to indicate how you intend to
configure the test.
Configuring the TrueSpeed test

Configuration of the TrueSpeed test can be broken into two segments. The first
segment is common to all configurations and the second is specific for the turnup option
or the troubleshooting option.
When the True Speed application initializes the Configure screen appears. There are
three options for configuring TrueSpeed:
• To configure all options yourself, select the green arrow to the right of Configure
Test Settings Manually. Go to step 2.
• To load configuration settings set from a previously saved file select the green
arrow to the right of Load Configuration from a Profile. Go to step 2.
• To start a new configuration based on the default settings, select the green arrow
to the right of Start a New Configuration (reset to defaults).
The filenames of the saved profiles will be listed on the left side of the screen and
screen.
Do the following:
Any section not selected will not be configured into the test. Any parameter of
the test (checked or not checked) may be reconfigured at a later point in the
configuration process.
c Select the Load Profiles button to load all checked sections into the test.
After profile has successfully loaded, select OK and then select the Next
arrow. Go to “Running the configured TrueSpeed test” on page 426.
2 The Mode Selection screen appears.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 419
TrueSpeed Test

– To continue with troubleshooting, select the radio button for trouble-
shooting. Go to “TrueSpeed Circuit Troubleshooting Option” on page 423.
– To proceed with a circuit turnup, select the radio button for installing or
turning-up. Continue to “TrueSpeed Circuit Turnup Option”.
TrueSpeed Circuit Turnup Option
1 The Symmetry selection screen appears. Select the radio button for a symmet-
rical circuit (My downstream and upstream throughputs are the same) or asym-
metrical (My downstream and upstream throughputs are different). Then select
Next (the green arrow).
2 The Connect:Channel screen appears (see Figure 97).
Figure 97 TrueSpeed Turnup Connection Settings
Do the following:
a In the Local Settings portion of the window, define the parameters of the local
connection including MAC, IP addresses and encapsulation, if any.
b In the Remote portion of the window, specify the IP address of the remote
connection. To verify that there is a device at the address specified, select the
Ping button. If there is a device, a green check mark will appear beside the
Remote IP address.
c To establish a valid connection for running the test, select the Connect to
Remote button. When the connection is determined to be valid, the bars for
Local Port, Auto Negotiation, and Communications Channel will turn
yellow and then green when communication is established. The bars will
display messages indicating the status of the connection operation.
If the connection is invalid, a message window will appear providing some
information as to why the connection is invalid. This connection issue must
be resolved before the test can be run, although configuration may continue.

Page 420 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
TrueSpeed Test
To continue with the configuration, select the green arrow on the right at the
bottom of the screen (legend text will vary whether the connection has been
made or is to be skipped).
3 The TrueSpeed Controls window will appear (see Figure 98 and Figure 99).
This window provides for the configuration of the parameters pertaining to the
Committed Information Rate (CIR) and TCP Threshold, among others, which will
be used on all subsequent TrueSpeed tests. If Traffic shaping is selected, CIR=L1
Committed Information Rate.
Figure 98 TrueSpeed Symmetrical Turnup Configuration
Figure 99 TrueSpeed Asymmetrical Turnup Configuration
The Advanced button provides access to additional parameters to define the Port
Connection, TCP Pass % and whether Multiple Connections are desired.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 421
TrueSpeed Test
The saturation window controls are also available here. For the Throughput test
and last iteration of the Walk the Window test the window size and the number of
connections are calculated such that CIR traffic loads can be obtained (based on
the measured baseline RTT latency). When the saturation window option is
selected these calculated values can be scaled up or down by the percentage
specified by the Boost Window (%) and the Boost Connections (%) settings to
account for fluctuation in network latency. An additional Walk the Window iteration
is done and the Throughput test is also done using the saturation window param-
eters when the Saturation Window is enabled.
After all parameters have been specified, select Next (the green arrow).
4 Depending on the application being run, the following screen may ask whether
you want to shape the TCP traffic.
– To run the test without shaped traffic testing select the No radio button. Select
Next (green arrow). Got to step 5.
– To run the test with shaped traffic select the Yes radio button. This option will
run the test with traffic shaping and then without to provide a comparison of
TCP throughput for both conditions.
– If you need to specify the Tc and Bc values before running the test, select the
Advanced radio button. When in the Advanced mode shaping can be
selected for the local or remote unit individually. This level of control is avail-
able by checking the Show additional testing options checkbox.
When all options are as desired, select Next (green arrow).
NOTE:
When traffic shaping is selected, the Committed Information Rate (CIR) will be
the L1 CIR.

If no Profile is to be saved at this time, select the Skip Profiles arrow at the
bottom of the window. Go to “Running the TrueSpeed test” on page 426.
If it is desired that the configuration be saved to memory (disk or USB), specify
the filename and the location where it is to be stored. If it is desired that subse-
quent users be restricted from being able modify this profile, check the box Save
as read-only.
To save the file to memory, select the Save Profiles button. Then select Next (the
green arrow). The test will begin. Go to step 3 on page 426.

Page 422 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
TrueSpeed Test
TrueSpeed Circuit Troubleshooting Option
1 The Connection Channel screen appears.
Figure 100 TrueSpeed Troubleshooting Connection Settings
NOTE:
All settings will be set to defaults upon selecting the troubleshoot mode.
Do the following:
a In the Local Settings portion of the window, define the parameters of the local
connection including MAC, IP addresses and encapsulation, if any.
b In the TCP Host Server Settings portion of the window, specify the IP address
of the TCP host server. If the instrument is emulating a device positioned
behind a NAT/Firewall, be certain to specify the private IP address of the
emulated device.
c To verify that there is a device at the address you specified, select the Ping
button. If there is a device, a green check mark will appear beside the
Remote IP address.
d To continue with the configuration, select the select Next (right green arrow)-
at the bottom of the screen.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 423
TrueSpeed Test
2 The TrueSpeed Controls window will appear (see Figure 101).
Figure 101 TrueSpeed Troubleshooting Controls Configuration
This window provides for the configuration of the parameters pertaining to the
Committed Information Rate (CIR) and TCP Threshold, among others, which will
be used on all subsequent TrueSpeed tests.
3 Depending on the application being run, the following screen may ask whether
you want to do shape the TCP traffic.
– To run the test without shaped traffic testing select the No radio button. Select
Next (green arrow). Got to step 4.
– To run the test with shaped traffic select the Yes radio button. This option will
run the test with traffic shaping and then without to provide a comparison of
TCP throughput for both conditions.
– If you need to specify the Tc and Bc values before running the test, select the
Advanced radio button. When in the Advanced mode shaping can be
selected for the local or remote unit individually. This level of control is avail-
able by checking the Show additional testing options checkbox.
After all parameters have been specified, select Next (the green arrow).
4 The Step Configuration window appears.
Select the steps that are to be included in the TrueSpeed test. To learn more
about each step, see “About the test steps” on page 416. When all desired steps
are chosen, select Next (the green arrow).
5 If selected, the Path MTU window appears.
Specify the MTU Upper Limit (this value represents the starting point - the upper
value - with which the test set will begin the Path MTU search). Then select Next
(the green arrow).
6 If selected, the RTT window appears.
Enter the Duration of the Round Trip Delay test (this test will calculate the
inherent latency of the network) in seconds. Then select Next (the green arrow).

Page 424 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
TrueSpeed Test
7 If selected, the Walk the Window screen appears.
Specify the test Window Sizes, # Connections to each window and Test Dura-
tion (and Max Segment Size in bytes if Path MTU is not selected).Select Next
(the green arrow).
8 The TCP Throughput window appears.
Specify the Window Size (in bytes), File Size per Connection or check box to
Automatically find file size for 30 second transmit and Number of Connec-
tions (and the RTT (in ms) and Max Segment Size (in bytes) if RTT and Path
MTU are not selected).Then select Next (the green arrow).
9 If the Advanced TCP Test has been selected, the Advanced TCP window
appears.
Specify the Test Duration (and Window Size and Number of Connections if the
RTT step is not selected). Then select Next (the green arrow).
a If no Profile is to be saved at his time, select the Skip Profiles arrow at the
bottom of the window. Go to “Running the TrueSpeed test” on page 426.
specify the filename and the location where it is to be stored. If it is desired
that subsequent users be restricted from being able modify this profile, check
the box Save as read-only.
To save the file to memory, select the Save Profiles button. Then select Next
(the green arrow). Go to “Running the TrueSpeed test” on page 426.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 425
TrueSpeed Test
Running the TrueSpeed test

When the TrueSpeed test has been completely configured three options are available
- run the test as configured, reconfigure the test (possibly to save as a different profile)
or load a saved profile (except when profile has just been loaded).
Running the configured TrueSpeed test
1 The Run/Edit window appears.

To return to the beginning and modify existing configuration, select the Go arrow
after “Change Configuration”. Go to step 2 of “Configuring the TrueSpeed test” on
page 419.
To load a previously saved set of configuration parameters, select the Go arrow
after “Load Configuration from a Profile” (or left green arrow at the bottom of the
window if coming from Profile Selection). Go to step 1 in “Configuring the True-
Speed test” on page 419.
To run the test, as configured, select the Go arrow after “Select and Run Tests”.
2 The Run TrueSpeed Tests window appears.
The blinking button labeled Run Test indicates that the test is not yet running. To
start the test, press the Run Test button. The button will change to a yellow back-
ground and the legend will change to Stop Test.
While running the turnup version of TrueSpeed, a time remaining indication will be
shown after the MTU test has been completed. The troubleshooting version indi-
cates its activity by the display of an animated Running indicator.
To abort the test, press the Stop Test button.
When the test has completed, if the turnup option had been selected, the screen
will show a pass/fail indication. For troubleshooting option, it will not. To continue
after the test has been stopped or it has finished, select Next (the green arrow).
3 The post-test window appears.
Figure 102 TrueSpeed Post-test Window
If the test fails, a message will appear to help diagnose the cause.

Page 426 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
TrueSpeed Test

Go back to step 2.
“Change Configuration and Rerun Test” line. Go to step 2 of “Configuring the
TrueSpeed test” on page 419.
The detailed results are presented on a sequence of windows that vary
depending upon the steps in the test that were selected to be run.
On the last page of the results select the right-pointing green arrow. Go to
step 6.
4 The Report Info window appears.
Enter the desired information into the fields and identify the location of a logo that
should be added to the report. When all desired information has been defined,
select Next (the green arrow).
Identify the location where the report is to be saved, the format of the report and
the filename in which to save it.
You may view the report before and/or after its creation by selecting the View
Report button and/or checking the “View report after creation” checkbox. The
report will automatically load into the appropriate reader (if available) depending
upon the format in which it has been saved.
When ready to save the report, select the Create Report button. After it has been
saved (and viewed), select the right-pointing green arrow.
the “Exit TrueSpeed test”.
To exit the TrueSpeed application, select the Go arrow after “Exit TrueSpeed test”.
– To start the TrueSpeed test from the beginning, select the Start Over button.
Go to“Configuring the TrueSpeed test” on page 419.
application, check the box Restore Setups on Exit.
– To exit to the base application, retaining all setups from the TrueSpeed test,
The TrueSpeed test is finished.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 427
TrueSpeed VNF Test
TrueSpeed VNF Test

Speed VNF Test. This test uses the Wirespeed application to test the upstream and
downstream links for transmission parameters. In contrast to the standard TrueSpeed
Test, the VNF test is controlled by a Virtual TrueSpeed server at the remote end, rather
than another T-BERD/MTS or QT-600 instrument.

• “TrueSpeed VNF test steps” on page 428
• “Initiating the TrueSpeed VNF test” on page 429
• “Configuring the TrueSpeed VNF test” on page 430
• “Running the TrueSpeed VNF test” on page 434
TrueSpeed VNF test steps

Speed VNF Test for the purpose of troubleshooting a circuit experiencing reduced
performance or when turning-up a new circuit. This test establishes communication
with a Virtual TrueSpeed server at the remote end, and uses the Wirespeed application
and automates TCP throughput testing per the IETF RFC 6349 standard “ippm-tcp-
throughput-framework” and to allow TCP throughput testing for up to 64 connections.
Unlike the RFC 2544 test which uses layer 2/3, this test uses layer 4. The trouble-
shooting option validates that the network is tuned as expected, verifies prioritization of
services, and can eliminate finger-pointing between the end user and the network
provider.
TrueSpeed VNF is useful for confirming the results which may have been obtained by
a customer who has run the Virtual TrueSpeed from a server URL on their PC client.
The T-BERD/MTS may be connected to a similar point in the network and can run the
identical test scenario to confirm the accuracy of the client PC. It is also useful for
testing in greater depth and narrowing down the root cause of performance issues.
About the test steps

Per the IETF draft standard, this test includes several steps, described in the following
section.
The test is configured to run the Path MTU, RTT, and Upstream and Downstream
Throughput tests.
Step 1: Determine the path MTU

Packetization Layer Path MTU Discovery (PLPMTUD) is a method for TCP to dynami-
cally discover the MTU of a path by probing with progressively larger packets. It resolves
many of the robustness problems of the classical techniques (PMTUD) since it does not
depend on the delivery of ICMP messages.

Page 428 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
TrueSpeed VNF Test
The general strategy is for the Packetization Layer to find an appropriate Path MTU by
probing the path with progressively larger packets. If a probe packet is successfully deliv-
ered, then the effective Path MTU is raised to the probe size. The packet probe size is
raised until the packets fail to be delivered; this implies that the IP “Do Not Frag” (DF)
bit is set on all packets.
Step 2: Determine the baseline RTT

Before stateful TCP testing can begin, it is important to baseline the round trip delay and
bandwidth of the network to be tested.
These measurements provide estimates of the ideal TCP window size, which will be
used in subsequent test steps.
This test is equivalent to a “TCP Ping” and transfers a light load TCP traffic stream from
the client to the server and provides RTT values.
Step 3: Measure TCP Throughput

This step runs Throughput tests with various window sizes and number of connections to
achieve the target throughput (also called Walk the Window Test). The Results screens
are enhanced to show measured versus expected throughput results. This step also
estimates and measures the maximum TCP throughput on a link for each specific
window size.
This test produces a throughput dashboard result screen which clearly shows the
expected versus measured TCP throughput along with key loss and delay related
metrics. For the more advanced user, throughput versus loss and delay graphs are also
available.
Initiating the TrueSpeed VNF test
There are two ways to initiate the TrueSpeed VNF test; both from the
Select Test application tree.
• Select the interface and technology for the Layer 4 TCP Wirespeed application
you desire.
Then initiate the TrueSpeed test using the on-screen softkey. There are two
choices presented next: choose the second choice “TrueSpeed VNF Test”.
• From the Select Test menus, select the TrueSpeed VNF Test implementation of
Layer 4 TCP Wirespeed application on the technology and interface you want to
use.
eters of the TrueSpeed VNF test to be run. Alternatively, if you are coming back to run
a saved configuration (or modify an existing profile) you can select the direct initiation of
the TrueSpeed VNF test, load the existing profile and start testing. For more information
see “Launching a single automated test” on page 364.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 429
TrueSpeed VNF Test
Launching the TrueSpeed VNF test from L4 TCP Wirespeed application
1 If not already selected, use the Test Menu to select the L4 TCP Wirespeed applica-
tion for the interface you are testing. Refer to Table 32 on page 366 for a list of
applications.
2 On the right side of the main screen, select TrueSpeed Test soft button. There are two
choices presented next; choose “TrueSpeed VNF Test”.
The Test Configuration options screen appears.
Configuring the TrueSpeed VNF test

When the True Speed VNF application initializes the Configure screen appears. There
are two options for configuring TrueSpeed:
• To configure all options yourself, select the green arrow to the right of Configure
Test Settings Manually. Go to “TrueSpeed VNF Manual Configuration” on
page 431.
• To load configuration settings set from a previously saved file select the green
arrow to the right of Load Configuration from a Profile.
NOTE:
For more information on server settings and descriptions, refer to the True-
Speed VNF Web Management User’s Guide.

The filenames of the saved profiles will be listed on the left side of the screen and
screen.
Do the following:
Any section not selected will not be configured into the test. Any parameter of the
test (checked or not checked) may be reconfigured at a later point in the configu-
ration process.
c Select the Load Profiles button to load all checked sections into the test. After
profile has successfully loaded, select OK and then select the Next arrow. Go
to “Running the TrueSpeed VNF test” on page 434.

Page 430 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
TrueSpeed VNF Test
TrueSpeed VNF Manual Configuration
The Local Settings screen appears.
Figure 103 TrueSpeed VNF Local settings
1 This screen provides setting necessary for the T-BERD/MTS to connect to the
local network. MAC Address and IP Addresses are provided support layer 2 and
layer 3 protocols, and Encapsulation (Tagging) may be set to None or VLAN as
required. Then select Next (the green arrow).

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 431
TrueSpeed VNF Test
2 The Server Connection screen appears (Figure 104). The IP Address of the True-
Speed VNF server must be entered as the Server IP.
Figure 104 TrueSpeed VNF Server Connection step
NOTE:
There are some advanced settings which are occasionally required depending
on the server’s configuration.
Click the Advanced Settings link to enter the follow settings if needed:
– User Name
– Authentication Key
– Server Port
– Authentication Memory feature
Select Back (the green arrow) to return to the Server Connection page.
3 Click the Connect button near the bottom of the screen. The status indicators next
to it will indicate the success or failure of connection to the server. Then select
Next (the green arrow).
NOTE:
If desired before connecting, to verify that a device exists at that IP, issue a
ping to that address by clicking the Ping button. If it displays a checkmark,
then the ping was successful. Also, if desired, to verify that a Virtual True-
Speed server exists at that IP, issue a command to identify it by clicking the
Identify button. If it displays a checkmark, then the server is present. Also, the
server’s software revision information is displayed to the right of the Identify
button.

Page 432 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
TrueSpeed VNF Test
4 The Test Definition screen appears. The settings required to perform the test may
be entered on this page. These include a Test Name, the TOS or DSCP settings
(common to both ends), the CIR’s (Committed Information Rate) for generation of
Upstream and Downstream traffic, and the time duration for each window being
tested.
NOTE:
In some cases, additional settings may be entered by clicking the Advanced
settings link at the bottom of the screen, including:
– TCP Port
– Number of Window Walks
– Connection Count
– Option to run Saturation Window
– Saturation Window Boost settings
– Report Information
Settings in the Report Information group designated with an asterisk (*)

(Customer Name and Customer Email) are required by the TrueSpeed VNF
server and defaults will be provided by the T-BERD/MTS if not entered.
Figure 105 TrueSpeed VNF Test Definition
Once all settings have been made, select Next (the green arrow).

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 433
TrueSpeed VNF Test

a If no Profile is to be saved at his time, select the Skip Save Profiles arrow at
the bottom of the window. Go to “Running the TrueSpeed VNF test” on
page 434.
specify the filename and the location where it is to be stored. If it is desired
that subsequent users be restricted from being able modify this profile, check
the box Save as read-only.
To save the file to memory, select the Save Profiles button. Then select Next (the
green arrow). Go to “Running the TrueSpeed VNF test” on page 434.
Figure 106 TrueSpeed VNF Save Profiles
Running the TrueSpeed VNF test

1 After configuration is complete, the Run Test screen appears.
The blinking button labeled Start indicates that the test is not yet running. To start
the test, press the Start button. The button will change to a yellow background
and the legend will change to Stop Test.

Page 434 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
TrueSpeed VNF Test
NOTES:
While running the MSS and RTT tests, test activity is indicated by the display
of an animated Running indicator. During the Upstream and Downstream
Throughput tests, a time percentage remaining progress bar is shown at the
top of the screen.
When a test run is requested, the server may not be able to start the test
immediately due to limited resources. (available ports, maximum CIR allowed,
and maximum number of concurrent tests allowed). A message will be dis-
played that indicates the number of tests that are ahead of this unit while wait-
ing, and the test will automatically start when resources become available.
To abort the test, press the Stop button.

During the MSS test phase, the following animation is displayed:
During the RTT test phase, the following animation will be displayed:

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 435
TrueSpeed VNF Test
During the Upstream and Downstream Throughput test phases, a bar graph will
be displayed indicating throughput measured second-by-second for each window
tested.
Figure 107 TrueSpeed VNF Run Test (In Progress)
When the test has completed, the Upstream and Downstream Diagnosis results
that are based on the last window tested will be shown at the bottom of the
screen. To continue after the test has been stopped or it has finished, select Next
(the green arrow).

Page 436 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
TrueSpeed VNF Test
2 The post-test window appears.
Figure 108 TrueSpeed VNF Post-test Window

arrow on the Create Report Locally” line. Go to step 3.
– To repeat the test that just ran, select the Go arrow on the Repeat Test line.
Go back to step 1. This will run a new test but will not create a new Authoriza-
tion Code on the server.
“Change Configuration and Rerun Test” line. Go to step 1 of “TrueSpeed VNF
Manual Configuration” on page 431. If any test definition setting is changed,
this will create a new Authorization Code on the server when the test is
started.
– To view detailed results of the performance achieved during the test, select the
Go arrow on the “View Detailed Results” line. The detailed results are
presented on a sequence of windows that vary depending upon the steps in
the test that were selected to be run. On the last page of the results, select
the right-pointing green arrow. Go to step 5.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 437
TrueSpeed VNF Test
3 The Report Info window appears.
Figure 109 TrueSpeed VNF Report Window
Enter the desired information into the fields and identify the location of a logo that
should be added to the report. When all desired information has been defined,
select Next (the green arrow).
NOTE:
The Show Test ID page provides information to allow you to look up the server's
report.

Page 438 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
TrueSpeed VNF Test
Figure 110 TrueSpeed VNF Create Report
Identify the location where the report is to be saved, the format of the report and
the filename in which to save it.
You may view the report before and/or after its creation by selecting the View
Report button and/or checking the “View report after creation” checkbox. The
report will automatically load into the appropriate reader (if available) depending
upon the format in which it has been saved.
When ready to save the report, select the Create Report button. After it has been
saved (and viewed), select the right-pointing green arrow.
the “Exit TrueSpeed test”.
To exit the TrueSpeed application, select the Go arrow after “Exit TrueSpeed test”.
– To start the TrueSpeed VNF test from the beginning, select the Start Over
button. Go to “Configuring the TrueSpeed VNF test” on page 430.
application, check the box Restore Setups on Exit.
– To exit to the base application, retaining all setups from the TrueSpeed VNF
test, select the Exit to Results button.
The TrueSpeed VNF test is finished.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 439
Testing using TAM automation

If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so, you can use it to remotely log
into and provision network elements (for example, switches and routers) from a Mobility
Switching Center (MSC) by issuing TL1 commands (See Figure 111).
Figure 111 Provisioning NE using TAM
You can also use it to emulate a router on the network end of the Ethernet Transport
Service (ETS), then run an RFC 2554 script (see “Automated RFC 2544 (RFC 5180)
and Fibre Channel tests” on page 368). The script puts a Network Interface Device
(NID) in loop back mode, then transmits traffic from the instrument. The NID loops the

Page 440 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
traffic back to the instrument, where you can analyze results for the traffic to determine
link characteristics such as throughput and latency.
Figure 112 Router emulation configuration
Before testing
Before connecting to an NE using the TAM tool, establish a Username and Password
for the test instrument. Be certain to grant privileges that allow the instrument to:
• View the NE’s cross-connect definitions.
• Delete cross-connect definitions.
• Activate specific ingress and egress flows in the command line interfaces (CLIs)
for the switch ports.
Connecting to the management network

Before running a TAM test, you must connect the instrument to the management
network that the NE resides on using the Ethernet management port on your instrument
and a straight through Ethernet cable.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 441
To connect the instrument to the network
1 Insert one end of a straight through Ethernet cable into the Ethernet management
port on your instrument.
– On the MTS/T-BERD 6000A base unit, the port is located on the top panel of
the base unit, in the left corner, adjacent to the two USB ports (see
Figure 113).
Figure 113 MTS/T-BERD 6000A Ethernet Management Port
RJ 45 Ethernet
Management Port
– On the MTS/T-BERD 8000, the port is located on the top panel of the base
unit, in the middle, adjacent to the DB-9 serial port (see Figure 114).
Figure 114 MTS/T-BERD 8000 Ethernet Management Port
RJ 45 Ethernet Management Port
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the access port on the management
network that the NE resides on.
The instrument is physically connected to the network. To establish a complete connec-

tion proceed to “Setting up a TAM test” on page 443.
Connecting to the test network

In addition to the management connection, you must establish a connection for the
traffic transmitted by the instrument and received from the network element.
The ports and cables used to connect the instrument to the circuit for testing vary
depending on the line rate of the test interface. For details on connecting the instrument

Page 442 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
to the circuit for testing, refer to the Getting Started manual that shipped with your
Setting up a TAM test

Before monitoring or configuring a network element using the Test Access Manage-
ment tool, (TAM), you must specify the settings required to establish a connection to the
NE, indicate the test mode (Monitor or Emulate), and provide the ingress and egress
flow.
To specify the TAM settings
“Launching a single automated test” on page 364), and connect the instrument to
the circuit. For details, refer to the Getting Started Manual that shipped with your
2 On the Main screen, select the Toolkit softkey, then select TAM Setup.
The TAM Setup screen appears, with tabs that allow you to specify connection settings
and test port settings. Tabs are also provided that allow you to observe the status of
the connection, and the version of the TAM application currently running on your instru-
ment.
3 On the Connection tab, specify the following settings:
Setting Value
Network Element Select the type of NE that you are monitoring or config-
Type uring.
Network Element IP Enter the IP address for the NE.
Address
Network Element IP Enter the port identifier for the NE’s management port.
Port Note: When Network Element Type is set to SSH, the
port will be set to 22. When Network Element Type is
set to Telnet, the port will be set to 23.
Username Enter the username you created for the test instru-
ment. This name is used to log on to the NE and to
ensure that the instrument is authenticated for TAM
testing.
Password Enter the password required to log on to the NE.
Login type Select from SSH (port = 22) or Telnet (port=23). Only
applicable when NE type = Alcatel 7750, 7450 or 7705.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 443
4 Select the Test Port tab, then specify the following settings:
Setting NE Type Value

Method Any Indicate whether you intend to monitor the
NE, or emulate a router on the network
end of an ETS.
Note- If the NE was specified as Alcatel
7705 then only Emulate will be available
Test Port Any Enter the port identifier for the port that
your instrument is connected to for testing
(this is not the same port specified as the
NE’s management port).
– If the NE Type is 167x, the port ID
must be in a #/p#/p# format, where the
last /p# is optional.
– If the NE Type is 7x50, the port ID
must be in a #/#/# format.
Test VLAN Any Enter the VLAN ID carried in the traffic
transmitted or monitored on the instru-
ment’s test port when the instrument is
emulating a router.
Ingress Flow Alcatel 1675 Enter the name of the inbound flow.
Alcatel 1678
Egress Flow Alcatel 1675 Enter the name of the outbound flow.
Alcatel 1678
Service ID Alcatel 7750 Enter the ID for the epipe.
Alcatel 7450
Customer Port Alcatel 7750 Enter the port identifier for the customer
Alcatel 7450 port.
Customer Alcatel 7750 Enter the VLAN ID for the customer port.
VLAN Alcatel 7450
5 Use the buttons at the bottom of the screen to do the following:
Button Appears ... Used to ...

Configure At all times Configure the NE port with the values
you specified, and take you to the Sta-
tus tab. The NE IP address must be
specified before the port can be con-
figured.
Restore At all times Restore the NE’s original configura-
tion values and takes you to the Sta-
tus tab.
Exit At all times Exit the TAM script.

Page 444 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Saving automated test report data
Button Appears ... Used to ...

Upgrade If the TAM script is Install a detected upgrade from a USB
launched and the key and take you to the Status tab.
instrument detects an
upgrade on an
attached USB key.
The TAM settings are specified. After a connection is established, you can use the TAM
script to configure and monitor the network element. You can observe the status of each
command executed on the Status tab. The current version of the TAM server software
appears on the Version tab.
For details on using TAM automation, refer to the QT-600 Ethernet and Triple-Play
Probe User Interface Guide.

When each automated test is complete, a dialog box appears asking if you would like
to save a test report. You can optionally append the progress log (the text that appeared
while you were running the test) to the end of the report.
To save automated test report data
1 When the report dialog box appears, if you would like to append a progress log to
the end of the report, select the option on the dialog box, then reply with Yes or
No. If you select Yes, specify the following:
– The customer’s name.
– Your name.
– Work Order No.
– The test location.
– Any additional comments you might have concerning the test.
Select the right-facing green arrow. The Report screen appears.
2 This screen allows two actions - Generating a report of the most current results or
viewing a previously saved report. To generate a new report:
a Select the radio button for the format desired.
b Change the default file name, if desired, or click on the Select button to open
the report file management screen to find existing file names. To overwrite an
existing file, select it from the list and then click the Select button to return to
the Report screen.
c To display the report on the screen after it is generated, check the View report
after creation checkbox.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 445
d To include the message log in the generated report, check the Include
message log checkbox.
e Select the Create Report button.
3 To View previously saved report;
a Select the create Report Button. The View Report screen appears.
b from this screen you can see the list of currently saved reports in available
locations. To view an existing report, select its filename then, click on View.
the report will display on the screen.
c When finished with the report, select the Exit button to return to the Report
screen.
4 When completed with the Reports, select the left-facing green button to re-specify
your report or the Exit button.
The Exit screen appears.
5 To restore the setups to their previous settings, check the Restore Setups on Exit
checkbox.
6 To return to the base application, select the Exit button.
7 To return to the Report screen, select the Cancel button.
8 Select Close to close the dialog box and return to the Main screen.
The report is saved.
NOTE:
You can not view Chinese or Japanese PDFs on your test instrument. if you
save the report in a PDF format, you must export the PDF, then load it onto a
PC or workstation with a PDF Viewer.
If you need to view Chinese or Japanese reports on the test instrument, save
the report data as an HTML file.

Page 446 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
15
Chapter 15 VoIP Testing
This chapter provides information on testing voice over IP services. Topics discussed
• “About VoIP testing” on page 448
• “Understanding the graphical user interface” on page 449
• “Populating the Address Book” on page 454
• “Specifying Ethernet frame and IP settings” on page 455
• “Specifying VoIP settings” on page 456
• “Specifying VoIP Filters” on page 461
• “Placing and receiving calls” on page 461
• “Analyzing Audio Packets” on page 466

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 447
About VoIP testing
About VoIP testing

If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so, you can use it to verify the proper
installation and configuration of Voice over IP (VoIP) service.

The VoIP option allows you to:
• Place and receive calls (call setup and teardown)
• Voice conversation/generate tone/IP voice announce
• Auto answer
• Real-time packet metrics (delay, jitter, packet loss)
• E-model QoS and RTCP statistics
• User selectable CODEC
• MOS and R Factor results
Understanding VoIP basics

VoIP refers to a collection of standards and technologies for transporting Voice over
Internet Protocol. There are three basic functions that need to be performed in order for
a voice conversation to take place:
1 The first requirement to maintaining a voice conversation is call management
(signaling). This includes call setup, teardown and maintenance. These protocols/
standards help enable the actual voice conversation. There are several standards
for maintaining a phone call:
– H.323 – This is an umbrella recommendation from ITU which contains a large
set of standards for multimedia communication over packet switched
networks.
– Session Initialization Protocol (SIP) – SIP is a contender to H.323 being devel-
oped by IETF multiparty, multimedia session control working group. This
alternative is lighter and easier to setup than the H.323 standard.
2 VoIP is transmitted using several layers of encapsulation. A common example of
how VoIP is transmitted is RTP > UDP > IP > L2 data-link protocol (IPoE/PPPoE).

Page 448 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Figure 115 is an example of the levels of encapsulation and where the voice
sample is stored.
Figure 115 VoIP Encapsulation
3 Analog to digital data conversion/compression and vice versa. This involves

sampling the audio and providing some digital outputs. This is done using codecs.
Some examples of codecs used in VoIP are G.711 U law, G.711 A law,
G.723 5.3K, G 723 6.3K, G.729A, G.726.32K, and G.722 64K.

When you configure your module for testing, the main screen provides four summary
result buttons that allow you to display physical/link quality results, transaction log,
transport streams quality results, and content streams quality results. Setup tabs are
provided that allow you to specify items such as the destination phone number and
codec. Other setups may appear, depending on the call control.
Action buttons
When running VoIP applications, buttons appear at the bottom of the Main screen that
allow you to select an SFP or specify the wavelength for an optical connector (if appli-
cable), turn the laser on or off, and, register with the management entity (also called
“gateway,” “proxy,” or “call manager,” depending on which signaling protocol you are
using), or place and receive a call.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 449

When you select a VoIP application, LEDs appear next to the result window on the Main
screen (see Figure 116).
Figure 116 VoIP LEDs
The LEDs allow you to quickly determine whether a signal is present, whether synchro-
nization has been acquired, and whether or not the link is active. LEDs also indicate the
content rating.
Understanding the VoIP call bar

The VoIP call bar is located in the area just above the results. It allows entry of the desti-
nation phone number and quick selection of setup items. The setup items available vary
depending on the call control.
Figure 117 VoIP call bar, SIP call control
Understanding VoIP test results

VoIP results are available that allow you to verify the quality of the physical layer, the
link, the transport quality of audio streams, and the quality of the audio itself.

Page 450 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Layered view: Quality Layer Buttons

The layered view appears on the Main screen the first time you launch a VoIP applica-
tion. Color coded quality buttons appear which immediately indicate the current and
historical status of the physical layer and link, the transport of the audio streams (using
IP, UDP, and RTP), and the audio streams themselves. Figure 118 illustrates the view
when all results are OK and there is no history of errors at any layer.
Figure 118 Layered View - All Results OK
Ethernet Quality (Physical Link Quality) —Selecting this button will display aggre-
gate results (such as the bandwidth utilization, interface (layer 1) and Ethernet (layer 2)
errors for the link.
Transaction Log—Selecting this button will display a running list of all transactions
with the far-end including communication with Call Manager/Gatekeeper/Proxy, and
call status.
Transport Quality—Selecting this button will display test results for each monitored IP,
UDP, or RTP voice stream.
Content Quality—Selecting this button will display test results for each monitored voice
stream.
Navigation Tip:
You can always return to the layered view by setting the results group to Sum-
mary, and the category to Status.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 451
Layered View: Button Colors

Figure 119 illustrates the view when the instrument has lost the physical connection so
there is a history of errors at the physical layer.
Figure 119 Layered View - Errored physical link
Table 34 explains each of the colors used for the current and history buttons.
Table 34 Current and History Button Colors
Color Current History

Green Indicates that all results are OK for N/A
that particular quality group. For an
page 451.
Yellow Indicates that at least one result at Indicates that at least one result
that particular layer triggered a occurred during the test that trig-
minor alarm or error based on the gered a minor alarm or error
established thresholds. based on the established
thresholds.
Red Indicates that at least one result at Indicates that at least one result
that particular layer triggered a triggered a major alarm or error
major alarm or error based on the based on the established
established thresholds. thresholds during the test. For
an example, see Figure 119 on
page 452.

Page 452 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
To optimize the number of results that appear on your display, the result windows
appear in the Full Size view by default when you run VoIP applications.
Figure 120 VoIP results: Transport quality
Navigating the results display

When navigating through the VoIP results, consider the following:
• When you launch an application for the first time, the Summary group and Status
category appear. This is also referred to as the “layered” view (see “Layered view:
Quality Layer Buttons” on page 451).
• When you launch applications subsequent times, the result view that was
displayed the last time you ended a test appears. For example, if the Transport
quality results were displayed the last time you ran the application, the next time
you launch the application, the Transport quality results will appear (see
Figure 120 on page 453).
• Use the result group button to switch between the Summary, Content, Transport,
Transaction Log, Miscellaneous, Ethernet, and Graphs groups.
• Use the result category button to switch between the categories for each group.
For example, when observing results in the Content group, Current Call Scores
and Historical Call Score Stats categories are available.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 453
VoIP test applications

If your instrument is optioned to do so, this release supports the VoIP applications listed
in Table 35.
Table 35 VoIP applications

10/100/1000 VoIP Terminate
100M Optical VoIP Terminate
1GigE Opti- VoIP Terminate
cal
10G LAN VoIP Terminate

The Dual Module Carrier, Transport Module, and MSAM provides an Address Book
which gives you quick access to phone numbers when you want to place a call. Entries
can include name, phone number, and IP address information. The address book can
be saved by saving the test configuration.
To update entries in the address book
1 If you haven’t already done so, launch a VoIP application. For a list of applica-
tions, see Table 35 on page 454.
2 Press the Address Book soft key. The address book appears.
3 In the Entry Name column, tap the field to launch a keypad, and then specify a
name for the entry.
4 In the Dest. Number column, tap the field to launch a keypad, and then enter a
phone number alias for the entry.

Page 454 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
5 In the Dest. Name/URI/Email column, tap the field to launch a keypad, and then
enter the destination name/URI/Email.
6 Select either Select and Dial or Save and Close.
The entry is updated.

Before testing on an optical circuit, you can specify interface settings which:
• Indicate which SFP jack you are using (if your unit is equipped with SFP jacks).
• Specify the transmitted wavelength (if your unit is equipped with 850 nm,
1310 nm, and 1550 nm connectors).
• Allow your unit to communicate with another Ethernet device (when requesting
video traffic using IGMP).
For details on the various connectors used to connect to the circuit, refer to the printed
Getting Started User’s Manual that shipped with your unit. For details on specifying the
information required to establish a link to another device, see “Specifying interface
settings” on page 102 of Chapter 5 “Ethernet and IP Testing”.
Specifying Ethernet frame and IP settings

Before you transmit traffic, you can specify the frame characteristics of the traffic, such
as the frame type (DIX, 802.3), encapsulation (VLAN, Q-in-Q,), and IP settings such as
IP type, gateway, and subnet mask.
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the Ethernet/IP tab.
– None. If you do not want to encapsulate transmitted frames, select None.
4 In Frame Type, specify the type of frame you are transmitting (DIX, or 802.3).
5 In Source Type, specify whether the source MAC address uses a factory default
MAC or User Defined. If User Defined, enter the MAC address
6 If you selected VLAN Encapsulation, enter the VLAN ID and Priority.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 455
Specifying VoIP settings
7 If you selected Q-in-Q Encapsulation, do the following:

a Enter the SVLAN ID, DEI, Priority, and TPID.
b Enter the CVLAN ID and Priority.
8 Specify whether the Source IP Type is a Static address or DHCP.
9 If you selected Static IP, specify the Source IP, Gateway, and Subnet Mask.
The Ethernet frame and IP settings are specified.

Before placing or receiving VoIP calls, you must specify the VoIP settings.
To specify VoIP settings
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the VoIP tab.
3 In the panel on the left side of the tab, select General, and then specify the
following:
a Select Auto Answer, and then specify whether to automatically answer calls.
b Select Call Control Standard, and then specify a call control standard
– SIP is Session Initiation Protocol. It is an application layer protocol used to
establish, modify, and terminate conference and telephony sessions over IP-
based networks.
– SCCP is the call control used on Cisco VoIP systems.
– H.323 (Fast connect) minimizes the number of messages exchanged.

Page 456 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
c If you selected SIP call control, specify the following settings.
Setting Description
Source Alias Enter the source phone number alias.
Outbound Alias Select how to dial the destination:
Dial by Phone Number or
Dial by Name/URI/Email.
Dest. Phone Number If you selected “Dial by Phone Number” for Out-
bound Alias, enter the destination phone number via
the on-screen keypad or select from the list of
recently dialed numbers.
Dest. Name/URI/Email If you selected “Dial by Name/URI/Email” for Out-
bound Alias, enter the destination name/URI/Email
via the on-screen keypad or select from the list of
recently entered names.
SIP Vendor Specify the vendor.
100 Rel Usage Specify whether 100rel is required, supported, or dis-
abled.
100 Rel provides reliable provisional response mes-
sages by appending the 100rel tag to the value of the
required header of initial signaling messages.
d If you selected SCCP call control, specify the following:
Setting Description
Dest. Phone Number Enter the destination phone number via the on-screen
keypad or select from the list of recently dialed num-
bers.
Device Type Specify the Device Type.
Device Name If checked, click on the field and use the keypad to
enter the device name.
e If you selected H.323 call control, specify the following settings..
Setting Description
Source Alias Enter the source phone number alias.
Dest. Phone Number Enter the destination phone number via the on-screen
keypad or select from the list of recently dialed num-
bers.
H.323ID Enter the ID, using up to 40 characters. This is an ID
element field that is sent to the Gatekeeper during all
registration and request messages.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 457
Setting Description
Bear Cap Specify the bearer capability: Voice, 3.1K audio, Unre-
stricted Digital
This sets the Bearer Cap information element in the
H.323 setup message for outgoing calls.
Calling Party Num- Specify the numbering plan, if required: Unknown,
ber Plan ISDN/Telephony, Data, Telex, National, Private
This sets the Calling Party Numbering Plan information
element in the H.323 setup message for outgoing calls.
Calling Party Num- Specify the type of number, if required: Unknown, Inter-
ber Type national, National, Network Specific, Subscriber,
Abbreviated.
This sets the Calling Party Type information element in
the H.323 setup message for outgoing calls
Called Party Num- Specify the numbering plan, if required: Unknown,
ber Plan ISDN/Telephony, Data, Telex, National, Private.
This sets the Called Party Numbering Plan information
element in the H.323 setup message for outgoing calls.
Called Party Type Specify the type of number, if required: Unknown, Inter-
national, National, Network Specific, Subscriber,
Abbreviated.
This sets the Called Party Type information element in
the H.323 setup message for outgoing calls.
4 If you selected SIP call control, in the panel on the left side of the tab, select
Proxy, and then specify the following:
Setting Description
Proxy Mode Specify whether your circuit has a Static Proxy or No
Proxy.
Address Type If your circuit uses a static Proxy, specify whether the
address is an IP Address or DNS Name.
Proxy IP Enter the IP address of the proxy. To verify the proxy
address, press the PING soft-key. If the address is reach-
able, a check mark will display next to the Ping button. If
not, a red X will display.
This is the outbound proxy, or the device from which the
instrument will send and receive all SIP messages. If you
have a network that uses one server for registration and
another for placing and receiving calls, the Proxy IP
specifies the address for placing and receiving calls.
Proxy User name Enter a user name used to access the Proxy.
Proxy Password Enter the password associated with the user name.

Page 458 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Setting Description
DNS Name If the address type is DNS Name, enter the DNS name
for the proxy.
Proxy Port Enter the proxy port number.
Call Control Port Enter the call control port number.
5 If you selected SCCP call control, in the panel on the left side of the tab, select
Call Manager, and then specify the following:
Setting Description
Call Manager IP Enter the IP address of the call manager.
Call Manager Port Enter a number for the call manager port.
6 If you selected H.323 call control, in the panel on the left side of the tab, select
Gatekeeper, and then specify the following:
Setting Description
Gatekeeper Mode Specify the gatekeeper mode:
NO GATEKEEPER means no RAS (registration,
admission, and status) messages will be used.
AUTO DISCOVER automatically discovers the gate-
keeper.
STATIC allows you to enter the gatekeeper address.
Authentication Specify whether authentications is supported or
required.
Gatekeeper IP Enter the gatekeeper IP address
Username Enter the username to register with the gateway.
Password Enter the password associated with the username.
Local RAS Port Enter the UDP port that is used locally for registration
(RAS messages)
Call Control Port Enter the UDP port that is used for call control mes-
sages (for placing and receiving calls).
Gatekeeper RAS Enter the UDP port that the gatekeeper uses for regis-
Port tration (RAS messages).
Time Zone Select the time zone where you are located.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 459
7 In the left panel on the side of the tab, select Audio Codec and then specify the
following:
Setting Description
Primary Codec Select the codec type to be advertised/supported for
receiving audio packets.
The codec on the receiving and transmitting end should
match. The call may not be successful if the codecs
don’t match
Speech Per Frame Specify the number of milliseconds of speech per trans-
mission frame the unit can receive.
Jitter buffer Set the jitter buffer length.This is the number of millisec-
onds of speech that will be collected before an attempt
will be made to play the speech back. This allows lost,
late, or out-of-sequence packets time to arrive and be
reassembled before playback.
Transmit Source Select the transmit source: Voice conversation (trans-
mits and receives live voice), IP voice announce (the
unit repeats a sequence of words including the calling
party’s IP address), Tone (transmits the specified fre-
quency).
Language If the Transmit Source is set to IP Voice Announce, the
Language selection becomes available. This specifies
the language for the transmitted voice announcement.
Voice IP QOS Enter a value to indicate the Voice IP Quality of Service.
The value you enter will be both the Differentiated Ser-
vices (DiffServ) code point and the type of service (ToS)
indicator. The value will occupy a 6-bit field in the packet
headers of RTP stream voice packets and will indicate
how packets are treated at each hop. You can specify a
number from 0 to 63 to indicate the per-hop behavior.
RTP Port Min/Max Specify the RTP port minimum and maximum numbers.
The real-time transport protocol (RTP) port number
allows you to identify voice traffic versus other traffic.
Some systems only accept RTP traffic on certain port
numbers.
Silence Suppres- Specify whether silence suppression is supported.
sion
8 In the left panel on the side of the tab, select QoS and then specify the following:
Setting Description
MOS Scaling Specify the scale used for MOS results.
Jitter Threshold Specify the pass and fail thresholds for the jitter result.
Delay Threshold Specify the pass and fail thresholds for the delay result.

Page 460 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Specifying VoIP Filters
Setting Description
Loss Threshold Specify the pass and fail thresholds for the loss result.
Content Threshold Specify the pass and fail thresholds for the MOS results.
The VoIP settings are specified.
Specifying VoIP Filters

If you wish to capture VoIP packets, you can specify filters to capture specific types of
packets.
To specify VoIP filter settings
2 Select the Setup soft key, and then select the VoIP Filters tab.
3 Specify the type of filter:
Setting Description
Signaling Only incoming and outgoing signaling/control packets
shall be captured. Incoming signaling/control packets
destined for the unit (based on destination IP address
of incoming packets) shall only be sent to the capture
buffer. Signaling packets shall include RTCP packets,
H.323/SIP/SCCP call control packets.
Audio Only audio packets for the call in progress shall be sent
to the capture buffer. Incoming packets shall be cap-
tured based on destination IP address and UDP port
number fields of the packets.
Signaling and Audio Both signaling and audio packets shall be sent to the
capture buffer.
All Traffic All incoming traffic will be captured.
The VoIP filters are specified.
Placing and receiving calls

To verify call setup and tear down, the instrument allows placing and receiving calls. To
monitor the audio and insert voice into calls, the unit allows use of wired and Bluetooth®

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 461
wireless headsets.Adjustment of the audio volume levels is accomplished via on-

screen controls.
NOTE:
If playing audio on a MTS8000 with DMC, no audio path is available. You can
use the simulated voice and observe results but will not hear audio.
Registering with the server

Before placing or receiving calls, you must register with the server (the Proxy/Gateway/
Call Manager, depending on call control). If H.323 call control is used, you must manu-
ally register with the server after changing any call settings. If SIP or SCCP call controls
are used, the unit automatically deregisters and registers with the server after a change
in call settings.
To register with the server
• Tap the Register action button to begin registering.
Figure 121 VoIP registration action button
NOTE:
The registration action button is not available if using H.323 call control with NO
Gatekeeper.
After successful registration, the button will turn yellow and change to “Regis-
tered” and the Stack status indicator in the LED panel updates.
Figure 122 Successful registration
NOTE:
When Proxy Mode is set to “No Proxy”, registered LED will not be lit.

Page 462 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Placing calls
After specifying configuration settings and registering with the server, you can place a
VoIP call.
To place a VoIP call
1 Select the Place Call action button.

The button label changes to Hang Up.
After the call is connected, the Call status in the LED panel will update and the
timer begins counting.
2 While the call is up, observe the Transport and Content result categories.
If voice insertion is configured, the Audio levels and Bluetooth connection settings
can be adjusted by selecting the speaker and Bluetooth icons in the system tray.
3 If desired, DTMF tones may be sent using the DTMF keypad.
NOTE:
For DTMF tone entry, the configuration must specify call type = Voice Conver-
sation.
4 Select the Hang up action button to end the call.
Receiving calls manually

After specifying configuration settings and registering with the server, you can receive
a VoIP call.
To receive a VoIP call
1 When the instrument indicates an incoming call, select the Answer Call action
button.
The button label changes to Hang Up.
After the call is connected, the Call status in the LED panel will update and the
timer begins counting.
2 While the call is up, observe the Transport and Content result categories.
If audio monitoring or voice insertion is configured. the Audio levels and Bluetooth
connection settings can be adjusted by selecting the speaker and Bluetooth icons
in the system tray.
3 Select the Hang up action button to end the call.
Automatically answering calls

The Auto Answer feature allows you to verify incoming service.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 463
To answer calls automatically
1 In the VoIP call bar, check the box for Auto Answer.
2 Place a call to the instrument from a VoIP phone (or a second instrument).
The call is automatically answered, and the following information is logged:
– Time the call was answered
– Caller’s IP address
– Time the call ended
3 Tap the Hang up action button to end the call.

If your instrument is configured and optioned to do so, you can use it to capture trans-
mitted and received packets, save it on the instrument or to an external USB key, and
using the PVA-1000 VoIP Analyzer software.
Understanding the Capture toolbar

The buttons on the Capture toolbar (illustrated in Figure 123) are used to enable or
disable the capture feature, start and stop the capture process, save the packets in the
capture buffer to the internal USB drive (or an external drive), or launch Wireshark® or
J-Mentor to analyze the packets on the instrument.
Figure 123 Capture Toolbar
The % Buffer Full gauge shows the percentage of the available buffer capacity that is
used.
When you capture traffic at a high bandwidth or specify a small buffer size, if you
configure the capture to wrap (overwrite) the oldest packets in the buffer with new
captured packets in 1 MB increments, the buffer gauge may appear to “jump around”.
If you do not wrap the packets, the capture process may stop very soon after you start
it, because the buffer reaches capacity quickly. This is expected behavior.
Specifying filter settings

If you specify VoIP filter settings (see “Specifying VoIP Filters” on page 461), the
settings determine which received traffic is captured to the buffer. The Capture Toolbar

Page 464 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
(illustrated in Figure 123) indicates whether filters are active or inactive. Transmitted
frames are always captured to the buffer.
Capturing packets
Capturing packets involves launching and configuring a VoIP application, specifying the
capture settings, and, if you are capturing received traffic, specifying the filter settings.
While capturing packets in the VoIP application, it is recommended that you do not save
the captured packets until the call is ended (the phone is on hook).
When capturing packets, bear in mind that configuring the capture for a large buffer (for
example, 256 MB) with small packets (for example, 46 byte ping packets), it will take a
long time to fill the buffer. If you configure the capture for a small buffer with large
packets, it will take much less time.
To capture packets on the instrument
– Specify the settings required to filter received traffic for the type you want to
capture and analyze.
– Clear all of the filters to capture all received traffic.
For details, refer to “Specifying filter settings” on page 464.
2 Select the Capture setup tab, and then specify the following settings:
Setting Parameter
Capture buffer size (MB) Specify a size ranging from 1 to 256 MB in a 1 MB
increment. The default buffer size is 16 MB.
Capture frame slicing If you want to capture the first 64 or 128 bytes of
each frame (and ignore the rest of the frame),
select 64 or 128; otherwise, select None.
If you select None (the default), the entire frame is
captured.
When capture buffer is If you want to overwrite the oldest packets with new
filled packets when the buffer becomes full, select
Wrap Capture; otherwise, select Stop Capture.

5 If you want to manually stop capturing packets (for example, after the instrument
has transmitted and received a certain number of frames), select the Capture
Started action key.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 465
The action key turns gray, and a message appears in the message bar indicating
that the capture is complete.
Packets were captured and are stored temporarily in the capture buffer. A count of
the number of packets processed is provided in the Ethernet result group, in the
Capture category.

You will lose the entire contents of the capture buffer if you launch a new
application on the port that you are capturing packets on, or if you turn your
instrument OFF. To ensure that the packets are stored, save the capture
buffer before changing applications or turning the instrument OFF.
6 Select Save Capture Buffer and then specify the file name and other parameters
as needed.(For more information, see “Saving or exporting captured packets” on
page 13) of Chapter 1 “Basic Testing”.
Analyzing Audio Packets

Audio packets captured with the VoIP application can be analyzed using the PVA-1000
VoIP Analyzer software from Viavi. PVA-1000 software provides automated capture
and detailed analysis of VoIP calls. It provides details of signaling and quality perfor-
mance issues.
When capturing packets in the VoIP application, it is recommended that you do not save
the captured packets until the call is ended (the phone is on hook).

Page 466 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
16
Chapter 16 Test Results
This chapter describes the categories and test results that are available when
performing Ethernet, Fibre Channel, TCP/UDP, and IP Video tests. Topics discussed in
this chapter include the following:
• “About test results” on page 468
• “Summary Status results” on page 468
• “CPRI/OBSAI results” on page 469
• “Ethernet, IP, TCP/UDP, and Fibre Channel results” on page 476
• “RS-FEC results” on page 544
• “PTP results” on page 545
• “Wander Interface results” on page 550
• “IP Video results” on page 551
• “VoIP results” on page 564
• “Graphical results” on page 570
• “Histogram results” on page 571
• “Event Log results” on page 571
• “Time test results” on page 572

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 467
About test results
About test results

After you connect the instrument to the circuit and press the START/STOP button,
results for the configured test accumulate and appear in the Result Windows in the
center of the screen. The result groups and categories available depend on their appli-
cability to the test you configured. For example, if you select, configure, and start a
SONET test application, 10 Gigabit Ethernet LAN categories are not available because
they are not applicable when running a SONET application.
A number of enhancements have been made to the test result layout; for details, see
“Step 5: Viewing test results” on page 19.
The following sections describe the test results for each of the categories.
Summary Status results

When running most applications, the Summary Status category displays a large “ALL
SUMMARY RESULTS OK” message on a green background if no errors, anomalies,
alarms, or defects have been detected (see Figure 124).
Figure 124 ALL SUMMARY RESULTS OK message
If errors, anomalies, alarms, or defects have been detected, the background is red, and
the errored results are displayed (see Figure 125).
Figure 125 Errored Summary Status results (NextGen application)

Page 468 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
CPRI/OBSAI results
This allows you to immediately view errored results without searching through each
category. The errored results are listed by group and category. To see all results for the
group/category, select the arrow key to the right of the group/category name. You can
also collapse or expand the results by selecting the box to the left of the name.
If OoS (out of sequence) Layer 3 Packets, B8ZS Detect, Path Pointer Adjustment, or
correctable FEC conditions occur, and no other errors occurred, the background is
yellow, indicating you should research each condition displayed. In some instances, the
conditions constitute errors; in other instances, the conditions are expected and should
not be interpreted as errors.
IP VIDEO RESULTS:
When running IP Video applications, the Summary Status results provide a lay-
ered view of the state of the physical/link, transport stream, and video stream
quality layers. For details, see “IP Video results” on page 551.
CPRI/OBSAI results
BERT results pertaining to frequency characteristcs, code violations and sync and
pattern errors are reported in the results pane on the UI when using Layer 1 applica-
tions. Layer 2 applications additionally report on framing errors and other CPRI specific
data.
Categories discussed in this section include the following:

• “CPRI and OBSAI LEDs” on page 469
• “Interface/Signal results” on page 470
• “RRH Status Results” on page 471
• “RRH SFP Results” on page 471
• “RRH RTD Results” on page 472
• “CPRI/OBSAI Error Stats” on page 473
• “CPRI/OBSAI Counts results” on page 474
• “CPRI L1 Inband Protocol results” on page 475
• “CPRI/OBSAI Payload BERT results” on page 475
CPRI and OBSAI LEDs

If the instrument loses any of the LED events, the green Status LED extinguishes, and
the red Alarm LED in the history column illuminates indicating an error condition has
occurred.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 469
CPRI/OBSAI results
Table 36 describes the LEDs, and indicates whether each LED is applicable when
testing a CPRI or OBSAI circuit.
Table 36 CPRI/OBSAI LEDs
LED Indicates CPRI OBSAI

Signal Present Green X X
– A signal is present.
Red
– Received signal has been lost
since the last test start or restart.
Sync Acquired Green X X
– Synchronization is established.
Red
– Synchronization has been lost
since the last test restart.
Frame Sync Green X X
– Frame alignment has been
achieved.
Red
– Frame alignment has been lost.
Pattern Sync Green X X
– Synchronization with the received
test patterns has been achieved.
Red
– Synchronization has been lost
Interface/Signal results
Table 37 describes the CPRI and OBSAI Interface/Signal results.
Table 37 CPRI/OBSAI Interface/Signal Results
Test Result Description

Optical Rx Level (dBm) Displays the receive level in dBm when testing optical
interfaces using average power consumption.
Optical Rx Overload Displays current status of Optical Rx Overload condi-
tion (On/Off)
Rx Frequency (Hz) Frequency of the clock recovered from the received
signal, expressed in Hz.
Rx Freq Deviation (ppm) Current received frequency deviation. Displayed in
PPM.
Rx Freq Max Deviation Maximum received frequency deviation.
(ppm)

Page 470 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
CPRI/OBSAI results
Table 37 CPRI/OBSAI Interface/Signal Results

Signal Losses Number of times signal was lost during current test.
Signal Loss Seconds Number of seconds during which a signal was not
present.
Sync Loss Seconds Number of seconds during which a synchronization
was not present.
Tx Clock Source Shows the source of the transmit timing standard
Tx Frequency (Hz) Current transmitter clock frequency, expressed in Hz.
Tx Freq Deviation (ppm) Current transmitted frequency deviation. Displayed in
PPM.
Tx Max Freq Deviation Maximum transmitted frequency deviation.
(ppm)
RRH Status Results

Table 38 shows the RRH Stats test results.
Table 38 RRH Stats Results

Serial Number Serial number of the RRH connected for testing.
Software Version Software version of the RRH connected for testing.
Manufacturer Manufacturer of the RRH connected for testing.
Model Model information of the RRH
VSWR Floor (dBm) Tx Power level, above which VSWR values are
reported by the RRH.
Max Tx Power (dBm) Maximum Transmit Power that the RRH supports.
Min/Max Tx Frequency Transmit Frequency range supported by the RRH.
(MHz)
Min/Max Rx Frequency Receive Frequency range supported by the RRH.
(MHz)
RRH SFP Results

Table 39 shows the RRH SFP test results.
Table 39 RRH SFP Results

Wavelength (nm) Current wavelength of the transceiver used by the
connected RRH (e.g., 1310.00).

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 471
CPRI/OBSAI results
Table 39 RRH SFP Results

Vendor Vendor of the transceiver used by the connected
RRH.
Vendor PN Part number assigned by the vendor to the trans-
ceiver used by the connected RRH.
Vendor Rev Revision assigned by the vendor to the transceiver
used by the connected RRH.
Power Level Type Power level used by the transceiver used by the con-
nected RRH (e.g., Average Power).
Diagnostic Monitoring Indicates whether diagnostic monitoring is supported
by the transceiver used by the connected RRH.
Diagnostic Byte Byte indicating how diagnostic monitoring is imple-
mented in the transceiver used by the connected
RRH.
Nominal Rate (Mbits/sec) The nominal rate of the transceiver used by the con-
nected RRH expressed in megabits per second.
Min Rate (Mbits/sec) The minimum rate of the transceiver used by the con-
Max Rate (Mbits/sec) The maximum rate of the transceiver used by the con-
Transceiver Type of transceiver used by the connected RRH (e.g.,
Ethernet 1000BASE-LX).
Wavelength (nm) Current wavelength of the transceiver used by the
connected RRH (e.g., 1310.00).
RRH RTD Results

Table 40 shows the RRH RTD test results.
Table 40 RRH Stats Results

RTD Delay Offset (μs) The delay offset stored by the RRH, expressed in microsec-
onds. This value is not factored into the Compensated RTD
measurement.
Round Trip Delay, Avg (μs) The average round trip delay over the last second (including the
RRH delay offset), expressed in microseconds.
Compensated RTD, Avg (μs) The average round trip delay over the last second (without the
RRH delay offset), expressed in microseconds.

Page 472 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
CPRI/OBSAI results
RRH RF Results
Table 41 shows the RRH RF test results.
Table 41 RRH RF Results

Tx Incident Power (dBm) Incident Power for a Tx Antenna reported by the RRH.
Tx Reflected Power (dBm) Reflected Power for a Tx Antenna reported by the RRH
Tx VSWR Voltage Standing Wave Ratio for a Tx Antenna reported by the
RRH
Tx Return Loss (dBm) Loss of power for a Tx Antenna reported by the RRH.
CPRI/OBSAI Error Stats

Table 42 shows the CPRI/OBSAI Error Stats test results.
Table 42 CPRI/OBSAI Error Stats results

Word Sync Loss Events A count of the number of word sync loss events that have
occurred since the last restart.
Word Sync Loss Seconds A count of the number of seconds in which a 10b word loss
occurred since the last restart
Code Violations The number of code violations that have been received
Code Violations Rate The ratio of code violations to bits received since the last
test restart.
Code Violations Seconds The number of seconds in which code violations have been
received since the last test restart.
Rx K30.7 Words The number of K30.7 words received since the last test
restart.
Frame Sync Loss Events The number of frame sync losses that have been recorded
Frame Sync Loss Seconds The number of seconds in which frame sync losses have
been received since the last test restart.
Running Disparity Errors The number of Running Disparity Errors received since the
last test restart.
Running Disparity Error rate The rate at which Running Disparity errors have been
received since the last test restart
Running Disparity Error Seconds The number of seconds in which a running disparity error
was received since the last test restart.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 473
CPRI/OBSAI results
CPRI/OBSAI Counts results

Table 43 shows the CPRI/OBSAI Counts results.
Table 43 CPRI/OBSAI Counts results

Rx Code Words The total number of 10b code words received since last test
restart.
Tx Code Words The total number of 10b code words transmitted since last
test restart.
Rx Frames The total number of hyperframes (CPRI) or master frames
(OBSAI) received since last test restart.
Tx Frames The total number of hyperframes (CPRI) or master frames
(OBSAI) transmitted since last test restart.
Rx Message Groups A count of the number of different groups received.
Round Trip Delay, Current (μs) The currently calculated round trip delay, expressed in
microseconds.
Round Trip Delay, Avg (μs) The average round trip delay over the last second,
expressed in microseconds.
Round Trip Delay, Max (μs) The minimum round trip delay since the last restart of the
test, expressed in microseconds.
Round Trip Delay, Min (μs) The maximum round trip delay since the last restart of the
Rx Messages A count of the messages received in each of the following
groups-
– Control
– Measurement
– WCDMA/FDD
– WCDMA/TDD
– GSM/EDGE
– TETRA
– CDMA2000
– WLAN
– Loop back
– Frame Clock Burst
– Ethernet
– RTT
– WiMAX
– Virtual HW Reset
– LTE
– Generic Packet
– Multi-hop RTT

Page 474 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
CPRI/OBSAI results
CPRI L1 Inband Protocol results

Table 44 shows the CPRI-specific L1 Inband Protocol results.
Table 44 CPRI Counts results

Rx Protocol Version Received CPRI protocol version.
Rx C&M HDLC Rate Received HDLC bit rate for the slow C&M channel.
Rx C&M Ethernet Subchannel Received subchannel number at which the control words for
Number the Ethernet channel starts within a hyperframe.
Start-up State Current state of start-up sequence
Tx Protocol Version Transmitted CPRI protocol version.
Tx C&M HDLC Rate Transmitted HDLC bit rate for the slow C&M channel.
Tx C&M Ethernet Subchannel Transmitted subchannel number at which the control words
Number for the Ethernet channel starts within a hyperframe.
Port Type Current status of port type selection (Master/Slave).
Rx Scrambler Seed The received scrambler seed value.
OBSAI Status Results

Table 45 shows the CPRI/OBSAI Error Stats test results.
Table 45 OBSAI Status results
Rx State Current state of the OBSAI receiver.
R Scrambler Seed Captured scrambler seed by the receiver.
Rx RP3 Bus FCB Sync Indicates whether RP3 Bus FCB message has been
received
Rx RP3 Bus FCB SFN Latched RP3 Bus FCB SFN value
Rx RP3 Bus FCB C1 Latched RP3 Bus FCB C1 value
CPRI/OBSAI Payload BERT results

Table 46 shows the CPRI/OBSAI payload BERT results.
Table 46 CPRI/OBSAI Payload BERT results

Pattern Sync Losses Count of the number of times pattern sync was lost since ini-
tially acquiring pattern synchronization.
Pattern Sync Loss Seconds The number of seconds in which pattern sync was lost since
initially acquiring pattern synchronization.
Bit Error Rate The ratio of pattern bit errors to received pattern bits since ini-
Bit Errors Count of the number of bit errors received since initially
acquiring pattern synchronization.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 475
Ethernet, IP, TCP/UDP, and Fibre Channel results
Table 46 CPRI/OBSAI Payload BERT results (Continued)

(Bit) Errored Seconds Count of the number of seconds containing bit errors since
Error-Free Seconds Count of the number of seconds containing no bit errors since
Error-Free Seconds % The ratio of Errored Seconds to Error-Free Seconds since ini-
Total Bits Received The total number of bits received since initially acquiring pat-
tern synchronization.
Round Trip Delay - Current (μs) The currently calculated round trip delay, expressed in micro-
seconds.
Round Trip Delay - Average (μs) The average round trip delay over the last second, expressed
in microseconds.
Round Trip Delay - Minimum (μs) The minimum round trip delay since the last restart of the
Round Trip Delay - Maximum The maximum round trip delay since the last restart of the
(μs) test, expressed in microseconds.

Test results such as link counts, statistics, error statistics, and BER results are available
when performing Ethernet, IP, TCP/UDP or Fibre Channel testing.
• If you are testing a 10 Gigabit WAN interface, SONET/SDH test results are also
available (see the T-BERD / MTS / SC Sonet / SDH, OTN and PDH Testing
Manual that shipped with your instrument or upgrade).If you are testing using
VPLS encapsulated traffic, link statistics, link counts, filter statistics, filter counts,
and BERT statistics for the customer appear in the associated “Customer” result
categories. Link statistics and link counts for the service provider are also
provided in “SP” categories.
• If you are testing using MAC-in-MAC (PBB) traffic, link statistics, link counts, filter
statistics, filter counts, and BERT statistics for the customer frames appear in the
associated “Customer” result categories. Link statistics and counts are also
provided for the backbone frames.
• If you are testing using MPLS encapsulated traffic, the standard Layer 2 and
Layer 3 result categories are provided, and test results associated with MPLS
testing appear.

Page 476 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
• In all cases, only the results applicable to your test appear in each category. For
example, if you are performing a Layer 2 Ethernet test with VLAN tagged traffic,
VPLS results and Fibre Channel results do not appear because they are not appli-
cable to your test.
FCS Errored Acterna Test Packets:
If you are running a Layer 2, 3, or 4 traffic or multiple stream application using

an Acterna Test Packet (ATP) payload, received FCS errored Acterna frames
will not impact link counts, link statistics, or error statistics.

• “LEDs” on page 478
• “Cable Diagnostic results” on page 490
• “SLA/KPI” on page 493
• “Interface results” on page 493
• “L2 Link Stats results” on page 494
• “L2 Link Counts results” on page 500
• “L2 Filter Stats results” on page 503
• “L2 Filter Counts results” on page 507
• “J-Proof (transparency) results” on page 509
• “L2 BERT Stats results” on page 510
• “CDMA Receiver Status results” on page 511
• “CDMA/GPS Receiver Log” on page 512
• “Ethernet OAM Service OAM results” on page 513
• “Ethernet OAM Service OAM MEP Discovery results” on page 516
• “Ethernet OAM L-OAM Modes results” on page 517
• “Ethernet OAM L-OAM Counts results” on page 517
• “Ethernet OAM L-OAM States results” on page 518
• “Ethernet OAM L-OAM Error History results” on page 519
• “L3/IP Config Status results” on page 524
• “Ping results” on page 526
• “Traceroute results” on page 526
• “PCS Error Stats” on page 527
• “Ethernet Per Lane results” on page 528
• “Error Stats results” on page 529
• “Capture results” on page 536
• “Sync Status Messages” on page 536

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 477
• “AutoNeg Status results” on page 536

• “Login Status results” on page 538
• “PTP Link Counts results” on page 545
• “PTP Link Stats results” on page 546
• “PTP Graphs” on page 549
• “Detailed L4 Stats” on page 541
• “Cumulative L4 results” on page 542
• “J-Profiler results” on page 543
LEDs
Table 47 describes the LEDs provided during Ethernet, IP, TCP/UDP, and Fibre
Channel testing. Only the LEDs that are applicable for your test appear in the LED
panel. For example, layer 2 Ethernet, layer 3 IP, and layer 4 TCP/UDP LEDs do not
appear if you configure your unit for a Layer 1 test. RS-FEC LEDs only appear when
running a 100 GigE RS-FEC application.
occurred.
Table 47 describes the LEDs for 100GigE RS-FEC testing, and indicates whether each
LED is applicable when testing Ethernet, IP, and Fibre Channel.
Table 47 Ethernet, IP, TCP/UDP, and Fibre Channel LEDs
Fibre Channel
TCP/UDP
LED Indicates
Ethernet
MiM
IP
Acterna Green X X X
Detect – A frame with an Acterna payload
has been detected.
Red
– An Acterna payload was detected,
and then not present for
> 1 second.

Page 478 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Table 47 Ethernet, IP, TCP/UDP, and Fibre Channel LEDs (Continued)
Fibre Channel
TCP/UDP
Ethernet
LED Indicates
MiM
IP
ATP Frame Green
Sync – Synchronization with a received
ATP frame has been achieved.
Red
– Synchronization has been lost since
the last test restart.
Frame Detect Green X X X X X
– Valid frames have been detected.
Red
– Frames were detected, and then
not present for > 1 second.
HI-BER Red (Status)
– High Bit Error Rate alarm is cur-
rently being detected 10G, 40G &
Red (History) 100G only
– High Bit Error Rate alarm was
detected at some point since the
last restart of the test.
IP Packet Green X X
Detect – An IP Packet has been detected.
Red
– An IP Packet was detected, and
then not present for > 1 second.
LOA Red
(Deskew) – Loss of Alignment (LOA) has
occurred between lanes.
Red
100G only
– Loss of Alignment (LOA) has

occurred between lanes at some
40G &
point since the last restart of the

test.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 479
Fibre Channel
TCP/UDP
Ethernet
LED Indicates
MiM
IP
LOAML Red
– Loss of Alignment Marker Lock
(LOAML) has occurred between
lanes.
Red
100G only
40G &
lanes at some point since the last
restart of the test.
LOBL Red
– Loss of Block Lock (LOBL) has
Red
100G only
40G &

test.
LPAC Red
– A valid frame was not received
within 10 seconds of the last test
start or restart.
L1 Pattern Green X X
Sync – Synchronization with the received
Layer 1 patterns has been achieved.
Red
L2 Pattern Green X X X
Red

Page 480 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Fibre Channel
TCP/UDP
Ethernet
LED Indicates
MiM
IP
Link Active Green X X X X X
– Auto-negotiation was successful,
and link is established with the
instrument’s link partner.
Red
– A link to the instrument’s link part-
ner has been lost since the last test
restart.
Local Fault Red (Status)
Detect – No local faults are currently being
10G, 40G &

detected.
100G only
Red (History)
– A local fault occurred since the last
test restart.
Loss of Align. Red (Status)
100G RS-FEC only
100G RS-FEC only

– Loss of alignment has been
detected.
Red (History)
– A loss of alignment occurred since
Marker Lock Green

– (Alignment) Marker Lock has been
achieved across all lanes.
100G only
Red
40G &
– Alignment Marker Lock was lost on

some lane since the las test restart.
Pause Frame Green X X
Detect – Pause frames have been detected.
Red
– Pause frames were detected, and
then were not present for > 1 sec-
ond.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 481
Fibre Channel
TCP/UDP
Ethernet
LED Indicates
MiM
IP
PBB Frame Green X
Detect – PBB (MAC-in-MAC) frames have
been detected.
Red
– PBB frames were detected, and
ond.
Remote Fault Red
Detect – No remote faults are currently being
10G, 40G &

detected.
100G only
Red
– A remote fault has occurred since
RS-FEC Red (Status) 100G RS-FEC only
100G RS-FEC only

LOAMP – Loss of Alignment Marker Payload
Sequence has been detected.
Red (History)
– A Loss of Alignment Marker Pay-
load Sequence occurred since the
last test restart.
RS-FEC LOA Red (Status)

100G RS-FEC only
100G RS-FEC only
32G Fibre Channel

detected.
Red (History)
RS-FEC HI Red (Status)

100G RS-FEC only
100G RS-FEC only
32G Fibre Channel
SER – A high symbol error rate alarm has

been detected.
Red (History)
– A high symbol error rate alarm was
detected since the last test restart.

Page 482 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Fibre Channel
TCP/UDP
Ethernet
LED Indicates
MiM
IP
Signal Pres- Green X X X X X
ent1 – A signal is present.
Red
– Received signal has been lost since
the last test start or restart.
Status Green X X X X X
– N/A
Red
– An error has been recorded by the
instrument, as shown in a red Sum-
mary Status window.
SVLAN Frame Green X X X
Detect – SVLAN tagged Ethernet frames
have been detected.
Red
– SVLAN tagged Ethernet frames
were detected, and then not present
for > 1 second.
Sync Acquired Green X X X X X
Red
TCP Packet Green X
Detect – TCP packets have been detected.
Red
– TCP packets were detected, and
UDP Packet Green X
Detect – UDP packets have been detected.
Red
– UDP packets were detected, and

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 483
Fibre Channel
TCP/UDP
Ethernet
LED Indicates
MiM
IP
VLAN Frame Green X X X
Detect – VLAN tagged Ethernet frames have
been detected.
Red
– VLAN tagged Ethernet frames were
detected, and then not present for
> 1 second.
VLAN Stack Green X X X
Frame Detect – VLAN stack tagged Ethernet frames
have been detected.
Red
– VLAN stack tagged Ethernet frames
for > 1 second.
CDMA/GPS Green X
Sync2 – The instrument is within a CDMA/
(OWD Time GPS network and has obtain syn-
Source) chronization with the CDMA base
station/GPS.
Red
– The instrument obtained synchroni-
zation with the CDMA base station/
GPS, and then it was not present
for > 1 second.
1PPS Sync2 Green X
(OWD Time – The instrument is receiving the data
Source) that is required to synchronize its
internal clock with the GPS time
received from the 1 PPS signal.
After the CDMA/GPS Sync LED illu-
minates, this LED may take up to fif-
teen additional seconds to
illuminate.
Red
– The instrument synchronized the
clock with the 1PPS signal, and
then it was not present for > 1 sec-
ond.
1. The Signal Present LED is not applicable when testing 10/100/1000 Ethernet.

Page 484 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
2. If your instrument is equipped with the One Way Delay option, these LEDs appear in the LED panel.
Table 48 describes the LEDs for 25GigE testing, and indicates whether each LED is applicable when
testing Ethernet, IP, and Fibre Channel.(Please check the table below)
Table 48 Ethernet, IP, TCP/UDP, and Fibre Channel LEDs
Fibre Channel
TCP/UDP
Ethernet
LED Indicates
MiM
IP
Acterna Green X X X
Detect – A frame with an Acterna payload
has been detected.
Red
– An Acterna payload was detected,
and then not present for
> 1 second.
ATP Frame Green
Sync – Synchronization with a received
ATP frame has been achieved.
Red
Frame Detect Green X X X X X
Red
– Frames were detected, and then
not present for > 1 second.
HI-BER Red (Status)
– High Bit Error Rate alarm is cur-
rently being detected
10G, 40G &
100G only
Red (History)
– High Bit Error Rate alarm was
detected at some point since the
last restart of the test.
IP Packet Green X X
Detect – An IP Packet has been detected.
Red
– An IP Packet was detected, and

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 485
Fibre Channel
TCP/UDP
Ethernet
LED Indicates
MiM
IP
LOAML Red
lanes.
Red
100G only
40G &
lanes at some point since the last
restart of the test.
LOBL Red
Red
100G only
40G &

test.
LPAC Red
– A valid frame was not received
within 10 seconds of the last test
start or restart.
L1 Pattern Green X X
Red
L2 Pattern Green X X X
Red

Page 486 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Fibre Channel
TCP/UDP
Ethernet
LED Indicates
MiM
IP
Link Active Green X X X X X
– Auto-negotiation was successful,
and link is established with the
instrument’s link partner.
Red
– A link to the instrument’s link part-
ner has been lost since the last test
restart.
Local Fault Red (Status)
Detect – No local faults are currently being
10G, 40G &

detected.
100G only
Red (History)
– A local fault occurred since the last
test restart.
Loss of Align. Red (Status)
100G RS-FEC only
100G RS-FEC only

detected.
Red (History)
Marker Lock Green

– (Alignment) Marker Lock has been
achieved across all lanes.
100G only
Red
40G &
– Alignment Marker Lock was lost on

some lane since the las test restart.
Pause Frame Green X X
Detect – Pause frames have been detected.
Red
– Pause frames were detected, and
ond.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 487
Fibre Channel
TCP/UDP
Ethernet
LED Indicates
MiM
IP
PBB Frame Green X
Detect – PBB (MAC-in-MAC) frames have
been detected.
Red
– PBB frames were detected, and
ond.
Remote Fault Red
Detect – No remote faults are currently being
10G, 40G &

detected.
100G only
Red
– A remote fault has occurred since
RS-FEC Red (Status) 100G RS-FEC only
100G RS-FEC only

LOAMP – Loss of Alignment Marker Payload
Sequence has been detected.
Red (History)
– A Loss of Alignment Marker Pay-
load Sequence occurred since the
last test restart.
RS-FEC HI Red (Status)

100G RS-FEC only
100G RS-FEC only
32G Fibre Channel

SER – A high symbol error rate alarm has
been detected.
Red (History)
– A high symbol error rate alarm was
detected since the last test restart.
Signal Pres- Green X X X X X

ent1 – A signal is present.
Red
– Received signal has been lost since
the last test start or restart.
Status Green X X X X X
– N/A
Red
– An error has been recorded by the
instrument, as shown in a red Sum-
mary Status window.

Page 488 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Fibre Channel
TCP/UDP
Ethernet
LED Indicates
MiM
IP
SVLAN Frame Green X X X
Detect – SVLAN tagged Ethernet frames
have been detected.
Red
– SVLAN tagged Ethernet frames
for > 1 second.
Sync Acquired Green X X X X X
Red
TCP Packet Green X
Detect – TCP packets have been detected.
Red
– TCP packets were detected, and
UDP Packet Green X
Detect – UDP packets have been detected.
Red
– UDP packets were detected, and
VLAN Frame Green X X X
Detect – VLAN tagged Ethernet frames have
been detected.
Red
– VLAN tagged Ethernet frames were
detected, and then not present for
> 1 second.
VLAN Stack Green X X X
Frame Detect – VLAN stack tagged Ethernet frames
have been detected.
Red
– VLAN stack tagged Ethernet frames
for > 1 second.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 489
Fibre Channel
TCP/UDP
Ethernet
LED Indicates
MiM
IP
CDMA/GPS Green X
Sync2 – The instrument is within a CDMA/
(OWD Time GPS network and has obtain syn-
Source) chronization with the CDMA base
station/GPS.
Red
– The instrument obtained synchroni-
zation with the CDMA base station/
GPS, and then it was not present
for > 1 second.
1PPS Sync2 Green X
(OWD Time – The instrument is receiving the data
Source) that is required to synchronize its
internal clock with the GPS time
received from the 1 PPS signal.
After the CDMA/GPS Sync LED illu-
minates, this LED may take up to fif-
teen additional seconds to
illuminate.
Red
– The instrument synchronized the
clock with the 1PPS signal, and
then it was not present for > 1 sec-
ond.
2. If your instrument is equipped with the One Way Delay option, these LEDs appear in the LED panel.
Cable Diagnostic results

The Cable Diagnostics screen shows measurements associated with running cable
diagnostics on an electrical link.
After running the Cable Diagnostics tool, the screen lists results for one of the following
states:
• Active 10M or 100M link. If a 10M or 100M link is established, the MDI/MDIX
status (see “MDI or MDIX Status result” on page 491) is reported.

Page 490 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
• Active 1G electrical link. If a 1G electrical link is established, the pair status,

polarity, and pair skew for each MDI pair is reported. See “Skew (ns) result” on
page 492, “Polarity result” on page 492 and “Skew (ns) result” on page 492.
• Inactive link. If the link is inactive, the unit indicates the type of fault and the
fault’s relative distance from the tester (see “Distance (m) result” on page 492).
Results associated with cable diagnostics are also provided in the L2 Link Stats result
category (see “L2 Link Stats results” on page 494).
MDI or MDIX Status result

The MDI/MDIX Status result indicates the resolved wiring (MDI, or MDIX) of the near
end unit’s RJ-45 jack. For example, if the far end can not auto-configure its interface,
(in other words, the wiring is fixed), this result can help you determine whether a straight
through or crossover cable is being used or the MDI/MDIX wiring of the far end port.
• You must know the fixed MDI/MDIX status of the far end port to determine the
type of cable using the near end MDI/MDIX Status result. For example, if you
know that the far end port is fixed at MDI, and the near end port detects MDIX,
then you can conclude that a straight through cable is used.
• You must know the cable type used to determine the MDI/MDIX status of the far
end port using the near end MDI/MDIX Status result. For example, if you know
you are using a straight through cable, and the near end port detects MDIX, you
can conclude that the wiring at the far end port is MDI.
Table 49 illustrates each of the possible resolutions.
Table 49 Transport Module Ethernet MDI/MDIX Resolution

Far end Near end
Cable
port port
MDIX straight through MDI
MDI cross over MDI
MDI straight through MDIX
MDIX cross over MDIX
NOTE:
If the speed detected on the line is 1G electrical, the MDI/MDIX Status results
are not applicable and therefore do not appear on the Cable Diagnostics
screen.
Fault Type result

If a link is inactive, and a fault is detected, the instrument indicates the type of fault
detected (Open, Short, or Unknown) and the fault’s relative distance from the tester
within +/- 1 meter.
If you do not connect the cable to a far end device (completing the circuit), you can also
use the Open detection feature to measure the length of a cable.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 491
Fault types are defined as follows:
Open—Indicates there is a cut on the pair (or that the cable is not connected to a device
at the far end of the circuit), and that the tester has detected an impedance exceeding
333 ohms. The distance from the near end tester to the end of the cable (or the cut) is
also provided.
Short—Indicates a positive and negative line on the same pair are touching, and that
the tester has detected an impedance less than 33 ohms.
Unknown—Indicates the tester has detected impedance outside of the ranges stated
for Open and Short faults, or that the cable is properly terminated into another Ethernet
port. Unknown does not necessarily indicate that a fault was detected.
NOTE:
If the far end of the cable is connected to a powered down IP phone, and the
phone is an older model, there is a filter that connects between pairs 1-2 and
3-6 in the phone. Depending on the characteristics of the filter, your tester may
report a fault for pairs 1-2 and 3-6.
Distance (m) result

For each fault detected, the distance from the Dual Module Carrier, Transport Module,
and MSAM to the fault is listed. If no fault is detected, N/A appears.
Skew (ns) result

The Skew result is a measurement of timing differences between the MDI pairs on
active 1G electrical links. Timing differences may occur for a variety of reasons. For
example, if different insulating materials are used on the pairs, a variance in the signal
velocity (skew) may occur. If the skew is significant, transmission of the signal may be
impaired to such a degree that the received signal can not be synchronized.
Pair skew is reported in +/- 8 ns increments.
Polarity result
The Polarity result indicates the polarity of each MDI pair on active 1G electrical links,
indicating how each pair is physically wired to the unit’s port.
• Normal (+) indicates a normal polarity for the pair.
• Inverted (-) indicates an inverted polarity for the pair.
Pair result
The Pair results for 1G electrical links provide the current pair assignments for the link.
MDI pairs for 1G electrical links are assigned during the process of auto-negotiation;
therefore, if for any reason the link becomes inactive, and then the link is re-established,

Page 492 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
the pair assignments could potentially change. For example, the first time you establish
a link after auto-negotiation, the following pairs could be assigned:
Table 50 MDI pair assignments
MDI0 MDI1 MDI2 MDI3

1-2 3-6 4-5 7-8
If the link goes down (becomes inactive), and then is re-established, the following pairs
could be assigned:
Table 51 MDIX pair assignments
MDI0 MDI1 MDI2 MDI3

3-6 1-2 7-8 4-5
SLA/KPI
The Summary SLA/KPI results provide the results relevant to the Service Level Agree-
ment (SLA) and Key Performance Indicators (KPI).
Interface results
Table 52 describes the Interface/Signal results.
Table 52 Interface/Signal results

Link Loss Seconds Number of seconds during which the link was down (lost).
Local Fault Seconds Displays the number of test seconds during which a local fault
occurred, indicating that the Transport Module could not detect
a received signal, could not obtain PCS block synchronization,
or detects 16 or more errored PCS block sync headers in a
125 μs period. Only applicable when testing 10 Gigabit Ethernet
interfaces.
Optical Rx Level (dBm) Displays the receive level in dBm when testing optical interfaces
using average power consumption (sum of all lanes).
Optical Rx Overload Displays ON if the received optical power level is greater than
the receiver shutdown specification as stated in the specifica-
tions appendix of the Getting Started guide that shipped with
your instrument, or as stated in the vendor specifications for the
transceiver (SFP, XFP, QSFP+ or CFP) you have inserted.
Remote Fault Seconds Displays the number of test seconds during which the instru-
ment transmits a remote fault indication in response to the
receipt of a remote fault indication from its link partner. Only
applicable when testing 10 Gigabit, 40 Gigabit, and
100 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 493
Table 52 Interface/Signal results (Continued)

Rx Frequency (Hz) Frequency of the clock recovered from the received signal,
expressed in Hz.
Rx Freq Deviation (ppm) Current received frequency deviation. Displayed in PPM.
Rx Freq Max Deviation (ppm) Maximum received frequency deviation.
Signal Losses Number of times signal was lost during current test.
Signal Loss Seconds Number of seconds during which a signal was not present.
Sync Loss Seconds Number of seconds during which a synchronization was not
present.
Tx Clock Source Shows the source of the transmit timing standard
Tx Frequency (Hz) Current transmitter clock frequency, expressed in Hz.
Tx Freq Deviation (ppm) Current transmitted frequency deviation. Displayed in PPM.
Tx Freq Max Deviation (ppm) Maximum transmitted frequency deviation.
Wavelength Displays the current wavelength of the SFP in use.
Table 53 describes the Interface/Lambda results.
Table 53 Interface/Lambda Results (40G/100G applications only)

Optical Rx Level (dBm) Displays the receive level in dBm of each lane when testing some
optical interfaces.
QSFP/CFP Per Lane Sig- Verifies the presence of an active signal in each lane. Designation
nal Present of Not Ready indicates presence of device in unit in powered down
condition.
QSFP/CFP Rx Level per Displays the individual power for each lane and total optical power
Lambda (dbm) received in all lanes.
QSFP/CFP Tx Level per Displays the individual power for each lane and total optical power
Lambda (dbm transmitted in all lanes.
L2 Link Stats results

Table 54 describes the L2 Link Stats and L2 Customer Link Stats results such as the
average frame rate, peak frame rate, and the maximum, minimum, and average round
trip delay measurements. Only results that are applicable to your test appear in the
category. For example, the MPLS results only appear when your unit is configured to
test using layer 3, MPLS encapsulated traffic. If your unit is configured for a Layer 2
test, MPLS results will not appear.
When testing VPLS or MPLS-TP encapsulated traffic, link statistic results appear in the
L2 Customer Link Stats and the L2 SP Link Stats categories.

Page 494 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
When testing EoE encapsulated traffic, link statistic results appear in the L2 Customer
Link Stats and the L2 Backbone Link Stats categories.
Table 54 L2 Link Stats results

B-Tag Displays the following for the last received backbone frame:
Value
– Displays the value carried in the B-Tag field (VLAN ID + Priority + Drop
Eligible) in a hexadecimal format.
VLAN ID
– Displays the ID for the backbone VLAN used as the path to the desti-
nation carried in the frame.
Priority
– Displays the VLAN priority carried in the frame.
DEI
– Displays the drop eligible bit carried in the frame.
Current Util, % The current bandwidth utilized by received Broadcast, Unicast, or Multi-
cast
traffic expressed as a percentage of the line rate of available bandwidth.
This measurement is an average taken over the prior second of test time.
Delay (μs), Round You must originate an Acterna payload to measure round trip delay. If a
Trip unit is in loopback mode, or if the far end unit is not looped back, invalid
results appear because the unit is not originating the traffic.
Before measuring delay on 10 Gigabit Ethernet or
10 Gigabit Fibre Channel circuits, you can indicate whether or not you
want to make the measurement using a high or low degree of precision. If
your delay results say “Out of Range”, change your setting to low preci-
sion, and then restart the measurement.
Average
The average round trip delay calculated in microseconds, with a resolu-
tion as follows:
– 10/100/1000 and 1 GigE Ethernet: 2.048 μs (ATPv2), 10ns (ATPv3-
1GigE)
– 10 Gigabit Ethernet: 2.048 μs (ATPv2), 10ns (ATPv3)
– 1G/2G/4Gigabit Fibre Channel: 2.409 μs
– 10 Gigabit Fibre Channel: 2.008 μs
– 10GigE eCPRI: 2.048 μs (ATPv2), 10ns (ATPv3)
– 25GigE eCPRI: 2.048 μs (ATPv2), 10ns (ATPv3), 1ns (ATPv4)
– 40 Gigabit Ethernet 10ns (ATPv3)
Current
– The current round trip delay calculated in microseconds.
Maximum
– The maximum round trip delay calculated in microseconds.
Minimum
– The minimum round trip delay calculated in microseconds.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 495
Table 54 L2 Link Stats results (Continued)

EoE-Tag Displays the following for the last received backbone frame:
Service ID
– Displays the service ID carried in the last frame.
TTL
– Displays the Time To Live carried in the last frame.
Frame Rate Current
– The current rate of received frames taken over the prior second of test
time.
Average
– The average rate is calculated over the time period elapsed since the
last test restart.
Minimum
– The minimum rate is taken over a one second period.
Peak
– The maximum rate is taken over a one second period since frame
detection.
All rates are expressed in frames per second.
Frame Size The average, maximum, and minimum size of frames received since
frame detection.
I-Tag Displays the following for the last received backbone frame:
Value
– Displays the value carried in the I-Tag field (Service ID + Priority + DEI
+ Use Customer Address) in a hexadecimal format.
Service ID
Priority
– Displays the priority carried in the last frame.
DEI
– Displays the drop eligible bit carried in the last frame.
Use Customer Address
– Displays the use customer address bit carried in the last frame.
MPLS Label Depth Displays the maximum number of MPLS labels for all frames received
Max since starting the test.
MPLS Label Depth Displays the minimum number of MPLS labels for all frames received
Min since starting the test.
MPLS1 ID Displays label 1 of the last received MPLS encapsulated frame.
MPLS1 Priority Displays the label 1 priority of the last received MPLS encapsulated
frame.
MPLS1 TTL Displays the label 1 TTL value for the last received MPLS encapsulated
frame.
MPLS2 ID Displays label 2 of the last received MPLS encapsulated frame.

Page 496 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018

MPLS2 Priority Displays the label 2 priority of the last received MPLS encapsulated
frame.
MPLS2 TTL Displays the label 2 TTL value for the last received MPLS encapsulated
frame.
MPLS-TP Label Displays the maximum number of MPLS-TP labels for all frames received
Depth Max since starting the test. Result appears in the L2 SP Link Stats category.
MPLS-TP Label Displays the minimum number of MPLS-TP labels for all frames received
Depth Min since starting the test. Result appears in the L2 SP Link Stats category.
MPLS-TP Tunnel Displays the tunnel label of the last MPLS-TP encapsulated frame.
Label
MPLS-TP Tunnel Pri- Displays the tunnel priority of the last MPLS-TP encapsulated frame.
ority
MPLS-TP Tunnel TTL Displays the tunnel TTL value of the last MPLS-TP encapsulated frame.
MPLS-TP VC Label Displays the VC label of the last MPLS-TP encapsulated frame.
MPLS-TP VC Priority Displays the VC priority of the last MPLS-TP encapsulated frame.
MPLS-TP VC TTL Displays the VC TTL value of the last MPLS-TP encapsulated frame.
One Way Delay (μs) Average
The average one way delay calculated in microseconds, with a resolution
as follows:
– 10/100/1000 and 1 GigE Ethernet: 2.048 μs(ATPv2), 10ns (ATPv3-
1GigE)
Current
– The current one way delay calculated in microseconds.
Maximum
– The maximum one way delay calculated in microseconds.
Minimum
– The minimum one way delay calculated in microseconds.
One Way Delay % The ratio of packets containing a GPS time stamp to the total number of
Valid Acterna Test Packets received.
OWD ATP Frame The number of ATP-GPS frames received since test restart.
Count

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 497

Packet Jitter (μs) Instantaneous
– The current Packet Jitter measured over the prior second of test time.
Average
– The smoothed average value of the packet delay variation since the
last test restart (per RFC 1889), calculated in microseconds.
Max Average
– The maximum Packet Jitter, Avg (μs) measured since the last test
restart, calculated in microseconds.
Peak
– The highest packet delay variation measured since the last test restart,
calculated in microseconds.
Preceding SVLANs Displays the SVLAN ID, priority, and DEI of stacked VLANs.
Rx Mbps, Cur L1 The current bandwidth utilized by the received traffic expressed in L1
megabits per second, including the preamble, start of frame delimiter, and
minimum inter-frame gap.
Rx Mbps/Kbps L1, The average L1 rate of received frames calculated since the last test
Average restart.
Rx Mbps/Kbps L1, The minimum current L1 rate of received frames calculated since the last
Minimum test restart.
Rx Mbps/Kbps L1, The maximum current L1 rate of received frames calculated since the last
Maximum test restart.
Rx Mbps, Cur L2 The current data rate of received frames calculated over the prior second
of test time. Data rate is the frame bandwidth, excluding the preamble,
start of frame delimiter, and minimum inter-frame gap.
Rx Mbps/Kbps L2, The average data rate of received frames calculated since the last test
Average restart
Rx Mbps/Kbps L2, The minimum current data rate of received frames calculated since the
Minimum last test restart.
Rx Mbps/Kbps L2, The maximum current data rate of received frames calculated since the
Maximum last test restart.
Rx Pause Length The duration, in milliseconds of currently received pause frames taken
(ms) over the prior second of test time, and the minimum and maximum length
since starting or restarting the test.
S-Tag The speed tag (S-Tag) is a backbone tag that designates the path for the
backbone frame to the destination.
VLAN ID
– Displays the ID for the backbone VLAN used as the path to the desti-
nation carried in the frame.
Priority
DEI

Page 498 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018

Svc Disruption (μs) The service disruption time (maximum inter-frame gap) when service
switches to a protect line calculated in microseconds. Result appears in
the L2 SP Link Stats category.
SVLAN Frame DEI Displays the DEI of the last received tagged frame.
SVLAN ID Displays the SVLAN ID of the last received tagged frame.
SVLAN User Priority Displays the SVLAN priority of the last received tagged frame.
Total Util % Average
– The average bandwidth utilized by the received traffic, expressed as a
percentage of the line rate of available bandwidth calculated over the
time period since the last test restart.
Current
– The current bandwidth utilized by the received traffic expressed as a
percentage of the line rate of available bandwidth. This measurement
is an average taken over the prior second of test time.
Minimum
– The minimum bandwidth utilized by the received traffic since the last
test restart expressed as a percentage of the line rate of available
bandwidth.
Peak
– The peak bandwidth utilized by the received traffic since the last test
restart expressed as a percentage of the line rate of available band-
width.
NOTE: The bandwidth utilization calculations are made on per-second
boundaries and may happen in the middle of a large frame, causing the
utilization to be reduced.
Tx Mbps, Cur L1 The current bandwidth utilized by the transmitted traffic expressed in
megabits per second. This measurement is an average taken over the
prior second of test time.
Tx Mbps, Cur L2 The current data rate of transmitted frames calculated over the prior sec-
ond of test time. Data rate is the frame bandwidth, excluding the pream-
ble, start of frame delimiter, and minimum inter-frame gap.
VLAN ID Displays the VLAN ID of the last received tagged frame.
VLAN User Priority Displays the VLAN priority of the last received tagged frame.
VPLS Label Depth Displays the maximum number of VPLS labels for all frames received
Max since starting the test. Result appears in the L2 SP Link Stats category.
VPLS Label Depth Displays the minimum number of VPLS labels for all frames received
Min since starting the test. Result appears in the L2 SP Link Stats category.
VPLS Tunnel Label Displays the tunnel label of the last received VPLS encapsulated frame.
VPLS Tunnel Priority Displays the tunnel priority of the last received VPLS encapsulated frame.
VPLS Tunnel TTL Displays the tunnel TTL value of the last received VPLS encapsulated
frame.
VPLS VC Label Displays the VC label of the last received VPLS encapsulated frame.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 499

VPLS VC Priority Displays the VC priority of the last received VPLS encapsulated frame.
VPLS VC TTL Displays the VC TTL value of the last received VPLS encapsulated
frame.
L2 Link Counts results

Table 55 describes the L2 Link Counts results, such as the number of received frames,
number of transmitted frames, and number of unicast, multicast, or broadcast frames.
The Received Frames result includes errored frames; all other results count valid
frames only.
When testing VPLS or MPLS-TP encapsulated traffic, the link count results appear in
the L2 Customer Link Counts and the L2 SP Link Counts categories.
When testing MiM encapsulated traffic, the link count results appear in the L2 Customer
Link Counts and the L2 Backbone Link Counts categories.
Table 55 L2 Link Counts results

Jumbo Frames Jumbo/Oversized frames are counted in this category.
This includes count of received Ethernet frames with a length greater
than:
1518 bytes (non-tagged frames)
1522 bytes (VLAN tagged frames)
1526 bytes (Q-in-Q encapsulated frames)
1024 - 1518/1522/1526 A count of received Customer Ethernet frames between:
– 1024 bytes and 1518 bytes
– 1024 to 1522 bytes for VLAN-tagged frames
– 1024 to 1526 bytes for Q-in-Q encapsulated frames
1024 - < Jumbo Frames A count of received Ethernet frames between 1024 bytes and less
than Jumbo frames
1024-2140 Byte Frames A count of received Fibre Channel frames with lengths between 1024
and 2140 bytes, inclusive.
128-255 Byte Frames A count of received Ethernet frames with lengths between 128 and
255 bytes, inclusive.

Page 500 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Table 55 L2 Link Counts results (Continued)

64 Byte Frames A count of received Ethernet frames with a length of 64 bytes.
65-127 Byte Frames A count of received Ethernet frames with lengths between 65 and 127
bytes, inclusive.
Broadcast Frames The number of Ethernet broadcast frames received since the last test
restart.
Class 1 Frames A count of received Fibre Channel Class 1 frames since the last test
start or restart.
start or restart.
start or restart.
Class F Frames A count of received Fibre Channel Class F frames since the last test
start or restart.
Customer Tx Frame A count of the total number of VPLS customer frame bytes transmit-
Bytes ted since the test was started. The count starts at the Destination
Address and continues to the Frame Check Sequence. The count
does not include the preamble.
Far End B-B Credits Count of the number of credits communicated by the far end during
ELP login.
MPLS-TP Frames A count of received MPLS-TP frames since the test was started,
including errored frames. Appears in the L2 SP Link Counts category.
Multicast Frames The number of Ethernet multicast frames received since the last test
restart.
Near-end B-B Credits Count of the number of credits communicated by the near-end during
Implicit login.
Pause Frames A count of pause frames received from a remote Ethernet device.
Pause frames are utilized for flow control and alert the transmitting
device that it must reduce the outgoing frame rate or risk a receiver
overflow on the far end, resulting in dropped traffic.
Received Frames A count of frames received since the last test restart, including
errored frames.
Rx Acterna Frames A count of received Acterna frames, including errored frames.
Rx Acterna OWD The number of ATP-GPS frames received since test restart.
Frames

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 501

Rx Collisions A count of the number of times the unit has received a jam signal
while it was not transmitting frames. Result only appears for half-
duplex 10/100 Ethernet tests.
Rx Frame Bytes A count of the total number of frame bytes received since the test was
started. The count starts at the Destination Address and continues to
the Frame Check Sequence.
– The count does not include the preamble or start of frame delim-
iter.
– The count does include errored frames.
Rx LBM Frames A count of the total number of LBM frames received since the last test
restart.
Rx LBR Frames A count of the total number of LBR frames received since the last test
restart.
Rx MPLS Frames A count of received MPLS frames since the test was started, including
errored frames.
Rx Q-in-Q Frames A count of received QinQ frames since the test was started, including
errored frames.
Rx R_RDYs A count of received Fibre Channel Rx_RDY primitives since the last
test start or restart.
Rx Stacked VLAN A count of received stacked VLAN frames as defined in IEEE 802.p/q
Frames since the test was started, including errored frames.
Rx VLAN Frames A count of received VLAN frames as defined in IEEE 802.p/q since
the test was started, including errored frames.
Rx VPLS Frames A count of received VPLS frames since the test was started, including
errored frames. Appears in the L2 SP Link Counts category.
Span Tree Frames A count of received 802.1d spanning tree frames since frame detec-
tion after the last test start or restart.
Transmitted Frames A count of transmitted frames since the last test restart.
Tx Acterna Frames A count of transmitted Acterna frames since the last test restart.
Tx Avail B-B Credit, Cur- A count of the current number of credits the transmitter can use to
rent send frames. Each time a frame is transmitted, the count decreases
by one; each time a frame is acknowledged from the far end through
an R_RDY, the count increases by one, up to the maximum value
established during login.
Tx Collisions A count of the number of times the unit has transmitted a frame, and
then received a jam signal in the time slot for the frame. Result only
appears for half duplex 10/100 Ethernet tests.
Tx Frame Bytes A count of the total number of frame bytes transmitted since the test
was started. The count starts at the Destination Address and contin-
ues to the Frame Check Sequence. The count does not include the
preamble.

Page 502 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018

Tx Late Collisions A count of the number of times the unit has transmitted a frame, and
then experiences a collision more than 64 byte times after the trans-
mission begins. Result only appears for half-duplex 10/100 Ethernet
tests.
Tx LBM Frames A count of the total number of LBM frames transmitted since the last
test restart
Tx R_RDYs A count of transmitted Fibre Channel Rx_RDY primitives since the
last test start or restart.
Unicast Frames The number of Ethernet unicast frames received since the last test
restart.
L2 Filter Stats results

Table 56 describes the L2 Filter Stats and L2 Customer Filter Stats results for filtered
traffic such as the average frame rate, peak frame rate, and the maximum, minimum,
and average round trip delay measurements.
When testing VPLS or MPLS-TP encapsulated traffic, the Layer 2 filter statistic results
appear in the L2 Customer Filter Stats category.
When testing MiM encapsulated traffic, the Layer 2 filter statistic results appear in the
L2 Customer Filter Stats and L2 Backbone Filter Stats categories.
Table 56 L2 Filter Stats and L2 Customer Filter Stats

B-Tag Displays the following for the last filtered backbone frame:
Value
– Displays the value carried in the B-Tag field (VLAN ID + Priority +
Drop Eligible) in a hexadecimal format.
VLAN ID
– Displays the ID for the backbone VLAN used as the path to the
destination carried in the frame.
Priority
DEI

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 503
Table 56 L2 Filter Stats and L2 Customer Filter Stats (Continued)

Delay (μs) Average
The average round trip delay calculated in microseconds, with a res-
olution as follows:
– 10/100/1000 and 1 GigE Ethernet: 2.048 μs (ATPv2), 10ns
(ATPv3- 1GigE)
– 10GigE eCPRI: 2.048 μs (ATPv2), 10ns (ATPv3)
– 25GigE eCPRI: 2.048 μs (ATPv2), 10ns (ATPv3), 1ns (ATPv4)
Current
– The current round trip delay calculated in microseconds.
Maximum
– The maximum round trip delay calculated in microseconds.
Minimum
– The minimum round trip delay calculated in microseconds.
NOTE:
You must originate an Acterna payload to measure round trip delay.
If a unit is in loopback mode, or if the far end unit is not looped back,
invalid results appear because the unit is not originating the traffic.
Before measuring delay on 10 Gigabit Ethernet or
10 Gigabit Fibre Channel circuits, you can indicate whether or not
you want to make the measurement using a high or low degree of
precision. If your delay results say “Out of Range”, change your set-
ting to low precision, and then restart the measurement.
Frame Rate Current
– The current rate of filtered frames taken over the prior second of
test time.
Average
– The average rate is calculated over the time period that elapsed
Minimum
– The minimum rate is taken over a one second period.
Peak
– The maximum rate is taken over a one second period since
frame detection.
All rates are expressed in frames per second.
Frame Size The average, maximum, and minimum size of filtered frames since
frame detection.

Page 504 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018

I-Tag Displays the following for the last filtered backbone frame:
Value
– Displays the value carried in the I-Tag field (Service ID + Priority
+ DEI + Use Customer Address) in a hexadecimal format.
Service ID
Priority
– Displays the priority carried in the last frame.
DEI
– Displays the drop eligible bit carried in the last frame.
Use Customer Address
– Displays the use customer address bit carried in the last frame.
MPLS1 ID Displays label 1 of the last filtered MPLS encapsulated frame.
MPLS1 Priority Displays the label 1 priority of the last filtered MPLS encapsulated
frame.
MPLS1 TTL Displays the label 1 TTL value for the last filtered MPLS encapsu-
lated frame.
MPLS2 ID Displays label 2 of the last filtered MPLS encapsulated frame.
MPLS2 Priority Displays the label 2 priority of the last filtered MPLS encapsulated
frame.
MPLS2 TTL Displays the label 2 TTL value for the last filtered MPLS encapsu-
lated frame.
MPLS-TP Tunnel Label Displays the tunnel label of the last filtered MPLS-TP encapsulated
frame.
MPLS-TP Tunnel Priority Displays the tunnel priority of the last filtered MPLS-TP encapsu-
lated frame.
MPLS-TP Tunnel TTL Displays the tunnel TTL value of the last filtered MPLS-TP encapsu-
lated frame.
MPLS-TP VC Label Displays the VC label of the last filtered MPLS-TP encapsulated
frame.
MPLS-TP VC Priority Displays the VC priority of the last filtered MPLS-TP encapsulated
frame.
MPLS-TP VC TTL Displays the VC TTL value of the last filtered MPLS-TP encapsu-
lated frame.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 505

One Way Delay (μs) Average
The average one way delay calculated in microseconds, with a res-
olution as follows:
– 10/100/1000 and 1 GigE Ethernet: 2.048 ms
– 10 Gigabit Ethernet: 2.048 ms
– 1G/2G/4Gigabit Fibre Channel: 2.409 ms
– 10 Gigabit Fibre Channel: 2.008 ms
Current
– The current one way delay calculated in microseconds.
Maximum
– The maximum one way delay calculated in microseconds.
Minimum
– The minimum one way delay calculated in microseconds.
One Way Delay % Valid The ratio of packets containing a GPS timestamp to the total num-
ber of Acterna Test Packets received.
OWD ATP Frame Count The number of ATP-GPS frames received since test restart.
Packet Jitter (μs) Instantaneous
– The current Packet Jitter measured over the prior second of test
time.
Average
– The smoothed average value of the packet delay variation since
the last test restart (per RFC 1889), calculated in microseconds.
Max Average
– The maximum Packet Jitter, Avg (μs) measured since the last
test restart, calculated in microseconds.
Peak
– The highest packet delay variation measured since the last test
restart, calculated in microseconds.
Rx Acterna OWD Frames The number of filtered ATP-GPS frames received since test restart.
Rx Mbps, Cur L1 The current bandwidth utilized by the filtered traffic expressed in
megabits per second. This measurement is an average taken over
the prior second of test time.
Rx Mbps, Cur L2 The current data rate of filtered frames calculated over the prior sec-
ond of test time. Data rate is the frame bandwidth, excluding the
preamble, start of frame delimiter, and minimum inter-frame gap.
Rx Stacked VLAN Frames A count of received stacked VLAN frames as defined in IEEE 802.p/
q since the test was started, including errored frames.
SVLANx ID, PRI, DEI Displays the SVLAN ID, priority, and DEI of each VLAN in the stack.
Svc Disruption (μs) The service disruption time (maximum inter-frame gap) when ser-
vice switches to a protect line calculated in microseconds.

Page 506 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018

– The average bandwidth utilized by the filtered traffic, expressed
as a percentage of the line rate of available bandwidth calculated
over the time period since the last test restart.
Current
– The current bandwidth utilized by the filtered traffic expressed as
a percentage of the line rate of available bandwidth. This mea-
surement is an average taken over the prior second of test time.
Minimum
– The minimum bandwidth utilized by the filtered traffic since the
last test restart expressed as a percentage of the line rate of
available bandwidth.
Peak
– The peak bandwidth utilized by the filtered traffic since the last
test restart expressed as a percentage of the line rate of avail-
able bandwidth.
NOTE: The bandwidth utilization calculations are made on per-sec-
ond boundaries and may happen in the middle of a large frame,
causing the utilization to be reduced.
VLAN ID Displays the VLAN ID of the last filtered tagged frame.
VLAN User Priority Displays the VLAN priority of the last filtered tagged frame.
VPLS Tunnel Label Displays the tunnel label of the last filtered VPLS encapsulated
frame.
VPLS Tunnel Priority Displays the tunnel priority of the last filtered VPLS encapsulated
frame.
VPLS Tunnel TTL Displays the tunnel TTL value of the last filtered VPLS encapsulated
frame.
VPLS VC Label Displays the VC label of the last filtered VPLS encapsulated frame.
VPLS VC Priority Displays the VC priority of the last filtered VPLS encapsulated
frame.
VPLS VC TTL Displays the VC TTL value of the last filtered VPLS encapsulated
frame.
L2 Filter Counts results

Table 57 describes the L2 Filter Counts L2 Customer Filter Counts results for filtered
traffic such as the number of received frames and the number of received frames with
an Acterna payload. Only valid frames are counted in this category; errored frames are
not counted.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 507
When testing VPLS encapsulated traffic, Layer 2 filter count results appear in the L2
Customer Filter Counts category..
Table 57 L2 Filter Counts results

>1518/1522 A count of filtered Ethernet frames with a length greater than:
>1518/1526 – 1518 bytes (non-tagged frames)
– 1522 bytes (VLAN tagged frames)
– 1526 bytes (Q-in-Q encapsulated frames)
NOTE: Jumbo frames are counted in this category.
1024 - 1518/1522 A count of filtered Ethernet frames between:
1024 - 1518/1526 – 1024 bytes and 1518 bytes
– 1024 to 1522 bytes for VLAN-tagged frames
– 1024 to 1526 bytes for Q-in-Q encapsulated frames
1024-2140 Byte Frames A count of filtered Fibre Channel frames with lengths between 1024
128-255 Byte Frames A count of filtered Ethernet frames with lengths between 128 and 255
bytes, inclusive.
bytes, inclusive.
28-64 Byte Frames A count of filtered Fibre Channel frames with lengths between 28 and
512-1023 Byte Frames A count of filtered Ethernet frames with lengths between 512 and
64 Byte Frames A count of filtered Ethernet frames with a length of 64 bytes.
bytes, inclusive.
68-124 Byte Frames A count of filtered Fibre Channel frames with lengths between 68 and
Broadcast Frames The number of filtered Ethernet broadcast frames since the last test
restart.
Multicast Frames The number of filtered Ethernet multicast frames received since the
last test restart.
Rx Acterna Frames A count of received Acterna frames, including errored frames.
Rx Acterna OWD The number of filtered ATP-GPS frames received since test restart.
Frames

Page 508 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Table 57 L2 Filter Counts results (Continued)

Rx Frame Bytes A count of the total number of frame bytes received since the test was
started. The count starts at the Destination Address and continues to
the Frame Check Sequence.
– The count does not include the preamble or start of frame delim-
iter.
– The count does include errored frames.
Rx MPLS Frames A count of filtered MPLS frames since the test was started, including
errored frames.
Rx Q-in-Q Frames A count of filtered Q-in-Q frames since the test was started, including
errored frames.
Rx Stacked VLAN A count of received stacked VLAN frames as defined in IEEE 802.p/q
Frames since the test was started, including errored frames.
Rx VLAN Frames A count of filtered VLAN frames as defined in IEEE 802.p/q since the
test was started, including errored frames.
Rx VPLS Frames A count of filtered VPLS frames since the test was started, including
errored frames. Appears in the L2 SP Link Counts category.
Span Tree Frames A count of filtered 802.1d spanning tree frames since frame detection
after the last test start or restart.
Tx ATP Frame Count A count of transmitted ATP frames at Layer 2.
Unicast Frames The number of filtered Ethernet unicast frames since the last test
restart.
Valid Rx Frames Count of the number of filtered error-free frames since the test was
started.
J-Proof (transparency) results

Table 58 describes the Transparency results associated with the loop back of control
frames for various protocols. To view the Transparency results, launch the
Layer 2 Traffic application, and then run the transparency test (see “Using J-Proof to
verify layer 2 transparency” on page 136)..
Table 58 Transparency results
Test
Description
Result
Name Displays the name specified when you configured the test frame.
Tx A count of the number of test frames for a particular test frame type
transmitted by the instrument since the last test start or restart.
Rx A count of the number of test frames for a particular test frame type
received by the instrument since the last test start or restart.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 509
Table 58 Transparency results (Continued)
Test
Description
Result
Status Displays one of the following:
– N/A. Indicates that a particular test frame is not configured to be
transmitted.
– IDLE. Indicates that a particular test frame is in the queue to be
transmitted.
– In Progress. Indicates that a particular test frame is currently being
transmitted, and has not yet encountered an error.
– Timeout. Indicates that for a particular test frame a timeout was
reached while waiting for a transmitted frame to return; however,
all frames were successfully looped back before the end of the
test frame’s transmission.
– Payload Errors. Indicates that for a particular test frame all trans-
mitted frames were successfully looped back, but a received
frame contained a payload that was not the same as its transmit-
ted payload.
– Header Errors. Indicates that for a particular test frame, all trans-
mitted frames were successfully looped back, but a received
frame contained a header that was different from its transmitted
header.
– Count Mismatch. Indicates that the number of received frames for
a particular test frame did not match the number of frames trans-
mitted.
L2 BERT Stats results

Table 59 describes the L2 BERT Stats results typically associated with the transmission
of BERT patterns on a Layer 2 (switched) network. In some instances, the instrument
may detect BERT patterns while transmitting an Acterna payload (for example, if a
device on the far end of the link is transmitting an all ones BERT pattern).
To view the L2 BERT Stats results while BER testing, transmit traffic with a BERT
pattern in the payload over a Layer 2 network, and then set a result category to L2
BERT Stats.

Page 510 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
When testing VPLS encapsulated traffic, Layer 2 BERT statistic results appear in the
L2 Customer BERT Stats category.
NOTE:
To display Layer 2 BERT Stat results, the Dual Module Carrier,
Transport Module, and MSAM must receive frames with a BERT pattern
matching the pattern specified in the receive settings (see “Specifying Ethernet
Table 59 L2 BERT Stats results

Bit Error Rate The ratio of pattern bit errors to received pattern bits since ini-
tially acquiring frame synchronization.
NOTE: This ratio is determined using only the bits in the payload
of the frame.
Bit Errored Seconds The number of seconds during which one or more pattern bit
errors occurred since initial frame synchronization.
Bit Errors A count of the number of received bits in a recognized pattern
that do not match the expected value since initially acquiring
frame synchronization.
Bit Error-Free Seconds Number of error-free seconds during which error analysis has
been performed since initial pattern synchronization.
Bit Error-Free Seconds,% Number of error-free seconds divided by the number of seconds
during which error analysis has been performed since initial pat-
tern synchronization, expressed as a percentage.
Pattern Losses Count of the number of times pattern synchronization was lost
since initially acquiring pattern synchronization.
Pattern Loss Seconds Count of the number of seconds during which pattern synchroni-
zation was lost since initially acquiring pattern synchronization.
CDMA Receiver Status results

Table 60 describes the CDMA Receiver Status results used when testing one way
delay.
Table 60 CDMA Receiver results

Signal Processor State Displays the state of the signal processor in the Præcis Cf device.
Base Station Pseudo Displays the PNO code of the base station that the Præcis Cf
Noise Offset device is listening to, between 0 and 511.
Automatic Gain Control Displays automatic gain control DAC byte, between 0 and 255, but
typically between 150 and 220.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 511
Table 60 CDMA Receiver results (Continued)

Carrier Signal to nose Displays the signal to noise ratio (SNR) for received CDMA broad-
Ratio cast channel, between 0.0 and 99.9, but typically between 2.5 and
11.0.
Sync Channel Frame Error Displays the Sync Channel Frame Error Rate.
Rate
TCXO Control Displays the status of TCXO voltage control. If the TCXO voltage
control starts falling outside of the typical range, the Præcis Cf
device should be returned to the factory.
No Signal Time-Out Indicates that the Præcis Cf unit was not able to acquire CDMA for
one hour while the Time Figure of merit has been 9.
Hardware Failure Indicates the Præcis Cf device cannot be expected to work properly
Detected due to an internal error.
Time Figure of Merit Indicates the GPS accuracy of the current signal.
Firmware Version Displays the firmware of the connected CDMA receiver.
CDMA/GPS Receiver Log

The CDMA Receiver Log provides a listing of significant events and messages, such
as sync acquired or CDMA loss.

Page 512 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Ethernet OAM Service OAM results

Table 61 describes the Service OAM results, such as the number of RDI seconds, loss
of continuity indicator, and the number of transmitted and received CCM frames.
Table 61 Ethernet OAM Service OAM results

CCM Loss of Continuity ON indicates that a loss of continuity has occurred.
Maint. ID Displays the maintenance association ID configured for the
CCM frame received.
MD Level Displays the maintenance domain level configured for the CCM
frame received.
Mismerge ON indicates that CCM frames have been received with the
same maintenance domain level specified for transmitted
frames, but the received CCM frames carry a different mainte-
nance association ID (MAID).
Peer MEG End Point Displays the maintenance entity group end point ID for the
ID instrument’s peer as configured.
RDI Indicates whether or not remote defect indication is ON or OFF.
RDI Seconds Count of the number of seconds during which an RDI was
declared since starting or restarting the test.
Total Rx Frames Count of the number of CCM frames received since the last
OAM setting was specified or changed.
Total Tx Frames Count of the number of CCM frames transmitted since the last
OAM setting was specified or changed.
Unexpected MEG ON indicates that CCM frames have been received with a
Level maintenance entity group level lower than that specified as the
maintenance domain level when you configured the OAM set-
tings for the transmitting instrument.
Unexpected MEP ON indicates that a CCM was received from a different mainte-
nance end point than that specified as the instrument’s peer
MEG End Point.
Unexpected Period ON indicates that a CCM was received with the correct mainte-
nance domain level, maintenance association ID, and mainte-
nance end point ID, but with a period value that was not the
same as the instrument’s CCM rate.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 513
Table 61 Ethernet OAM Service OAM results (Continued)

AIS AIS Indicates whether AIS is ON or OFF.
AIS Seconds Count of the number of seconds during which an AIS was
declared since starting or restarting the test.
Total Rx Frames Count of the number of frames received since AIS was
declared.
Total Tx Frames Count of the number of frames transmitted since AIS was
declared.
Unexpected Period ON indicates that an AIS was received with the correct mainte-
nance domain level, maintenance association ID, and mainte-
nance end point ID, but with a period value that was not the
same as the instrument’s AIS rate.
LBM Total Rx LBM Count of the total number of LBM frame received since the last
Frames OAM setting was specified or changed.
Total Tx LBM Count of the total number of LBM frames transmitted since the
Frames last OAM setting was specified or changed.
Total Rx LBR Count of the total number of LBR frames received since the
Total Tx LBR Count of the total number of LBR frames transmitted since the
LTM Total Rx LTM Count of the total number of LTM frame received since the last
Total Tx LTM Count of the total number of LTM frames transmitted since the
Total Rx LTR Count of the total number of LTR frames received since the last
Total Tx LTR Frames Count of the total number of LTR frames transmitted since the
last OAM setting was specified or changed.

Page 514 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018

CV/ Expected LSR ID IPv6 ID entered during setup as the address of the expected
FFD LSR
Expected LSP ID ID entered during setup as the ID of the expected LSP
Total Rx CV Frames Count of the total number of CV OAM packets received since
the first received FFD
Total Tx CV Frames Count of the total number of CV OAM packets sent
Total Rx FFD Count of the total number of FFD OAM packets received since
Frames the first received FFD
Total Tx FFD Count of the total number of FFD OAM packets sent
Frames
Expected Fre- Display of FFD OAM packets Frequency (Tx) as specifed in
quency (FFD) setup
dLOCV Simple Loss of Connectivity Verification due to missing CV or
FFD OAM packets with expected TTSI
dTTSI Mismatch Trail Termination Source ID mismatch defect due to unex-
pected or lack of expected TTSI in CV or FFD OAM packets
dTTSI Mismerge Trail Termination Source ID mismerge defect due to both unex-
pected and expected TTSI in CV or FFD OAM packets
dExcess Defect due to a rate of receipt of CV or FFD OAM packets in
excess of the nominal receipt rate- 1 per second for CV or 20
per second for FFD
BDI BDI Status of BD transmit or receive condition. OFF = BDI button in
action bar not clicked
BDI Seconds Total seconds since receipt of first BDI
Defect Type Type of defect received in BDI OAM packets
Defect Location Defect location received in BDI OAM packets
LSP ID LSP ID from BDI OAM packets received
LSR ID LSR ID from BDI OAM packets received
Total RX Frames Total number of BDI packets received since the first BDI or FDI
packet was received
Total Tx Frames Total number of BDI packets sent

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 515

FDI FDI Status of BDI or FDI transmit or receive condition. OFF = FDI
or BDI button in action bar not clicked
FDI Seconds Total seconds since receipt of first FDI
Defect Type Type of defect received in FDI OAM packets
Defect Location Defect location received in FDI OAM packets
LSP ID LSP ID from FDI OAM packets received
LSR ID LSR ID from FDI OAM packets received
Total RX Frames Total number of FDI packets received since the first BDI or FDI
packet was received
Total Tx Frames Total number of FDI packets sent
Ethernet OAM Service OAM MEP Discovery results

Table 62 describes the Ethernet OAM Service OAM MEP Discovery results, dealing
with identification of network OAM elements and some continuity checking parameters.
Table 62 Ethernet OAM Service OAM MEP Discovery results

# of MEPs Discov- Number of unique MEPs currently displayed
ered
MEP ID Displays configured ID of the MEG Endpoint (MEPin the incoming CCM)
Source MAC Displays MAC address of the source of the incoming CCM
Address
VLAN ID Displays VLAN ID in the incoming CCM, if present
SVLAN ID Displays SVLAN ID in the incoming CCM, if present
MD Level Displays the configured level of the Maintenance Domain (MD) in the
incoming CCM
Specify Domain ID Displays the configured Specify Domain ID in the incoming CCM
MD ID Displays the configured Maintenance Domain ID in the incoming CCM
MA ID Displays configured Maintenance Association (MA) Name or Maintenance
Entity Group (MEG) Identification
CCM Rate Displays configured transmission frequency of the incoming CCM
CCM Type Displays the configured CCM type in the incoming CCM
* Results can be filtered by a specified value under any of these column headings. Enter data in
Filter the Display settings under the Results display window. To expand, select the icon in the
lower left corner.

Page 516 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Ethernet OAM L-OAM Modes results

Table 63 describes the L-OAM Modes results, such as the remote and local mode,
parser action, and muxer action. The Link OAM State must be On to observe these
results.
L-OAM results are not applicable to the 40G/100G High Speed Transport Module or
CSAM.
Table 63 Ethernet OAM L-OAM Modes results (Remote and Local Operation)

Mode Displays the current mode (Active or Passive) for the local or remote
instrument.
Parser Action Indicates the local or remote receiver is currently forwarding, looping
back, or discarding non-OAM PDUs.
Muxer Action Indicates the local or remote transmitter is currently forwarding or discard-
ing non-OAM PDUs.
Vendor OUI Displays the Vendor OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier) for the local
or remote instrument.
Vendor Specific Info Displays vendor specific information for the local or remote instrument.
Max PDU Size Displays the maximum PDU (Protocol Data Units) size supported by the
local or remote instrument.
Unidirectional Indicates whether the local or remote instrument advertises that it is capa-
ble of sending OAM PDUs when the receive path is non-operational.
Link Events Indicates whether the local or remote instrument is configured to monitor
link events.
Loopback Indicates whether the local or remote instrument advertises that it pro-
vides loopback support.
Variable Retrieval Indicates whether the local or remote instrument supports sending Vari-
able Response OAM PDUs.
Revision Displays the current TLV (Type Length Value) revision for the local or
remote instrument.
MAC Address Displays the MAC address for the remote instrument.
Ethernet OAM L-OAM Counts results

Table 64 describes the L-OAM Counts results, such as the number of transmitted and
received variable requests, variable responses, and loop back control frames. The Link
OAM State must be On to observe these results.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 517
L-OAM results are not applicable with 40G/100G High Speed Transport Module
Table 64 Ethernet OAM L-OAM Counts results

Information A count of Information frames transmitted or received since starting the
test.
Event Notification A count of Event notification frames transmitted or received since start-
ing the test.
Variable Request A count of variable request frames transmitted or received since start-
ing the test.
Variable Response A count of Variable Response frames transmitted or received since
starting the test.
Loopback Control A count of Loopback Control frames transmitted or received since start-
ing the test.
Duplicate Event A count of duplicate Event notification frames transmitted or received
since starting the test.
Unsupported A count of unsupported frames transmitted or received since starting
the test.
Organization Specific A count of Organization Specific frames transmitted or received since
starting the test.
Ethernet OAM L-OAM States results

Table 65 describes the L-OAM States results, such as the Discovery state, and Dying
Gasp events. The Link OAM State must be On to observe these results
L-OAM results are not applicable with 40G/100G High Speed Transport Module.
Table 65 Ethernet OAM L-OAM States results

Discovery
State Displays one of the following:
– Fault
– Active Send Local
– Passive Wait
– Send Local Remote
– Send Any
Local Displays one of the following:
– 0 = Can’t complete
– 1 = Not completed
– 2 = Completed
– 3 = Reserved

Page 518 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Table 65 Ethernet OAM L-OAM States results (Continued)

Remote Displays one of the following:
– 0 = Can’t complete
– 1 = Not completed
– 2 = Completed
– 3 = Reserved
Remote Events
Link Fault Indicates whether a link fault occurred.
Dying Gasp Indicates whether an unrecoverable failure has
occurred.
Critical Indicates whether a critical event has occurred.
Ethernet OAM L-OAM Error History results

Table 66 describes the L-OAM Error History results for Symbol Period Events, Frame
Events, Frame Period Events, Frame Sec Summary Events. The Link OAM State must
be On to observe these results.
L-OAM results are not applicable with 40G/100G High Speed Transport Module
Table 66 Ethernet OAM L-OAM Error History results

Remote Timestamp Displays the time that the last event occurred.
Remote Window Indicates the duration of the period.
Remote Threshold Indicates the number of errors that must occur in the window to
cause an event.
Remote Errored Frame Sec A count of the number of errored seconds in the period.
Remote Errored Frames A count of errored frames since in the period.
Remote Error Running Total A count of the number of errors since starting the test.
Remote Running Total A count of the number of events since starting the test.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 519

Table 67 describes the L3 Link Stats results, such as the average packet rate, peak
packet rate, and the maximum, minimum, and average round trip delay measurements.

Packet Rate Average
– The average rate of received packets, calculated over the time
period elapsed since the last test restart.
Current
– The current rate of received packets. This measurement is an
average taken over the prior second of test time.
Minimum
– The minimum rate of received packets over a one second period.
Peak
– The maximum rate of received packets over a one second period.
The packet rate is expressed in packets per second.
Packet Size Average
– The average size of packets received since IP packet detection.
Minimum
– The minimum size of packets received since IP packet detection.
Maximum
– The maximum size of packets received since IP packet detection.
Rx Mbps, Cur L3 The current bandwidth utilized by the received IP traffic expressed in
megabits per second. This measurement is an average taken over
– The average bandwidth utilized by the received IP traffic. This
measurement is an average taken over the prior second of test
time.
Current
– The current bandwidth utilized by the received IP traffic.
Minimum
– The minimum bandwidth utilized by the received IP traffic since
Peak
– The peak bandwidth utilized by the received IP traffic since the last
test restart.
Bandwidth utilization is expressed as a percentage of the line rate of
available bandwidth.
NOTE: The bandwidth utilization calculations are made on per-sec-
ond boundaries and may happen in the middle of a large frame, caus-
ing the utilization to be reduced.

Page 520 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018

Tx Mbps, Cur L3 The current bandwidth utilized by the transmitted IP traffic expressed
in megabits per second. This measurement is an average taken over

Table 68 describes each of the L3 Link Counts results such as the number of received
packets, number of transmitted packets, and number of unicast, multicast, or broadcast
packets. The Received Packets result includes errored packets; all other results count
valid packets only., Checkmarks indicate whether the result is provided for IPv4 or IPv6
traffic
Test Result IPv4 IPv6 Description

>1500 Byte Pack- X X A count of Ethernet IP packets with a length greater
ets than 1500 bytes.
1024-1500 Byte X X A count of Ethernet IP packets with lengths between
Packets 1024 and 1500 bytes, inclusive.
20-45 Byte Packets X X A count of Ethernet IP packets with lengths between
20 and 45 bytes, inclusive.
256-511 Byte Pack- X X A count of Ethernet IP packets with lengths between
ets 256 and 511 bytes, inclusive.
46-63 Byte Packets X X A count of Ethernet IP packets with lengths between
46 and 63 bytes, inclusive.
64-127 Byte Pack- X X A count of Ethernet IP packets with lengths between
ets 64 and 127 bytes, inclusive.
Broadcast Packets X X The number of Ethernet broadcast IP packets
Multicast Packets X X The number of Ethernet multicast IP packets
Received Packets X X A count of IP packets received since the last test
restart, including errored packets.
Rx Router Adver- X A count of received router advertisement messages
tisements when running an IPv6 application. This count is not
reset when you restart a test; to reset the count you
must bring down the link, reestablish the link, and
then start the test again.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 521

Transmitted Pack- X X A count of IP packets transmitted since the last test
ets restart. This result does not appear when testing in
Monitor mode.
Tx Router Solicita- X A count of transmitted router solicitation messages
tions when running an IPv6 application. This count is not
reset when you restart a test; to reset the count you
must bring down the link, reestablish the link, and
then start the test again.
Unicast Packets X X The number of Ethernet unicast IP packets received

Table 69 lists the L3 Filter Stats results for filtered traffic such as the average packet
rate, peak packet rate, and the maximum, minimum, and average packet sizes. L3 Filter
Stats and Filter Counts exclude errored frames.
Table 69 L3 Filter Stats results

Packet Rate Average
– The average rate of filtered packets, calculated over the
time period elapsed since the last test restart.
Current
– The current rate of filtered packets. This measurement is
an average taken over the prior second of test time.
Minimum
– The minimum rate of filtered packets over a one second
period.
Peak
– The maximum rate of filtered packets over a one second
period.
The packet rate is expressed in packets per second.
Packet Size Average
– The average size of filtered packets since IP packet detec-
tion.
Minimum
– The minimum size of filtered packets since IP packet
detection.
Maximum
– The maximum size of filtered packets since IP packet
detection.

Page 522 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Table 69 L3 Filter Stats results (Continued)

Rx Mbps, Cur L3 The current bandwidth utilized by filtered IP traffic expressed
in megabits per second. This measurement is an average
taken over the prior second of test time.
– The average bandwidth utilized by filtered IP traffic. This
measurement is an average taken over the prior second of
test time.
Current
– The current bandwidth utilized by filtered IP traffic.
Minimum
– The minimum bandwidth utilized by filtered IP traffic since
Peak
– The peak bandwidth utilized by filtered IP traffic since the
last test restart.
Bandwidth utilization is expressed as a percentage of the line
rate of available bandwidth.
NOTE: The bandwidth utilization calculations are made on
per-second boundaries and may happen in the middle of a
large frame, causing the utilization to be reduced.

Table 70 describes each of the L3 Filter Counts results for filtered traffic such as the
number of received IP packets, and the number of received packets with an Acterna
payload.

>1500 Byte Packets X X A count of filtered Ethernet IP packets with a length
greater than 1500 bytes.
1024-1500 Byte X X A count of filtered Ethernet IP packets with lengths
Packets between 1024 and 1500 bytes, inclusive.
128-255 Byte Packets X X A count of filtered Ethernet IP packets with lengths
between 128 and 255 bytes, inclusive.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 523
Table 70 L3 Filter Counts results (Continued)

512-1023 Byte Pack- X X A count of filtered Ethernet IP packets with lengths
ets between 512 and 1023 bytes, inclusive.
Broadcast Packets X X The number of filtered Ethernet broadcast
IP packets received since the last test restart.
Multicast Packets X X The number of filtered Ethernet multicast
IP packets received since the last test restart.
Received Packets X X A count of filtered IP packets received since the
last test restart, including errored packets.
Unicast Packets X X The number of filtered Ethernet unicast IP packets
L3/IP Config Status results

Table 71 describes the L3 Config Status or IP Config Status results associated with the
assignment of static IP addresses, or the assignment of IP addresses by a DHCP
server.
Table 71 L3/IP Config Status results

Data Mode X Indicates whether you are testing in IPoE or
PPPoE mode.
Destination IP X X Displays the destination IP address as defined for
Address the currently selected port.
Destination MAC X X Displays the hardware (MAC) address of either the
Address gateway or the destination host as resolved by
ARP for the currently selected port.
IP Gateway X X Displays the Gateway address assigned by the
DHCP server for the currently selected port.
IP Subnet Mask X Displays the Subnet mask assigned by the DHCP
server for the currently selected port.

Page 524 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Table 71 L3/IP Config Status results (Continued)

PPPoE Status X Displays one of the following messages that indi-
cate the current status of the PPPoE session:
– INACTIVE
– PPPOE ACTIVE
– PPP ACTIVE
– PPPOE UP
– USER REQUESTED INACTIVE
– PPPOE TIMEOUT
– PPPOE FAILED
– PPP LCP FAILED
– PPP AUTHENTICATION FAILED
– PPP IPCP FAILED
– PPP UP FAILED
– INVALID CONFIG
Source IP Address X Displays the IP address assigned by the DHCP
server to the currently selected port.
Src Global IP Address X Displays the global address assigned to the instru-
ment manually, or during the auto-configuration
process for IPv6 connections.
Src Link-Local IP X Displays the link local address of the instrument if
Address you are running an IPv6 application. DAD (dupli-
cate address detection) must determine that there
are no other devices with the link local address
before the address appears.
Subnet Prefix Length X Displays the subnet prefix length used to generate
the required IPv6 global address for the instrument.
Preferred DNS X X The address of the preferred DNS server.
Address
Alternate DNS X X The address of the alternate DNS server.
Address
Resolved Name X X The resolved hostname. (The domain name asso-
ciated with the IP address.)
IP Gateway X Displays the gateway address assigned for CPE
(WAN) router.
IP Subnet Mask X Displays the subnet mask for CPE (WAN) router.
Dest. IP Address X Displays the IP address for the CPE (WAN) router.
ARP Status X Displays whether the ARP resolution was success-
ful.
Traffic Source IP Add X Displays the IP address for the CPE (LAN) router.
Traffic IP Subnet X Displays the IP subnet mask of the CPE (LAN)
Mask router.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 525
Ping results
Table 72 describes the Ping results associated with the transmission of Ethernet Ping
packets.
Table 72 Ping results

Delay, Avg (ms) The round trip delay for all pings sent and successfully received by the
Transport Module since the last test restart. Calculated in milliseconds.
Delay, Max (ms) The maximum round trip delay for the pings sent and successfully received
by the Transport Module. Calculated in milliseconds.
Delay, Min (ms) The minimum round trip delay for the pings sent and successfully received
by the Transport Module. Calculated in milliseconds.
DNS Errors Count of the DNS errors received during the course of trying to ping the
host.
Lost Pings Count of Ping requests sent by the Transport Module for which replies were
not received within 3 seconds.
Lost Pings, % The percentage of the total test seconds during which replies were not
received within 3 seconds.
Ping Replies Rx Count of the ping replies received in response to the ping requests sent by
the Transport Module.
Ping Replies Tx Count of the ping replies sent from the Dual Module Carrier,
Transport Module, and MSAM.
Ping Requests Rx Count of the ping requests received by the Transport Module (in other
words, requests sent to the Transport Module’s IP address) from another
Layer 3 device on the network.
Ping Requests Tx Count of the ping requests sent from the Transport Module.
Traceroute results
Table 73 describes the results associated with the Traceroute application.
Table 73 Traceroute results

Delay (ms) The round trip delay for the packet. Calculated in milliseconds.
Hop Displays the hop number for each hop the packet takes while crossing the
circuit.
IP Address Displays the destination IP address for the packet.

Page 526 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
PCS Error Stats

Table 74 lists and describes each of the test results available in the PCS Error Stats
result category.
Table 74 PCS Error Stats

Alignment Marker Number of seconds during which Alignment Markers were not detected
Loss Seconds since initial frame synchronization.
Alignment Marker Alignment Marker Lock condition currently being detected.
Lock Present
Alignment Marker Alignment Marker Lock condition detected and then lost at some time
Lock History since initial frame synchronization.
Invalid Alignment A count of the number of Invalid Alignment Markers since initial frame
Markers synchronization.
Invalid Alignment The ratio of the sum of Invalid Alignment Markers, across all lanes, to
Markers Rate the sum of all Alignment Markers, across all lanes, since initial frame
synchronization.
Invalid Alignment A count of the number of seconds containing at least one Invalid Align-
Marker Seconds ment Marker, any lane, since initial frame synchronization.
BIP-8 AM Bit Errors A count of the sum of BIP-8 bit errors, across all lanes, since initial
BIP-8 AM Bit Errors The ratio of the sum of BIP-8 bit errors, across all lanes, to the total
Rate number of Alignment Markers, across all lanes, since initial frame syn-
chronization.
BIP-8 AM Bit Error A count of the number of seconds containing at least one BIP-8 AM Bit
Seconds Error since initial frame synchronization.
BIP-8 AM Block A count of the sum total of BIP-8 Block Errors across all lanes since ini-
Errors tial frame synchronization.
BIP-8 AM Block The ratio of the sum of BIP-8 block errors, across all lanes, to the total
Errors Rate number of Alignment Markers since initial frame synchronization.
BIP-8 AM Block Error A count of the number of seconds containing at least one BIP-8 AM
Seconds Block Error since initial frame synchronization.
Maximum Skew (bits) The maximum skew (in bits) between lanes that was detected since
Alignment Marker Lock.
LOA (Deskew) Loss of Alignment of the lanes due excessive interlane skew or invalid
Alignment Marker data.
Maximum Skew (ns) The maximum skew (in ns) between lanes that was detected since
Alignment Marker Lock.
Current Maximum The maximum inter-lane skew (in bits) that was detected during the
Skew (bits) period specified for error insertion.
Current Maximum The maximum inter-lane skew (in ns) that was detected during the
Skew (ns) period specified for error insertion.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 527
Table 74 PCS Error Stats (Continued)

HI BER Seconds A count of the number of seconds where High Bit Error Rate (HI BER)
was detected in the Sync Bits since initial frame synchronization.
HI BER Present A High Bit Error Rate (HI BER) was detected in the Sync Bits since ini-
tial frame synchronization.
HI BER History A High Bit Error Rate (HI BER) was detected in the Sync Bits at some
time in the past after initial frame synchronization.
PCS Block Errors A count of the number of PCS Block Errors since initial frame synchroni-
zation.
PCS Block Error Rate The ratio of the sum of block errors to the total number of blocks since
initial frame synchronization.
PCS Block Error Sec- A count of the number of seconds containing at least one PCS Block
onds Error since initial frame synchronization.
Ethernet Per Lane results

Table 75 lists and describes each of the test results shown in the Ethernet Per Lane
display when performing Ethernet testing. These results appear in a different category
depending on the application: for single stream apps, they appear in the Ethernet cate-
gory, in the multiple stream app, they appear under the link category.
Table 75 Ethernet Per Lane results

Max Skew VL ID Shows Virtual Lane ID for virtual lane having the greatest skew.
Min Skew VL ID Shows Virtual Lane ID for virtual lane having the least skew.
Max Skew (ns) Shows skew value in nsecs for virtual lane having the greatest skew.
Max Skew (bits) Shows skew value in bits for virtual lane having the greatest skew.
Lane # Shows the virtual Lanes in the signal:40G- #0 - #3, 100G- #0 -#19.
Virtual Lane ID Shows Lane ID for each virtual lane.
Skew (bits) Shows skew value in bits for each virtual lane.
Skew (ns) Shows skew value in nsecs for each virtual lane.
Sync Acquired Display of sync acquisition status for each virtual lane.
Marker Lock Display of marker lock status for each virtual lane.
Code Violations Count of number of code violations for each virtual lane.
Invalid Alignment Count of the number of invalid alignment markers for each virtual lane.
Markers
BIP-8 AM Bit Errors Count of number of BIP-8 AM Bit errors for each virtual lane.
BIP-8 AM Block Count of number of BIP-8 AM Block errors for each virtual lane since the
Errors start of the test.

Page 528 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Figure 126 Ethernet Per Lane Results Table
Error Stats results

The Error Stats category lists error statistics such as the number of bit errors, FCS or
CRC errored frames, jabbers, runts, and code violations for the Layer 1 BERT, and
Layer 2 traffic test applications.
Error Stats (Layer 1 BERT)

Table 76 describes the test results for the Layer 1 BERT patterns.
Table 76 Error Stats results (B Seed, A Seed, and PRBS31 patterns)
Pattern Pattern Pattern 3

Dela
Test Result Description 1- 2- -
y
B Seed A Seed PRBS31
Bit Error Rate The ratio of pattern bit X
errors to received pattern
bits since initially acquiring
pattern synchronization.
Bit Errors A count of the number of X
received bits in a recog-
nized pattern that do not
match the expected value.
Code Violation The ratio of code violations X X
Rate to bits received since the
last test restart.
Code Violation A count of the number of X X
Seconds seconds during which code
violations occurred.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 529
Table 76 Error Stats results (B Seed, A Seed, and PRBS31 patterns) (Continued)

Dela
y
Code Violations A count of each invalid 66- X X
bit code word in the bit
stream due to synchroniza-
tion header errors.
For 10GigE and 10G Fibre
Channel streams, code
words with PCS block
errors are also counted as
code violations.
Error- Free Sec- The percentage of seconds X
onds,% that the received pattern is
error free.
Errored Seconds A count of the number of X
seconds that the received
pattern contained at least
one error.
Error-Free Sec- A count of the number of X
onds seconds the pattern is
received without any errors.
Pattern Errors A count of the number of X X
received patterns that do
not match the expected pat-
tern.
Pattern Error Rate The ratio of pattern errors to X X
received patterns since ini-
tially acquiring pattern syn-
chronization.
Pattern Error- The percentage of seconds X X
Free Seconds, % that the received pattern is
error free.
Pattern Errored A count of the number of X X
Seconds seconds that the received
pattern contained at least
one error.
Pattern Error-Free A count of the number of X X
Seconds seconds the pattern is
received without any errors.
Pattern Loss Sec- A count of the number of X X X
onds seconds during which pat-
tern synchronization is lost.
Total Bits A count of the total number X
Received of bits received since the
last test restart.

Page 530 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Table 76 Error Stats results (B Seed, A Seed, and PRBS31 patterns) (Continued)

Dela
y
Pattern Sync Count of the number of X
Losses times pattern synchroniza-
tion was lost since initially
acquiring pattern synchroni-
zation.
Pattern Sync Loss Count of the number of sec- X
Seconds onds during which pattern
synchronization was lost
since initially acquiring pat-
tern synchronization.
Round Trip Delay, The current round trip delay X
Current calculated in microsec-
onds. This measurement is
an average taken over the
prior second of time.
Round Trip Delay, The average round trip X
Average delay measured since start-
ing the test, calculated in
microseconds.
Round Trip Delay, The minimum round trip X
Minimum delay measured since start-
microseconds.
Round Trip Delay, The maximum round trip X
Maximum delay measured since start-
microseconds.
Error Stats (Layer 2 Traffic)

For Layer 2 Ethernet and Fibre Channel test applications, to view the Layer 2 Error
Stats results described in Table 77, set the result category to Error Stats.
Table 77 Error Stats results (Layer 2 traffic)

Alignment Errors A count of the number of frames received containing both a framing
error and an FCS error. Only applicable when testing on 10/
100 Mbps circuits.
Alignment Marker Loss A count of the seconds since the last valid alignment marker.
Seconds
Block Sync Losses (PCS) Count of the number of instances when block synchronization was
lost since the last test start or restart. Only applicable when running
10 GigE applications.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 531
Table 77 Error Stats results (Layer 2 traffic) (Continued)

Code Violation Rate The ratio of code violations to bits received since the last test restart.
Code Violation Seconds A count of the number of seconds during which code violations
occurred.
Code Violations A count of each invalid 66-bit code word in the bit stream due to syn-
chronization header errors.
For 10GigE and 10G Fibre Channel streams, code words with PCS
block errors are also counted as code violations.
CRC Errored Frames A summed count of Fibre Channel frames containing Cyclic Redun-
dancy Check (CRC) errors. When receiving Fibre Channel jumbo
frames containing CRC errors, the CRC error count does not incre-
ment. Instead, these frames are counted as Fibre Jabbers.
Errored Blocks (PCS) Count of the errored blocks received since the last test start or
restart. Only applicable when running 10 GigE applications.
Errored Frames – For Ethernet, a summed count of FCS Errored Frames, Jabbers,
and Undersized Frames.
– For Fibre Channel, a summed count of CRC Errored Frames,
Fibre Jabbers, and Undersized Frames.
FCS Errored Frames A count of Ethernet frames containing Frame Check Sequence
(FCS) errors. When receiving Ethernet jumbo frames containing
FCS errors, the FCS error count does not increment. Instead, these
frames are counted as Jabbers.
Fibre Jabbers A count of Fibre Channel frames that have a byte value greater than
the maximum 2140 frame length and an errored CRC.
Fibre Runts A count of Fibre Channel frames under the minimum 28 byte frame
length containing CRC errors.
Frame Loss Ratio The ratio of frames lost to the number of frames expected.
HI SER Alarm If a high symbol error rate (HI SER) alarm is declared and reported
as an error (indicated with an ON status). If the rate is below the
acceptable level, OFF appears as the status.
HI SER Seconds Count of the number of seconds during which a HI SER alarm was
received.
Invalid Alignment Marker A ratio of the number of alignment marks lost to the total number of
Rate markers.
Invalid Alignment Marker A count of the seconds in which there was at least one invalid align-
Seconds ment marker.
Invalid Alignment Markers A count of the number of alignment markers lost.
Jabbers A count of received Ethernet frames that have a byte value greater
than the maximum 1518 frame length (or 1522 bytes for VLAN
tagged frames or 1526 bytes for Q-in-Q encapsulated frames) and
an errored FCS.

Page 532 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Table 77 Error Stats results (Layer 2 traffic) (Continued)

LOA Alarm ON indicates that a LOA alarm was detected at some point since the
last restart of the test; OFF indicates that no LOA alarm has been
detected. (LOA is not applicable to 25GigE testing)
LOA Seconds Count of the number of seconds during which a LOA alarm was
received. (LOA is not applicable to 25GigE testing)
LOAMP Alarm ON indicates that a LOAMP alarm was detected at some point since
the last restart of the test; OFF indicates that no LOAMP alarm has
been detected. (25GigE testing uses LOCWMS instead of LOAMP)
LOAMP Seconds Count of the number of seconds during which a LOAMP alarm was
received. (25GigE testing uses LOCWMS instead of LOAMP)
Lost Frames An estimated count of lost Acterna test frames in the received traffic.
– If the instrument receives an Acterna test frame with a sequence
number that is greater than the next expected sequence number,
the lost frame count will be incremented by the difference
between the sequence number in the received frame and next
expected sequence number. The next expected sequence num-
ber is set to the received sequence number plus one.
number that is less than the next expected sequence number, the
lost frame count will be decremented by one because the frame
will be counted as an Out of Sequence (OoS) frame.
NOTE: If the instrument receives frames that contain errors in the

sequence number field, the Lost Frames and Out of Sequence counts
may be incorrect.
OoS Frames An estimated count of out of sequence Acterna test frames in the
received traffic.
number that is less than the next expected sequence number, the
OoS frame count will be incremented by one. The next expected
sequence number is unchanged.
sequence number field, the Lost Frames and Out of Sequence
counts may be incorrect.
RS-FEC Uncorrectable Count of the number of uncorrectable RS-FEC errors received since
the last restart of the test.
RS-FEC Uncorrectable The ratio of uncorrectable RS-FEC blocks to the total blocks
Rate received since the last restart of the test.
Runts/Undersized A count of Ethernet frames under the minimum 64 byte frame
length.
Symbol Errors A count of 1 Gigabit Ethernet, 1 Gigabit/2 Gigabit Fibre Channel
receive frames with at least one code violation.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 533
Error Stats (Layer 3 Traffic)

For layer 3 test applications, to view the layer 3 Error Stats results described in
Table 78, set the result category to Error Stats.
Table 78 Error Stats results (layer 3 traffic)

Acterna Payload Errors A count of received IP packets containing Acterna Payload check-
sum errors.
NOTE: This result only appears if you receive an Acterna payload.
Code Violation Rate The ratio of code violations to bits received since the last test
restart.
Code Violation Seconds A count of the number of seconds during which code violations
occurred.
Code Violations A count of each invalid 66-bit code word in the bit stream due to
synchronization header errors.
For 10GigE and 10G Fibre Channel streams, code words with PCS
block errors are also counted as code violations.
Errored Frames A summed count of FCS Errored Frames, Jabbers, and Undersized
Frames.
Errored Second The number of available seconds during which one or more rele-
vant errors were present.
Errored Second Ratio The ratio of errored seconds to the number of available seconds.
FCS Errored Frames A count of Ethernet frames containing Frame Check Sequence
(FCS) errors. When receiving Ethernet jumbo frames containing
FCS errors, the FCS error count does not increment. Instead, these
frames are counted as Jabbers.
Frame Loss Ratio The ratio of frames lost to the number of frames expected.
HI SER Alarm If a high symbol error rate (HI SER) alarm is declared and reported
as an error (indicated with an ON status). If the rate is below the
acceptable level, OFF appears as the status.
HI SER Seconds Count of the number of seconds during which a HI SER alarm was
received.
IP Checksum Errors A count of received IP packets with a checksum error in the header.
IP Packet Length Errors A count of received IP packets that exceed the available Ethernet
payload field.
Jabbers A count of received Ethernet frames that have a byte value greater
than the maximum 1518 frame length (or 1522 bytes for VLAN
tagged frames) and an errored FCS.
LOA Alarm ON indicates that a LOA alarm was detected at some point since
the last restart of the test; OFF indicates that no LOA alarm has
been detected. (25GigE testing does not use LOA)
received. (25GigE testing does not use LOA)

Page 534 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Table 78 Error Stats results (layer 3 traffic) (Continued)

LOAMP Alarm ON indicates that a LOAMP alarm was detected at some point
since the last restart of the test; OFF indicates that no LOAMP
alarm has been detected. (25GigE testing uses LOCWMS instead
of LOAMP)
LOAMP Seconds Count of the number of seconds during which a LOAMP alarm was
received. (25GigE testing uses LOCWMS instead of LOAMP)
Lost Frames An estimated count of lost Acterna test frames in the received traf-
fic.
number that is greater than the next expected sequence number,
the lost frame count will be incremented by the difference
between the sequence number in the received frame and next
expected sequence number. The next expected sequence num-
ber is set to the received sequence number plus one.
number that is less than the next expected sequence number,
the lost frame count will be decremented by one because the
frame will be counted as an Out of Sequence (OoS) frame.
OoS Frames An estimated count of out of sequence Acterna test frames in the
received traffic.
number that is less than the next expected sequence number,
the OoS frame count will be incremented by one. The next
expected sequence number is unchanged.
Packet Error Rate The ratio of lost packets to the number of total packets.
RS-FEC Uncorrectable Count of the number of uncorrectable RS-FEC errors received
since the last restart of the test.
RS-FEC Uncorrectable The ratio of uncorrectable RS-FEC blocks to the total blocks
Rate received since the last restart of the test.
Runts/Undersized A count of Ethernet frames under the minimum 64 byte frame
length.
Severely Errored Second Seconds during which 30% or more of the frames were lost, con-
tained FCS errors, or Loss of Link was detected.
The following calculation is used to declare an SES:
(FCS Error count + Lost Frame count) / (Frames Received count +
Lost Frames) > 0.3.
Severely Errored Second The ratio of severely errored seconds to the number of available
Ratio seconds.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 535
Table 78 Error Stats results (layer 3 traffic) (Continued)

Symbol Errors A count of 1 Gigabit Ethernet, 1 Gigabit/2 Gigabit Fibre Channel
receive frames with at least one code violation.
Unavailable Second Unavailable time is defined as ten (10) consecutive severely
errored seconds. These ten seconds are included in the UAS count.
For example, if 12 consecutive SES occur, the UAS count will be
12. If only 3 consecutive SES occur, the UAS count will be zero.
Capture results
If you capture packets to analyze using Wireshark®, the Capture category provides a
count of the number of packets processed, and displays a gauge indicating the percent
of the buffer that is filled with captured packets.
Sync Status Messages

If you are testing on a SyncE or GigE circuit (except 40GigE or 100GigE), the Sync
Status Messages category provides results related to SyncE testing. Table 79
describes the test results for the Layer 1 BERT patterns.
Table 79 Sync Status Messages results

Decoded QL Message Decode of the last quality level (QL) message
SSM Message Count Total Count of all SSM messages received.
SSM Message Count Event Count of the SSM Event messages received.
SSM Message Count Information Count of the SSM Information messages received.
SSM Message Count Malformed Count of the SSM Malformed messages received.
SSM PDU Rate (pps) Rate of the PDU (Protocol Data Unit).
Tx SSM Count Count of all SSM messages sent.
On the Summary results page, the “Wrong SSM PDU Rate” result may appear. This
alarm indicates that the PDU rate is slower than 1pps or faster than 10pps.
AutoNeg Status results

The AutoNeg Status category displays results associated with the auto-negotiation of
capabilities between two Ethernet devices.

Page 536 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Table 80 describes each of the results for 10/100/1000 links.
NOTE:
AutoNeg Status results only appear when auto-negotiation is turned ON on
the CSAM, MSAM, or T-BERD / MTS 5800.
Table 80 AutoNeg Status results

1000Base - TX FDX Indicates that the Ethernet link partner is full duplex capable at
1000Base-TX (YES or NO).
1000Base - TX HDX Indicates that the Ethernet link partner is half duplex capable 1000Base-
TX (YES or NO).
100Base-TX FDX Indicates whether the Ethernet link partner is full duplex capable at
100Base-TX HDX Indicates whether the Ethernet link partner is half duplex capable at
10Base-TX FDX Indicates whether the Ethernet link partner is full duplex capable at
10Base-TX HDX Indicates whether the Ethernet link partner is half duplex capable at
Duplex Indicates the negotiated duplex setting for the link (half or full).
Link Advt. Status Indicates that the Dual Module Carrier, Transport Module, and MSAM
has received a valid auto-negotiation capability advertisement from the
Ethernet link partner and sent an acknowledgement.
Link Config ACK Indicates that the Ethernet link partner has acknowledged the receipt of
a valid auto-negotiation capability advertisement from the Dual Module
Carrier, Transport Module, and MSAM.
Mstr/Slv Resolution Indicates whether the Ethernet link partner is operating as the master
(providing the clock for timing), or slave (deriving the clock from the
Dual Module Carrier, Transport Module, and MSAM). Applicable when
testing 1000 Base-Tx only.
Remote Fault If supported by the Ethernet link partner, indicates a reason for auto-
negotiation failure. If auto-negotiation succeeded, the result will read
“NO”.
Speed (Mbps) Indicates the negotiated speed setting for the link (10 or 100 Mbps).
Table 81 describes each of the results for 1 Gigabit Ethernet optical links.
Table 81 1 Gigabit Ethernet Optical AutoNeg Status results

FDX Capable Indicates whether the Ethernet link partner is full duplex capable (YES or
NO).
Flow Control Indicates whether Flow Control is turned On or Off on your unit.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 537
Table 81 1 Gigabit Ethernet Optical AutoNeg Status results (Continued)

HDX Capable Indicates whether the Ethernet link partner is half duplex capable (YES or
NO).
Link Advt. Status Indicates that the Dual Module Carrier, Transport Module, and MSAM has
received a valid auto-negotiation capability advertisement from the Ether-
net link partner and sent an acknowledgement.
Link Config ACK Indicates that the Ethernet link partner has acknowledged the receipt of a
valid auto-negotiation capability advertisement from the Dual Module Car-
rier, Transport Module, and MSAM.
Pause Capable Indicates the flow control capabilities of the Ethernet link partner. Those
capabilities are:
– Tx Only:
The Ethernet link partner will transmit PAUSE frames to alert the
Transport Module to reduce the transmitted bandwidth momentarily,
however it will not reduce its transmitted bandwidth if it receives
PAUSE frames.
– Rx Only:
The Ethernet link partner will reduce its transmitted bandwidth momen-
tarily if it receives PAUSE frames but it will not transmit PAUSE frames
to alert the Transport Module to reduce the transmitted bandwidth.
– Both Rx and Tx:
The Ethernet link partner will transmit PAUSE frames to alert the
Transport Module to reduce the transmitted bandwidth momentarily
and it will reduce its transmitted bandwidth momentarily if it receives
PAUSE frames
– Neither Rx or Tx:
The Ethernet link partner will not transmit PAUSE frames to alert the
Transport Module to reduce the transmitted bandwidth and it will not
reduce its transmitted bandwidth if it receives PAUSE frames.
Remote Fault If supported by the Ethernet link partner, indicates a reason for auto-nego-
tiation failure. If auto-negotiation succeeded, the result will read “NO”.
Login Status results

The Login Status category displays results associated with the login status between two
Fibre Channel devices.

Page 538 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Implicit or Explicit (E-Port) login

Table 82 describes each of the results when using an Implicit or Explicit (E-Port) login.
Table 82 Login Status results - Implicit or Explicit (E-Port) login

Login Status Indicates the status of the Fibre Channel login process by displaying
one of the following:
– IN PROGRESS
– COMPLETE
– FAILED/LOOP
RX ELP Accept Count of accept messages received in response to login requests.
RX ELP Ack1 Count of acknowledgments received in response to login requests or
accept/reject messages.
RX ELP Reject Count of rejections received in response to login requests.
RX ELP Request Count of login requests received from another Viavi compliant Ethernet
tester or a distance extension device.
TX ELP Accept Count of accept messages transmitted in response to login requests
from another Viavi compliant Ethernet tester or a distance extension
device.
TX ELP Ack1 Count of acknowledgments transmitted in response to login requests or
accept/reject messages from another Viavi compliant Ethernet tester or
a distance extension device.
TX ELP Reject Count of rejections transmitted in response to login requests from Viavi
compliant Ethernet tester or a distance extension device.
TX ELP Request Count of login requests transmitted to another Viavi compliant Ethernet
tester or a distance extension device.
Explicit (Fabric/N-Port) login

Table 83 describes each of the results when using an Implicit or Explicit (E-Port) login.
Table 83 Login Status results - Explicit (Fabric/N-Port) login

Fabric Present Indicates whether a fabric is present (Yes or No).
Fabric Login Status Indicates the status of the fabric login process by displaying one of the
following:
– In Progress
– Complete
– Failed/Loop
– Unavailable
F Port Name Displays the name of the F Port that the instrument logged into.
Fabric Name Displays the name of the fabric that the instrument logged into.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 539
Table 83 Login Status results - Explicit (Fabric/N-Port) login (Continued)

N Port Login Status Indicates the status of the N Port login process by displaying one of the
following:
– In Progress
– Complete
– Failed/Loop
– Unavailable
Dest. N Port ID Displays the port ID for the destination N port.
Dest. N Port Name Displays the name of the destination N port.
Dest. Node Name Displays the name of the destination node.
Source N Port ID Displays the port ID for the source N port.
Source N Port Name Displays the name of the source N port.
Source Node Name Displays the name of the source node.

Table 84 describes the L4 Link Stats results, such as the source and destination port
carried in the last layer 4 packet received, and the current bandwidth utilized by TCP or
UDP traffic.

Rx Destination Port Displays the Destination Port number for the last layer 4 packet
received.
Rx Mbps, Cur L4 The current bandwidth utilized by the received layer 4 (TCP/UDP) traffic
expressed in megabits per second. This measurement is an average
Rx Mbps, Cur TCP The current bandwidth utilized by the received TCP traffic expressed in
Rx Mbps, Cur UDP The current bandwidth utilized by the received UDP traffic expressed in
Rx Source Port Displays the Source Port number for the last layer 4 packet received.
Tx Mbps, Cur L4 The current bandwidth utilized by the transmitted TCP/UDP traffic

Page 540 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Detailed L4 Stats
When running the TCP Wirespeed application, detailed statistics are provided for each
established connection, including bandwidth measurements, delay measurements,
window statistics, and frame counts. Table 87 describes the Detailed L4 Stats results.
Table 85 Detailed L4 Stats results

Estab. Indicates whether or not a connection was established.
Local Port Displays the local port number for the connection.
Negotiated MSS The value of the negotiated Max Segment Size.
Remote Port Displays the remote port number for the connection.
Rx Mbps, Cur The current bandwidth utilized by the received traffic expressed in
Rx Mbps, Avg The average bandwidth utilized by the received traffic since starting the
test expressed in megabits per second.
Rx Mbps, Min The minimum bandwidth utilized by the received traffic since starting
the test expressed in megabits per second.
Rx Mbps, Max The maximum bandwidth utilized by the received traffic since starting
Tx Mbps, Cur The current bandwidth utilized by the transmitted traffic expressed in
Tx Mbps, Avg The average bandwidth utilized by the transmitted traffic since starting
Tx Mbps, Min The minimum bandwidth utilized by the transmitted traffic since starting
Tx Mbps, Max The maximum bandwidth utilized by the transmitted traffic since starting
Rx Send Wind Clsd Count of times the far end window closed as a result of reaching its
Cnt limit.
Tx Total Retrans Count of the total number of frames retransmitted.
Frames
Send Window, Cur The current window size. This measurement is an average taken over
Send Window, Min The minimum window size utilized since starting the test.
Send Window, Max The maximum window size utilized since starting the test.
RTD, Cur (ms) The current round trip delay calculated in milliseconds. This measure-
ment is an average taken over the prior second of time.
RTD, Avg (ms) The average round trip delay measured since starting the test, calcu-
lated in milliseconds.
RTD, Min (ms) The minimum round trip delay measured since starting the test, calcu-

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 541
Table 85 Detailed L4 Stats results (Continued)

RTD, Max (ms) The maximum round trip delay measured since starting the test, calcu-
Cumulative L4 results
When running the TCP Wirespeed application, cumulative statistics are provided for all
connections. Table 87 describes the Cumulative L4 results.
Table 86 Detailed L4 Stats results

Total Tx Mbps, Cur. Sum total of transmit throughput of all the valid connections (up to
64 TCP connections).
Total Rx Mbps, Cur. Sum total of receive throughput of all the valid connections (up to 64
TCP connections).
Total Tx Retrans Frm Sum total of Tx re-transmit frame count of all the valid connections (up
to 64 TCP connections).
Established Connections Number of active connections.

Table 87 describes the L4 Link Counts results.

TCP Packets A count of TCP packets received since the last test start or restart.
UDP Packets A count of TCP packets received since the last test start or restart.

Table 88 describes the L4 Filter Stats result.
Table 88 L4 Filter Stats results

Rx Mbps, Cur L4 The current bandwidth utilized by filtered layer 4 (TCP/UDP) traffic

Page 542 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018

Table 89 describes the L4 Filter Counts results.

TCP Packets A count of filtered TCP packets received since the last test start or
restart.
UDP Packets A count of filtered TCP packets received since the last test start or
restart.
J-Profiler results
Table 90 describes the results provided when you run the J-Profiler application.
Table 90 Traffic Profiler Streams results

MPLS/MPLS1 Label Displays the label attached to groups of profiled streams.
MPLS/MPLS1 Priority Displays the priority of the identified stream.
MPLS PW/MPLS2 Label Displays the label attached to groups of profiled streams on a
pseudo wire.
MPLS PW/MPLS2 Priority Displays the priority of the identified stream.
VLAN/SVLAN ID Displays the ID of the provider VLAN
VLAN/SVLAN Priority Displays the priority of the identified VLAN.
CVLAN ID Displays the ID of the customer VLAN.
CVLAN Priority Displays the priority of the identified VLAN.
Source MAC Displays the source MAC address for the discovered stream.
Source IP Displays the source IP address for the discovered stream.
Destination MAC Displays the destination MAC address for the discovered stream.
Destination IP Displays the destination IP address for the discovered stream.
Source Port Displays the source port number for the discovered stream.
Source Port Name Displays the source port name for the discovered stream.
Dest Port Displays the destination port number for the discovered stream.
Dest Port Name Displays the destination port name for the discovered stream.
L1 Mbps Displays the Layer 1 bandwidth utilized for the discovered stream
(in Mbps).
Util % Displays the current bandwidth utilized by the stream expressed as
a percentage of the line rate of available bandwidth. This measure-
ment is an average taken over the prior second of test time.
IP DSCP Displays the DSCP value for the discovered stream.
Frames A count of received Ethernet frames for the discovered stream.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 543
RS-FEC results
Table 90 Traffic Profiler Streams results (Continued)

Frame Size, Max The maximum size of frames received for the discovered stream
since frame detection.
Frame Size, Min The minimum size of frames received for the discovered stream
since frame detection.
Bytes A count of received bytes for the discovered stream.
RS-FEC results
When running 100GigE and 32Gig Fibre Channel RS-FEC applications, additional
LEDs supporting RS-FEC alarms and errors, and statistical test results are provided in
addition to the supporting Layer 1, Layer 2, and Layer 3 LEDs and results.
RS-FEC LED results

RS-FEC LEDs are described in “LEDs” on page 478.
RS-FEC Stats results

Table 91 describes the RS-FEC Stats results provided when running 100GigE and
32Gig Fibre Channel RS-FEC applications.
Table 91 RS-FEC Stats results

LOAMP Alarm ON indicates that a LOAMP alarm was detected at some point
since the last restart of the test; OFF indicates that no LOAMP
alarm has been detected. (Not for 32G Fibre Channel testing).
(25GigE testing uses LOCWMS instead of LOAMP)
LOAMP Seconds Count of the number of seconds during which a LOAMP alarm
was received. (Not for 32G Fibre Channel testing). (25GigE test-
ing uses LOCWMS instead of LOAMP)
LOA Alarm ON indicates that a LOA alarm was detected at some point since
the last restart of the test; OFF indicates that no LOA alarm has
been detected. (LOA is not available on 25GigE testing)
received. (LOA is not available on 25GigE testing)
HI SER Alarm If a high symbol error rate (HI SER) alarm is declared and
reported as an error (indicated with an ON status). If the rate is
below the acceptable level, OFF appears as the status.
HI SER Seconds Count of the number of seconds during which a HI SER alarm
was received.

Page 544 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
PTP results
Table 91 RS-FEC Stats results (Continued)

RS-FEC Correctable Count of the number of correctable RS-FEC errors received since
the last restart of the test.
RS-FEC Correctable Rate The ratio of correctable RS-FEC blocks to the total blocks
received since the last restart of the test.
RS-FEC Uncorrectable Count of the number of uncorrectable RS-FEC errors received
since the last restart of the test.
RS-FEC Uncorrectable Rate The ratio of uncorrectable RS-FEC blocks to the total blocks
received since the last restart of the test.
PTP results
When running PTP/1588 applications, additional LEDs supporting 1 PPS and TOD
signals, and test results specific to PTP are provided (in addition to the supporting Layer
1, Layer 2, and Layer 3 LEDs and results).
PTP Link Counts results

Table 92 describes the PTP Link Counts results. The results that appear vary
depending on whether you are using Master or Slave mode.
Table 92 PTP Link Counts results

Domain Mismatches The count of domain mismatch messages.
Rx Frame Counts, Announce The count of received announce messages.
Rx Frame Counts, Sync The count of received sync frames.
Rx Frame Counts, Follow Up The count of received follow up frames.
Rx Frame Counts, Delay Request The count of received delay request frames.
Rx Frame Counts, Delay Response The count of received delay response frames.
Rx Frame Counts, Signaling The count of received signaling frames.
Rx Frame Counts, Management The count of received management frames.
Tx Frame Counts, Delay Request The count of transmitted delay request messages.
Tx Frame Counts, Delay Response The count of transmitted delay response frames.
Tx Frame Counts, Signaling The count of transmitted signaling frames.
Tx Frame Counts, Management The count of received management frames.
Rx Frame Rates, Announce The rate of received announce messages.
Rx Frame Rates, Sync The rate of received sync frames.
Rx Frame Rates, Follow Up The rate of received follow up frames.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 545
PTP results
Table 92 PTP Link Counts results (Continued)

Rx Frame Rates, Delay Request The rate of received delay request frames.
Rx Frame Rates, Delay Response The rate of received delay response frames.
Rx Frame Rates, Signaling The rate of received signaling frames.
Rx Frame Rates, Management The rate of received management frames.
Tx Frame Rates, Delay Request The rate of transmitted delay request messages.
Tx Frame Rates, Delay Response The rate of transmitted delay response messages.
Tx Frame Rates, Signaling The rate of transmitted signaling frames.
Tx Frame Rates, Management The rate of transmitted management frames.
PTP Link Stats results

Table 93 describes the PTP Link Stats results. The results that appear vary depending
on whether you are using Master or Slave mode.
Table 93 PTP Link Stats results

Rx Domain Number Displays the Domain Number Attribute settings configured on the
PTP Master.
Port State Reports the state of the PTP port when running a test in Terminate
mode.
Max TE (us) The maximum time error measured in microseconds from test
restart.
Two Way cTE (us) The constant time errors in microseconds as determined within the
entire observation interval. This result will not be available until the
entire observation interval has transpired.
Two Way cTE Time A count down of the time remaining within the minimum observa-
Remaining (s) tion interval. The observation interval begins when a valid signal
(T1 sync packet and T4 delay response packet) is received.
T1 cTE (us) The constant T1 time errors in microseconds as determined within
the entire observation interval. This result will not be available until
the entire observation interval has transpired.
T1 cTE Time Remaining (s) A count down of the time remaining within the minimum observa-
tion interval specified for T1 packets. The observation interval
begins when a valid T1 packet is received.
T4 cTE (us) The constant T4 time errors in microseconds as determined within
the entire observation interval. This result will not be available until
the entire observation interval has transpired.
T4 cTE Time Remaining (s) A count down of the time remaining within the minimum observa-
tion interval specified for T4 packets. The observation interval
begins when a valid signal T4 packet is received.

Page 546 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
PTP results
Table 93 PTP Link Stats results (Continued)

Source IP Address In Slave mode, reports the destination IP of the master.
Unicast Lease Duration The granted lease duration in seconds.
Grandmaster ID The unique identifier for the grandmaster clock. This is a 64-bit
unique identifier derived from the master's 48 bit MAC address, but
it is not the MAC address itself. The formula for computing the
expanded ID is:
<First three bytes of MAC>:FF:FE:<last three bytes of MAC>.
Grandmaster Clock Class Displays the traceability of the time or frequency distributed by the
grandmaster clock.
Grandmaster Clock Accu- Displays the characterization of the grandmaster clock for the pur-
racy pose of the best grandmaster clock algorithm.
Grandmaster Time Source Indicates the source of the time used by the grandmaster clock.
Grandmaster Priority 1 Displays the priority 1 value, used in the execution of the best mas-
ter clock algorithm. Lower values take precedence.
Grandmaster Priority 2 Displays the priority 2 value, used in the execution of the best mas-
ter clock algorithm. Lower values take precedence.
Master-to-Slave Time- Displays whether master and slave time stamps are getting closer
stamps Converging together over time.
Mean Path Delay Average Mean Path Delay - mean propagation time between a master and
slave as computed by the slave, and is calculated by (Tms-Tsm)/2.
It is calculated based on the current Delay Request propagation
time (Tsm) and Sync propagation time (Tms) pair.
MPD, Average - average value of all MPDs since beginning of test
(since last test restart). [MPD(1) + MPD(2) + MPD(3) + ….
MPD(N)]/N.
Mean Path Delay Current MPD, Current - current 1 second value of MPD in this test. MPD[i]
where is [i] is the current second.
Mean Path Delay Minimum MPD, Minimum - smallest value of MPD in this test.
Mean Path Delay Maximum MPD, Maximum - largest value of MPD in this test.
One-Way Delay (OWD), One-way Path Delay, Master to Slave reported in the following cat-
Master-Slave (μs) egories:
– Average
– Current
– Minimum
– Maximum
One-Way Delay (OWD), One-way Path Delay, Slave to Master reported in the following cat-
Slave-Master (μs) egories:
– Average
– Current
– Minimum
– Maximum
Offset from Master Average The average offset from master from test restart.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 547
PTP results

Offset from Master Current The current offset from master from test restart.
Offset from Master Mini- The minimum offset from master from test restart.
mum
Offset from Master Maxi- The maximum offset from master from test restart.
mum
Delay Difference- Average Average detected difference between the Master to Slave Delay
and the Slave to Master Delay.
Delay Difference- Current Current detected difference between the Master to Slave Delay
Delay Difference- Minimum Minimum detected difference between the Master to Slave Delay
Delay Difference-- Maxi- Maximum detected difference between the Master to Slave Delay
mum and the Slave to Master Delay.
Two Way Time Error- Aver- One half of the Average Delay Difference.
age
Two Way Time Error- Cur- One half of the Current Delay Difference.
rent
Two Way Time Error- Mini- One half of the Minimum Delay Difference.
mum
Two Way Time Error- Maxi- One half of the Maximum Delay Difference.
mum
Sync PDV Average The average variation in Sync packet delay (master to slave) from
the minimum Sync packet delay.
Sync PDV Current The current variation in Sync packet delay (master to slave) from
Sync PDV Minimum The minimum variation in Sync packet delay (master to slave) from
Sync PDV Maximum The maximum variation in Sync packet delay (master to slave)
from the minimum Sync packet delay.
Delay Request IPDV Aver- The average variation in Delay Request packet delay (slave to
age master) from the minimum Delay Request packet delay.
Delay Request IPDV Cur- The current variation in Delay Request packet delay (slave to mas-
rent ter) from the minimum Delay Request packet delay.
Delay Request IPDV Mini- The minimum variation in Delay Request packet delay (slave to
mum master) from the minimum Delay Request packet delay.
Delay Request IPDV Maxi- The maximum variation in Delay Request packet delay (slave to
mum master) from the minimum Delay Request packet delay.

Page 548 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
PTP results

Floor Packet Delay Mini- Note: Floor Packet results are based on Sync or Delay messages,
mum as configured in the Message Type Setup on the PTP Thresholds
Setup page.
Floor Packet Delay (ns), Minimum is the smallest delay measured
since the beginning of the test.
FPC (Floor Packet Count) The number of packets in the current measurement window with a
Current delay less than the sum of the Floor Packet Delay Minimum and
the configured Cluster Range.
FPC (Floor Packet Count) The smallest FPC measured in any window during the whole test.
Minimum
FPR (Floor Packet Rate) The FPC Current divided by the number of seconds in the current
Current measurement window.
FPR (Floor Packet Rate) The smallest FPR measured in any window during the whole test.
Minimum
FPP (%) Currrent The FPC Current divided by the total number of packets received
in the current measurement window.
FPP (%) Minimum The smallest FPP measured for any window during the whole test.
Abs. Two Way Time Error The absolute value of the Two Way Time Error measurement. The
error is reported in the following categories:
– Average
– Current
– Minimum
– Maximum
PTP Graphs
The following current and average PTP results are available in graphical form:
• Mean Path Delay
• Offset from Master
• Sync PDV
• Delay Request PDV
• Sync IPDV
• Delay Request IPDV
• Master to Slave, OWD
• Slave to Master, OWD
• Delay Difference
• Two Way Time Error
• Abs. Two Way Time Error (Absolute Two Way Time Error)
• Max TE (Abs. Two Way Time Error, Max)

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 549
Wander Interface results
Wander Interface results

When your instrument is configured for wander tests on a 1GigE Optical circuit, wander
results are available in the Interface result group. Table 94 lists and describes each of
the test results available in the Wander result category.
Table 94 Wander test results

TIE The aggregate variation in time delay of the received signal with respect to
the reference since the last test start or restart.
Max. TIE The maximum aggregated Time Interval Error measured since the last test
start or restart.
Min. TIE The minimum aggregated Time interval error measured since the last test
start or restart.
MTIE The largest peak-to-peak TIE detected since the last test start or restart.
Max. Wander Time Time remaining until Wander memory is filled.
Remaining
Signal Present Indicates that the data signal is valid.
Wander Refer- Indicates that the reference signal is valid.
ence Present
Rx Frequency (Hz) Current frequency of the timing signal being analyzed.
Reference Fre- Difference between frequency of the timing signal and the reference signal.
quency Deviation (TOO HIGH or TOO LOW)
(ppm)
In addition, the Wander Analysis provides the following results:

• MTIE — Maximum Time Interval Error. Per ITU-T O.172, MTIE is a measure of
wander that characterizes frequency offsets and phase transients. It is a function
of parameter τ called the Observation Interval. MTIE(τ) is the largest peak-to-
peak TIE detected since the test started.
• TDEV — Time Deviation. Per ITU-T O.172, TDEV is a measure of wander that
characterizes its spectral content. It is also a function of parameter τ (the Obser-
vation Interval). TDEV(τ) can be said to be the RMS of filtered TIE, where a
band-pass filter is centered on a frequency of
0.42/τ.
• Wander Time Remaining — Shows the remaining time left in the wander test in
days, hours, minutes, seconds, based on file size and/or disk space constraints.
For detailed information about MTIE and TDEV analysis, see Principles of Jitter and
Wander Testing. in the T-BERD / MTS / SC Sonet / SDH, OTN and PDH Testing Manual
that shipped with this unit.

Page 550 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
IP Video results
When testing wander, you can view results in a graphical format by selecting the
Wander Graph result categories in the Interface group (see Figure 127).
Figure 127 Wander Graph result
IP Video results
Test results that help you evaluate the quality of the physical, link, transport stream, and
video stream layers are available when testing IP Video service. A detailed discussion
of the layout and principals behind these results is provided in the “Understanding IP
Video test results” on page 301 section of Chapter 12 “IP Video Testing”.

• “IP Video LEDs” on page 551
• “Physical/Link Stats results” on page 552
• “All Streams Transport results” on page 554
• “All Streams Video/All Program Video results” on page 557
• “All Streams Complete results” on page 561
• “Individual stream results” on page 561
• “Stream and Program PID results” on page 562
• “MSTV results” on page 562
IP Video LEDs
Table 95 describes the LEDs provided during IP Video testing. Only the LEDs that are
applicable for your test appear in the LED panel.
occurred. For details, refer to “Understanding the LED panel” on page 301 of
Chapter 12 “IP Video Testing”.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 551
IP Video results
testing IP Video.
Table 95 IP Video LEDs
LED Indicates
Frame Detect Green
Red
– Frames were detected, and then not present for > 1 sec-
ond.
Packet Detect Green
– An IP Packet has been detected.
Red
– An IP Packet was detected, and then not present for > 1
second.
Link Active Green
– Auto-negotiation was successful, and link is established
with the instrument’s link partner.
Red
– A link to the instrument’s link partner has been lost since
Signal Present1 Green
Red
– Received signal has been lost since the last test start or
restart.
Sync Acquired Green
Red
– Synchronization has been lost since the last test restart.
Physical/Link Stats results

Table 96 lists the results provided in the Physical/Link result group, Stats category.
Table 96 Physical/Link Stats results
Test Result For Descriptions, Refer to....

Link Active Table 47 on page 478 (“LEDs”)
Signal Present
Sync Acquired

Page 552 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
IP Video results
Table 96 Physical/Link Stats results (Continued)
Test Result For Descriptions, Refer to....

Local Fault Detect Table 52 on page 493 (“Interface results”)
Local Fault Seconds
Optical Rx Level (dBm)
Optical Rx Overload
Signal Losses
Signal Loss Seconds
Link Loss Seconds
Sync Loss Seconds
Code Violations Table 77 on page 531 (“Error Stats (Layer 2 Traffic)”)
Errored Frames Table 78 on page 534 (“Error Stats (Layer 3 Traffic)”)
FCS Errored Frames
Jabbers
Runts
Symbol Errors
Undersized Frames
Remote Fault Detect Table 80 on page 537 (“AutoNeg Status results”)
Remote Fault Seconds Table 81 on page 537 (“1 Gigabit Ethernet Optical AutoNeg Status
results”)
Rx IGMP Frames Count of the number of IGMP frames received since the last test
start or restart.
Block Error Rate (PCS) The ratio of errored blocks to total blocks since the last restart of the
test. Only applicable when running 40 GigE and 100GigE applica-
tions.
Block Error Secs (PCS) Count of the number of seconds during which errored blocks were
received. Only applicable when running 40 GigE and 100GigE
applications.
Rx Q-in-Q Frames Table 55 on page 500 (“L2 Link Counts results”)
Rx VLAN Frames
Total Received Frames
Transmitted Frames
SVLAN ID Table 54 on page 495 (“L2 Link Stats results”)
Total Rx Frame Bytes
Total Rx Mbps, Cur L1
Total Util, % Avg
Total Util %, Cur
Total Util %, Min
Total Util %, Peak
VLAN ID

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 553
IP Video results
All Streams Transport results

Table 97 lists the results provided in the All Streams Transport result group, All cate-
gory. In addition to the test results provided for each discovered stream, you can
observe details for a particular stream, such as the source IP address, source port, and
encapsulation settings by selecting the stream, and then pressing the Stream Details
button.
Table 97 All Streams Transport results
Test Result Explorer Analyzer Description

# Streams Analyzed X X Displays the number of discovered streams
that are currently being analyzed using either
the Explorer or the Analyzer application.
#Prgs X X For MPTS streams, displays the number of
programs carried in each discovered stream.
Destination IP X X Displays the destination IP address carried in
Address each discovered stream.
Dist. Err Cur X Displays a total count of instances where the
distance errors fell below the Distance Error
threshold during the last test interval. This
result is only available when analyzing RTP
encapsulated video streams.
Dist. Err Max X Displays the maximum number of distance
errors measured in a test interval since starting
or restarting the test. This result is only avail-
able when analyzing RTP encapsulated video
streams.
Dist. Err Tot X Displays a total count of instances where the
distance errors fell below the Distance Error
threshold since starting or restarting the test.
This result is only available when analyzing
RTP encapsulated video streams.
IP Chksum Errors X X Displays a count of instances when the
expected IP checksum is not equal to the
checksum carried in a received packet for all
analyzed streams since starting the test.
L1 Mbps X X Displays the Layer 1 bandwidth utilized by
each discovered stream (in Mbps).
Max Loss Period X Displays the value for the longest loss period
detected since starting or restarting the test.

Page 554 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
IP Video results
Table 97 All Streams Transport results (Continued)

MDI DF Cur X Displays the current media delivery index delay
factor (MDI-DF). The current count is an aver-
age of the measurements taken during each
test interval since starting or restarting the test.
This result is only applicable if your instrument
includes the MDI option and if analyzing CBR
video streams (not available for VBR or MSTV
streams).
MDI DF Max X Displays the maximum media delivery index
delay factor (MDI-DF) detected since starting
or restarting the test. This result is only applica-
ble if your instrument includes the MDI option
and if analyzing CBR video streams (not avail-
abe for VBR or MSTV streams).
MDI MLR Cur X Displays the current media delivery index loss
rate (MDI MLR). For RTP encapsulated video
streams, the current MLR is calculated by
counting the number of lost IP packets during
the last test interval, and multiplying this num-
ber by seven. If a stream is not RTP encapsu-
lated, this result is the same as the CC Lost
Count. This result is only applicable if your
instrument includes the MDI option and if ana-
lyzing CBR video streams (not availabe for
VBR or MSTV streams).
MDI MLR Max X Displays the current media delivery index loss
rate (MDI MLR) declared since starting or
restarting the test. This result is only applicable
if your instrument includes the MDI option and
if analyzing CBR video streams (not availabe
for VBR or MSTV streams).
Min Loss Distance X Displays the value for the shortest loss period
Name X X Displays the name of each discovered stream.
OoS Pkts Cur X Displays a count of out of sequence frames
detected during the current test interval. This
OoS Pkts Max X Displays the maximum value for the OoS Pkts
Cur result since starting or restarting the
test.This result is only available when analyz-
ing RTP encapsulated video streams.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 555
IP Video results

OoS Pkts Tot X Displays a count of out of sequence frames
Period Err Cur X Displays the number of loss period errors
detected during the last test interval. A loss
period error is declared whenever the loss
period exceeds the Loss Period threshold. This
Period Err Max X Displays the maximum value for the Period
Err Cur result since starting or restarting the
test. This result is only available when analyz-
ing RTP encapsulated video streams.
Period Err Tot. X Displays the total number of loss period errors
Pkt Jitter Cur (ms) X X Displays the current packet jitter measured for
received packets during the last test interval,
calculated in milliseconds. When running Ana-
lyzer applications, if the stream is RTP encap-
sulated, this is derived using the RTP header.
This result is only applicable to CBR streams
(not availabe for VBR or MSTV streams).
Pkt Jitter Max (ms) X X Displays the maximum packet jitter measured
for received packets since the last test restart,
calculated in milliseconds. When running Ana-
lyzer applications, if the stream is RTP encap-
sulated, this is derived using the RTP header.
This result is only applicable to CBR streams
(not availabe for VBR or MSTV streams).
Pkt Loss Cur X X Displays the current number packets lost within
the last test interval.
Pkt Loss Max X X Displays the maximum packet lost measured
during a single test interval since starting or
restarting the test.
Pkt Loss Peak X X Displays the maximum value recorded for the
Pkt Loss Cur result since starting the test.
Pkt Loss Tot X X Displays the total number of packets lost since
starting the test.
Port X X Displays the destination UDP port number car-
ried in each discovered stream.

Page 556 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
IP Video results

RTP Present X X For each discovered stream, Yes indicates that
an RTP header is present; No indicates that no
RTP header is present.
RUDP Packet Count X Displays the number of received RUDP unicast
retry media packets. It appears only when
using MSTV protocol in SPTS Analyzer.
Stream Type X Displays the type of stream (CBR or VBR) for
each discovered stream.
Sync Losses Tot. X Displays a count of the number of instance
when synchronization was lost with the MPEG
Sync Byte Err Tot. X Displays the total number of sync byte errors
Sync Byte Err Cur X Displays the current number of sync byte
errors detected during the last test interval.
Sync Byte Err Max X Displays the maximum number of sync byte
errors detected during a single test interval
Total L1 Mbps X X Displays the cumulative Layer 1 bandwidth uti-
lized by all discovered streams (in Mbps).
UDP Chksum Errors X X Displays a count of instances when the
expected UDP checksum is not equal to the
checksum carried in a received packet for all
analyzed streams since starting the test.
All Streams Video/All Program Video results

Table 98 lists the results provided in the All Streams Video result group (All category),
and in the Stream result group (All Programs Video result category). The All Programs

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 557
IP Video results
Video result category only appears when running MPTS (Multiple Program Transport
Stream) applications.
Table 98 All Streams Video and All Programs Video results

MPTS MPTS SPTS SPTS
Test Result Explor Analyz Explor Analyz Description
er er er er
Name X X X X For descriptions, see
Destination IP X X X X Table 97 on page 554 (“All
Address Streams Transport results”)
Port X X X X
L1 Mbps X X X X
#Prgs X X
IP Chksum Errors X X X X
UDP Chksum Errors X X X X
Total L1 Mbps X X X X
# Streams Analyzed X X X X
Transport ID X Displays the transport stream
ID carried in the PAT for each
discovered stream. (not avail-
abe for MSTV streams)
Prog No. X Displays the program number
carried in the PAT for the
stream. (not availabe for
MSTV streams)
PMT PID X Displays the program ID for
the PMT (Program Map
Table) (not availabe for MSTV
streams)
#PIDs X Displays the total number of
PIDs for a particular program.
Prog Mbps Cur X Displays the current band-
width utilized by the program
expressed in megabits per
second. This measurement is
an average taken during the
current test interval.
Prog Mbps Min X Displays the minimum band-
second since starting or

Page 558 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
IP Video results
Table 98 All Streams Video and All Programs Video results (Continued)
MPTS MPTS SPTS SPTS

er er er er
Prog Mbps Max X Displays the maximum band-
second since starting or
Sync Losses Tot. X Displays a count of the num-
ber of instances when syn-
chronization was lost with the
MPEG since starting or
Sync Byte Err Tot. X Displays the total number of
sync byte errors since start-
ing or restarting the test.
Sync Byte Err Cur X Displays the current number
of sync byte errors detected
during the last test interval.
Sync Byte Err Max X Displays the maximum num-
ber of sync byte errors
detected during a single test
interval since starting or
PCR Jitter Max X Displays the maximum PCR
jitter during a single test inter-
val since starting or restarting
the test. (not availabe for
MSTV streams)
PCR Jitter Cur X Displays the current PCR jit-
ter measured as an average
taken during the last test
interval, in milliseconds. (not
availabe for MSTV streams)
CC Err Tot. X Displays the total number of
continuity counter errors
since starting or restarting the
test.
CC Err Cur X Displays the number of conti-
nuity counter errors detected
CC Err Max X Displays the maximum num-
ber of continuity counter
errors detected during a sin-
gle test interval since starting
or restarting the test.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 559
IP Video results
MPTS MPTS SPTS SPTS

er er er er
Transp. Err Tot. X X Displays the maximum num-
ber of transport errors
Transp. Err Cur X X Displays the number of trans-
port errors detected during
Transp. Err Max X X Displays the maximum num-
ber of transport errors
PAT Err Tot. X X Displays the maximum num-
ber of PAT errors detected
during a single test interval
test. (not availabe for MSTV
streams)
PAT Err Cur X X Displays the current number
of PAT errors detected during
the last test interval. (not
availabe for MSTV streams)
PAT Err Max X X Displays the maximum num-
ber of PAT errors detected
streams)
PMT Err Tot. X Displays the maximum num-
ber of PMT errors detected
streams)
PMT Err Cur X Displays the current number
of PMT errors detected
(not availabe for MSTV
streams)

Page 560 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
IP Video results
MPTS MPTS SPTS SPTS

er er er er
PMT Err Max X Displays the maximum num-
ber of PMT errors detected
streams)
PID Err Tot. X Displays the total number of
PID errors detected since
starting or restarting the test.
PID Err Cur X Displays the current number
of PID errors detected during
PID Err Max X Displays the maximum num-
ber of PID errors detected
test.
All Streams Complete results

You can observe results associated with transport and video streams by selecting the
All Streams Complete result group, All category. Each of the results displayed in this
view is documented in Table 97 on page 554 (“All Streams Transport results”) and
Table 98 on page 558 (“All Streams Video/All Program Video results”).
Individual stream results

In addition to the All Streams result views, you can observe results for a particular
stream by setting the result group to the stream number. The streams are numbered in
the order that they appear in the All Streams view.
Each of the results displayed in this view is documented in Table 97 on page 554 (“All
Streams Transport results”) and Table 98 on page 558 (“All Streams Video/All Program
Video results”; however, the result names may be slightly different because in many
instances they did not need to be abbreviated. For example, the Packet Loss, Peak
result that appears for a particular stream provides the same data that is provided by
the Pkt Loss Peak result in the All Streams view.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 561
IP Video results
Stream and Program PID results

When running MPTS Analyzer applications, you can observe test results associated
with the PIDs for each analyzed program. When running SPTS Analyzer applications,
you can observe results associated with the PIDs in each analyzed stream. The PID,
PID Type (Audio, Video, PMT, or PAT), bandwidth utilized, and error counts are
provided for each PID. Table 99 lists each of the PID results.
Table 99 PID results

PID Displays the PID number.
Type Displays the PID type (Audio, Video, PMT, or PAT).
Mbps Displays the bandwidth utilized by the PID in Mbps.
CC Err Displays the number of continuity counter errors detected during
CC Err Max Displays the maximum number of continuity counter errors
detected during a single test interval since starting or restarting
the test.
CC Err Tot. Displays the total number of continuity counter errors since start-
ing or restarting the test.
PID Err Displays the current number of PMT errors detected during the
last test interval.
PID Err Max Displays the maximum number of PID errors detected during a
single test interval since starting or restarting the test.
PID Err Tot. Displays the total number of PID errors detected since starting or
MSTV results
When running SPTS Analyzer using MSTV protocol, you can observe the MSTV
results. There are four groups of results within the MSTV category: Stats, Count,
Latency Distribution, and Message Log.
MSTV Stats
Table 100 lists each of the MSTV Stats results.
Table 100 MSTV Stats results

ICC Latency with Burst Average, Current, and Maximum amount of time, in mil-
liseconds, of a MSTV ICC request to the first unicast
media packet of the burst video stream.

Page 562 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
IP Video results
Table 100 MSTV Stats results (Continued)

ICC Latency without Average, Current, and Maximum amount of time, in mil-
Burst liseconds, of a MSTV ICC request to the first multicast
media packet of the video stream.
RUDP Latency Average, Current, and Maximum amount of time, in mil-
liseconds, of a MSTV RUDP request message to the
first unicast retry media packet.
DServer Command Average, Current, and Maximum amount of time, in mil-
Latency liseconds, of a MSTV command message to its appro-
priate response, including ICC request and status.
Client Command Average, Current, and Maximum amount of time, in mil-
Latency liseconds, of a MSTV burst complete message to its
AckBurstComplete response.
ICC and RUDP rate Average, Current, and Maximum bitrate of all ICC media
packets, plus uncategorized or late RUDP media pack-
ets.
MSTV Count
Table 101 lists each of the MSTV Count results.
Table 101 MSTV Counts results

ICC (with Burst) Latency Number of ICC Latency (with burst) measurements
Count done.
ICC (without Burst) Number of ICC Latency (without burst) measurements
Latency Count done.
Total ICC Request Sent Total number of ICC requests sent.
RUDP Latency Count Number of RUDP Latency measurements done.
MSTV Latency Distribution

The MSTV Latency Distribution results shows the ICC with burst, ICC without burst, and
RUDP latency in graphical form.
MSTV Message Log

The MSTV Message Log provides a listing of significant messages such as join
requests, retry requests, leave requests, and errors.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 563
VoIP results
VoIP results
Test results that help you evaluate the quality of the physical, link, transport stream, and
voice content layers are available when testing VoIP service. A detailed discussion of
the layout and principals behind these results is provided in the “Understanding VoIP
test results” on page 450 section of Chapter 15 “VoIP Testing”.

• “VoIP LEDs” on page 564
• “Content results” on page 566
• “Transport results” on page 567
• “Transaction Log results” on page 568
• “Miscellaneous measurements” on page 568
• “Ethernet results” on page 569
• “Graph results” on page 570
VoIP LEDs
Table 102 describes the LEDs provided during VoIP testing. Only the LEDs that are
applicable for your test appear in the LED panel.
occurred. For details, refer to “Understanding the LED panel” on page 450 of
Chapter 15 “VoIP Testing”.
testing VoIP.
Table 102 VoIP LEDs
LED Indicates
Call Status gray
– indicates Idle or Unavailable
Green
– indicates Conversation in Progress
Frame Detect Green
Red
– Frames were detected, and then not present for > 1 sec-
ond.
IP Packet Detect Green
– An IP Packet has been detected.
Red
– An IP Packet was detected, and then not present for > 1
second.

Page 564 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
VoIP results
Table 102 VoIP LEDs (Continued)
LED Indicates
Link Active Green
– Auto-negotiation was successful, and link is established
with the instrument’s link partner.
Red
– A link to the instrument’s link partner has been lost since
Local Content Rat- This result provides current and history rating indication of
ing the call in progress.
Green
– indicates MOS Score above configured Pass/Good Con-
tent Threshold
Red
– indicates MOS Score below configured Fail/Poor Content
Threshold
Yellow
– indicates MOS Score between Pass and Fail Content
Threshold
Network Up/Down Green
– indicates Network is up (Physical Link is up, IP address
obtained (if DHCP enabled), PPPoE UP (if Data Mode is
PPPoE)
Red
– indicates Network is down
Phone Status Green
– indicates Registered (Registered with SIP Proxy/H.323
Gatekeeper/SCCP Call Manager or No Proxy/Gate-
keeper) or Registration In Progress
Gray
– indicates Not Registered
Signal Present Green
Red
– Received signal has been lost since the last test start or
restart.
Sync Acquired Green
Red
– Synchronization has been lost since the last test restart.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 565
VoIP results
Content results
Content provides current and historic call scores. Table 103 describes the current call
score measurements.
Table 103 Current Call Scores
Result Definition
MOS Conversational Mean Opinion Score represented as a number and a
Quality graphic representation of quality.
MOS Listener Quality Current, Average, Minimum, and Maximum Listener and
conversation quality scores.
R Factor Conversa- Current, Average, Minimum, and Maximum conversation
tional Quality quality R factor
R Factor Listener Current, Average, Minimum, and Maximum listener qual-
Quality ity R factor
R Factor G.107 Current, Average, Minimum, and Maximum G.107 R fac-
tor
R Factor Burst Current, Average, Minimum, and Maximum burst R factor
R Factor Gap Current, Average, Minimum, and Maximum gap R factor
Local Content Rating Current, Average, Minimum, and Maximum conversation
quality mean opinion score
Local Content Rating Overall Local content rating: whether the MOS score is
currently within the Threshold.
Table 104 describes the historic call score measurements.
Table 104 Historic Call Scores
Result Definition
MOS Conversational Quality Average, Minimum, and Maximum MOS for conversation quality
for the entire call.
MOS Listener Quality Average, Minimum, and Maximum Listener quality actor scores
for the entire call.
R Factor Conversational Average, Minimum, and Maximum conversation quality R factor
Quality for the entire call.
R Factor Listener Quality Average, Minimum, and Maximum listener quality R factor for the
entire call.
R Factor G.107 Average, Minimum, and Maximum G.107 R factor for the entire
call.
R Factor Burst Average, Minimum, and Maximum burst R f actor for the entire
call.
R Factor Gap Average, Minimum, and Maximum gap R factor for the entire call.
Local Content Rating Overall Local content rating: whether the MOS score was within
the threshold at any point during the call.

Page 566 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
VoIP results
Transport results
This category provides quality of service and Stats/Counts.
QoS results
These results report local and remote quality of service results. Table 105 describes the
QoS results.
Table 105 Transport QoS results
Result Definition
Audio Delay The end to end delay in milliseconds.
Current: measured in the last second.
Minimum/Maximum: since the beginning of the call
QoS: whether the delay has crossed the threshold in the last second.
History: the delay has crossed the threshold during any given second so far.
Jitter The deviation in packet arrival times, in milliseconds.
Current: measured in the last second.
Minimum/Maximum: since the beginning of the call
QoS: whether the jitter has crossed the threshold in the last second.
History: the jitter has crossed the threshold during any given second so far.
Lost packets Count: number of packets lost
Percent: Percentage of packets lost so far from the beginning of the call.
QoS: whether the percent has crossed the threshold in the last second.
History: whether the percentage crossed the threshold during any given second
so far.
NOTE:
The Delay results, Remote Jitter results, and Remote Lost Packets are only
provided if the RTCP signaling is active.
Stats/Counts results
These results provide audio throughput stats.Table 106 describes the throughput
results.
Table 106 Transport Stats/Counts results
Result Definition
Local Rate Tx The local transmit rate
Local Rate Rx The local receive rate
Bytes Tx Total number of bytes transmitted
Bytes Rx Total number of bytes received
Packets Tx Total number of RTP packets transmitted

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 567
VoIP results
Table 106 Transport Stats/Counts results (Continued)
Result Definition
Packets Rx Total number of RTP packets received
Out of Sequence Total number of packets that arrive out of sequence
Lost Audio Pack- The total number of lost audio packets
ets
Remote Bytes Tx Total number of bytes transmitted from the remote end
Remote Packets Total number of RTP packets transmitted from the remote end
Tx
Transaction Log results

A running list of all signaling and call status transactions with the far-end.
Miscellaneous measurements
This category provides measurements and call stats.
Measurement results
Table 107 describes the miscellaneous results for the audio path.
Table 107 Miscellaneous results
Result Definition
Audio Jitter Buffer Any time the jitter buffer is queried for a packet to play
Replayed out and it returns null, this counter is incremented.
Audio Jitter Buffer If two packets with different timestamps end up with the
Dropped same calculated play out (due to a shift in the jitter buffer
window), the packet will be discarded and this counter
will be incremented.
Delay, Network Time, in milliseconds, needed to travel the network
Delay, Encoding Time, in milliseconds, needed to convert samples in
selected codec form
Delay, Packetization Number of milliseconds needed to fill the frame(s) com-
prising one RTP data packet
Delay, Buffering Time, in milliseconds, that the data was held in a jitter
buffer
Delay Total Total of all delays
% of Total Delay, Net- The percent of the total delay that is related to network
work delay

Page 568 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
VoIP results
Table 107 Miscellaneous results (Continued)
Result Definition
% of Total Delay, The percent of the total delay that is related to encoding
Encoding delay
% of Total Delay, Pack- The percent of the total delay that is related to Packeti-
etization zation delay
% of Total Delay, Buff- The percent of the total delay that is related to buffering
ering delay
Mic Power Level The microphone power level, in dBm, coming into the
codec.
NOTE: The microphone power level applies to the level
coming into the codec. It is not tied to actual availability
of a microphone.
Speaker Power Level The speaker power level, in dBm, coming out of the
codec.
NOTE: The speaker power level applies to the level
coming out of the codec. It is not tied to actual availabil-
ity of a speaker.
Call Stats results

This category provides results for the current call. Table 108 describes the call info
results.
Table 108 Call Stats results
Result Definition
Call Duration Length of time for the current call.
Remote IP The IP address of the incoming call
Remote alias The alias of the incoming call
Audio Codec Rx The Audio decoder type used for decoding.
Speech per Frame Rx The speech per frame received
Audio Codec Tx The Audio codec being use for transmit
Speech per Frame Tx The speech per frame being transmitted
RTCP Used Indicates whether RTCP was used for the Audio path
Silence Suppression Indicates whether silence suppression is enabled on
the far-end.
Ethernet results
This category provides Ethernet Stats, Capture info, and Auto Negotiation status.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 569
Graphical results
Stats results
The Ethernet Stats category provides stats for the physical interface, such as whether
signal is present, any code violations, number of transmitted and received frames, and
so on.
Capture results
The Capture category provides a count of the number of packets processed, and
displays a gauge indicating the percent of the buffer that is filled with captured packets.
Auto Neg Status

This category provides Auto Negotiation Status. It includes stats such as whether the
link is pause, FDX, or HDX capable and whether a remote fault was received.
Graph results
The graph results provide Audio Throughput, Local Audio Delay, Current Audio Jitter,
and Current Lost Audio Packets.
Graphical results
The Graphs result group provides test results such as Latency (RTD), Throughput,
Instantaneous Packet Jitter, and Errors graphically. When viewing results graphically, a
legend is provided under the graph with colors indicating what each color represents on
the graph. For graphs that display time, absolute time is used.
You can customize the graphs to suit your needs by doing the following:
• To simplify the graph, you can select the legend, and then choose the data that
you want to observe, and hide the rest.
• If you are running a multiple streams application, you can select the legend, and
then choose the data that you want to observe for each analyzed stream and hide
the rest.
Graphs require significant system resources; therefore, you can optionally disable auto-
matic graph generation if you intend to run other resource intense applications.
To disable graph generation
1 On the Main screen, select Tools > Customize ....

The Customize User Interface Look and Feel screen appears.
2 Clear the Generate Graphs setting, and then select Close to return to the Main
screen.

Page 570 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Histogram results
The MSAM will not automatically generate graphs. You can select the Generate Graphs
setting at any time to resume automatic graph generation.
Histogram results
The Histogram result category provides a display of test results in a bar graph format.
Histograms enable you to quickly identify spikes and patterns of errors over a specific
interval of time (seconds, minutes, or hours).
A sample histogram is provided in Figure 128.
Figure 128 Sample histogram
Results are updated once per second.
NOTE:
Histograms are best viewed using full-sized result window. See “Changing the
result layout” on page 20.
Event Log results

The event log result category provides a display listing any significant events, errors or
alarms that occur during the course of your test. The log displays the value for each
error or alarm, and provides the date and time that the error or alarm occurred.
Events are updated once per second. For instructions on customizing your event log
display, see “About the Event log” on page 20.
NOTE:
Event logs are best viewed using full-sized result window. See “Changing the
result layout” on page 20.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 571
Time test results
Time test results

The Time category provides the current date, time, and the time elapsed since the last
test start or restart. Table 109 describes each of the Time results.
Table 109 Time results
Result Description
Current Date Current day and month.
Current Time Current time of day in hours, minutes, and seconds
(hh:mm:ss).
Test Elapsed Time Amount of time in hours, minutes, and seconds
(hh:mm:ss) since the last test restart.

Page 572 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
17
Chapter 17 Troubleshooting
If you experience problems when testing using your instrument, you may be able to
solve these problems on your own after referring to this section. If you experience
significant problems with the module, call the Technical Assistance Center (see “Tech-
nical assistance” on page xiv).
This chapter describes how to identify and correct issues encountered when testing
using the instrument. Topics discussed in this chapter include the following:
• “Before testing” on page 574
• “Performing tests” on page 575
• “Upgrades and options” on page 579

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 573
Before testing
Before testing
The following section addresses questions that may be asked about assembling the
various components before testing.
The test application I need is not available

When testing using an MSAM, only the applications for currently inserted PIMs will
appear on the Test menu. For example, if an SFP and XFP PIM are inserted in the
MSAM chassis, you will not see DS1 applications. Other applications, such as the Mac-
in-Mac applications only appear if you purchased the associated testing option.
Resolution
Insert the appropriate PIM for the application.
Can I hot-swap PIMs?

No, PIMs are not hot-swappable.
Resolution
You must turn the BERT module OFF before inserting or swapping PIMs.
How can I determine whether I need to swap a PIM or swap SFP

transceivers?
Tables listing the line rates supported by each PIM are provided in the Getting Started
Manual that shipped with your instrument or upgrade. Details concerning each of the
Viavi recommended optics (transceivers) are available on the instrument itself (by
selecting the corresponding option from the Help menu). You can also observe details
for the currently inserted SFP or XFP on the Interface setup tab of the Dual Module
Carrier, Transport Module, and MSAM user interface.
I am receiving unexpected errors when running optical applications

SFP transceivers are designed for specific interfaces and line rates.
Resolution
Verify that the SFP you inserted into the PIM is designed to support the interface you
are connected to for testing. This information is provided on the Interface setup tab of
the Dual Module Carrier, Transport Module, and MSAM user interface.

Page 574 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Performing tests
Performing tests
The following section addresses questions that may be asked about performing tests
using the Dual Module Carrier, Transport Module, and MSAM.
Optical Overload Protection message

When in optical mode, the instrument displays a warning that the Optical Overload
Protection is activated, or the instrument does not detect a signal.
Resolution
Applied power must not exceed the power level specified in the vendor specifications
provided for your SFP or XFP.
User interface is not launching

The BERT icon is highlighted in yellow, but the user interface is not launching.
Resolution
Press the Results or the Start/Stop key to display the user interface.
Inconsistent test results

I am getting inconsistent test results.
Resolution
Verify the following:

• Verify that your test leads are good and are connected properly for the test you
are performing.
• Verify that the correct timing source is selected on the Interface setup screen.
• Verify that the correct line interface is selected.
• Verify that the correct mapping, tributaries, and analysis rates are selected.
Result values are blank

Why are the result values blank?
Resolution
Results are blank if gating criteria have not been met. Criteria examples include Signal
Present, Frame Sync Present, Pointer Present, and BERT Pattern Sync Present.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 575
Performing tests
Unit on far end will not loop up

The unit on the far end will not respond to a Loop Up command.
Resolution
Verify that the application running on the far end is not configured to automatically
transmit traffic when the laser is turned on. If so, it can not respond to a Loop Up
command. Turn the setting off.
A receiving instrument is showing many bit errors

I am transmitting an ATP payload carrying a BERT pattern, and the receiving instrument
is showing a large number of bit errors.
Resolution
Verify that the receiving instrument is not using a Version 1 Transport Module. You can
determine this by checking the serial number for the module. If there is no V2 or V3
prefix for the serial number, you are using a version 1 module.
Even when running software version 8.x, version 1 Transport Modules will not support
ATP payloads carrying BERT patterns. Version 2 and Version 3 Transport Modules do
support the payloads.
RFC 2544 or FC Script button does not appear

The the RFC 2544 or FC Script button does not appear on the Main screen.
Resolution

• Payload analysis is ON for your current test application. You can not run the RFC
2544 or Fibre Channel script when the module is configured to analyze live traffic.
• Traffic is not VPLS or MPLS encapsulated. You can not run the RFC 2544 with
VPLS or MPLS encapsulated traffic.
• The module is not configured to run a timed test. You can not run the RFC 2544 or
Fibre Channel script during a timed test.
Which MSAM or application module is selected?

When testing using an 8000 and two MSAMs (via a DMC), or an 8000 using multiple
application modules, which test is in the foreground, and which is running in the back-
ground?

Page 576 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Performing tests
Resolution
On the Main screen, a button appears in the menu bar indicating which DMC slot and
port, or which 8000 application module and port is currently selected.
I am transmitting Layer 2 Ethernet traffic with OAM frames at

10 Mbps, but no frames are transmitted or received
When your instrument is configured to transmit Ethernet traffic with OAM frames at a
low speed (10 Mbps) and low bandwidth (for example, .001% of the line rate), the
instrument gives the OAM frame the priority, and sends it every second. As a result,
regular traffic is stalled, because the instrument is only sending the OAM frames at
regular intervals. This is expected behavior.
Resolution
Try the following:

• Increase the bandwidth.
• Turn Link OAM and Service OAM OFF.
• Run the test without the OAM frames. Frames will be counted as transmitted and
received.
One way delay measurements do not appear

One way delay measurements do not appear on the results pages.
Resolution

• Are you testing using two GPS time synchronized instruments? Two synchronized
instruments are required to ensure accurate measurements. If both units are not
synchronized, the instruments will transmit standard ATP test packets (instead of
ATP-UTC test packets), and standard round trip delay measurements will be
reported instead of one way delay measurements.
• If your instruments are not synchronized, verify that:
– Both instruments are located within a CDMA network.
– All connections from the USB port and the BNC connector on the instrument
to the CDMA receiver are secure.
– If your instruments are synchronized, verify that transmitting instruments are
configured to transmit an Acterna payload. If a BERT payload is transmitted,
delay can not be measured because the test packets do not carry the
required UTC timestamp. Although you must transmit an Acterna payload,
you can populate the payload with either a BERT pattern or a fill-byte pattern.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 577
Performing tests
My VoIP call didn’t go through

The VoIP call did not successfully go through.
Resolution
Check your connections to verify that they are hooked up properly.
Check the Ethernet link light on the instrument’s Ethernet jack. It should be green.
Verify the LAN settings (IP address, netmask, DNS name).
Verify the call control. Most equipment uses Fast Connect.
If you do not have a gatekeeper, verify the outgoing alias and IP address.
If you are using a gatekeeper, verify you are registered with the gatekeeper.
Check with your system administrator to verify that the firewall allows VoIP traffic.
I am emulating a SIP phone but cannot register with the SIP server.
I am emulating a SIP phone but cannot register with the SIP server.
Resolution
In typical networks, the same server handles both registration and placing and
receiving calls. However, in some networks, there is a Proxy server that handles SIP
messaging for placing and receiving calls, and a registrar that handles registration,
which may be in a different domain.
If this is the case, do the following.

• Verify that you specified the “Proxy” on the Proxy Settings menu as the outbound
proxy, or the device from which the HST will send and receive all SIP messages
(for placing and receiving calls).
• Verify that you specified the “Alias” on the General Settings menu as the SIP
server or registrar (the device that keeps track of all the registered devices), using
the following format “phoneNumber@domain” where domain is either an IP
address of the registrar or a literal domain such as “viavisolutions.com”.
I am running a VoIP test but the delay measurement does not appear.
The delay measurement does not appear.
Resolution
The delay measurement is only displayed if RTCP is supported.

Page 578 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Upgrades and options
I have very little loss, but a high level of delay on my VoIP test
I have very little loss, but a high level of delay.
Resolution
Check your network. It may be experiencing high traffic.
I have a large amount of jitter in my VoIP test, but no loss or delay.

I have a large amount of jitter, but no loss or delay.
Resolution
Check the setup of your router.

The following section addresses questions that may be asked about upgrading or
installing test options for the instrument.
How do I upgrade my instrument?

Upgrades are installed from a USB key. Instructions are provided with each software
upgrade.
How do I install test options?

Test options are enabled by entering a Viavi provided challenge code. Instructions are
provided when you order test options.
Do software and test options move with the Dual Module Carrier,
Transport Module, and MSAM or Transport Module?
Test options are available when you connect the Dual Module Carrier,
Transport Module, and MSAM or Transport Module to a different base unit; however,
the base unit software and BERT (MSAM/Transport Module) software reside on the
base unit.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 579

Page 580 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Glossary
Symbols/Numerics
10G — Used to represent 10 Gigabit Ethernet.
10GigE — Used throughout this manual to represent 10 Gigabit Ethernet.
2M — See E1. The E1 PIMs are used when testing 2M interfaces.
802.11b — IEEE standard for wireless LANs. You can establish wireless LAN connec-
tions to the T-BERD ⁄ MTS 8000, 6000A, and 5800 using an 802.11 PCMCIA card.
802.3 — The IEEE specification for Ethernet. 802.3 also specifies a frame type that
places the frame length in the Length/Type field of the Ethernet header, as opposed to
the DIX Type II frame type which utilizes the Length/Type field to identify the payload
Ethertype.
AC — Alternating Current. An AC power adapter is supplied with the instrument.
ARP — Address Resolution Protocol. Method for determining a host’s hardware

address if only the IP address is known. The instrument automatically sends ARP
requests during layer 3 IP testing.
ATP — Acterna test packet. A test packet that contains a time stamp and sequence
number for measuring round trip delay and counting out-of-sequence frames.
AxC — Antenna Carrier. In CPRI, one AxC is the amount of digital baseband (IQ) user
plane data necessary for either reception or transmission of a single carrier at one inde-
pendent antenna element.
BBU — Base Band Unit.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 581
Glossary
BER — Bit Error Rate.
BERT — Bit error rate test. A known pattern of bits is transmitted, and errors received
are counted to figure the BER. The Bit Error Rate test is used to measure transmission
quality.
CCM — Continuity Check Message.
CDP — Cisco Discovery Protocol.
CE — Customer Edge.
CFM — Connectivity Fault Management. Comprises capabilities for detecting, veri-

fying, and isolating connectivity failures in VLANs.
Concat — Concatenated.
CPRI — Common Public Radio Interface.
Curr — Current.
CWDM4 — Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing 4 Lane. Optics supporting

100GigE circuits using CWDM technology and 4 lanes of 25 Gb/s traffic onto and
demultiplexed from duplex singlemode fiber (SMF).
DA — Destination address.
DAD — IPv6 duplicate address detection. When going through the Multicast Listener
Discovery process to obtain or verify a link local address, a device issues a neighbor
solicitation using the tentative address to determine if the address is already used. This
process is referred to as DAD.
DB-9 — Standard 9-pin RS-232 serial port or connector.
DB-25 — 25-pin RS-232 serial port or connector.
Dec — Decrement.
DHCP — Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A communications protocol that

assigns IP addresses dynamically as needed. Also supports static IP address assign-
ment.
DIX — Digital, Intel, and Xerox. Ethernet Type II frame format.
DSCP — Differentiated Services Code Point. A method for specifying IP packets will be
queued while waiting to be forwarded within a router.

Page 582 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Glossary
EDD — Ethernet demarcation device.
EFM — Ethernet First Mile.
Err — Error.
Erred — Errored.
Ethernet — A LAN protocol. Using the instrument, you can test and verify Ethernet
network elements and services.
Ethernet link partner — The nearest Ethernet device on a link. The instrument auto-
negotiates its capabilities with this device when you initialize a link.
ETS — Ethernet Transport Service. A point-to-point path through a specific component

of a switch.
ETSI — European Telecommunications Standards Institute.
FCS — Frame check sequence. A value calculated by an originating device and

inserted into an Ethernet frame. The receiving device performs the same calculation,
and compares its FCS value with the FCS value in the frame. If the values don’t match
(suggesting the frame is errored), an FCS error is declared. Switching devices will
discard the frame.
FDV — Frame Delay Variation. Maximum frame jitter within SLA compliance.
FDX — Full Duplex.
FE — Far End. Used by the ITU performance measures to indicate which end of the
network is being tested.
FEC — Forward Error Correction. A method used to detect and reconstruct

an erroneous transmitted message at the receiver, without requesting a retransmission.
FTD — Frame Transfer Delay. Maximum frame transfer time (source to destination)
within SLA compliance.
FTP — File transfer protocol. Protocol used on LANs and the Internet to transfer files.
Frame Loss — Loss of frame synchronization.
GARP — Generic Attribute Registration Protocol.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 583
Glossary
Gate time — Time duration for error measurement. During this period the error source
is accumulated if it is an error or recorded if it is an alarm.
GigE — Used throughout this manual to represent Gigabit Ethernet.
Global Addresses — Second IPv6 source address assigned to an interface. The

global address is not used locally, and is broader in scope, typically to get past a router.
If you use auto-configuration to establish a link, the global address is provided automat-
ically.
GMRP — GARP Multicast Registration Protocol.
GNSS — Global Navigation Satellite System.
GPS — Global Positioning System.
GUI — Graphical User Interface. Layout of commands in a user-friendly environment.

See also UI (user interface).
GVRP — GARP VLAN Registration Protocol.
HBER — High bit error ratio.
HDX — Half duplex.
Histogram — Print output of specific results in a bar graph format.
HI SER — High symbol error rate.
Hz — Hertz (cycles per second).
IGMP — Internet Group Management Protocol.
Inc — Increment.
Internet Protocol — Commonly referred to as “IP”. Protocol specifying the format and
address scheme of packets transmitted over the Internet. Typically used with TCP.
IOS — Internetwork Operating System. Software used on most Cisco Systems routers
and current Cisco network switches. The instrument allows you to use the automated
TAM test to remotely provision and monitor network elements running this IOS.
IP — See Internet Protocol.
IPoE — Internet Protocol over Ethernet. Used on the GUI and through this guide to see
the applications used to establish a standard layer 3 (IP) connection.

Page 584 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Glossary
IPv4 — Internet Protocol Version 4.
IPv6 — Internet Protocol Version 6.
I/Q — In-phase (I) and Quadrature (Q)
ISI — Inter-symbol Interference. ISI is often a symptom of dispersion on multi-mode

fiber.
ISM — In-Service Monitoring.
ISO — International Organization for Standardization.
ISP — Internet service provider. A vendor who provides access to the Internet and the
World Wide Web.
ITB — Inverted Transcoded Block.
ITU — International Telecommunications Union based in Geneva, Switzerland.
Jabber — An Ethernet frame that exceeds the IEEE 802.3 maximum length of 1518
bytes (or 1522 bytes with a VLAN tag) and contains an errored FCS.
J-Connect — Utility that allows you to detect other Viavi test instruments on a partic-
ular subnet, and use a detected instrument’s addresses to automatically populate key
traffic settings. Also known as Viavi-Discovery.
JMEP — JDSU Micro Ethernet Small Form-Factor Pluggable Probe (SFP). A 1310 nm,
1000Base-LX, Gigabit Ethernet SFP transceiver that reduces the need for additional
instrumentation.
J-Mentor — Utility provided on the instrument that allows you to capture data for anal-
ysis when testing from an Ethernet interface.
J-Proof — Application used to verify Layer 2 Transparency.
J-Scan — Utility used to scan and detect the signal structure and mappings from a
SONET or SDH interface. Also referred to in other documents as the Auto-Discovery
feature.
Jumbo frame — An Ethernet frame that exceeds the IEEE 802.3 maximum length of
1518 bytes (or 1522 bytes with a VLAN tag). You can transmit jumbo frames using the
T-BERD ⁄ MTS 8000, 6000A, and 5800.
Just — Justification.
LAN — Local Access Network.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 585
Glossary
LACP — Link Aggregation Control Protocol.
LBM — Loopback Message.
LBR — Loopback Reply.
LCD — Liquid Crystal Display.
LCK — Locked defect.
LED — Light emitting diode.
LLB — Line Loopback.
LLC — Logical link control. Three bytes carried in 802.3 frames which specify the
memory buffer the data frame is placed in.
LLDP — Link Layer Discovery Protocol.
LiION — Lithium Ion. The instrument can be equipped with a rechargeable Lithium Ion
battery.
Link-Local Address — IPv6 address assigned to a device locally in an IP network

when there is no other assignment method available, such as a DHCP server. These
addresses must always go through duplicate address detection (DAD), even if you
manually specify the address. See also DAD and Global Addresses.
LOC — Loss of Continuity.
LOF — Loss of Frame. A condition indicating that the receiving equipment has lost
LTE-A — Long Term Evolution Advanced.
LTE-TDD — Long Term Evolution Time Division Duplexed.
Maintenance Association (MA) — A set of MEPs that are each configured with the
same maintenance association identifier (MAID) and MD level, which are established
to verify the integrity of a single service instance.
Maintenance Association Identifier (MAID) — An identifier for an MA, unique over

the domain, that uses CFM to protect against the accidental concatenate.
Maintenance Domain (MD) — The network or the part of the network for which faults
in connectivity can be managed.
MDI — Media Delivery Index (video applications).

Page 586 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Glossary
MDI-X port — Medium Dependent Interface Crossover port. RJ-45 interface used by
Ethernet NICs and routers that requires use of a cross-over cable (MDI-X ports cross
transmit and receive lines. An MDI-X port on one device connects to an MDI port on
another device. MDI-X interfaces transmit using pins 3 and 6, and receive using pins 1
and 2. The Transport Module supports cable diagnostics of MDI-X interfaces.
Maintenance Entity (ME) — Represents an entity that requires management and

facilitates a relationship between two ME group end points.
MEG — Maintenance Entity Group. Includes different MEs that satisfy the following
conditions: a) MEs in a MEG exist in the same administrative boundary, b) MEs in a
MEG have the same MEG level, or c) MEs in a MEG belong to the same point-to-point
or multipoint Ethernet connections.
MEG End Point (MEP) — Marks the end point of an Ethernet MEG that can initiate
and terminate OAM frames for fault management and performance monitoring.
MEG Intermediate Point (MIP) — Serves as an intermediate point in a MEG that

reacts to certain OAM frames. A MIP does not initiate OAM frames, nor does it take
action on the transit Ethernet flows.
Maintenance Association End-Point Identifier (MEPID) — A small integer, unique

over a given MA, which identifies a specific MEP.
MFAS — Multi Frame Alignment Signal.
MMF — Multi-mode Fiber.
MPEG — Set of standards for compression of audio and video and multimedia delivery
developed by the Moving Pictures Expert Group.
MPLS — Multiple Path Label Switching. A mechanism using labels rather than routing
tables to transmit layer 3 IP traffic over a Layer 2 Ethernet network.
Msg — Message.
MPD — Mean Path Delay
MPLS — Multiprotocol Label Switching. A form of frame encapsulation that uses labels
rather than routing tables to transmit layer 3 traffic over a layer 2 Ethernet network.
MPTS — Multiple program transport stream.
MSAM — Multiple Services Application Module. Application module used in combina-

tion with the T-BERD / MTS 6000A base unit or a DMC and a
T-BERD / MTS 8000 base unit for testing from a variety of interfaces.
MSC — Mobility Switching Center.
MSPP — MSPP. Multi-service provisioning platform. Typically next generation SONET

multiplexors capable of aggregating multiple access technologies such as Ethernet,
TDM, and ATM onto a SONET ring.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 587
Glossary
MSTP — Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol.
MTIE — The maximum time interval error (peak-to-peak value) in the clock signal
being measured that occurs within a specified observation interval in seconds. See also
TDEV and TIE.
Multipat — Multiple patterns. An automated sequence of 5 BERT patterns for three

minutes each. The Multipat sequence consists of ALL ONES, 1:7, 2 in 8, 3 in 24, and
QRSS.
NDF — New data flag.
NE — Near-end. Used by ITU performance measurements to indicate which end of the

network is being tested.
NetFlow — NetFlow is a network protocol developed by Cisco Systems to run on Cisco

IOS-enabled equipment for collecting IP traffic information.
NID — Network Interface Device. Device located on the customer premises used by
carriers to properly demark and manage their network.
NIU — Network Interface Unit. Electronic device at the point of interconnection

between the service provider communications facilities and terminal equipment at a
subscriber’s premises.
NOC — Network Operations Center.
NSA — Non-service affecting.
OAM — Operations, Administration, and Maintenance. The instrument allows you to

run link and service layer OAM applications.
OBSAI RP3 — Open Base Station Architecture Initiative Reference Point 3.
ODU — Optical channel data unit.
OOF — Out of framing.
OOM — Out of multi framing.
OOS — Out of sequence.
OPU — Optical channel payload unit.

Page 588 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Glossary
OTN — Optical Transport Network. Network protocol that facilitates the transmission of
different types of client signals, such as SONET, SDH, and Ethernet over a single
optical network through the use of an OTN wrapper, which provides the overhead
required for proper network management.
OTU1 — Optical Transport Unit 1. Used on the user interface to identify the test appli-
cations used for 2.7G OTN testing.
cations used for 10.7G, 11.05G, and 11.1G OTN testing.
cations used to test a 43G OTN signal designed to carry 40G BERT signals. OTU3
applications are available on the CSAM and the 40/100G High Speed
Transport Module.
cations used to test a 111.8G OTN signal designed to carry 100Gig Ethernet BERT and
ODU4 encoded signals. OTU4 applications are available on the CSAM and 40/100G
High Speed Transport Module.
OWD — One-Way Delay.
Packet — Bundle of data, configured for transmission. Consists of data to be trans-

mitted and control information.
Packet Delay Variation — The difference in one-way-delay as experienced by a

series of packets.
PAT — Program Association Table.
Pattern sync — The condition occurring when the data received matches the data that
is expected for a period of time defined by the pattern selected.
PCAP — File format used for packet captures on the instrument.
PCR — Program Clock Reference.
PCS — Physical Coding Sublayer.
PDV — Packet Delay Variation. The difference in one-way delay for pairs of packets in
a flow.
PE — Provider edge.
PES — Packetized elementary streams. Streams carrying packetized video and audio
payloads.
PID — Program ID.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 589
Glossary
PLM-P — Payload mismatch Path.
PM — Path monitoring.
PMT — Program Map Table.
PPPoE — Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet. PPPoE is used on the GUI and
throughout this guide to see the applications used to establish a connection to a PPPoE
peer via a login process. The HST can emulate a PPPoE client or server.
PPS — Pulse per second.
Pseudo wires (PW) — Point-to-point connections used to carry each type of service
between to PE routers in a VPLS network.
PSM4 — Parallel Single Mode 4 Lane. Optic supporting 100GigE circuits of at least 500
meters using singlemode fiber.
PTP — Precision time protocol
Q-in-Q — Also known as VLAN stacking, enables service providers to use a single
VLAN to support customers who have multiple VLANs. Q-in-Q VLANs can also be used
to provide virtual access and connections to multiple services available over the ISPs,
ASPs, and storage services.
QoS — Quality of Service.
QRSS — Quasi-Random Signal Sequence. A modified 2^20-1 pseudo random test

signal, modified for use in AMI circuits.
RDI — Remote Defect Indication. A terminal will transmit an RDI when it loses its
incoming signal.
REI — Remote Error Indicator.
RFI — Remote Failure Indicator.
RJ 48-11 — Modular telephone jack, typically used for telephones, modems, and fax
machines.
RRH — Remote Radio Head.
RSTP — Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.
RS-232 — Set of standards specifying electrical, functional and mechanical interfaces

used for communicating between computers, terminals and modems.

Page 590 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Glossary
RS-FEC — Reed Solomon Forward Error Correction.
RTD — Round-Trip Delay. Maximum frame transfer delay when measured at source
after signal is looped back from far end.
RTP — Real-time Transport Protocol. Standardized packet format for delivering audio
and video over the Internet. MPEG video streams are often encapsulated in RTP
packets.
Runt — An Ethernet frame that is shorter than the IEEE 802.3 minimum frame length
of 64 bytes and contains an errored FCS, or a Fibre Channel frame that is shorter than
the minimum 28 byte frame length containing an errored CRC.
Rx — Receive or receiver or input.
SA — 1. Source address. 2. Service affecting.
SD — Signal Degradation.
Secs — Seconds.
SER — Symbol Error Rate.
Service disruption time — The time between Ethernet (maximum inter-frame gap)
when service switches to a protect line. The Svc Disruption (us) result in the Link Stats
category displays the service disruption time.
SF — Signal Fail.
SFD — Start of frame delimiter. Part of an Ethernet frame preamble that indicates that
the destination address frame is about to begin.
SFP — Small form-factor pluggable module. Used throughout this manual to represent
pluggable optical transceivers (modules).
Skew — A timing variation between lanes.
SLA — Service Level Agreement.
SMF — Single-mode Fiber.
SNAP — Subnetwork Access Protocol. Protocol used in 802.3 frames which specifies
a vendor code and an Ethertype. When you transmit pings using the Transport Module,
you can transmit 802.3 frames with logical link control (LLC) and SNAP.
SPTS — Single Program Transport Stream.
SR4 — Short reach optic supporting 100GigE circuits over multimode fiber.
STP — Spanning Tree Protocol.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 591
Glossary
SVLAN — Stacked VLAN. Used in Q-in-Q traffic to provide a second encapsulation tag,
expanding the number of VLANs available. Often considered the VLAN assigned to the
service provider (as opposed to the customer).
Sync — Synchronization.
TAM — Test Access Management. Application used to provision network elements

using your instrument at a remote location.
TCP — Transmission Control Protocol. Layer 4 protocol that allows two devices to
establish a connection and exchange streams of data.
TCP Window Size — The maximum number of bytes that a port can transmit over a
TCP connection before being acknowledged by the receiving port.
TDEV — Time Deviation. A measure of the phase error variation versus the integration
time. It is calculated based on the TIE. See also TIE and MTIE.
TEM — Timing Expansion Module.
Term — See Terminate.
Terminate — An application where the instrument is terminating the circuit. In these

applications, the instrument sends and receives traffic.
Through — An application where the instrument is used in series with a network circuit
to monitor the traffic on that circuit.
TIE — Time Interval Error. Represents the time deviation of the signal under test rela-
tive to a reference source. Used to calculate MTIE and TDEV. See also MTIE and
TDEV.
TL1 — Language used to manage optical and broadband access infrastructure in

North America. TL1 is used in input and output messages that pass between Opera-
tions Systems (OSs) and Network Elements (NEs). Using the test access management
tool on your instrument, you can establish a connection to an NE, then issue TL1
commands to configure the NE remotely or monitor activity.
ToD — Time of Day. Signal provided by CDMA and GPS receivers and antenna for the
purpose of synchronizing the time in instruments used to perform precise measure-
ments, such as one way delay.
TOH — Transport Overhead.
TU — Tributary unit.
Tx — Transmit or transmitter or output.

Page 592 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Glossary
UAS — Unavailable seconds.
UDP — User Datagram Protocol. Layer 4 protocol that offers a limited amount of
service when messages are exchanged between devices on an IP network. UDP uses
IP to transmit data from one device to another device; however, unlike TCP, UDP does
not divide a message into packets, and then reassemble the packets at the far end.
UI — Unit Interval. One bit period at the data rate being measured.
us — Microseconds (also expressed as μs).
USB — Universal Serial Bus. A bus designed to handle a broad range of devices, such
as keyboards, mouses, printers, modems, and hubs.
User Plane — CPRI plane that is used to transfer data from the radio base station to
the mobile station and vice versa. These data are transferred in the form of IQ data.
VDC — Volts Direct Current.
Viavi Discovery — See J-Connect.
Viavi Ethernet test set — A test set marketed by Viavi and designed to transmit an
Acterna Test Packet (ATP) payload with a time stamp that is used to calculate a variety
of test results. The FST-2802 TestPad, the SmartClass Ethernet tester, the HST with
an Ethernet SIM, the T-BERD / MTS 5800, MSAM, CSAM, and Transport Module can
all be configured to transmit and analyze ATP payloads, and can be used in end-to-end
and loopback configurations during testing.
VLAN — Virtual LAN.
VNC — Virtual Network Computing. A thin client system that enables you to run appli-
cations on a VNC server from any other computer connected to the Internet. Using
VNC, you can run the instrument from a remote workstation.
VPLS — Virtual Private LAN Service. An MPLS application which provides multi-point
to multi-point layer 2 VPN services, allowing geographically dispersed sites to share an
Ethernet broadcast domain by connecting each site to an MPLS-based network.
WAN — Wide area network.
XFP — 10 Gigabit Small Form Factor Pluggable Module.

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 593
Glossary

Page 594 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Index
Numerics AutoNeg Status results 536

10 Gigabit Ethernet WAN testing
about results 476 B
default overhead values 82
1G Pair Status result 492 BER testing
3.072G optical 22, 26, 196, 206
3.072G optical Ethernet results 510
BERT 22, 26, 196, 206 Ethernet, layer 1 101
monitoring 23, 41 Ethernet, layer 2 128
802.3ae, overhead values 82 Fibre Channel, layer 1 331
BERT results
Ethernet 510
A Fibre Channel 510
Address book, populating 310, 454 Buffer capacity, captured packets 8
Alarm LEDs Bursty loads, transmitting 125
Ethernet 493 Byte pattern filter 121
Fibre Channel 493
IP 493
IP Video 552, 564 C
TCP/UDP 493
Alarm test intervals, IP Video 315 Cable diagnostics
about 85
Analyzer applications, IP Video 298 running 86
Analyzing MPLS-TP traffic 131–136 test results explained 490
viewing measurements 87
Analyzing wander 227
Call control standard 456
Applications
IP Video testing 310 Calls
loop back 283 placing 463
MiM 80, 207 receiving 463–464
Multiple Streams 258 Capturing packets
selecting 3 about 6, 56, 159, 217, 464
TCP/UDP 236 based on a trigger 11–13
Triple Play 273 buffer capacity 8
ATP listen port, explained 237 Capture toolbar 8, 464
capturing packets 465
Automated tests estimated time to save buffer data 15
applications 364 exporting buffer data 13
Fibre Channel 368 packet slicing 8
FTP Throughput test 411 saving buffer data 13
HTTP Throughput test 413 specifying filter settings 8, 464
launching 364 test results 536
RFC 2544 368 test traffic and control plane traffic, defined 7
saving test report data 445 VoIP 461
specifying external settings 379
TAM 440–445 CDMA receiver 511
TCP Throughput 414 CJPAT pattern 130, 341
TrueSAM 348–364
TrueSpeed 415–427 Collapsing measurements 20
TrueSpeed VNF 428–439 Compliance information xiv
VLAN 410 Configuring tests 5

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 595
Index
Connecting the instrument to the circuit 5 capturing packets 6, 56, 159, 217, 464
Constant loads, transmitting 124 classic RFC 2544 test 379
features and capabilities 74
Conventions xii filter settings 114
CPRI testing frame settings 105, 455
calibrating delay measurements 38 interface settings 102, 141
CPRI Check tests 57 Layer 2 transparency 136
inserting defects 39 monitoring traffic 130, 131, 206
Layer 1 BER 26 MPLS 83
Layer 2 BER 29 OAM service layer 171
Remote Radio Head testing 34 test results 469–475, 476–536
test results 469 traffic loads 123
turn up 57 transmitting traffic 128
verifying layer 2 transparency 136
CRPAT pattern 130, 341 VPLS 82
CSPAT pattern 130, 341 Ethernet testing, inserting defects 162
Custom test results Event logs, about 20
creating 20
maintaining 20 Expanding measurements 20
Customer services Explicit Fabric/N-port logins 329
technical assistance xiv Explorer applications, IP Video 297
Customer services, technical assistance xiv Exporting wander data 230
D F
Delay, measuring Fault results 491
Fibre Channel 342
MiM 186, 190 Features and capabilities
Ethernet 74
Diagnostics, running cable 86 Fibre Channel 328
Discovering IP Video testing 299
other Viavi instruments 91 Jitter and Wander 224
traffic using J-Profiler 192 Multiple Streams testing 256
PDH 224
Discovering network devices 95, 98 T-Carrier 224
Displaying test results 19 TCP/UDP testing 234
Triple Play testing 256
Fibre Channel testing
E about N_Port login 329
applications 330
Encapsulation automated 368
MiM 180, 183, 188 features and capabilities 328
MPLS 83, 142, 143 filter settings 337
Q-in-Q 106, 113, 142, 455 frame settings 336
VLAN 106, 112, 142, 455 implicit and explicit logins 334
VPLS 82, 106, 113 inserting errors 342
Error Stats results interface settings 333
Ethernet, layer 1 529 layer 1 BER 331
Ethernet, layer 2 531 Login Status results 538
Ethernet, layer 3 534 measuring delay 342
measuring service disruption 341
Errors, inserting Fibre Channel 342 monitoring traffic 343
Ethernet test results running automated 368
AutoNeg Status 536 topologies 335
Error Stats, layer 1 529 traffic loads 338
Error Stats, layer 2 531 transmitting patterns 340
Error Stats, layer 3 534 transmitting traffic 339
L2 BERT Stats 510 Filter settings
L2 Filtered Counts 507 Ethernet 114
L2 Filtered Stats 503 Fibre Channel 337
L2 Link Counts 500 for packet capture 8, 464
L2 Link Stats 494 IP 149, 152
LEDs 478 IP Video 313, 455
OAM 513, 517, 518, 519 MiM traffic 182
Ping 526 TCP/UDP 243
Signal 493, 552 VoIP 461
Transparency 509
Frame settings
Ethernet testing Ethernet 105, 455
about 233 Fibre Channel 336
automated 368 MiM traffic 180, 187
BER testing, layer 1 99, 101
BER testing, layer 2 128 FTP Throughput test, automated 411

Page 596 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Index
G filter settings 313, 455

graphical user interface, about 300, 449
G.826 results 534 IGMP settings 318
Graphs, about 20 interface settings 312, 455
joining streams 319
layered results view 301, 451
leaving streams 280, 321
H LEDs 301, 450
H.323 456, 457, 459 network architecture, explained 322
network architecture, illustrated 296
Help, technical assistance xiv observing physical and link statistics 320
Histograms observing stream statistics 321
about 20 populating address book 310, 454
viewing 20 quality buttons, explained 301
restart button 300
HTTP Throughput test, automated 413 result threshold settings 315
stream icons, explained 306
streams results view 305
I symptoms, source content issues 322
symptoms, transport network problems 323
IGMP settings, IP Video 318 typical encapsulation, illustrated 297, 449
Incrementing understanding MPEG streams 296, 448
MAC addresses 269 understanding test results 301
VLAN IDs 269 IPTV encapsulation, illustrated 297, 449
Interface settings
Ethernet 102, 141
Fibre Channel 333 J
IP Video 312, 455
J-Connect
IP Config Status results 524 about 91
IP test results discovering instruments 92
IP Config Status 524 discovering Viavi instruments 91
L3 Config Status 524 observing instrument details 95
L3 Filter Counts 523 prerequisites 91
L3 Filter Stats 522 JDSU Discovery
L3 Link Counts 521 discoverable instruments 91
L3 Link Stats 520 discovering instruments 92
IP testing observing details for an instrument 95
automated 368 prerequisites 91
capturing packets 6, 56, 159, 217, 464 refresh soft key 93
classic RFC 2544 test 379 sorting instruments 93
filter settings 149, 152 Jitter testing
monitoring traffic 158 about 224
packet settings 147, 150 features and capabilities 224
Ping 154
running Traceroute 157 Jitter testing, packet 163
traffic loads 123 Joining video streams 319
transmitting 153
J-Profiler
IP Video test results about 192
customizing the display 310 test results 543
LEDs 551, 564
MSTV 562 J-Proof testing
navigating the display 309 See Transparency testing 136
observing physical and link statistics 320 J-QuickCheck, running before RFC 2544 388
observing stream statistics 321
static and dynamic, explained 308
understanding 301 L
IP Video testing
about Analyzer applications 298 L2 BERT Stats results 510
about Explorer applications 297 L2 Filtered Counts results 507
about MPTS 297
about PES 324 L2 Filtered Stats results 503
about RTP encapsulation 324 L2 Link Counts results 500
about signaling tables 324 L2 Link Stats results 494
about SPTS 297
about UDP encapsulation 324 L3 Config Status results 524
action buttons 300, 449 L3 Filter Counts results 523
alarm test intervals 315
Analyzer applications, features 307 L3 Filter Stats results 522
applications 310 L3 Link Counts results 521
button colors, explained 303
button colors, illustrated 302 L3 Link Stats results 520
Explorer applications, features 307 L4 Filter Counts results 543

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 597
Index
L4 Filter Stats results 542 Measuring

L4 Link Counts results 542 IP packet jitter 163
packet jitter 163
L4 Link Stats results 540 round trip delay See Delay
Labels Messages, PPPoE 146
specifying MPLS 105, 455
specifying VPLS 105, 455 MGCP, defined 457
Laser, turning ON or OFF 6 MiM testing
about results 476
Layer 1 BER testing applications 80, 207
See Ethernet testing or Fibre Channel testing configuring tests 179
Layer 2 testing filter settings 182
See Ethernet testing or Fibre Channel testing frame settings 180, 187
inserting errors 186, 190
Layer 2 transparency inserting pause frames 186, 190
about loop backs 136 LEDs 179
configuring near end 137 measuring delay 186, 190
initiating the loop back 140 OAM settings 184
observing results 140 test results 179
starting the frame sequence 140 traffic loads 184
using Quick Config 138 transmitting traffic 185, 189
verifying 136
Monitoring
Layer 3 testing 3.072G optical 23, 41
See IP testing Fibre Channel traffic 343
Layer 4 testing layer 2 traffic, Ethernet 130, 131, 206
See TCP/UDP testing layer 2 traffic, Fibre Channel 343
layer 3 traffic, IP 158
Layout, changing result 20
MPEG video transport streams 296, 448
LBM messages, sending 178
MPLS testing
Leaving video streams 280, 321 about results 476
LEDs encapsulation settings 142, 143
alarm 493, 552, 564 loop back settings 287
Ethernet 478 overview 83
IP Video 551, 564 specifying labels 105, 455
MiM 179 MPLS-TP testing
Multiple Streams 247, 259 results 500, 503
Triple Play 274 running 131–136
Loads MPTS, about 297
about Ethernet traffic 123
transmitting bursty 125 MSTV results 562
transmitting constant 124 Multiple Streams testing
transmitting ramped 126 about test results 247, 260
Login Status results 538 applications 258
capturing packets 6, 56, 159, 217, 464
Loop back testing enabling streams 263
about transparent L2 136 features and capabilities 256
action buttons 288 graphical results, changing properties 262
address swapping 285 graphical results, viewing 247, 261
applications 283, 289 incrementing MAC addresses 269
ARP settings 285 incrementing VLAN IDs 269
filter criteria 285 LEDs 247, 259
key concepts 285 looping back streams 279
messages 289 Pipe display 259
MPLS traffic 287 running TCP Host script 280
specifying unit ID 289 specifying common traffic characteristics 266
TCP/UDP traffic 288 specifying layer 2 settings 268
terminology 284 specifying layer 3 settings 270
using LLB 290 specifying layer 4 settings 271
using Loop Up 291 specifying load types 264
VLAN and Q-in-Q traffic 286 specifying load unit 265
VPLS traffic 286 transmitting streams 271
Multiple tests, running 20
M
MAC addresses, incrementing for multiple streams N
269
Network discovery 95, 98
MAC-in-MAC testing, See MiM testing
NewGen
MDI/MDIX Pair Status result 491 configuring layer 2 tests 179
Measurements inserting errors 186, 190
cable diagnostic 87 inserting pause frames 186, 190
expanding and collapsing 20 measuring packet jitter 186, 190

Page 598 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Index
measuring round trip delay 186, 190 Q

measuring service disruption time 186, 190
monitoring traffic 186 Q-in-Q testing
test results, about 179 encapsulation settings 106, 113, 142, 455
transmitting layer 2 traffic 185, 189 specifying SVLAN and CVLAN 105, 455
NewGen testing, about results 476 Quick Config settings 81
O R
OAM testing Ramped loads, transmitting 126
about service layer 171 RDI analysis, turning ON 178
results 513, 517, 518, 519
sending LBM messages 178 Receiving calls 463–464
specifying settings 172 Results See Test results
turning RDI analysis ON 178
RFC 2544 test
OBSAI testing optimizing test time 377
Layer 1 BER 26 running classic 379
One way delay running J-QuickCheck 388
CDMA Receiver Kit 165 RTP encapsulation, IP Video 324
GPS Receiver Kit 165
measuring 164–167 Running
results 501, 506 cable diagnostics 86
signal input 166 classic RFC 2544 tests 379
FC test, automated 368
Optimizing RFC test time 377 multiple tests 20
P S
Packet jitter, measuring IP 163 Safety information xiv
Packet settings, IP 147, 150 SCCP 456, 457
Packet slicing, about 8 Service disruption time
Pair Skew result 492 measuring Fibre Channel 341
Parameters, specifying test 5 Service layer testing, OAM 171
Patterns Setting result group and category 19
CJPAT 130, 341 Settings, Quick Config 81
CRPAT 130, 341
CSPAT 130, 341 Signal results, Ethernet 493, 552
transmitting layer 2 Ethernet 129 Signaling tables, video 324
transmitting layer 2 Fibre Channel 340
SIP
PBB testing defined 456
See MiM testing test settings 457
PDH testing SONET test results, T1.231 528
Specifying test parameters 5
Performance
G.826 results 534 SPTS, about 297
PES, explained 324 SSM See Sync Status Messages
Ping Stacked VLAN
results 526 configuring 113
testing 154, 526 filtering traffic 118
results 502, 506
Placing calls 463
Starting and stopping tests 5
Populating custom results 20
Streams Pipe
Ports Multiple Streams 259
ATP listen 237 Triple Play streams 274
well known TCP/UDP 240
Summary results 468
PPPoE testing
messages 146 Support xiv
See also IP testing Sync Status Messages 536
PTP testing SyncE
analyzing traffic 210 See Synchronous Ethernet
GPS receiver 208 Sync Status Messages 536
optional time sources 207
PTP Check tests 217 Synchronous Ethernet testing 191
results, link counts 545 System Recovery testing, about 376
results, link stats 546
signal input 208

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 599
Index
T populating custom 20
setting category 19
T1.231 results 528 setting group 19
TAM 440–445 setting the group and category 19
Summary 468
T-Carrier testing Time 572
features and capabilities 224 using entire screen 20
TCP/UDP test results 542 viewing 19
L4 Filter Counts 543 viewing cable diagnostic 87
L4 Filter Stats 542 Wander 550
L4 Link Stats 540 Test settings
TCP/UDP testing H.323 457, 459
about 234 SCCP 457
applications 236 SIP 457
ATP listen port 237 VoIP 456–461
automated 368 Testing
capturing packets 6, 56, 159, 217, 464 configuring parameters 5
classic RFC2544 test 379 connecting instrument to circuit 5
configuring layer 4 traffic 239 jitter and wander 224
configuring the traffic load 242 selecting an application 3
features and capabilities 234 starting a test 5
filter settings 243 turning laser ON or OFF 6
filtering traffic 243 viewing results 19, 20
inserting errors 245
looping back traffic 245 Threshold settings, IP Video 315
Running automated Throughput test 414 Time results 572
running TCP Host Script 280 Traceroute, running 157
specifying frame length 242
specifying layer 2 and 3 settings 200, 239 Traffic loads
specifying packet length 242 about Ethernet 123
traffic loads 123 about Fibre Channel 338
transmitting traffic 244 about MiM traffic 184
well known ports 240 transmitting bursty 125
Wirespeed 245 transmitting constant 124
transmitting ramped 126
Technical assistance xiv
Transmitting wander 225
Test applications
Ethernet 79 Transparency testing
Fibre Channel 330 about loop backs 136
IP 79 configuring near end 137
IP Video 310 initiating the loop back 140
Loop back 289 observing results 140
Loopback 289 results 509
MiM 80, 207 starting the frame sequence 140
Multiple Streams 258 using Quick Config 138
selecting 3 verifying layer 2 136
specifying parameters 5 Triggers 11
TCP/UDP 236
Triple Play 273 Triple Play testing
about test results 274
Test results applications 273
1G Pair Status 492 characterizing services 276
about 10 Gigabit WAN 476 features and capabilities 256
about Ethernet 476 graphical results, changing properties 275
about Fibre Channel 476 graphical results, viewing 275
about graphs 20 LEDs 274
about IP 476 looping back streams 279
about IP Video 301, 551 specifying layer 2 and layer 3 settings 279
about MiM 179, 476 Streams Pipe 274
about MPLS 476 transmitting streams 279
about NewGen 476
about VoIP 450 Troubleshooting
about VPLS 476 general 575
about Wander 550 tests 575
Cable Diagnostic 490 TrueSAM 348–364
changing layout 20
collapsing 20 TrueSpeed Test 415–427
custom 20 TrueSpeed VNF 428–439
event logs 20
expanding 20 Turning ON or OFF, laser 6
Fault 491
histograms 20
J-Profiler 543 U
MDI/MDIX Pair Status 491
Pair Skew 492 UDP
encapsulation, IP Video 324

Page 600 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
Index
traffic, transmitting 244
V
Viavi Discovery 91
Video
content issues, symptoms 322
transport network problems, symptoms 323
Viewing
cable measurements 87
histograms 20
test results 19
VLAN testing
automated 410
encapsulation settings 106, 112, 142, 455
incrementing IDs for multiple streams 269
VoIP
about 448
button colors, explained 452
button colors, illustrated 452
calls, placing 463
calls, receiving 463–464
filters 461
navigating the display 453
settings, specifying 456–461
understanding test results 450
VPLS testing
about results 476
encapsulation settings 106, 113
loop back settings 286
overview 82
specifying labels 105, 455
W
Wander testing
about 224
analysis 227
exporting data 230
Well known ports 240
Wirespeed testing 245

May 2018 22046564, Rev. 015 Page 601
Index

Page 602 22046564, Rev. 015 May 2018
22046564
Rev. 015, May 2018
English
Viavi Solutions
North America: 1.844.GO VIAVI / 1.844.468.4284
Latin America +52 55 5543 6644
EMEA +49 7121 862273
APAC +1 512 201 6534
All Other Regions: viavisolutions.com/contacts
email TAC@viavisolutions.com

22046564r015 EthernetTestingGuide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

22046564r015 EthernetTestingGuide PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

22046564r015 EthernetTestingGuide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

T-BERD/MTS/SC/MAP-2100

Ethernet, and Fibre Channel

Reproduction and distribution of this guide is authorized for US Government purposes

Terms and conditions

Open Source Disclaimer - IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY

T-BERD/MTS/SC Ethernet and Fibre Channel Testing Manual

T-BERD/MTS CPRI/OBSAI, Ethernet, and Fibre Channel Testing Manual

About this Manual ix

Chapter 1 Basic Testing 1

T-BERD/MTS CPRI/OBSAI, Ethernet, and Fibre Channel Testing Manual

Chapter 2 Optical BER Testing 21

Chapter 3 CPRI/OBSAI Testing 25

Chapter 4 eCPRI Testing 71

Chapter 5 Ethernet and IP Testing 73

T-BERD/MTS/SC Ethernet and Fibre Channel Testing Manual

MPLS-TP test applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

T-BERD/MTS/SC Ethernet and Fibre Channel Testing Manual

Specifying traffic load settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

T-BERD/MTS/SC Ethernet and Fibre Channel Testing Manual

Service layer features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Chapter 6 25GigE and 100GigE RS-FEC Testing 195

T-BERD/MTS/SC Ethernet and Fibre Channel Testing Manual

Chapter 7 PTP/1588 Testing 205

Chapter 8 1GigE Optical SyncE & 1000BASE-T Wander Testing 223

Chapter 9 TCP/UDP Testing 233

T-BERD/MTS/SC Ethernet and Fibre Channel Testing Manual

Running TCP Host or Wirespeed applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Chapter 10 Triple Play and Multiple Streams Testing 255

T-BERD/MTS/SC Ethernet and Fibre Channel Testing Manual

Chapter 11 Loop Back Testing 283

Chapter 12 IP Video Testing 295

T-BERD/MTS/SC Ethernet and Fibre Channel Testing Manual

Understanding IP Video test results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Chapter 13 Fibre Channel Testing 327

T-BERD/MTS/SC Ethernet and Fibre Channel Testing Manual

Measuring service disruption time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341

Chapter 14 Automated Testing 347

T-BERD/MTS/SC Ethernet and Fibre Channel Testing Manual

Setting Connection parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

Chapter 15 VoIP Testing 447

T-BERD/MTS/SC Ethernet and Fibre Channel Testing Manual

Populating the Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454

Chapter 16 Test Results 467

T-BERD/MTS/SC Ethernet and Fibre Channel Testing Manual

CDMA/GPS Receiver Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

T-BERD/MTS/SC Ethernet and Fibre Channel Testing Manual

MSTV results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562

Chapter 17 Troubleshooting 573

T-BERD/MTS/SC Ethernet and Fibre Channel Testing Manual

T-BERD/MTS/SC Ethernet and Fibre Channel Testing Manual

T-BERD/MTS/SC Ethernet and Fibre Channel Testing Manual

T-BERD/MTS/SC Ethernet and Fibre Channel Testing Manual

Purpose and scope

T-BERD/MTS CPRI/OBSAI, Ethernet, and Fibre Channel Testing Manual

Use this manual in conjunction with the following manuals:

T-BERD/MTS/SC Ethernet and Fibre Channel Testing Manual

T-BERD/MTS CPRI/OBSAI, Ethernet, and Fibre Channel Testing Manual

Table 1 Text formatting and other typographical conventions (Continued)

Table 2 Symbol conventions